Ceragon FibeAir IP-20 All OutDoor User Guide PDF

User Guide
FibeAir® IP-20 All-Outdoor

Products:
IP-20C
IP-20C-HP
IP-20S
IP-20E
IP-20V
September 2020
Rev AA.01 | CeraOS 11.3
© Copyright 2020 by Ceragon Networks Ltd. All rights reserved.
User Guide for FibeAir® IP-20 All-Outdoor Products, CeraOS 11.3
Notice
This document contains information that is proprietary to Ceragon Networks Ltd. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, modified, or distributed without prior written authorization of
Ceragon Networks Ltd. This document is provided as is, without warranty of any kind.
Trademarks
Ceragon Networks®, FibeAir® and CeraView® are trademarks of Ceragon Networks Ltd., registered in
the United States and other countries.
Ceragon® is a trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd., registered in various countries.
CeraMap™, PolyView™, EncryptAir™, ConfigAir™, CeraMon™, EtherAir™, CeraBuild™, CeraWeb™,
and QuickAir™, are trademarks of Ceragon Networks Ltd.
Other names mentioned in this publication are owned by their respective holders.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Ceragon Networks
Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for damage in connection with the furnishing,
performance, or use of this document or equipment supplied with it.
Open Source Statement

The Product may use open source software, among them O/S software released under the GPL or
GPL alike license ("Open Source License"). Inasmuch that such software is being used, it is released
under the Open Source License, accordingly. The complete list of the software being used in this
product including their respective license and the aforementioned public available changes is
accessible at:
Network element site: ftp://ne-open-source.license-system.com
NMS site: ftp://nms-open-source.license-system.com/
Information to User
Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment and the warranty for such equipment.
Intended Use/Limitation
Fixed point-to-point radio links for private networks.
Authorized to Use
Only entities with individual authorization from the National Regulator to operate the mentioned
radio equipment.
The equipment can be used in the following EU countries:
Austria (AT) - Belgium (BE) - Bulgaria (BG) - Switzerland/Liechtenstein (CH) - Cyprus (CY) - Czech
Republic (CZ) - Germany (DE) – Denmark (DK) - Estonia (EE) - Finland (FI) - France (FR) -Greece (GR) -
Hungary (HU) - Ireland (IE) – Iceland (IS) – Italy (IT) – Lithuania (LT) - Luxembourg (LU) – Latvia (LV) -
Malta (MT) - Netherlands (NL) - Norway (NO) - Portugal (PT) - Romania (RO) - Sweden (SE) - Slovenia
(SI) - Slovak Republic (SK) – United Kingdom (UK) – Spain (SP) – Poland (PL)
Page 2 of 1094
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Table of Contents
Section I: Introduction .................................................................................................. 48
1. Introduction............................................................................................................ 49
1.1 Configuration Tips ...................................................................................................................... 50
1.2 IP-20C Overview ......................................................................................................................... 52
1.3 IP-20C-HP Overview ................................................................................................................... 52
1.4 IP-20S Overview ......................................................................................................................... 53
1.5 IP-20E Overview ......................................................................................................................... 53
1.6 IP-20V Overview......................................................................................................................... 54
1.7 PoE Injector Overview ................................................................................................................ 54
1.8 FibeAir IP-20 Assured Platform .................................................................................................. 55
1.9 The Web-Based Element Management System......................................................................... 56
1.9.1 Introduction to the Web EMS .................................................................................................... 56
1.9.2 Web EMS Page Layout ............................................................................................................... 57
1.9.3 The Unit Summary Page ............................................................................................................. 61
1.9.4 The Radio Summary Page .......................................................................................................... 62
1.9.5 The Security Summary Page ...................................................................................................... 64
1.10 Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure ......................................................................... 67
Section II: Web EMS Configuration ............................................................................... 74

2. Getting Started ....................................................................................................... 75
2.1 Assigning IP Addresses in the Network ...................................................................................... 75
2.2 Establishing a Connection .......................................................................................................... 75
2.2.1 PC Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 76
2.3 Logging on .................................................................................................................................. 77
2.3.1 Logging in Without Knowing the IP Address .............................................................................. 77
2.4 Changing Your Password ............................................................................................................ 80
2.5 Applying a Pre-Defined Configuration File ................................................................................. 81
2.6 Performing Quick Platform Setup .............................................................................................. 83
2.7 Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding) ............................................................................... 86
2.8 Configuring In-Band Management ............................................................................................. 86
2.9 Changing the Management IP Address ...................................................................................... 87
2.10 Configuring the Activation Key .................................................................................................. 88
2.10.1 Activation Key Overview ............................................................................................................ 88
2.10.2 Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters .......................................................................... 89
2.10.3 Entering the Activation Key ....................................................................................................... 90
2.10.4 Activating Demo Mode .............................................................................................................. 90
2.10.5 Activation Key Reclaim ............................................................................................................... 90
2.10.6 Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features ................................................................ 92
2.11 Setting the Time and Date (Optional) ........................................................................................ 96
Page 3 of 1094

2.12 Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager) ............................................................................. 98

2.12.1 IP-20E and IP-20V Management Interface ...............................................................................101
2.13 Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) ..................................................................................103
2.13.1 Radio Profiles ...........................................................................................................................109
2.14 Running the Frequency Scanner (IP-20E and IP-20V) ..............................................................111
2.15 Configuring the Radio Parameters ...........................................................................................115
2.15.1 Enabling Link ID Mismatch Security .........................................................................................119
2.16 Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power .........................................................................120
2.17 Operating in FIPS Mode ...........................................................................................................122
2.17.1 Requirements for FIPS Compliance..........................................................................................122
2.17.2 Enabling FIPS Mode .................................................................................................................123
2.17.1 Encrypting the External Protection Link ..................................................................................124
2.18 Configuring Grouping (Optional)..............................................................................................127
2.19 Creating Service(s) for Traffic ...................................................................................................127
3. Configuration Guide .............................................................................................. 128

3.1 System Configurations .............................................................................................................128
3.2 Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard .......................................................129
3.2.1 Configuring a 1+0 Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard ................................................130
3.2.2 Configuring a 1+0 (Repeater) Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard ..............................134
3.2.3 Configuring a 2 x (1+0) Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard ........................................138
3.2.4 Configuring a 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard ...................147
3.2.5 Configuring a Multiband (Enhanced Multi-Carrier ABC) Link Using the Quick Configuration
Wizard ......................................................................................................................................153
3.3 Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC .................................................................................................160
3.3.1 Multi-Carrier ABC Overview .....................................................................................................160
3.3.2 Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group....................................................................................160
3.3.3 Configuring the Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override Option .............................162
3.3.4 Adding and Removing Group Members ...................................................................................164
3.3.5 Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group .........................................................................................164
3.4 Configuring Multiband .............................................................................................................165
3.4.1 Multiband Overview ................................................................................................................165
3.4.2 Multiband Configuration..........................................................................................................169
3.4.3 Multiband Management ..........................................................................................................175
3.4.4 Configuring Synchronization in a Multiband Node ..................................................................180
3.5 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP .........................................................................181
3.5.1 LAG Overview ...........................................................................................................................181
3.5.2 Configuring a LAG Group .........................................................................................................182
3.5.3 Enabling and Disabling LAG Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event ..........................186
3.5.4 Configuring Enhanced LAG Distribution...................................................................................186
3.5.5 Deleting a LAG Group ...............................................................................................................187
3.5.6 Displaying LACP Parameters and Statistics ..............................................................................188
3.6 Configuring XPIC.......................................................................................................................195
3.6.1 XPIC Overview ..........................................................................................................................195
3.6.2 Configuring the Radio Carriers .................................................................................................195
3.6.3 Creating an XPIC Group ............................................................................................................195
Page 4 of 1094

3.6.4 Performing Antenna Alignment for XPIC .................................................................................196

3.7 Configuring Unit Protection with HSB Radio Protection (External Protection) .......................198
3.7.1 Unit Protection Overview ........................................................................................................198
3.7.2 Configuring Ethernet Interface Protection ..............................................................................199
3.7.3 Configuring HSB Radio Protection ...........................................................................................201
3.7.4 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP Unit ............................................203
3.7.5 Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit .......................................................................204
3.7.6 Editing Standby Unit Settings ...................................................................................................204
3.7.7 Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity .....................................................................205
3.7.8 Manually Switching to the Standby Unit..................................................................................205
3.7.9 Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit ..............................................................206
3.7.10 Disabling Unit Protection .........................................................................................................206
3.8 Configuring 1+1 HSB with Space Diversity ...............................................................................207
3.9 Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity ...................................................................................210
3.9.1 MIMO and Space Diversity Overview ......................................................................................210
3.9.2 Upgrading a 4x4 MIMO Link from an Earlier Version to CeraOS 10.5 or Higher .....................211
3.9.3 Configuring a 4x4 MIMO Link...................................................................................................212
3.9.4 Configuring a 2x2 MIMO Link...................................................................................................217
3.9.5 Configuring a 1+0 or 2+0 Space Diversity Link .........................................................................219
3.9.6 Viewing MMI Levels .................................................................................................................221
3.9.7 Deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity Group .............................................................................222
3.10 Configuring Advanced Space Diversity (ASD) ...........................................................................223
3.10.1 ASD Overview...........................................................................................................................223
3.10.2 Configuring an ASD Link ...........................................................................................................225
3.10.3 Viewing ASD Status ..................................................................................................................229
3.10.4 Deleting an ASD Group ............................................................................................................230
3.11 Configuring Advanced Frequency Reuse (AFR) ........................................................................231
3.11.1 AFR Overview ...........................................................................................................................231
3.11.2 Initial Link Configuration and Alignment for AFR .....................................................................232
3.11.3 Software Configuration for AFR ...............................................................................................232
3.11.4 Deleting an AFR Group .............................................................................................................236
3.12 Operating an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP in Single Radio Carrier Mode .............................................237
4. Unit Management ................................................................................................. 238

4.1 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications .............................................238
4.2 Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address ...............................................................................240
4.2.1 Changing the Subnet of the Remote IP Address ......................................................................242
4.3 Configuring SNMP ....................................................................................................................243
4.4 Configuring Trap Managers......................................................................................................245
4.5 Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server .....................................................................248
4.6 Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP ........................................................................250
4.7 Upgrading the Software ...........................................................................................................251
4.7.1 Viewing Current Software Versions .........................................................................................251
4.7.2 Software Upgrade Overview ....................................................................................................252
4.7.3 Downloading and Installing Software ......................................................................................253
4.7.4 Configuring a Timed Installation ..............................................................................................260
Page 5 of 1094

4.8 Backing Up and Restoring Configurations ................................................................................262

4.8.1 Configuration Management Overview ....................................................................................262
4.8.2 Viewing Current Backup Files...................................................................................................262
4.8.3 Setting the FTP/SFTP Configuration Management Parameters ...............................................264
4.8.4 Exporting a Configuration File ..................................................................................................265
4.8.5 Importing a Configuration File .................................................................................................268
4.8.6 Deleting a Configuration File....................................................................................................270
4.8.7 Backing Up the Current Configuration .....................................................................................270
4.8.8 Restoring a Saved Configuration ..............................................................................................271
4.8.9 Editing CLI Scripts .....................................................................................................................271
4.9 Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration .............................................................272
4.10 Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset ...............................................................................................272
4.11 Configuring Unit Parameters ...................................................................................................273
4.12 Configuring NTP .......................................................................................................................274
4.13 Displaying Unit Inventory .........................................................................................................278
4.14 Displaying SFP DDM and Inventory Information .....................................................................278
4.14.1 Displaying Information about an SFP Module .........................................................................279
4.14.2 Displaying PMs about an SFP Module ......................................................................................281
4.15 Defining a Login Banner ...........................................................................................................283
5. Radio Configuration .............................................................................................. 284

5.1 Viewing the Radio Status and Settings ....................................................................................285
5.2 Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters .............................................................................288
5.3 Configuring ATPC and ATPC Override Timer ............................................................................290
5.4 Configuring Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through ..................................................293
5.4.1 Viewing Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through Counters ........................................295
5.5 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption.................................................................................299
5.6 Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics ..................................................................303
5.6.1 Configuring BER Thresholds and Displaying Current BER ........................................................303
5.6.2 Displaying MRMC Status ..........................................................................................................306
5.6.3 Displaying MRMC PMs and Configuring ACM Profile Thresholds ............................................307
5.6.4 Displaying and Clearing Defective Block Counters ...................................................................309
5.6.5 Displaying Signal Level PMs and Configuring Signal Level PM Thresholds ..............................311
5.6.6 Displaying Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs ................................................................................313
5.6.7 Displaying MSE PMs and Configuring MSE PM Thresholds .....................................................314
5.6.8 Displaying XPI PMs and Configuring XPI PM Thresholds..........................................................316
5.6.9 Displaying Traffic PMs ..............................................................................................................318
6. Ethernet Services and Interfaces............................................................................ 326

6.1 Configuring Ethernet Service(s) ...............................................................................................326
6.1.1 Ethernet Services Overview .....................................................................................................326
6.1.2 General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services ...........................................................327
6.1.3 The Ethernet Services Page ......................................................................................................327
6.1.4 Adding an Ethernet Service ......................................................................................................329
6.1.5 Editing a Service .......................................................................................................................330
6.1.6 Deleting a Service.....................................................................................................................330
Page 6 of 1094

6.1.7 Enabling, Disabling, or Deleting Multiple Services ...................................................................331

6.1.8 Viewing Service Details ............................................................................................................331
6.1.9 Configuring Service Points .......................................................................................................332
6.2 Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype .....................................................................348
6.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces ...............................................................................................349
6.4 Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss Forwarding ......................................352
6.5 Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics .......................................................................................356
6.5.1 RMON Statistics .......................................................................................................................356
6.5.2 Egress CoS Statistics .................................................................................................................357
6.5.3 Port TX Statistics ......................................................................................................................358
6.5.4 Port RX Statistics ......................................................................................................................361
7. Quality of Service (QoS) ........................................................................................ 365

7.1 QoS Overview...........................................................................................................................365
7.2 Configuring Classification .........................................................................................................367
7.2.1 Classification Overview ............................................................................................................367
7.2.2 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface .................................................368
7.2.3 Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1Q UP and CFI Bit Classification Table ..........................................371
7.2.4 Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table ............................................372
7.2.5 Modifying the DSCP Classification Table ..................................................................................373
7.2.6 Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table .....................................................................375
7.2.7 Modifying the MAC DA Classification Table .............................................................................377
7.3 Configuring Policers (Rate Metering) .......................................................................................379
7.3.1 Policer (Rate Metering) Overview ............................................................................................379
7.3.2 Configuring Policer Profiles ......................................................................................................379
7.3.3 Assigning Policers to Interfaces ...............................................................................................383
7.3.4 Configuring the Ingress and Egress Byte Compensation..........................................................388
7.4 Configuring Marking ................................................................................................................388
7.4.1 Marking Overview ....................................................................................................................388
7.4.2 Enabling Marking .....................................................................................................................389
7.4.3 Modifying the 802.1Q Marking Table ......................................................................................389
7.4.4 Modifying the 802.1AD Marking Table ....................................................................................390
7.5 Configuring WRED ....................................................................................................................392
7.5.1 WRED Overview .......................................................................................................................392
7.5.2 Configuring WRED Profiles .......................................................................................................392
7.5.3 Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues .........................................................................................396
7.6 Configuring Egress Shaping ......................................................................................................397
7.6.1 Egress Shaping Overview .........................................................................................................397
7.6.2 Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles ..........................................................................................397
7.6.3 Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles .............................................................................400
7.6.4 Assigning a Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue .........................................................................404
7.6.5 Assigning a Service Bundle Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle ...............................................406
7.7 Configuring Scheduling ............................................................................................................407
7.7.1 Scheduling Overview................................................................................................................407
7.7.2 Configuring Priority Profiles .....................................................................................................408
7.7.3 Configuring WFQ Profiles .........................................................................................................413
7.7.4 Assigning a Priority Profile to an Interface...............................................................................417
Page 7 of 1094

7.7.5 Assigning a WFQ Profile to an Interface ..................................................................................417

7.8 Configuring and Displaying Queue-Level PMs .........................................................................419
8. Ethernet Protocols ................................................................................................ 423

8.1 Configuring G.8032 ..................................................................................................................423
8.1.1 G.8032 Overview......................................................................................................................423
8.1.2 Configuring the Destination MAC Address ..............................................................................424
8.1.3 Adding ERPIs ............................................................................................................................425
8.1.4 Configuring the RPL Owner ......................................................................................................429
8.1.5 Configuring Timers ...................................................................................................................430
8.1.6 Viewing the ERPI Configuration and Status Parameters ..........................................................430
8.1.7 Viewing ERPI State Information ...............................................................................................432
8.1.8 Initiating a Manual or Forced Switch and Clearing the Switch or Initiating Reversion ............433
8.1.9 Blocking or Unblocking R-APS Messages on a Service Point ....................................................433
8.1.10 Viewing ERPI Statistics .............................................................................................................433
8.2 Configuring MSTP .....................................................................................................................435
8.2.1 MSTP Overview ........................................................................................................................435
8.2.2 Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP instances (MSTIs) ...........................................................436
8.2.3 Configuring the MSTP Bridge Parameters ...............................................................................437
8.2.4 Configuring the MSTP Port Parameters ...................................................................................448
8.3 Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN) ...............................................................458
8.3.1 Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview ............................................................................458
8.3.2 Adding an ABN entity ...............................................................................................................458
8.3.3 Editing an ABN Entity ...............................................................................................................460
8.3.4 Deleting an ABN Entity .............................................................................................................460
8.3.5 Viewing the Statistics for an ABN Entity ..................................................................................460
8.4 Configuring Ethernet Bandwidth Notification (ETH-BN) ..........................................................462
8.4.1 ETH-BN Overview .....................................................................................................................462
8.4.2 Adding an ETH-BN entity..........................................................................................................463
8.4.3 Editing an ETH-BN Entity ..........................................................................................................465
8.4.4 Deleting an ETH-BN Entity .......................................................................................................465
8.4.5 Viewing the Statistics for an ETH-BN Entity .............................................................................465
8.5 Configuring LLDP ......................................................................................................................467
8.5.1 LLDP Overview .........................................................................................................................467
8.5.2 Displaying Peer Status ..............................................................................................................467
8.5.3 Configuring the General LLDP Parameters...............................................................................468
8.5.4 Configuring the LLDP Port Parameters ....................................................................................470
8.5.5 Displaying the Unit’s Management Parameters ......................................................................472
8.5.6 Displaying Peer Unit’s Management Parameters ....................................................................474
8.5.7 Displaying the Local Unit’s Parameters ....................................................................................476
8.5.8 Displaying LLDP Statistics .........................................................................................................480
9. Synchronization .................................................................................................... 484

9.1 Configuring SyncE Regenerator ...............................................................................................484
9.2 Configuring the Sync Source ....................................................................................................486
9.2.1 Viewing the Sync Source Status ...............................................................................................487
9.2.2 Adding a Sync Source ...............................................................................................................488
9.2.3 Editing a Sync Source ...............................................................................................................489
Page 8 of 1094

9.2.4 Deleting a Sync Source .............................................................................................................489

9.3 Configuring the Outgoing Clock and SSM Messages................................................................489
9.4 Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock ........................................................................................492
10. Access Management and Security.......................................................................... 495

10.1 Quick Security Configuration ...................................................................................................496
10.1.1 Quick Security Configuration – General Parameters Page .......................................................496
10.1.2 Quick Security Configuration – Protocols Page ........................................................................497
10.1.3 Quick Security Configuration – Access Control Page ...............................................................498
10.1.4 Quick Security Configuration – RSA Key & Certificate Page.....................................................499
10.2 Configuring the General Access Control Parameters ...............................................................500
10.3 Configuring the Password Security Parameters .......................................................................502
10.4 Configuring the Session Timeout .............................................................................................503
10.5 Configuring Users .....................................................................................................................504
10.5.1 User Configuration Overview ...................................................................................................504
10.5.2 Configuring User Profiles .........................................................................................................504
10.5.3 Configuring Users .....................................................................................................................507
10.6 Configuring RADIUS..................................................................................................................509
10.6.1 RADIUS Overview .....................................................................................................................509
10.6.2 Activating RADIUS Authentication ...........................................................................................509
10.6.3 Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes ...............................................................................510
10.6.4 Configuring a RADIUS Server ...................................................................................................511
10.7 Configuring TACACS+ ...............................................................................................................537
10.7.1 TACACS+ Overview...................................................................................................................537
10.7.2 Activating TACACS+ Authentication and Authorization ...........................................................538
10.7.3 Configuring the TACACS+ Server Attributes.............................................................................539
10.7.4 Configuring a TACACS+ Server .................................................................................................541
10.8 Viewing Remote Access User Connectivity and Permissions ...................................................543
10.9 Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates...........................................................................................545
10.9.1 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File ................................................................545
10.9.2 Downloading a Certificate ........................................................................................................547
10.10 Enabling HTTPS ........................................................................................................................549
10.11 Downloading and Installing an RSA Key ...................................................................................550
10.12 Blocking Telnet Access .............................................................................................................555
10.13 Uploading the Security Log ......................................................................................................555
10.14 Uploading the Configuration Log .............................................................................................557
10.15 Anti-Theft Protection ...............................................................................................................560
11. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting .............................................................. 562

11.1 Viewing Current Alarms ...........................................................................................................562
11.2 Viewing Alarm Statistics ...........................................................................................................564
11.3 Viewing and Saving the Event Log ...........................................................................................564
11.4 Editing Alarm Text and Severity and Disabling Alarms and Events ..........................................566
Page 9 of 1094

11.4.1 Displaying Alarm Information ..................................................................................................566

11.4.2 Viewing the Probable Cause and Corrective Actions for an Alarm Type .................................567
11.4.3 Editing an Alarm Type and Disabling Alarms and Events .........................................................567
11.4.4 Setting Alarms to their Default Values .....................................................................................568
11.5 Configuring Voltage Alarm Thresholds and Displaying Voltage PMs .......................................569
11.6 Uploading Unit Info ..................................................................................................................572
11.6.1 Uploading a Unit Info File Via HTTP or HTTPS ..........................................................................572
11.6.2 Uploading a Unit Info File Via FTP or SFTP ...............................................................................573
11.7 Performing Diagnostics ............................................................................................................576
11.7.1 Performing Radio Loopback .....................................................................................................576
11.7.2 Performing Ethernet Loopback ................................................................................................577
11.7.3 Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM)....................................................579
12. Web EMS Utilities ................................................................................................. 599

12.1 Restarting the HTTP Server ......................................................................................................599
12.2 Calculating an ifIndex ...............................................................................................................599
12.3 Displaying, Searching, and Saving a list of MIB Entities ...........................................................600
Section III: CLI Configuration ...................................................................................... 602

13. Getting Started (CLI) .............................................................................................. 603
13.1 General (CLI) ............................................................................................................................603
13.2 Establishing a Connection (CLI) ................................................................................................603
13.2.1 PC Setup (CLI) ...........................................................................................................................604
13.3 Logging On (CLI) .......................................................................................................................604
13.4 General CLI Commands ............................................................................................................605
13.5 Changing Your Password (CLI)..................................................................................................606
13.6 Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding) (CLI) .....................................................................607
13.7 Configuring In-Band Management (CLI) ...................................................................................609
13.8 Changing the Management IP Address (CLI) ............................................................................609
13.9 Configuring the Activation Key (CLI) ........................................................................................611
13.9.1 Activation Key Overview (CLI) ..................................................................................................611
13.9.2 Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters (CLI) ................................................................611
13.9.3 Entering the Activation Key (CLI) .............................................................................................612
13.9.4 Activating Demo Mode (CLI) ....................................................................................................612
13.9.5 Activation Key Reclaim (CLI).....................................................................................................612
13.9.6 Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features (CLI) ......................................................613
13.10 Setting the Time and Date (Optional) (CLI) ..............................................................................613
13.10.1 Setting the Daylight Savings Time (CLI) ..................................................................614
13.11 Enabling the Interfaces (CLI) ....................................................................................................615
13.11.1 IP-20E and IP-20V Management Interface (CLI).....................................................617
13.12 Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) (CLI) ..........................................................................618
13.12.1 Displaying Available MRMC Scripts (CLI)................................................................618
13.12.2 Assigning an MRMC Script to a Radio Carrier (CLI) ................................................619
Page 10 of 1094

13.13 Configuring the Radio Parameters (CLI) ...................................................................................621

13.13.1 Entering Radio View (CLI) .......................................................................................621
13.13.2 Muting and Unmuting a Radio (CLI) .......................................................................622
13.13.3 Configuring the Transmit (TX) Frequency (CLI) ......................................................623
13.13.4 Configuring the Transmit (TX) Level (CLI) ...............................................................624
13.14 Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power (CLI) .................................................................625
13.15 Configuring the RSL Threshold Alarm (CLI) ..............................................................................626
13.16 Operating in FIPS Mode (CLI) ...................................................................................................627
13.16.1 Requirements for FIPS Compliance (CLI)................................................................627
13.16.2 Enabling FIPS Mode (CLI) .......................................................................................627
13.16.3 Encrypting the External Protection Link (CLI) ........................................................628
13.17 Configuring Grouping (Optional) (CLI) .....................................................................................630
13.18 Creating Service(s) for Traffic (CLI)...........................................................................................630
14. Configuration Guide (CLI) ...................................................................................... 631

14.1 System Configurations (CLI) .....................................................................................................631
14.2 Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC (CLI) .........................................................................................632
14.2.1 Multi-Carrier ABC Overview (CLI) .............................................................................................632
14.2.2 Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI) ...........................................................................632
14.2.3 Configuring the Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override Option (CLI) .....................633
14.2.4 Removing Members from a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI) .....................................................634
14.2.5 Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI) .................................................................................634
14.3 Configuring Multiband (CLI) .....................................................................................................635
14.3.1 Multiband Overview (CLI) ........................................................................................................635
14.3.2 Multiband Configuration (CLI) .................................................................................................635
14.3.3 Multiband Management (CLI) ..................................................................................................637
14.3.4 Configuring Synchronization in a Multiband Node (CLI) ..........................................................637
14.3.5 Deleting a Multiband Group (CLI) ............................................................................................637
14.3.6 Displaying Multiband Group Statistics (CLI) .............................................................................637
14.4 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP (Optional) (CLI) ................................................639
14.4.1 LAG Overview (CLI)...................................................................................................................639
14.4.2 Configuring a LAG Group (CLI) .................................................................................................640
14.4.3 Configuring LACP (CLI) ..............................................................................................................640
14.4.4 Viewing LAG Details (CLI) .........................................................................................................641
14.4.5 Editing and Deleting a LAG Group (CLI)....................................................................................641
14.4.6 Enabling and Disabling the LAG Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event Option (CLI)643
14.4.7 Configuring Enhanced LAG Distribution (CLI) ..........................................................................644
14.4.8 Displaying LACP Parameters and Statistics (CLI) ......................................................................644
14.5 Configuring XPIC (CLI) ..............................................................................................................649
14.5.1 XPIC Overview (CLI) ..................................................................................................................649
14.5.2 Configuring the Radio Carriers for XPIC (CLI) ...........................................................................649
14.5.3 Creating an XPIC Group (CLI) ....................................................................................................649
14.5.4 Performing Antenna Alignment for XPIC (CLI) .........................................................................650
14.5.5 Displaying XPIC Status (CLI) ......................................................................................................651
14.6 Configuring Unit Protection with HSB Radio Protection (External Protection) (CLI) ...............652
14.6.1 Unit Protection Overview (CLI) ................................................................................................652
14.6.2 Configuring Ethernet Interface Protection (CLI) ......................................................................653
Page 11 of 1094

14.6.3 Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI) ...................................................................................655

14.6.4 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP Unit (CLI) ....................................656
14.6.5 Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit (CLI) ...............................................................656
14.6.6 Editing Standby Unit Settings (CLI)...........................................................................................656
14.6.7 Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity (CLI) .............................................................658
14.6.8 Manually Switching to the Standby Unit (CLI) .........................................................................658
14.6.9 Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit (CLI) ......................................................659
14.6.10 Disabling Unit Protection (CLI) ...............................................................................659
14.7 Configuring 1+1 HSB with Space Diversity (CLI) .......................................................................660
14.8 Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity (CLI) ...........................................................................661
14.8.1 MIMO and Space Diversity Overview (CLI) ..............................................................................661
14.8.2 Upgrading a 4x4 MIMO Link from an Earlier Version to CeraOS 10.5 or Higher (CLI) .............662
14.8.3 Configuring a 4x4 MIMO Link (CLI) ..........................................................................................663
14.8.4 Configuring a 2x2 MIMO Link (CLI) ..........................................................................................664
14.8.5 Configuring a 1+0 or 2+0 Space Diversity Link (CLI) .................................................................665
14.8.6 Viewing MMI Levels (CLI) .........................................................................................................665
14.8.7 Deleting a 4x4 MIMO Group (CLI) ............................................................................................666
14.8.8 Deleting a 2x2 MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI) ..............................................................667
14.9 Configuring Advanced Space Diversity (ASD) (CLI) ...................................................................668
14.9.1 Configuring an ASD Link (CLI) ...................................................................................................668
14.9.2 Viewing ASD Status (CLI) ..........................................................................................................671
14.9.3 Deleting an ASD Group (CLI) ....................................................................................................671
14.10 Configuring Advanced Frequency Reuse (AFR) (CLI) ................................................................673
14.10.1 Initial Link Configuration and Alignment for AFR (CLI) ...........................................673
14.10.2 Software Configuration for AFR (CLI) .....................................................................673
14.10.3 Deleting an AFR Group (CLI) ...................................................................................674
14.11 Operating an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP in Single Radio Carrier Mode (CLI) .....................................675
15. Unit Management (CLI) ......................................................................................... 676

15.1 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications (CLI) .....................................676
15.2 Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address (CLI) .......................................................................676
15.2.1 Configuring the Remote Radio's IP Address in IPv4 format (CLI) .............................................676
15.2.2 Configuring the Remote Radio's IP Address in IPv6 format (CLI) .............................................677
15.3 Configuring SNMP (CLI) ............................................................................................................679
15.3.1 Configuring Basic SNMP Settings (CLI) .....................................................................................679
15.3.2 Configuring SNMPv3 (CLI) ........................................................................................................681
15.3.3 Displaying the SNMP Settings (CLI) ..........................................................................................682
15.3.4 Configuring Trap Managers (CLI) .............................................................................................682
15.4 Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP (CLI) ................................................................685
15.5 Upgrading the Software (CLI) ...................................................................................................686
15.5.1 Software Upgrade Overview (CLI) ............................................................................................686
15.5.2 Viewing Current Software Versions (CLI) .................................................................................687
15.5.3 Configuring a Software Download (CLI) ...................................................................................687
15.5.4 Downloading a Software Package (CLI) ....................................................................................689
15.5.5 Installing and Upgrading Software (CLI) ...................................................................................689
15.6 Backing Up and Restoring Configurations (CLI)........................................................................691
15.6.1 Configuration Management Overview (CLI) ............................................................................691
Page 12 of 1094

15.6.2 Setting the Configuration Management Parameters (CLI).......................................................692

15.6.3 Backing up and Exporting a Configuration File (CLI) ................................................................693
15.6.4 Importing and Restoring a Configuration File (CLI) ..................................................................694
15.6.5 Editing CLI Scripts (CLI) .............................................................................................................694
15.7 Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration (CLI).....................................................695
15.8 Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset (CLI) .......................................................................................695
15.9 Configuring Unit Parameters (CLI) ...........................................................................................695
15.10 Configuring NTP (CLI) ...............................................................................................................697
15.11 Displaying Unit Inventory (CLI).................................................................................................699
15.12 Displaying SFP DDM and Inventory Information (CLI) .............................................................700
15.12.1 Displaying Static Information about an SFP Module (CLI) .....................................700
15.12.2 Displaying Dynamic (DDM) Information about an SFP Module (CLI) .....................701
15.12.3 Displaying DDM PMs about an SFP Module (CLI) ..................................................702
16. Radio Configuration (CLI)....................................................................................... 703

16.1 Viewing and Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters (CLI) ................................................704
16.1.1 Displaying Communication Status with the Remote Radio (CLI) .............................................704
16.1.2 Displaying the Remote Radio’s Link ID (CLI) .............................................................................704
16.1.3 Muting and Unmuting the Remote Radio (CLI) ........................................................................704
16.1.4 Displaying the Remote Radio’s RX Level (CLI) ..........................................................................705
16.1.5 Configuring the Remote Radio’s TX Level (CLI) ........................................................................705
16.1.6 Configuring Remote ATPC (CLI) ................................................................................................705
16.1.7 Displaying the Remote Unit’s Most Severe Alarm (CLI) ...........................................................705
16.2 Configuring ATPC and ATPC Override Timer (CLI) ....................................................................706
16.3 Configuring Header De-Duplication (CLI) .................................................................................709
16.3.1 Displaying Header De-Duplication Information (CLI) ...............................................................711
16.4 Configuring Frame Cut-Through (CLI) ......................................................................................711
16.5 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption (CLI) ........................................................................713
16.6 Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics (CLI) ..........................................................717
16.6.1 Displaying General Modem Status and Defective Block PMs (CLI) ..........................................717
16.6.2 Displaying Excessive BER (Aggregate) PMs (CLI) ......................................................................717
16.6.3 Displaying BER Level and Configuring BER Parameters (CLI) ...................................................719
16.6.4 Configuring RSL Thresholds (CLI) .............................................................................................720
16.6.5 Configuring TSL Thresholds (CLI) ..............................................................................................720
16.6.6 Displaying RSL and TSL Levels (CLI) ..........................................................................................720
16.6.7 Configuring the Signal Level Threshold (CLI) ............................................................................722
16.6.8 Configuring the MSE Thresholds and Displaying the MSE PMs (CLI) .......................................723
16.6.9 Configuring the XPI Thresholds and Displaying the XPI PMs (CLI) ...........................................725
16.6.10 Displaying ACM PMs and Configuring ACM Profile Thresholds (CLI) .....................728
17. Ethernet Services and Interfaces (CLI) .................................................................... 730

17.1 Configuring Ethernet Services (CLI) ..........................................................................................730
17.1.1 Ethernet Services Overview (CLI) .............................................................................................730
17.1.2 General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services (CLI) ...................................................731
17.1.3 Defining Services (CLI) ..............................................................................................................731
17.1.4 Configuring Service Points (CLI) ...............................................................................................743
Page 13 of 1094

17.1.5 Defining the MAC Address Forwarding Table for a Service (CLI) .............................................772
17.2 Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI) .............................................................779
17.2.1 Configuring the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI) ...................................................................................780
17.2.2 Configuring the C-VLAN Ethertype (CLI) ..................................................................................780
17.2.3 Configuring the MRU (CLI) .......................................................................................................780
17.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces (CLI) .......................................................................................781
17.3.1 Entering Interface View (CLI) ...................................................................................................781
17.3.2 Displaying the Operational State of the Interfaces in the Unit (CLI) ........................................783
17.3.3 Viewing Interface Attributes (CLI) ............................................................................................784
17.3.4 Configuring an Interface’s Media Type (CLI) ............................................................................784
17.3.5 Configuring an Interface’s Speed and Duplex State (CLI) .........................................................785
17.3.6 Configuring an Interface’s Auto Negotiation State (CLI) ..........................................................786
17.3.7 Configuring an Interface’s IFG (CLI) .........................................................................................786
17.3.8 Configuring an Interface’s Preamble (CLI) ...............................................................................786
17.3.9 Adding a Description for the Interface (CLI) ............................................................................787
17.3.10 Displaying Interface Statistics (RMON) (CLI) ..........................................................787
17.4 Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss Forwarding (CLI) ..............................789
17.4.1 Configuring Receipt of CSF PDUs (CLI) .....................................................................................793
17.5 Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics (CLI) ...............................................................................794
17.5.1 Displaying RMON Statistics (CLI) ..............................................................................................794
17.5.2 Configuring Ethernet Port PMs and PM Thresholds (CLI) ........................................................795
17.5.3 Displaying Ethernet Port PMs (CLI) ..........................................................................................795
17.5.4 Clearing Ethernet Port PMs (CLI) .............................................................................................798
18. Quality of Service (QoS) (CLI) ................................................................................. 799

18.1 Configuring Classification (CLI) .................................................................................................799
18.1.1 Classification Overview (CLI) ....................................................................................................799
18.1.2 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface (CLI) .........................................800
18.1.3 Configuring VLAN Classification and Override (CLI) .................................................................800
18.1.4 Configuring 802.1p Classification (CLI) .....................................................................................802
18.1.5 Configuring DSCP Classification (CLI) .......................................................................................807
18.1.6 Configuring MPLS Classification (CLI) .......................................................................................810
18.1.7 Configuring MAC DA Classification (CLI) ..................................................................................814
18.1.8 Configuring a Default CoS (CLI) ................................................................................................815
18.1.9 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service Point (CLI) ..............................................815
18.1.10 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service (CLI) ......................................815
18.2 Configuring Policers (Rate Metering) (CLI) ...............................................................................816
18.2.1 Overview of Rate Metering (Policing) (CLI) ..............................................................................816
18.2.2 Configuring Rate Meter (Policer) Profiles (CLI) ........................................................................816
18.2.3 Displaying Rate Meter Profiles (CLI).........................................................................................818
18.2.4 Deleting a Rate Meter Profile (CLI) ..........................................................................................818
18.2.5 Attaching a Rate Meter (Policer) to an Interface (CLI) .............................................................819
18.2.6 Attaching a Rate Meter (Policer) to a Service Point and CoS (CLI) ...........................................824
18.2.7 Configuring the Line Compensation Value for a Rate Meter (Policer) (CLI).............................825
18.2.8 Displaying Rate Meter Statistics for an Interface (CLI) ............................................................826
18.3 Configuring Marking (CLI) ........................................................................................................827
18.3.1 Marking Overview (CLI) ............................................................................................................827
18.3.2 Configuring Marking Mode on a Service Point (CLI) ................................................................828
18.3.3 Marking Table for C-VLAN UP Bits (CLI) ...................................................................................829
Page 14 of 1094

18.3.4 Marking Table for S-VLAN UP Bits (CLI)....................................................................................830

18.4 Configuring WRED (CLI) ............................................................................................................831
18.4.1 WRED Overview (CLI) ...............................................................................................................831
18.4.2 Configuring WRED Profiles (CLI) ...............................................................................................832
18.4.3 Assigning a WRED Profile to a Queue (CLI) ..............................................................................834
18.5 Configuring Shapers (CLI) .........................................................................................................835
18.5.1 Overview of Egress Shaping (CLI) .............................................................................................835
18.5.2 Configuring Queue Shapers (CLI) .............................................................................................835
18.5.3 Configuring Service Bundle Shapers (CLI) ................................................................................838
18.5.4 Configuring Egress Line Compensation for Shaping (CLI) ........................................................842
18.6 Configuring Scheduling (CLI) ....................................................................................................842
18.6.1 Overview of Egress Scheduling (CLI) ........................................................................................842
18.6.2 Configuring Queue Priority (CLI) ..............................................................................................843
18.6.3 Configuring Interface Priority Profiles (CLI) .............................................................................843
18.6.4 Attaching a Priority Profile to an Interface (CLI) ......................................................................846
18.6.5 Configuring Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) (CLI) .....................................................................847
18.7 Displaying Egress PMs and Statistics (CLI)................................................................................852
18.7.1 Displaying Queue-Level Statistics (CLI) ....................................................................................852
18.7.2 Configuring and Displaying Queue-Level PMs (CLI) .................................................................853
18.7.3 Displaying Service Bundle-Level Statistics (CLI) .......................................................................858
19. Ethernet Protocols (CLI)......................................................................................... 860

19.1 Configuring G.8032 (CLI) ..........................................................................................................860
19.1.1 Configuring the Destination MAC Address (CLI) ......................................................................860
19.1.2 Configuring ERPIs (CLI) .............................................................................................................861
19.1.3 Configuring the RPL Owner (CLI) ..............................................................................................863
19.1.4 Configuring Timers (CLI) ...........................................................................................................863
19.1.5 Initiating a Manual or Forced Switch and Clearing the Switch or Initiating Reversion (CLI) ....864
19.1.6 Blocking or Unblocking R-APS Messages on a Service Point (CLI) ............................................865
19.1.7 Displaying the ERPI Attributes (CLI) .........................................................................................866
19.2 Configuring MSTP (CLI) ............................................................................................................872
19.2.1 Configuring the MSTP Bridge Parameters (CLI) .......................................................................872
19.2.2 Configuring the MSTP Port Parameters (CLI) ...........................................................................886
19.3 Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN) (CLI) .......................................................894
19.3.1 Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview (CLI) ....................................................................894
19.3.2 Configuring an ABN Entity (CLI)................................................................................................894
19.4 Configuring Ethernet Bandwidth Notification (ETH-BN) (CLI) ..................................................899
19.5 Configuring LLDP (CLI) ..............................................................................................................904
19.5.1 Configuring the General LLDP Parameters (CLI) ......................................................................904
19.5.2 Displaying the General LLDP Parameters (CLI) .........................................................................905
19.5.3 Configuring LLDP Port Parameters (CLI) ...................................................................................906
19.5.4 Displaying LLDP Port Parameters (CLI) .....................................................................................907
19.5.5 Displaying LLDP Local System Parameters (CLI) .......................................................................907
19.5.6 Displaying the LLDP Remote System Parameters (CLI) ............................................................912
19.5.7 Displaying LLDP Statistics (CLI) .................................................................................................915
20. Synchronization (CLI)............................................................................................. 919

20.1 Configuring SyncE Regenerator (CLI) .......................................................................................919
Page 15 of 1094

20.2 Changing the ETSI/ANSI Mode (CLI) .........................................................................................921

20.3 Configuring the Sync Source (CLI) ............................................................................................921
20.3.1 Configuring an Ethernet Interface as a Synchronization Source (CLI) .....................................922
20.3.2 Configuring a Radio Interface as a Synchronization Source (CLI) ............................................923
20.3.3 Clearing All Sync Sources (CLI) .................................................................................................924
20.4 Configuring the Outgoing Clock (CLI) .......................................................................................925
20.5 Configuring SSM Messages (CLI) ..............................................................................................926
20.6 Displaying Synchronization Status and Parameters (CLI) .........................................................927
20.7 Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock (CLI) ................................................................................929
21. Access Management and Security (CLI) .................................................................. 931

21.1 Configuring the General Access Control Parameters (CLI) .......................................................931
21.1.1 Configuring the Inactivity Timeout Period (CLI) .......................................................................931
21.1.2 Configuring Blocking Upon Login Failure (CLI) .........................................................................932
21.1.3 Configuring Blocking of Unused Accounts (CLI) .......................................................................933
21.2 Configuring the Password Security Parameters (CLI) ...............................................................934
21.2.1 Configuring Password Aging (CLI) ............................................................................................934
21.2.2 Configuring Password Strength Enforcement (CLI) ..................................................................934
21.2.3 Forcing Password Change Upon First Login (CLI) .....................................................................935
21.2.4 Displaying the System Password Settings (CLI) ........................................................................935
21.3 Configuring Users (CLI) .............................................................................................................936
21.3.1 User Configuration Overview (CLI) ...........................................................................................936
21.3.2 Configuring User Profiles (CLI) .................................................................................................936
21.3.3 Configuring User Accounts (CLI)...............................................................................................938
21.4 Configuring RADIUS (CLI) .........................................................................................................941
21.4.1 RADIUS Overview (CLI) .............................................................................................................941
21.4.2 Activating RADIUS Authentication (CLI) ...................................................................................941
21.4.3 Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes (CLI) .......................................................................941
21.5 Configuring TACACS+ (CLI) .......................................................................................................943
21.6 Displaying Remote Access Users ..............................................................................................945
21.7 Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates (CLI) ..................................................................................946
21.7.1 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File (CLI) ........................................................946
21.7.2 Downloading a Certificate (CLI) ...............................................................................................948
21.8 Enabling HTTPS (CLI) ................................................................................................................950
21.9 Configuring HTTPS Cipher Hardening (CLI) ..............................................................................951
21.10 Downloading and Installing an RSA Key (CLI) ...........................................................................952
21.11 Blocking Telnet Access (CLI) .....................................................................................................954
21.12 Uploading the Security Log (CLI) ..............................................................................................954
21.13 Uploading the Configuration Log (CLI) .....................................................................................956
21.14 Enabling NETCONF (CLI) ...........................................................................................................958
21.15 Terminating all Active Sessions (CLI) ........................................................................................959
Page 16 of 1094

22. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting (CLI) ...................................................... 960

22.1 Viewing Current Alarms (CLI) ...................................................................................................960
22.2 Viewing the Event Log (CLI)......................................................................................................960
22.3 Editing Alarm Text and Severity (CLI) .......................................................................................960
22.3.1 Displaying Alarm Information (CLI) ..........................................................................................961
22.3.2 Editing an Alarm Type (CLI) ......................................................................................................961
22.3.3 Setting Alarms to their Default Values (CLI).............................................................................961
22.4 Configuring a Timeout for Trap Generation (CLI) ....................................................................962
22.5 Disabling Alarms and Events (CLI) ............................................................................................963
22.6 Configuring Voltage Alarm Thresholds and Displaying Voltage PMs (CLI) ...............................964
22.7 Uploading Unit Info (CLI) ..........................................................................................................966
22.8 Activating the Radio Logger (CLI) .............................................................................................969
22.9 Performing Diagnostics (CLI) ....................................................................................................970
22.9.1 Performing Radio Loopback (CLI) .............................................................................................970
22.9.2 Performing Ethernet Loopback (CLI) ........................................................................................970
22.9.3 Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM) (CLI) ...........................................972
22.10 Working in CW Mode (Single or Dual Tone) (CLI) ....................................................................988
Section IV Maintenance .............................................................................................. 990

23. Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 991
23.1 Temperature Ranges ................................................................................................................991
23.2 Troubleshooting Tips ........................................................................................................992
23.2.1 Platform ...................................................................................................................................992
23.2.2 XPIC ..........................................................................................................................................992
23.2.3 Unit Protection .........................................................................................................................992
23.3 IP-20C Connector Pin-outs .......................................................................................................993
23.3.1 Ethernet Traffic Ports – RJ-45/SFP Pinouts ..............................................................................994
23.3.2 MGT/PROT - Management (FE-Standard) and Protection (FE-Non-Standard) ........................995
23.3.3 DC .............................................................................................................................................995
23.3.4 RSL Interface ............................................................................................................................995
23.3.5 Source Sharing .........................................................................................................................995
23.4 IP-20C LEDs ..............................................................................................................................996
23.4.1 Electrical GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs .......................................................................................996
23.4.2 Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs .............................................................................................996
23.4.3 Management FE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs ...................................................................................996
23.4.4 Radio LED .................................................................................................................................997
23.4.5 Status LED ................................................................................................................................997
23.4.6 Protection LED .........................................................................................................................997
23.5 IP-20C-HP Connector Pin-outs .................................................................................................998
23.5.1 Data Port 1 - GbE Electrical (RJ-45) ..........................................................................................998
23.5.2 Management Port (FE-Standard) and Protection (FE-Non-Standard) .....................................999
23.5.3 DC .............................................................................................................................................999
23.5.4 RSL Interface ............................................................................................................................999
23.5.5 Source Sharing .........................................................................................................................999
Page 17 of 1094

23.6 IP-20C-HP LEDs .......................................................................................................................1000

23.6.1 Electrical GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs .....................................................................................1000
23.6.2 Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs ...........................................................................................1000
23.6.3 Management FE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs .................................................................................1000
23.6.4 Radio LED ...............................................................................................................................1001
23.6.5 Status LED ..............................................................................................................................1001
23.6.6 Protection LED .......................................................................................................................1001
23.7 IP-20S Connector Pin-outs .....................................................................................................1002
23.7.1 Eth1/PoE - GbE Electrical+PoE/Optical ..................................................................................1003
23.7.2 Eth2 - GbE Electrical/Optical ..................................................................................................1003
23.7.3 Eth3 - GbE Electrical/Optical ..................................................................................................1003
23.7.4 MGT/PROT - Management (FE-Standard) and Protection (FE-Non-Standard) ......................1004
23.7.5 DC ...........................................................................................................................................1004
23.7.6 RSL Interface ..........................................................................................................................1004
23.8 IP-20S LEDs .............................................................................................................................1005
23.8.1 Electrical GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs .....................................................................................1005
23.8.2 Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs ...........................................................................................1005
23.8.3 Management FE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs .................................................................................1005
23.8.4 Radio LED ...............................................................................................................................1006
23.8.5 Status LED ..............................................................................................................................1006
23.8.6 Protection LED .......................................................................................................................1006
23.9 IP-20E Connector Pin-outs .....................................................................................................1007
23.9.1 IP-20E Interfaces – ESE...........................................................................................................1008
23.9.2 IP-20E Interfaces – ESS ...........................................................................................................1009
23.9.3 IP-20E Interfaces – ESP ..........................................................................................................1010
23.9.4 Eth1/PoE GbE Interface (RJ-45) (ESE only) .............................................................................1011
23.9.5 Eth1 GbE Optical Interface (SFP) (ESS only) ...........................................................................1011
23.9.6 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) .........................................................................1011
23.9.7 Eth1 10G Optical Interface (SFP+) (ESP only) .........................................................................1011
23.9.8 MGT GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) .....................................................................................1011
23.9.9 EXT Port..................................................................................................................................1011
23.9.10 Power Adaptor .....................................................................................................1012
23.9.11 RSL Interface ........................................................................................................1012
23.10 IP-20E LEDs.............................................................................................................................1013
23.10.1 Eth1/PoE GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs (ESE only) ..................................................1013
23.10.2 Eth1 GbE Optical Interface (SFP) LEDs (ESS only).................................................1013
23.10.3 Eth1 10G Optical Interface (SFP+) LEDs (ESP only) ..............................................1013
23.10.4 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) LEDs ...............................................1014
23.10.5 MGT GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) LEDs ...........................................................1014
23.10.6 Radio LED .............................................................................................................1014
23.10.7 Status LED ............................................................................................................1015
23.10.8 Protection LED .....................................................................................................1015
23.11 IP-20V Connector Pin-outs .....................................................................................................1016
23.11.1 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) .......................................................1016
23.11.2 Eth1 10G Optical Interface (SFP+) ........................................................................1016
23.11.3 MGT GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) ...................................................................1017
23.11.4 Power Adaptor .....................................................................................................1017
23.11.5 RSL Interface ........................................................................................................1017
Page 18 of 1094

23.12 IP-20V LEDs ............................................................................................................................1019

23.12.1 Eth1 10G Optical Interface (SFP+) LEDs ...............................................................1019
23.12.2 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) LEDs ...............................................1019
23.12.3 MGT GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) LEDs ...........................................................1020
23.12.4 Radio LED .............................................................................................................1020
23.12.5 Status LED ............................................................................................................1020
23.13 PoE Injector Pin-outs..............................................................................................................1021
23.13.1 PoE Port ...............................................................................................................1021
23.13.2 Data Port ..............................................................................................................1021
23.13.3 DC .........................................................................................................................1022
23.14 PoE Injector LEDs ...................................................................................................................1022
23.14.1 Radio LED .............................................................................................................1022
Section V: Appendices............................................................................................... 1023
24. Alarms List .......................................................................................................... 1024

25. Abbreviations ..................................................................................................... 1088
Page 19 of 1094

List of Figures
Figure 1: Main Web EMS Page ...............................................................................................................57
Figure 2: Displaying a Representation of the Front Panel ......................................................................58
Figure 3: Main Web EMS Page with Representation of Front Panel – IP-20C and IP-20S......................58
Figure 4: Main Web EMS Page with Representation of Front Panel – IP-20C-HP ..................................58
Figure 5: Main Web EMS Page with Representation of Front Panel – IP-20E ........................................59
Figure 6: Main Web EMS Page with Representation of Front Panel – IP-20V .......................................59
Figure 7: Main Web EMS Page with Active and Standby Tabs ...............................................................60
Figure 8: Related Pages Drop-Down List ................................................................................................61
Figure 9: Unit Radio Summary Page .......................................................................................................61
Figure 10: Unit Summary Page – Customizing Columns ........................................................................62
Figure 11: Radio Summary Page.............................................................................................................62
Figure 12: Radio Summary Page – Customizing Columns ......................................................................63
Figure 13: Security Summary Page .........................................................................................................64
Figure 14: Security Summary Page – FIPS Security Warnings ................................................................65
Figure 15: Security Summary Page – Customizing Columns ..................................................................66
Figure 16: Internet Protocol Properties Window ...................................................................................76
Figure 17: Login Page .............................................................................................................................77
Figure 18: Change User Password Page .................................................................................................80
Figure 19: Quick Configuration – From File Page ...................................................................................82
Figure 20: Quick Configuration – From File Page – Configuration File Loaded ......................................82
Figure 21: Quick Configuration – Platform Setup Page ..........................................................................83
Figure 22: Quick Configuration – Platform Setup Summary Page..........................................................85
Figure 23: Local Networking Configuration Page ...................................................................................87
Figure 24: Activation Key Configuration Page ........................................................................................89
Figure 25: Activation Key Overview Page ...............................................................................................92
Figure 26: Time Services Page ................................................................................................................96
Figure 27: Interface Manager Page ........................................................................................................99
Figure 28: Interface Manager – Edit Page ............................................................................................100
Figure 29: Multiple Selection Operation Section (Interface Manager Page) .......................................100
Figure 30: Traffic over Management Page ...........................................................................................102
Figure 31: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page (IP-20C) (ETSI).................................................................103
Figure 32: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page (IP-20E) (ETSI) .................................................................104
Figure 33: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page (IP-20C) (FCC) .................................................................104
Figure 34: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page – Configuration (IP-20C/IP-20C-HP) ...............................105
Figure 35: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page - Configuration (IP-20E) ..................................................106
Figure 36: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page – Configuration – Adaptive Mode (IP-20C/IP-20C-HP) ..107
Page 20 of 1094

Figure 37: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page – Configuration – Adaptive Mode (IP-20E) ....................107
Figure 38: Frequency Scanner Page – IP-20V – Continuous Mode ......................................................111
Figure 39: Frequency Scanner Page – IP-20E – Single Mode ...............................................................112
Figure 40: Frequency Scanner Results – Graph Format (IP-20V – Continuous Mode) .........................114
Figure 41: Frequency Scanner Results – Graph Format (IP-20E – Single Mode) ..................................114
Figure 42: Radio Parameters Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP .......................................................................115
Figure 43: Radio Parameters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP .....................................................116
Figure 44: Radio Parameters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C .......................................................................121
Figure 45: Security General Configuration Page ..................................................................................123
Figure 46: Unit Redundancy Page ........................................................................................................125
Figure 47: 1+0 Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1 ...........................................................................130
Figure 52: 1+0 Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 6 (Summary Page)................................................134
Figure 53: 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1 ...........................................................134
Figure 58: 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 6 (Summary Page) ................................138
Figure 59: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1 .................................................................138
Figure 64: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 6 (XPIC) ......................................................142
Figure 65: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 6 (Non-XPIC) ..............................................142
Figure 66: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 7 (XPIC) ......................................................143
Figure 67: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 7 (Non-XPIC) ..............................................143
Figure 70: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard –Summary Page (XPIC) ..........................................146
Figure 71: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard –Summary Page (No XPIC) ....................................146
Figure 72: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1 ............................................147
Figure 73: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio #2 Selection Page ................147
Page 21 of 1094

Figure 74: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio XPIC Configuration Page ......148
Figure 75: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio Parameters Configuration Page
..............................................................................................................................................................148
Figure 76: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio Parameters Configuration Page
(XPIC) ....................................................................................................................................................149
Figure 77: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio MRMC Script Configuration
Page ......................................................................................................................................................150
Figure 78: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio MRMC Script Configuration
Page – XPIC ...........................................................................................................................................150
Figure 79: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Management Configuration Page .151
Figure 80: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard –Summary Page ................................152
Figure 81: Multiband Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1 ................................................................153
Figure 86: Multiband Quick Configuration Wizard – Summary Page ...................................................157
Figure 87: Bandwidth Notification Page (Empty) .................................................................................158
Figure 88: Bandwidth Notification – Add Page ....................................................................................158
Figure 89: Bandwidth Notification Page (Populated with Radio BNM) ................................................159
Figure 90: Multi-Carrier ABC Group Page (Empty) ...............................................................................160
Figure 91: Create ABC Group Wizard – First Page ................................................................................161
Figure 92: Create ABC Group Wizard – Second Page ...........................................................................161
Figure 93: Create ABC Group Wizard – Finish Page .............................................................................162
Figure 94: Multi-Carrier ABC Group – Edit Group Page .......................................................................163
Figure 95: Multi Carrier ABC Group - Add/Remove Members Page ....................................................164
Figure 96: Multiband Operation – IP-20E and IP-20C/IP-20C-HP.........................................................167
Figure 97: Multiband Operation – IP-20E and IP-20N or IP-20A ..........................................................168
Figure 98: Multiband Operation – IP-20E and Third-Party Unit ...........................................................169
Figure 99: Multi Carrier ABC Groups Page (Empty) ..............................................................................170
Figure 100: Create ABC Group Wizard – Page 1 ...................................................................................170
Figure 104: Multi Carrier ABC Groups Page (Populated with Multiband Group) .................................172
Figure 105: Bandwidth Notification Page (Empty) ...............................................................................173
Figure 106: Bandwidth Notification – Add Page ..................................................................................174
Figure 107: Bandwidth Notification Page (Populated with Radio BNM) ..............................................175
Figure 108: Multiband Cable for Use with CSFP Port ...........................................................................176
Page 22 of 1094

Figure 109: Multiband Configuration with Inband Management and/or SyncE via the IP-20E ...........177
Figure 110: Multiband Configuration with Direct Inband Management to the Paired Unit ................178
Figure 111: Multiband Configuration with Direct Inband Management to the IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-
20S ........................................................................................................................................................179
Figure 112: Create LAG Group – Page 1 ...............................................................................................183
Figure 113: Create LAG Group – Page 2 ...............................................................................................183
Figure 114: Create LAG Group – Final Page .........................................................................................184
Figure 115: Link Aggregation - Edit Page ..............................................................................................185
Figure 116: LAG Distribution Function (DF) Page .................................................................................187
Figure 117: LACP Aggregation Page .....................................................................................................189
Figure 118: LACP Port Status Page .......................................................................................................190
Figure 119: LACP Port Status – View Page ...........................................................................................191
Figure 120: LACP Port Statistics Page ...................................................................................................193
Figure 121: LACP Port Debug Page .......................................................................................................194
Figure 122: XPIC Configuration Page ....................................................................................................196
Figure 123: Logical Interfaces – Edit Page ............................................................................................200
Figure 124: Unit Redundancy Page ......................................................................................................201
Figure 125: Unit Redundancy Page when Redundancy Enabled ..........................................................202
Figure 126: Interface Manager Page – Both Radio Carriers Enabled ...................................................203
Figure 127: Standby Tab of Radio Parameters Page ............................................................................204
Figure 128: Unit Redundancy Page ......................................................................................................205
Figure 129: Create Diversity Group – Page 1 .......................................................................................207
Figure 130: Create Space Diversity Group – Selection Summary .........................................................208
Figure 131: Diversity - Edit Page (Space Diversity Group) ....................................................................208
Figure 132: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page......................................................................212
Figure 133: 4x4 MIMO Group – Select Group Parameters Page ..........................................................213
Figure 134: 4x4 MIMO Group – Select Members Parameters Page ....................................................213
Figure 135: 4x4 MIMO Group – Select MRMC Parameters Page .........................................................214
Figure 136: 4x4 MIMO Group – Select Members Parameters Page ....................................................215
Figure 137: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page (Populated – 4x4 MIMO Group) ..................216
Figure 138: 4x4 MIMO Configuration...................................................................................................216
Figure 139: Create Diversity Group Page – 2x2 MIMO – Page 1 ..........................................................217
Figure 140: Create Diversity Group Page – 2x2 MIMO – Page 2 ..........................................................217
Figure 141: Diversity Groups – 2x2 MIMO - Edit Page .........................................................................218
Figure 144: Diversity - Edit Page...........................................................................................................220
Figure 145: 4x4 MIMO - Edit Members Page .......................................................................................221
Page 23 of 1094

Figure 146: Diversity Groups - Edit Members Page..............................................................................221

Figure 147: Advanced Space Diversity (ASD) .......................................................................................223
Figure 148: ASD Data Paths ..................................................................................................................224
Figure 149: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page......................................................................226
Figure 150: AMCC Group - Select Group Parameters Page ..................................................................226
Figure 151: AMCC Group - Select Members Parameters Page ............................................................227
Figure 152: AMCC Group - Select MRMC Parameters Page .................................................................228
Figure 153: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page – Populated with ASD Group .......................229
Figure 154: AMCC – ASD – Radio Members Page ................................................................................229
Figure 155: AMCC Group Edit Page ......................................................................................................230
Figure 156: AFR 1+0 Deployment .........................................................................................................231
Figure 157: AFR 1+0 Configuration ......................................................................................................232
Figure 158: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page (Empty) ........................................................233
Figure 159: AMCC Group – Select Group Parameters Page .................................................................233
Figure 160: AMCC Group – Select Members Parameters Page (Hub Site) ...........................................234
Figure 161: AMCC Group – Select Members Parameters Page (Tail Site) ............................................234
Figure 162: AMCC Group – Selection Summary Page ..........................................................................235
Figure 163: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page (Populated) ..................................................236
Figure 164: AMCC Group – Edit Page ...................................................................................................236
Figure 165: Local Networking Configuration Page ...............................................................................239
Figure 166: Remote Networking Configuration Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP ...........................................240
Figure 167: Remote Networking Configuration Page – IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V .............................241
Figure 168: Remote IP Configuration Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP ........................................241
Figure 169: SNMP Parameters Page.....................................................................................................243
Figure 170: V3 Users Page ....................................................................................................................244
Figure 171: V3 Users - Add Page ..........................................................................................................245
Figure 172: Trap Managers Page ..........................................................................................................246
Figure 173: Trap Managers - Edit Page ................................................................................................246
Figure 174: FileZilla Server User Configuration ....................................................................................248
Figure 175: FileZilla Server Shared Folder Setup ..................................................................................249
Figure 176: FTP Port Page ....................................................................................................................250
Figure 177: Versions Page ....................................................................................................................251
Figure 178: Software Versions Table ....................................................................................................252
Figure 179: Download & Install Page – HTTP/HTTPS Download – No File Selected ............................254
Figure 180: Download & Install Page – HTTP/HTTPS Download –File Selected ...................................255
Figure 181: Download & Install Page – FTP ..........................................................................................256
Figure 182: FTP Parameters Page .........................................................................................................257
Page 24 of 1094

Figure 183: Install Parameters Page .....................................................................................................260

Figure 184: Install Parameters Page .....................................................................................................261
Figure 185: Backup Files Page ..............................................................................................................263
Figure 186: Configuration Management Page – FTP/SFTP...................................................................264
Figure 187: FTP Parameters Page (Configuration Management) .........................................................265
Figure 188: Configuration Management Page – HTTP/HTTPS .............................................................266
Figure 189: Chassis Configuration Page ...............................................................................................272
Figure 190: Unit Parameters Page .......................................................................................................273
Figure 191: NTP Configuration Page ....................................................................................................274
Figure 192: NTP Configuration Page (Disabled) ...................................................................................275
Figure 193: NTP Configuration Page (Disabled) ...................................................................................276
Figure 194: Inventory Page ..................................................................................................................278
Figure 195: SFP Alarm Example ............................................................................................................279
Figure 196: SFP Transceiver Inventory and DDM Page ........................................................................279
Figure 197: SFP PM Report Page ..........................................................................................................281
Figure 198: Login Banner Page .............................................................................................................283
Figure 199: Radio Parameters Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP .....................................................................285
Figure 200: Radio Parameters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP ...................................................286
Figure 201: Remote Radio Parameters Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP ........................................................288
Figure 202: Remote Radio Parameters Page – IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V ..........................................288
Figure 203: Remote Radio Parameters Page Per Carrier – Multi-Carrier .............................................289
Figure 204: ATPC Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP ..........................................................................................291
Figure 205: ATPC – Edit Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP .............................................................291
Figure 206: Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP ...................................293
Figure 207: Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration – Edit Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP .......294
Figure 208: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP ...........................................295
Figure 209: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Page – Single-Carrier .................................................296
Figure 210: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP .........................297
Figure 211: Payload Encryption Page ...................................................................................................300
Figure 212: Payload Encryption – Edit Page .........................................................................................300
Figure 213: Payload Encryption – Edit Page with Master Key Displayed .............................................301
Figure 214: Radio BER Thresholds Page ...............................................................................................304
Figure 215: Radio BER Thresholds – Edit Page .....................................................................................305
Figure 216: MRMC Status Page ............................................................................................................306
Figure 217: MRMC PM Report Page .....................................................................................................307
Figure 218: MRMC Thresholds Configuration – Edit Page ...................................................................308
Figure 219: Counters Page – Multi-Carrier ...........................................................................................309
Page 25 of 1094

Figure 220: Counters Page – Single-Carrier ..........................................................................................310

Figure 221: Counters Page Per Carrier – Multi-Carrier ........................................................................310
Figure 222: Signal Level PM Report Page .............................................................................................311
Figure 223: Signal Level Thresholds Configuration – Edit Page ............................................................312
Figure 224: Aggregate PM Report Page ...............................................................................................313
Figure 225: MSE PM Report Page ........................................................................................................314
Figure 226: Modem MSE Thresholds Configuration – Edit Page..........................................................315
Figure 227: XPI PM Report Page...........................................................................................................316
Figure 228: XPI Thresholds Configuration – Edit Page .........................................................................317
Figure 229: Capacity PM Report Page ..................................................................................................319
Figure 230: Ethernet Radio Capacity and Throughput Threshold Page ...............................................320
Figure 231: Utilization PM Report Page ...............................................................................................322
Figure 232: Ethernet Radio Utilization Threshold Page .......................................................................322
Figure 233: Frame Error PM Report Page ............................................................................................324
Figure 234: Ethernet Services Page ......................................................................................................327
Figure 235: Ethernet Services - Add page ............................................................................................329
Figure 236: Multiple Selection Operation Section (Ethernet Services) ................................................331
Figure 237: Ethernet Service Points Page ............................................................................................334
Figure 238: Ethernet Service Points Page – Ingress Attributes ............................................................337
Figure 239: Ethernet Service Points Page – Egress Attributes .............................................................339
Figure 240: Ethernet Service Points - Add Page ...................................................................................341
Figure 241: Attached VLAN List Page ...................................................................................................345
Figure 242: Attached VLAN List - Add Page ..........................................................................................346
Figure 243: Ethernet General Configuration Page ...............................................................................348
Figure 244: Physical Interfaces Page ....................................................................................................349
Figure 245: Physical Interfaces - Edit Page ...........................................................................................350
Figure 246: ASP & LLF Page ..................................................................................................................353
Figure 247: Automatic State Propagation - Add Page ..........................................................................353
Figure 248: RMON Page .......................................................................................................................356
Figure 249: RMON Page – Hiding and Displaying Columns ..................................................................357
Figure 250: Egress CoS Statistics Page..................................................................................................357
Figure 251: Egress CoS Statistics – Edit Page .......................................................................................358
Figure 252: Ethernet Port TX PM Report Page .....................................................................................359
Figure 253: Ethernet PM Port Admin Page ..........................................................................................360
Figure 254: Ethernet Port Tx Threshold Page ......................................................................................361
Figure 255: Ethernet Port RX PM Report Page .....................................................................................362
Figure 256: Ethernet PM Port Admin Page ..........................................................................................363
Page 26 of 1094

Figure 257: Ethernet Port Rx Threshold Page ......................................................................................364

Figure 258: QoS Block Diagram ............................................................................................................365
Figure 259: Logical Interfaces Page ......................................................................................................369
Figure 260: Logical Interfaces - Edit Page.............................................................................................369
Figure 261: 802.1Q Classification Page ................................................................................................371
Figure 262: 802.1Q Classification - Edit Page .......................................................................................371
Figure 263: 802.1AD Classification Page ..............................................................................................372
Figure 264: 802.1Q Classification - Edit Page .......................................................................................372
Figure 265: DSCP Classification Page....................................................................................................373
Figure 266: DSCP Classification - Edit Page ..........................................................................................374
Figure 267: DSCP Classification - Add Page ..........................................................................................374
Figure 268: MPLS Classification Page ...................................................................................................376
Figure 269: MPLS Classification - Edit Page ..........................................................................................376
Figure 270: MAC DA Classification Page...............................................................................................377
Figure 271: MAC DA Classification – Add Page ....................................................................................377
Figure 272: MAC DA Classification – Edit Page ....................................................................................378
Figure 273: Policer Profile Page ...........................................................................................................380
Figure 274: Policer Profile - Add Page ..................................................................................................380
Figure 275: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Unicast Policer (Default) ...........................................383
Figure 276: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Multicast Policer .......................................................385
Figure 277: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Broadcast Policer ......................................................386
Figure 278: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Ethertype Policer ......................................................387
Figure 279: 802.1Q Marking Page ........................................................................................................389
Figure 280: 802.1Q Marking - Edit Page ...............................................................................................390
Figure 281: 802.1AD Marking Page ......................................................................................................390
Figure 282: 802.1AD Marking - Edit Page.............................................................................................391
Figure 283: WRED Profile Page ............................................................................................................393
Figure 284: WRED Profile - Add Page ...................................................................................................393
Figure 285: Logical Interfaces – WRED Page ........................................................................................396
Figure 286: Logical Interfaces – WRED - Edit Page ...............................................................................397
Figure 287: Queue Shaper Profile Page................................................................................................398
Figure 288: Queue Shaper Profile – Add Page .....................................................................................398
Figure 289: Service Bundle Shaper Profile Page ...................................................................................401
Figure 290: Service Bundle Shaper Profile – Add Page ........................................................................401
Figure 291: Logical Interfaces – Shaper – Egress Queue Shaper ..........................................................404
Figure 292: Logical Interfaces – Egress Queue Shaper Configuration – Add Page ...............................405
Figure 293: Logical Interfaces – Shaper – Egress Service Bundle Shaper .............................................406
Page 27 of 1094

Figure 294: Logical Interfaces – Egress Service Bundle Shaper Configuration – Add Page ..................406
Figure 295: Scheduler Priority Profile Page ..........................................................................................409
Figure 296: Scheduler Priority Profile – Add Page ...............................................................................410
Figure 297: Scheduler WFQ Profile Page..............................................................................................414
Figure 298: Scheduler WFQ Profile – Add Page ...................................................................................414
Figure 299: Logical Interfaces – Scheduler – Egress Port Scheduling Priority ......................................417
Figure 300: Logical Interfaces – Scheduler – Egress Port Scheduling WFQ ..........................................418
Figure 301: Egress CoS PM Configuration Page ...................................................................................420
Figure 302: Egress CoS PM Configuration – Add Page .........................................................................421
Figure 303: Egress CoS PM Page ..........................................................................................................422
Figure 304: G.8032 General Attribute Page .........................................................................................424
Figure 305: G.8032 ERPI Attribute Page ...............................................................................................425
Figure 306: G.8032 ERPI Attribute Wizard – Page 1 .............................................................................425
Figure 310: G.8032 ERPI Attribute Wizard – Submit ............................................................................428
Figure 311: G.8032 ERPI Attribute – Edit Page .....................................................................................429
Figure 312: G.8032 ERPI Attribute – State Page...................................................................................432
Figure 313: G.8032 ERPI Attribute – Statistics Page.............................................................................433
Figure 314: Instance Per Service Mapping – Edit Page ........................................................................436
Figure 315: MSTP Bridge General Attributes Page ...............................................................................438
Figure 316: MSTP Bridge Configuration ID Page ..................................................................................440
Figure 317: MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree Page......................................................................................441
Figure 318: MSTP Bridge CIST Page ......................................................................................................444
Figure 319: MSTP Bridge MSTI Page ....................................................................................................445
Figure 320: MSTP Bridge MSTI – Edit Page ..........................................................................................445
Figure 321: MSTP Bridge VLAN Page ....................................................................................................447
Figure 322: MSTP Port Spanning Tree Page (IP-20C) ...........................................................................449
Figure 323: MSTP Port Spanning Tree – Edit Page ...............................................................................449
Figure 324: MSTP Port CIST Page (IP-20C) ...........................................................................................451
Figure 325: MSTP Port CIST – Edit Page ...............................................................................................451
Figure 326: MSTP Port MSTI Page ........................................................................................................454
Figure 327: MSTP Port MSTI – Edit Page ..............................................................................................455
Figure 328: MSTP Port BDPU Counters Page .......................................................................................457
Figure 329: Bandwidth Notification Page.............................................................................................458
Page 28 of 1094

Figure 331: Bandwidth Notification - Statistics Page (ABN) .................................................................461

Figure 332: Bandwidth Notification Page.............................................................................................463
Figure 334: Bandwidth Notification - Statistics Page (ETH-BN)............................................................465
Figure 335: LLDP Remote System Management Page .........................................................................468
Figure 336: LLDP Configuration Parameters Page ................................................................................469
Figure 337: LLDP Port Configuration Page ...........................................................................................470
Figure 338: LLDP Port Configuration - Edit Page ..................................................................................471
Figure 339: LLDP Destination Address Table Page ...............................................................................472
Figure 340: LLDP Management TLV Configuration Page ......................................................................473
Figure 341: LLDP Remote System Management Page .........................................................................474
Figure 342: LLDP Remote System Table Page ......................................................................................475
Figure 343: LLDP Local System Parameters Page .................................................................................476
Figure 344: LLDP Local System Port Page .............................................................................................478
Figure 345: LLDP Local System Management Page ..............................................................................479
Figure 346: LLDP Local System Management – View Page ..................................................................479
Figure 347: LLDP Statistic Page ............................................................................................................480
Figure 348: LLDP Port TX Statistics Page ..............................................................................................481
Figure 349: LLDP Port RX Statistics Page ..............................................................................................482
Figure 350: SyncE Regenerator Page....................................................................................................484
Figure 351: Pipe Configurations - Add Page .........................................................................................485
Figure 352: Sync Source Page ...............................................................................................................487
Figure 353: Sync Source – Add Page ....................................................................................................488
Figure 354: Outgoing Clock Page..........................................................................................................490
Figure 355: Outgoing Clock – Edit Page ...............................................................................................490
Figure 356: 1588 General Configuration Page .....................................................................................493
Figure 357: 1588 Transparent Clock Page ............................................................................................493
Figure 358: 1588 Transparent Clock – Edit Page ..................................................................................494
Figure 359: Quick Configuration Security General Parameters Page ...................................................496
Figure 360: Quick Configuration Security Protocols Page ....................................................................497
Figure 361: Quick Configuration Security Access Control Page ...........................................................498
Figure 362: Quick Configuration Security RSA Key & Certificate Page .................................................499
Figure 363: Access Control General Configuration Page ......................................................................500
Figure 364: Access Control User Accounts - Edit Page .........................................................................501
Figure 365: Access Control Password Management Page ...................................................................502
Figure 366: Protocols Control Page ......................................................................................................503
Figure 367: Access Control User Profiles Page .....................................................................................505
Page 29 of 1094

Figure 368: Access Control User Profiles - Add Page ...........................................................................506

Figure 369: Access Control User Accounts Page ..................................................................................507
Figure 370: Access Control User Accounts - Add Page .........................................................................507
Figure 371: Remote Access Control Configuration Page (RADIUS) ......................................................509
Figure 372: Radius Configuration – Edit Page ......................................................................................510
Figure 373: Server Manager – Creating User Groups...........................................................................513
Figure 374: Server Manager – Creating Users ......................................................................................514
Figure 375: Server Manager – User Password Settings........................................................................515
Figure 376: Server Manager – Creating a RADIUS Client .....................................................................516
Figure 377: Create Network Policy – Specify Name and Connection Type ..........................................518
Figure 378: Create Network Policy – Select Condition .........................................................................519
Figure 379: Create Network Policy – User Group added to Policy’s Conditions ..................................520
Figure 380: Create Network Policy – Specifying Access Permission ....................................................521
Figure 381: Create Network Policy – Configuring Authentication Methods ........................................522
Figure 382: Create Network Policy – Insecure Authentication Method Query....................................522
Figure 383: Create Network Policy – Configuring Constraints .............................................................523
384: Create Network Policy – Configuring Settings .............................................................................524
Figure 385: Create Network Policy – Adding Vendor Specific Attributes ............................................525
Figure 386: Create Network Policy – Selecting to Add Attribute Information .....................................525
Figure 387: Create Network Policy – Specifying the Vendor................................................................526
Figure 388: Create Network Policy – Configuring Vendor-Specific Attribute Information ..................527
Figure 389: Create Network Policy – Example of Vendor-Specific Attribute Configuration ................528
Figure 390: Create Network Policy – Stopping/Starting NPS Services .................................................529
Figure 391: Remote Access Control Configuration Page (TACACS+) ....................................................538
Figure 392: TACACS+ Configuration – Edit Page ..................................................................................539
Figure 393: Remote Access Users Page ................................................................................................543
Figure 394: Remote Access Users Table - View ....................................................................................544
Figure 395: Security Certificate Request Page .....................................................................................545
Figure 396: FTP Parameters Page (Security Certificate Request) .........................................................546
Figure 397: Security Certification Download and Install Page .............................................................547
Figure 398: FTP Parameters Page (Security Certification Download & Install) ....................................548
Figure 399: RSA Key Download & Install Page (HTTP Selected) ...........................................................551
Figure 400: RSA Key Download & Install Page (FTP Selected) ..............................................................553
Figure 402: Protocols Control Page ......................................................................................................555
Figure 403: Security Log Upload Page ..................................................................................................556
Figure 404: FTP Parameters Page (Security Log Upload) .....................................................................556
Page 30 of 1094

Figure 405: Configuration Log Upload Page .........................................................................................558

Figure 406: FTP Parameters Page (Configuration Log Upload) ............................................................558
Figure 407: Current Alarms Page .........................................................................................................562
Figure 408: Current Alarms - View Page ..............................................................................................563
Figure 409: Alarm Statistics Page .........................................................................................................564
Figure 410: Event Log ...........................................................................................................................564
Figure 411: Alarm Configuration Page .................................................................................................566
Figure 412: Alarm Configuration Page – Expanded ..............................................................................567
Figure 413: Alarm Configuration - Edit Page ........................................................................................568
Figure 414: Voltage Alarm Configuration Page ....................................................................................569
Figure 415: Voltage Alarm Configuration – Edit Page ..........................................................................570
Figure 416: Voltage PM Report Page ...................................................................................................570
Figure 417: Unit Info Page – HTTP/HTTPS Upload ...............................................................................572
Figure 418: Unit Info Page – FTP/SFTP Upload ....................................................................................574
Figure 420: Radio Loopbacks Page .......................................................................................................576
Figure 421: Radio Loopbacks – Edit Page .............................................................................................577
Figure 422: Logical Interfaces – Loopback Page ...................................................................................577
Figure 423: SOAM MD Page .................................................................................................................581
Figure 424: SOAM MD – Add Page .......................................................................................................581
Figure 425: SOAM MA/MEG Page ........................................................................................................583
Figure 426: SOAM MA/MEG – Add Page..............................................................................................584
Figure 427: MEP List Page ....................................................................................................................588
Figure 428: Add MEP Page ...................................................................................................................588
Figure 429: SOAM MEP Page ...............................................................................................................589
Figure 430: Add SOAM MEP Wizard – Page 1 ......................................................................................589
Figure 431: Add SOAM MEP Wizard – Page 2 ......................................................................................590
Figure 432: Add SOAM MEP Wizard –Summary Page ..........................................................................590
Figure 433: SOAM MEP - Edit Page ......................................................................................................592
Figure 434: SOAM MEP DB Table .........................................................................................................593
Figure 435: MEP Last Invalid CCMS Page .............................................................................................595
Figure 436: SOAM MEP Loopback Page ...............................................................................................597
Figure 437: Restart HTTP Page .............................................................................................................599
Figure 438: ifIndex Calculator Page ......................................................................................................600
Figure 439: MIB Reference Table Page ................................................................................................600
Figure 440: IP-20C Interfaces – Descriptive Labels ..............................................................................993
Figure 441: IP-20C Interfaces – Letter Labels .......................................................................................993
Page 31 of 1094

Figure 442: IP-20C Interfaces – 2E2SX Model ......................................................................................994

Figure 443: IP-20C DC Port Connector .................................................................................................995
Figure 444: IP-20C-HP Interfaces .........................................................................................................998
Figure 445: IP-20C DC Port Connector .................................................................................................999
Figure 446: IP-20S Interfaces – Descriptive Labels .............................................................................1002
Figure 447: IP-20S Interfaces – Letter Labels .....................................................................................1002
Figure 448: IP-20S DC Connector .......................................................................................................1004
Figure 449: IP-20E Interfaces – ESE ....................................................................................................1008
Figure 450: IP-20E Interfaces – ESS ....................................................................................................1009
Figure 451: IP-20E Interfaces – ESP ....................................................................................................1010
Figure 452: Two-Wire to PoE Port Power Adaptor ............................................................................1012
Figure 453: RSL Pins ...........................................................................................................................1012
Figure 454: IP-20V Interfaces .............................................................................................................1016
Figure 455: Two-Wire to PoE Port Power Adaptor ............................................................................1017
Figure 456: RSL Pins ...........................................................................................................................1018
Figure 457: PoE Injector Connectors ..................................................................................................1021
Page 32 of 1094

List of Tables
Table 1: Electronic Information Products Declaration of Hazardous/Toxic Substances ........................46
Table 2: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Platform Menu ..................................................................67
Table 3: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Faults Menu ......................................................................68
Table 4: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Radio Menu .......................................................................69
Table 5: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Ethernet Menu ..................................................................70
Table 6: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Sync Menu.........................................................................72
Table 7: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Quick Configuration Menu ................................................73
Table 8: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Utilities Menu....................................................................73
Table 9: Cables for Direct CPU Connection ............................................................................................77
Table 10: Activation Key Status Parameters ..........................................................................................89
Table 11: Activation Key-Enabled-Features Table Parameters ..............................................................92
Table 12: Activation Key-Enabled-Features Description ........................................................................93
Table 13: Time Services Parameters ......................................................................................................97
Table 14: Ethernet Splitter Cable and Gland for Dual Ethernet Port .....................................................98
Table 15: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page Parameters ......................................................................108
Table 16: Available Radio Profiles – IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S .....................................................109
Table 17: Available Radio Profiles – IP-20E ..........................................................................................109
Table 18: Available Radio Profiles – IP-20V ..........................................................................................110
Table 19: System Configurations ..........................................................................................................128
Table 20: Multiband Cable for Use with CSFP Port ..............................................................................176
Table 21: LACP Aggregation Status Parameters ...................................................................................189
Table 22: LACP Port Status Parameters................................................................................................191
Table 23: LACP Port Statistics ...............................................................................................................193
Table 24: LACP Port Debug Statistics ...................................................................................................194
Table 25: SNMP V3 Authentication Parameters ..................................................................................245
Table 26: Trap Manager Parameters ....................................................................................................247
Table 27: Software Versions Table Columns ........................................................................................252
Table 28: Download & Install Status Parameters .................................................................................259
Table 29: Backup Files Page Columns ..................................................................................................263
Table 30: Unit Parameters ...................................................................................................................273
Table 31: NTP Status Parameters .........................................................................................................276
Table 32: SFP Inventory Parameters ....................................................................................................280
Table 33: SFP Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Parameters .........................................................280
Table 34: DDM PMs ..............................................................................................................................281
Table 35: Radio Status Parameters ......................................................................................................287
Table 36: Remote Radio Parameters ....................................................................................................289
Page 33 of 1094

Table 37: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Fields .............................................................................297

Table 38: MRMC Status Parameters ....................................................................................................306
Table 39: MRMC PMs ...........................................................................................................................308
Table 40: Signal Level PMs ...................................................................................................................311
Table 41: Signal Level Thresholds.........................................................................................................312
Table 42: Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs ..............................................................................................313
Table 43: Modem MSE PMs .................................................................................................................314
Table 44: XPI PMs .................................................................................................................................316
Table 45: Capacity/Throughput PMs ....................................................................................................320
Table 46: Utilization PMs .....................................................................................................................323
Table 47: Frame Error Rate PMs ..........................................................................................................325
Table 48: Ethernet Services Page Parameters......................................................................................328
Table 49: General Service Point Attributes ..........................................................................................335
Table 50: Attached Interface Types .....................................................................................................336
Table 51: Service Point Ingress Attributes ...........................................................................................337
Table 52: Service Point Egress Attributes .............................................................................................339
Table 53: VLAN Classification Parameters ............................................................................................346
Table 54: Physical Interface Status Parameters ...................................................................................351
Table 55: Ethernet TX Port PMs ...........................................................................................................359
Table 56: Ethernet RX Port PMs ...........................................................................................................362
Table 57: Logical Interface Classification Parameters ..........................................................................370
Table 58: Policer Profile Parameters ....................................................................................................381
Table 59: ERPI Configuration Parameters ............................................................................................431
Table 60: ERPI Status Parameters ........................................................................................................431
Table 61: ERPI State Parameters ..........................................................................................................432
Table 62: ERPI Statistics .......................................................................................................................434
Table 63: MSTP Bridge Configuration ID Parameters...........................................................................440
Table 64: MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree Status Parameters ...................................................................442
Table 65: MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Parameters .......................................................442
Table 66: MSTP Bridge CIST Status Parameters ...................................................................................444
Table 67: MSTP Bridge MSTI Status Parameters ..................................................................................446
Table 68: MSTP Port Spanning Tree Status Parameters.......................................................................450
Table 69: MSTP Port CIST Status Parameters .......................................................................................452
Table 70: MSTP Port MSTI Status Parameters .....................................................................................455
Table 71: MSTP BPDU Counters ...........................................................................................................457
Table 72: ABN Status Parameters ........................................................................................................460
Table 73: ABN Entity Statistics Parameters ..........................................................................................461
Page 34 of 1094

Table 74: ETH-BN Status Parameters ...................................................................................................465

Table 75: ETH-BN Entity Statistics Parameters.....................................................................................466
Table 76: LLDP Remote System Management Parameters ..................................................................468
Table 77: LLDP Read-Only Configuration Parameters ..........................................................................469
Table 78: LLDP Configurable Configuration Parameters ......................................................................470
Table 79: LLDP Port Configuration Status Parameters .........................................................................471
Table 80: LLDP Management TLV Parameters .....................................................................................473
Table 81: LLDP Remote System Management Parameters ..................................................................474
Table 82: LLDP Remote System Table Parameters ...............................................................................475
Table 83: LLDP Local System Parameters .............................................................................................476
Table 84: LLDP Local System Port Parameters .....................................................................................478
Table 85: LLDP Local System Management Parameters ......................................................................480
Table 86: LLDP Statistics .......................................................................................................................481
Table 87: LLDP Port TX Statistics ..........................................................................................................482
Table 88: LLDP Port RX Statistics ..........................................................................................................482
Table 89: Sync Source Parameters .......................................................................................................487
Table 90: RSA File Download & Install Status Parameters ...................................................................554
Table 91: Anti-Theft Alarms .................................................................................................................561
Table 92: Alarm Information ................................................................................................................563
Table 93: Event Log Information ..........................................................................................................565
Table 94: Alarm Configuration Page Parameters .................................................................................566
Table 95: Voltage PMs ..........................................................................................................................571
Table 96: SOAM MA/MEG Configuration Parameters .........................................................................584
Table 97: SOAM MA/MEG Status Parameters .....................................................................................585
Table 98: SOAM MEP Parameters ........................................................................................................591
Table 99: SOAM MEP DB Table Parameters .........................................................................................593
Table 100: MIMO Protection Cables ....................................................................................................607
Table 101: IP Address (IPv4) CLI Parameters ........................................................................................609
Table 102: IP Address (IPv6) CLI Parameters ........................................................................................610
Table 103: Local Time Configuration CLI Parameters...........................................................................613
Table 104: Daylight Savings Time CLI Parameters ................................................................................614
Table 105: Interface Configuration CLI Parameters .............................................................................616
Table 106: MRMC Script CLI Parameters .............................................................................................618
Table 107: MRMC Script Assignation to Radio Carrier CLI Parameters ................................................619
Table 108: Entering Radio View CLI Parameters ..................................................................................621
Table 109: Radio Mute/Unmute CLI Parameters .................................................................................622
Table 110: Radio Transmit (TX) Frequency CLI Parameters .................................................................623
Page 35 of 1094

Table 111: Radio Transmit (TX) Level CLI Parameters ..........................................................................624

Table 112: System Configurations (CLI)................................................................................................631
Table 113: LAG Group CLI Parameters .................................................................................................641
Table 114: LACP Aggregation Status Parameters (CLI) .........................................................................645
Table 115: LACP Port Status Parameters (CLI) .....................................................................................646
Table 116: LACP Port Statistics (CLI) .....................................................................................................648
Table 117: MMI and XPI Levels CLI Parameters ...................................................................................666
Table 118: Remote Unit IP Address (IPv4) CLI Parameters ..................................................................677
Table 119: Remote Unit IP Address (IPv6) CLI Parameters ..................................................................678
Table 120: Basic SNMP CLI Parameters ................................................................................................679
Table 121: SNMPv3 CLI Parameters .....................................................................................................681
Table 122: Trap Managers CLI Parameters ..........................................................................................683
Table 123: Software Download CLI Parameters ...................................................................................688
Table 124: Configuration Management CLI Parameters ......................................................................692
Table 125: Configuration Backup and Restore CLI Parameters ............................................................693
Table 126: Configuration Import and Restore CLI Parameters ............................................................694
Table 127: Unit Parameters CLI Parameters ........................................................................................696
Table 128: NTP CLI Parameters ............................................................................................................697
Table 129: SFP Inventory Parameters (CLI) ..........................................................................................700
Table 130: SFP Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Parameters (CLI) ...............................................701
Table 131: Remote Radio Mute/Unmute CLI Parameters ...................................................................704
Table 132: Remote Radio TX Level CLI Parameters ..............................................................................705
Table 133: Remote Radio ATPC CLI Parameters ...................................................................................705
Table 134: Radio ATPC CLI Parameters ................................................................................................707
Table 135: Header De-Duplication CLI Parameters ..............................................................................709
Table 136: Aggregate PMs (CLI) ...........................................................................................................718
Table 137: Excessive BER CLI Parameters ............................................................................................719
Table 138: RSL Thresholds CLI Parameters ..........................................................................................720
Table 139: TSL Thresholds CLI Parameters ...........................................................................................720
Table 140: RSL and TSL PMs (CLI) .........................................................................................................722
Table 141: Signal Level Threshold CLI Parameters ...............................................................................723
Table 142: MSE CLI Parameters ...........................................................................................................723
Table 143: MSE PMs (CLI) .....................................................................................................................725
Table 144: XPI Threshold CLI Parameters.............................................................................................725
Table 145: XPI PMs (CLI) .......................................................................................................................727
Table 146: ACM PMs and ACM Profile Thresholds (CLI) ......................................................................729
Table 147: Adding Ethernet Service CLI Parameters ............................................................................732
Page 36 of 1094

Table 148: Entering Ethernet Service View CLI Parameters .................................................................735

Table 149: Displaying Ethernet Service Details CLI Parameters ...........................................................737
Table 150: Ethernet Service Operational State CLI Parameters ...........................................................738
Table 151: Ethernet Service CoS Mode CLI Parameters .......................................................................739
Table 152: Ethernet Service EVC CLI Parameters .................................................................................741
Table 153: Deleting Ethernet Service CLI Parameters ..........................................................................742
Table 154: Service Points per Service Type ..........................................................................................744
Table 155: Service Point Types per Interface .......................................................................................744
Table 156: Legal Service Point – Interface Type Combinations per Interface – SAP and SNP .............750
Table 157: Legal Service Point – Interface Type Combinations per Interface – Pipe and MNG...........750
Table 158: Add Service Point CLI Parameters ......................................................................................753
Table 159: Enable/Disable Broadcast Frames CLI Parameters .............................................................758
Table 160: Service Point CoS Preservation CLI Parameters .................................................................759
Table 161: Service Point Enable/Disable Flooding CLI Parameters ......................................................761
Table 162: C-VLAN CoS Preservation Mode CLI Parameters ................................................................764
Table 163: C-VLAN Preservation CLI Parameters .................................................................................766
Table 164: S-VLAN CoS Preservation CLI Parameters...........................................................................767
Table 165: Service Bundle CLI Parameters ...........................................................................................768
Table 166: VLAN Bundle to Service Point CLI Parameters ....................................................................769
Table 167: Display Service Point Attributes CLI Parameters ................................................................771
Table 168: Delete Service Point Attributes CLI Parameters .................................................................772
Table 169: MAC Address Forwarding Table Maximum Size CLI Parameters ........................................774
Table 170: MAC Address Forwarding Table Aging Time CLI Parameters .............................................775
Table 171: Adding Static Address to MAC Address Forwarding Table CLI Parameters ........................776
Table 172: Enabling MAC Address Learning CLI Parameters ................................................................779
Table 173: Configure S-VLAN Ethertype CLI Parameters .....................................................................780
Table 174: Configure MRU CLI Parameters ..........................................................................................780
Table 175: Entering Interface View CLI Parameters .............................................................................782
Table 176: Interface Media Type CLI Parameters ................................................................................784
Table 177: Interface Speed and Duplex State CLI Parameters .............................................................785
Table 178: Interface Auto Negotiation State CLI Parameters ..............................................................786
Table 179: Interface IFG CLI Parameters ..............................................................................................786
Table 180: Interface Preamble CLI Parameters ....................................................................................787
Table 181: Interface Description CLI Parameters .................................................................................787
Table 182: Interface Statistics (RMON) CLI Parameters .......................................................................787
Table 183: Automatic State Propagation to an Ethernet Port CLI Parameters ....................................791
Table 184: RMON Statistics CLI Parameters .........................................................................................794
Page 37 of 1094

Table 185: Port PM Thresholds CLI Parameters ...................................................................................795

Table 186: Ethernet Port PMs ..............................................................................................................797
Table 187: VLAN Classification and Override CLI Parameters ..............................................................801
Table 188: 802.1p Trust Mode CLI Parameters ....................................................................................803
Table 189: C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI Bit Classification Table Default Values ......................................804
Table 190: C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI Bit Classification Table CLI Parameters .....................................804
Table 191: S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table Default Values ......................................806
Table 192: S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table CLI Parameters .....................................806
Table 193: Trust Mode for DSCP CLI Parameters .................................................................................808
Table 194: DSCP Classification Table Default Values ...........................................................................809
Table 195: Modify DSCP Classification Table CLI Parameters ..............................................................810
Table 196: Trust Mode for MPLS CLI Parameters ................................................................................812
Table 197: MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table Default Values ...............................................................813
Table 198: MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table Modification CLI Parameters ........................................814
Table 199: Default CoS CLI Parameters ................................................................................................815
Table 200: Rate Meter Profile CLI Parameters .....................................................................................816
Table 201: Assigning Rate Meter for Unicast Traffic CLI Parameters ...................................................820
Table 202: Assigning Rate Meter for Multicast Traffic CLI Parameters ................................................821
Table 203: Assigning Rate Meter for Broadcast Traffic CLI Parameters ...............................................822
Table 204: Assigning Rate Meter per Ethertype CLI Parameters .........................................................823
Table 205: Assigning Rate Meter for Service Point and Service Point/CoS CLI Parameters .................825
Table 206: Assigning Line Compensation Value for Rate Meter CLI Parameters .................................826
Table 207: Displaying Rate Meter Statistics CLI Parameters ................................................................826
Table 208: Marking Mode on Service Point CLI Parameters ................................................................828
Table 209: Marking Table for C-VLAN UP Bits ......................................................................................829
Table 210: 802.1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI Bit Mapping Table CLI Parameters ...........................829
Table 211: 802.1ad UP Marking Table (S-VLAN) ..................................................................................830
Table 212: 802.1ad UP Marking Table (S-VLAN) CLI Parameters .........................................................831
Table 213: WRED Profile CLI Parameters .............................................................................................832
Table 214: Assigning WRED Profile to Queue CLI Parameters .............................................................834
Table 215: Queue Shaper Profiles CLI Parameters ...............................................................................836
Table 216: Attaching Shaper Profile to Queue CLI Parameters............................................................837
Table 217: Service Bundle Shaper Profiles CLI Parameters ..................................................................839
Table 218: Attaching Shaper Profile to Service Bundle CLI Parameters ...............................................841
Table 219: Egress Line Compensation for Shaping CLI Parameters .....................................................842
Table 220: Interface Priority Profile Example ......................................................................................843
Table 221: Interface Priority Profile CLI Parameters ............................................................................844
Page 38 of 1094

Table 222: Interface Priority Sample Profile Parameters .....................................................................845

Table 223: Attaching Priority Profile to Interface CLI Parameters .......................................................846
Table 224: WFQ Profile Example ..........................................................................................................848
Table 225: WFQ Profile CLI Parameters ...............................................................................................849
Table 226: WFQ Sample Profile Parameters ........................................................................................850
Table 227: Attaching WFQ Profile to Interface CLI Parameters ...........................................................851
Table 228: Egress Queue Level PMs CLI Parameters ............................................................................852
Table 229: Egress Service Bundle Level PMs CLI Parameters ...............................................................858
Table 230: G.8032 Destination MAC Address CLI Parameters .............................................................861
Table 231: G.8032 ERPI Configuration CLI Parameters ........................................................................862
Table 232: G.8032 RPL Owner CLI Parameters.....................................................................................863
Table 233: G.8032 Timer Configuration CLI Parameters ......................................................................864
Table 234: G.8032 Switching and Reversion CLI Parameters ...............................................................865
Table 235: G.8032 Switching and Reversion CLI Parameters ...............................................................865
Table 236: G.8032 ERPI Display Command Input Parameters .............................................................868
Table 237: G.8032 ERPI Display Command Output Parameters ..........................................................868
Table 238: G.8032 Service Point Display Command Output Parameters.............................................870
Table 239: Defining Number of MSTIs CLI Parameters ........................................................................874
Table 240: BPDU Destination MAC Address CLI Parameters ...............................................................875
Table 241: MSTP Signal Degrade Failure CLI Parameters .....................................................................878
Table 242: MSTP Configuration ID CLI Parameters ..............................................................................879
Table 243: MSTP Service to MSTI Mapping CLI Parameters ................................................................880
Table 244: MSTP Bridge Level Spanning Tree CLI Parameters .............................................................881
Table 245: Bridge Level MSTI CLI Parameters ......................................................................................883
Table 246: CIST Port CLI Parameters ....................................................................................................888
Table 247: MSTI Port CLI Parameters ...................................................................................................890
Table 248: Port BPDU Counters CLI Parameters ..................................................................................893
Table 249: ABN Entity CLI Parameters .................................................................................................895
Table 250: ETH-BN Entity CLI Parameters ............................................................................................901
Table 251: General LLDP CLI Parameters .............................................................................................905
Table 252: LLDP Port CLI Parameters ...................................................................................................906
Table 253: LLDP Remote Unit CLI Parameters .....................................................................................913
Table 254: LLDP Remote Management Data Per Port CLI Parameters ................................................915
Table 255: SyncE Regenerator CLI Parameters ....................................................................................920
Table 256: Sync Source Ethernet CLI Parameters ................................................................................922
Table 257: Sync Source Radio CLI Parameters .....................................................................................924
Table 258: Outgoing Clock CLI Parameters ..........................................................................................925
Page 39 of 1094

Table 259: 1588 Transparent Clock CLI Parameters .............................................................................930

Table 260: Inactivity Timeout Period CLI Parameters ..........................................................................932
Table 261: Blocking Upon Login Failure CLI Parameters ......................................................................932
Table 262: Blocking Unused Accounts CLI Parameters ........................................................................933
Table 263: Password Aging CLI Parameters .........................................................................................934
Table 264: Password Strength Enforcement CLI Parameters ...............................................................934
Table 265: Force Password Change on First Time Login CLI Parameters .............................................935
Table 266: User Profile CLI Parameters ................................................................................................937
Table 267: User Profile Access Protocols CLI Parameters ....................................................................938
Table 268: User Accounts CLI Parameters ...........................................................................................939
Table 269: Activate RADIUS CLI Parameters ........................................................................................941
Table 270: Configure RADIUS Server CLI Parameters...........................................................................941
Table 271: TACACS+ CLI Parameters ....................................................................................................944
Table 272: CSR Generation and Upload CLI Parameters ......................................................................947
Table 273: Certificate Download and Install CLI Parameters ...............................................................948
Table 274: RSA Key Download and Install CLI Parameters ...................................................................953
Table 275: Security Log CLI Parameters ...............................................................................................955
Table 276: Configuration Log CLI Parameters ......................................................................................956
Table 277: Editing Alarm Text and Severity CLI Parameters ................................................................961
Table 278: Restoring Alarms to Default CLI Parameters ......................................................................962
Table 279: Uploading Unit Info CLI Parameters ...................................................................................967
Table 280: Radio Loopback CLI Parameters .........................................................................................970
Table 281: Ethernet Loopback CLI Parameters ....................................................................................971
Table 282: Maintenance Domain CLI Parameters ................................................................................974
Table 283: SOAM MEG CLI Configuration Parameters .........................................................................976
Table 284: MEP CLI Configuration Parameters ....................................................................................981
Table 285: MEP and Remote MEP Status Parameters (CLI) .................................................................983
Table 286: Loopback CLI Parameters ...................................................................................................987
Table 287: CW Mode CLI Parameters...................................................................................................989
Table 288: IP-20C Ethernet Traffic Ports- RJ-45/SFP Pinouts ...............................................................994
Table 289: IP-20C MGT/PROT Interface - RJ-45 Pinouts ......................................................................995
Table 290: IP-20C-HP Data Port 1 – Pinouts .........................................................................................998
Table 291: IP-20C-HP Management Interface - RJ-45 Pinouts .............................................................999
Table 292: IP-20S Eth1/PoE Interface- RJ-45/SFP Pinouts .................................................................1003
Table 293: IP-20S Eth2 Interface - RJ-45/SFP Pinouts ........................................................................1003
Table 294: IP-20S Eth3/EXP Interface - RJ-45/SFP Pinouts.................................................................1003
Table 295: IP-20S MGT/PROT Interface - RJ-45 Pinouts .....................................................................1004
Page 40 of 1094

Table 296: IP-20E Port Distribution Per Hardware Model .................................................................1007

Table 297: IP-20E Eth1/PoE Interface- RJ-45......................................................................................1011
Table 298: IP-20E MGT Interface - RJ-45/ Pinouts .............................................................................1011
Table 299: IP-20V MGT Interface - RJ-45/ Pinouts .............................................................................1017
Table 300: PoE Injector PoE Port - RJ-45 Pinouts ...............................................................................1021
Table 301: PoE Injector RJ-45 Data Port Supporting 10/100/1000Base-T .........................................1021
Table 302: Alarms ...............................................................................................................................1024
Table 303: Abbreviations ...................................................................................................................1088
Page 41 of 1094

Safety Precautions & Declared Material

General Equipment Precautions
Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those
! specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
When working with a FibeAir IDU, note the following risk of electric shock and
energy hazard: Disconnecting one power supply disconnects only one power
! supply module. To isolate the unit completely, disconnect all power sources.
Machine noise information order - 3. GPSGV, the highest sound pressure level
! amounts to 70 dB (A) or less, in accordance with ISO EN 7779.
Static electricity may cause body harm, as well as harm to electronic components
inside the device.
To prevent damage, before touching components inside the device, all
electrostatic charge must be discharged from both personnel and tools.
High Frequency Electromagnetic Fields!

Exposure to strong high frequency electromagnetic fields may cause thermal
damage to personnel. The eye (cornea and lens) is easily exposed.
Any unnecessary exposure is undesirable and should be avoided.
In radio-relay communication installations, ordinary setup for normal operation,
! the general RF radiation level will be well below the safety limit.
In the antennas and directly in front of them the RF intensity normally will exceed
the danger level, within limited portions of space.
Dangerous radiation may be found in the neighborhood of open waveguide
flanges or horns where the power is radiated into space.
To avoid dangerous radiation, the following precautions must be taken:
• During work within and close to the front of the antenna; make sure that
transmitters will remain turned off.
• Before opening coaxial - or waveguide connectors carrying RF power, turn
off transmitters.
• Consider any incidentally open RF connector as carrying power, until
otherwise proved. Do not look into coaxial connectors at closer than reading
distance (30 cm). Do not look into an open waveguide unless you are
absolutely sure that the power is turned off.
Page 42 of 1094

ESD
This equipment contains components which are sensitive to “ESD” (Electro Static
Discharge). Therefore, ESD protection measures must be observed when touching
the IDU.
Anyone responsible for the installation or maintenance of the FibeAir IDU must
use an ESD Wrist Strap.
Additional precautions include personnel grounding, grounding of work benches,
grounding of tools and instruments, as well as transport and storage in special
antistatic bags and boxes.
Laser
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
The optical interface must only be serviced by qualified personnel, who are aware
of the hazards involved to repair laser products.
When handling laser products, the following precautions must be taken:
• Never look directly into an open connector or optical cable.
• Before disconnecting an optical cable from the optical transmitter, the
power should be switched off. If this is not possible, the cable must be
disconnected from the transmitter before it is disconnected from the
receiver.
• When the cable is reconnected it must be connected to the receiver before
it is connected to the transmitter.
Special Requirements for North America

Grounding: This equipment is designed to permit connection between the
earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor at the
equipment.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
! interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Restricted Access Area: DC powered equipment should only be installed in a
Restricted Access Area.
Installation Codes: The equipment must be installed according to country national
electrical codes. For North America, equipment must be installed in accordance
Page 43 of 1094

with the US National Electrical Code, Articles 110-16, 110-17 and 110-18, and the
Canadian Electrical Code, Section 12.
Overcurrent Protection: A readily accessible listed branch circuit overcurrent
protective device, rated 15 A, must be incorporated in the building wiring.
Grounded Supply System: The equipment shall be connected to a properly
grounded supply system. All equipment in the immediate vicinity shall be
grounded the same way, and shall not be grounded elsewhere.
Local Supply System: The DC supply system is to be local, i.e. within the same
premises as the equipment.
Disconnect Device: A disconnect device is not allowed in the grounded circuit
between the DC supply source and the frame/grounded circuit connection.
Special Requirements for Norway and Sweden:

! Equipment connected to the protective earthing of the building installation
through the mains connection or through other equipment with a connection to
protective earthing – and to a cable distribution system using coaxial cable, may in
some circumstances create a fire hazard. Connection to a cable distribution
system has therefore to be provided through a device providing electrical isolation
below a certain frequency range (galvanic isolator, see EN 60728-11).
Utstyr som er koplet til beskyttelsesjord via nettplugg og/eller via annet
jordtilkoplet utstyr – og er tilkoplet et kabel-TV nett, kan forårsake brannfare. For
å unngå dette skal det ved tilkopling av utstyret til kabel-TV nettet installeres en
galvanisk isolator mellom utstyret og kabel- TV nettet.
Utrustning som är kopplad till skyddsjord via jordat vägguttag och/eller via annan
utrustning och samtidigt är kopplad till kabel-TV nät kan i vissa fall medfőra risk
főr brand. Főr att undvika detta skall vid anslutning av utrustningen till kabel-TV
nät galvanisk isolator finnas mellan utrustningen och kabel-TV nätet.
Page 44 of 1094

Précautions générales relatives à l'équipement

L’utilisation de commandes ou de réglages ou l'exécution de procédures autres
! que celles spécifiées dans les présentes peut engendrer une exposition
dangereuse aux rayonnements.
L’usage de FibeAir IDU s’accompagne du risque suivant d'électrocution et de

danger électrique : le débranchement d'une alimentation électrique ne
! déconnecte qu'un module d'alimentation électrique. Pour isoler complètement
l'unité, il faut débrancher toutes les alimentations électriques.
Bruit de machine d’ordre - 3. GPSGV, le plus haut niveau de pression sonore

! s'élève à 70 dB (A) au maximum, dans le respect de la norme ISO EN 7779.
Allgemeine Vorsichtsmaßnahmen für die Anlage

Wenn andere Steuerelemente verwendet, Einstellungen vorgenommen oder
! Verfahren durchgeführt werden als die hier angegebenen, kann dies gefährliche
Strahlung verursachen.
Beachten Sie beim Arbeiten mit FibeAir IDU das folgende Stromschlag- und
Gefahrenrisiko: Durch Abtrennen einer Stromquelle wird nur ein
! Stromversorgungsmodul abgetrennt. Um die Einheit vollständig zu isolieren,
trennen Sie alle Stromversorgungen ab.
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung - 3. GPSGV, der höchste

! Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
Page 45 of 1094

RoHS Compliance Declaration

Table 1: Electronic Information Products Declaration of Hazardous/Toxic Substances
Component Lead (Pb) Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Polybrominated Polybrominated
(Hg) (Cd) Chromium Biphenyls (PBB) Diphenyl Ethers
(Cr VI) (PBDE)
PCB/Circuit Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply

Modules
Mechanical Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply
Parts
Cables Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply
Page 46 of 1094

About This Guide

This document explains how to configure and operate FibeAir IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, IP-20S, IP-
20E, and IP-20V units.
Note The term IP-20 in this document refers to all of these products: IP-20C,
IP-20C-HP, IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V.
The IP-20 is a modular product with a wide variety of configuration options. Not all
configurations are described in this manual.
This document applies to CeraOS version 11.3.
What You Should Know

Some features described in this manual may not be available in the current release. Please
consult the Release Notes for the functionality supported in the specific release you are
using.
Target Audience
This manual is intended for use by individuals responsible for configuration and
administration of an IP-20 system or network.
Related Documents
• FibeAir IP-20C Technical Description
• FibeAir IP-20C Installation Guide
• FibeAir IP-20C-HP Technical Description
• FibeAir IP-20C-HP Installation Guide
• FibeAir IP-20S Technical Description
• FibeAir IP-20S Installation Guide
• FibeAir IP-20E Technical Description
• FibeAir IP-20E Installation Guide
• FibeAir IP-20V Technical Description
• FibeAir IP-20V Installation Guide
• FibeAir IP-20 Series MIB Reference
• Release Notes for FibeAir IP-20 All-Outdoor Products, CeraOS 11.3
Page 47 of 1094

Section I:
Introduction
Page 48 of 1094

1. Introduction
This section includes:
• Configuration Tips
• IP-20C Overview
• IP-20C-HP Overview
• IP-20S Overview
• IP-20E Overview
• IP-20V Overview
• PoE Injector Overview
• FibeAir IP-20 Assured Platform
• The Web-Based Element Management System
This user manual provides instructions for configuring and operating the following
products:
• IP-20C
• IP-20C-HP
• IP-20S
• IP-20E
• IP-20V
Each of these products except IP-20C-HP can be used with a Ceragon-approved
PoE Injector.
Wherever applicable, the manual notes the specific distinctions between these
products. The manual also notes when specific features are only applicable to
certain products and not others.
Page 49 of 1094

1.1 Configuration Tips

This section describes common issues and how to avoid them.
 Ethernet Port Configuration
The Ethernet ports of a FibeAir IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V
are not enabled by default in a new unit. You must manually enable the
Ethernet port or ports in order for the unit to process Ethernet traffic. See
Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager).
For RJ-45 ports, it is recommended to enable Auto-Negotiation for both the
local port and its peer in order to obtain optimal performance.
For SFP ports, it is recommended to disable Auto-Negotiation.
For instructions, see Configuring Ethernet Interfaces.
 SyncE Interface Configuration
When configuring a Sync source or outgoing clock on an Ethernet interface,
the Media Type of the interface must be RJ-45 or SFP, not Auto-Type. See
Synchronization.
 In-Band Management
 It is strongly recommended not to configure ASP on an Ethernet interface that
carries in-band management traffic. If you do need to use ASP on this
interface, it is recommended to use it in ASP Management Safe (CSF) mode to
avoid loss of management in the event that ASP is triggered. See Configuring
Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss Forwarding.
 When inband management is being transmitted via a LAG configuration, it is
recommended to enable LACP to overcome uni-directional failures. See
Configuring a LAG Group.
 If you are using 1588 Transparent Clock, make sure the Transparent Clock
settings are symmetrical; that is, make sure Transparent Clock is either
enabled or disabled on both sides of the link. To avoid loss of management,
make sure to configure Transparent Clock on the remote side of the link first,
then on the local side. See Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock.
 To avoid loss of management when configuring Multi-Carrier ABC, make sure
to add or remove members on the remote side of the link first, then on the
local side. See Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC.
In order to use in-band management with an external switch, it must be
supported on the external switch.
When configuring in-band management, be sure to tag the management
traffic to avoid overflow of the CPU.
It is strongly recommended to assign the management service (1025) a CoS
of 7 to ensure that management packets receive high priority and are not
discarded in instances of network congestion. See Configuring Ethernet
Service(s).
For instructions on configuring in-band management on the IP-20, see
Configuring In-Band Management.
Page 50 of 1094

 Link Aggregation (LAG)

If you are configuring LAG with an external switch, the switch must support
LAG. For instructions on configuring LAG, see Configuring Link Aggregation
(LAG) and LACP.
When using IEEE 1588 PTP synchronization across a LAG link, follow the
recommendations set forth in ITU-T standard G.8275.1, Annex 6 in order to
prevent PTP packets from following different paths between the devices,
which can lead to asymmetric delay. For instructions on configuring LAG, see
Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP.
 Software Upgrade
When upgrading software via HTTP, make sure the software package is not
unzipped. For instructions, see Upgrading the Software.
 Configuration Management and Backup Restoration
Configuration files can only be copied to the same IP-20 hardware type with
the same part number as the unit from which they were originally saved. For
example, an IP-20C configuration file can only be restored to an IP-20C with
the same part number as the unit from which it was saved.
 4x4 MIMO and 2+2 Space Diversity
For IP-20C 2E2SX hardware models, if you try to apply a 4x4 MIMO or 2+2
Space Diversity configuration while P4 is assigned one or more service points,
ASP or LLF instances, or a LAG group or Sync source is configured on P4, the
configuration will fail and an error message will be generated. Also, the Admin
status of the port must be set to Down before applying the 4x4 MIMO or 2+2
Space Diversity configuration. See Enabling the Interfaces (Interface
Manager).
Page 51 of 1094

1.2 IP-20C Overview

IP-20C represents a new generation of radio technology, capable of high bit rates
and longer reach, and suitable for more diverse deployment scenarios. IP-20C is a
dual-core, compact, all-outdoor backhaul Ethernet product that combines radio,
baseband, and Carrier Ethernet functionality in a single, durable box for outdoor
installations.
IP-20C offers the convenience of an easy installation procedure, and full
compatibility with RFU-C antennas. It is designed for use in network
configurations which require high capacity solutions. IP-20C covers the entire
licensed frequency spectrum (6-42GHz) and offers a wide capacity range,
including Header De-Duplication.
IP-20C is available in several hardware models:
• IP-20C ESS – Includes one RJ-45 port and two SFP ports for Ethernet traffic.
• IP-20C ESX – Includes one RJ-45 port and one SFP port for Ethernet traffic, and
an SFP+ port for use as an Extension port with 4x4 MIMO and 2+2 Space
Diversity configurations.
• IP-20C 2E2SX – Includes two RJ-45 traffic ports in a single gland, as well as two
SFP ports, for a total of up to four available traffic ports. In 4x4 MIMO and 2+2
Space Diversity configurations, one of the SFP ports (P4) is automatically
configured to operate as an Extension port.
Note: IP-20C 2E2SX requires CeraOS 10.5.5 or higher.
For a more detailed description of the IP-20C port layout options, see IP-20C
Connector Pin-outs.
1.3 IP-20C-HP Overview

IP-20C-HP is a high-power version of FibeAir IP-20C, operating in the 4-11 GHz
bands and providing TX power of up to 35 dBm. Together, IP-20C and IP-20C-HP
represent a new generation of radio technology, capable of high bit rates and
longer reach, and suitable for diverse deployment scenarios.
IP-20C-HP provides the same basic feature set as IP-20C, including unique
MultiCore features such as 4x4 MIMO, ASD, and AFR.
In addition, IP-20C-HP uses field-replaceable diplexer units. An IP-20C-HP can be
ordered in two parts: A generic radio unit and a diplexer unit. The generic radio
unit covers an entire frequency band. It is the diplexer unit, which is passive, that
determines the sub-band coverage for the entire integrated IP-20C-HP unit. This
provides operators with major benefits in terms of both maintenance and
deployment time.
For maintenance, the operator can reduce the number of spare radio units in its
inventory because a single generic radio unit can be used for any sub-band. This
means that for a site covering four channel ranges within a single frequency band,
a single spare radio unit can be kept on hand, because that unit can be used as a
spare for any of the IP-20C-HP nodes in the site. The diplexer units, because they
are passive, are much less likely to require replacement, so the maintenance of
spare parts for the diplexer units is much less of a concern for the operator.
Page 52 of 1094

The use of separate generic radio units and diplexer units also enables operators
to achieve a quicker system deployment time. In the planning stage, when the
frequency bands have been determined but the exact sub-band layout is still
under consideration, operators can already order all the radio units required for
the frequency bands that have been determined, and can begin ordering diplexer
units for the approximate sub-bands that are anticipated, while still determining
the exact network parameters. This enables faster delivery and deployment of the
network.
1.4 IP-20S Overview

IP-20S is an all-outdoor solution for backhaul sites. It runs under CeraOS, the high-
performance, internetworking operating system, and supports all common
features of the IP-20 platform in a compact, environmentally friendly architecture.
IP-20S supports cutting edge capacity-boosting techniques, such as QPSK to 2048
QAM and Header De-Duplication, to offer a high capacity solution for every
network topology and every site configuration. Its green, compact, all-outdoor
configuration makes IP-20S ideal for any location.
IP-20S includes one RJ-45 port and two SFP ports for Ethernet traffic.
1.5 IP-20E Overview

IP-20E is a compact and versatile high capacity backhaul Ethernet system which
operates in the E-band (70-80 GHz). Its light weight and small footprint make it
versatile for many different applications. Thanks to its small footprint, low power
consumption, and simple installation, IP-20E can be installed in many different
types of remote outdoor locations.
IP-20E R2 offers ACM, with a modulation BPSK (2 QAM) through 1024 QAM. IP-
20E supports a diverse set of features that is optimally suited for macro–to–macro
site connectivity. It is equally well suited to be used as a high capacity aggregation
link connecting an array of small cells or BTS sites to a macro site.
All references to IP-20E in this document refer to IP-20E hardware release 2, high-
power (R2H). There are several hardware options for IP-20E R2H, with variations
in interface layout and capacity. For a full description of these options, refer to the
Technical Description for FibeAir IP-20E.
For purposes of this document, when it is necessary to distinguish between
different IP-20E R2H hardware models, the following terms are used:
• IP-20E R2H ESP – Includes all IP-20E R2 models that support a 10G interface
and include ESP in their marketing models.
• IP-20E R2H – All other IP-20E R2H models.
Note: For instructions on using IP-20E hardware release 1 (R1), refer to the
FibeAir IP-20C, IP-20S, and IP-20E User Guide Rev E, for CeraOS 8.2, or
earlier versions.
Page 53 of 1094

1.6 IP-20V Overview

IP-20V uses a compact hardware form factor that is similar to IP-20E, and
operates in the V-band (57-66 GHz). As with IP-20E, the light weight and small
footprint of IP-20V make it versatile for many different applications. Thanks to its
small footprint, low power consumption, and simple installation, IP-20V can be
installed in many different types of remote outdoor locations.
IP-20V operates over 50 – 500 MHz channels to deliver up to 2.5 Gbps of Ethernet
throughput in several system configurations.
• 50 MHz – BPSK to 128 QAM
IP-20V runs the same CeraOS software as the rest of the FibeAir IP-20 platform,
enabling it to provide the same Ethernet services model and other advanced
radio, Ethernet, and management features as IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, IP-20S, IP-20E,
and IP-20V.
A single hardware version is available for IP-20V, covering the entire V-band
spectrum.
1.7 PoE Injector Overview

The PoE injector box is designed to offer a single cable solution for connecting
both data and the DC power supply to the IP-20C, IP-20S, IP-20E, or IP-20V unit.
To do so, the PoE injector combines 48VDC input and GbE signals via a standard
CAT5E cable using a proprietary Ceragon design.
The PoE injector can be ordered with a DC feed protection and with +24VDC
support, as well as EMC surge protection for both indoor and outdoor installation
options. It can be mounted on poles, walls, or inside racks.
Note: An AC-power PoE Injector option is also available. Contact your
Ceragon representative for details.
Page 54 of 1094

1.8 FibeAir IP-20 Assured Platform

Ceragon’s FibeAir® IP-20 Assured platform enhances network reliability and
security, ensuring that mission-critical networks maintain availability, and
protecting the confidentiality and integrity of their users’ data.
The FibeAir IP-20 Assured platform is compliant with FIPS 140-2, including:
• Compliance with FIPS 140-2 specifications for cryptography module.
• FIPS 140-2 Level 2 physical security.
• AES-256 encryption (FIPS 197) over radio links.
The FibeAir IP-20 Assured platform also provides:
• Secured communication and protocols for management interface.
• Centralized user authentication management via RADIUS.
• Advanced identity management and password policy enforcement.
• Security events log.
• Secure product architecture and development.
The following products are included in the FibeAir IP-20 Assured platform:
• FibeAir IP-20C Assured
• FibeAir IP-20C-HP Assured
• FibeAir IP-20S Assured
Note: CeraOS 11.3 cannot be used in FibeAir IP-20 Assured platforms. For
FibeAir IP-20 Assured, use CeraOS 10.9.6. CeraOS 8.3 can also be used
with FibeAir IP-20 Assured.
Page 55 of 1094

1.9 The Web-Based Element Management System

• Introduction to the Web EMS
• Web EMS Page Layout
• The Unit Summary Page
• The Radio Summary Page
• The Security Summary Page
1.9.1 Introduction to the Web EMS

The Element Management System (Web EMS) is an HTTP web-based element
manager that enables the operator to perform configuration operations and
obtain statistical and performance information related to the system, including:
• Configuration Management – Enables you to view and define configuration
data.
• Fault Monitoring – Enables you to view active alarms.
• Performance Monitoring – Enables you to view and clear performance
monitoring values and counters.
• Diagnostics and Maintenance – Enables you to define and perform loop back
tests and software updates.
• Security Configuration – Enables you to configure security features.
• User Management – Enables you to define users and user groups.
The Web EMS opens to a page that summarizes the key unit parameters. The next
page, when scrolling down the Web EMS main menu, summarizes the key radio
parameters. Next is a page that summarizes the key security-related parameters
of the unit. See The Unit Summary Page, The Radio Summary Page, and The
Security Summary Page.
A Web-Based EMS connection to the unit can be opened using a Web browser
(Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, or Google Chrome). The Web-Based EMS uses
a graphical interface.
Note: For optimal Web EMS performance, it is recommended to ensure that
the network speed is at least 100 Kbps for most operations, and at
least 5 Mbps for software download operations.
The Web-Based EMS shows the actual unit configuration and provides easy access
to any interface. A wide range of configuration, testing, and system monitoring
tasks can be performed through the Web EMS.
Note! The alarms and system configuration details shown in this manual do
not necessarily represent actual parameters and values on a fully
operating IP-20 system. Some of the pages and tasks described in this
Manual may not be available to all users, based on the actual system
configuration, activation key, and other details.
Page 56 of 1094

1.9.2 Web EMS Page Layout

Each Web EMS page includes the following sections:
• The left section of the page displays the Web EMS menu tree:
◦ Click to display the sub-options under a menu item.

◦ Click to hide the sub-options under a menu item.
• The main section of the page provides the page's basic functionality.
Figure 1: Main Web EMS Page
Page 57 of 1094

1.9.2.1 Front Panel Representation

Optionally, you can display a representation of the IP-20 front panel by clicking
either the arrow in the center or the arrow at the right of the bottom toolbar.
Figure 2: Displaying a Representation of the Front Panel
Figure 3: Main Web EMS Page with Representation of Front Panel – IP-20C and IP-20S
Figure 4: Main Web EMS Page with Representation of Front Panel – IP-20C-HP
Page 58 of 1094

Figure 5: Main Web EMS Page with Representation of Front Panel – IP-20E
Figure 6: Main Web EMS Page with Representation of Front Panel – IP-20V
Page 59 of 1094

1.9.2.2 Active and Standby Tabs

When HSB radio protection is enabled, two tabs appear on the top of the main
section. These tabs are labeled Active and Standby and enable you to configure
the Active and Standby units separately if necessary. The title above the main
section indicates whether you are working with the Active or Standby TCC. For
details on configuring HSB radio protection, see Configuring Unit Protection with
HSB Radio Protection (External Protection).
Note: HSB protection is only available for IP-20C and IP-20S.
Figure 7: Main Web EMS Page with Active and Standby Tabs
Page 60 of 1094

1.9.2.3 Related Pages Drop-Down List

Certain pages include a Related Pages drop-down list on the upper right of the
main section of the page. You can navigate to a page related to the current page
by selecting the page from this list.
Figure 8: Related Pages Drop-Down List
1.9.3 The Unit Summary Page

The Unit Summary page is the first page that appears when you log into the Web
EMS. It gathers the unit parameters, current alarms, and unit inventory
information on a single page for quick viewing.
Figure 9: Unit Radio Summary Page

The Unit Summary page includes:
• Unit Parameters – Basic unit parameters such as the current software version,
unit temperature, and voltage input level. For additional information, see
Configuring Unit Parameters.
• Current Alarms – All alarms currently raised on the unit. For additional
information, see Viewing Current Alarms.
The Unit Summary page can be customized to include only specific columns and
tables. This enables you to hide information you do not need in order to focus on
the information that is most relevant.
To hide a specific section of the Unit Summary page, click the section title. To
display a section that has been hidden, click the section title again.
To customize which columns appear in a section, click next to the section title. A
list of columns is displayed. Select only the columns you want to display and click
again.
Page 61 of 1094

Note: When one or more columns are hidden, the icon turns white ( ).
Figure 10: Unit Summary Page – Customizing Columns
1.9.4 The Radio Summary Page

The Radio Summary page gathers the key link and radio parameters on a single
page for quick viewing. To display the Radio Summary page, select Radio
Summary from the Web EMS main menu.
Figure 11: Radio Summary Page

The Radio Summary page includes:
• Link Status – Link status per radio carrier, including whether or not the link is
Up, groups to which the link is assigned (such as LAG, XPIC, protection, and/or
Multi-Carrier ABC), and the IP address (both IPv4 and IPv6) of the remote
carrier. For additional information, see Configuring the Radio Parameters.
• Radio Information – The TX and RX frequencies, frequency separation, and
channel bandwidth on which the link is operating. For additional information,
see Configuring the Radio Parameters.
• Remote Radio Parameters – Key information about the status of the remote
carrier. For additional information, see Configuring the Remote Radio
Parameters.
• Radio Transmitter – Mute status, maximum and operational TX level,
modulation, and bit rate. For additional information, see Configuring the
Radio Parameters.
Page 62 of 1094

• Radio Receiver – Receiver PMs and statistics, including defective blocks,

modem MSE, and RX level, modulation, and bit rate. For additional
information, see Configuring the Radio Parameters and Configuring the Radio
(MRMC) Script(s).
The Radio Summary page can be customized to include only specific columns and
tables. This enables you to hide information you do not need in order to focus on
the information that is most relevant.
To hide a specific section of the Radio Summary page, click the section title. To
To customize which columns appear in a section, click next to the section title. A
list of columns is displayed. Select only the columns you want to display and click
again.
Figure 12: Radio Summary Page – Customizing Columns
Page 63 of 1094

1.9.5 The Security Summary Page

The Security Summary page gathers a number of important security-related
parameters on a single page for quick viewing. To display the Security Summary
page, select Security Summary from the Web EMS main menu.
Figure 13: Security Summary Page
Page 64 of 1094

If FIPS mode is enabled, a yellow Warning icon may appear next to certain items.
These items indicate fields for which the current security settings are not
appropriate for FIPS mode. Hover over an item to display a tooltip explaining the
warning.
Figure 14: Security Summary Page – FIPS Security Warnings

The Security Summary page includes:
• General Parameters – Includes the following fields:
◦ FIPS Mode Admin – See Operating in FIPS Mode.
◦ Session Timeout (Minutes) – See Configuring the Session Timeout.
◦ Login Banner Text – See Defining a Login Banner.
• Radio Payload Encryption – For each radio interface, displays whether AES-
256 payload encryption is enabled and its validation state.
For radio interfaces on which AES-256 payload encryption is enabled, you can
display the master key by hovering the mouse over the icon to the right of the
Master Key field.
For additional information, see Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption.

• Ports & Protocols – Displays information about the current configuration of
the following protocols used for communicating with the device:
◦ HTTP – See Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates .
◦ Telnet – See Blocking Telnet Access.
◦ SNMP – See Configuring SNMP.
• SNMP V3 Users – Displays a list of SNMP V3 users configured on the device.
For additional information, see Configuring SNMP.
• Login & Password Management – Displays login and password security
parameters configured on the device. See Configuring the General Access
Control Parameters and Configuring the Password Security Parameters.
• User Accounts – Displays a list of users configured for the device and their
parameters. See Configuring Users.
• RSA Key – Displays the public RSA key currently configured on the device. See
Downloading and Installing an RSA Key.
Page 65 of 1094

The Security Summary page can be customized to include only specific columns
and tables. This enables you to hide information you do not need in order to focus
on the information that is most relevant.
To hide a specific section of the Radio Summary page, click the section title. To
To customize which columns appear in a section, click next to the section title. A list
of columns is displayed. Select only the columns you want to display and click again.
Figure 15: Security Summary Page – Customizing Columns
Page 66 of 1094

1.10 Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure

The following table shows the Web EMS menu hierarchy, with links to the sections
in this document that provide instructions for the relevant menu item.
Note: Some menu items are only available if the relevant activation key or
feature is enabled.
Table 2: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Platform Menu

Sub-Menus For Further Information
Shelf Management > Chassis Configuration Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset

Setting the Unit to the Factory Default
Configuration
Shelf Management > Unit Redundancy Configuring Unit Protection with HSB Radio
Protection
Interfaces > Interface Manager Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager)
Interfaces > SFP Displaying SFP DDM and Inventory Information
Interfaces > Traffic over Management IP-20E and IP-20V Management Interface
Management > Unit Parameters Configuring Unit Parameters
Management > NTP Configuration Configuring NTP
Management > Time Services Setting the Time and Date (Optional)
Management > Inventory Displaying Unit Inventory
Management > Unit Info Uploading Unit Info
Management > Login Banner Defining a Login Banner
Management > Networking > Local Changing the Management IP Address
Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating
Communications
Management > Networking > Remote Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address
Management > SNMP > SNMP Parameters Configuring SNMP
Management > SNMP > Trap Managers Configuring Trap Managers
Management > SNMP > V3 Users Configuring SNMP
Software > Versions Viewing Current Software Versions
Software > Download & Install Downloading and Installing Software
Configuring a Timed Installation
Configuration > Timer Parameters Reserved for future use.
Configuration > Backup Files Viewing Current Backup Files
Configuration > Configuration Management Backing Up and Restoring Configurations
Activation Key > Activation Key Configuration Configuring the Activation Key
Activation Key > Activation Key Overview Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled
Features
Page 67 of 1094


Security > General > Configuration Operating in FIPS Mode
Security > General > Security Log Upload Uploading the Security Log
Security > General > Configuration Log Upload Uploading the Configuration Log
Security > X.509 Certificate > CSR Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates
Security > X.509 Certificate > Download & Install Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates
Security > Access Control > General Configuring the General Access Control
Parameters
Security > Access Control > User Profiles Configuring User Profiles
Security > Access Control > User Accounts Configuring Users
Security > Access Control > Password Configuring the Password Security Parameters
Management
Security > Access Control > Change Password Changing Your Password
Security > Access Control > Remote Access Control Configuring RADIUS
> Configuration Configuring TACACS+
Security > Access Control > Remote Access Control Viewing Remote Access User Connectivity and
> Users Permissions
Security > RSA Key Downloading and Installing an RSA Key
Security > Protocols Control Configuring the Session Timeout
Enabling HTTPS
Blocking Telnet Access
PM & Statistics > SFP Displaying SFP DDM and Inventory Information
PM & Statistics > Voltage Configuring Voltage Alarm Thresholds and

Displaying Voltage PMs
Table 3: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Faults Menu

Current alarms Viewing Current Alarms

Alarm Statistics Viewing Alarm Statistics
Event Log Viewing and Saving the Event Log
Alarm Configuration Editing Alarm Text and Severity and Disabling
Alarms and Events
Voltage Alarm Configuration Configuring Voltage Alarm Thresholds
Page 68 of 1094

Table 4: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Radio Menu

Radio Parameters Configuring the Radio Parameters

Remote Radio Parameters Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters
Radio BER Thresholds Configuring BER Thresholds and Displaying
Current BER
ATPC Configuring ATPC and ATPC Override Timer
Payload Encryption Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption
Ethernet Interface > Configuration Configuring Header De-Duplication and Frame
Cut-Through
Ethernet Interface > Counters Viewing Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-
Through Counters
MRMC > Symmetrical Scripts > ETSI Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s)
MRMC > Symmetrical Scripts > FCC Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s)
MRMC > MRMC Status Displaying MRMC Status
PM & Statistics > Counters Displaying and Clearing Defective Block
Counters
PM & Statistics > Signal Level Displaying Signal Level PMs
PM & Statistics > Diversity Not relevant for these products
PM & Statistics > Combined Not relevant for these products
PM & Statistics > Aggregate Displaying Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs
PM & Statistics > MSE Displaying MSE PMs
PM & Statistics > XPI Displaying XPI PMs and Configuring XPI PM
Thresholds
PM & Statistics > MRMC Displaying MRMC PMs and Configuring ACM
Profile Thresholds
PM & Statistics > Traffic > Capacity/Throughput Displaying Capacity and Throughput PMs
PM & Statistics > Traffic > Utilization Displaying Utilization PMs and Configuring
Utilization Thresholds
PM & Statistics > Traffic > Frame error rate Displaying Frame Error Rate PMs
Diagnostics > Loopback Performing Radio Loopback
Groups > XPIC Configuring XPIC
Groups > Multi Carrier ABC Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC
Configuring Multiband
Groups > Diversity Configuring a 2x2 MIMO Link
Configuring a 1+0 or 2+0 Space Diversity Link
Page 69 of 1094


Groups > AMCC Configuring a 4x4 MIMO Link
Configuring Advanced Space Diversity (ASD)
Configuring Advanced Frequency Reuse (AFR)
Table 5: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Ethernet Menu

General Configuration Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype
Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP instances
(MSTIs)
Services Configuring Ethernet Service(s)
Interfaces > Physical Interfaces Configuring Ethernet Interfaces
Interfaces > Logical Interfaces Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a
Logical Interface
Assigning Policers to Interfaces
Configuring the Ingress and Egress Byte
Compensation
Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues
Assigning a Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue
Assigning a Service Bundle Shaper Profile to a
Service Bundle
Assigning a Priority Profile to an Interface
Assigning a WFQ Profile to an Interface
Performing Ethernet Loopback
Interfaces > ASP & LLF Configuring Automatic State Propagation and
Link Loss Forwarding
PM & Statistics > RMON RMON Statistics
PM & Statistics > Port TX Port TX Statistics
PM & Statistics > Port RX Port RX Statistics
PM & Statistics > Egress CoS Statistics Egress CoS Statistics
PM & Statistics > Egress CoS PM > Configuration Configuring and Displaying Queue-Level PMs
PM & Statistics > Egress CoS PM > Egress CoS PM Configuring and Displaying Queue-Level PMs
QoS > Classification > 802.1Q Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1Q UP and CFI Bit
Classification Table
QoS > Classification > 802.1AD Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit
Classification Table
QoS > Classification > DSCP Modifying the DSCP Classification Table
QoS > Classification > MPLS Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table
QoS > Classification > MAC DA Modifying the MAC DA Classification Table
QoS > Policer > Policer Profile Configuring Policer Profiles
Page 70 of 1094


QoS > Marking > 802.1Q Modifying the 802.1Q Marking Table
QoS > Marking > 802.1AD Modifying the 802.1AD Marking Table
QoS > WRED > WRED Profile Configuring WRED
QoS > Shaper > Queue Profiles Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles
QoS > Shaper > Service Bundle Profiles Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles
QoS > Scheduler > Priority Profiles Configuring Priority Profiles
QoS > Scheduler > WFQ Profiles Configuring WFQ Profiles
Protocols > Bandwidth Notification Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification
(ABN)
Configuring Ethernet Bandwidth Notification
(ETH-BN)
Configuring Multiband
Protocols > G.8032 > General Attribute Configuring the Destination MAC Address
Protocols > G.8032 > ERPI Attribute Adding ERPIs through Viewing ERPI Statistics
Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > General Attributes Enabling MSTP and Configuring the MSTP
Bridge General Attributes
Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > Configuration ID Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge
Configuration ID
Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > Spanning Tree Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge
Spanning Tree
Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > CIST Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge CIST
Parameters
Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > MSTI Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge MSTI
Parameters
Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > VLAN Viewing the MSTP VLAN Parameters
Protocols > MSTP > Port > Spanning Tree Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Port
Spanning Tree
Protocols > MSTP > Port > CIST Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Port CIST
Parameters
Protocols > MSTP > Port > MSTI Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Port MSTI
Parameters
Protocols > MSTP > Port > BPDU Counters Viewing and Resetting the BPDU Counters
Protocols > LLDP > Remote Management Displaying Peer Status
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Configuring the General LLDP Parameters
Parameters
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Configuring the LLDP Port Parameters
Port Configuration
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Displaying the Unit’s Management Parameters
Destination Address
Page 71 of 1094


Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Displaying the Unit’s Management Parameters
Management TLV
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Remote System > Displaying Peer Unit’s Management Parameters
Management
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Remote System > Displaying Peer Unit’s Management Parameters
Remote Table
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Local System > Displaying the Local Unit’s Parameters
Parameters
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Local System > Port Displaying the Local Unit’s Parameters
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Local System > Displaying the Local Unit’s Parameters
Management
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > General Displaying LLDP Statistics
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > Port TX Displaying LLDP Statistics
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > Port RX Displaying LLDP Statistics
Protocols > SOAM > MD Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault
Management (FM)
Protocols > SOAM > MA/MEG Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault
Management (FM)
Protocols > SOAM > MEP Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault
Management (FM)
Protocols > LACP > Aggregation Displaying LACP Aggregation Status Parameters
Protocols > LACP > Port > Status Displaying LACP Port Status Parameters
Protocols > LACP > Port > Statistics Displaying LACP Port Statistics
Protocols > LACP > Port > Debug Displaying LACP Port Debug Statistics
Interfaces > Groups > LAG Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP
Table 6: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Sync Menu

SyncE Regenerator Configuring SyncE Regenerator

Sync Source Configuring the Sync Source
Outgoing Clock Configuring the Outgoing Clock and SSM
Messages
1588 > General Configuration Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock
1588 > Transparent Clock Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock
Page 72 of 1094


1588 > Boundary Clock > Clock Parameters > Reserved for future use.
Default
1588 > Boundary Clock > Clock Parameters > Reserved for future use.
Advanced
1588 > Boundary Clock > Port Parameters Reserved for future use.
1588 > Boundary Clock > Port Statistics Reserved for future use.
Table 7: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Quick Configuration Menu

From CeraPlan Applying a Pre-Defined Configuration File

Platform Setup Performing Quick Platform Setup
Security > General Parameters Quick Security Configuration – General
Parameters Page
Security > Protocols Quick Security Configuration – Protocols Page
Security > Access Control Quick Security Configuration – Access Control
Page
Security > RSA Key & Certificate Quick Security Configuration – RSA Key &
Certificate Page
PIPE > Single Carrier > 1+0 Configuring a 1+0 Link Using the Quick
Configuration Wizard
PIPE > Single Carrier > 1+0 (Repeater) Configuring a 1+0 (Repeater) Link Using the
Quick Configuration Wizard
PIPE > Single Carrier > 2 X (1 + 0) Configuring a 2 x (1+0) Link Using the Quick
Configuration Wizard
PIPE > Multi Carrier ABC > 2 + 0 Configuring a 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC Link Using
the Quick Configuration Wizard
PIPE > Multi Carrier ABC > Multiband Configuring a Multiband (Enhanced Multi-
Carrier ABC) Link Using the Quick Configuration
Wizard
Table 8: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Utilities Menu

Restart HTTP Restarting the HTTP Server

ifIndex Calculator Calculating an ifIndex
MIB Reference Guide Displaying, Searching, and Saving a list of MIB
Entities
Page 73 of 1094

Section II:
Web EMS Configuration
Page 74 of 1094

2. Getting Started
• Assigning IP Addresses in the Network
• Establishing a Connection
• Logging on
• Changing Your Password
• Applying a Pre-Defined Configuration File
• Performing Quick Platform Setup
• Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding)
• Configuring In-Band Management
• Changing the Management IP Address
• Configuring the Activation Key
• Setting the Time and Date (Optional)
• Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager)
• Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s)
• Running the Frequency Scanner (IP-20E and IP-20V)
• Configuring the Radio Parameters
• Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power
• Operating in FIPS Mode
• Configuring Grouping (Optional)
• Creating Service(s) for Traffic
2.1 Assigning IP Addresses in the Network

Before connection over the radio hop is established, it is of high importance that
you assign the IP-20 unit a dedicated IP address, according to an IP plan for the
total network. See Changing the Management IP Address.
By default, a new IP-20 unit has the following IP settings:
• IP address: 192.168.1.1
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Warning! If the connection over the link is established with identical IP
addresses, an IP address conflict will occur and the remote connection
may be lost.
2.2 Establishing a Connection

Connect the IP-20 unit to a PC by means of a TP cable. The cable is connected to
the MGT port on the IP-20 and to the LAN port on the PC. Refer to the Installation
Guide for the type of unit you are connecting for cable connection instructions.
Page 75 of 1094

2.2.1 PC Setup
To obtain contact between the PC and the IP-20 unit, it is necessary to configure
an IP address on the PC within the same subnet as the IP-20 unit. The default IP-
20 IP address is 192.168.1.1. Set the PC address to e.g. 192.168.1.10 and subnet
mask to 255.255.255.0. Note the initial settings before changing.
Note: The IP-20 IP address, as well as the password, should be changed
before operating the system. See Changing the Management IP
Address and Changing Your Password.
1 Select Control Panel > All Control Panel Items > Network and Sharing Center.
2 Click Change the adapter settings.
3 Select Local Area Connection > Properties > Internet Protocol Version 4
(TCP/IP), and set the following parameters:
◦ IP address: 192.168.1.10
◦ Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
◦ No default gateway
4 Click OK to apply the settings.
Figure 16: Internet Protocol Properties Window
Page 76 of 1094

2.3 Logging on
1 Open an Internet browser (Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox).
2 Enter the default IP address “192.168.1.1” in the Address Bar. The Login page
opens.
Figure 17: Login Page

3 In the Login window, enter the following:
◦ User Name: admin
◦ Password: admin
4 Click Apply.
2.3.1 Logging in Without Knowing the IP Address

If the unit's IP address has been changed from its default of 192.168.1.1, and you
do not know the new IP address, you can log into the unit by establishing a
connection directly to the CPU. This requires a Ceragon Networks proprietary
Ethernet cable. This cable should be ordered from Ceragon Networks, according
to the following table.
Table 9: Cables for Direct CPU Connection

Product Cable Marketing Model Cable Description
IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP- IP-20_MIMO_Prot_ mng_spltr CABLE,RJ45M TO 2xRJ45F, 1.0M,

20S WITH GLANDS, UV PROTECTED
IP-20E R2H IP-20_Mini-MNG-CBL CABLE,MiniDP TO RJ45F,0.2M,FOR
FIELD DEBUG
IP-20E R2H ESP and IP-20V IP-20_Mini-MNG-CBL_ESP CABLE,MiniDP TO RJ45F,0.2M,FOR
FIELD DEBUG. ESP
Page 77 of 1094

For IP-20E R2H, as an alternative to the proprietary cable described above, you
can use a cable with the following pinouts:
P1 WIRE P2
2 3
TWISTED PAIR 1
8 6
14 1
TWISTED PAIR 2
20 2
SHELL SHIELD SHELL
For IP-20E ESP and IP-20V, as an alternative to the proprietary cable described
above, you can use a cable with the following pinouts:
P1 WIRE P2
14 3
TWISTED PAIR 1
16 6
18 1
TWISTED PAIR 2
20 2
SHELL SHIELD SHELL
To log in using this cable:

1 The IP address of the CPU is 192.0.2.1. To connect, set up a new Local Area
Connection with an IP address as follows:
◦ IP address: 192.0.2.3
◦ Subnet mask 255.255.255.240
◦ No default gateway
Note: In the event that you fail to connect using 192.0.2.1, use 192.0.2.2
instead.
Page 78 of 1094

2 Connect the single end of the cable to:

◦ IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S: The MGT port on the IP-20 unit.
◦ IP-20E and IP-20V: The EXT port on the IP-20 unit.
3 Connect Channel 2 of the cable to the LAN port on the PC.
4 Verify that the MGT port LED is orange. (When a connection is established
using Channel 1 of the cable, the LED on the MGT port is green.)
Note: For IP-20E, there is no LED to indicate whether the connection has
been established.
5 The system will prompt you for a user name and password (see Figure 17).
6 Enter the user name and password. The default user name and password are:
◦ User Name: admin
◦ Password: admin
7 Click Apply.
8 After a connection is established, you can view or configure the unit's IP
address using the Web EMS. See Changing the Management IP Address.
Page 79 of 1094

2.4 Changing Your Password

It is recommended to change your default Admin password as soon as you have
logged into the system.
In addition to the Admin password, there is an additional password protected user
account, “root user”, which is configured in the system. The root user password
and instructions for changing this password are available from Ceragon Customer
Support. It is strongly recommended to change this password.
To change your password:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > Change Password. The Change
User Password page opens.
Figure 18: Change User Password Page

2 In the Old password field, enter the current password. For example, upon
initial login, enter the default password (admin).
3 In the New password field, enter a new password. If Enforce Password
Strength is activated (see Configuring the Password Security Parameters), the
password must meet the following criteria:
◦ Password length must be at least eight characters.
◦ Password must include characters of at least three of the following
character types: lower case letters, upper case letters, digits, and special
characters. For purposes of meeting this requirement, upper case letters at
the beginning of the password and digits at the end of the password are
not counted.
◦ A password cannot be repeated within five changes of the password.
4 Click Apply.
Page 80 of 1094

2.5 Applying a Pre-Defined Configuration File

IP-20 units can be configured from the Web EMS in a single step by applying a pre-
defined configuration file. A pre-defined configuration file can be prepared for
multiple IP-20 units, with the relevant configuration details specified and
differentiated per-unit.
Pre-defined configuration files can include all the parameters necessary to
configure basic links, including:
• Platform parameters:
◦ ETSI to ANSI conversion
◦ General unit parameters, such as unit name, location, and contact person
◦ Activation Key (or Demo mode) configuration
◦ IP configuration (IPv4 and IPv6)
◦ NTP configuration
◦ Basic SNMP Parameters (Enable/Disable, Read and Write Communities)
◦ Time services configuration
• Interface configuration:
◦ Radio
◦ Ethernet
◦ LAG
◦ Radio protection
◦ Multi-Carrier ABC groups
• Advanced radio configuration
◦ XPIC
◦ MIMO
• Services configuration
◦ Management
◦ Point-to-Point
◦ Multipoint
The pre-defined configuration file is generated by Ceragon Global Services and
provided as a service.
The pre-defined configuration file must be compatible with the CeraOS version
the IP-20 device is running. Configuration files created for CeraOS 9.2 cannot be
used with later CeraOS versions. Configuration files must also be compatible with
the type of IP-20 device. For example, a configuration file created for IP-20C
cannot be applied to an IP-20G device.
For further information on the creation of pre-defined configurations, consult
your Ceragon representative.
Page 81 of 1094

To apply a pre-defined configuration file:

1 Select Quick Configuration > From CeraPlan. The Quick Configuration – From
File page opens.
Figure 19: Quick Configuration – From File Page

2 Click Browse, and select the configuration file for your unit.
Figure 20: Quick Configuration – From File Page – Configuration File Loaded
3 In the Device List field, select the IP-20 unit you are configuring.
Note: Although the configuration file may contain parameters for multiple
types of devices, only devices of the same product type as the unit you
are configuring are displayed in this field.
4 Optionally, click View file to display the configuration file (read-only).
5 To initiate the configuration, click Submit. Progress is updated in the Quick
Configuration – From File page.
When the configuration is complete, the unit reboots.
Note: If the pre-defined configuration file included a new IP address for the unit,
make sure to configure an IP address on the PC or laptop you are using to
perform the configuration within the same subnet as the IP-20 unit’s new
IP address.
Page 82 of 1094

2.6 Performing Quick Platform Setup

The Platform Setup page in the Web EMS centralizes the main configurable items
from several Web EMS pages in a single location:
• Unit Parameters (Name, Contact Person, Location, Longitude, and Latitude)
• IPv4 Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway
• NTP Enable/Disable
• Demo Activation Key Enable/Disable
• SNMP Parameters
These items enable you to configure the basic platform parameters quickly, in a
single Web EMS page. Combined with the quick link configuration wizards, this
enables you to configure a new link in the field quickly and efficiently, to the point
where the link is up and functioning and any necessary advanced configurations
can be performed remotely without the need to physically access the IP-20 unit.
To use the Platform Setup page:
1 Select Quick Configuration > Platform Setup. The Quick Configuration –
Platform Setup page opens.
Figure 21: Quick Configuration – Platform Setup Page
Page 83 of 1094

2 The Unit Parameters section is optional. For details on each field, see
3 In the IPv4 Address section, configure the unit’s management IP address,
subnet mask, and, optionally, a default gateway. If you want to use an IPv6
address, see Changing the Management IP Address.
4 In the Date & Time section, you can enable Network Time Protocol (NTP). NTP
distributes Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) throughout the system, using a
jitter buffer to neutralize the effects of variable latency.
If you select Enable, the NTP version and NTP server IP address fields are also
displayed, enabling you to configure the NTP parameters. For details on these
fields, see Configuring NTP.
Note: You can configure additional NTP servers, up to four, in the NTP
Configuration page. See Configuring NTP.
5 In the Activation Key section, you can enable or disable Demo mode in the
Demo admin field. Demo mode enables all features for 60 days. When demo
mode expires, the most recent valid activation key goes into effect. The 60-
day period is only counted when the system is powered up. 10 days before
demo mode expires, an alarm is raised indicating that demo mode is about to
expire.
If you set Demo admin to Disable, the Activation Key field is displayed. Enter a
valid activation key in this field. For a full explanation of activation keys, see
Configuring the Activation Key.
Page 84 of 1094

6 In the SNMP Parameters section, you can set whether to enable or disable
SNMP monitoring in the Admin field, and set the SNMP Read Community and
SNMP Write Community. For a full explanation of SNMP parameters, see
Configuring SNMP.
7 Click Finish. The Selection Summary page opens. To go back and change any of
the parameters, click Back. To implement the new parameters, click Submit.
Figure 22: Quick Configuration – Platform Setup Summary Page
Page 85 of 1094

2.7 Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding)

Mate Management Access enables the use of in-band management for nodes that
use two IP-20C or IP-20C-HP units (4x4 MIMO, 2+2 XPIC, and 4+0 Multi-Carrier
ABC), where traffic comes from an external switch operating in LAG mode. When
Mate Management Access is enabled, the two units exchange incoming
management packets, ensuring that all management data is received by both
units.
Mate Management Access must be configured via the CLI. For instructions, see
Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding) (CLI) on page 607.
2.8 Configuring In-Band Management

You can configure in-band management in order to manage the unit remotely via
its radio and/or Ethernet interfaces.
Note: Before configuring in-band management, it is recommended to review
the configuration recommendations for in-band management listed in
Configuration Tips.
To use in-band management for nodes that utilize two IP-20C or
IP-20C-HP units (4x4 MIMO, 2x2 XPIC, and 4+0 Multi-Carrier ABC), you
must first configure Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding). For
instructions, see Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding) (CLI) on
page 607.
Each IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit includes a pre-defined management service with
Service ID 257. The management service is a multipoint service that connects the
two local management ports and the network element host CPU in a single
service. In order to enable in-band management, you must add at least one
service point to the management service, in the direction of the remote site or
sites from which you want to access the unit for management.
Note: In order to use in-band management, it must be supported on the
external switch.
For instructions on adding service points, see Configuring Service Points.
Page 86 of 1094

2.9 Changing the Management IP Address

Related Topics:
• Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications
• Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address
To change the management IP address of the local unit:
1 Select Platform > Management > Networking > Local. The Local Networking
Configuration page opens.
Figure 23: Local Networking Configuration Page

2 Optionally, in the Description field, enter descriptive information about the unit.
3 In the IP address field, enter an IP address for the unit. You can enter the
address in IPv4 format in this field, and/or in IPv6 format in the IPv6 Address
field. The unit will receive communications whether they are sent to its IPv4
address or its IPv6 address.
4 In the Subnet mask field, enter the subnet mask.
5 Optionally, in the Default gateway field, enter the default gateway address.
6 Optionally, in the IPv6 Address field, enter an IPv6 address for the unit. You
can enter the address in IPv6 format in this field, and/or in IPv4 format in the
IP Address field. The unit will receive communications whether they are sent
to its IPv4 address or its IPv6 address.
7 If you entered an IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length in the IPv6 Prefix-
Length field.
8 Optionally, if you entered an IPv6 address, enter the default gateway in IPv6
format in the Default Gateway IPv6 field.
9 Click Apply.
Page 87 of 1094

2.10 Configuring the Activation Key

• Activation Key Overview
• Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters
• Entering the Activation Key
• Activating Demo Mode
• Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features
2.10.1 Activation Key Overview

IP-20 offers a pay-as-you-grow concept in which future capacity growth and
additional functionality can be enabled with activation keys. Each device contains
a single unified activation key cipher.
New IP-20 units are delivered with a default activation key that enables you to
manage and configure the unit. Additional feature and capacity support requires
you to enter an activation key cipher in the Activation Key Configuration page.
Contact your vendor to obtain your activation key cipher.
Note: To obtain an activation key cipher, you may need to provide the unit’s
serial number. You can display the serial number in the Web EMS
Inventory page. See Displaying Unit Inventory.
Each required feature and capacity should be purchased with an appropriate
activation key. It is not permitted to enable features that are not covered by a
valid activation key. In the event that the activation-key-enabled capacity and
feature set is exceeded, an Activation Key Violation alarm occurs and the Web
EMS displays a yellow background and an activation key violation warning. After a
48-hour grace period, all other alarms are hidden until the capacity and features
in use are brought within the activation key’s capacity and feature set.
In order to clear the alarm, you must configure the system to comply with the
activation key that has been loaded in the system. The system automatically
checks the configuration to ensure that it complies with the activation-key-
enabled features and capacities. If no violation is detected, the alarm is cleared.
When entering sanction state, the system configuration remains unchanged, even
after power cycles. However, the alarms remain hidden until an appropriate
activation key is entered or the features and capacities are re-configured to be
within the parameters of the current activation key.
Demo mode is available, which enables all features for 60 days. When demo
mode expires, the most recent valid activation key goes into effect. The 60-day
period is only counted when the system is powered up. 10 days before demo
mode expires, an alarm is raised indicating that demo mode is about to expire.
Page 88 of 1094

2.10.2 Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters

To display the current activation key status parameters:
1 Select Platform > Activation Key > Activation Key Configuration. The
Activation Key Configuration page opens.
Figure 24: Activation Key Configuration Page
Table 10: Activation Key Status Parameters

Parameter Definition
Type Displays the current activation key type.

Validation number Displays a random, system-generated validation
number. This number is required when reclaiming an
activation key. See Activation Key Reclaim.
Date code Displays a date code used for validation of the current
activation key cipher.
Violation runtime counter (hours) In the event of an Activation Key Violation alarm, this
field displays the number of hours remaining in the 48-
hour activation key violation grace period.
Page 89 of 1094

Sanction state If an Activation Key Violation alarm has occurred, and
the 48-hour activation key violation grace period has
expired without the system having been brought into
conformance with the activation-key-enabled capacity
and feature set, Yes appears in this field to indicate
that the system is in an Activation Key Violation
sanction state. All other alarms are hidden until the
capacity and features in use are brought within the
activation-key-enabled capacity and feature set.
2.10.3 Entering the Activation Key

To enter a new activation key:
Activation Key Configuration page opens (Figure 24).
2 Enter the activation key cipher you have received from the vendor in the
Activation Key field. The activation key cipher is a string that enables all
features and capacities that have been purchased for the unit.
3 Click Apply.
If the activation key cipher is not legal (e.g., a typing mistake or an invalid serial
number), an Activation Key Loading Failure event is sent to the Event Log. When a
legal activation key cipher is entered, an Activation Key Loaded Successfully event
is sent to the Event Log.
2.10.4 Activating Demo Mode

To activate demo mode:
Activation Key Configuration page opens (Figure 24).
2 In the Demo admin field, select Enable.
3 Click Apply.
The Demo timer field displays the number of hours that remain before demo
mode expires.
2.10.5 Activation Key Reclaim

If it is necessary to deactivate an IP-20 device, whether to return it for repairs or
for any other reason, the device’s activation key can be reclaimed for a credit that
can be applied to activation keys for other devices.
Note: Activation key reclaim is only available for IP-20 devices running
CeraOS 9.2 or later.
Where the customer has purchased upgrade activation keys, credit is given for the
full feature or capacity, not for each individual upgrade. For example, if the
customer purchased two capacity activation keys for 300M and later purchased
one upgrade activation key to 350M, credit is given as if the customer had
purchased one activation key for 350M and one activation key for 300M.
Page 90 of 1094

For instructions on how to reclaim an activation key, refer to the User Guide for
the Ceragon Activation Key Management System, Rev A.15 or later, Chapter 7,
Reclaiming an Activation Key.
Page 91 of 1094

2.10.6 Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features

To display the status of activation key coverage for features and capacities in the
IP-20:
1 Select Platform > Activation Key > Activation Key Overview. The Activation
Key Overview page opens.
Figure 25: Activation Key Overview Page

The Activation Key Overview page displays the activation-key-enabled features
and capacities for the IP-20, and indicates the activation key status of each feature
according to the activation key currently implemented in the unit. Table 12
describes the available activation keys, as displayed in the Activation Key
Overview.
Note: Some of the features listed in the Activation Key Overview page and
described in Table 12 may not be supported in the product you are
using or the currently installed software version. For details on feature
support, refer to the Release Notes or Technical Description for the IP-
20 product and CeraOS release you are using.
Table 11: Activation Key-Enabled-Features Table Parameters

Feature ID A unique ID that identifies the feature.

Feature name The name of the feature.
Feature Description A description of the feature.
Activation key-enabled feature usage Indicates whether the activation-key-enabled
feature is actually being used.
Activation key-enabled feature credit Indicates whether the feature is allowed under
the activation key that is currently installed in the
unit.
Activation key violation status Indicates whether the system configuration
violates the currently installed activation key with
respect to this feature.
Page 92 of 1094

Table 12: Activation Key-Enabled-Features Description
Activation Key Name Description

Services Mode Enables a number of Ethernet services, depending on the type of activation key:
• Smart-Pipe –Smart Pipe (L1) services only (unlimited) and a single management
service, with MSTP.
• Edge-CET Node – Up to 8 services (all supported service types).
• Agg-Lvl-1-CET-Node – Up to 64 services (all supported service types).
• Agg-Lvl-2-CET-Node – Up to 1024 services (all supported service types).
Any CET activation key also enables the following:
• A GbE traffic port in addition to the port provided by the default activation key,
for a total of 2 GbE traffic ports.
• Network resiliency (MSTP/RSTP) for all services.
• Full QoS for all services including basic queue buffer management (fixed queues
buffer size limit, tail-drop only) and eight queues per port.
Number of Services Indicates how many services are allowed according to the Services Mode activation key,
and how many are actually configured on the device.
H-QoS Not relevant for IP-20 products.
Network Resiliency Enables the following network resiliency protocols:
• G.8032
Only relevant for FibeAir IP-20C and IP-20V devices.
Ethernet OAM – Fault Enables Connectivity Fault Management (FM) per Y.1731 (CET mode only).
Management
Ethernet OAM – Not relevant in the current CeraOS release.
Performance Monitoring
LACP Enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
Sync Unit Enables the G.8262 synchronization unit. This activation key is required in order to
provide end-to-end synchronization distribution on the physical layer. This activation key
is also required to use SyncE.
IEEE 1588 Transparent Enables IEEE-1588 Transparent Clock.
Clock
IEEE 1588 Ordinary Clock Not relevant in the current CeraOS release.
(quantity)
IEEE 1588 Boundary Clock Not relevant for all-outdoor devices.
Main Card Redundancy Not relevant for all-outdoor devices.
TDM Pseudowire Not relevant for all-outdoor devices.
Frame cut-through Enables Frame Cut-Through.
Secured Management Enables secure management protocols (SSH, HTTPS, SFTP, SNMPv3, TACACS+, and
RADIUS).
FE traffic ports (quantity) Displays the number of FE traffic ports allowed under the current activation key.
GbE traffic ports (quantity) Displays the number of GbE traffic ports allowed under the current activation key.
Page 93 of 1094


10GbE traffic ports Displays the number of 10G traffic ports allowed under the current activation key. Only
(quantity) relevant for FibeAir IP-20E and IP-20V devices.
ACM (quantity) Displays the number of radio carriers that are allowed to use ACM under the current
activation key.
Narrow CHBW 1.75MHz Not relevant for all-outdoor devices.
script (quantity)
Header De-Duplication Displays the number of radio carriers that are allowed to use Header De-Duplication.
(quantity)
XPIC (quantity) Displays the number of radio carriers that are allowed to use XPIC. Each carrier in the
XPIC pair requires an XPIC activation key.
Multi-Carrier ABC (quantity) Displays the number of radio carriers that are allowed to use Multi-Carrier ABC. Each
carrier in the Multi-Carrier ABC group requires a Multi-Carrier ABC activation key.
MIMO Enables the use of MIMO. A separate activation key is required for each core in the
MIMO configuration.
SD Not relevant for all-outdoor devices.
ASD Enables the use of Advanced Space Diversity (ASD). A separate activation key is required
per core. This means that for a single link, with two IP-20C or IP-20C-HP units on one side
of the link and one IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit on the other side, a total of six ASD
activation keys are required.
AFR 1+0 (quantity) Enables the use of Advanced Frequency Reuse (AFR). For an AFR 1+0- configuration, two
activation keys are required for the hub site (one per carrier) and one activation key is
required for each tail site.
Payload Encryption AES-256 Displays the number of radio carriers that can use of AES-256 encryption Note that:
(quantity) • If no AES activation key is configured for the unit and the user attempts to enable AES
on a radio carrier, in addition to an Activation Key Violation alarm the feature will
remain inactive and no encryption will be performed.
• After entering an AES activation key, the user must reset the unit before AES can be
activated. Unit reset is only necessary for the first AES activation key. If AES activation
keys are acquired later for additional radio carriers, unit reset is not necessary.
Second core activation Enables the use of the second core on an IP-20C.
Second core activation for Note relevant for all-outdoor devices.
RFU-D
Second core activation for Enables the use of the second core on an IP-20C-HP.
HP
Second modem activation Note relevant for all-outdoor devices.
RFU port activation key Not relevant in the current CeraOS release.
Radio capacity level 1 Displays the number of radio carriers for which there is permission to use up to 10 Mbps.
This is the default level, so every radio carrier on the device has this capacity level.
Radio capacity level 2 Displays the number of radio carriers for which there is permission to use up to 50 Mbps.
Radio capacity level 3 Displays the number of radio carriers for which there is permission to use up to 100
Mbps.
Page 94 of 1094


Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Mbps.
Auto State Propagation and Enables the use of Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) with Automatic State Propagation (ASP).
LLF Without the activation key, only one LLF ID can be configured. This means that only one
ASP pair can be configured per radio interface or radio group.
Enhanced Multi-Carrier ABC Enables the configuration and use of a Multiband (Enhanced Multi-Carrier ABC) link. Two
(quantity) activation keys are required per Multiband node, on the IP-20E. One of these activation
keys is for the radio port, the other is for the Ethernet port carrying traffic to the unit
paired with the IP-20E. No activation key is required for the unit paired with the IP-20E.
Page 95 of 1094

2.11 Setting the Time and Date (Optional)

Related Topics:
• Configuring NTP
IP-20 uses the Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) standard for time and date
configuration. UTC is a more updated and accurate method of date coordination
than the earlier date standard, Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Every IP-20 unit holds the UTC offset and daylight savings time information for the
location of the unit. Each management unit presenting the information uses its
own UTC offset to present the information with the correct time.
Note: If the unit is powered down, the time and date are saved for 96 hours
(four days). If the unit remains powered down for longer, the time and
date may need to be reconfigured.
To display and configure the UTC parameters:
1 Select Platform > Management > Time Services. The Time Services page
opens.
Figure 26: Time Services Page

2 Configure the fields listed in Table 13.
Page 96 of 1094

3 Click Apply.
Table 13: Time Services Parameters

Date & Time Configuration UTC Date and Time The UTC date and time.
Local Current Date and Read-only. The calculated local date
Time and time, based on the local clock,
Universal Time Coordinated (UTC), and
Daylight Savings Time (DST)
configurations.
Offset from GMT UTC Offset Hours The required hours offset (positive or
negative) relative to GMT. This is used
to offset the clock relative to GMT,
according to the global meridian
location.
UTC Offset Minutes The required minutes offset (positive
or negative) relative to GMT. This is
used to offset the clock relative to
GMT, according to the global meridian
location.
Daylight Saving Start Time Month The month when Daylight Savings Time
begins.
Day The date in the month when Daylight
Savings Time begins.
Daylight Saving End Time Month The month when Daylight Savings Time
ends.
Day The date in the month when Daylight
Savings Time ends.
DST Offset (Hours) The required offset, in hours, for
Daylight Savings Time. Only positive
offset is supported.
Page 97 of 1094

2.12 Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager)

By default:
• Ethernet traffic interfaces are disabled and must be manually enabled.
• The Ethernet management interface is enabled.
• Radio interfaces are enabled.
Note: IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V units have a single radio interface.
For IP-20C 2E2SX hardware versions, P4 can be used as a traffic port (Eth 4).
However, in 4x4 MIMO and 2+2 Space Diversity configurations, P4 is used as an
Extension port.
When one of these configurations is applied, the system automatically configures
P4 to operate as an Extension port and it is no longer available for use as a traffic
port (Eth 4). In these configurations, P4 must be used with an SFP+ module.
If you try to apply a 4x4 MIMO or 2+2 Space Diversity configuration while P4 is
assigned one or more service points, ASP or LLF instances, or a LAG group or Sync
source is configured on P4, the configuration will fail and an error message will be
generated. Also, the Admin status of the port must be set to Down before
applying the 4x4 MIMO or 2+2 Space Diversity configuration.
When used as a traffic port, P4 is displayed in the Interface Manager as Ethernet:
Slot 1, Port 4. When it is used as an Extension port, it is not displayed at all in the
Interface Manager.
In IP-20C 2E2SX models, P2 is a DisplayPort that uses a special splitter cable and
gland to accommodate two RJ-45 cables.
Table 14: Ethernet Splitter Cable and Gland for Dual Ethernet Port
Marketing Model Item Description
IP-20_Ethernet_Splitter_cable CABLE,DP TO 2xRJ45F, 1.0M, WITH GLANDS, UV PROTECTED
Page 98 of 1094

• One end of the cable is labelled GbE1/PoE. This is used for the RJ-45
connection to Eth 1 (traffic/PoE).
• The other end of the cable is labelled GbE2. This is used for the RJ-45
connection to Eth 2 (traffic).
To enable or disable interfaces:

1 Select Platform > Interfaces > Interface Manager. The Interface Manager
page opens, displaying all of the system's traffic and management interfaces.
Figure 27: Interface Manager Page

To enable or disable an individual interface:
1 Select the interface in the Interface Manager table.
Page 99 of 1094

2 Click Edit. The Interface Manager – Edit page opens.
Figure 28: Interface Manager – Edit Page

3 In the Admin status field, select Up to enable the interface or Down to disable
the interface.
4 Click Apply, then Close.
To enable or disable multiple interfaces:
1 Select the interfaces in the Interface Manager table or select all the interfaces
by selecting the check box in the top row.
2 In the Multiple Selection Operation section underneath the Interface
Manager Table, select Admin status – Up or Admin status – Down.
Figure 29: Multiple Selection Operation Section (Interface Manager Page)

3 Click Apply.
Note: The Operational Status field displays the current, actual operational
state of the interface (Up or Down).
Page 100 of 1094

2.12.1 IP-20E and IP-20V Management Interface

The management ports of IP-20E and IP-20V can be used for traffic as well as
management and (except for IP-20E ESE) PoE. This increases the number of
available Ethernet traffic ports for these devices and enables customers to
configure setups in which a single cable is used to carry management, power, and
traffic from the customer equipment to the IP-20 device.
The following are the relevant ports:
• IP-20E:
◦ ESP and ESS – Port 1 (Management/PoE/Traffic)
◦ ESE – Port 3 (Management/Traffic)
• IP-20V – Port 1 (Management/PoE/Traffic)
In most respects, these ports can be used like other Ethernet traffic ports,
including:
• Support for Auto Negotiation
• Support for synchronization
• Support for LLDP
• Support for Y.1731 CFM-SOAM
• Support for RMON
Because this interface is used for management, a management service (Service ID
257) and service point (Service Point ID 1) are configured on the interface and
cannot be removed.
A Policer (Policer ID 251) is attached to this service point and cannot be edited or
removed.
In order to ensure that the port can be used for traffic services, the Attached
Interface Type of the management service point can be modified from its default
value of dot1q if it is the only service point on the interface. It can be changed to
s-tag or QinQ, giving you the flexibility to configure services on the interface
according to the expected user traffic. See Editing a Service Point.
The following limitations exist for these ports:
• Cannot belong to LAG groups
• Do not support MSTP and G.8032
• Automatic State Propagation can only be used in CSF mode
To use the IP-20E or IP-20V management port for traffic, you should perform the
following configurations:
• An egress Service Bundle Shaper (Shaper ID 256) is also attached to this
service point. This Shaper cannot be edited, but it can and must be either
detached or disabled on the port in order for the port to support 1G traffic.
See Assigning a Service Bundle Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle.
• Change the port speed from its default value of 100 Mbps to 1 Gbps. See
Configuring Ethernet Interfaces.
• Enable the LOC alarm (Alarm ID 401) for the management port. By default,
this alarm is disabled on the management port and must be manually enabled
when using the port for traffic.
Page 101 of 1094

To enable the LOC alarm:

1 Select Platform > Interfaces > Traffic over Management. The Traffic over
Management page opens.
Figure 30: Traffic over Management Page

2 In the Loss of Carrier Alarm Supported field, select Yes.
3 Click Apply.
Page 102 of 1094

2.13 Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s)

Related Topics:
• Displaying MRMC Status
Multi-Rate Multi-Constellation (MRMC) radio scripts define how the radio utilizes
its available capacity. Each script is a pre-defined collection of configuration
settings that specify the radio’s transmit and receive levels, link modulation,
channel spacing, and bit rate. Scripts apply uniform transmit and receive rates
that remain constant regardless of environmental impact on radio operation.
Note: The list of available scripts reflects activation-key-enabled features.
Only scripts within your activation-key-enabled capacity will be
displayed.
To display the MRMC scripts and their basic parameters and select a script:
1 Select one of the following, depending on the regulatory framework in which
you are operating:
◦ To display ETSI scripts, select Radio > MRMC > Symmetrical Scripts > ETSI.
◦ To display ANSI (FCC) scripts, select Radio > MRMC > Symmetrical Scripts
> FCC.
The MRMC Symmetrical Scripts page opens. For a description of the
parameters displayed in the MRMC Symmetrical Scripts page, see Configuring
the Radio (MRMC) Script(s).
Note: IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V units do not support XPIC or MIMO. For
detailed information on the exact scripts and profiles available per unit
type, channel, and configuration, refer to the Release Notes for the
CeraOS version you are using.
The following figures show scripts supported by the IP-20C and IP-20E.
Figure 31: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page (IP-20C) (ETSI)
Page 103 of 1094

Figure 32: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page (IP-20E) (ETSI)
Figure 33: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page (IP-20C) (FCC)

2 In the Select Radio Interface field, select the slot for which you want to
configure the script.
Note: This step is only applicable for IP-20C and IP-20C-HP units.
3 Select the script you want to assign to the radio. The currently-assigned script
is marked by a check mark (Script ID 1504 in the image above).
4 Click Configure Script. A separate MRMC Symmetrical Scripts page opens
similar to the page shown below.
Page 104 of 1094

Figure 34: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page – Configuration (IP-20C/IP-20C-HP)
Page 105 of 1094

Figure 35: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page - Configuration (IP-20E)

5 In the MRMC Script operational mode field, select the ACM
mode: Fixed or Adaptive.
◦ Fixed ACM mode applies constant Tx and Rx rates. However, unlike regular
scripts, with a Fixed ACM script you can specify a maximum profile to
inhibit inefficient transmission levels.
◦ In Adaptive ACM mode, Tx and Rx rates are dynamic. An ACM-enabled
radio system automatically chooses which profile to use according to the
channel fading conditions. If you select Adaptive, two fields are displayed
enabling you to select minimum and maximum ACM profiles.
Page 106 of 1094

Figure 36: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page – Configuration – Adaptive Mode (IP-20C/IP-20C-HP)
Figure 37: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page – Configuration – Adaptive Mode (IP-20E)
Page 107 of 1094

6 Define the script profile or profiles:

◦ If you selected Fixed ACM mode, select the ACM profile in the MRMC
Script profile field.
◦ If you selected Adaptive ACM mode, select the maximum and minimum
ACM profiles in the MRMC Script maximum profile and the MRMC Script
minimum profile fields.
Note: Refer to Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) for a list of available
radio profiles.
7 Click Apply.
Note: Changing the script resets the radio interface and affects traffic. Changing
the maximum or minimum profile does not reset the radio interface.
Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) describes the MRMC Symmetrical Scripts
page parameters.
Table 15: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page Parameters

Script ID A unique ID assigned to the script in the system.

Channel bandwidth (MHz) The script's channel bandwidth (channel spacing).
Occupied bandwidth (MHz) The script's occupied bandwidth.
Modulation Script Indicates whether the script supports Adaptive Coding Modulation
(ACM). In ACM mode, a range of profiles determines Tx and Rx rates.
This enables the radio to modify its transmit and receive levels in
response to environmental conditions.
Multi-Carrier IP-20C and IP-20C-HP only. Indicates the Multi-Carrier status of the
script (XPIC, MIMO, or Single-Carrier).
Adjacent Channel Displays the script’s adjacent channel polarization mode.
Latency Level Always displays Normal.
Symmetry Indicates that the script is symmetrical (Normal). Only symmetrical
scripts are supported in the current release.
Standard Indicates whether the script is compatible with ETSI or FCC (ANSI)
standards, or both.
MRMC Script operational The ACM mode: Fixed or Adaptive.
mode • Fixed ACM mode applies constant TX and RX rates. However,
unlike regular scripts, with a Fixed ACM script you can specify a
maximum profile to inhibit inefficient transmission levels.
• In Adaptive ACM mode, TX and RX rates are dynamic. An
ACM-enabled radio system automatically chooses which profile
to use according to the channel fading conditions.
MRMC Script profile Fixed ACM mode only: The profile in which the system will operate.
MRMC Script maximum profile Adaptive ACM mode only: The maximum profile for the script. For
example, if you select a maximum profile of 5, the system will not climb
above profile 5, even if channel fading conditions allow it.
Page 108 of 1094

MRMC Script minimum profile Adaptive ACM mode only: The minimum profile for the script. For
example, if you select a minimum profile of 3, the system will not go
below profile 3 regardless of the channel fading conditions. The
minimum profile cannot be greater than the maximum profile, but it can
be equal to it.
2.13.1 Radio Profiles

Table 16 lists the available radio profiles for IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S. Table
17 lists the available radio profiles for IP-20E. Table 18 lists the available radio
profiles for IP-20V.
Note: For detailed information on the exact profiles available per unit type,
channel, and configuration, refer to the Release Notes for the CeraOS
version you are using.
Table 16: Available Radio Profiles – IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S

Profile Modulation
Profile 0 QPSK
Profile 1 8 QAM
Profile 2 16 QAM
Profile 3 32 QAM
Profile 4 64 QAM
Profile 5 128 QAM
Profile 6 256 QAM
Profile 7 512 QAM
Profile 8 1024 QAM (Strong FEC)
Profile 9 1024 QAM (Light FEC)
Profile 10 2048 QAM
Table 17: Available Radio Profiles – IP-20E

Profile Modulation
Profile 0 BPSK
Profile 1 QPSK
Profile 2 8 QAM
Profile 3 16 QAM
Profile 4 32 QAM
Profile 5 64 QAM
Profile 6 128 QAM
Profile 7 256 QAM
Page 109 of 1094

Table 18: Available Radio Profiles – IP-20V

Profile Modulation
Profile 0 BPSK
Profile 1 QPSK
Profile 2 8 QAM
Profile 3 16 QAM
Profile 4 32 QAM
Profile 5 64 QAM
Profile 6 128 QAM
Profile 7 256 QAM
Page 110 of 1094

2.14 Running the Frequency Scanner (IP-20E and IP-20V)

To facilitate optimal operation in frequency scenarios, IP-20E and IP-20V include a
frequency scanner that enables you to scan a defined frequency range and
determine the current interference level for each channel.
The frequency scanner can be used both in the initial provisioning of the link and
at any time after the link has been provisioned. The scanner determines the
interference level for each RX channel. Using this information, you can select the
channels with the least interference, and configure the unit’s frequency
accordingly.
When the frequency scan begins, the unit stops receiving traffic until the scan is
complete. This means the link is effectively down while the frequency scanner is
operating. Once the frequency scan operation has been completed, either at the
end of a Single Mode scan or by user action in the case of a Continuous scan, the
link is automatically restored at the same frequency settings as before the scan.
Note: The frequency scanner does not automatically change the link’s
frequency settings. These settings must be changed manually. The
frequency scanner simply provides information you can use in
determining the proper frequency configuration.
To perform a frequency scan:
1 Select Radio > Frequency Scanner. The Frequency Scanner page opens.
Figure 38: Frequency Scanner Page – IP-20V – Continuous Mode
Page 111 of 1094

Figure 39: Frequency Scanner Page – IP-20E – Single Mode

2 Enter a range for the scan (in MHz) by entering the lower frequency of the
range in the Start Frequency field and the upper frequency of the range in the
Stop Frequency field. The range of permissible values is:
◦ For IP-20E: 81000-86000 MHz on the high side and 71000-76000 MHz on
the low side
◦ For IP-20V: 57000 – 66000 MHz.
3 In the Scanner Mode field, select from the following options:
◦ Continuous Mode – The frequency scanner scans each channel in the
script, and repeats the scan continuously until you manually stop the scan
by clicking Stop. For each channel, the Web EMS will display the minimum,
maximum, and most recently measured interference levels, in both table
and graph formats.
◦ Single Mode – The frequency scanner scans each channel in the script
once, over the defined frequency range. For each channel, the Web EMS
will display the measured interference level.
Note: When running the Frequency Scanner on the remote side of a link
using in-band management, make sure to run the Frequency Scanner
in Single mode, not Continuous mode. Since the link is down during
the scan, management to the remote site is lost, so that if the scan is
run in Continuous mode, it will not be possible to de-activate the
Frequency Scanner.
4 Click Apply to save the scan configuration.
5 Click Scan:
Page 112 of 1094

◦ The Scan Progress field displays the scan’s progress, in percentage of the
defined spectrum that has been scanned. In Continuous Mode, the Scan
Progress field rises to 100 when the defined spectrum has been scanned,
returns to 0, and continues to advance from 0 to 100 for each scan until
you click Stop. In Single Mode, the Scan Progress field rises to 100 and
stays at 100 once the defined spectrum has been scanned.
◦ The Frequency Scanner Band field displays the frequency channel
configured in the current MRMC script. See Configuring the Radio (MRMC)
Script(s).
◦ The Last Scan Date and Time field displays the date and time of the most
recently completed frequency scan.
Scan results are displayed are displayed in table format, and can also be displayed
in graph format. In Single Mode, results are displayed after the scan is completed.
In Continuous Mode, results are displayed after the scan has completed one cycle
over the defined spectrum, and are automatically updated as the scan proceeds.
Figure 38 shows the results of a Continuous Mode scan on an IP-20V in table
format. Figure 39 shows the results of a Single Mode scan on an IP-20E in table
format. For each RX channel in the defined frequency range, the table displays the
following columns:
• Frequency (MHz) – The starting frequency in the scanned channel.
• RSL Sample Value (dBm) – In Single Mode, the RSL value measured for the
scanned channel. In Continuous Mode, the latest RSL value measured for the
scanned channel.
• Minimum RSL (dBm) – In Continuous Mode, the lowest RSL value measured
for the scanned channel. In Single Mode, the same as the RSL Sample Value.
• Maximum RSL (dBm) – In Continuous Mode, the highest RSL value measured
You can also display the scan results in graph format by clicking Graph. The Graph
page presents the scan results in graphical format, with the frequency on the
horizontal axis and the RSL on the vertical axis.
The Graph page has the following tabs:
• RSL Sample Value (dBm) – In Single Mode, the RSL value measured for the
scanned channel. In Continuous Mode, the latest RSL value measured for the
scanned channel.
• Minimum RSL (dBm) – In Continuous Mode, the lowest RSL value measured
• Maximum RSL (dBm) – In Continuous Mode, the highest RSL value measured
Page 113 of 1094

Figure 40: Frequency Scanner Results – Graph Format (IP-20V – Continuous Mode)
Figure 41: Frequency Scanner Results – Graph Format (IP-20E – Single Mode)
Page 114 of 1094

2.15 Configuring the Radio Parameters

In order to establish a radio link, you must:
• Verify that the radio is muted (the TX Mute Status should be On).
• Configure the radio frequencies.
Note: Even if you are using the default frequencies, it is mandatory to
actually configure the frequencies.
• Configure the TX level.
• Click Apply to apply these configurations.
Note: If you are using the default values and did not change any other
parameters on the Radio Parameters page, the Apply button will be
grayed out. To activate the Apply button, change any parameter on
the page, then change it back to the desired value.
• Set TX Mute to Unmute.
• Click Apply to apply the unmute.
• Verify that the radio is unmuted (the TX Mute Status should be Off).
You can do these tasks, perform other radio configuration tasks, and display the
radio parameters in the Radio Parameters page.
To configure the radio parameters:
1 Select Radio > Radio Parameters. The Radio Parameters page opens.
◦ For multi-carrier units, the Radio Parameters page initially displays a table
as shown in Figure 42.
◦ For single-carrier units, a page appears, similar to Figure 43 (which shows
an IP-20C/IP-20C-HP page).
Figure 42: Radio Parameters Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
Page 115 of 1094

2 For multi-carrier units, select the carrier in the Radio table (see Figure 42) and
click Edit. A separate Radio Parameters page opens. The page is essentially
identical to the IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V page, except for the addition of a
Radio location parameter.
Figure 43: Radio Parameters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
Page 116 of 1094

3 Set the radio frequency in the Frequency control (Local) section:

i In the TX Frequency (MHz) field, set the transmission radio frequency in
MHz.
ii In the RX Frequency (MHz) field, set the received radio frequency in MHz.
iii Click Apply. The system automatically calculates and displays the
frequency separation in the TX to RX frequency separation (MHz) field,
based on the configured TX and RX frequencies.
iv Optionally, select Set also remote unit to apply the frequency settings to
the remote unit as well as the local unit.
Notes: If the carrier belongs to a 4x4 MIMO group, an ASD group, an AFR
group, or an XPIC group, you must disable the group before changing
the TX or RX frequency.
For IP-20E and IP-20V, a frequency scanner is available to scan the

frequency range covered by the currently configured MRMC script and
determine the current interference level for each channel. This
enables you to select the best channel in accordance with current
interference levels. See Running the Frequency Scanner (IP-20E and IP-
20V).
4 Set the other radio parameters in the Configuration parameters section:
i In the TX Level (dBm) field, enter the desired TX signal level (TSL). The
range of values depends on the frequency and RFU type.
ii The RSL Connector Source field is used when you are measuring the RSL at
the unit’s RSL port, and determines which receiver’s RSL is measured at
the RSL port:
◦ Main – The default value for IP-20E and IP-20V. Keep this setting
when measuring RSL on an IP-20E or an IP-20V. This option does not
appear for other all-outdoor IP-20 products.
◦ PHY1 – The default value for IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S. Select
PHY1 to measure the RSL of an IP-20S and Radio Port 1 of an IP-20C or
IP-20C-HP.
◦ PHY2 – Select PHY2 to measure the RSL of Radio Port 2 of an IP-20C or
IP-20C-HP.
Note: The voltage at the RSL port is 1.XX where XX is the RSL level. For
example: 1.59V means an RSL of -59 dBm. Note that the voltage
measured at the RSL port is not accurate and should be used only as
an aid).
Note that the voltage measured at the RSL port is not accurate and
should be used only as an aid).
Page 117 of 1094

iii To mute the TX output of the radio carrier, select Unmute in the TX Mute
field. To unmute the TX output of the radio carrier, select Off. To configure
a timed mute, select Mute with Timer.
If you select Mute with Timer, an additional field appears: Mute timeout
(minutes). This field defines a timer for the mute, in minutes (1-1440).
When the timer expires, the mute automatically ends. This provides a fail-
safe mechanism for maintenance operations that eliminates the possibility
of accidently leaving the radio muted after the maintenance has been
completed. By default, the timer is 10 minutes.
Note: In contrast to an ordinary mute, a timed mute is not persistent. This

means that if the unit is reset, the radio is not muted when the unit
comes back online, even if the timer had not expired. Also, in unit and
radio protection configurations, a timed mute is not copied to the
mate unit or radio, and no mismatch alarm is raised if a timed mute is
configured on only one radio in the protection pair.
iv In the Link ID field, enter a unique link identifier from 1 to 65535. The Link
ID identifies the link, in order to distinguish it from other links. If the Link
ID is not the same at both sides of the link, a Link ID Mismatch alarm is
raised. If Link ID Mismatch Security is enabled, traffic is also blocked on
the link. See Enabling Link ID Mismatch Security.
v In the RSL degradation alarm admin field, select Enable if you want the
unit to generate an alarm in the event that the RSL falls beneath the
threshold defined in the RSL degradation threshold field. The range of
values is -99 to 0. By default, the alarm is disabled, with a default
degradation threshold of -68 dBm. The RSL degradation alarm is alarm ID
1610, Radio Receive Signal Level is below the configured threshold.
The alarm is cleared when the RSL goes above the configured threshold.
The alarm is masked if the radio interface is disabled, the radio does not
exist, or a communication-failure alarm (Alarm ID #1703) is raised.
vi In the Adaptive TX power admin field, select Enable if you wish the IP-20
to automatically adjust power levels on the fly in order to optimize the
available capacity at every modulation point. See Enabling ACM with
Adaptive Transmit Power.
Note: The RSL Connector Source field is used in dual-carrier systems to
switch between one carrier and the other when measuring RSL at the
BNC connector.
For a description of the read-only parameters in the Status parameters section,
see Viewing the Radio Status and Settings.
Page 118 of 1094

2.15.1 Enabling Link ID Mismatch Security

Note: This feature is only relevant for IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S units.
You can configure the unit to block all Ethernet traffic over the radio link in the
event of a Link ID mismatch by enabling Link ID Mismatch Security. When Link ID
Mismatch Security is enabled and a Link ID mismatch occurs:
• All Ethernet traffic over the link is blocked.
• The operational status of the radio is set to Down.
• Automatic State Propagation is triggered.
• You cannot change the Link ID of the remote radio, but the local-remote
channel remains open for other remote configurations.
• In-band management is lost. Once the mismatch is cleared, in-band
management is automatically restored.
• The relevant interfaces are treated as being Down for purposes of MSTP and
G.8032.
Link ID Mismatch Security must be enabled and disabled via CLI.
To enable Link ID Mismatch Security, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security link-id mismatch security set admin
enable
To disable Link ID Mismatch Security, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security link-id mismatch security set admin
disable
To display the current Link ID Mismatch Security setting, enter the following
command in root view:
root> platform security link-id mismatch security show admin
By default, Link ID Mismatch Security is disabled.
Page 119 of 1094

2.16 Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power

When planning ACM-based radio links, the radio planner attempts to apply the
lowest transmit power that will perform satisfactorily at the highest level of
modulation. During fade conditions requiring a modulation drop, most radio
systems cannot increase transmit power to compensate for the signal
degradation, resulting in a deeper reduction in capacity. The IP-20 is capable of
adjusting power on the fly, and optimizing the available capacity at every
modulation point.
To enable ACM with adaptive transmit power:
2 For multi-carrier units, select the carrier in the Radio table (see Figure 42) and
click Edit. A separate Radio Parameters page opens. The page is essentially
identical to the single-carrier page, except for the addition of a Radio location
parameter.
Page 120 of 1094

Figure 44: Radio Parameters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C

3 In the Adaptive TX power admin field, select Enable. The Adaptive TX power
operational status field should now indicate Up to indicate that the feature is
fully functional.
Note: Adaptive TX Power only operates when the MRMC script is configured
to Adaptive mode. If the script is configured to Fixed mode (or
Adaptive mode with the Minimum and Maximum Profile set to the
same value), you can set Adaptive TX Power to Enable, but the
Adaptive TX power operational status field will indicate Down.
Page 121 of 1094

2.17 Operating in FIPS Mode

Notes: This feature is only relevant for IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S units.
FIPS 140-2 compliance is only available with the IP-20 Assured

platform. The IP-20 Assured platform is supported with CeraOS 10.9.6
and CeraOS 8.3. It is not supported with CeraOS 11.3.
FibeAir IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S can be configured to be FIPS 140-2-
compliant in specific hardware and software configurations, as described in this
section.
2.17.1 Requirements for FIPS Compliance

For a full list of FIPS requirements, refer to the Ceragon IP-20 FIPS 140-2 Security
Policy, available upon request. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure
that these requirements are met.
For an IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S node to be FIPS-compliant, the unit must be
FIPS-compliant hardware. A FIPS-compliant IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S unit has a
unique part number ending in the letters AF, in the following format:
• IP-20C-***-AF
• IP-20C-HP-***-AF
• IP-20S-***-AF
Note: To display the part numbers of the hardware components of your IP-
20 unit, see Displaying Unit Inventory.
Unit redundancy configurations can be configured to be FIPS 140-2-compliant.
This requires encryption of the protection link between the two units. See
Encrypting the External Protection Link.
A special label is affixed to a FIPS-compliant IP-20C-HP unit. This label is tamper-
evident and must be applied in such a way that it is not possible to remove the
diplexer unit from the radio unit without also removing a label and leaving
evidence that the label was tampered with. This label must be replaced if the SM
card is replaced. Replacement labels can be ordered from Ceragon Networks, part
number BS-0341-2. Tamper-evident labels should be inspected for integrity at
least once every six months. For further details, refer to the FibeAir IP-20C-HP
Installation Guide.
Page 122 of 1094

2.17.2 Enabling FIPS Mode

To set the unit to operate in FIPS mode:
1 Select Platform > Security > General > Configuration. The Security General
Figure 45: Security General Configuration Page

2 The Import/Export security settings field determines whether security
configurations are included in configuration backup files. To enhance unit
security, it is recommended to select Enable in this field, so that security
configurations will not be included in backup files. When you are finished, click
Apply.
3 In the FIPS admin configuration field, select Enable.
4 Click Apply.
Note: Changing the FIPS configuration causes a unit reset.
After enabling FIPS:
• The MD5 option for SNMPv3 is blocked.
• After any system reset, the length of time before users can log back into the
system is longer than usual due to FIPS-related self-testing.
For a full list of FIPS requirements, including software configuration requirements,
refer to the Ceragon IP-20 FIPS 140-2 Security Policy, available upon request.
Page 123 of 1094

2.17.1 Encrypting the External Protection Link

For unit redundancy configurations, the external protection link must be
encrypted using IPsec. This encrypts all IP packets that pass between the
management ports of the two IP-20 units.
IPsec uses a 32-character pre-shared key. The pre-shared key is a 32-byte
symmetric encryption key. The same pre-shared key must be configured on both
ends of the encrypted link.
IPsec encryption is automatically enabled when FIPS mode is enabled. However, it
is enabled with a default value: protectionpresharedkey0123456789.
If this default value is not changed, the following alarm is triggered:
• 5113 – Protection Pre-Shared-Key has the default value
Page 124 of 1094

2.17.1.1 Initial Configuration of FIPS-Compliant Unit Redundancy Configuration

To set up a unit redundancy configuration that is FIPS 140-2-compliant, you must
follow these steps:
1 Configure and enable unit redundancy on both units. See Configuring Unit
Protection with HSB Radio Protection (External Protection).
2 Enable FIPS on both IP-20 units. See Enabling FIPS Mode.
When you enable FIPS mode, IPsec encryption will automatically be enabled
on the protection link, using the default protection pre-shared key. Alarm
5113 will be raised.
3 Verify that there is no Configuration Mismatch alarm by checking in the Faults
> Current Alarms page. If a Configuration Mismatch alarm is present, you
must clear the alarm before configuring a new pre-shared key. Otherwise, the
key will not be copied to the Standby unit.
Note: You can use the following CLI command to display a list of mismatched
parameters:
root> platform management protection show mismatch details

4 Configure a new pre-shared key on the active unit. To configure a protection
key:
i Verify that the web interface protocol for accessing the unit is configured
to HTTPS. See Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates .
ii Select Platform > Unit Redundancy. The Unit Redundancy page opens.
Figure 46: Unit Redundancy Page

iii In the Protection Pre-Shared Key field, enter a 32-character key. The key
must be exactly 32 characters.
iv Click Apply. The key is automatically copied to the standby unit.
Note: Communication with the standby unit may be lost for a few seconds
while the key is being copied.
To clear the user-defined protection pre-shared key and restore it to its default
value, enter the following CLI command in root view:
Page 125 of 1094

root> platform management protection clear pre-shared-key
Page 126 of 1094

2.17.1.2 Replacing a Unit in a FIPS-Compliant Unit Redundancy Configuration

If it becomes necessary to replace a unit in a FIPS 140-2-compliant unit
redundancy configuration, you must pre-configure the replacement unit as
follows:
1 Enable FIPS on the replacement unit. See Enabling FIPS Mode.
2 Configure the protection pre-shared key on the replacement unit. See Initial
Configuration of FIPS-Compliant Unit Redundancy Configuration, Step 3.
3 Configure and enable unit redundancy on the replacement unit. See
Configuring Unit Protection with HSB Radio Protection (External Protection).
4 Perform copy-to-mate. See Configuring HSB Radio Protection.
2.18 Configuring Grouping (Optional)

At this point in the configuration process, you should configure any interface
groups that need to be set up according to your network plan. For details on
available grouping and other configuration options, as well as configuration
instructions, see System Configurations.
2.19 Creating Service(s) for Traffic

In order to pass traffic through the IP-20, you must configure Ethernet traffic
services. For configuration instructions, see Configuring Ethernet Service(s).
Page 127 of 1094

3. Configuration Guide
• System Configurations
• Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
• Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC
• Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP
• Configuring XPIC
• Configuring Unit Protection with HSB Radio Protection (External Protection)
• Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity
• Operating an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP in Single Radio Carrier Mode
Note: Multi-Carrier ABC, XPIC, MIMO, and Space Diversity are only
supported with IP-20C. HSB radio protection is only supported with IP-
20C and IP-20S.
3.1 System Configurations

This section lists the basic system configurations and the IP-20 product types that
support them, as well as links to configuration instructions.
Table 19: System Configurations

Configuration Supported Products Link to Configuration Instructions
Multi-Carrier ABC (Multi-Radio) IP-20C Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC

IP-20C-HP
Multiband (Enhanced Multi- IP-20E Configuring Multiband
Carrier ABC) IP-20C
IP-20C-HP
IP-20S
Link Aggregation (LAG) IP-20C Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG)
IP-20C-HP and LACP
IP-20S
IP-20E
IP-20V
1+1 XPIC IP-20C Configuring XPIC
IP-20C-HP
HSB Radio Protection IP-20C Configuring Unit Protection with
IP-20C-HP HSB Radio Protection (External
IP-20S Protection)
1+1 HSB with Space Diversity IP-20C Configuring 1+1 HSB with Space
Diversity
MIMO and Space Diversity IP-20C Configuring MIMO and Space
Diversity
ASD 2+0 (XPIC) IP-20C Configuring Advanced Space
IP_20C-HP Diversity (ASD)
Page 128 of 1094


AFR 1+0 IP-20C (hub site or tail site) Configuring Advanced Frequency
IP-20S (tail site only) Reuse (AFR)
IP-20C/IP-20C-HP in Single Radio IP-20C Operating an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP in
Carrier Mode IP-20C-HP Single Radio Carrier Mode
3.2 Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard

The Web EMS provides wizards to configure radio links. The wizards guide you
through configuration of the basic radio parameters and services necessary to
establish a working pipe link. The following link types can be configured with the
Quick Configuration wizard:
• 1+0 – Configures a 1+0 radio link consisting of a user-selected Ethernet (or
LAG) and radio interface. This link passes traffic between the radio and
Ethernet interfaces via a point-to-point pipe service. See Configuring a 1+0
Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard.
• 1+0 Repeater – Configures a 1+0 radio link that passes traffic between two
user-selected radios via a point-to-point pipe service. This type of link is used
to configure a node that functions as a repeater, passing traffic between two
other nodes. See Configuring a 1+0 (Repeater) Link Using the Quick
Configuration Wizard.
• 2 x (1+0) – Configures a 2 x (1+0) radio link, which is essentially a 2+0 link
without Multi-Carrier ABC. You can configure these 1+0 links as an XPIC link or
as ordinary 1+0 non-XPIC links. Each link consists of a user-selected Ethernet
(or LAG) and radio interface. Each link passes traffic between the radio and
Ethernet interfaces via a point-to-point pipe service. See Configuring a 2 x
(1+0) Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard.
• 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC – Configures a 2 + 0 Multi-Carrier ABC group consisting
of an Ethernet interface or LAG and the two radio interfaces. See Configuring
a 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard. For a
detailed explanation of Multi-Carrier ABC and its requirements, see
Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC.
You can also use this wizard to configure XPIC between the radios within the
Multi-Carrier ABC group. For a detailed explanation of XPIC and its
requirements, see Configuring XPIC.
Note: 1+0 Repeater links and Multi-Carrier ABC are only available for IP-20C
and IP-20C-HP dual-carrier units.
• Multiband – Configures a link that bundles E-Band and microwave radios in a
single group that is shared with an Ethernet interface. A Multiband link uses
an IP-20E and an IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, IP-20S, IP-20N, IP-20A, or third-party
microwave unit. The Multiband group is only configured on the IP-20E unit.
See Configuring a Multiband (Enhanced Multi-Carrier ABC) Link Using the
Quick Configuration Wizard.
Because the Quick Configuration wizard creates Pipe links, you cannot add an
interface to a link using the Quick Configuration wizard if any service points are
attached to the interface prior to configuring the link. See Deleting a Service Point.
Page 129 of 1094

3.2.1 Configuring a 1+0 Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard

To configure a 1+0 link using the Quick Configuration wizard:
1 Select Quick Configuration > PIPE > Single Carrier > 1+0. Page 1 of the 1+0
Quick Configuration wizard opens.
Figure 47: 1+0 Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1

2 In the Pipe Type field, select the Attached Interface type for the service that
will connect the radio and Ethernet interfaces. Options are:
◦ s-tag – All S-VLANs and untagged frames are classified into the service.
◦ dot1q – All C-VLANs and untagged frames are classified into the service.
Note: For a full explanation of Ethernet Services, service types, and attached
interface types, see Configuring Ethernet Service(s).
3 In the Ethernet Interface field, select an Ethernet interface or a LAG for the
link.
Note: To create a LAG, click Create LAG. The Create LAG Group page opens.
For instructions on creating LAG groups, see Configuring Link
Aggregation (LAG) and LACP.
4 Click Next. Page 2 of the 1+0 Quick Configuration wizard opens.
Page 130 of 1094


5 In the Radio Interface field, select a radio interface for the link.

7 In the TX Frequency (MHz) field, set the transmission radio frequency in MHz.
8 In the RX Frequency (MHz) field, set the received radio frequency in MHz.
Page 131 of 1094

Note: If the carrier belongs to a 4x4 MIMO group, an ASD group, an AFR

20V).
9 In the TX Level (dBm) field, enter the desired TX signal level (TSL). The range
of values depends on the frequency and RFU type.
10 To mute the TX output of the radio, select Mute in the TX mute field. To
unmute the TX output of the radio, select Unmute.

12 In the Script ID field, select the MRMC script you want to assign to the radio.
For a full explanation of choosing an MRMC script, see Configuring the Radio
(MRMC) Script(s).
13 In the Operational Mode field, select the ACM mode: Fixed or Adaptive.
◦ Fixed ACM mode applies constant TX and RX rates. However, unlike regular
◦ In Adaptive ACM mode, TX and RX rates are dynamic. An ACM-enabled
channel fading conditions.
14 Do one of the following:
◦ If you selected Fixed in the Operational Mode field, the next field is
Profile. Select the ACM profile for the radio in the Profile field.
◦ If you selected Adaptive in the Operational Mode field, the following two
fields are displayed:
◦ Maximum profile – Enter the maximum profile for the script. See
Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s).
Page 132 of 1094

◦
Minimum profile – Enter the minimum profile for the script. See

16 In the In Band Management field, select Yes to configure in-band
management, or No if you do not need in-band management. If you select
Yes, the Management VLAN field appears.
17 If you selected Yes in the In Band Management field, select the management
VLAN in the Management VLAN field.
Note: You can only select Untagged if you are not using IP Forwarding. If you
select Untagged and you want to configure IP Forwarding later, you
will first have to change Untagged to a specific VLAN. See Mate
Management Access (IP Forwarding) (CLI).
18 If you want to use the Ethernet interface as well as the radio interface for in-
band management, select In Band includes Ethernet interface.
Page 133 of 1094

19 Click Finish. Page 6 of the 1+0 Quick Configuration wizard opens. This page
displays the parameters you have selected for the link.
Figure 52: 1+0 Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 6 (Summary Page)

20 To complete configuration of the link, click Submit. If you want to go back and
change any of the parameters, click Back. After you click Submit, the unit is
reset.
3.2.2 Configuring a 1+0 (Repeater) Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
To configure a 1+0 repeater (radio-to-radio) link using the Quick Configuration
wizard:
1 Select Quick Configuration > PIPE > Single Carrier > 1+0 (Repeater). Page 1 of
the 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration wizard opens.
Figure 53: 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1

2 In the Radio #1 Interface field, select the first radio interface for the link.
3 Click Next. Page 2 of the 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration wizard opens.
Page 134 of 1094


4 In the Radio #2 Interface field, select the second radio interface for the link.
will connect the radios. Options are:
Page 135 of 1094

7 For each interface, configure the following radio parameters:

MHz.
Note: For IP-20E and IP-20V, a frequency scanner is available to scan the
20V).
iii In the TX Level (dBm) field, enter the desired TX signal level (TSL). The
iv To mute the TX output of the radio, select Mute in the TX mute field. To

9 For each interface, configure the following MRMC script parameters.
10 In the Script ID field, select the MRMC script you want to assign to the radio.
For a full explanation of choosing an MRMC script, see Configuring the Radio
(MRMC) Script(s).
11 In the Operational Mode field, select the ACM mode for the radio: Fixed or
Adaptive.
Profile. Select the ACM profile for the radio in the Profile field.
Page 136 of 1094

◦

VLAN in the Management VLAN field. Management will be available through
both radio interfaces.
Page 137 of 1094

16 Click Finish. Page 6 of the 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration wizard opens.
This page displays the parameters you have selected for the link.
Figure 58: 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 6 (Summary Page)
17 To complete configuration of the link, click Submit. If you want to go back and
change any of the parameters, click Back. After you click Submit, the unit is
reset.
3.2.3 Configuring a 2 x (1+0) Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard

To configure a 2 x (1+0) link using the Quick Configuration wizard:
1 Select Quick Configuration > PIPE > Single Carrier > 2 X (1 + 0). Page 1 of the
2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration wizard opens.
Figure 59: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1
Page 138 of 1094

2 In the First PIPE Type field, select the Attached Interface type for the service
that will connect the first Ethernet interface and the first radio interface.
Options are:
3 In the Ethernet Interface field, select the Ethernet interface or a LAG that will
send and receive traffic to and from the first radio interface.
4 Click Next. Page 2 of the 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration wizard opens.
Page 139 of 1094

5 In the First Radio Interface field, select the radio interface for the first link.

7 In the Second PIPE Type field, select the Attached Interface type for the
service that will connect the second Ethernet interface and the second radio
interface. Options are:
8 In the Ethernet Interface field, select an Ethernet interface or a LAG that will
send and receive traffic to and from the second radio interface.
Page 140 of 1094


10 In the Second Radio Interface field, select the radio interface for the second
link.

12 If you want to set up an XPIC configuration, select XPIC. For full instructions on
configuring XPIC, including antenna alignment instructions, see Configuring
XPIC.
Page 141 of 1094

Figure 64: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 6 (XPIC)
Figure 65: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 6 (Non-XPIC)
Page 142 of 1094

14 You can configure the basic radio parameters for each interface. If you
selected XPIC in the Radio XPIC Configuration page, configure the parameters
for the group rather than the individual interfaces.
15 For each radio interface or XPIC group, configure the following radio
parameters.
MHz.
Figure 66: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 7 (XPIC)
Figure 67: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 7 (Non-XPIC)
Page 143 of 1094

17 You can configure the MRMC script parameters for each interface. For an XPIC
group, configure the parameters for the group rather than the individual
interfaces.
18 For each interface or XPIC group, configure the following MRMC script
parameters.
i In the Script ID field, select the MRMC script you want to assign to the
radio or XPIC group. For a full explanation of choosing an MRMC script, see
ii In the Operational Mode field, select the ACM mode: Fixed or Adaptive.
iii Do one of the following:
Profile. Select the ACM profile in the Profile field.
◦

20 In the First In Band Management field, select Yes to configure in-band
management for the first 1+0 link, or No if you do not need in-band
management for this link. If you select Yes, the Management VLAN field
appears.
Page 144 of 1094


24 In the Second In Band Management field, select Yes to configure in-band
management for the second 1+0 link, or No if you do not need in-band
management for this link. If you select Yes, the Management VLAN field
appears.
27 Click Finish. The Summary page opens. This page displays the parameters you
have selected for the group.
Page 145 of 1094

Figure 70: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard –Summary Page (XPIC)
Figure 71: 2 X (1 + 0) Quick Configuration Wizard –Summary Page (No XPIC)

28 To complete configuration of the links, click Submit. If you want to go back
and change any of the parameters, click Back. After you click Submit, the unit
is reset.
Page 146 of 1094

3.2.4 Configuring a 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC Link Using the Quick Configuration
Wizard
To configure a 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC link using the Quick Configuration wizard:
1 Select Quick Configuration > PIPE > Multi Carrier ABC > 2+0. Page 1 of the 2 +
0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration wizard opens.
Figure 72: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1

2 In the Ethernet Interface field, select an Ethernet interface or a LAG for the
group.
3 In the Radio #1 Interface field, select the first radio interface for the group.
Note: The Number of Radio Interfaces field is read-only.
5 Click Next. The Radio #2 Selection page opens.
Figure 73: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio #2 Selection Page
Page 147 of 1094

6 In the Radio #2 Interface field, select the second radio interface for the group.
7 Click Next. The Radio XPIC Configuration page opens. If you want to set up an
XPIC configuration, select the radio pair. For full instructions on configuring
XPIC, including antenna alignment instructions, see Configuring XPIC.
Figure 74: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio XPIC Configuration
Page
8 Click Next. The Radio Parameters Configuration page opens. You can configure
the basic radio parameters for each interface. If you selected XPIC in the Radio
XPIC Configuration page, you configure the parameters for the group rather
than the individual interfaces.
Figure 75: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio Parameters
Configuration Page
Page 148 of 1094

Figure 76: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio Parameters
Configuration Page (XPIC)
9 For each interface or XPIC group, configure the following radio parameters.
MHz.
20V).
10 Click Next. The Radio MRMC Script Configuration page opens. You can
configure the MRMC script parameters for each interface. For an XPIC group,
you configure the parameters for the group rather than the individual
interfaces.
Page 149 of 1094

Figure 77: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio MRMC Script
Configuration Page
Figure 78: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio MRMC Script
Configuration Page – XPIC
11 For each interface or XPIC group, configure the following MRMC script
parameters.
12 In the Script ID field, select the MRMC script you want to assign to the radio or
XPIC group. For a full explanation of choosing an MRMC script, see Configuring
Page 150 of 1094

◦
15 Click Next. The Management Configuration page opens.
Figure 79: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Management Configuration
Page
Page 151 of 1094

Figure 80: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard –Summary Page
20 To complete configuration of the Multi-Carrier ABC group, click Submit. If you
want to go back and change any of the parameters, click Back. After you click
Submit, the unit is reset.
Page 152 of 1094

3.2.5 Configuring a Multiband (Enhanced Multi-Carrier ABC) Link Using the

Quick Configuration Wizard
For important general information about Multiband links, see Multiband
Overview.
To configure a Multiband node using the Quick Configuration wizard:
1 Connect the external switch to the Eth1 port on the IP-20E.
2 Connect the Eth2 port on the IP-20E to the unit paired with the IP-20E. When
the paired unit is an IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S, use the Eth2 port on the IP-
20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S.
3 Verify that no service points are configured on the Eth2 port of the IP-20E. If
there are service points on Eth2, remove them. See Deleting a Service Point.
4 On the IP-20E, select Quick Configuration > PIPE > Multi Carrier ABC >
Multiband. Page 1 of the Multiband Quick Configuration wizard opens.
Figure 81: Multiband Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1

6 In the Ethernet Interface field, select the port connected to the external
switch. This should be Ethernet: Slot 1, Port 1.
7 In the Radio #1 Interface field, select Radio: Slot 2, Port 1.
Page 153 of 1094

8 Click Next. Page 2 of the Multiband Quick Configuration wizard opens.

9 In the Ethernet #1 Interface field, select Ethernet: Slot 1, Port 2.
10 In the Maximum Bandwidth (Mbps) field, select the maximum traffic that the
IP-20E will pass to the paired unit.
◦ When using Fixed ACM mode, set this parameter to the actual rate you
want the paired unit to broadcast.
◦ When using Adaptive ACM mode, set this parameter to the maximum of
the paired unit’s capacity.
The default value is 1000 Mbps.
Note: The Maximum Bandwidth represents the L1 capacity of the radio link
connected to the Ethernet member. The actual bandwidth that will be
available for traffic is less due to overhead.
When using a third-party radio as the paired unit, it is particularly

important to set this parameter properly in order to ensure optimal
performance. Failure to properly set this parameter may lead to
frequent pauses as the queue fills up during low capacity periods, such
as when weather conditions cause the ACM profile to drop.
Page 154 of 1094


12 Configure the following radio parameters.
MHz.

14 In the Script ID field, select the MRMC script you want to assign to the radio or
XPIC group. For a full explanation of choosing an MRMC script, see Configuring
Page 155 of 1094

◦

Page 156 of 1094

Note: If you want to manage the paired unit via the IP-20E, refer to the
instructions in Inband Management via the IP-20E.
Figure 86: Multiband Quick Configuration Wizard – Summary Page

22 To complete configuration of the Multiband group on the IP-20E, click Submit.
If you want to go back and change any of the parameters, click Back. After you
click Submit, the unit is reset.
Note: After adding Eth2 to the Multiband group, an alarm is raised (Alarm
1794). This alarm is cleared when the unit is reset.
After configuring the Multiband group on the IP-20E, you must perform the
following configurations on the paired unit:
1 Configure a service between the Ethernet port connected to the IP-20E and
the radio or Multi-Carrier ABC group being used for the Multiband link. See
Configuring Ethernet Service(s).
Note: If the paired unit is an IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, IP-20S, or third-party
microwave radio, the service must be a Pipe service. If the paired unit
is an IP-20N or IP-20A, any service type can be used. However, this
service must be given higher priority than any other service attached
to the interfaces used for Multiband.
2 Configure Automatic State Propagation with ASP trigger by remote fault
enabled. See Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss
Forwarding.
Page 157 of 1094

3 Configure Bandwidth Notification. For instructions, see Multiband

Configuration, Step 8.
i Select Ethernet > Protocols > Bandwidth Notification. The Bandwidth
Notification page opens.
Figure 87: Bandwidth Notification Page (Empty)

ii Click Add. The Bandwidth Notification – Add page opens.
Figure 88: Bandwidth Notification – Add Page
Page 158 of 1094

iii In the Name field, select a descriptive name.

iv In the Protocol Type field, select Radio BNM.
v In the Admin field, select Up.
vi In the Monitored Interface field, select the interface or group connected
to the IP-20E.
vii In the TX VLAN Type field, select the VLAN type that will be used in
bandwidth notification messages. Options are:
◦ C-Vlan
◦ S-Vlan
viii In the TX VLAN field, select the VLAN to be used in bandwidth notification
messages. Options are:
◦ 1-4090
◦ Untagged
Note: You should configure the same VLAN encapsulation as the radio
service point attached to the service for the Multiband group. For
example, if the service point on the radio interface is C-Vlan 20, select
C-Vlan in the TX VLAN Type field and 20 in the TX VLAN field.
ix Click Apply. The configuration is added to the Bandwidth Notification page
with the Protocol Type Radio BNM.
Figure 89: Bandwidth Notification Page (Populated with Radio BNM)
Page 159 of 1094

3.3 Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC

Note: This option is only relevant for IP-20C and IP-20C-HP units.
• Multi-Carrier ABC Overview
• Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group
• Configuring the Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override Option
• Adding and Removing Group Members
• Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group
3.3.1 Multi-Carrier ABC Overview

Multi-Carrier Adaptive Bandwidth Control (ABC) enables multiple separate radio
carriers to be shared by a single Ethernet port. This provides an Ethernet link over
the radio with the total sum of the capacity of all the radios in the group, while
still behaving as a single Ethernet interface. In Multi-Carrier ABC mode, traffic is
dynamically divided among the carriers, at the Layer 1 level, without requiring
Ethernet Link Aggregation.
Load balancing is performed regardless of the number of MAC addresses or the
number of traffic flows. During fading events which cause ACM modulation
changes, each carrier fluctuates independently with hitless switchovers between
modulations, increasing capacity over a given bandwidth and maximizing
spectrum utilization. The result is 100% utilization of radio resources in which
traffic load is balanced based on instantaneous radio capacity per carrier.
One Multi-Carrier ABC group that includes both radio interfaces can be configured
per unit. The MRMC scripts for both radio carriers must be identical.
3.3.2 Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group

To configure a Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 Select Radio > Groups > Multi Carrier ABC. The Multi Carrier ABC page opens.
Figure 90: Multi-Carrier ABC Group Page (Empty)

2 Click Create Group. The first page of the Create ABC Group wizard opens.
Page 160 of 1094

Figure 91: Create ABC Group Wizard – First Page

3 Optionally, enter a descriptive name for the group in the Group Name field.
4 In the Minimum bandwidth field, select Enable to enable Minimum
Bandwidth Override or Disable to disable Minimum Bandwidth Override.
5 In the Minimum bandwidth threshold field, enter the minimum bandwidth
override threshold (in Mbps). The threshold can be between 0 – 20000 Mbps,
with a resolution of 1 Mbps. If the group’s bandwidth capacity falls beneath
this threshold, the group is automatically placed in Down state until the
bandwidth capacity exceeds this threshold.
Note: For an explanation of Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth
Override, see Configuring the Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth
Override Option.
6 Click Next. The next page of the Create Group wizard opens.
Figure 92: Create ABC Group Wizard – Second Page

7 In the Member 1 field, select a radio interface.
Note: Although you may select the Radio members in any order you wish,
ABC configuration will not succeed unless Radio slot 2 port 1 is
selected first and Radio slot 2 port 2 is selected second.
8 Click Next. The next page of the Create Group wizard opens.
9 In the Member 2 field, select a radio interface.
10 Click Next. A summary page opens.
Page 161 of 1094

Figure 93: Create ABC Group Wizard – Finish Page

11 Click Submit. A message appears indicating whether or not the operation was
successful.
12 Click Close to close the Create Group wizard. You must click Submit before
clicking Close, or the selections you made will be discarded and the process
cancelled.
3.3.3 Configuring the Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override Option

A multi-carrier ABC group can be configured to be placed in Operational State
Down if the group’s capacity falls beneath a user-defined threshold.
By default, the Multi-Carrier ABC minimum bandwidth override option is disabled.
When enabled, the Multi-Carrier ABC group is automatically placed in Operational
State Down in the event that the group’s aggregated capacity falls beneath the
user-configured threshold. The group is returned to Operational State Up when its
aggregated capacity goes above the threshold.
In order to use Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override, an ASP group
must be configured on the IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit in which the Monitored
Interface is the Multi-Carrier ABC group and the Controlled Interface is the
Ethernet interface that faces the upstream IP-20 unit. See Configuring Automatic
State Propagation.
An alarm is also raised when this feature is enabled and the group’s aggregated
capacity falls beneath the threshold:
• Alarm ID – 2201
• Alarm Description – Multi Carrier ABC bandwidth is below the threshold
This option is used in conjunction with the LAG group shutdown in case of
degradation event option (see Enabling and Disabling LAG Group Shutdown in
Case of Degradation Event ) in cases where the operator wants to re-route traffic
from an upstream switch connected to an another IP-20 unit whenever the link is
providing less than a certain capacity. To set up a configuration in which a drop in
the capacity of the Multi-Carrier ABC group closes the Ethernet port in the
upstream FibeAir IP-20 unit, you must perform all of the following steps:
• Enable the Multi-Carrier ABC minimum bandwidth option and set a threshold
on the IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit, as described below.
Page 162 of 1094

• Enable an ASP group on the IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit, where the Monitored
State Propagation.
• Enable the LAG group shutdown in case of degradation event option on the
upstream IP-20 unit.
Notes: When using in-band management, management is lost in the event of
radio failure and returns when the radio link is restored.
The minimum bandwidth threshold is based on the capacity of the
Multi-Carrier ABC group, not the combined capacities of the group’s
members. The group’s aggregated capacity is displayed in the Multi-
Carrier ABC Group – Edit Group page (Figure 94).
You can configure Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override when creating
the group. See Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group.
To configure Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override after the group has
been created:
1 Select the group in the Multi-Carrier ABC table and click Edit Group. The Edit
Group page opens.
Figure 94: Multi-Carrier ABC Group – Edit Group Page

2 In the Minimum bandwidth field, select Enable to enable Minimum
Bandwidth Override or Disable to disable Minimum Bandwidth Override.
3 In the Minimum bandwidth threshold field, enter the minimum bandwidth
override threshold (in Mbps). If the group’s bandwidth capacity falls beneath
this threshold, the group is automatically placed in Operational State Down
until the bandwidth capacity exceeds this threshold.
4 Click Apply.
Page 163 of 1094

3.3.4 Adding and Removing Group Members

You can add and remove interfaces from the group after creating the group. This
is relevant if you want to delete a Multi-Carrier ABC group, since you must remove
the members individually before deleting the group.
To remove interfaces:
1 Select the group in the Multi-Carrier ABC table and click Add/Remove
Members. The Add/Remove Members page opens.
Figure 95: Multi Carrier ABC Group - Add/Remove Members Page

2 Select a member in the Remove Member field or select Remove All.
Note: Although you may select the Radio members in any order you wish,
member removal will not succeed unless Radio slot 2 port 1 is
removed first and Radio slot 2 port 2 is removed second.
3 Click Apply.
4 Repeat these steps to remove additional members from the group.
3.3.5 Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group

To delete a Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 Select Radio > Groups > Multi Carrier ABC. The Multi Carrier ABC page opens
(Figure 90).
2 Select the group in the Multi-Carrier ABC table and click Add/Remove
Members. The abc-config-table – Add/Remove Members page opens (Figure
95).
3 Remove each member of the group. See Adding and Removing Group
Members.
4 Click Close to close the Multi Carrier ABC – Add/Remove Members page.
5 Select the group and click Delete.
Page 164 of 1094

3.4 Configuring Multiband

This feature requires:
• IP-20E ESP hardware version
• When used with IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S, an ESS hardware version (two
SFP ports) is required for the paired unit in order to configure synchronization
and/or in-band management for the paired unit.
3.4.1 Multiband Overview

Multiband bundles E-Band and microwave radios in a single group that is shared
with an Ethernet interface. This provides an Ethernet link over the radio with
capacity of up to 2.5 Gbps. A Multiband link is highly resilient because the
microwave link acts, in effect, as a backup for the E-Band link.
In the event of radio failure in one device, the other device continues to operate
to the extent of its available capacity. Thus, operators benefit from both the high
capacity of E-Band and the high reliability of microwave.
Notes: LLDP is not supported between Eth2 of the IP-20E and the Ethernet
port to which it is connected in the paired unit in Multiband
configurations.
Multiband with CeraOS version 10.5 is not compatible over the link
with Multiband using earlier versions, and Multiband with CeraOS
version 10.7 and higher is not compatible over the link with Multiband
using earlier versions. Therefore, when upgrading the software on a
Multiband link to CeraOS 10.5 or to CeraOS 10.7 or higher from an
earlier version, make sure to upgrade the remote unit first when using
inband management to avoid loss of management.
Page 165 of 1094

3.4.1.1 Multiband Operation

A Multiband node consists of an IP-20E unit and an IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, IP-20S, IP-
20N, IP-20A, or a third-party microwave radio.
Note: Multiband is also supported with IP-50E. For more information and
configuration instructions, refer to the User Guide for IP-50E, CeraOS
10.9.5 or higher.
In a Multiband configuration, all traffic enters the node via the 10G port on the IP-
20E (Eth1). Traffic is passed to a Multiband group that includes Eth2 and the radio
carrier.
When traffic is passed from the IP-20E to the paired unit, it is transmitted via Eth2
on the IP-20E to either a single radio carrier or 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC group, and
transmitted. To ensure a smooth traffic flow, certain configurations must be
performed on the paired unit.
When the IP-20E is paired with an IP-20 microwave unit, the following must be
configured on the IP-20 microwave unit:
• A service must be configured between the Ethernet port connected to the IP-
20E and the radio or Multi-Carrier ABC group being used for the Multiband
link.
• Automatic State Propagation, with ASP trigger by remote fault enabled.
• Radio BNM.
When the IP-20E is paired with a third-party unit, the following must be
configured on the third-party unit:
• The unit’s switching mechanism must be set to Pipe mode and a Pipe service
must be configured between the Ethernet port connected to the IP-20E and
the paired unit’s radio or radio group.
• Automatic State Propagation must be enabled.
• 802.3X Flow Control must be enabled.
Note: The latency differential between the IP-20E and the paired unit cannot
be more than 1.6 ms. That means that under all foreseeable
conditions, such as a high ACM profile on one unit and a low ACM
profile on the other unit, there should be no more than a 1.6 ms
difference between the latency of the two radio carriers in the
Multiband link.
Page 166 of 1094

Figure 96 illustrates Multiband operation with an IP-20E and IP-20C or IP-20C-HP.

Figure 96 illustrates a configuration that includes synchronization and
management of the IP-20C/IP-20C-HP via the IP-20E. Both of these items are
optional, and require an optical cable between Eth3 on the IP-20E and Eth3 on the
IP-20C/IP-20C-HP, as described in the following sections.
Management (Optional) and/or

Management
MGMT
Synchronization (Optional)
Eth1
(10GE)
External Multiband
GbE Port
Eth2 Carrier
Switch Group
Eth3
Traffic
IP-20E
Eth1
Carrier 1
Management Eth2
Pipe Carrier 2
(Optional) and/or
Synchronization
(Optional) Multi-Carrier
Eth 3
ABC Group
IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
Figure 96: Multiband Operation – IP-20E and IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
Page 167 of 1094

Figure 97 illustrates a split-mount Multiband configuration in which an IP-20E

operates with an IP-20N or an IP-20A IDU connected to an RFU-D or an RFU-D-HP.
In this figure, the RFU carriers are configured in an RFU-based Multi-Carrier ABC
group. Multiband can also be configured using a single-carrier RFU-D or RFU-D-HP
configuration, or with an RFU-C connected to an RMC-B.
Note: TCC-based Multi-Carrier ABC and TCC Redundancy cannot be used
with Multiband.
Figure 97 illustrates a configuration that includes synchronization and
management of the IP-20N or IP-20A unit via the IP-20E. Both of these items are
optional, and require an optical cable between any free 1 Gbps optical SFP port on
the IP-20N or IP-20A and Eth3 on the IP-20E, as described in the following
sections.

Management Synchronization (Optional)
MGMT
Eth1
(10GE)
External Multiband
GbE Port Eth2 Carrier
Switch Traffic Group
Eth3
Management (Optional)
and/or Synchronization IP-20E
(Optional)
Carrier 1
Eth (1G) RIC-D

Pipe Carrier 2
Multi-
Eth (1G)
Carrier
ABC Group
IP-20N/IP-20A RFU-D/RFU-D-HP
Figure 97: Multiband Operation – IP-20E and IP-20N or IP-20A
Page 168 of 1094

Figure 98 illustrates Multiband operation with an IP-20E paired with a third-party

radio. Figure 98 illustrates a configuration that includes synchronization and
management of the third-party unit via the IP-20E. Synchronization via the IP-20E
requires an optical cable between Eth3 on the IP-20E and an Ethernet port on the
third-party unit, as described in the following sections.

Management
MGMT
Synchronization (Optional)
Eth1
(10GE)
External Multiband
GbE Port
Eth2 Carrier
Switch Group
Eth3
Traffic
IP-20E
Eth
Management Pipe
(Optional) and/or Carrier
Synchronization
(Optional) Eth
Third-Party Unit
Figure 98: Multiband Operation – IP-20E and Third-Party Unit
3.4.2 Multiband Configuration

To configure a Multiband node:
2 Connect the Eth2 port on the IP-20E to the paired unit. When the paired unit
is an IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S, use the Eth2 port on the IP-20C, IP-20C-HP,
or IP-20S. When the paired unit is an IP-20N or IP-20A, use any 1 Gbps SFP
port on the IP-20N or IP-20A.
there are service points on Eth2, remove them. See Deleting a Service Point.
4 Set Eth2 on the IP-20E to Admin – Down. See Enabling the Interfaces
(Interface Manager).
Page 169 of 1094

5 On the IP-20E, configure a Multiband group that includes Eth2 and the radio:
i Select Radio > Groups > Multi-Carrier ABC. The Multi Carrier ABC Groups
page opens.
Figure 99: Multi Carrier ABC Groups Page (Empty)

ii Click Create Group. Page 1 of the Create ABC Group wizard opens.
Figure 100: Create ABC Group Wizard – Page 1

iii In the Group ID field, select Enhanced Multi Carrier ABC (Group #1).
iv Optionally, in the Group Name field, enter a descriptive name for the
group.
Page 170 of 1094

v Click Next. Page 2 of the Create ABC Group wizard opens.

vi In the Member #1 field, select Radio: Slot 2, Port 1.
vii Click Next. Page 3 of the Create ABC Group wizard opens.

viii In the Member #2 field under Member Selection, select Ethernet: Slot 1,
Port 2.
ix In the Member #2 field under Maximum Bandwidth (Mbps), select the
maximum traffic that the IP-20E will pass to the paired unit.
◦ When using Fixed ACM mode, set this parameter to the actual rate
you want the paired unit to broadcast.
◦ When using Adaptive ACM mode, set this parameter to the maximum
of the paired unit’s capacity.
Page 171 of 1094



x Click Finish. The Selection Summary page of the Create ABC Group wizard
opens.

xi Click Submit. The group is added to the Multi Carrier ABC page.
Figure 104: Multi Carrier ABC Groups Page (Populated with Multiband Group)
xii Reset the IP-20E. See Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset.
Page 172 of 1094

6 On the paired unit, configure a service between the port receiving traffic from
the IP-20E and the radio or Multi-Carrier ABC group. See Configuring Ethernet
Service(s).
7 On the paired unit, configure Automatic State Propagation with ASP trigger by
remote fault enabled. See Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link
Loss Forwarding.
8 If the paired unit is an IP-20 microwave unit, configure Radio BNM:
Note: If the paired unit is a third-party radio, enable 802.3X Flow Control.
i Select Ethernet > Protocols > Bandwidth Notification. The Bandwidth
Figure 105: Bandwidth Notification Page (Empty)
Page 173 of 1094

ii Click Add. The Bandwidth Notification – Add page opens.

iii In the Name field, select a descriptive name.
iv In the Protocol Type field, select Radio BNM.
v In the Admin field, select Up.
vi In the Monitored Interface field, select the interface or group connected
to the IP-20E.
vii In the TX VLAN Type field, select the VLAN type that will be used in
bandwidth notification messages. Options are:
◦ C-Vlan
◦ S-Vlan
viii In the TX VLAN field, select the VLAN to be used in bandwidth notification
messages. Options are:
◦ 1-4090
◦ Untagged
ix Click Apply. The configuration is added to the Bandwidth Notification page
with the Protocol Type Radio BNM.
Page 174 of 1094

Figure 107: Bandwidth Notification Page (Populated with Radio BNM)
3.4.3 Multiband Management

The IP-20E unit in a Multiband configuration can be managed normally, as in any
other configuration. For in-band management of the IP-20E, configure the
management service on the IP-20E Multiband group. See Configuring In-Band
Management.
The following options are available for managing the paired unit in a Multiband
configuration:
• Inband management via the IP-20E
• Inband management directly from the external switch
• Out-of-Band management
Page 175 of 1094

3.4.3.1 Inband Management via the IP-20E

The paired unit can managed via the IP-20E. In-band management via the IP-20E
requires that the paired unit have at least two free 1G SFP ports. When the paired
unit is an IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S, this requires an ESS hardware version for
the IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S. To manage the paired unit via the IP-20E, an
optical cable must be connected between port Eth3 on the IP-20E and Eth3 on the
IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S or the Ethernet port receiving management data on
the IP-20N, IP_20A, or third-party unit.
Since Eth2 and Eth3 on the IP-20E are accessed via a single gland on a single
physical port, a special cable must be used. This cable fits into the single gland on
the IP-20E in order to connect to both Eth2 and Eth3. On the other side of the
cable, the cable is split so that a separate cable can be inserted into the gland for
each of the Ethernet ports on the paired unit.
Eth2 Eth2
Port 2
(CSFP)
Eth3 Eth3
IP-20E Paired Unit
Figure 108: Multiband Cable for Use with CSFP Port
Table 20: Multiband Cable for Use with CSFP Port

Cable Marketing Model Cable Description
IP-20_FO_SM_LC2SNG2LC_ARM_5m CABLE,FO,DUAL LC TO LC/LC SPLIT,5.3M,SM,3xM28

GLAND,OUTDOOR
Page 176 of 1094

On the IP-20E, a CSFP module must be used for Port 2 in order to utilize both Eth2
and Eth3.
When the paired unit is an IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S, Eth2 and Eth3 on the IP-
20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S must use BiDi SFP modules.
Management and
Power (PoE) Port 1
(MGT/PoE)
GbE Port Port 2

CSFP (Eth2/Eth3)
External GbE Port

Traffic
Port 3
SFP+
Switch (Eth1)
IP-20E (ESP)
Multiband
Cable
PWR
Power
Eth1/PoE
Traffic
BiDi
Eth2
Power SFP
Source Management BiDi

Eth 3
and/or SyncE SFP
MGT/PROT
IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or
IP-20S (ESS)
Figure 109: Multiband Configuration with Inband Management and/or SyncE via
the IP-20E
A management service must be defined between the management port of the
IP-20E and Eth3 on the IP-20E. This transmits management to the paired unit. See
Configuring In-Band Management.
Note: To avoid loops, in-band management must not be configured on the
slave unit.
Page 177 of 1094

3.4.3.2 Inband Management Directly via the External Switch

An IP-20 microwave radio paired with an IP-20E can be managed by means of a TP
cable connected to the MGT port on the IP-20 and to the LAN port on a PC or
laptop. If the paired unit is a third-party radio, it can also be managed via out-of-
band management.
In this configuration, the special Multiband cable is not required unless you are
using synchronization via the IP-20E for the paired unit. See Configuring
Synchronization in a Multiband Node.
Management and
Power (PoE) Port 1
IP-20E (MGT/PoE)
GbE Port Port 2

SFP (Eth2/Eth3)
External GbE Port

Traffic
Port 3
SFP+
Switch (Eth1)
GbE Port
Traffic IP-20E (ESP)
PWR
Power
Eth1/PoE
SFP Eth2
Power Management
(IP-20C)
Source Eth 3
MGT/PROT
IP-20S (ESS)
Figure 110: Multiband Configuration with Direct Inband Management to the Paired
Unit
Page 178 of 1094

3.4.3.3 Out-of-Band Management

The IP-20 microwave radio can be managed by means of a TP cable connected to
the MGT port on the IP-20 and to the LAN port on a PC or laptop.
In this scenario, the IP-20E is managed by connecting the PC or laptop used for
management to the PoE Injector, which provides transfers power and
management to the MGT/PoE port of the IP-20E.
Management and
Management Power (PoE)
(IP-20E) PoE IP-20E Port 1
(MGT/PoE)
Injector
Port 2
SFP (Eth2/Eth3)
GbE Port Traffic

Port 3
SFP+ (Eth1)
External
Switch Traffic IP-20E (ESP)
Power PWR
Eth1/PoE
Power
Source SFP Eth2
Eth 3
Management
(IP-20C/IP-20S)
MGT/PROT
IP-20S (ESS)
Figure 111: Multiband Configuration with Direct Inband Management to the IP-
20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S
Page 179 of 1094

3.4.4 Configuring Synchronization in a Multiband Node

SyncE and 1588 Transparent Clock can be used in Multiband nodes. SyncE and
1588 Transparent Clock can be configured for both the IP-20E and the unit paired
with the IP-20E.
Notes: When a third-party unit is paired with the IP-20E, it is a
prerequisite that the third-party radio unit support SyncE and, if
required, 1588 Transparent Clock in order to provide
synchronization for the Multiband node.
In CeraOS 11.3, synchronization for the paired unit requires an optical cable
between port Eth3 on the IP-20E and Eth3 on the IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S or a
free 1G SFP port on the IP-20N, IP-20A, or third-party radio. In this configuration,
Port 2 on the IP-20E must be used as a CSFP port. The paired unit must have at
least two 1G SFP ports. For IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S, this means an ESS
hardware version is required. Eth2 and Eth3 on the IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S
must use BiDi SFP modules.
The cable fits into the single gland on the IP-20E in order to connect to both Eth2
and Eth3. On the other side of the cable, the cable is split so that a separate cable
can be inserted into the gland for each of the Ethernet ports on the paired unit.
This is the same cable and the same setup used for inband management via the
IP-20E. For details, see Inband Management via the IP-20E.
To configure synchronization on a Multiband node:
1 On the IP-20E, configure three synchronization sources: Eth1, the radio, and
Eth3. Do not configure Eth2 as a synchronization source.
2 On the paired unit, configure two synchronization sources: the Ethernet port
receiving synchronization from the IP-20E, and the radio. When using Multi-
Carrier ABC, configure both radios as synchronization sources.
In ring configurations, configure priority order in the direction of traffic on the
ring.
For instructions on configuring SyncE, see Configuring the Sync Source.
For instructions on configuring 1588 Transparent Clock, see Configuring 1588
Transparent Clock.
Page 180 of 1094

3.5 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP

Link aggregation (LAG) enables you to group several physical Ethernet or radio
interfaces into a single logical interface bound to a single MAC address. This
logical interface is known as a LAG group. Traffic sent to the interfaces in a LAG
group is distributed by means of a load balancing mechanism. IP-20 uses a
distribution function of up to Layer 4 in order to generate the most efficient
distribution among the LAG physical ports.
This section explains how to configure LAG and includes the following topics:
• LAG Overview
• Configuring a LAG Group
• Enabling and Disabling LAG Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event
• Configuring Enhanced LAG Distribution
• Deleting a LAG Group
• Displaying LACP Parameters and Statistics
3.5.1 LAG Overview

LAG can be used to provide redundancy for Ethernet interfaces, both on the
same IP-20 unit (line protection) and on separate units (line protection and
equipment protection). LAGs can also be used to provide redundancy for radio
links.
LAG can also be used to aggregate several interfaces in order to create a wider
(aggregate) link. For example, LAG can be used to create a 4 Gbps channel.
You can create up to four LAG groups. The following restrictions exist with respect
to LAG groups:
• Only physical interfaces (including radio interfaces), not logical interfaces, can
belong to a LAG group.
• Interfaces can only be added to the LAG group if no services or service points
are attached to the interface.
• Any classification rules defined for the interface are overridden by the
classification rules defined for the LAG group.
• When removing an interface from a LAG group, the removed interface is
assigned the default interface values.
There are no restrictions on the number of interfaces that can be included in a
LAG. It is recommended, but not required, that each interface in the LAG have the
same parameters (e.g., speed, duplex mode).
The LAG page lists all LAG groups configured on the unit.
Note: To add or remove an Ethernet interface to a LAG group, the interface
must be in an administrative state of “down”. This restriction does not
apply to radio interfaces. For instructions on setting the administrative
state of an interface, see Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager).
Page 181 of 1094

IP-20 supports LACP, which expands the capabilities of static LAG and provides
interoperability with third-party equipment that uses LACP. LACP improves the
communication between LAG members. This improves error detection capabilities
in situations such as improper LAG configuration or improper cabling. It also
enables the LAG to detect uni-directional failure and remove the link from the
LAG, preventing packet loss.
LACP is enabled as part of the LAG configuration process. It should only be used if
the LAG is in a link with another LACP-enabled LAG.
Note: LACP is not supported with unit protection. For unit protection, a
special, limited implementation is configured on the logical interface
level. See Configuring Line Protection Mode.
LACP can only be used with Ethernet interfaces.
LACP cannot be used with Enhanced LAG Distribution or with the LAG
Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event feature.
3.5.2 Configuring a LAG Group
Page 182 of 1094

3.5.2.1 Adding and Removing Group Members

To create a LAG group:
1 Select Ethernet > Groups > LAG. The LAG page opens.
2 Click Create Group underneath the Link Aggregation table. The Create LAG
Group page opens.
Figure 112: Create LAG Group – Page 1

3 In the Group ID field, select a LAG Group ID. Only LAG IDs that are not already
assigned to a LAG group appear in the dropdown list.
4 In the LACP field, select Enable to enable LACP on the LAG or Disable to
disable LACP on the LAG. The default value is Disable.
5 In the Member 1 field, select an interface to assign to the LAG group. Only
interfaces not already assigned to a LAG group appear in the dropdown list.
6 Click Next. A new Create LAG Group page opens.
Figure 113: Create LAG Group – Page 2

7 In the Member 2 field, select an additional interface to assign to the LAG
Group.
Page 183 of 1094

8 To add additional interfaces to the LAG group, repeat steps 5 and 6.

9 When you have finished adding interfaces to the LAG group, click Finish. A
new Create LAG Group page opens displaying all the interfaces you have
selected to include in the LAG group.
Figure 114: Create LAG Group – Final Page

10 Click Submit. If all the interfaces meet the criteria listed above, a message
appears that the LAG group has been successfully created. If not, a message
appears indicating that the LAG group was not created and giving the reason.
Page 184 of 1094

3.5.2.2 Editing a LAG Group

To edit an existing LAG group:
2 Select the LAG group you want to edit in the Link Aggregation table.
3 Click Edit underneath the Link Aggregation table. The Link Aggregation - Edit
page opens.
Figure 115: Link Aggregation - Edit Page

4 Do any of the following:
◦ To enable or disable LACP, select Enable or Disable in the LACP field. See
LAG Overview for restrictions.
◦ To enable or disable LAG Group Shutdown in case of Degradation Event,
select Enable or Disable in the LAG degrade field. See Enabling and
Disabling LAG Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event for
restrictions.
◦ To remove an interface from the LAG Group, select the interface in
the Remove Member field.
◦ To add an interface to the LAG Group, select the interface in the Add
Member field.
5 Click Apply.
6 To remove or add additional interfaces, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7 When you are finished, click Close to close the Link Aggregation – Edit page.
Notes: When removing an interface from a LAG group, the removed interface
is assigned the default interface values.
For information about the LAG degrade field, see Enabling and
Disabling LAG Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event .
Page 185 of 1094

3.5.3 Enabling and Disabling LAG Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event
Note: LAG Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event cannot be used
with LACP.
A LAG group can be configured to be automatically closed in the event of LAG
degradation. This option is used if you want traffic from the switch to be re-routed
during such time as the link is providing less than a certain capacity.
By default, the LAG group shutdown in case of degradation event option is
disabled. When enabled, the LAG is automatically closed in the event that any one
or more ports in the LAG fail. When all ports in the LAG are again operational, the
LAG is automatically re-opened.
Note: Failure of a port in the LAG also triggers a lag-degraded alarm, Alarm
ID 100.
To enable or disable the LAG group shutdown in case of degradation event option:
1 Select Ethernet > Groups > LAG to open the LAG page.
2 Select the LAG group in the Link Aggregation table.
3 Click Edit underneath the Link Aggregation table. The Link Aggregation - Edit
page opens (Figure 115).
4 In the LAG degrade field, select Enable to enable the LAG group shutdown in
case of degradation event option or Disable to disable the LAG group
shutdown in case of degradation event option.
5 Click Apply.
3.5.4 Configuring Enhanced LAG Distribution

You can change the distribution function by selecting from ten pre-defined LAG
distribution schemes. The feature includes a display of the TX throughput for each
interface in the LAG, to help you identify the best LAG distribution scheme for the
specific link.
Note: Enhanced LAG distribution is only available for LAG groups that consist
of exactly two interfaces. It cannot be used with LACP.
To configure enhanced LAG distribution:
2 Click LAG DF underneath the Link Aggregation table. The LAG Distribution
Function (DF) page opens.
Page 186 of 1094

Figure 116: LAG Distribution Function (DF) Page

3 In the Distribution Function field, select a pre-set distribution scheme, from 1
to 10. It is recommended to experiment with the various schemes, monitoring
the TX byte count fields for each interface to determine the efficiency of each
distribution scheme for the link. The default distribution scheme is 1. The
default LAG distribution pattern is 1.
4 To clear the TX byte counts, select Clear on read for one or both interfaces.
The byte counts will be cleared when you close the LAG Distribution Function
(DF) page or click Refresh.
Note: This counter will also be cleared for the members of the LAG in the
Port RMON Statistics page.
5 Click Apply to apply the selected distribution scheme.
3.5.5 Deleting a LAG Group

In order to delete a LAG group, you must first make sure that no service points are
attached to the LAG group and that all members of the LAG group are set to
Admin = Down.
To delete a LAG group:
2 Select the LAG group you want to delete in the Link Aggregation table.
3 Click Delete underneath the Link Aggregation table. The LAG group is deleted.
To delete multiple LAG groups:
1 Select the LAG groups in the Link Aggregation table or select all the LAG
groups by selecting the check box in the top row.
2 Click Delete underneath the Link Aggregation table.
Page 187 of 1094

3.5.6 Displaying LACP Parameters and Statistics

You can display the following LACP parameters and statistics:
• LACP Aggregation (per LAG)
• LACP Port Status
• LACP Port Statistics
• LACP Port Debug Statistics
Note: IP-20 does not support any LACP write parameters.
Page 188 of 1094

3.5.6.1 Displaying LACP Aggregation Status Parameters

To display LACP aggregation status parameters:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LACP > Aggregation to open the LACP
Aggregation page.
Figure 117: LACP Aggregation Page

Table 21 describes the LACP aggregation status parameters.
Table 21: LACP Aggregation Status Parameters

LAG Interface Location Identifies the LAG group.

Administrative Key The current administrative value of the key for the Aggregator.
Aggregator MAC The individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator.
Address
Aggregate or Individual Indicates whether the Aggregator represents an aggregate or an
individual link.
Frame Collector The maximum delay, in tens of microseconds.
Maximum Delay
Actor System ID The MAC address value used as a unique identifier for the system that
contains this Aggregator.
Actor System Priority The priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID.
Actor Operational Key The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator.
Partner System ID The MAC address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current
protocol Partner of this Aggregator.
Partner System Priority The priority value associated with the Partner’s System ID.
Partner Operational Key The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator’s current
Protocol partner.
Page 189 of 1094

3.5.6.2 Displaying LACP Port Status Parameters

To display LACP port status parameters:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LACP > Port > Status to open the LACP Port
Status page.
Figure 118: LACP Port Status Page
Page 190 of 1094

2 The LACP Port Status page displays the major port status parameters, per
port. To display all the available LACP port status parameters, select a port
and click View. The LACP Port Status – View page is displayed.
Figure 119: LACP Port Status – View Page

Table 22 describes the LACP port status parameters.
Table 22: LACP Port Status Parameters

Port Interface Location The location of the port.

Selected Aggregator ID The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation port has
currently selected.
Attached Aggregator ID The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation port is
currently attached to.
Aggregate or Individual Indicates whether the Aggregation Port is able to aggregate or is only
able to operate as an individual link.
Actor System ID The MAC Address value that defines the value of the System ID for the
system that contains this Aggregation Port.
Page 191 of 1094

Actor System Priority The priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID.
Actor Port The port number locally assigned to the Aggregation Port.
Actor Port Priority The priority value assigned to this Aggregation Port.
Actor Administrative Key The current administrative value of the Key for the Aggregation Port.
Actor Administrative The administrative values of the Actor’s state as transmitted by the Actor
State via LACPDUs.
Actor Operational Key The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregation Port.
Actor Operational State The current operational values of the Actor’s state as transmitted by the
Actor via LACPDUs.
Partner Operational Key The current operational value of the Key for the protocol Partner.
Partner Operational The current values of Actor State in the most recently received LACPDU
State transmitted by the protocol Partner.
Partner Operational The MAC Address value representing the current value of the
System ID Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner’s System ID.
Partner Operational The operational value of priority associated with the Partner’s System ID.
System Priority
Partner Operational Port The operational port number assigned to this Aggregation port by the
Aggregation port’s port Partner.
Partner Operational Port The Priority value assigned to this Aggregation port by the Partner.
Priority
Partner Administrative The current administrative value of the Key for the protocol Partner.
Key
Partner Administrative The current administrative value of Actor state for the protocol Partner.
State
Partner Administrative The MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the
System ID Aggregation Port’s Protocol partner’s System ID.
Partner Administrative The administrative priority value associated with the Partner’s System ID.
System Priority
Partner Administrative The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol
Port partner.
Partner Administrative The current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol
Port Priority partner.
Page 192 of 1094

3.5.6.3 Displaying LACP Port Statistics

To display LACP port statistics:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LACP > Port > Statistics to open the LACP Port
Statistics page.
Figure 120: LACP Port Statistics Page

Table 23 describes the LACP port statistics.
Table 23: LACP Port Statistics


currently selected.
LACPDUs TX The number of LACPDUs that this port has transmitted.
LACPDUs RX The number of LACPDUs that this port has received.
Unknown RX The number of unknown protocol frames that this port has received.
Illegal RX The number of illegal protocol frames that this port has received.
Page 193 of 1094

3.5.6.4 Displaying LACP Port Debug Statistics

To display LACP port debug statistics:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LACP > Port > Debug to open the LACP Port
Debug page.
Figure 121: LACP Port Debug Page

Table 24 describes the LACP port debug statistics.
Table 24: LACP Port Debug Statistics


currently selected.
Debug RX State The state of the receive state machine for the Aggregation port. Possible
values are:
• Current – An LACPDU was received before expiration of the most
recent timeout period.
• Expired – No LACPDU was received before expiration of the most
• Defaulted – No LACPDU was received during the two most recent
timeout periods.
Debug Last RX Time The value of a TimeSinceSystemReset (F.2.1) when the last LACPDU was
received by this Aggregation port.
Debug Mux State The state of the Mux state machine for the Aggregation port. Possible
values are Collecting, Distributing, Attached, and Detached.
Debug Mux Reason A text string indicating the reason for the most reason change in the state
of the Mux machine.
Page 194 of 1094

3.6 Configuring XPIC

• XPIC Overview
• Configuring the Radio Carriers
• Creating an XPIC Group
• Performing Antenna Alignment for XPIC
3.6.1 XPIC Overview

Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) is a feature that enables two radio
carriers to use the same frequency with a polarity separation between them.
Since they will never be completely orthogonal, some signal cancelation is
required.
In addition, XPIC includes an automatic recovery mechanism that ensures that if
one carrier fails, or a false signal is received, the mate carrier will not be affected.
This mechanism also ensures that both carriers will be operational, after the
failure is cleared.
To configure and enable XPIC, first configure the carriers and then perform
antenna alignment, as described below.
For 2+2 XPIC using an external switch operating in LAG mode, Mate Management
Access enables users to manage both units via in-band management. For
instructions, see Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding) (CLI) on page 607.
3.6.2 Configuring the Radio Carriers

To configure the radio carriers:
1 Configure the carriers on both ends of the link to the desired frequency
channel. Both carriers must be configured to the same frequency channel.
2 Assign an XPIC (CCDP operational mode) support-enabled script to the carriers
on both ends of the link. Each carrier must be assigned the same script. For
details, refer to Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s).
Note: XPIC support is indicated by an X in the script name. For example,
mdN_A2828X_111_1205 is an XPIC-enabled script.
mdN_A2828N_130_100 is not an XPIC-enabled script. For a list of XPIC
support-enabled scripts, refer to the most recent Release Notes.
3 In the XPIC page, create an XPIC group that consists of the two RMCs that will
be in the XPIC group. See Creating an XPIC Group.
3.6.3 Creating an XPIC Group

To create an XPIC group:
1 Select Radio > Groups > XPIC. The XPIC page opens.
Page 195 of 1094

Figure 122: XPIC Configuration Page

2 In the XPIC Configuration page, select Enable in the Admin state field and
click Apply.
To disable XPIC, select Disable in the Admin state field and click Apply.
3.6.4 Performing Antenna Alignment for XPIC

1 Align the antennas for the first carrier. For a 2+2 XPIC configuration (or a 4x4
MIMO configuration), align the antennas for the first carrier on the upper IP-
20C or IP-20C-HP units. While you are aligning these antennas, mute the
second carrier. See Configuring the Radio Parameters. For a 2+2 XPIC
configuration (or a 4x4 MIMO configuration), mute all the carriers except the
first carrier on the upper IP-20C or IP-20C-HP units.
2 Adjust the antenna alignment until you achieve the maximum RSL for the first-
carrier link (the “RSLwanted”). This RSL should be no more than +/-2 dB from
the expected level. Record the RSL of the first carrier as the “RSLwanted”).
3 Measure the RSL of the second carrier and record it as the “RSLunwanted”).
Note: To measure the second carrier, leave the Voltmeter connected to the
BNC connector. In the Radio Parameters page of the Web EMS
(Figure 43), change the RSL Connector Source field from PHYS1 to
PHYS2 (or vice versa). The BNC connector will now measure RSL from
the other carrier.
4 Determine the XPD by subtracting RSLunwanted from the RSLwanted.
5 The XPD should be between 25dB and 30dB. If it is not, you should adjust the
OMT assembly on the back of the antenna at one side of the link until you
achieve the highest XPD, which should be no less than 25dB. Adjust the OMT
very slowly in a right-left direction. OMT adjustment requires very fine
movements and it may take several minutes to achieve the best possible XPD.
Note: As an extra step, to check the veracity of the initial measurements, you
can mute the first carrier and unmute the second carrier on the upper
IP-20C or IP-20C-HP units on both sides of the link. Then measure the
RSL of the second carrier link (the “RSLwanted”), measure the RSL of the
first carrier (the “RSLunwanted”) and determine the XPD. The XPD should
match the XPD with the second carriers muted.
Page 196 of 1094

6 Unmute all the carriers and check the RSL levels of all the carriers on both
sides of the link. The RSL of the horizontal carrier of the local unit should
match the RSL of the vertical carrier of the remote unit, within ±2dB. The RSL
of the vertical carrier of the local unit should match the RSL of the horizontal
carrier of the remote unit, within ±2dB.
7 For a 2x2 configuration, repeat Steps 1 through 6 for the lower IP-20C or IP-
20C-HP units.
8 Check the XPI levels of all the carriers on both sides of the link. All the carriers
should have approximately the same XPI value. Do not adjust the XPI at the
remote side of the link, as this may cause the XPI at the local side of the link to
deteriorate.
Note: In some cases, the XPI might not exceed the required 25dB minimum
due to adverse atmospheric conditions. If you believe this to be the
case, you can leave the configuration at the lower values, but be sure
to monitor the XPI to make sure it subsequently exceeds 25dB. A
normal XPI level in clear sky conditions is between 25 and 30dB.
Page 197 of 1094

3.7 Configuring Unit Protection with HSB Radio Protection

(External Protection)
This section explains how to configure unit protection, including HSB radio
protection and Ethernet interface protection, and includes the following topics:
• Unit Protection Overview
• Configuring HSB Radio Protection
• Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP Unit
• Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit
• Editing Standby Unit Settings
• Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity
• Manually Switching to the Standby Unit
• Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit
• Disabling Unit Protection
Note: For instructions on configuring 1+1 unit protection with Space
Diversity, see Configuring 1+1 HSB with Space Diversity on page 207.
3.7.1 Unit Protection Overview

IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S support 1+1 HSB radio protection. IP-20C and
IP-20C-HP also support 2+2 HSB radio protection. In HSB radio protection, one IP-
20 operates in active mode and the other operates in standby mode. If a
protection switchover occurs, the Active unit goes into standby mode and the
Standby unit goes into active mode.
• For a full explanation of 1+1 HSB radio protection and 2+2 HSB radio
protection support in IP-20C and IP-20C-HP, refer to the IP-20C Technical
Description or the IP-20C-HP Technical Description.
• For a full explanation of 1+1 HSB radio protection support in IP-20S, refer to
the IP-20S Technical Description.
To configure unit protection, you must perform the following steps:
1 Configure Ethernet interface protection – See Configuring Ethernet Interface
Protection.
2 Configure HSB radio protection – See Configuring HSB Radio Protection.
3 For 2+2 HSB configurations (IP-20C and IP-20C-HP only), perform the
additional steps described in Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C or
IP-20C-HP Unit.
Note: For FIPS configurations, the external protection link must be encrypted
using IPsec. This encrypts all IP packets that pass between the
management ports of the two IP-20 units. For instructions, see
Encrypting the External Protection Link.
Page 198 of 1094

3.7.2 Configuring Ethernet Interface Protection

There are two modes for Ethernet interface protection in an HSB radio protection
configuration:
• Line Protection Mode – Traffic is routed to the Ethernet ports via two ports on
an external switch.
• Split Protection Mode – Only available for optical Ethernet ports. An optical
splitter cable is used to connect to both the active and the standby optical
Ethernet ports.
Page 199 of 1094

3.7.2.1 Configuring Line Protection Mode

To configure line protection mode:
1 Configure the GE ports on the external switch in LACP mode. The external
switch must support LACP.
Note: IP-20 supports a special LACP implementation for purposes of line
protection only. This LACP implementation is configured on the logical
interface level, as described below. Regular LACP is configured as part
of the LAG configuration, and is not supported with unit redundancy.
See Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP.
2 Connect one port on the external switch to an Ethernet port on the active IP-
20, and the other port on the external switch to an Ethernet port on the
standby IP-20.
3 Enable LACP on the Ethernet interface connected to the external switch on
the active IP-20:
i Select Ethernet > Interfaces > Logical Interfaces. The Logical Interfaces
ii Select the interface and click Edit. The Logical Interfaces – Edit page
opens.
Figure 123: Logical Interfaces – Edit Page

iii In the Interface Mode field, select LACP.
iv Click Apply, then Close.
Page 200 of 1094

3.7.2.2 Configuring Split Ethernet Interface Protection Mode (CLI)

To configure split Ethernet interface protection mode:
1 Use an optical splitter to route traffic to an optical Ethernet port on each IP-20
unit.
2 Proceed to Configuring HSB Radio Protection.
3.7.3 Configuring HSB Radio Protection

You must perform the initial configuration of a 1+1 or 2+2 HSB system using a
splitter cable for each unit to provide a management connection to each unit. For
instructions on preparing and connecting the splitter cables, refer to the
Installation Guide for IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S.
To configure HSB radio protection:
1 Before enabling protection, you must:
i Verify that both units have the same hardware part number (see
Displaying Unit Inventory) and the same software version (see Viewing
Current Software Versions). If the units do not have the same software
version, upgrade each unit to the most recent software release (see
Upgrading the Software).
ii Assign an IP address to each unit. For instructions, see Changing the
Management IP Address.
iii Establish a management connection to one of the units. You can select
either unit; once you enable Protection Administration, the system will
determine which unit becomes the Active unit.
2 Select Platform > Shelf Management > Unit Redundancy. The Unit
Redundancy (HSB Protection) page opens.
Page 201 of 1094

3 In the Protection Admin field, select Enable.

4 Click Apply.
The system configures itself for HSB protection:
• The system determines which unit is the Active unit based on a number of
pre-defined criteria.
• When the system returns online, all management must be performed via the
Active unit using the IP address you defined for that unit.
• The IP address you defined for the unit which is now the Standby unit is no
longer valid, and the management port of the Standby unit becomes non-
operational.
• Management of the Standby unit is performed via the Active unit, via the
cable between the two MIMO/Prot ports on the splitters connecting the two
units.
• HSB protection is enabled on both units.
• The Unit Redundancy page refreshes to include additional radio protection
fields.
Figure 125: Unit Redundancy Page when Redundancy Enabled

In additional, almost every Web EMS page will now include two tabs on top of the
main section of the page:
◦ Active – Enables you to configure the Active unit.
◦ Standby – In most cases, this tab is read-only and enables you to
display Standby unit parameters. Even when a switchover occurs, the
unit displayed in the Web EMS is always the currently Active unit.
Note: The parameters that are editable on the Standby tab are
described in Editing Standby Unit Settings.
Page 202 of 1094

5 Once you have enabled Protection:

i Perform all necessary radio configurations on the Active unit, such as
setting the frequency, assigning MRMC scripts, unmuting the radio, and
setting up radio groups such as XPIC or Multi-Carrier ABC (Multi-Radio).
ii Perform all necessary Ethernet configurations on the Active unit, such as
defining Ethernet services.
iii In the Unit Redundancy page, click Copy to Mate to copy the configuration
of the Active unit to the Standby unit. Confirm the action in the
confirmation window that appears.
Note: While the system is performing the copy-to-mate operation, a
temporary loss of management connection will occur.
To keep the Standby unit up-to-date, after any change to the configuration of the
Active unit click Copy to Mate to copy the configuration to the Standby unit.
If you change the configuration of the Active unit but do not perform Copy to
Mate, a Configuration Mismatch alarm appears in the Faults > Current Alarms
page.
Note: You can use the following CLI command to display a list of mismatched
parameters:
root> platform management protection show mismatch

details
3.7.4 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP Unit

In order to configure 2+2 HSB unit protection on an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit, you
must simply enable the second radio carrier on both units on both sides of the
link. No other configuration is necessary other than the configuration described
above.
• To enable the second radio carrier on both units, use the Interface
Manager page (see Figure 27). The following figure shows the Interface
Manager page with both radio carriers enabled.
Figure 126: Interface Manager Page – Both Radio Carriers Enabled
Page 203 of 1094

3.7.5 Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit

You can view the settings of the standby unit any time.
To view the settings of the standby unit, click the Standby tab of the desired page.
The following is an example of the Standby tab of the Radio Parameters page
after Protection Admin has been enabled.
Figure 127: Standby Tab of Radio Parameters Page
3.7.6 Editing Standby Unit Settings

Almost all settings of the standby unit are view-only. However, several settings
are editable on the Standby unit. They must be configured separately for the
Standby unit, and are not copied via copy-to-mate, nor do they trigger a
configuration mismatch in the CLI.
In the Web EMS, failure to synchronize these configuration settings causes a
configuration mismatch alarm.
The following settings must be configured separately on the standby unit:
• Setting the Unit Name – in the Name field of the Unit Parameters page (see
Configuring Unit Parameters).
• Disabling/enabling Radio TX-mute – in the TX mute field of the Edit Radio
Parameters window. Refer to Configuring the Radio Parameters.
• Clearing the Radio and RMON counters – in the TX mute field of the Counters
Page. Refer to Displaying and Clearing Defective Block Counters.
• Setting the activation key configuration – in the Activation Key and Demo
admin fields of the Activation Key Configuration Page (see Configuring the
Activation Key).
• Defining user accounts – Refer to the Access Control User Accounts Page
(see Configuring Users).
• Setting synchronization settings – Refer to the SyncE Regenerator
page (see Configuring SyncE Regenerator).
Page 204 of 1094

3.7.7 Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity

You can view link and protection status and activity any time.
To view link and protection status and activity:
Redundancy (HSB Protection) page opens.

The following information is displayed:
• Protection Operational State – Indicates whether HSB protection is functional
(available in practice). Radio protection is not functional if any of the following
occurred:
◦ MIMO is configured.
◦ The management connection to the mate is down.
• Protection Activity – The activity state of the device: Active or Standby.
• Protection Link to Mate – Indicates whether the two units (the Active and the
Standby) are physically connected.
• Copy to mate status – Indicates the status of the last copy-to-mate operation
• Protection Admin – Indicates whether HSB protection is enabled or disabled.
• Lockout – Indicates whether lockout is enabled or disabled.
3.7.8 Manually Switching to the Standby Unit

The following events trigger switchover for HSB radio protection according to
their priority, with the highest priority triggers listed first.
1 Loss of active unit
2 Lockout
3 Radio/Ethernet interface failure
4 Manual switch
At any point, you can manually switch to the Standby unit, provided that the
highest protection fault level in the Standby unit is no higher than the highest
protection fault level on the Active unit.
Page 205 of 1094

To manually switchover to the Standby unit:

1 Select Platform > Management > Unit Redundancy. The Unit Redundancy
(HSB Protection) page opens (Figure 124).
2 Click Manual Switch.
3 Confirm the action in the confirmation window that appears.
3.7.9 Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit

At any point, you can perform lockout, which disables automatic switchover to
the standby unit.
To disable automatic switchover to the Standby unit:
Redundancy (HSB Protection) page opens (Figure 124).
2 Select On in the Lockout field.
3 Click Apply.
To re-enable automatic switchover, select Off in the Lockout field and then
click Apply.
3.7.10 Disabling Unit Protection

You can disable unit protection at any time. If you disable unit protection, keep in
mind that while the unit that was formerly the active unit maintains its IP address,
the unit that was formerly the standby unit is assigned the default IP address
(192.168.1.1)
To disable protection:
Redundancy (HSB Protection) page opens (Figure 124).
2 Select Disable in the Protection Admin field.
3 Click Apply.
Page 206 of 1094

3.8 Configuring 1+1 HSB with Space Diversity

Note: This feature is only relevant for IP-20C. It can be used with all IP-20C
hardware versions.
A 1+1 HSB-SD configuration utilizes two IP-20C units on each side of the link, with
both radio carriers activated. The IP-20C units are combined and connected to the
primary and diversity antennas via a dual coupler and two flexible waveguides.
Radio carrier 2 is muted on each unit. On the receiving side, the signals are
combined in the active unit to produce a single, optimized signal. The link is
protected via external protection, so that if a protection switchover occurs, the
standby unit becomes the active unit, and the link continues to function with full
space diversity.
To configure a 1+1 HSB link with Space Diversity:
1 For one IP-20 unit, select Radio > Groups>
Diversity. The Diversity page opens.
2 Click Create Group. The Create Diversity Group page opens.
Figure 129: Create Diversity Group – Page 1

3 In the Group Type field, select 1+0 Space Diversity.
4 Click Next. The Selection Summary page opens.
Page 207 of 1094

Figure 130: Create Space Diversity Group – Selection Summary

5 Click Submit to create the Diversity group.
6 In the Diversity page, select the group you just created and click Edit
Group. The Diversity - Edit page opens.
Figure 131: Diversity - Edit Page (Space Diversity Group)

7 In the Admin state field, select Enable.
8 Click Apply.
9 Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for the second unit.
Note: The identity of the active and standby units is not determined until
unit protection is configured.
Page 208 of 1094

10 Configure Unit Protection, according to the instructions in Configuring Unit

11 On the active IP-20 unit, mute the transmitter of radio carrier 2. For
instructions, see Configuring the Radio Parameters.
12 Perform Copy to Mate. See Step 5 in Configuring HSB Radio Protection.
Important Note: It is crucial to ensure that the port connected to the Diversity
antenna is muted in each IP-20 unit. If you perform Copy to Mate after
configuring unit protection, as indicated above, the mute
configuration will be copied to the standby unit. If you mute the
interface before configuring unit protection, you must make sure to
manually mute the interface on both IP-20 units. Otherwise,
configuring unit protection will override the mute configuration.
Page 209 of 1094

3.9 Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity

Note: This feature is only relevant for IP-20C and IP-20C-HP.
This section describes how to configure MIMO and Space Diversity, and includes
the following topics:
• MIMO and Space Diversity Overview
• Upgrading a 4x4 MIMO Link from an Earlier Version to CeraOS 10.5 or Higher
• Configuring a 4x4 MIMO Link
• Configuring a 2x2 MIMO Link
• Configuring a 1+0 or 2+0 Space Diversity Link
• Viewing MMI Levels
• Deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity Group
3.9.1 MIMO and Space Diversity Overview

Note: MIMO and Space Diversity are not supported with ATPC. ATPC must be
disabled before configuring ASD. See Configuring ATPC and ATPC
Override Timer.
Line-of-Sight (LoS) Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) achieves spatial
multiplexing by creating an artificial phase de-correlation by deliberate antenna
distance at each site in deterministic constant distance. At each site in a MIMO
configuration, data to be transmitted over the radio link is split into two bit
streams (2x2 MIMO) or four bit streams (4x4 MIMO). These bit streams are
transmitted via two antennas. In 2x2 MIMO, the antennas use a single
polarization. In 4x4 MIMO, each antenna uses dual polarization. The phase
difference caused by the antenna separation enables the receiver to distinguish
between the streams.
IP-20C supports both 2x2 MIMO and 4x4 MIMO. For a full explanation of MIMO
support in IP-20C, refer to the IP-20C Technical Description.
For 4x4 MIMO using an external switch operating in LAG mode, Mate
Management Access enables users to manage both units via in-band
management. See Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding) (CLI).
For IP-20C 2E2SX hardware models, if you try to apply a 4x4 MIMO or 2+2 Space
Diversity configuration while P4 is assigned one or more service points, ASP or LLF
instances, or a LAG group or Sync source is configured on P4, the configuration
will fail and an error message will be generated. Also, the Admin status of the port
must be set to Down before applying the 4x4 MIMO or 2+2 Space Diversity
configuration. See Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager).
The same hardware configurations can also be used to implement BBS Space
Diversity. IP-20C and IP-20C-HP support 1+0 and 2+2 Space Diversity. For a full
explanation of Space Diversity support in IP-20C and IP-20C-HP, refer to the
Technical Description for the product and CeraOS version you are using.
2+2 HSB Space Diversity provides both equipment protection and signal
protection. If one unit goes out of service, the other unit takes over and maintains
the link until the other unit is restored to service and Space Diversity operation
resumes.
Page 210 of 1094

2+2 HSB Space Diversity utilizes two IP-20C units operating in dual core mode. In
each IP-20C unit, both radio carriers are connected to a single antenna. One
optical GbE port on each IP-20C is connected to an optical splitter. Traffic must be
routed to an optical GbE port on each IP-20C unit.
In effect, a 2+2 HSB configuration is a protected 2+0 Space Diversity configuration.
Each IP-20C monitors both of its cores. If the active IP-20C detects a radio failure
in either of its cores, it initiates a switchover to the standby IP-20C.
Notes: Only one MIMO or Space Diversity group can be created per IP-20C or
IP-20C-HP unit. All MRMC scripts that support MIMO also support
Space Diversity.
For 4x4 MIMO links, CeraOS versions 10.5 and higher are not
interoperable with earlier CeraOS versions. If you are upgrading from
an earlier version with an existing 4x4 MIMO link, you must follow the
procedure in Upgrading a 4x4 MIMO Link from an Earlier Version to
CeraOS 10.5 or Higher.
3.9.2 Upgrading a 4x4 MIMO Link from an Earlier Version to CeraOS 10.5 or
Higher
For 4x4 MIMO links, CeraOS versions 10.5 and higher are not interoperable with
earlier CeraOS versions. When upgrading from a CeraOS version prior to CeraOS
10.5 to CeraOS 10.5 or higher, if there is an existing 4x4 MIMO link, you must
perform either of the following procedures to properly upgrade the link. Option 1
is the preferred option.
Important Note: You must download the new CeraOS software package to all
four units before beginning the upgrade process. All four units in
the 4x4 MIMO link must use the same CeraOS build and version.
Upgrade Procedure – Option 1
1. Upgrade the remote Slave unit.
2. Upgrade the remote Master unit.
3. Upgrade the local Slave unit.
4. Upgrade the local Master unit.
4. Wait for the link to be restored between the Master units.
5. Mute both radio carriers on the remote Slave unit.
7. Unmute both radio carriers on the remote Slave unit.
Page 211 of 1094

3.9.3 Configuring a 4x4 MIMO Link

To configure a 4x4 MIMO link, you must perform the following steps:
1 Verify that the following three cables are connected between the Master and
Slave units on each side of the link. For details, refer to the IP-20C Installation
Guide or the IP-20C-HP Installation Guide:
◦ Source sharing cable between both EXT REF IP-20 radio connectors.
◦ MIMO data sharing cable between both IP-20 ETH3/EXT ports.
◦ MIMO signaling cable between both IP-20 MGT/PROT ports.
2 Configure the IP-20 carriers as XPIC links, using XPIC scripts, and configuring
the carriers as XPIC groups. See Configuring XPIC.
3 Perform antenna alignment for XPIC. See Performing Antenna Alignment for
XPIC.
4 Configure 4x4 MIMO groups on each IP-20 unit, in the following order:
i Upper unit (Master) on the local side of the link.
ii Upper unit (Master) on the remote side of the link.
iii Lower unit (Slave) on the local side of the link.
iv Lower unit (Slave) on the remote side of the link.
To configure a 4x4 MIMO group:
i Select Radio > Groups> AMCC. The Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration
page opens.
Figure 132: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page
Page 212 of 1094

ii Click Create Group. The AMCC Group – Select Group Parameters page
opens.
Figure 133: 4x4 MIMO Group – Select Group Parameters Page

iii In the Group Type field, select MIMO 4X4.
iv In the Group Admin Status field, select Enable.
v Click Next. The AMCC Group – Select Members Parameters page opens.
Figure 134: 4x4 MIMO Group – Select Members Parameters Page

vi In the Member #1 field, select one of the radio carriers.
vii In the Member Role field, select MIMO Master if the unit is the Master
unit, or MIMO Slave if the unit is the Slave unit.
Page 213 of 1094

viii Click Next. The AMCC Group – Select MRMC Parameters page opens.
Figure 135: 4x4 MIMO Group – Select MRMC Parameters Page

ix Select Set MRMC Script, and configure the Script ID, Operational mode,
Maximum profile, and Minimum profile. For an explanation of these
fields, see Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s). Make sure the script
you select supports MIMO.
Note: For a list of available scripts, including an indication of which scripts
support MIMO, refer to the Release Notes for the CeraOS release you
are using.
Page 214 of 1094

x Click Finish. The AMCC Group – Selection Summary page opens. Note that
the second radio carrier is automatically added to the group, with the
same Member Role and MRMC script as you defined for the first radio
carrier you added to the group.
Figure 136: 4x4 MIMO Group – Select Members Parameters Page

xi Click Submit to configure the group. If you changed the MRMC script from
the script that had previously been configured, or if you set the Group
Admin Status to Enable, the unit is reset.
Page 215 of 1094

Figure 137: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page (Populated – 4x4 MIMO
Group)
5 Verify that the MMI levels are appropriate. See Viewing MMI Levels.
6 Configure LAG on the two Ethernet ports of the external switches connected
to the IP-20 units on both sides of the link.
enabled on the MIMO group in all four IP-20 units that make up the link. See
Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss Forwarding.
Note: The last two steps are crucial to ensure that the link continues to
function via the MIMO resiliency mechanism in the event of a
hardware failure scenario.
Figure 138 shows one side of a 4x4 MIMO link.
EXT REF
Eth1
Carrier 1
GbE Port
Source Eth3/
Carrier 2
OMT
EXT
Sharing Cable
MIMO
MGT/
Group ASP – Remote
PROT
Fault Trigger
MIMO Sharing Enabled
External Cable
Master IP-20
LAG
Switch
ASP – Remote
Eth1 Fault Trigger
Enabled
Carrier 1
Eth3/
GbE Port EXT
Carrier 2
OMT
MIMO Signaling
Cable MGT/ MIMO
PROT
Group
EXT REF
Slave IP-20
Figure 138: 4x4 MIMO Configuration
Page 216 of 1094

3.9.4 Configuring a 2x2 MIMO Link

To configure a 2x2 MIMO link, you must perform the following steps:
1 Select Radio > Groups> Diversity. The Diversity Group page opens.
2 Click Create Group. The Diversity Groups page opens.
Figure 139: Create Diversity Group Page – 2x2 MIMO – Page 1

3 In the Group Type field, select MIMO 2x2.
4 Click Next. The Create Diversity Group page is updated and displays your
system configuration.
Figure 140: Create Diversity Group Page – 2x2 MIMO – Page 2

5 Click Submit to create the 2x2 MIMO group.
Page 217 of 1094

6 After creating the group, you must enable the group in the MIMO - Edit page:
i From the MIMO page, select the group from the table and click Edit
Group. The MIMO - Edit page opens
Figure 141: Diversity Groups – 2x2 MIMO - Edit Page

ii In the Admin state field, select Enable.
iii Click Apply.
7 In the Role field, leave the setting Not-relevant.
8 Verify that the MMI levels are appropriate. See Viewing MMI Levels.
Page 218 of 1094

3.9.5 Configuring a 1+0 or 2+0 Space Diversity Link

To create a Space Diversity group:
1 Select Radio > Groups> Diversity. The Diversity page opens.
2 Click Create Group. The Create Diversity Group page opens.

3 In the Group Type field, select one of the following according to your desired
system configuration:
◦ 1+0 Space Diversity
◦ 2+0 Space Diversity
4 Click Next. The Create Diversity Group page is updated and displays your
system configuration.

5 Click Submit to create the Diversity group.
Page 219 of 1094

6 After creating the group, you must enable the group and, for 2+0 groups, set
the unit’s role (Master or Slave) in the Diversity - Edit page.
i From the Diversity page, select the group from the table and click Edit
Group. The Diversity - Edit page opens.
Figure 144: Diversity - Edit Page

ii In the Admin state field, select Enable.
iii In the Role field:
◦ For 1+0 Space Diversity groups, leave the setting Not-relevant.
◦ For 2+2 Space Diversity groups, set the role of the group
to Master or Slave.
iv Click Apply.
Page 220 of 1094

3.9.6 Viewing MMI Levels

You can view MMI levels for the individual radio carriers in a MIMO group.
Note that the MMI value can also be calculated manually. To calculate it manually,
you must measure the following RSL levels per receiver:
1 Mute all remote transmitters except the transmitter for the link you want to
measure, and measure the local RSL level (RSL_Wanted).
2 Mute all remote transmitters except the same polarization interferer and
measure the local RSL2 (RSL_Int).
The MMI is equal to RSL_Wanted – RSL_Int
To view MMI Levels for a 4x4 MIMO group:
1 Select Radio > Groups> AMCC. The Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration page
opens.
2 Select the 4x4 MIMO group from the table.
3 Click Edit Members. The AMCC Group - Edit Members page opens.
Figure 145: 4x4 MIMO - Edit Members Page

To view MMI Levels for a 2x2 MIMO group:
1 Select Radio > Groups> Diversity. The Diversity Groups page opens.
2 Select the 2x2 MIMO group from the table.
3 Click Edit Members. The Diversity Groups - Edit Members page opens.
Figure 146: Diversity Groups - Edit Members Page
Page 221 of 1094

The Edit Members page provides the following information for each radio carrier
in the MIMO group:
• MMI – MIMO Mate Interference. MMI represents the difference between the
RSL1 and the RSL2 of the remote Master and Slave transmitters with the same
polarization. The nominal range is 0. The range should be from -3 dB to +3 dB.
This parameter is not relevant for 1+0 Space Diversity (as indicated by a value
of -99).
3.9.7 Deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity Group

You can delete a MIMO or Space Diversity Group.
To delete a MIMO or Space Diversity Group:
1 Before deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity group, you must disable the group.
To disable the group, set the Admin State to Disable in the Edit Group page.
Note: When the MIMO or Space Diversity group is disabled, the
system is automatically reset.
2 Select the group from the table.
3 Click Delete. The Delete MIMO confirmation page opens.
4 Confirm the operation.
Page 222 of 1094

3.10 Configuring Advanced Space Diversity (ASD)

This section describes how to configure Advanced Space Diversity (ASD), and
includes the following topics:
• ASD Overview
• Configuring an ASD Link
• Viewing ASD Status
• Deleting an ASD Group
3.10.1 ASD Overview

ASD uses a combination of BBC Space Diversity and beam forming technology to
increase system gain and reduce the effects of fading and multipath. ASD is
implemented as an asymmetrical link with three antennas and three IP-20C or IP-
20C-HP units, as shown in Figure 147.
• In one direction, two transmitters transmit to one receiver. ASD increases
system gain in this direction by 6 dB.
• In the other direction, transmissions from one transmitter are received by two
receivers. This is a simple case of Space Diversity, and provides a 3 dB increase
in system gain.
Master Master
Network RF Network
Switch Eth Port
Processor
Modem 1
Chain V +6dB V RF Chain Modem 1
Processor Eth Port Switch
OMT f1 f1 OMT
Modem 2 RF Chain H H RF Chain Modem 2
+3dB
Communications
Source Sharing
Data Sharing
Protection
Network
Processor
Modem 1 RF Chain V
OMT f1
Modem 2 RF Chain H
Slave
Figure 147: Advanced Space Diversity (ASD)

The ability to implement space diversity with only three IP-20 units and three
antennas is made possible by the use of standard space diversity in one direction
and a phase-synchronized beam-forming mechanism in the other direction. Each
IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit is installed in a 2+0 XPIC configuration, with an OMT as
the mediation device and a dual-polarization antenna. Alignment is performed
using an XPIC script. Following alignment, the ASD groups are configured and a
special ASD script (28 MHz, 40 MHz, or 56 MHz) is applied to each of the three
ASD groups.
• MRMC Script 1951 – 28 MHz
Page 223 of 1094

Figure 148 shows the data paths between Site 1, with two IP-20C or IP-20C-HP
units and two antennas, and Site 2, with one IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit and one
antenna.
Site 1 Site 2
+3dB +6dB
f1 f1
f1
Figure 148: ASD Data Paths

The data path from Site 1 to Site 2 includes the same TX signals being sent from
the main and diversity radios at Site 1 (RX diversity). IP-20 uses beam forming
technology to achieve optimal reception by the IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit at Site 2.
This quadruples the signal’s strength, adding 6dB in system gain and resilience to
selective fading.
The data path from Site 2 to Site 1 is similar to that of a standard space diversity
configuration. The signal transmitted from Site 2 is received by the main and
diversity antennas at Site 1 (RX diversity). These signals are combined using
Baseband Combining (BBC). This adds 3dB in system gain since the signal
practically doubles its level as it is received in a phase-synchronized manner by
two receivers.
Page 224 of 1094

3.10.1.1 ASD Failure Scenarios

In the event of hardware failure on a Slave unit, the link continues to function in
Master-only configuration.
In the event of hardware failure on a Master unit, the link ceases to function until
the failure is rectified.
To restore full ASD operation, the faulty equipment must be replaced. The
replacement equipment must be pre-configured to the same configuration as the
equipment being replaced. Once the new equipment has been properly installed
and, if necessary, powered up, the system automatically reverts to full ASD
operation, with no user intervention required.
3.10.2 Configuring an ASD Link

Note: ASD is not supported with ATPC and XPIC. ATPC and XPIC must both be
Override Timer and Creating an XPIC Group.
To configure an ASD link, you must perform the following steps:
1 Install the IP-20C or IP-20C-HP units as follows:
◦ At Site 1, install two IP-20C/IP-20C-HP units in a 4x4 MIMO configuration.
◦ At Site 2, install one IP-20C/IP-20C-HP unit in a 2+0 Dual Polarization (XPIC)
configuration.
For instructions, refer to the Installation Manual for IP-20C or IP-20C-HP.
2 Verify that the Ethernet interfaces on the Slave unit are set to Admin = Down
in the Interface Manager. See Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager).
3 Configure the radio parameters for each of the six radio carriers in the link.
Make sure each carrier is configured with the same radio parameters. See
Configuring the Radio Parameters.
4 Assign an ASD script to each of the six radio carriers in the link. Options are:
◦ MRMC Script 1951 (28/30 MHz)
◦ MRMC Script 1952 (40 MHz)
See Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s).
Note: Make sure to set the same MRMC parameters for all the radio carriers
in the ASD link. For ASD, the scripts must be set to Adaptive mode.
5 Mute both carriers on the Slave unit. See Configuring the Radio Parameters.
6 Align the antenna of the Master unit to the antenna at Site 2 until you achieve
a steady link at the RSL that is expected according to the site plan, at 2048
QAM.
7 Unmute the carriers of the Slave unit and mute both carriers on the Master
unit. See Configuring the Radio Parameters.
8 Align the antenna of the Slave unit to the antenna at Site 2 until you achieve a
steady link at the RSL that is expected according to the site plan, at 2048
QAM.
9 Unmute the carriers of the Master unit. At this point, all of the carriers in the
ASD link should be unmuted.
Page 225 of 1094

10 Configure ASD on each unit:

i Select Radio > Groups> AMCC. The Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration
page opens.
Figure 149: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page

ii Click Create Group. The AMCC Group – Select Group Parameters page
opens.
Figure 150: AMCC Group - Select Group Parameters Page

iii In the Group Type field:
◦ At Site 1 (two units), select Dual ASD.
◦ At Site 1 (one unit), select Single ASD.
Page 226 of 1094

Note: After you select one of the ASD options in the Group Type field, ASD
2+0 will be displayed in the Group Subtype field.
iv In the Group Admin Status field, select Enable.
v Click Next. The next page of the AMCC Group – Select Members
Parameters page opens.
Figure 151: AMCC Group - Select Members Parameters Page

vi In the Member Role field for Member #1:
◦ For the Master unit at Site 1 (two units), select Master. The Member
Role for Member #2 is automatically set to Master.
◦ For the Slave unit at Site 1, select Slave. The Member Role for
Member #2 is automatically set to Slave.
◦ For the unit at Site 2, select Master. The Member Role for Member #2
is automatically set to Master.
Page 227 of 1094

vii Click Next. The AMCC Group – Select MRMC Parameters page opens.
Figure 152: AMCC Group - Select MRMC Parameters Page

viii In the Script ID field:
ix In the Operational Mode field, select Adaptive.
x Select the maximum and minimum ACM profiles in the Maximum profile
and the Minimum profile fields.
in the ASD link. Refer to Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) for a
list of available radio profiles.
Page 228 of 1094

xi Click Finish. The AMCC Group – Selection Summary page opens.

xii Click Submit. The group is created.
Figure 153: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page – Populated with ASD
Group
Note: No unit reset takes place when the group is created.
3.10.3 Viewing ASD Status

To view ASD status:
1 Select Radio > Groups > AMCC. The Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration
2 Select a group and click View Members. The AMCC – ASD – Radio Members
page opens.
Figure 154: AMCC – ASD – Radio Members Page

The Operational State field displays one of the following statuses:
• Idle – All units are operational.
• Master Only – The Slave unit is not operational.
• ASD Configuration not supported – The link has been misconfigured. Make
sure that each radio carrier is configured with the same radio parameters and
MRMC scripts and parameters.
Page 229 of 1094

The Combined Status field indicates the status of the ASD group’s received radio
signal:
• Combined – Only relevant for the Master unit at the dual-unit side of the link.
ASD is functioning to produce a combined radio signal.
• Main Only – Only relevant for Master units. Only the main path signal is being
received.
• Diversity Only – Only relevant for Slave units and the Master unit at the
single-unit side of the link. Only the diversity path is providing a usable signal.
• N/A – No adequate signal is being received, either because of an LOF
condition or misconfiguration of the link.
3.10.4 Deleting an ASD Group

To delete an ASD group, you must perform the following steps:
1 Select Radio > Groups> AMCC. The Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration page
opens (Figure 153).
2 Select the group and click Edit. The AMCC Group Edit page opens.
Figure 155: AMCC Group Edit Page

3 In the Group Admin Status field, select Disable, then Apply. At this point, a
system reset takes place.
4 Once the unit comes back online, return to the Advanced Multi Carrier
Configuration page opens (Figure 153), select the group, and click Delete. The
group is deleted.
Page 230 of 1094

3.11 Configuring Advanced Frequency Reuse (AFR)
3.11.1 AFR Overview

AFR works in conjunction with ACM to enable links to achieve high modulations
and high capacities despite the presence of adjacent links transmitting at the
same frequency. By mitigating the effects of side lobe interference (SLI)
completely, or nearly completely, AFR can reduce adjacent link interference to
levels that enable links that would otherwise be limited to QPSK modulation to
transmit at modulations of up to 2048 QAM. This enables the placement of links
that would otherwise be impractical due to high interference.
In an AFR 1+0 configuration, a dual-modem FibeAir IP-20C unit is deployed at the
hub site and two FibeAir IP-20C or IP-20S units are deployed in two tail sites. Each
carrier at the hub site is known as an “aggregator.”
The hub site utilizes a single FibeAir IP-20C unit with two radio carriers. Each
carrier is in a link, via its own directional antenna, with a tail site that consists of a
FibeAir IP-20C or IP-20S unit.
One hub site cannot have more than two tail sites. Also, a hub site cannot be a tail
site for another AFR hub site.
Note: The links should be located so as to ensure that the two data streams
do not cross.
Tail Site 1
IP-20C or
f1 IP-20S
Low angular
separation Tail Site 2
IP-20C or
Hub Site
IP-20S
Dual-Modem IP-20C f1
f1 f2 f3 f4
1 frequency spot
Figure 156: AFR 1+0 Deployment

For more detailed information about planning links with AFR, refer to the
Advanced Frequency Reuse (AFR) Link Planning Guide.
Page 231 of 1094

3.11.2 Initial Link Configuration and Alignment for AFR

AFR 1+0 requires the following hardware configurations:
• Hub Site – Install a single IP-20C unit with two antennas using an IP-20C Dual
Core kit, as described in Section 6.12 of the FibeAir IP-20C Installation Guide,
2x2 MIMO Direct Mount.
• Tail Sites – Install a 1+0 IP-20C or IP-20S configuration.
Before performing the software configuration for AFR, you must set up and align
the two links as individual 1+0 links. Use Script 1801 for the alignment, but do not
enable AFR before aligning the links.
When aligning Link A, mute both sides of Link B. When you are finished aligning
Link A, mute both sides of Link A, unmute both sides of Link B, and align link B.
When you are finished aligning Link B, unmute both sides of both links.
Tail-1
(IP-20C or IP-20S)
Hub Agg-1 Link A

Site (IP-20C)
Agg-2
(IP-20C)
Link B
Tail-2
(IP-20C or IP-20S)
Figure 157: AFR 1+0 Configuration
3.11.3 Software Configuration for AFR

Note: AFR is not supported with ATPC. ATPC should be disabled before
configuring AFR. See Configuring ATPC and ATPC Override Timer.
Perform the following steps for each site in the AFR configuration.
• If you are performing the configuration locally at the Hub site and each Tail
site, the order in which you configure the sites does not matter.
• If you are performing the configuration for all three sites remotely from the
Hub Site, you must configure the sites in the following order:
◦ Tail Site 1
◦ Tail Site 2
◦ Hub Site
After you configure AFR on the Tails Sites, the link between the Hub Site and the
Tail Sites will be lost. The links will be restored after you configure AFR on the Hub
site and the Hub site comes back up after unit reset.
Page 232 of 1094

page opens.
Figure 158: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page (Empty)

2 Click Create Group. The AMCC Group – Select Group Parameters page opens.
Figure 159: AMCC Group – Select Group Parameters Page

3 In the Group type field, select one of the following:
◦ If you are configuring the Hub site, select AFR Aggregate.
◦ If you are configuring a Tail site, select AFR Tail.
4 In the Group admin status field, select Enable.
5 Click Next. The AMCC Group – Select Members Parameters page opens.
Page 233 of 1094

Figure 160: AMCC Group – Select Members Parameters Page (Hub Site)
Figure 161: AMCC Group – Select Members Parameters Page (Tail Site)
6 In the Member #1 field, select a radio interface.
Page 234 of 1094

7 In the Member role field, select the role of the interface in the AFR 1+0
configuration:
◦ If you are configuring the Hub site, select Aggregate #1 or Aggregate #2.
◦ If you are configuring the Tail site, select Tail #1 or Tail #2.
Make sure the interface you configure as Aggregate #1 is part of the link with
Tail #1 and that the interface you configure as Aggregate #2 is part of the link
with Tail #2.
8 Select Set MRMC Script (1801).
Note: Script 1801 is a 28/30 MHz script, with a maximum ACM profile of 10
(2048 QAM). For additional details, refer to the relevant Release Notes
or product Technical Description.
9 In the MRMC Script maximum profile field, select the maximum ACM profile
for the links.
10 Click Finish. This page displays the parameters you have selected for the link.
Figure 162: AMCC Group – Selection Summary Page

11 Click Submit. The unit is automatically reset. Once AFR has been configured on
the Hub site and both Tail sites, the configuration is complete.
Page 235 of 1094

3.11.4 Deleting an AFR Group

If you want to disable AFR and convert the two links into non-AFR links, you must
perform the following steps for each site in the AFR configuration. If you are
managing the links by in-band management from the hub site, you must disable
AFR at the tail sites first, then disable AFR at the hub site. Once AFR has been
disabled at all of the sites, you can delete the AFR groups in any order.
page opens.
Figure 163: Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration Page (Populated)

2 Select the group and click Edit Group. The AMCC Group – Edit page opens.
Figure 164: AMCC Group – Edit Page

3 In the Group admin status field, select Disable.
4 Click Apply, then Close. The unit is automatically reset.
5 In the Advanced Multi Carrier Configuration page, select the group and click
Delete.
Once you have performed this procedure for the Hub site and both Tail sites, you
can reconfigure the links according to the new network plan.
Page 236 of 1094

3.12 Operating an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP in Single Radio Carrier Mode

If you wish to operate an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit in single radio carrier mode,
you must perform the following steps:
1 Verify that XPIC is disabled. See Configuring XPIC.
2 Disable Multi-Carrier ABC, as described in Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group.
3 Disable one of the two radio interfaces, as described in Enabling the Interfaces
(Interface Manager).
4 Mute the disabled radio interface, as described in Configuring the Radio
Parameters.
Page 237 of 1094

4. Unit Management
• Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications
• Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address
• Configuring SNMP
• Configuring Trap Managers
• Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server
• Figure 175: FileZilla Server Shared Folder Setup
• Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP
• Upgrading the Software
• Backing Up and Restoring Configurations
• Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration
• Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset
• Configuring Unit Parameters
• Configuring NTP
• Displaying Unit Inventory
• Displaying SFP DDM and Inventory Information
• Defining a Login Banner
Related topics:
• Setting the Time and Date (Optional)
• Uploading Unit Info
• Changing the Management IP Address
4.1 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications

You can specify which IP protocol the unit will use when initiating
communications, such as downloading software, sending traps, pinging, or
exporting configurations. The options are IPv4 or IPv6.
To set the IP protocol version of the local unit:
1 Select Platform > Management > Networking > Local. The Local Networking
Page 238 of 1094

Figure 165: Local Networking Configuration Page

2 In the IP address Family field, select the IP protocol the unit will use when
initiating communications. The options are IPv4 or IPv6.
Page 239 of 1094

4.2 Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address

You can configure the IP address of a remote unit.
To configure the IP address of a remote unit:
1 Select Platform > Management > Networking > Remote. The Remote
Networking Configuration page opens.
◦ For single-carrier units, the page appears as shown in Figure 167.
Figure 166: Remote Networking Configuration Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
Page 240 of 1094

Figure 167: Remote Networking Configuration Page – IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V
2 For multi-carrier units, select the carrier in the Radio table (see Figure 166)
and click Edit. A separate Remote IP Configuration page opens. The page is
identical to the single-carrier page.
Figure 168: Remote IP Configuration Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
Page 241 of 1094

3 In the Remote IP address field, enter an IP address for the remote unit. You
can enter the address in IPv4 format in this field, and/or in IPv6 format in the
IPv6 Address field. The remote unit will receive communications whether they
are sent to its IPv4 address or its IPv6 address.
4 In the Remote Subnet mask field, enter the subnet mask of the remote radio.
5 Optionally, in the Remote default gateway field, enter the default gateway
address for the remote radio.
6 Optionally, in the Remote IPv6 Address field, enter an IPv6 address for the
remote unit. You can enter the address in IPv6 format in this field, and/or in
IPv4 format in the IP Address field. The unit will receive communications
whether they are sent to its IPv4 address or its IPv6 address.
7 If you entered an IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length in the Remote
IPv6 Prefix-Length field.
8 Optionally, if you entered an IPv6 address, enter the default gateway in IPv6
format in the Remote default Gateway IPv6 field.
9 Click Apply.
4.2.1 Changing the Subnet of the Remote IP Address

If you wish to change the Remote IP Address to a different subnet:
1 Change the address of the Remote Default Gateway to 0.0.0.0.
2 Click Apply.
3 Set the Remote IP Address as desired, and the Remote Default Gateway as
desired.
Similarly, if you wish to change the Remote IPv6 Address to a different subnet:
1 Change the address of the Remote IPv6 Default Gateway to 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0.
2 Click Apply.
3 Set the Remote IPv6 Address as desired, and the Remote IPv6 Default
Gateway as desired.
Page 242 of 1094

4.3 Configuring SNMP

IP-20 products support SNMP v1, V2c, and v3. You can set community strings for
access to IP-20 units.
IP-20 products support the following MIBs:
• RFC-1213 (MIB II).
• RMON MIB.
• Proprietary MIB.
Access to the unit is provided by making use of the community and context fields
in SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c/SNMPv3, respectively.
To configure SNMP:
1 Select Platform > Management > SNMP > SNMP Parameters. The SNMP
Parameters page opens.
Figure 169: SNMP Parameters Page

2 In the Admin field, select Enable to enable SNMP monitoring, or Disable to
disable SNMP monitoring.
Note: The Operational Status field indicates whether SNMP monitoring is
currently active (Up) or inactive (Down).
Page 243 of 1094

3 In the SNMP Read Community field, enter the community string for the SNMP
read community.
4 In the SNMP Write Community field, enter the community string for the
SNMP write community
5 In the SNMP Trap Version field, select V1, V2, or V3 to specify the SNMP
version.
Note: The SNMP MIB Version field displays the current SNMP MIB version
the unit is using.
6 In the V1V2 Blocked field, select Yes if you want to block SNMPv1 and
SNMPv2 access so that only SNMPv3 access will be enabled.
Note: Additional security parameters can be configured in the Quick
Configuration Security Protocols page. See Quick Security
Configuration – Protocols Page, Step 4.
7 Click Apply.
If you are using SNMPv3, you must also configure SNMPv3 users. SNMPv3 security
parameters are configured per SNMPv3 user.
To add an SNMP user:
1 Select Platform > Management SNMP > V3 Users. The V3 Users page opens.
Figure 170: V3 Users Page

2 Click Add. The V3 Users - Add page opens.
Page 244 of 1094

Figure 171: V3 Users - Add Page

3 Configure the SNMP V3 Authentication parameters, as described below.
Table 25: SNMP V3 Authentication Parameters

User Name Enter the SNMPv3 user name.

Password Enter a password for SNMPv3 authentication. The password must
be at least eight characters.
Authentication Algorithm Select an authentication algorithm for the user. Options are:
• None
• SHA
• MD5
Encryption (Privacy) Mode Select an encryption (privacy) protocol for the user. Options are:
• None
• DES
• AES
Access Mode Select an access permission level for the user. Options are:
• Read Write User
• Read Only User
4.4 Configuring Trap Managers

You can configure trap forwarding parameters by editing the Trap Managers
table. Each line in the Trap Managers table displays the setup for a manager
defined in the system.
To configure trap managers:
1 Select Platform > Management > SNMP > Trap Managers. The Trap Managers
page opens.
Page 245 of 1094

Figure 172: Trap Managers Page

2 Select a trap manager and click Edit. The Trap Managers Edit page opens.
Figure 173: Trap Managers - Edit Page

3 Configure the trap manager parameters, as described in Table 26.
Page 246 of 1094

Table 26: Trap Manager Parameters

IPv4 Address If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4, enter the destination
IPv4 address. Traps will be sent to this IP address. See Defining the IP
Protocol Version for Initiating Communications.
IPv6 Address If the IP address family is configured to be IPv6, enter the destination
IPv6 address. Traps will be sent to this IP address. See Defining the IP
Protocol Version for Initiating Communications.
Description Enter a description of the trap manager (optional).
Admin Select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the selected trap
manager.
Community Enter the community string for the SNMP read community.
Port Enter the number of the port through which traps will be sent.
Heartbeat Period Enter the interval, in minutes, between each heartbeat trap.
CLLI Enter a Common Language Location Identifier (CLLI). The CLLI is free
text that will be sent with the trap. You can enter up to 100
characters.
V3 User Name If the SNMP Trap version selected in SNMP Parameters page is V3,
enter the name of a V3 user defined in the system.
To view or define a V3 user, use the V3 Users page.
Note: Make sure that an identical V3 user is also defined on the
manager's side.
Page 247 of 1094

4.5 Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server

Several tasks, such as software upgrade (except when performed using HTTP or
HTTPS) and configuration backup, export, and import, require the use of FTP or
SFTP. The IP-20 can function as an FTP or SFTP client. If you wish to use FTP/SFTP,
you must install FTP/SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are using.
Note: For FTP, it is recommended to use FileZilla_Server software that can be
downloaded from the web (freeware).
For SFTP, it is recommended to use SolarWinds SFTP server 1.0.4.9
(freeware).
If you are using IPv6 to perform the operation, make sure to use
FileZilla version 0.9.38 or higher to ensure IPv6 support. If you are
using another type of FTP or SFTP server, make sure the application
version supports IPv6.
To install and configure FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop:
1 Create a user and (optional) password on the FTP/SFTP server. For example, in
FileZilla Server, perform the following:
i From the Edit menu, select Users.
ii In the Users window, click Add.
iii In the Add user account window, enter a user name and click OK.
iv In the Users window, select Enable account and, optionally, select
Password and enter a password.
v In the Users window, click OK.
Figure 174: FileZilla Server User Configuration
Page 248 of 1094

2 Create a shared FTP/SFTP folder on the PC or laptop you are using to perform
the FTP/SFTP operation (for example, C:\FTPServer).
3 In the FTP/SFTP server, set up the permissions for the shared FTP/SFTP folder.
For example, in FileZilla Server:
i From the Edit menu, select Users.
ii In the Users window, select Shared folders.
iii Underneath the Shared folders section, click Add and browse for your
shared FTP folder.
iv Select the folder and click OK.
v In the Shared folders section, select your shared FTP folder.
vi In the Files and Directories sections, select all of the permissions.
vii Click Set as home directory to make the Shared folder the root directory
for your FTP server.
viii Click OK to close the Users window.
Figure 175: FileZilla Server Shared Folder Setup
Page 249 of 1094

4.6 Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP

By default, the following IP-20 ports are used for FTP and SFTP when the IP-20
unit is acting as an FTP or SFTP client (e.g., software downloads, configuration file
backup and restore operations):
• FTP – 21
• SFTP – 22
You can change either or both of these ports from the following pages:
• Platform > Management > Unit Info
• Platform > Software > Download & Install
• Platform > Configuration > Configuration Management
• Platform > Security > General > Security Log Upload
• Platform > Security > General > Configuration Log Upload
• Platform > Security > X.509 Certificate > CSR
• Platform > Security > X.509 Certificate > Download & Install
• Platform > Security > RSA Key
From any of these pages, click FTP Port. The FTP Port page opens.
Figure 176: FTP Port Page

Edit the File transfer port number for FTP and or SFTP and click Apply.
Page 250 of 1094

4.7 Upgrading the Software

IP-20 software and firmware releases are provided in a single bundle that includes
software and firmware for all components in the system. Software is first
downloaded to the system, then installed. After installation, a reset is
automatically performed on all components whose software was upgraded.
Important Note: Make sure to use the original CeraOS software file, without any
modification. Otherwise the software download process will
fail.
• Viewing Current Software Versions
• Software Upgrade Overview
• Downloading and Installing Software
• Configuring a Timed Installation
4.7.1 Viewing Current Software Versions

To display the software version running and downloaded on the unit:
1 Select Platform > Software > Versions. The Versions page opens, displaying
the following:
◦ Running Version – The software version currently running on the unit.
◦ Downloaded Version – The version, if any, that has been downloaded
from the server but not yet installed. Upon installation and reset, this
version will become the Running Version.
Figure 177: Versions Page
Page 251 of 1094

2 To display more detailed information about software component versions,

select Show Detailed Information. The Software Versions table opens in the
Versions page. For a description of the information provided in the Software
Versions table, see Table 27: Software Versions Table Columns.
Figure 178: Software Versions Table
Table 27: Software Versions Table Columns

Package Name The name of the software package.

Target Device The specific component on which the software runs.
Running Version The software version currently running on the component.
Downloaded The version, if any, that has been downloaded from the server but not yet
Version installed. Upon installation, this version will become the Running Version.
Reset Type The level of reset required by the component in order for the Installed Version
to become the Active Version. A cold (hard) reset powers down and powers
back up the component. A warm (soft) reset simply reboots the software or
firmware in the component.
4.7.2 Software Upgrade Overview

The IP-20 software installation process includes the following steps:
1 Download – The files required for the installation or upgrade are downloaded
from a remote server.
2 Installation – The downloaded software and firmware files are installed in all
modules and components of the IP-20 that are currently running an older
version.
3 Reset – The IP-20 is restarted in order to boot the new software and firmware
versions.
Software and firmware releases are provided in a single bundle that includes
software and firmware for all components in the system. When you download a
software bundle, the system verifies the validity of the bundle. The system also
compares the files in the bundle to the files currently installed in the IP-20 and its
Page 252 of 1094

components, so that only files that need to be updated are actually downloaded.
A message is displayed for each file that is actually downloaded.
Note: When downloading an older version, all files in the bundle may be
downloaded, including files that are already installed.
Software bundles can be downloaded via HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, or SFTP. After the
software download is complete, you can initiate the installation.
Notes: Before performing a software upgrade, it is important to verify that
the system date and time are correct. See Setting the Time and Date
(Optional).
When upgrading a node with unit protection, upgrade the standby

unit first, then the active unit.
4.7.3 Downloading and Installing Software

Note: For HTTPS and SFTP downloads, be aware that only certain ciphers are
supported in some operation modes. For a list of supported ciphers,
including an indication of which ciphers are supported in HTTPS strong
mode and FIPS mode, refer to Annex A – Supported Ciphers for Secured
Communication Protocols in the Release Notes for the product and
You can download software using HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, or SFTP.
When downloading software via HTTP or HTTPS, the IP-20 functions as the server,
and you can download the software directly to the IP-20 unit.
Note: HTTP and HTTPS can only be used to download files for CeraOS 9.5 and
later. If there is a requirement to downgrade from CeraOS 9.5 or
higher to an earlier version using HTTP or HTTPS, contact Ceragon
Customer Support for assistance.
When downloading software via FTP or SFTP, the IP-20 functions as an FTP or
SFTP client. You must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you
are using to perform the software upgrade. For details, see Installing and
Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server.
Page 253 of 1094

4.7.3.1 Downloading Software Via HTTP or HTTPS

To download and install a new software version using HTTP or HTTPS:
1 Before performing a software upgrade, it is important to verify that the
system date and time are correct. See Setting the Time and Date (Optional).
2 In the IP-20’s Web EMS, select Platform > Software > Download & Install. The
Download & Install page opens.
Figure 179: Download & Install Page – HTTP/HTTPS Download – No File Selected
3 Select HTTP.
4 Click Choose File. A browse window opens.
5 Navigate to the directory in which the software file is located and select the
file. The selected file must be a ZIP file.
Page 254 of 1094

6 Click Open. The file name of the selected file appears in the File Name field.
Figure 180: Download & Install Page – HTTP/HTTPS Download –File Selected
7 Click Download. The download begins. You can view the status of the
download in the Download Status field. See Table 28.
Note: To discontinue the download process, click Abort.
8 Once the download has been completed, verify that the version you want to
install has been downloaded. You can check the downloaded version for each
component by viewing the Downloaded Version column in the Versions page.
See Viewing Current Software Versions.
Page 255 of 1094

4.7.3.2 Downloading Software Via FTP or SFTP

To download and install a new software version using FTP or SFTP:
1 Before performing a software upgrade, it is important to verify that the
system date and time are correct. See Setting the Time and Date (Optional).
2 Install and configure FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are
using to perform the software upgrade, as described in Installing and
3 Unzip the new software package for IP-20 into your shared FTP or SFTP folder.
4 In the IP-20’s Web EMS, select Platform > Software > Download & Install. The
Download & Install page opens.
5 Select FTP.
Figure 181: Download & Install Page – FTP
Page 256 of 1094

6 Click FTP Parameters to display the FTP Parameters page.
Figure 182: FTP Parameters Page

7 In the File Transfer Protocol field, select the file transfer protocol you want to
use (FTP or SFTP).
8 In the Username field, enter the user name you configured in the FTP server.
9 In the Password field, enter the password you configured in the FTP server. If
you did not configure a password for your FTP/SFTP user, simply leave this
field blank.
10 If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4, enter the IPv4 address of the
PC or laptop you are using as the FTP/SFTP server in the Server IPv4 address
field. See Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications.
PC or laptop you are using as the FTP/SFTP server in the Server IPv6 Address
12 In the Path field, enter the directory path from which you are downloading
the files. Enter the path relative to the FTP user's home directory, not the
absolute path. If the location is the home directory, it should be left empty. If
the location is a sub-folder under the home directory, specify the folder name.
If the shared folder is "C:\", this parameter can be left empty or populated
with "//".
13 Click Apply to save your settings, then Close to close the FTP Parameters page.
14 Click Download. The download begins. You can view the status of the
download in the Download Status field. See Table 28.
15 Once the download has been completed, verify that the version you want to
install has been downloaded. You can check the downloaded version for each
component by viewing the Downloaded Version column in the Versions page.
See Viewing Current Software Versions.
Page 257 of 1094

Important Note – If upgrading from version 7.9 or earlier:

• Before you proceed to install the software, repeat the download
process even if Download Success is displayed in the Download status
field, until the unit displays the message No new software modules
found.
• In case of failure, wait at least 30 minutes and repeat the software
download.
Page 258 of 1094

4.7.3.3 Installing Software

Note: For instructions how to configure a timed installation, see Configuring
a Timed Installation.
To install software:
1 Download the software version you want to install. See Downloading and
Installing Software.
2 Select Platform > Software > Download & Install. The Download & Install
3 Click Install. The installation begins. You can view the status of the installation
in the Download & Install - Status Parameters section of the Download &
Install Download & Install page. See Table 28.
Upon completion of the installation, the system performs an automatic reset.
Important Notes:
• DO NOT reboot the unit during the software installation process. As
soon as the process is successfully completed, the unit will reboot itself.
• Sometimes the installation process can take up to 30 minutes.
• Only in the event that software installation was not successfully finished
and more than 30 minutes have passed can the unit be rebooted.
Table 28: Download & Install Status Parameters

Download status The status of any pending software download. Possible values are:
• Ready – The default value, which appears when no download
is in progress.
• Verifying download files – The system is verifying the files to
be downloaded.
• Download in progress – The download files have been
verified, and the download is in progress.
If an error occurs during the download, an appropriate error message
is displayed in this field.
When the download is complete, one of the following status
indications appears:
• Download Success
• Download Failure
• All components already found in the system
When the system is reset, the Download Status returns to Ready.
Download progress Displays the progress of the current software download.
Page 259 of 1094

Install status The status of any pending software installation. Possible values are:
• Ready – The default value, which appears when no
installation is in progress.
• Verifying installation files – The system is verifying the files to
be installed.
• Installation in progress – The installation files have been
verified, and the installation is in progress.
If an error occurs during the installation, an appropriate error
message is displayed in this field.
When the installation is complete, one of the following status
indications appears:
• Installation Success
• Installation Partial Success
• Installation Failure
• incomplete-sw-version
When the system is reset, the Installation Status returns to Ready.
Install progress Displays the progress of the current software installation.
4.7.4 Configuring a Timed Installation

You can schedule a timed (deferred) software installation to take place at any
time within 24 hours after you configure the installation.
To schedule a timed software installation:
1 Download the software version you want to install. See Downloading and
Installing Software.
2 Select Platform > Software > Download & Install. The Download & Install
3 Click Install Parameters. The Install Parameters page opens.
Figure 183: Install Parameters Page

4 Select Yes in the Timed installation field.
5 Click Apply. The Software management timer field appears.
Page 260 of 1094

Figure 184: Install Parameters Page

6 In the Software management timer field, enter the amount of time, in hours
and minutes, you want to defer the installation. For example, in Figure 184,
the timer is set for two hours after the timer was configured (02:00).
7 Click Apply, then Close to close the Install Parameters page.
Page 261 of 1094

4.8 Backing Up and Restoring Configurations

You can import and export IP-20 configuration files. This enables you to copy the
system configuration to multiple IP-20 units. You can also backup and save
configuration files.
Configuration files can only be copied between units of the same type, i.e., IP-20C
to IP-20C, IP-20C-HP to IP-20C-HP, IP-20S to IP-20S, IP-20E to IP-20E, and IP-20V to
IP-20V.
Importing and exporting configuration files can be done using HTTP, HTTPS, FTP,
or SFTP.
• Configuration Management Overview
• Viewing Current Backup Files
• Setting the FTP/SFTP Configuration Management Parameters
• Exporting a Configuration File
• Importing a Configuration File
• Deleting a Configuration File
• Backing Up the Current Configuration
• Restoring a Saved Configuration
• Editing CLI Scripts
4.8.1 Configuration Management Overview

System configuration files consist of a zip file that contains three components:
• A binary configuration file used by the system to restore the configuration.
• A text file which enables users to examine the system configuration in a
readable format. The file includes the value of all system parameters at the
time of creation of the backup file.
• An additional text file which enables you to write CLI scripts in order to make
desired changes in the backed-up configuration. This file is executed by the
system after restoring the configuration.
The system provides three restore points to manage different configuration files.
Each restore point contains a single configuration file. Files can be added to the
restore points by creating backups of the current system state or by importing
them from an external server. For example, you may want to use one restore
point to keep a last good configuration, another to import changes from an
external server, and the third to store the current configuration.
You can apply a configuration file to the system from any of the restore points.
4.8.2 Viewing Current Backup Files

Page 262 of 1094

To display the configuration files currently saved at the system restore points:
1 Select Platform > Configuration > Backup Files. The Backup Files page opens.
For a description of the information provided in the Backup Files page, see
Table 29: Backup Files Page Columns.
Figure 185: Backup Files Page
Table 29: Backup Files Page Columns

File number A number from 1 to 3 that identifies the restore point.

Original system type The type of unit from which the backup configuration file was
created.
Software version The software version of the unit from which the backup
configuration file was created.
Time of creation The time and date on which the configuration file was created.
Original IP address The IP address of the unit from which the configuration file was
created.
System ID The System ID, if any, of the unit from which the configuration file
was created. This is taken from the Name field in the Unit
Parameters page. See Configuring Unit Parameters.
Valid Reserved for future use.
Page 263 of 1094

4.8.3 Setting the FTP/SFTP Configuration Management Parameters

When importing and exporting configuration files via FTP or SFTP, the IP-20
functions as an FTP or SFTP client. You must install FTP or SFTP server software on
the PC or laptop you are using to perform the import or export. For details, see
Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server.
Before importing or exporting a configuration file via FTP or SFTP, you must
perform the following steps:
1 Verify that the system date and time are correct. See Setting the Time and
Date (Optional).
2 Install and configure an FTP server on the PC or laptop you are using to
perform the import or export. See Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP
Server.
3 In the IP-20 Web EMS, select Platform > Configuration > Configuration
Management. The Configuration Management page opens.
4 In the Configuration Management page, select FTP.
Figure 186: Configuration Management Page – FTP/SFTP

Page 264 of 1094

Figure 187: FTP Parameters Page (Configuration Management)

6 In the File transfer protocol field, select FTP or SFTP.
you did not configure a password for your FTP user, simply leave this field
blank.
PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server in the Server IP address field. See
Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications.
PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server in the Server IPv6 Address field.
See Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications.
11 In the Path field, enter the location of the file you are importing, or the
location to which you want to export the file. If the location is the root shared
folder, it should be left empty. If the location is a sub-folder under the root
shared folder, specify the folder name. If the shared folder is "C:\", this
parameter can be left empty or populated with "//".
12 In the File name field, enter the name of the file you are importing, or the
name you want to give the file you are exporting.
Note: You must add the suffix .zip to the file name. Otherwise, the file
import may fail. You can export the file using any name, then add the
suffix .zip manually.
13 Click Apply, then Close, to save the FTP parameters and return to the
Configuration Management page.
4.8.4 Exporting a Configuration File

You can export a saved configuration file from one of the system's three restore
points to a PC or laptop. You can use FTP, SFTP, HTTP, or HTTPS to export a
configuration file.
Page 265 of 1094

4.8.4.1 Exporting a Configuration File Via HTTP or HTTPS

To export a configuration file using HTTP or HTTPS:
1 Select Platform > Configuration > Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 Select HTTP.
Figure 188: Configuration Management Page – HTTP/HTTPS

3 In the File number field, select the restore point from which to export the file.
Note: The Timed installation field is reserved for future use.
4 Click Export. The export begins. You can view the status of the export in the
File Transfer status field in the Export/Import file status section. Possible
values are:
◦ Ready - The default value, which appears when no import or export is in
progress.
◦ File-in-Transfer – The file export is in progress.
◦ If an error occurs during the import or export, an appropriate error
When the import or export is complete, one of the following status indications
appears:
◦ Succeeded
◦ Failure
Page 266 of 1094

The next time the system is reset, the File Transfer status field returns to
Ready.
5 To abort the export, click Abort Export.
Page 267 of 1094

4.8.4.2 Exporting a Configuration File Via FTP or SFTP

To export a configuration file via FTP or SFTP:
1 Verify that you have followed all the steps in Setting the FTP/SFTP
Configuration Management Parameters.
Configuration Management page opens (Figure 186).
3 Select FTP.
4 In the File Number field, select the restore point from which you want to
export the file.
Note: The Timed installation field is reserved for future use.
5 Click Apply to save your settings.
6 Click Export. The export begins. You can view the status of the export in the
values are:
◦ Ready – The default value, which appears when no import or export is in
progress.
◦ File-in-Transfer – The file export is in progress.
appears:
• Succeeded
• Failure
The next time the system is reset, the File Transfer status field returns to Ready.
4.8.5 Importing a Configuration File

You can import a saved configuration file from a PC or laptop to one of the
system's three restore points. You can use FTP, SFTP, HTTP, or HTTPS to export a
configuration file.
Page 268 of 1094

4.8.5.1 Importing a Configuration File Via HTTP or HTTPS

To export a configuration file using HTTP or HTTPS:
2 Select HTTP.
3 Select Choose File and from your directory, select the file you want to import.
4 In the File Number field, select the restore point to which you want to import
the file. The imported file will be saved to the selected restore point, and will
overwrite whatever file was previously held in that restore point.
6 Click Import. The import begins. You can view the status of the import in the
values are: )
◦ Ready - The default value, which appears when no import or export is in
progress.
◦ File-in-Transfer – The file import is in progress.
appears:
◦ Succeeded
◦ Failure
The next time the system is reset, the File Transfer status field returns to
Ready.
After importing the configuration file, you can apply the configuration by restoring
the file from the restore point to which you saved it. See Restoring a Saved
Configuration.
Page 269 of 1094

4.8.5.2 Importing a Configuration File Via FTP or SFTP

To import a configuration file using FTP or SFTP:
1 Verify that you have followed all the steps in Setting the FTP/SFTP
Configuration Management Parameters.
3 Select FTP.
4 In the File Number field, select the restore point to which you want to import
the file. The imported file will be saved to the selected restore point, and will
overwrite whatever file was previously held in that restore point.
6 Click Import. The import begins. You can view the status of the import in the
values are:
◦ Ready – The default value, which appears when no import or export is in
progress.
◦ File-in-Transfer – The file import is in progress.
appears:
• Succeeded
• Failure
The next time the system is reset, the File Transfer status field returns to Ready.
After importing the configuration file, you can apply the configuration by restoring
the file from the restore point to which you saved it. See Restoring a Saved
Configuration.
4.8.6 Deleting a Configuration File

You can delete a saved configuration file from any of the system's three restore
points:
To delete a configuration file:
2 In the File Number field, select the restore point that holds the configuration
file you want to delete.
3 Click Delete. The file is deleted.
4.8.7 Backing Up the Current Configuration

You can back up the current configuration file to one of the system's three restore
points.
To back up a configuration file:
Page 270 of 1094


2 In the File Number field, select the restore point to which you want to back up
the file. If another configuration file is already saved to that restore point, it
will be overwritten by the file you back up.
3 Click Backup. The backup begins. You can view the status of the backup in the
Backup file creation status field. Possible values in the status field are:
◦ Ready – The default value, which appears when no backup is in progress.
◦ Generating file – The system is verifying the files to be backed up.
If an error occurs during the backup, an appropriate error message is displayed in
this field.
When the backup is complete, one of the following status indications appears:
• Succeeded
• Failure
The next time the system is reset, the Backup file creation status field returns to Ready.
4.8.8 Restoring a Saved Configuration

You can replace the current configuration with any configuration file saved to one
of the system's three restore points by restoring the configuration file from the
restore point. Restoring a saved configuration does not change the unit’s FIPS
mode.
To restore a configuration file:
2 In the File Number field, select the restore point that holds the configuration
you want to restore.
3 Click Restore. The configuration restoration begins. You can view the status of
the restoration in the Configuration restore status field.
Note: While a configuration restoration is taking place, no user can make any
changes to the configuration. All system configuration parameters are
read-only during the configuration restoration.
4.8.9 Editing CLI Scripts

The configuration file package includes a text file that enables you to write CLI scripts
in a backed-up configuration that are executed after restoring the configuration.
To edit a CLI script:
1 Back up the current configuration to one of the restore points. See Backing Up
the Current Configuration.
2 Export the configuration from the restore point to a PC or laptop.
See Exporting a Configuration File.
3 On the PC or laptop, unzip the file Configuration_files.zip.
4 Edit the cli_script.txt file using clish commands, one per line.
5 Save and close the cli_script.txt file, and add it back into
the Configuration_files.zip file.
Page 271 of 1094

6 Import the updated Configuration_files.zip file back into the unit.

See Importing a Configuration File.
7 Restore the imported configuration file. See Restoring a Saved Configuration.
The unit is automatically reset. During initialization, the CLI script is executed,
line by line.
Note: If any specific command in the CLI script requires reset, the unit is
reset when that command is executed. During initialization following
the reset, execution of the CLI script continues from the following
command.
4.9 Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration

You can restore the unit to its factory default configuration, while retaining the
unit’s IP address settings and logs.
To restore the factory default settings:
1 Select Platform > Shelf Management > Chassis Configuration. The Chassis
Figure 189: Chassis Configuration Page

2 Click Set to Factory Default. The unit is restored to its factory default settings.
This does not change the unit's IP address or FIPS configuration.
4.10 Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset

To initiate a hard (cold) reset on the unit:
1 Select Platform > Shelf Management > Chassis Configuration. The Chassis
Configuration page opens (Figure 189).
2 Click Reset.
3 A prompt appears asking if you want to proceed with the reset. Click Yes to
initiate the reset.
The unit is reset.
Page 272 of 1094

4.11 Configuring Unit Parameters

To view and configure system information:
1 Select Platform > Management > Unit Parameters. The Unit Parameters page
opens. Table 30 describes the fields in the Unit Parameters page.
Figure 190: Unit Parameters Page
Table 30: Unit Parameters
Name A name for the unit (optional, up to 128 characters). This name appears at the
top of every Web EMS page.
Description Descriptive information about the unit. This information is used for
debugging, and should include information such as the unit type.
System up time The time since the system was last reinitialized.
Contact person The name of the person to be contacted if and when a problem with the
system occurs (optional).
Location The actual physical location of the node or agent (optional).
Longitude The unit's longitude coordinates.
Latitude The unit's latitude coordinates.
Measurement format The type of measurement you want the system to use: Metric or Imperial.
Unit Temperature The current temperature of the unit. For further information, see
Temperature Ranges.
Voltage input (Volt) The voltage input of the unit.
Page 273 of 1094

User Comment A free text field for any information you want to record (up to 500
characters).
4.12 Configuring NTP

IP-20 supports Network Time Protocol (NTP). NTP distributes Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC) throughout the system, using a jitter buffer to neutralize the
effects of variable latency.
You can configure up to four NTP servers. Each server can be configured using
IPv4 or IPv6. When multiple servers are configured, the unit chooses the best
server according to the implementation of Version 4.2.6p1 of the NTPD (Network
Time Protocol Daemon). The servers are continually polled. The polling interval is
determined by the NTPD, to achieve maximum accuracy consistent with minimum
network overhead.
To view and configure the NTP Parameters:
1 Select Platform > Management > NTP Configuration. The NTP Configuration
page opens.
Figure 191: NTP Configuration Page
Page 274 of 1094

2 Select a row in the NTP Configuration table and click Edit. The NTP
Configuration Edit page opens.
Figure 192: NTP Configuration Page (Disabled)

3 In the NTP Admin field, select Enable.
4 In the NTP version field, select the NTP version you want to use. Options are
NTPv3 and NTPv4. NTPv4 provides interoperability with NTPv3 and with SNTP.
5 Select IPv4 or IPv6.
Note: For each NTP server, you can define an IPv4 address or an IPv6
address but not both.
6 In the NTP server IPv4 address or NTP server IPv6 address field, enter the IP
address of the NTP server.
Page 275 of 1094

7 Click Apply. Once you click Apply, the NTP Status Parameters appear. Table 31
describes the NTP Status Parameters.
Figure 193: NTP Configuration Page (Disabled)

8 Repeat these steps for each NTP server you want to configure, up to four
servers.
Table 31: NTP Status Parameters

Lock status Indicates the NTP status of the unit. Possible values are:
• LOCK – The NTP client is locked on a remote server.
• LOCAL – The NTP client is locked on the local system clock
(free running clock).
• CANDIDATE – The server is next in line to be selected if the
currently locked server is discarded.
• N/A – The NTP client is not locked on any clock or NTP is
disabled.
IPv4 address The IPv4 address of the NTP server (if configured).
IPv6 address The IPv6 address of the NTP server (if configured).
Refid The NTP client time server.
Stratum The NTP client statum..
Page 276 of 1094

Peer type The server peer type.
Reach The result of the last 8 polls in octal form.
Delay The round trip delay to peer in milliseconds.
Offset Offset to the client in milliseconds.
Jitter Variance in latency on the network.
Page 277 of 1094

4.13 Displaying Unit Inventory

To view the unit's part number and serial number:
1 Select Platform > Management > Inventory. The Inventory page opens,
showing the unit's part number and serial number.
Figure 194: Inventory Page
4.14 Displaying SFP DDM and Inventory Information

Static and dynamic monitoring is available for SFP modules, including all SFP,
SFP+, and CSFP modules used in Ethernet and MIMO ports in IP-20 all-outdoor
products.
Dynamic monitoring (DDM) PMs are also available.
Note: DDM parameters are not relevant for electrical SFPs.
The following alarms are available in connection with SFP DDM and inventory
monitoring. The polling interval for these alarms is one minute.
• Alarm #803- SFP port RX power level is too low.
• Alarm #804 – SFP port RX power level is too high.
• Alarm #805- SFP port TX power level is too low.
• Alarm #806 – SFP port TX power level is too high.
These alarms are based on thresholds defined by the SFP module vendor, which
are static. They also display the actual RX or TX values as of the time when the
alarm was raised, which are dynamic. The dynamic values are not changed as long
as the alarm is still raised. They are only updated if the alarm is cleared, then
raised again.
Page 278 of 1094

If there is no signal on the interface, a Loss of Carrier alarm (LOC) is raised, and
this alarm masks the DDM alarms.
Figure 195: SFP Alarm Example
4.14.1 Displaying Information about an SFP Module

To display information about an SFP module:
1 Select Platform > Interfaces > SFP. The SFP Transceiver Inventory and DDM
page opens.
◦ The SFP Inventory section displays static information about the SFP
module.
◦ The SFP Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) section displays dynamic
information about the current state of the SFP module.
Figure 196: SFP Transceiver Inventory and DDM Page

2 In the SFP Transceiver field, select the SFP interface about which you want to
display information.
Note: In a 2E2SX IP-20C unit, P4 is displayed as Ethernet: Slot 1, Port 4 when
used as a traffic port, and Extension: Slot 1, Port 1 when used as an
Extension port in MIMO and Space Diversity configurations.
Page 279 of 1094

Table 32: SFP Inventory Parameters

Parameter Description
Transceiver Present Indicates whether an SFP module is attached to the interface.

Connector Type Always displays LC.
Transceiver Type Displays a description of the SFP module.
Vendor Name Displays the name of the SFP’s vendor.
Vendor Part Number Displays the vendor’s part number for the SFP module.
Vendor Serial Number Displays the vendor’s serial number for the SFP module.
Vendor Revision Displays the revision number of the serial number provided by the
vendor for the SFP module.
Laser Wavelength (nm) Display’s the SFP module’s laser wavelength. For CSFP modules,
two wavelengths are displayed. This parameters is not relevant for
copper SFPs.
Link Length SM Fiber (km) The maximum length of the cable (in km) for single mode fiber
cables.
Link Length OM1 Fiber (m) The maximum length of the cable (in meters) for OM1 multi-mode
fiber cables.
fiber cables.
fiber cables.
Table 33: SFP Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Parameters

Optical Diagnostics Supported Displays whether the SFP module supports DDM monitoring. For
modules that do not support DDM monitoring, the parameters
below are not available.
RX Power Level (dBm) The SFP module’s current RX power signal strength (in dBm).
TX Power Level (dBm) The SFP module’s current TX power signal strength (in dBm).
Bias Current (mA) The laser bias current of the SFP module (in mA)
Temperature The current temperature of the SFP module (displayed in both C°
and F°).
If no signal is being received, RX Power Level is displayed as -40 dBm.

If the Admin status of the port is Down, the TX Power Level is displayed as -40 DBm
and the Bias Current is displayed as 0 mA.
The Temperature is always shown as long as the SFP module is inserted in the port.
Page 280 of 1094

4.14.2 Displaying PMs about an SFP Module

To display DDM PMs:
1 Select Platform > PM & Statistics > SFP. The SFP PM Report page opens.
Figure 197: SFP PM Report Page

2 In the Interface field, select the interface for which you want to display PMs.
Note: In a 2E2SX IP-20C unit, P4 is displayed as Ethernet: Slot 1, Port 4 when
used as a traffic port, and Extension: Slot 1, Port 1 when used as an
Extension port in MIMO and Space Diversity configurations.
3 In the Interval Type field:
◦ To display reports for the past 24 hours, in 15 minute intervals, select 15
minutes.
◦ To display reports for the past month, in daily intervals, select 24 hours.
Note: No entries are displayed if the SFP device does not support DDM, or if
the Admin status of the interface is Down.
DDM PMs are not persistent, which means they are not saved in the event of unit
reset. RX and TX power levels are collected five times per 15-minute interval. 15-
minute PM data is saved for 24 hours. 24-hour PM data, which is updated every
15 minutes, is saved for 30 days.
Table 34 describes the DDM PMs.
Table 34: DDM PMs

Interval For 24-hour intervals, displays the date of the interval. For 15-minute
intervals, displays the date and ending time of the interval.
Min RX Power (dBm) The minimum RX power during the interval (dBm).
Max RX Power (dBm) The maximum RX power during the interval (dBm).
Avg RX Power (dBm) The average RX power during the interval (dBm).
Min TX Power (dBm) The minimum TX power during the interval (dBm).
Max TX Power (dBm) The maximum TX power during the interval (dBm).
Page 281 of 1094

Avg TX Power (dBm) The average TX power during the interval (dBm).
Integrity Indicates whether the values received at the time and date of the measured
interval are reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not
reliable. Possible causes are (i) an LOC alarm, (ii) changing the Admin status of
the interface, or (iii) unit reset.
Page 282 of 1094

4.15 Defining a Login Banner

You can define a login banner of up to 2,000 bytes. This banner will appear every
time a user establishes a connection with the Web EMS. The banner appears
before the login prompt, so that users will always see the login banner and must
manually close the banner before logging in to the Web EMS.
To define a login banner:
1 Select Platform > Management > Login Banner. The Login Banner page opens.
Figure 198: Login Banner Page

2 Enter a text message of up to 2,000 bytes.
3 To display a test banner as it will appear to users, click Test Banner.
4 Click Apply.
Page 283 of 1094

5. Radio Configuration
• Viewing the Radio Status and Settings
• Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters
• Configuring ATPC and ATPC Override Timer
• Configuring Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through
• Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption
• Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics
Related topics:
• Configuring the Radio Parameters
• System Configurations
• Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC
• Configuring Unit Protection with HSB Radio Protection (External Protection)
• Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity
• Operating an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP in Single Radio Carrier Mode
• Performing Radio Loopback
Page 284 of 1094

5.1 Viewing the Radio Status and Settings

You can configure the radios and display the radio parameters in the Radio
Parameters page.
Note: For instructions how to configure the radio parameters, see
Configuring the Radio Parameters.
To display the radio parameters:
Figure 199: Radio Parameters Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP

2 For multi-carrier units, select the carrier in the Radio table (see Figure 199)
and click Edit. A separate Radio Parameters page opens. The page is
essentially identical to the Single-carrier page, except for the addition of a
Radio location parameter.
Page 285 of 1094

Figure 200: Radio Parameters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
Page 286 of 1094

Table 35 lists and describes the parameters in the Radio table of the IP-20C or
IP-20C-HP Radio Parameters page and the Status parameters section of the Radio
Parameters configuration page.
Table 35: Radio Status Parameters

Type The RF module type.

XPIC Support Indicates whether the carrier is operating in XPIC mode. For
instructions on configuring XPIC, refer to Configuring XPIC.
Note: Only relevant for IP-20C and IP-20C-HP units.
TX Frequency The configured TX radio frequency. The TX radio frequency is
configured in the Frequency control (Local) section of the Radio
Parameters page. See Configuring the Radio Parameters.
RX Frequency The configured RX radio frequency. The RX radio frequency is
configured in the Frequency control (Local) section of the Radio
Parameters page. See Configuring the Radio Parameters.
Radio Interface operational Indicates whether the carrier is operational (Up) or not operational
status (Down).
Operational TX Level (dBm) The actual TX signal level (TSL) of the carrier (in dBm).
RX Level (dBm) The actual measured RX signal level (RSL) of the carrier (in dBm).
Modem MSE (dB) The MSE (Mean Square Error) of the RX signal, measured in dB. A
value of 0 means that the modem is not locked.
Modem XPI (dB) The XPI (Cross Polarization Interference) level, measured in dB.
Defective Blocks The number of defective radio blocks that have been counted.
Click Clear Counter to reset this counter.
TX Mute Status Indicates whether radio transmission is muted.
Adaptive TX power Indicates whether Adaptive TX power is currently operational.
operational status
20V).
Page 287 of 1094

5.2 Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters

You can view and configure the parameters of the carrier or carriers at the remote
side of the link in the Remote Radio Parameters page.
To display the remote radio parameters:
1 Select Radio > Remote Radio Parameters. The Remote Radio Parameters page
opens.
Figure 201: Remote Radio Parameters Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
Figure 202: Remote Radio Parameters Page – IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V
2 For multi-carrier units, select the carrier in the Remote Radio table (see
Figure 201) and click Edit. A separate Remote Radio Parameters page opens.
The page is identical to the single-carrier page.
Page 288 of 1094

Figure 203: Remote Radio Parameters Page Per Carrier – Multi-Carrier

3 Configure the remote radio parameters. For a description of these
parameters, see Table 36: Remote Radio Parameters.
4 Click Apply.
You can also reset the remote unit from the Remote Radio Parameters – Edit
page:
• To reset the remote unit, click Reset Remote Unit.
Table 36: Remote Radio Parameters

Radio Location Read-only. Identifies the carrier.

Remote Radio Location Read-only. Identifies the location of the remote radio.
Local Remote Channel Read-only. The operational status of the active (in a protection
Operational Status configuration) remote channel.
Remote Receiver Signal Read-only. The Rx level of the remote radio, in dBm.
Level
Remote Most Severe Read-only. The level of the most severe alarm currently active on the
Alarm remote unit.
Remote Unit Link ID Edit page only. Identifies the link, in order to distinguish it from other
links. Enter a unique identifier from 1 to 65535.
Remote Tx Output Level The remote unit's Tx output level, if the remote unit has been
configured to operate at a fixed Tx level (in dBm).
Page 289 of 1094

Remote Radio Mute To mute the TX output of the remote radio, select On. To unmute the
TX output of the remote radio, select Off.
Remote IP Address The IPv4 IP address of the remote unit.
Remote IPv6 Address The IPv6 IP address of the remote unit.
5.3 Configuring ATPC and ATPC Override Timer

ATPC is a closed-loop mechanism by which each carrier changes the TX power
according to the indication received across the link, in order to achieve a desired
RSL on the other side of the link.
With ATPC, if the radio increases its TX power up to the configured TX power, it
can lead to a period of sustained transmission at maximum power, resulting in
unacceptable interference with other systems.
In order to minimize interference, IP-20 provides an ATPC override mechanism.
When ATPC override is enabled, a timer begins when ATPC raises the TX power to
its maximum. When the timer expires, the radio enters ATPC override state. In
ATPC override state, the radio transmits no higher than the pre-determined ATPC
override TX level, and an ATPC override alarm is raised. The radio remains in ATPC
override state until the ATPC override state is manually cancelled by the user (or
until the unit is reset). The radio then returns to normal ATPC operation.
In a configuration with unit protection, the ATPC override state is propagated to
the standby unit in the event of switchover.
Notes: When canceling an ATPC override state, you should ensure that the
underlying problem has been corrected. Otherwise, ATPC may be
overridden again.
You cannot use ATPC in MIMO mode. See Configuring MIMO and
Space Diversity.
To enable and configure ATPC and display ATPC settings:
1 Select Radio > ATPC. The ATPC page opens.
Page 290 of 1094

Figure 204: ATPC Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP

2 For multi-carrier units, select the carrier you wish to configure in the ATPC
table (see Figure 204) and click Edit. A separate ATPC –Edit page opens. The
page is essentially identical to the single-carrier page.
Figure 205: ATPC – Edit Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP

3 In the ATPC Admin field, select Enable to enable ATPC or Disable to disable
ATPC.
4 Click Apply. If you selected ATPC -Admin – Enable, the Reference RX Level
(dBm) and ATPC Override Admin fields are now displayed.
5 In the Reference RX Level (dBm) field, enter a number between -70 and -30 as
the reference value for the ATPC mechanism. When ATPC is enabled, it adjusts
the TX power dynamically to preserve this RSL level. The range of values
depends on the frequency, MRMC script, and RFU type.
6 In the ATPC Override Admin field, select Enable to enable ATPC override or
Disable to disable ATPC override. You can only enable ATPC override if ATPC
itself is enabled.
Page 291 of 1094

Note: Make sure to set an appropriate value in the Override Timeout field
before enabling ATPC override. Failure to do so can lead to
unexpected reduction of the TX power with corresponding loss of
capacity if TX override is enabled with the timer set to a lower-than-
desired value.
7 Click Apply. If you selected ATPC Override Admin – Enable, the ATPC
Override State, Override TX Level, and ATPC Override Admin fields are now
displayed.
8 In the Override TX Level field, select the TX power, in dBm, to be used when
the unit is in an ATPC override state. The range of values depends on the
frequency, MRMC script, and RFU type.
9 In the Override Timeout field, select the amount of time, in seconds, the timer
counts from the moment the radio reaches its maximum configured TX power
until ATPC override goes into effect. You can select from 0 to 1800 seconds.
10 In the Remote ATPC Admin field, select Enable to enable ATPC or Disable to
disable ATPC on the remote radio carrier.
11 Click Apply. If you selected Remote ATPC Admin – Enable, the Remote
Reference RX Level (dBm) field is now displayed.
12 In the Remote Reference RX Level (dBm) field, enter a number between -70
and -30 as the reference value for the ATPC mechanism on the remote radio
carrier.
13 Click Apply.
To cancel an ATPC override state on the local unit, click Cancel Override.
Page 292 of 1094

5.4 Configuring Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through

Note: For IP-20E and IP-20V, Header De-Duplication is available for all
channels except 500 MHz. Make sure to disable Header De-Duplication
before selecting a 500 MHz MRMC script.
Header De-Duplication enables operators to significantly improve Ethernet
throughout over the radio link without affecting user traffic. Header
De-Duplication can be configured to operate on various layers of the protocol
stack, saving bandwidth by reducing unnecessary header overhead. Header De-
duplication is also sometimes known as header compression.
Note: The Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through configuration
must be identical on both sides of the link.
If Frame Cut-Through is used together with 1588 Transparent Clock,

the 1588 packets must be given a CoS that is not assigned to the
fourth priority queue.
Using the Frame Cut-Through feature, frames assigned to queues with 4th priority
pre-empt frames already in transmission over the radio from other queues. After
the 4th queue frames have been transmitted, transmission of the pre-empted
frames resumes.
Note: Frame Cut-Through cannot be used together with 1588 Transparent
Clock.
To configure Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through:
1 Select Radio > Ethernet Interface > Configuration. The Radio Ethernet
Interface Configuration page opens.
◦ For multi-carrier units, the Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration page
initially displays a table as shown in Figure 206.
◦ For IP-20S units, a page appears, similar to Figure 207 (which shows an IP-
20C/IP-20C-HP page).
Figure 206: Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
Page 293 of 1094

Note: The Header Deduplication type column in the Main page and the
Header Deduplication type field in the Edit page are not operational.
To monitor the Header De-Duplication setting and status, use the
Header Deduplication mode and Header Deduplication operational
state columns and fields.
2 For multi-carrier units, select the carrier in the Radio Ethernet and
Compression table (see Figure 206) and click Edit. A separate Radio Ethernet
Interface Configuration page opens. The page is essentially identical to the
single-carrier page.
3 Click Edit. The Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration – Edit page opens.
Figure 207: Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration – Edit Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
4 In the Cut through mode field, select Yes to enable Frame Cut-Through or No
to disable Frame Cut-Through.
5 In the Header Compression mode field, select from the following options:
◦ Disabled – Header De-Duplication is disabled.
◦ Layer2 – Header De-Duplication operates on the Ethernet level.
◦ MPLS – Header De-Duplication operates on the Ethernet and MPLS levels.
◦ Layer3 – Header De-Duplication operates on the Ethernet and IP levels.
◦ Layer4 – Header De-Duplication operates on all supported layers up to
Layer 4.
◦ Tunnel – Header De-Duplication operates on Layer 2, Layer 3, and on the
Tunnel layer for packets carrying GTP or GRE frames.
◦ Tunnel-Layer3 – Header De-Duplication operates on Layer 2, Layer 3, and
on the Tunnel and T-3 layers for packets carrying GTP or GRE frames.
◦ Tunnel-Layer4 – Header De-Duplication operates on Layer 2, Layer 3, and
on the Tunnel, T-3, and T-4 layers for packets carrying GTP or GRE frames.
6 Click Apply, then Close
Note: The Utilization threshold field is not applicable.
Page 294 of 1094

5.4.1 Viewing Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through Counters

You can view PMs on the usage of Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through.
To view Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through counters:
1 Select Radio > Ethernet Interface > Counters. The Radio Ethernet Interface
◦ For multi-carrier units, the Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration page
initially displays a table as shown in Figure 208.
Figure 208: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Page – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
Page 295 of 1094

Figure 209: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Page – Single-Carrier

2 For multi-carrier units, select the carrier in the Header Compression Counters
table (Figure 208) and click View. A separate Radio Ethernet Interface
Configuration page opens. The page is essentially identical to the single-carrier
page.
Page 296 of 1094

Figure 210: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C/IP-20C-HP
Table 37 lists and describes the fields in the Radio Ethernet Interface Counters
page.
Table 37: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Fields

Interface Location Identifies the radio interface.

Header Compression Counters
TX bytes before Bytes on the TX side before Header De-Duplication.
enhanced HC
TX compressed Bytes on the TX side that were compressed by Header De-Duplication.
bytes
TX frames before Frames on the TX side before Header De-Duplication.
enhanced HC
TX frames Frames on the TX side that were compressed by Header De-Duplication.
compressed by
enhanced HC
Page 297 of 1094

TX learning frames The number of frames that have been used to learn unique data flows. Once
a particular flow type has been learned, subsequent frames with that flow
type are compressed by Header De-Duplication.
TX frames not Frames on the TX side that were not compressed due to exclusion rules.
compressed due to Note: The use of exclusion rules for Header De-Duplication is planned for
excluding rule future release.
TX frames not Frames on the TX side that were not compressed for reasons other than the
compressed due to use of exclusion rules.
other reasons
TX number of active The number of Header De-Duplication flows that are active on the TX side.
flows
Number of active Not supported.
flows of user
selected flow type
Ethernet Port Counters
Port RX good bytes The number of good bytes received on the port since the last time the Radio
Ethernet Interface counters were cleared.
Port RX good frames The number of good frames received on the port since the last time the
Radio Ethernet Interface counters were cleared.
Port TX total bytes The number of bytes transmitted since the last time the Radio Ethernet
Interface counters were cleared.
Port TX frames The number of frames transmitted since the last time the Radio Ethernet
Port TX idle bytes The number of idle bytes transmitted since the last time the Radio Ethernet
Cut Through
Counters
TX frames The number of frames that have been transmitted via Frame Cut-Through
since the last time the Radio Ethernet Interface counters were cleared.
Page 298 of 1094

5.5 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption

This feature is not supported with MIMO or Space Diversity links.
• Requires an activation key per radio. If no valid AES activation key has been
applied to the unit, AES will not operate on the unit. See Configuring the
Activation Key.
Note: In order for the AES activation key to become active, you must reset
the unit after configuring a valid AES activation key. Until the unit is
reset, an alarm will be present if you enable AES. This is not the case
for other activation keys.
FibeAir IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S support AES-256 payload encryption. AES is
enabled and configured separately for each radio carrier.
IP-20 uses a dual-key encryption mechanism for AES:
• The user provides a master key. The master key can also be generated by the
system upon user command. The master key is a 32-byte symmetric
encryption key. The same master key must be manually configured on both
• The session key is a 32-byte symmetric encryption key used to encrypt the
actual data. Each link uses two session keys, one for each direction. For each
direction, the session key is generated by the transmit side unit and
propagated automatically, via a Key Exchange Protocol, to the other side of
the link. The Key Exchange Protocol exchanges session keys by encrypting
them with the master key, using the AES-256 encryption algorithm. Session
keys are regenerated at user-configured intervals.
The first KEP exchange that takes place after a new master key is configured
causes traffic to be blocked for up to one minute, until the Crypto Validation State
becomes Valid. Subsequent KEP exchanges that take place when a session key
expires do not affect traffic. KEP exchanges have no effect upon ACM, RSL, and
MSE.
To configure payload encryption:
1 Verify that both the local and remote units are running with no alarms. If any
alarm is present, take corrective actions to clear the alarms before
proceeding.
2 If the link is using in-band management, identify which unit is local and which
unit is remote from the management point of view.
3 In a protected link, enable protection lockout, first on the remote and then on
the local unit. See Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit.
4 On the remote unit, select Radio > Payload Encryption. The Payload
Encryption page opens.
◦ For multi-carrier units, the Payload Encryption page initially displays a
table as shown in Figure 211.
◦ For IP-20S units, a page appears, similar to Figure 212 (which shows an IP-
20C/IP-20C-HP page).
Page 299 of 1094

Figure 211: Payload Encryption Page

5 Select the carrier you want to configure and click Edit. The Payload Encryption
– Edit page opens.
Figure 212: Payload Encryption – Edit Page

6 Configure the master key by doing one of the following:
◦ Enter a master key in the Master Key field. You must enter between 8 and
32 ASCII characters.
◦ Click Generate key to generate a master key automatically.
Page 300 of 1094

You must use the same master key on both sides of the link. This means that if
you generate a master key automatically on one side of the link, you must copy
that key and for use on the other side of the link. Once payload encryption has
been enabled on both sides of the link, the Key Exchange Protocol periodically
verifies that both ends of the link have the same master key. If a mismatch is
detected, an alarm is raised and traffic transmission is stopped for the
mismatched carrier at both sides of the link. The link becomes non-valid and
traffic stops being forwarded.
When you enter a master key, or when the master key is automatically generated,
the key is hidden behind dots. To copy the master key, you must display the key.
To display the master key, click Show Key. A new Master key field appears,
displaying the master key. You can copy the key to the clipboard from this field.
Figure 213: Payload Encryption – Edit Page with Master Key Displayed
7 Record and save the master key generated in Step 6.
8 On the local unit, follow Steps 4 through 6 to configure the same master key
configured on the remote unit also on the local unit.
9 Enable payload encryption on the remote unit:
i In the Admin Mode field, select AES-256 to enable payload encryption.
ii In the Session Key Period field, configure a time interval in hours and
minutes (HH:MM). This is the interval at which the session key is
automatically regenerated. The Session Key Period can be from 3 minutes
(00:03) to 12 hours (12:00).
iii When you are finished, click Apply.
This step will cause the link status to be Down until payload encryption is
successfully enabled on the local unit. However, the RSL measured on the
link should remain at an acceptable level.
Page 301 of 1094

Note: The Crypto Validation State field indicates whether the interface is
functioning properly, with AES-256 encryption. In order for this field to
display Valid, both the interface itself and AES-256 encryption must be
enabled, the hardware must be in place and functioning properly,
initialization must be finished, and AES-256 encryption must be
functioning properly, with no loopback on the interface.
10 Enable payload encryption on the local unit by following the procedure
described in Step 9. Verify that on both the local and remote active units, the
link status returns to Up and user traffic is restored. In links using in-band
management, verify also that in-band management returns.
11 In a protected link, perform copy-to-mate, first on the remote and then on the
local unit. See Step 5 in Configuring HSB Radio Protection. After the copy-to-
mate operation, wait for both standby units to re-boot and verify that there
are no alarms.
Note: The standby unit may have a payload encryption failure alarm for up to
about one minute after the unit is up and running.
12 In a protected link, remove the protection lockout, first on the remote and
then on the local unit. See Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby
Unit.
13 Verify that there are no alarms on the link.
Note: Any time payload encryption fails, the Operational status of the link is
Down until payload encryption is successfully restored.
Page 302 of 1094

5.6 Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics

• Configuring BER Thresholds and Displaying Current BER
• Displaying MRMC Status
• Displaying MRMC PMs
• Displaying and Clearing Defective Block Counters
• Displaying Signal Level PMs and Configuring Signal Level PM Thresholds
• Displaying Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs
• Displaying MSE PMs and Configuring MSE PM Thresholds
• Displaying XPI PMs and Configuring XPI PM Thresholds
• Displaying Traffic PMs
Note: The Radio > PM & Statistics > Diversity and Radio > PM & Statistics >
Combined pages are reserved for future use.
5.6.1 Configuring BER Thresholds and Displaying Current BER

You can configure PM thresholds, BER thresholds, and Excessive BER
Administration. This enables you to define the levels at which certain PMs are
counted, such as the number of seconds in which the configured threshold RX and
TX levels are exceeded. This also enables you to define the levels at which certain
alarms are triggered.
• Signal level PM thresholds, such as RX and TX level thresholds, are configured
from the Signal Level PM Report page. See Displaying Signal Level PMs and
Configuring Signal Level PM Thresholds.
• MSE PM thresholds are configured from the MSE PM Report page. See
Displaying MSE PMs and Configuring MSE PM Thresholds.
• XPI PM thresholds are configured from the XPI PM Report page. See
Displaying XPI PMs and Configuring XPI PM Thresholds.
Page 303 of 1094

You can also display the current BER level.

To configure the BER thresholds and Excessive BER Administration, and display
current BER levels:
1 Select Radio > Radio BER Thresholds. The Radio BER Thresholds page opens.
The current BER level is displayed, per radio, in the Radio BER column.
Figure 214: Radio BER Thresholds Page

2 In the Excessive BER admin field, select Enable to enable excessive BER
administration or Disable to disable excessive BER administration. Excessive
BER administration determines whether or not excessive BER is propagated as
a fault and considered a system event. For example, if excessive BER
administration is enabled, excessive BER can trigger a protection switchover
and can cause a synchronization source to go into a failure status. Excessive
BER administration is enabled or disabled for the entire unit rather than for
specific radios.
3 In the Thresholds table, select the radio for which you want to configure
thresholds.
Page 304 of 1094

4 Click Edit. The Radio BER Thresholds – Edit page opens.
Figure 215: Radio BER Thresholds – Edit Page

5 In the Excessive BER Threshold field, select the level above which an excessive
BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link. The range of values
is 1e-3 to 1e-10.
6 In the Signal Degrade BER Threshold field, select the level above which a
Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link. The
range of values is 1e-6 to 1e-15.
Page 305 of 1094

5.6.2 Displaying MRMC Status

Related Topics:
To display the current modulation and bit rate per radio:
1 Select Radio > MRMC > MRMC Status. The MRMC Status page opens.
Figure 216: MRMC Status Page

Table 38 describes the MRMC status parameters.
Note: To display the same parameters for an individual radio in a separate
page, select the radio in the MRMC script status table and click Edit.
You can configure Adaptive TX Power from the MRMC Status – Edit
page. See Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power.
Table 38: MRMC Status Parameters

Radio Location Identifies the carrier (Slot 2, port 1 or Slot 2, port 2).
Configured MRMC Script The current MRMC script.
TX profile The current TX profile.
TX QAM The current TX modulation.
TX bit-rate The current TX bit-rate.
RX profile The current RX profile.
RX QAM The current RX modulation.
RX bit-rate The current RX bit-rate.
Page 306 of 1094

5.6.3 Displaying MRMC PMs and Configuring ACM Profile Thresholds

Related Topics:
For each radio carrier, you can display the minimum and maximum ACM profile
and the minimum and maximum bitrate (throughput) per 15-minute or daily
intervals.
You can also define two ACM profile thresholds for each radio carrier, and display
the number of seconds per interval that the radio’s ACM profile was below each
of these thresholds. These thresholds trigger the following alarms:
• Threshold 1 – When the ACM profile goes beneath this threshold, Alarm ID
1313 (Major) is raised. The alarm is cleared when the ACM profile is at or
above this threshold.
1314 (Critical) is raised. The alarm is cleared when the ACM profile is at or
To display Multi-Rate Multi-Constellation PMs, including information on ACM
profile fluctuations per interval per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > MRMC. The MRMC PM Report page opens.
Figure 217: MRMC PM Report Page

2 In the Interface field, select the radio carrier for which you want to display
PMs.
◦ To display reports in 15-minute intervals, select 15 minutes.
◦ To display reports in daily intervals, select 24 hours.
Note: To display the same parameters for a specific interval in a separate
page, select the interval in the MRMC PM table and click View.
Page 307 of 1094

To set the ACM profile thresholds:

1 Click Thresholds. The MRMC Thresholds Configuration – Edit page opens.
Figure 218: MRMC Thresholds Configuration – Edit Page

2 For each radio carrier, you can enter define two thresholds. In the MRMC PM
Threshold 1 column, select the higher profile threshold. In the MRMC PM
Threshold 2 column, select the lower profile threshold. The default value for
each threshold is Profile 0.
Table 39 describes the MRMC PMs.
Table 39: MRMC PMs

Interval For 24-hour intervals, displays the date of the interval. For 15-minute intervals,
displays the date and ending time of the interval.
Min profile Displays the minimum ACM profile that was measured during the interval.
Max profile Displays the maximum ACM profile that was measured during the interval.
Min bitrate Displays the minimum total radio throughput (Mbps) delivered during the
interval.
Max bitrate Displays the maximum total radio throughput (Mbps) delivered during the
interval.
Seconds above Displays the number of seconds the radio was above both ACM profile
Threshold 1 thresholds during the interval.
Seconds below Displays the number of seconds the radio was below ACM profile threshold 1
Threshold 1 during the interval.
Seconds below Displays the number of seconds the radio was below ACM profile threshold 2
Threshold 2 during the interval.
interval are reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable
due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.
Page 308 of 1094

5.6.4 Displaying and Clearing Defective Block Counters

The Counters page displays the number of blocks in which errors were detected.
The larger the amount, the poorer the radio link quality.
To display the number of blocks in which errors were detected per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Counters. The Counters page opens.
◦ For multi-carrier units, the Counters page initially displays a table as shown
in Figure 219.
◦ For single-carrier units, the Counters page appears as shown in Figure 220.
Figure 219: Counters Page – Multi-Carrier
Page 309 of 1094

Figure 220: Counters Page – Single-Carrier

2 For multi-carrier units, you can select the carrier in the Radio table (see
Figure 219) and click View to display a page for that carrier. A separate
Counters page opens.
Figure 221: Counters Page Per Carrier – Multi-Carrier

3 To clear the counters, click Clear Counters.
Page 310 of 1094

5.6.5 Displaying Signal Level PMs and Configuring Signal Level PM Thresholds
To display signal level PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Signal Level. The Signal Level PM report page
opens.
Figure 222: Signal Level PM Report Page

2 For the IP-20C and IP-20C-HP, in the Interface field, select the radio for which
you want to display PMs.
Table 40 describes the Signal Level PMs.
page, select the interval in the RF PM table and click View.
Table 40: Signal Level PMs

Interval For 24-hour intervals, displays the date of the interval. For 15-
minute intervals, displays the date and ending time of the interval.
Max TSL (dBm) The maximum TSL (Transmit Signal Level) that was measured
during the interval.
Min TSL (dBm) The minimum TSL (Transmit Signal Level) that was measured
Max RSL (dBm) The maximum RSL (Received Signal Level) that was measured
Min RSL (dBm) The minimum RSL (Received Signal Level) that was measured
TSL exceed threshold The number of seconds the measured TSL exceeded the threshold
seconds during the interval. TSL thresholds are configured in the Radio
Thresholds page. See Configuring BER Thresholds and Displaying
Current BER.
Page 311 of 1094

RSL exceed threshold1 The number of seconds the measured RSL exceeded RSL threshold
seconds 1 during the interval. RSL thresholds are configured in the Radio
Current BER.
RSL exceed threshold2 The number of seconds the measured RSL exceeded RSL threshold
seconds 2 during the interval. RSL thresholds are configured in the Radio
Current BER.
Integrity Indicates whether the values received at the time and date of the
measured interval are reliable. An x in the column indicates that
the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power
failure that occurred at that time.
To set the Signal Level PM thresholds, click Thresholds. The Signal Level
Thresholds Configuration – Edit Page opens. Set the thresholds, described in
Table 41, and click Apply.
Figure 223: Signal Level Thresholds Configuration – Edit Page
Table 41: Signal Level Thresholds

RX Level Threshold 1 (dBm) Specify the threshold for counting exceeded seconds if the RSL is
below this level.
RX Level Threshold 2 (dBm) Specify a second threshold for counting exceeded seconds if the
RSL is below this level.
TX Level Threshold (dBm) Specify the threshold for counting exceeded seconds if the TSL is
below this level.
Page 312 of 1094

5.6.6 Displaying Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs

To display modem BER (Bit Error Rate) PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Aggregate. The Aggregate PM report page
opens.
Figure 224: Aggregate PM Report Page

Table 42 describes the Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs.
page, select the interval in the Modem BER PM table and click View.
Table 42: Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs

ES Displays the number of seconds in the measuring interval during which
errors occurred.
SES Displays the number of severe error seconds in the measuring interval.
UAS Displays the Unavailable Seconds value of the measured interval. The value
can be between 0 and 900 seconds (15 minutes).
BBE Displays the number of background block errors during the measured
interval.
Page 313 of 1094

reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that
time.
5.6.7 Displaying MSE PMs and Configuring MSE PM Thresholds

To display modem MSE (Minimum Square Error) PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > MSE. The MSE PM report page opens.
Figure 225: MSE PM Report Page

Table 43 describes the Modem MSE PMs.
page, select the interval in the Modem MSE PM table and click View.
Table 43: Modem MSE PMs

Interval For 24-hour intervals, displays the date of the interval. For 15-
minute intervals, displays the date and ending time of the interval.
Page 314 of 1094

Min MSE (dB) Displays the minimum MSE in dB, measured during the interval. A
0 in this field and an X in the Integrity field may also indicate that
the modem was unlocked during the entire interval.
Max MSE (dB) Displays the maximum MSE in dB, measured during the interval. A
0 in this field and an X in the Integrity field may also indicate that
the modem was unlocked.
Exceed threshold seconds Displays the number of seconds the MSE exceeded the MSE PM
threshold during the interval. The MSE PM is configured in the
Radio Thresholds page. See Configuring BER Thresholds and
Displaying Current BER.
measured interval are reliable. An X in the column indicates that
the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power
failure that occurred at that time. An X and a 0 value in the Max
MSE field may also indicate that the modem was unlocked.
To set the Modem MSE PM thresholds, click Thresholds. The Modem MSE
Thresholds Configuration– Edit Page opens. For each radio, specify the modem
MSE (Mean Square Error) threshold for calculating MSE Exceed Threshold
seconds, and click Apply.
Figure 226: Modem MSE Thresholds Configuration – Edit Page
Page 315 of 1094

5.6.8 Displaying XPI PMs and Configuring XPI PM Thresholds

Related topics:
To display XPI (Cross Polarization Interface) PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > XPI. The XPI PM report page opens.
Note: The XPI page only appears if XPIC is configured on the unit.
Figure 227: XPI PM Report Page

2 In the Interface field, select the port that holds the radio for which you want
to display PMs.
Table 44 describes the XPI PMs.
page, select the interval in the Modem XPI PM table and click View.
Table 44: XPI PMs

Min XPI (dB) The minimum XPI level that was measured during the interval.
Max XPI (dB) The maximum XPI level that was measured during the interval.
Page 316 of 1094

XPI below threshold The number of seconds the measured XPI level was below the threshold
seconds during the interval.
measured interval are reliable. An x in the column indicates that the
values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure
that occurred at that time.
To set the XPI PM thresholds, click Thresholds. The XPI Thresholds Configuration–
Edit Page opens. For each radio, specify the modem XPI threshold for calculating
XPI Exceed Threshold seconds, and click Apply.
Figure 228: XPI Thresholds Configuration – Edit Page
Page 317 of 1094

5.6.9 Displaying Traffic PMs

• Displaying Capacity and Throughput PMs
• Displaying Utilization PMs and Configuring Utilization Thresholds
• Displaying Frame Error Rate PMs
Page 318 of 1094

5.6.9.1 Displaying Capacity and Throughput PMs

You can display PMs for capacity and throughput for a radio, based on:
• The total Layer 1 bandwidth (payload plus overheads) sent through the radio
(Mbps).
• The total effective Layer 2 traffic sent through the radio.
You can also configure thresholds for capacity and throughput PMs. The number
of seconds during which these thresholds are exceeded are among the displayed
PMs.
Peak counters display the maximum data rate for each interval, with a resolution
of one second. This means the PM mechanism records the number of bytes sent
during each second of the interval and displays the number of bytes for the
highest one-second period during that interval. So, for example, when measuring
15-minute intervals, the PM mechanism chooses the peak value from 900
recorded values in that interval (60 seconds multiplied by 15 60-second record
periods).
Average counters display the average number of bytes received on the interface
measured with a resolution of one second. This means the PM mechanism divides
the total number of bytes received during the interval by the total number of
seconds in the interval. So, for example, when measuring 15-minute intervals, the
PM mechanism divides the total number of bytes received during the 15-minute
interval by 900.
To display capacity and throughput PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Traffic > Capacity/Throughput. The Capacity
PM report page opens.
Figure 229: Capacity PM Report Page
Page 319 of 1094

2 For the IP-20C and IP-20C-HP, in the Port field, select the port that holds the
radio for which you want to display PMs.
To set the thresholds for capacity and throughput PMs:
1 Select Threshold. The Ethernet Radio Capacity & Throughput Threshold page
opens.
Figure 230: Ethernet Radio Capacity and Throughput Threshold Page
2 Enter the capacity and throughput thresholds you want, in Mbps. The range of
values is 0 to 4294967295. The default value for is 1000.
Table 45 describes the capacity and throughput PMs.
page, select the interval in the PM table and click View.
Table 45: Capacity/Throughput PMs

Time interval index For 24-hour intervals, displays the date of the interval. For 15-minute
Peak capacity (Mbps) Displays the highest L1 bandwidth, in Mbps, sent through the selected
radio during the measured time interval.
Average capacity Displays the average L1 bandwidth, in Mbps, during the measured time
(Mbps) interval.
Seconds exceeding Displays the number of seconds during the measured time interval
Threshold during which the L1 bandwidth exceeded the configured capacity
threshold.
Peak throughput Displays the highest throughput, in Mbps, that occurred for the selected
(Mbps) radio during the measured time interval.
Page 320 of 1094

Average throughput Displays the average throughput, in Mbps, for the selected radio during
(Mbps) the measured time interval.
Seconds exceeding Displays the number of seconds during the measured time interval
Threshold during which the throughput exceeded the configured throughput
threshold.
measured interval are reliable. An x in the column indicates that the
Page 321 of 1094

5.6.9.2 Displaying Utilization PMs and Configuring Utilization Thresholds

You can configure three radio capacity utilization thresholds, in percentage. The
Utilization PM Report displays, for each radio carrier and Multi-Carrier ABC group,
the number of seconds in which the radio or group exceeded each threshold in
each interval. It also displays the peak and average utilization, in percentage, per
interval.
To display radio capacity utilization PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Traffic > Utilization. The Utilization PM report
page opens.
Figure 231: Utilization PM Report Page

2 In the Interface field, select the radio carrier for which you want to display
PMs, or select a Multi-Carrier ABC group.
To set the thresholds for utilization PMs:
1 Click Thresholds. The Utilization Threshold page opens.
Figure 232: Ethernet Radio Utilization Threshold Page

2 For each radio and Multi-Carrier ABC group, you can enter three thresholds, in %
(1-100). Utilization Threshold 1 should be the highest and Utilization Threshold 3
should be the lowest. The default value for each threshold is 0.
Page 322 of 1094


page, select the interval in the PM table and click View.
Table 46: Utilization PMs

Time interval index For 24-hour intervals, displays the date of the interval. For 15-
minute intervals, displays the date and ending time of the
interval.
Peak utilization (%) Indicates the highest utilization of the radio capacity that
occurred for the selected radio or group during the measured
time interval.
Average utilization (%) Indicates the average utilization of the radio capacity for the
selected radio or group during the measured time interval.
Seconds exceeding Threshold 1 Displays the number of seconds during the measured time
interval during which the L1 bandwidth exceeded Threshold 1
(the highest threshold).
interval during which the L1 bandwidth exceeded Threshold 2.
interval during which the L1 bandwidth exceeded Threshold 3
(the lowest threshold).
Seconds below Threshold 3 Displays the number of seconds during the measured time
interval during which the L1 bandwidth was less than Threshold 3
(the lowest threshold).
Integrity Indicates whether the values received at time and date of the
measured interval are reliable. An x in the column indicates that
the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or
power failure that occurred at that time.
Page 323 of 1094

5.6.9.3 Displaying Frame Error Rate PMs

To display frame error rate PMs per radio or Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Traffic > Frame error rate. The Frame error
rate PM report page opens.
Figure 233: Frame Error PM Report Page

2 For the IP-20C and IP-20C-HP, in the Port field, select the port that holds the
radio for which you want to display PMs.
Note: To display the same parameters for a specific interval in a separate page,
select the interval in the PM table and click View.
Page 324 of 1094

Table 47: Frame Error Rate PMs

Time interval For 24-hour intervals, displays the date of the interval. For 15-minute intervals,
index displays the date and ending time of the interval.
FER Displays the frame error rate (%) during the measured time interval.
interval are reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable
Page 325 of 1094

6. Ethernet Services and Interfaces

• Ethernet Services and Interfaces
• Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype
• Configuring Ethernet Interfaces
• Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss Forwarding
• Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics
Related topics:
• Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP
• Quality of Service (QoS)
• Ethernet Protocols
• Performing Ethernet Loopback
6.1 Configuring Ethernet Service(s)

• Ethernet Services Overview
• General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services
• The Ethernet Services Page
• Adding an Ethernet Service
• Editing a Service
• Deleting a Service
• Enabling, Disabling, or Deleting Multiple Services
• Viewing Service Details
• Configuring Service Points
6.1.1 Ethernet Services Overview

Users can define up to 64 Ethernet services. Each service constitutes a virtual
bridge that defines the connectivity between logical ports in the IP-20 network
element.
This version of IP-20 supports the following service types:
• Multipoint (MP)
• Point-to-Point (P2P)
• Management (MNG)
In addition to user-defined services, IP-20 contains a pre-defined management
service (Service ID 257). By default, this service is operational.
Note: You can use the management service for in-band management. For
instructions on configuring in-band management, see Configuring In-
Band Management.
A service point is a logical entity attached to a physical or logical interface. Service
points define the movement of frames through the service. Each service point
Page 326 of 1094

includes both ingress and egress attributes. A Point-to-Point or Multipoint service

can hold up to 32 service points. A Management service can hold up 30 service
points.
For a more detailed overview of IP-20's service-oriented Ethernet switching
engine, refer to the Technical Description for the IP-20 product type you are using.
6.1.2 General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services

When provisioning Ethernet services, it is recommended to follow these
guidelines:
• Use the same Service ID for all service fragments along the path of the service.
• Do not re-use the same Service ID within the same region. A region is defined
as consisting of all IP-20 devices having Ethernet connectivity between them.
• Use meaningful EVC IDs.
• Give the same EVC ID (service name) to all service fragments along the path of
the service.
• Do not reuse the same EVC ID within the same region.
It is recommended to follow these guidelines for creating service points:
• Always use SNP service points on NNI ports and SAP service points on UNI
ports.
• For each logical interface associated with a specific service, there should
never be more than a single service point.
• The transport VLAN ID should be unique per service within a single region.
That is, no two services should use the same transport VLAN ID.
6.1.3 The Ethernet Services Page

The Ethernet Services page is the starting point for defining Ethernet services on
the IP-20.
To open the Ethernet Services page:
1 Select Ethernet > Services. The Ethernet Services page opens.
Figure 234: Ethernet Services Page
Page 327 of 1094

Table 48 describes the parameters displayed in the Ethernet Services page.
Table 48: Ethernet Services Page Parameters

Services ID A unique ID for the service.

Service Type The service type:
• MP – Multipoint
• P2P – Point-to-Point
• MNG – Management
Service sub type Indicates the type of service (Ethernet).
EVC ID The Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC) ID. This parameter does not affect the
network element’s behavior, but is used by the NMS for topology
management.
EVC description The Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC) description. This parameter does not
affect the network element’s behavior, but is used by the NMS for topology
management.
Admin Indicates whether the service is enabled (Operational) or disabled (Reserved).
You can configure services for later use by defining the service as Reserved. In
Reserved mode, the service occupies system resources but is unable to
transmit and receive data.
Page 328 of 1094

6.1.4 Adding an Ethernet Service

To add an Ethernet service:
1 Select Ethernet > Services. The Ethernet Services page opens (Figure 234).
2 In the Ethernet Services page, click Add. The Ethernet Services – Add page
opens.
Figure 235: Ethernet Services - Add page

3 In the Service ID field, select a unique ID for the service. You can choose any
unused value from 1 to 4095. Once you have added the service, you cannot
change the Service ID. Service ID 257 is reserved for a pre-defined
management service.
4 In the Service Type field, select the service type:
◦ MP – Multipoint
◦ MNG – Management
◦ P2P – Point-to-Point
5 Optionally, in the EVC ID field, enter an Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC) ID
(up to 20 characters). This parameter does not affect the network element’s
behavior, but is used by the NMS for topology management.
6 Optionally, in the EVC Description field, enter a text description of the service
(up to 64 characters). This parameter does not affect the network element’s
behavior, but is used by the NMS for topology management.
7 In the Admin field, select one of the following options:
◦ Operational - The service is functional.
◦ Reserved - The service is disabled until this parameter is changed to
Operational. In this mode, the service occupies system resources but is
unable to receive and transmit data.
Page 329 of 1094

8 In the MAC table size field, enter the maximum MAC address table size for the
service. The MAC address table is a source MAC address learning table used to
forward frames from one service point to another. You can select a value from
16 to 131,072, in multiples of 16. This maximum only applies to dynamic, not
static, MAC address table entries.
Note: Additional configuration of the MAC address table can be performed
via the CLI. See Defining the MAC Address Forwarding Table for a
Service.
9 In the Default CoS field, enter a default Class of Service (CoS) value (0-7). This
value is assigned to frames at the service level if CoS Mode is set to Default-
CoS. Otherwise, this value is not used, and frames retain whatever CoS value
they were assigned at the service point or logical interface level.
10 In the CoS Mode field, select one of the following options. This parameter
determines whether or not frames passing through the service have their CoS
modified at the service level. The CoS determines the priority queue to which
frames are assigned.
◦ Default CoS – Frames passing through the service are assigned the default
CoS defined above. This CoS value overrides whatever CoS may have been
assigned at the service point or interface level.
◦ Preserve-SP-COS-Decision – The CoS of frames passing through the service
is not modified by the service's default CoS.
11 Click Apply, then Close to close the Ethernet Services - Add page.
12 Add service points. You must add service points to the service in order for the
service to carry traffic. See Configuring Service Points.
6.1.5 Editing a Service

To edit a service:
2 Select the service in the Service Configuration Table.
3 In the Ethernet Services page, click Edit. The Ethernet Services - Edit page
opens.
This page is identical to the Ethernet Services - Add page (Figure 235). You can
edit any parameter that can be configured in the Add page, except the Service ID.
6.1.6 Deleting a Service

Before deleting a service, you must first delete any service points attached to the
service.
To delete a service:
1 Delete all service points attached to the service you wish to delete, as
described in Deleting a Service Point.
3 Select the service in the Ethernet Service Configuration Table.
4 Click Delete. The service is deleted.
Page 330 of 1094

6.1.7 Enabling, Disabling, or Deleting Multiple Services

To enable, disable, or delete multiple services:
2 Select the services in the Ethernet Services Configuration table, or select all
the services by selecting the check box in the top row.
◦ To enable the selected services, in the Multiple Selection Operation
section underneath the Ethernet Services Configuration Table, select
Operational and click Apply.
◦ To disable the selected services, in the Multiple Selection Operation
section underneath the Ethernet Services Configuration Table, select
Reserved and click Apply.
◦ To delete the selected services, select Delete underneath the Ethernet
Services Configuration Table. Before deleting a service, you must delete
any service points attached to the service, as described in Deleting a
Service Point.
Figure 236: Multiple Selection Operation Section (Ethernet Services)

Note: When setting multiple services to Reserve state, make sure to avoid
setting the management service to Reserve state.
6.1.8 Viewing Service Details

To view the full service parameters:
2 Select the service in the Ethernet Services Configuration table.
3 In the Ethernet Services page, click Service Details. The Ethernet Services –
Service Details page opens. The Service Details page contains the same fields
as the Add page (Figure 235). However, in the Service Details page, these
fields are read-only.
Page 331 of 1094

6.1.9 Configuring Service Points

• Ethernet Services Points Overview
• The Ethernet Service Points Page
• Adding a Service Point
• Editing a Service Point
• Deleting a Service Point
• Attaching VLANs
Page 332 of 1094

6.1.9.1 Ethernet Services Points Overview

Service points are logical interfaces within a service. A service point is a logical
entity attached to a physical or logical interface. Service points define the
movement of frames through the service. Each service point includes both ingress
and egress attributes.
Each service point for a Point-to-Point or Multipoint service can be either a
Service Access Point (SAP) or a Service Network Point (SNP). A Point-to-Point
service can also use Pipe service points.
• An SAP is equivalent to a UNI in MEF terminology and defines the connection
of the user network with its access points. SAPs are used for Point-to-Point
and Multipoint traffic services.
• An SNP is equivalent to an NNI or E-NNI in MEF terminology and defines the
connection between the network elements in the user network. SNPs are
used for Point-to-Point and Multipoint traffic services.
• A Pipe service point is used to create traffic connectivity between two ports in
a port-based manner (Smart Pipe). In other words, all the traffic from one port
passes to the other port.
Management services utilize Management (MNG) service points.
A Point-to-Point or Multipoint service can hold up to 32 service points. A
management service can hold up to 30 service points.
Page 333 of 1094

6.1.9.2 The Ethernet Service Points Page

The Ethernet Service Points page is the starting point for configuring Ethernet
service points.
To open the Ethernet Service Points page:
2 Select the relevant service in the Ethernet Services Configuration table.
3 Click Service Points. The Ethernet Service Points page opens.
Figure 237: Ethernet Service Points Page

You can choose to display the following sets of attributes by selecting the
appropriate button above the SP Attributes table:
• General – See Ethernet Service Points – General SP Attributes Table
• Ingress – See Ethernet Service Points – Ingress Attributes
• Egress – See Ethernet Service Points – Egress Attributes
To return to the Ethernet Services page at any time, click Back to Services table at
the top of the Ethernet Service Points page.
Page 334 of 1094

Ethernet Service Points – General SP Attributes Table

The General SP Attributes table is shown in Figure 237: Ethernet Service Points
Page. Table 49 describes the parameters displayed in the General SP Attributes
table.
Table 49: General Service Point Attributes

Service point ID This ID is unique within the service. For Point-to-Point and Multipoint
services, the range of values is 1-32. For Management services, the range
of values is 1-30.
When adding a service point, you can select a service point ID from the
available options in the Service point ID drop-down list in the Ethernet
Service Points – Add page. Once you have added the service point, you
cannot change the service point ID.
Service point name A descriptive name for the service point (optional). The Service Point
Name can be up to 20 characters.
Service point type The service point type. Options are:
• SAP – Service Access Point.
• SNP – Service Network Point.
• MNG – Management service point.
• PIPE – Pipe service point.
The following rules apply to the mixing of different types of service points
on a single logical interface:
• You cannot configure both SAPs and SNPs on the same logical
interface.
• You can configure both SAPs or SNPs on the same logical interface
as a MNG service point.
• If you configure a Pipe service point on an interface, you cannot
configure an SAP, SNP, or another Pipe service point on the same
interface. You can, however, configure an MNG service point on
the same interface.
• You cannot configure more than one MNG service point on a
single logical interface.
Once you have added the service point, you cannot change this
parameter.
Interface location The physical or logical interface on which the service point is located. Once
you have added the service point, you cannot change this parameter.
Page 335 of 1094

Attached interface The encapsulation type (Ethertype) for frames entering the service point.
type Once you have added the service point, you cannot change this
parameter.
The Attached Interface Type determines which frames enter the service
via this service point, based on the frame’s VLAN tagging. Since more than
one service point may be associated with a single interface, frames are
assigned to the earliest defined service point in case of conflict.
For a list of available Attached Interface Types, the types of frames to
which each one applies, and the service point types for which each one is
available, see Table 50.
C-Vlan encapsulation The C-VLAN classified into the service point. Options are 1-4094,
Untagged, or N.A. (Not Applicable). Note that N.A. can only be used with
Bundle-C.
If you selected Bundle-C in the Attached Interface Type field, select
Untagged or N.A. You can then add multiple C-VLANs via the Attach VLAN
option. See Attaching VLANs.
S-Vlan encapsulation The S-VLAN classified into the service point. Options are 1-4094 and
Untagged (Not Applicable).
If you selected Bundle-S in the Attached Interface Type field, select the S-
VLAN value to classify into the service point (1-4094), or select Untagged.
You can then add multiple C-VLANs via the Attach VLAN option. See
Attaching VLANs.
Table 50 describes the available Attached Interface Types.
Table 50: Attached Interface Types

Attached Interface Type Types of Frames Available for Service Point
Types
dot1q A single C-VLAN is classified into the All

service point.
s-tag A single S-VLAN is classified into the SNP, PIPE, and MNG
service point.
Bundle-C A set of C-VLANs is classified into the SAP
service point.
Bundle-S A single S-VLAN and a set of C-VLANs SAP
are classified into the service point.
All-to-One All C-VLANs and untagged frames that SAP
enter the interface are classified into
the service point.
Q-in-Q A single S-VLAN and C-VLAN SAP and MNG
combination is classified into the service
point.
Page 336 of 1094

Ethernet Service Points – Ingress Attributes

Select Ingress in the Ethernet Service Points page to display the Ethernet Service
Points – Ingress Attributes table. Table 51 describes the parameters displayed in
the Ingress SP Attributes table.
Figure 238: Ethernet Service Points Page – Ingress Attributes
Table 51: Service Point Ingress Attributes

services, the range of values is 1-32. For Management services, the range
of values is 1-30.
Service point name A descriptive name for the service point (optional). The Service Point
Name can be up to 20 characters.
Learning admin Determines whether MAC address learning for incoming frames is enabled
(Enable) or disabled (Disable). When enabled, the service point learns the
source MAC addresses of incoming frames and adds them to a MAC
address forwarding table.
Allow flooding Determines whether incoming frames with unknown MAC addresses are
forwarded to other service points via flooding. Select Allow to allow
flooding or Disable to disable flooding.
Allow broadcast Indicates whether frames with a broadcast destination MAC address are
allowed to ingress the service via this service point. Select Allow to allow
broadcast or Disable to disable broadcast.
Page 337 of 1094

CoS Mode Indicates how the service point handles the CoS of frames that pass
through the service point. Options are:
• Default CoS – The service point re-defines the CoS of frames that
pass through the service point, according to the Default CoS
(below). This decision can be overwritten on the service level.
• Interface-Decision – The service point preserves the CoS decision
made at the interface level. The decision can still be overwritten at
the service level.
• MAC DA - The service point checks each frame against a list of
user-defined MAC DAs. If there is a match, the service point
applies to the frame the CoS and Color defined for that MAC DA. If
there is no match, the service point preserves the CoS decision
made at the interface level. See Classification Overview.
Note: For Bundle-S and Bundle-C service points, if Cos Overwrite Valid is
set to True, the CoS and Color defined in the Attached VLAN page has
priority over the interface decision, but not over a MAC DA match.
Default CoS The default CoS. If the CoS Mode is sp-def-cos, this is the CoS assigned to
frames that pass through the service point. This decision can be
overwritten at the service level. Possible values are 0 to 7.
Page 338 of 1094

Ethernet Service Points – Egress Attributes

Select Egress in the Ethernet Service Points page to display the Ethernet Service
Points – Egress Attributes table. Table 52 `describes the parameters displayed in
the General SP Attributes table.
Figure 239: Ethernet Service Points Page – Egress Attributes
Table 52: Service Point Egress Attributes

services, the range of values is 1-32. For Management services, the range of
values is 1-30.
Service point name A descriptive name for the service point (optional). The Service Point Name
can be up to 20 characters.
C-Vlan CoS preservation Determines whether the original C-VLAN CoS value is preserved or restored
for frames egressing from the service point.
• If C-VLAN CoS preservation is enabled, the C-VLAN CoS value of
frames egressing the service point is the same as the value when the
frame entered the service.
• If C-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled, the C-VLAN CoS value of
frames egressing the service point is set at whatever value might have
been re-assigned by the interface, service point, or service, or
whatever value results from marking (see Marking admin, below).
Page 339 of 1094

C-Vlan preservation Determines whether the original C-VLAN ID is preserved or restored for
frames egressing from the service point.
• If C-VLAN preservation is enabled, the C-VLAN ID of frames egressing
the service point is the same as the C-VLAN ID when the frame
entered the service.
• If C-VLAN preservation is disabled, the C-VLAN ID of frames egressing
the service point is set at whatever value might have been re-assigned
by the interface, service point, or service, or whatever value results
from marking (see Marking admin, below).
S-Vlan CoS preservation Determines whether the original S-VLAN CoS value is preserved or restored
• If S-VLAN CoS preservation is enabled, the S-VLAN CoS value of frames
egressing the service point is the same as the value when the frame
• If S-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled, the C-VLAN CoS value of
frames egressing the service point is set at whatever value might have
been re-assigned by the interface, service point, or service, or
whatever value results from marking (see Marking admin, below).
S-Vlan preservation Read-only. Indicates whether the original S-VLAN ID is preserved or restored
• If S-VLAN preservation is enabled, the S-VLAN ID of frames egressing
the service point is the same as the S-VLAN ID when the frame
• If S-VLAN preservation is disabled, the S-VLAN ID of frames egressing
the service point is set at whatever value might have been re-assigned
by the interface, service point, or service, or whatever value results
from marking (see Marking admin, below).
Marking admin Determines whether re-marking of the outer VLAN (C-VLAN or S-VLAN) of
tagged frames that pass through the service point is enabled.
• If Marking admin is set to Enable, and CoS preservation for the
relevant outer VLAN is set to Disable, the SAP re-marks the C-VLAN or
S-VLAN 802.1p UP bits of egress frames according to the calculated
CoS and Color, and the user-configurable 802.1Q and 802.1AD
marking tables. You can configure these tables by selecting Ethernet >
QoS > Marking from the menu on the left side of the Web EMS.
• If Marking admin and CoS preservation for the relevant outer VLAN
are both set to Enable, re-marking is not performed.
• If Marking admin and CoS preservation for the relevant outer VLAN
are both set to Disable, re-marking is applied, but only according to
the values defined for Green frames in the 802.1Q and 802.1AD
marking tables.
Service Bundle ID 1 is the only supported value.
Page 340 of 1094

6.1.9.3 Adding a Service Point

To add a service point:
3 Click Service Points. The Ethernet Service Points page opens (Figure 237).
4 Select the relevant service point in the Ethernet Services Points – General SP
Attributes table.
5 Click Add. The Ethernet Service Points – Add page opens.
Figure 240: Ethernet Service Points - Add Page
Page 341 of 1094

6 Configure the service point attributes, as described in Table 49, Table 51, and
Table 52.
Note: Optionally, you can select from a list of pre-defined service point
options in the Pre defined options field at the top of the Ethernet
Service Points - Add page. The system automatically populates the
remaining service point parameters according to the system-defined
parameters. However, you can manually change these parameter
values. The pre-defined options are customized to the type of service
to which you are adding the service point.
Page 342 of 1094

6.1.9.4 Editing a Service Point

To edit a service point:
Attributes table.
5 Click Edit. The Ethernet Service Points– Edit page opens. The Ethernet Service
Points – Edit page is similar to the Ethernet Service Points - Add page (Figure
240). You can edit any parameter that can be configured in the Add Service
Point page, except Service Point ID, Service Point Type, Interface Location,
and Attached Interface Type.
6 Edit the service point attributes, as described in Table 49, Table 51, and
Table 52.
Page 343 of 1094

6.1.9.5 Deleting a Service Point

You can only delete a service point with an Attached Interface Type of Bundle-C
or Bundle-S if no VLANs are attached to the service point. See Attaching VLANs.
To delete a service point:
Attributes table.
5 Click Delete. The service point is deleted.
Page 344 of 1094

6.1.9.6 Attaching VLANs

When the Attached Interface Type for a service point is set to Bundle-C or
Bundle-S, you can add multiple C-VLANs to the service point.
To add multiple C-VLANs:
Attributes table.
5 Click Attached VLAN. The Attached VLAN List page opens.
Figure 241: Attached VLAN List Page

6 Click Add. The Attached VLAN List - Add page opens.
Page 345 of 1094

Figure 242: Attached VLAN List - Add Page

7 Configure the VLAN Classification parameters, described in Table 53.
Table 53: VLAN Classification Parameters

Interface Location Read-only. The physical or logical interface on which the service point is
located.
Service ID Read-only. The ID of the service to which the service point belongs.
Service Point ID Read-only. The ID of the service point.
C-Vlan Encapsulation Select the C-VLAN you want to add to the service point.
S-Vlan Encapsulation Read-only.
If the Attached Interface Type for the service point is Bundle-S, this field
displays the S-VLAN encapsulation selected when the service point was
created.
If the Attached Interface Type for the service point is Bundle-C, this field
is inactive.
CoS Overwrite Valid If you want to assign a specific CoS and Color to frames with the C-VLAN
or S-VLAN defined in the C-VLAN Encapsulation field, select true. This
CoS and Color values defined below override the CoS and Color decisions
made at the interface level. However, if the service point or service are
configured to apply their own CoS and Color decisions, those decisions
override the decision made here.
Page 346 of 1094

CoS Value If CoS Overwrite Valid is set to true, the CoS value defined in this field is
applied to frames with the C-VLAN defined in the C-VLAN Encapsulation
field. This CoS overrides the CoS decision made at the interface level.
However, if the service point or service are configured to apply their
own CoS, that decision overrides the decision made here.
If CoS Overwrite Valid is set to false, this parameter has no effect.
Color If CoS Overwrite Valid is set to true, the Color value defined in this field
is applied to frames with the C-VLAN defined in the C-VLAN
Encapsulation field. This Color overrides the Color decision made at the
interface level. However, if the service point or service are configured to
apply their own Color, that decision overrides the decision made here.
If CoS Overwrite Valid is set to false, this parameter has no effect.
To edit a VLAN Classification table entry, select the entry in the VLAN
Classification table and click Edit. You can edit all the fields that can be configured
in the Attached VLAN List – Add page.
To delete a VLAN Classification table entry, select the entry in the VLAN
Classification table and click Delete.
Page 347 of 1094

6.2 Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype

To configure the size of the MRU (Maximum Receive Unit) and the S-VLAN
Ethertype:
1 Select Ethernet > General Configuration. The Ethernet General Configuration
page opens.
Figure 243: Ethernet General Configuration Page

2 In the MRU field, enter the global size (in bytes) of the Maximum Receive Unit
(MRU). Permitted values are 64 to 9612. The default value is 2000. Frames
that are larger than the global MRU will be discarded.
3 In the S VLAN Ether type field, select the S-VLAN Ethertype. This defines the
ethertype recognized by the system as the S-VLAN ethertype. Options are:
0x8100, 0x88A8, 0x9100, and 0x9200. The default value is 0x88A8.
Note: The C-VLAN Ethertype is set at 0x8100 and cannot be modified.
4 Click Apply.
Note: You can also map Ethernet services to MSTP instances (MSTIs) in the
Ethernet General Configuration page. See Mapping Ethernet Services
to MSTP instances (MSTIs).
Page 348 of 1094

6.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces

Related Topics:
• Configuring Ethernet Service(s)
• Quality of Service (QoS)
The IP-20’s switching fabric distinguishes between physical interfaces and logical
interfaces. Physical and logical interfaces serve different purposes in the switching
fabric. In some cases, a physical interface corresponds to a logical interface on a
one-to-one basis. For some features, such as LAG, a group of physical interfaces
can be joined into a single logical interface.
The basic interface characteristics, such as media type, port speed, duplex, and
auto-negotiation, are configured for the physical interface via the Physical
Interfaces page. Ethernet services, QoS, and OAM characteristics are configured
on the logical interface level.
To configure the physical interface parameters:
1 Select Ethernet > Interfaces > Physical Interfaces. The Physical Interfaces
page opens.
Figure 244: Physical Interfaces Page

Note: Ethernet: Slot 1, Port 4 is only used for P4 on an IP-20C 2E2SX unit
when used as a traffic port. When P4 is used as an Extension port, it is
not displayed at all.
Page 349 of 1094

2 Select the interface you want to configure and click Edit. The Physical
Interfaces - Edit page opens.
Figure 245: Physical Interfaces - Edit Page

3 Optionally, in the Description field, enter a description of the interface.
4 In the Media type field, select the physical interface layer 1 media type.
Options are:
◦ Auto-Type – NA.
◦ RJ45 – An electrical (RJ-45) Ethernet interface.
◦ SFP – An optical (SFP) Ethernet interface.
◦ Radio – A radio interface.
5 In the Auto negotiation field, select On to enable or Off to disable
Auto-Negotiation. When the Media-Type is Radio, Auto Negotiation is always
Off. Auto negotiation should not be used for 100 Mbps SFP interfaces or for
SFP+ interfaces on an IP-20E with the speed set to 10000.
6 In the Speed field, select the maximum speed of the interface, in Mbps.
Options are:
◦ Ethernet RJ-45 interfaces – 100 and 1000.
◦ Ethernet SFP interfaces – 100 and 1000.
◦ Ethernet SFP+ interfaces (IP-20V and IP-20E R2H ESP models only) – Only
1000 and 10000 are supported.
◦ Radio interfaces – The parameter is read-only and set by the system to 1000.
Page 350 of 1094

Notes: To use an SFP+ interface in 10G mode, the third-party switch must be
running Pause Frame Flow Control, as defined in IEEE 802.3x. It is also
recommended to configure shapers on the third-party switch so as to
limit the packet flow from the switch to the IP-20E unit to 2.5 Gbps.
After changing the speed of an SFP+ interface, you must reset the unit
in order for the change to take effect.
When an SFP interface is configured for 100 Mbps, the link must be
symmetric, i.e., the same interface speed must be configured on both
sides of the link.
7 In the Duplex field, select the interface's duplex setting (Full Duplex or Half
Duplex). Only Full-Duplex is available in this release.
Table 54 describes the status parameters that appear in the Physical Interfaces
page.
Table 54: Physical Interface Status Parameters

Interface location The location of the interface.

Operational Status Indicates whether the interface is currently operational (Up) or non-
operational (Down).
Admin Status Indicates whether the interface is currently enabled (Up) or disabled
(Down). You can enable or disable an interface from the Interface
Manager page. See Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager).
Media Type The physical interface layer 1 media type.
Actual port speed Displays the actual speed of the interface for the link as agreed by the
two sides of the link after the auto negotiation process.
Actual port duplex Displays the actual duplex status of the interface for the link as agreed
by the two sides of the link after the auto negotiation process.
Page 351 of 1094

6.4 Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss

Forwarding
Automatic state propagation enables propagation of radio failures back to the
Ethernet port. You can also configure Automatic State Propagation to close the
Ethernet port based on a radio failure at the remote carrier.
Automatic state propagation is configured as pairs of interfaces. Each interface
pair includes one Monitored Interface and one Controlled Interface. You can
create multiple pairs using the same Monitored Interface and multiple Controlled
Interfaces.
The Monitored Interface is a radio interface, or a radio protection or Multi-Carrier
ABC group. The Controlled Interface is an Ethernet interface or LAG. An Ethernet
interface can only be assigned to one Monitored interface.
Note: A radio interface that belongs to a LAG group cannot be used as a
monitored interface.
Each Controlled Interface is assigned an LLF ID. If ASP trigger by remote fault is
enabled on the remote side of the link, the ASP state of the Controlled Interface is
propagated to the Controlled Interface with the same LLF ID at the remote side of
the link. This means if ASP is triggered locally, it is propagated to the remote side
of the link, but only to Controlled Interfaces with LLF IDs that match the LLF IDs of
the affected Controlled Interfaces on the local side of the link.
Note: LLF requires an activation key (SL-LLF). Without this activation key,
only LLF ID 1 is available. See Configuring the Activation Key.
The following events in the Monitored Interface trigger ASP:
• Radio LOF
• Radio Excessive BER
• Remote Radio LOF
• Remote Excessive BER
• Remove LOC
The user can also configure the ASP pair so that Radio LOF, Radio Excessive BER,
or loss of the Ethernet connection at the remote side of the link will also trigger
ASP.
In addition, ASP is triggered if the Controlled Interface is a LAG, and the physical
interfaces that belong to the LAG are set to Admin = Down in the Interface
Manager.
When a triggering event takes place:
• If the Controlled Interface is an electrical GbE port, the port is closed.
• If the Controlled Interface is an optical GbE port, the port is muted.
The Controlled Interface remains closed or muted until all triggering events are
cleared.
In addition, when a local triggering event takes place, the ASP mechanism sends
an indication to the remote side of the link. Even when no triggering event has
taken place, the ASP mechanism sends periodic update messages indicating that
no triggering event has taken place.
Page 352 of 1094

A trigger delay time can be configured, so that when a triggering event takes
place, the ASP mechanism does not propagate the event until this delay time has
elapsed. A trigger delay from 0 to 10,000 ms can be set per LLD ID. The delay time
must be configured via CLI. See Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link
Loss Forwarding (CLI).
It is recommended to configure both ends of the link to the same Automatic State
Propagation configuration.
To configure an Automatic State Propagation interface pair:
1 Select Ethernet > Interfaces > Automatic State Propagation. The ASP & LLF
page opens.
Figure 246: ASP & LLF Page

2 Click Add. The Automatic State Propagation - Add page opens.
Figure 247: Automatic State Propagation - Add Page

3 In the Controlled Ethernet interface field, select an interface that will be
disabled upon failure of the Monitored Radio Interface, defined below.
4 In the Monitored Radio interface field, select the Monitored Radio Interface.
The Controlled Ethernet Interface, defined above, is disabled upon a failure
indication on the Monitored Radio Interface.
Page 353 of 1094

5 In the ASP admin field, select Enable to enable Automatic State Propagation
on the interface pair, or Disable to disable Automatic State Propagation on
the pair.
6 Optionally, in the ASP trigger by remote fault field, select Enable if you want
to configure the system to disable the Controlled Ethernet Interface upon a
radio failure at the remote side of the link from the Monitored Radio
Interface. ASP events will only be propagated to Controlled Interfaces with LLF
IDs that match LLF IDs of affected Controlled Interfaces at the other side of
the link.
7 Optionally, in the ASP Management Safe mode admin field, select Enable or
Disable to enable or disable ASP Management Safe mode (CSF mode). In ASP
Management Safe mode, the ASP mechanism does not physically shut down
the Controlled Interface when ASP is triggered. Instead, the ASP mechanism
sends a failure indication message(CSF PDU). This message is used to
propagate the failure indication to external equipment.
Note: CSF mode must be enabled when ASP is configured on the
management port of an IP-20E or IP-20V.
When ASP Management Safe mode (CSF) is configured, the peer unit must be
configured to receive CSF PDUs. CSF receive must be enabled in order for
G.8032 ERPI topology changes to be initiated upon receipt of a CSF PDU. This
must be configured via the CLI. For details, see Configuring Receipt of CSF
PDUs (CLI).
8 In the ASP LLF ID field, select an ID for Link Loss Forwarding (LLF). When ASP
trigger by remote fault is set to Enable, ASP events at the other side of the
link are propagated to Controlled Interfaces with LLF IDs that match the LLF
IDs of affected Controlled Interfaces at the other side of the link. LLF IDs are
unique per Monitored Interface. That is, if LLF ID 1 has been used for a
Controlled Interface that is grouped with radio interface 1, that ID cannot be
used again for another Controlled Interface grouped fixed radio interface 1.
However, it can be used for Controlled Interface grouped with radio
interface 2. You can select an LLF ID between 1 and 30.
9 Repeat this procedure to assign additional Controlled Interfaces to the
Monitored Interface, or to set up additional ASP pair with other interfaces.
Controlled Interfaces can only be assigned to one ASP pair. Monitored
Interfaces can be assigned to multiple ASP pairs.
To edit an Automatic State Propagation interface pair:
1 Select the interface pair in the Automatic state propagation configuration
table.
2 Click Edit. The Automatic State Propagation – Edit page opens. The Edit page is
similar to the Add page (Figure 247), but the Controlled Ethernet Interface
and Monitored Radio Interface parameters are read-only.
To delete an Automatic State Propagation interface pair:
1 Select the interface pair in the Automatic state propagation configuration
table.
2 Click Delete. The interface pair is removed from the Automatic state
propagation configuration table.
To delete multiple interface pairs:
Page 354 of 1094

1 Select the interface pairs in the Automatic state propagation configuration

table or select all the interfaces by selecting the check box in the top row.
2 Click Delete. The interface pairs are removed from the Automatic state
propagation configuration table.
Page 355 of 1094

6.5 Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics

IP-20 stores and displays statistics in accordance with RMON and RMON2
standards. You can display various peak TX and RX rates (per second) and average
TX and RX rates (per second), both in bytes and in packets, for each measured
time interval. You can also display the number of seconds in the interval during
which TX and RX rates exceeded the configured threshold.
• RMON Statistics
• Port TX Statistics
• Port RX Statistics
6.5.1 RMON Statistics

To view and reset RMON statistics:
1 Select Ethernet > PM & Statistics > RMON. The RMON page opens.
Figure 248: RMON Page

• To clear the statistics, click Clear All at the bottom of the page.
• To refresh the statistics, click Refresh at the bottom of the page.
Each column in the RMON page displays RMON statistics for one of the unit’s
interfaces. To hide or display columns:
1 In the header row, select the arrow next to any of the columns.
2 Select Columns.
3 Mark the interfaces you want to display and clear the interfaces you do not
want to display.
Page 356 of 1094

Figure 249: RMON Page – Hiding and Displaying Columns
6.5.2 Egress CoS Statistics

You can display packet egress statistics per CoS value. For each CoS value, the
following statistics are displayed per Color (Green and Yellow):
• Number of packets transmitted
• Number of packets dropped
• Number of bytes transmitted
• Number of bytes dropped
Note: Transmitted bits per second are not supported in the current release.
To display egress CoS statistics:
1 Select Ethernet > PM & Statistics > Egress CoS Statistics. The Egress CoS
Statistics page opens.
Figure 250: Egress CoS Statistics Page

2 In the Show Service bundle ID field, select 1.
Page 357 of 1094

By default, the egress CoS statistics are cumulative. That is, they are not
automatically cleared. You can set each individual CoS number to be cleared
whenever the Egress CoS Statistics page is opened by changing the Clear on read
value to Yes.
1 To change the clear on read value, select the CoS number in the CoS queue
index column and click Edit. The Egress CoS Statistics – Edit page opens.
Figure 251: Egress CoS Statistics – Edit Page

2 In the Clear on read field, select Yes to have statistics for the CoS value
cleared every time you open the page.
3 Click Apply.
6.5.3 Port TX Statistics

The Ethernet Port TX PM report page displays PMs that measure various peak
transmission rates (per second) and average transmission rates (per second), both
in bytes and in packets, for each measured time interval.
The page also displays the number of seconds in the interval during which
transmission rates exceeded the configured threshold.
• Displaying Ethernet Port TX PMs
• Enabling or Disabling Gathering of Port TX PM Statistics per Interface
• Setting the Ethernet Port TX Threshold
Page 358 of 1094

6.5.3.1 Displaying Ethernet Port TX PMs

To display Ethernet Port TX PMs:
1 Select Ethernet > PM & Statistics > Port TX. The Ethernet Port TX PM Report
page opens.
Figure 252: Ethernet Port TX PM Report Page

minutes.
Table 55 describes the Ethernet TX port PMs.
Table 55: Ethernet TX Port PMs

Peak... Average... bytes... Various peak transmission rates (per second) and average transmission
Packets... rates (per second), both in bytes and in packets, for each measured
time interval.
TX bytes Layer 1 exceed The number of seconds the TX bytes exceeded the specified threshold
threshold (sec) during the interval. For instructions on setting the threshold, see
Setting the Ethernet Port TX Threshold.
Invalid data flag Indicates whether the values received during the measured interval
are valid. An x in the column indicates that the values are not valid (for
example, because of a power surge or power failure that occurred
during the interval).
To clear the PMs, click Clear All.
Page 359 of 1094

6.5.3.2 Enabling or Disabling Gathering of Port TX PM Statistics per Interface

To select the interfaces for which to gather and display Port TX PMs:
1 In the Ethernet Port TX PM Report page, click PM Admin. The Ethernet PM
Port Admin page opens.
Figure 253: Ethernet PM Port Admin Page

2 Select the interface.
3 Click Enable Port PM or Disable Port PM to enable or disable the gathering of
Port TX PMs on the selected interface.
4 Click Close.
Page 360 of 1094

6.5.3.3 Setting the Ethernet Port TX Threshold

The TX bytes Layer 1 exceed threshold (sec) column shows, for each interval, the
number of seconds the TX bytes exceeded the specified threshold during the
interval:
To view and set this threshold:
1 In the Ethernet Port TX PM Report page, click Threshold. The Ethernet Port Tx
Threshold page opens.
Figure 254: Ethernet Port Tx Threshold Page

2 Enter a threshold, between 0 and 4294967295.
6.5.4 Port RX Statistics

The Ethernet Port RX PM report page displays PMs that measure various peak
transmission rates (per second) and average RX rates (per second), both in bytes
and in packets, for each measured time interval.
The page also displays the number of seconds in the interval during which RX
rates exceeded the configured threshold.
• Displaying Ethernet Port RX PMs
• Enabling or Disabling Gathering of Port RX PM Statistics per Interface
• Setting the Ethernet Port RX Threshold
Page 361 of 1094

6.5.4.1 Displaying Ethernet Port RX PMs

To display Ethernet Port RX PMs:
1 Select Ethernet > PM & Statistics > Port RX. The Ethernet Port RX PM Report
page opens.
Figure 255: Ethernet Port RX PM Report Page

minutes.
Table 56 describes the Ethernet RX port PMs.
Table 56: Ethernet RX Port PMs

Peak... Average... Various peak transmission rates (per second) and average RX rates (per
bytes... Packets... second), both in bytes and in packets, for each measured time interval.
RX bytes Layer 1 The number of seconds the RX bytes exceeded the specified threshold
exceed threshold during the interval. For instructions on setting the threshold, see Setting
(sec) the Ethernet Port RX Threshold.
Invalid data flag Indicates whether the values received during the measured interval are
valid. An x in the column indicates that the values are not valid (for
example, because of a power surge or power failure that occurred during
the interval).
To clear the PMs, click Clear All.
Page 362 of 1094

6.5.4.2 Enabling or Disabling Gathering of Port RX PM Statistics per Interface

To select the interfaces for which to gather and display Port RX PMs:
1 In the Ethernet Port RX PM Report page, click PM Admin. The Ethernet PM
Port Admin page opens.
Figure 256: Ethernet PM Port Admin Page

2 Select the interface.
3 Click Enable Port PM or Disable Port PM to enable or disable the gathering of
Port RX PMs on the selected interface.
4 Click Close.
Page 363 of 1094

6.5.4.3 Setting the Ethernet Port RX Threshold

The RX bytes Layer 1 exceed threshold (sec) column shows for each interval, the
number of seconds the RX bytes exceeded the specified threshold during the
interval.
To view and set this threshold:
1 In the Ethernet Port RX PM Report page, click Threshold. The Ethernet Port Rx
Threshold page opens.
Figure 257: Ethernet Port Rx Threshold Page

2 Enter a threshold, between 0 and 4294967295.
Page 364 of 1094

7. Quality of Service (QoS)

• QoS Overview
• Configuring Classification
• Configuring Policers (Rate Metering)
• Configuring Marking
• Configuring WRED
• Configuring Egress Shaping
• Configuring Scheduling
• Configuring and Displaying Queue-Level PMs
Note: You can display additional QoS egress PMs and statistics via CLI. For
information, see Displaying Egress PMs and Statistics (CLI).
7.1 QoS Overview

Quality of Service (QoS) deals with the way frames are handled within the
switching fabric. QoS is required in order to deal with many different network
scenarios, such as traffic congestion, packet availability, and delay restrictions.
IP-20’s personalized QoS enables operators to handle a wide and diverse range of
scenarios. IP-20’s smart QoS mechanism operates from the frame’s ingress into
the switching fabric until the moment the frame egresses via the destination port.
QoS capability is very important due to the diverse topologies that exist in today’s
network scenarios. These can include, for example, streams from two different
ports that egress via single port, or a port-to-port connection that holds hundreds
of services. In each topology, a customized approach to handling QoS will provide
the best results.
Figure 258 shows the basic flow of IP-20’s QoS mechanism. Traffic ingresses (left
to right) via the Ethernet or radio interfaces, on the “ingress path.” Based on the
services model, the system determines how to route the traffic. Traffic is then
directed to the most appropriate output queue via the “egress path.”
Egress
Ingress
Marker
Rate Limit (Optional)
GE/Radio Port Classifier
(Policing) Queue Scheduler/
Manager Shaper
Port GE/Radio
(Optional)
Standard QoS/ H-QoS
Egress
Ingress
Marker
Rate Limit (Optional)
Manager Shaper
Port GE/Radio
(Optional)
Standard QoS/ H-QoS
Egress
Ingress CET/Pipe Marker
Rate Limit Services (Optional)
Manager Shaper
Port GE/Radio
(Optional)
Standard QoS/ H-QoS
Figure 258: QoS Block Diagram
Page 365 of 1094

The ingress path consists of the following QoS building blocks:

• Ingress Classifier – A hierarchical mechanism that deals with ingress traffic on
three different levels: interface, service point, and service. The classifier
determines the exact traffic stream and associates it with the appropriate
service. It also calculates an ingress frame CoS and Color. CoS and Color
classification can be performed on three levels, according to the user’s
configuration.
• Ingress Rate Metering – A hierarchical mechanism that deals with ingress
traffic on three different levels: interface, service point, and service point CoS.
The rate metering mechanism enables the system to measure the incoming
frame rate on different levels using a TrTCM standard MEF rate meter, and to
determine whether to modify the color calculated during the classification
stage.
The egress path consists of the following QoS building blocks:
• Queue Manager – This is the mechanism responsible for managing the
transmission queues, utilizing smart WRED per queue and per packet color
(Green or Yellow).
• Scheduling and Shaping – A hierarchical mechanism that is responsible for
scheduling the transmission of frames from the transmission queues, based
on priority among queues, Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) in bytes per each
transmission queue, and eligibility to transmit based on required shaping on
several different levels (per queue and per port).
• Marker – This mechanism provides the ability to modify priority bits in frames
based on the calculated CoS and Color.
For a more detailed description of QoS in the IP-20, refer to the Technical
Description for the IP-20 product type you are using.
Page 366 of 1094

7.2 Configuring Classification

The hierarchical classifier consists of the following levels:
• Logical interface-level classification
• Service point-level classification
• Service level classification
This section explains how to configure classification at the logical interface level.
• For instructions how to configure classification at the service point level, see
Ethernet Service Points – Ingress Attributes.
• For instructions how to configure classification at the service level, see Adding
an Ethernet Service.
• Classification Overview
• Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface
• Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1Q UP and CFI Bit Classification Table
• Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table
• Modifying the DSCP Classification Table
• Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table
• Modifying the MAC DA Classification Table
In addition to the procedures described in this section, you can specify a specific
CoS and Color for a specific VLAN ID. This is the highest classification priority on
the logical interface level, and overrides any other classification criteria at the
logical interface level. Classification by VLAN ID can only be configured via CLI. See
Configuring VLAN Classification and Override (CLI).
7.2.1 Classification Overview

IP-20 supports a hierarchical classification mechanism. The classification
mechanism examines incoming frames and determines their CoS and Color. The
benefit of hierarchical classification is that it provides the ability to “zoom in” or
“zoom out”, enabling classification at higher or lower levels of the hierarchy. The
nature of each traffic stream defines which level of the hierarchical classifier to
apply, or whether to use several levels of the classification hierarchy in parallel.
Classification takes place on the logical interface level according to the following
priorities:
◦ VLAN ID (CLI-only – see Configuring VLAN Classification and Override (CLI))
◦ 802.1p bits
◦ DSCP bits
◦ MPLS EXP field
◦ Default interface CoS
IP-20 performs the classification on each frame ingressing the system via the
logical interface. Classification is performed step by step from the highest priority
to the lowest priority classification method. Once a match is found, the classifier
determines the CoS and Color decision for the frame for the logical interface-level.
Page 367 of 1094

For example, if the frame is an untagged IP Ethernet frame, a match will not be
found until the DSCP priority level. The CoS and Color values defined for the
frame’s DSCP value will be applied to the frame.
You can disable some of these classification methods by configuring them as un-
trusted. For example, if 802.1p classification is configured as un-trusted for a
specific interface, the classification mechanism does not perform classification by
UP bits. This is useful, for example, if classification is based on DSCP priority bits.
If no match is found at the logical interface level, the default CoS is applied to
incoming frames at this level. In this case, the Color of the frame is assumed to be
Green.
Classification may also be performed by Destination MAC Address (MAC DA) at
the service point level. When MAC DA classification is enabled on a service point,
the classification mechanism checks each frame ingressing the interface on which
the service point is defined against a list of user-defined MAC DAs. If there is a
match, the mechanism applies to the frame the CoS and Color defined for that
MAC DA. Classification by MAC DA overrides the other classification criteria at the
service point level.
Up to 64 MAC addresses can be defined per device, including four predefined
MAC addresses. You can assign each of these MAC addresses a CoS value and a
Color.
The following MAC addresses are predefined, with a high priority (CoS=7,
Color=Green). You can edit or delete these MAC addresses:
• 09:00:2B:00:00:04
• 09:00:2B:00:00:05
• 01:80:C2:00:00:14
• 01:80:C2:00:00:15
These are protocol MAC addresses used to transport IS-IS frames as defined in ISO
9542 and ISO/IEC 10589.
7.2.2 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface

This section explains how to configure the classification criteria per each logical
interface. The following sections explain how to modify the classification tables
per bit type.
To configure the classification criteria for a logical interface:
1 Select Ethernet > Interfaces > Logical Interfaces. The Logical Interfaces page
opens.
Page 368 of 1094

Figure 259: Logical Interfaces Page

2 Select the interface you want to configure and click Edit. The Logical Interfaces
- Edit page opens.
Figure 260: Logical Interfaces - Edit Page

3 Configure the parameters described in Table 57.
Note: The Ingress byte compensation and Egress byte compensation fields
are described in Configuring the Ingress and Egress Byte
Compensation.
Page 369 of 1094

Table 57: Logical Interface Classification Parameters

Trust VLAN UP bits Select the interface's trust mode for user priority (UP) bits:
• Trust – The interface performs QoS and color
classification according to UP and CFI/DEI bits
according to user-configurable tables for 802.1q UP
bits (C-VLAN frames) or 802.1AD UP bits (S-VLAN
frames). VLAN UP bit classification has priority over
DSCP and MPLS classification, so that if a match is
found with the UP bit of the ingressing frame, DSCP
values and MPLS bits are not considered.
• Un-Trust – The interface does not consider 802.1
UP bits during classification.
Trust DSCP Select the interface's trust mode for DSCP:
classification according to a user-configurable table
for DSCP to CoS and color classification. DSCP
classification has priority over MPLS classification,
so that if a match is found with the DSCP value of
the ingressing frame, MPLS bits are not considered.
• Un-Trust – The interface does not consider DSCP
during classification.
Trust MPLS Select the interface's trust mode for MPLS bits:
classification according to a user-configurable table
for MPLS EXP to CoS and color classification.
• Un-Trust – The interface does not consider MPLS
bits during classification.
Default port CoS Select the default CoS value for frames passing through the
interface (0 to 7). This value can be overwritten on the
service point and service level.
Page 370 of 1094

7.2.3 Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1Q UP and CFI Bit Classification Table
To modify the classification criteria for 802.1Q User Priority (UP) bits:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Classification > 802.1Q. The 802.1Q Classification
page opens.
Figure 261: 802.1Q Classification Page

2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The 802.1Q Classification –
Edit page opens.
Figure 262: 802.1Q Classification - Edit Page

3 Modify the parameters you want to change:
◦ 802.1Q UP – Read-only. The User Priority (UP) bit to be mapped.
Page 371 of 1094

◦ 802.1Q CFI – Read-only. The CFI bit to be mapped.

◦ 802.1Q CoS – The CoS assigned to frames with the designated UP and CFI.
◦ 802.1Q Color – The Color assigned to frames with the designated UP and
CFI.
7.2.4 Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table
To modify the classification criteria for 802.1AD User Priority (UP) bits:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Classification > 802.1AD. The 802.1AD Classification
page opens.
Figure 263: 802.1AD Classification Page

2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The 802.1AD Classification -
Edit page opens.
Figure 264: 802.1Q Classification - Edit Page

◦ 802.1AD UP – Read-only. The User Priority (UP) bit to be mapped.
Page 372 of 1094

◦ 802.1ADQ DEI – Read-only. The DEI bit to be mapped.

◦ 802.1AD CoS – The CoS assigned to frames with the designated UP and DEI.
◦ 802.1AD Color – The Color assigned to frames with the designated UP and
DEI.
7.2.5 Modifying the DSCP Classification Table

You can configure the classification criteria for Differentiated Service Code Point
(DSCP) priority values. The DSCP is a 6-bit length field inside the IP datagram
header carrying priority information. Classification by DSCP can be used for
untagged frames, as well as 802.1Q tagged or provider VLAN tagged frames.
IP-20 units have a DSCP classification table with 24 pre-defined entries. Each entry
includes the following criteria:
• DSCP – The DSCP value to be mapped.
• Binary – The binary representation of the DSCP value.
• Description – A description of the DSCP value.
• CoS – The CoS assigned to frames with the designated DSCP value.
• Color – The Color assigned to frames with the designated DSCP value.
You can modify the Description, CoS, and Color for any of the pre-defined entries.
You can also add and delete entries. The maximum number of entries is 32.
To modify the classification criteria for DSCPs:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Classification > DSCP. The DSCP Classification page
opens.
Figure 265: DSCP Classification Page

2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The DSCP Classification - Edit
page opens.
Page 373 of 1094

Figure 266: DSCP Classification - Edit Page

◦ DSCP – Read-only. The DSCP value to be mapped.
◦ Binary – Read-only. The binary representation of the DSCP value.
◦ Description – The description of the DSCP value.
◦ CoS – The CoS assigned to frames with the designated DSCP value.
◦ Color – The Color assigned to frames with the designated DSCP value.
To add an entry to the DSCP Classification table:
opens (Figure 265).
2 Click Add. The DSCP Classification - Add page opens.
Figure 267: DSCP Classification - Add Page

3 In the DSCP field, select the DSCP value you want to add. The Binary field is
automatically adjusted to display the binary representation of the DSCP value
you selected.
Page 374 of 1094

4 In the Description field, enter a description of the DSCP entry.

5 In the CoS field, select a CoS value to assign to frames with the designated
DSCP value.
6 In the Color field, select a Color to assign to frames with the designated DSCP
value.
7 Click Apply.
To delete an entry from the DSCP Classification table:
opens (Figure 265).
2 Select the row you want to modify and click Delete. A confirmation window
opens.
3 Click OK. The entry is deleted.
7.2.6 Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table

MPLS bits are used to provide QoS capabilities by utilizing the bits set in the MPLS
labels. Classification by MPLS bits is supported in both untagged and 802.1Q
provider-tagged frames.
To modify the classification criteria for MPLS EXP bits:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Classification > MPLS. The MPLS Classification page
opens.
Page 375 of 1094

Figure 268: MPLS Classification Page

2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The MPLS Classification - Edit
page opens.
Figure 269: MPLS Classification - Edit Page

◦ MPLS EXP – Read-only. The MPLS (experimental) bit to be mapped.
◦ CoS – The CoS assigned to frames with the designated MPLS EXP value.
◦ Color – The Color assigned to frames with the designated MPLS EXP value.
Page 376 of 1094

7.2.7 Modifying the MAC DA Classification Table

You can determine whether classification is performed by MAC DA in the CoS
Mode field of the service point’s Ingress Parameters page. See Classification
Overview.
To add an entry to the MAC DA Classification Table:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Classification > MAC DA. The MAC DA Classification
page opens.
Figure 270: MAC DA Classification Page

2 Click Add. The MAC DA Classification – Add page opens.
Figure 271: MAC DA Classification – Add Page
Page 377 of 1094

3 In the Destination MAC Address field, enter the MAC address.

4 In the CoS field, enter the CoS to be assigned to frames with this MAC DA.
5 In the Color field, enter the Color to be assigned to frames with this MAC DA.
To modify an entry in the MAC DA Classification Table:
1 In the MAC DA Classification page, select the row you want to modify and click
Edit. The MAC DA Classification – Edit page opens.
Figure 272: MAC DA Classification – Edit Page

◦ CoS – The CoS assigned to frames with this MAC DA.
◦ Color – The Color assigned to frames with this MAC DA.
To delete an entry from the MAC DA Classification Table:
1 In the MAC DA Classification page, select the row you want to delete and click
Delete. A confirmation window opens.
2 Click OK.
Page 378 of 1094

7.3 Configuring Policers (Rate Metering)

• Policer (Rate Metering) Overview
• Configuring Policer Profiles
• Assigning Policers to Interfaces
• Configuring the Ingress and Egress Byte Compensation
7.3.1 Policer (Rate Metering) Overview

The IP-20 switching fabric supports hierarchical policing on the logical interface
level. You can define up to 250 rate meter (policer) profiles.
Note: Policing on the service point level, and the service point and CoS level,
must be configured via CLI. See Configuring Policers (Rate Metering)
(CLI).
IP-20's policer mechanism is based on a dual leaky bucket mechanism (TrTCM).
The policers can change a frame’s color and CoS settings based on CIR/EIR +
CBS/EBS, which makes the policer mechanism a key tool for implementing
bandwidth profiles and enabling operators to meet strict SLA requirements.
The output of the policers is a suggested color for the inspected frame. Based on
this color, the queue management mechanism decides whether to drop the frame
or to pass it to the queue.
7.3.2 Configuring Policer Profiles

• Adding a Policer Profile
• Editing a Policer Profile
• Deleting a Policer Profile
Page 379 of 1094

7.3.2.1 Adding a Policer Profile

To add a policer profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Policer > Policer Profile. The Policer Profile page
opens.
Figure 273: Policer Profile Page

2 Click Add. The Policer Profile - Add page opens.
Figure 274: Policer Profile - Add Page

3 Configure the profile’s parameters. See Table 58 for a description of the
policer profile parameters.
Page 380 of 1094

Table 58: Policer Profile Parameters

Profile ID A unique ID for the policer profile. You can choose any unused value from 1
to 250. Once you have added the profile, you cannot change the Profile ID.
Description A description of the policer profile.
Policer type Read-only. The type of policer. Always set to MEF-TRTCM.
CIR Enter the Committed Information Rate (CIR) for the policer, in bits per
second. Permitted values are 0, or 64,000 through 1,000,000,000 bps. If the
value is 0, all incoming CIR traffic is dropped.
CBS Enter the Committed Burst Rate (CBR) for the policer, in Kbytes. Permitted
values are 0 through 8192 Kbytes.
EIR Enter the Excess Information Rate (EIR) for the policer, in bits per second.
Permitted values are 0, or 64,000 through 1,000,000,000 bps. If the value is
0, all incoming EIR traffic is dropped.
EBS Enter the Excess Burst Rate (EBR) for the policer, in Kbytes. Permitted values
are 0 through 8192 Kbytes.
Color mode Select how the policer treats packets that ingress with a CFI or DEI field set
to 1 (yellow). Options are:
• Color Aware – All packets that ingress with a CFI/DEI field set to 1
(yellow) are treated as EIR packets, even if credits remain in the CIR
bucket.
• Color Blind – All ingress packets are treated as green regardless of
their CFI/DEI value. A color-blind policer discards any former color
decisions.
Coupling flag Select Enable or Disable. When enabled, frames that ingress as yellow may
be converted to green when there are no available yellow credits in the EIR
bucket. Coupling Flag is only relevant in Color Aware mode.
Page 381 of 1094

7.3.2.2 Editing a Policer Profile

To edit a policer profile, select the profile in the Police Profile table and click Edit.
The Policer Profile Table Edit page opens.
The Policer Profile Table - Edit page is identical to the Policer Profile Table - Add
page (Figure 274). You can edit any parameter that can be configured in the
Policer Profile Table Add page, except the Profile ID.
Page 382 of 1094

7.3.2.3 Deleting a Policer Profile

You cannot delete a policer profile that is attached to a logical interface. You must
first remove the profile from the logical interface, then delete the profile. See
Assigning Policers to Interfaces.
To delete a policer profile, select the profile in the Police Profile table and click
Delete. The profile is deleted.
To delete multiple policer profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the Policer Profile table or select all the profiles by
selecting the check box in the top row.
2 Click Delete. The profiles are deleted.
7.3.3 Assigning Policers to Interfaces

To assign policers to a logical interface:
opens (Figure 259).
2 Select the interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration table and click
Policers. The Policers page opens.
Figure 275: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Unicast Policer (Default)

For a logical interface, you can assign policers to the following traffic flows:
• Unicast Policer
• Multicast Policer
• Broadcast Policer
• Ethertype Policers
Page 383 of 1094

7.3.3.1 Assigning Unicast Policers

To assign a policer for unicast traffic to a logical interface:
opens (Figure 259).
2 Select the interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration Table and click
Policers. The Policers page opens. By default, the Policers page opens to the
Unicast Policer table (Figure 275).
3 In the Policer profile field, select a profile from the policer profiles defined in
the system. The Policer profile drop-down list includes the ID and description
of all defined profiles.
4 In the Unicast admin field, select Enable to enable policing on unicast traffic
flows from the logical interface, or Disable to disable policing on unicast traffic
flows from the logical interface.
5 Click Apply.
Page 384 of 1094

7.3.3.2 Assigning Multicast Policers

To assign a policer for multicast traffic to a logical interface:
opens (Figure 259).
3 Select Multicast Policer. The Multicast Policer table appears.
Figure 276: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Multicast Policer

5 In the Multicast admin field, select Enable to enable policing on multicast
traffic flows from the logical interface, or Disable to disable policing on
multicast traffic flows from the logical interface.
6 Click Apply.
Page 385 of 1094

7.3.3.3 Assigning Broadcast Policers

To assign a policer for broadcast traffic to a logical interface:
opens (Figure 259).
3 Select Broadcast Policer. The Broadcast Policer table appears.
Figure 277: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Broadcast Policer

5 In the Broadcast admin field, select Enable to enable policing on broadcast
traffic flows from the logical interface, or Disable to disable policing on
broadcast traffic flows from the logical interface.
6 Click Apply.
Page 386 of 1094

7.3.3.4 Assigning Ethertype Policers

You can define up to three policers per Ethertype value.
To assign a policer to an Ethertype:
opens (Figure 259).
2 Select the interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration Table and click
3 Select Ethertype type 1 Policer. The Ethertype type 1 Policer table appears.
Figure 278: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Ethertype Policer

4 In the Ethertype 1 profile field, select a profile from the policer profiles
defined in the system. The Ethertype 1 profile drop-down list includes the ID
and description of all defined profiles.
5 In the Ethertype 1 user value field, enter the Ethertype value to which you
want to apply this policer. The field length is 4 nibbles (for example, 0x0806 -
ARP).
6 In the Ethertype 1 admin field, select Enable to enable policing on the logical
interface for the specified ethertype, or Disable to disable policing on the
logical interface for the specified ethertype.
7 Click Apply.
8 To assign policers to additional Ethertypes, select Ethertype type 2 Policer and
Ethertype type 3 Policer and repeat the steps above.
Page 387 of 1094

7.3.4 Configuring the Ingress and Egress Byte Compensation

You can define the ingress and egress byte compensation value per logical
interface. The policer attached to the interface uses these values to compensate
for Layer 1 non-effective traffic bytes.
To define the ingress byte compensation value for a logical interface:
opens (Figure 259).
2 Select the interface you want to configure and click Edit. The Logical Interfaces
- Edit page opens (Figure 260).
3 In the Ingress byte compensation field, enter the ingress byte compensation
value, in bytes. Permitted values are 0 to 32 bytes. The default value is 20
bytes.
4 In the Egress byte compensation field, enter the egress byte compensation
value, in bytes. Permitted values are 0 to 32 bytes. The default value is 0
bytes. Only even values are permitted.
7.4 Configuring Marking

• Marking Overview
• Enabling Marking
• Modifying the 802.1Q Marking Table
• Modifying the 802.1AD Marking Table
7.4.1 Marking Overview

When enabled, IP-20's marking mechanism modifies each frame’s 802.1p UP bit
and CFI/DEI bits according to the classifier decision. The CFI/DEI (color) field is
modified according to the classifier and policer decision. The color is first
determined by a classifier and may be later overwritten by a policer. Green color
is represented by a CFI/DEI value of 0, and Yellow color is represented by a
CFI/DEI value of 1. Marking is performed on egress frames that are VLAN-tagged.
The marking is performed according to global mapping tables that describe the
802.1p UP bits and the CFI bits (for C-VLAN tags) or DEI bits (for S VLAN tags). The
marking bit in the service point egress attributes determines whether the frame is
marked as green or according to the calculated color.
Note: The calculated color is sent to the queue manager regardless of
whether the marking bit is set.
Regular marking is only performed when:
• The outer frame is S-VLAN, and S-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled, or
• The outer frame is C-VLAN, and C-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled.
If marking and CoS preservation for the relevant outer VLAN are both disabled,
special marking is applied. Special marking means that marking is performed, but
Page 388 of 1094

only according to the values defined for Green frames in the 802.1Q and 802.1AD
marking tables.
When marking is performed, the C-VLAN or S-VLAN 802.1p UP bits are re-marked
according to the calculated CoS and color, and the mapping table for C-VLAN or S-
VLAN.
7.4.2 Enabling Marking

Marking is enabled and disabled on the service point level. See Ethernet Service
Points – Egress Attributes.
7.4.3 Modifying the 802.1Q Marking Table

The 802.1Q Marking table enables you to modify the CoS to UP and CFI bit
mapping that is implemented when marking is enabled.
To modify the 802.1Q Marking table:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Marking > 802.1Q. The 802.1Q Marking page opens.
Each row in the 802.1Q Marking page represents a CoS and color
combination.
Figure 279: 802.1Q Marking Page

2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The 802.1Q Marking - Edit
page opens.
Page 389 of 1094

Figure 280: 802.1Q Marking - Edit Page

3 Enter the new 802.1Q UP and 802.1Q CFI values.
7.4.4 Modifying the 802.1AD Marking Table

The 802.1AD Marking table enables you to modify the CoS to UP and DEI bit
mapping that is implemented when marking is enabled.
To modify the 802.1AD Marking table:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Marking > 802.1AD. The 802.1AD Marking page
opens. Each row in the 802.1AD Marking page represents a CoS and color
combination.
Figure 281: 802.1AD Marking Page
Page 390 of 1094

2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The 802.1AD Marking - Edit
page opens.
Figure 282: 802.1AD Marking - Edit Page

3 Enter the new 802.1AD UP and 802.1AD DEI values.
Page 391 of 1094

7.5 Configuring WRED

• WRED Overview
• Configuring WRED Profiles
• Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues
7.5.1 WRED Overview

Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) enables differentiation between
higher and lower priority traffic based on CoS. You can define up to 30 WRED
profiles. Each profile contains a green traffic curve and a yellow traffic curve. This
curve describes the probability of randomly dropping frames as a function of
queue occupancy.
The system also includes two pre-defined read-only profiles. These profiles are
assigned profile IDs 31 and 32:
• Profile number 31 defines a tail-drop curve and is configured with the
following values:
100% Yellow traffic drop after 64kbytes occupancy.
100% Green traffic drop after 128kbytes occupancy.
Yellow maximum drop is 100%
Green maximum drop is 100%
• Profile number 32 defines a profile in which all will be dropped. It is for
internal use and should not be applied to traffic.
A WRED profile can be assigned to each queue. The WRED profile assigned to the
queue determines whether or not to drop incoming packets according to the
occupancy of the queue. As the queue occupancy grows, the probability of
dropping each incoming frame increases as well. As a consequence, statistically
more TCP flows will be restrained before traffic congestion occurs.
7.5.2 Configuring WRED Profiles

• Adding a WRED Profile
• Editing a WRED Profile
• Deleting a WRED Profile
Page 392 of 1094

7.5.2.1 Adding a WRED Profile

To add a WRED profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > WRED > WRED Profile. The WRED Profile page opens.
Figure 283: WRED Profile Page

2 Click ADD. The WRED Profile - Add page opens, with default values displayed.
Figure 284: WRED Profile - Add Page

3 In the WRED Profile ID field, select a unique ID to identify the profile.
Permitted values are 1-30.
4 In the Green curve min point field, enter the minimum throughput of green
packets for queues with this profile, in Kbytes (0-8192). When this value is
reached, the system begins dropping green packets in the queue.
5 In the Green curve max point field, enter the maximum throughput of green
reached, all green packets in the queue are dropped.
Page 393 of 1094

6 In the Green curve max drop ratio field, enter the maximum percentage (1-
100) of dropped green packets for queues with this profile.
7 In the Yellow curve min point field, enter the minimum throughput of yellow
reached, the system begins dropping yellow packets in the queue.
8 In the Yellow curve max point field, enter the maximum throughput of yellow
packets for queues with this profile, in Kbytes (0-8192). After this value is
reached, all yellow packets in the queue are dropped.
9 In the Yellow curve max drop ratio field, enter the maximum percentage (1-
100) of dropped yellow packets for queues with this profile.
Page 394 of 1094

7.5.2.2 Editing a WRED Profile

To edit a WRED profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > WRED > WRED Profile. The WRED Profile page opens
(Figure 283).
2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit. The WRED Profile – Edit page
opens. This page is similar to the WRED Profile – Add page (Figure 284). You
can edit any parameter except the WRED Profile ID.
3 Modify the profile.
Page 395 of 1094

7.5.2.3 Deleting a WRED Profile

You cannot delete a WRED profile that is assigned to a queue. You must first
remove the WRED profile from the queue, then delete the WRED profile. See
Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues.
To delete a WRED profile, select the profile in the WRED Profile Configuration
table (Figure 283) and click Delete. The profile is deleted.
To delete multiple WRED profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the WRED Profile Configuration table or select all the
profiles by selecting the check box in the top row.
7.5.3 Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues

To assign a WRED profile to a queue:
opens (Figure 259).
2 Select an interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration table and click
WRED. The WRED page opens.
Figure 285: Logical Interfaces – WRED Page

3 In the Show Service bundle ID field, select 1.
4 Select a CoS Queue ID and click Edit. The Logical Interfaces – WRED – Edit
page opens.
Page 396 of 1094

Figure 286: Logical Interfaces – WRED - Edit Page

5 In the Profile ID field, select the WRED profile you want to assign to the
selected queue.
7.6 Configuring Egress Shaping

• Egress Shaping Overview
• Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles
• Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles
• Assigning a Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue
• Assigning a Service Bundle Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle
7.6.1 Egress Shaping Overview

Egress shaping determines the traffic profile for each queue. IP-20 can perform
queue shaping on the following levels:
• Queue Level – Single leaky bucket shaping. On the queue level, you can
configure up to 31 single leaky bucket shaper profiles. If no profile is attached
to the queue, no egress shaping is performed on that queue.
• Service Bundle Level – Dual leaky bucket shaping. On the service bundle level,
users can configure up to 256 dual leaky bucket shaper profiles. If no profile is
attached to the service bundle, no egress shaping is performed on that service
bundle.
• Interface Level – Single leaky bucket shaping.
Note: Egress shaping on the interface level is planned for future release.
7.6.2 Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles

• Adding a Queue Shaper Profile
• Editing a Queue Shaper Profile
• Deleting a Queue Shaper Profile
Page 397 of 1094

7.6.2.1 Adding a Queue Shaper Profile

To add a queue shaper profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Shaper > Queue Profiles. The Queue Shaper Profile
page opens.
Figure 287: Queue Shaper Profile Page

2 Click Add. The Queue Shaper – Add page opens, with default values displayed.
Figure 288: Queue Shaper Profile – Add Page

3 In the Profile ID field, select a unique ID to identify the profile. Permitted
values are 1-31.
4 Optionally, in the Description field, enter a description of the profile.
5 In the CIR field, enter the Committed Information Rate (CIR) assigned to the
profile, in bits per second. Permitted values are:
◦ 16,000 - 32,000,000 bps, with granularity of 16,000.
◦ 32,000,000 - 131,008,000 bps, with granularity of 64,000.
Page 398 of 1094

7.6.2.2 Editing a Queue Shaper Profile

To edit a queue shaper profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Shaper > Queue Profiles. The Queue Shaper Profile
2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit. The Queue Shaper Profile –
Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Queue Shaper Profile – Add page
(Figure 288). You can edit any parameter except the Profile ID.
Page 399 of 1094

7.6.2.3 Deleting a Queue Shaper Profile

You cannot delete a queue shaper profile that is assigned to a queue. You must
first remove the profile from the queue, then delete the profile. See Assigning a
Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue.
To delete a queue shaper profile, select the profile in the Queue Shaper Profiles
Configuration table (Figure 287) and click Delete. The profile is deleted.
To delete multiple queue shaper profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the Queue Shaper Profiles Configuration table or select
all the profiles by selecting the check box in the top row.
7.6.3 Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles

• Adding a Service Bundle Shaper Profile
• Editing a Service Bundle Shaper Profile
• Deleting a Service Bundle Shaper Profile
Page 400 of 1094

7.6.3.1 Adding a Service Bundle Shaper Profile

To add a service bundle shaper profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Shaper > Service Bundle Profiles. The Service Bundle
Shaper Profile page opens.
Figure 289: Service Bundle Shaper Profile Page

2 Click Add. The Service Bundle Shaper Profile – Add page opens, with default
values displayed.
Figure 290: Service Bundle Shaper Profile – Add Page

3 In the Profile ID field, select a unique ID to identify the profile. Permitted
values are 1-31.
4 Optionally, in the Description field, enter a description of the profile.
5 In the CIR field, enter the Committed Information Rate (CIR) assigned to the
profile, in bits per second. Permitted values are:
◦ 0 – 32,000,000 bps, with granularity of 16,000.
◦ 32,000,000 – 1,000,000,000 bps, with granularity of 64,000.
Page 401 of 1094

6 In the PIR field, enter the Peak Information Rate (PIR) assigned to the profile,
in bits per second. Permitted values are:
◦ 16,000 – 32,000,000 bps, with granularity of 16,000.
◦ 32,000,000 – 1,000,000,000 bps, with granularity of 64,000.
Page 402 of 1094

7.6.3.2 Editing a Service Bundle Shaper Profile

To edit a service bundle shaper profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Shaper > Service Bundle Profiles. The Service Bundle
Shaper Profile page opens (Figure 289).
2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit. The Service Bundle Shaper
Profile – Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Service Bundle Shaper
Profile – Add page (Figure 290). You can edit any parameter except the Profile
ID.
Page 403 of 1094

7.6.3.3 Deleting a Service Bundle Shaper Profile

You cannot delete a service bundle shaper profile that is assigned to a service
bundle. You must first remove the profile from the service bundle, then delete the
profile.
To delete a service bundle shaper profile, select the profile in the Service Bundle
Shaper Profiles Configuration table (Figure 289) and click Delete. The profile is
deleted.
To delete multiple service bundle shaper profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the Service Bundle Shaper Profiles Configuration table or
select all the profiles by selecting the check box in the top row.
7.6.4 Assigning a Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue

To assign a queue shaper profile to a queue:
opens (Figure 259).
Shaper. The Logical Interfaces – Shaper page opens, with the Egress Queue
Shaper Configuration table open by default. All queue shaper profiles defined
in the system are listed in the table.
Figure 291: Logical Interfaces – Shaper – Egress Queue Shaper

3 Click Add. The Egress Queue Shaper Configuration – Add page opens.
Page 404 of 1094

Figure 292: Logical Interfaces – Egress Queue Shaper Configuration – Add Page
Note: Only one service bundle (Service Bundle ID 1) is supported.
4 In the CoS queue ID field, select the CoS queue ID of the queue to which you
want to assign the shaper. Queues are numbered according to CoS value, from
0 to 7.
5 In the Profile ID field, select from a list of configured queue shaper profiles.
See Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles.
6 In the Shaper Admin field, select Enable to enable egress queue shaping for
the selected queue, or Disable to disable egress queue shaping for the
selected queue.
To assign a different queue shaper profile to a queue:
opens (Figure 259).
Shaper Configuration table open by default (Figure 291).
4 Select the row you want to edit and click Edit. The Egress Queue Shaper
Configuration – Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Egress Queue
Shaper Configuration – Add page (Figure 292).
5 To assign a different egress queue shaper profile, select the profile in the
Profile ID field.
6 To enable or disable egress queue shaping for the selected queue, select
Enable to enable egress queue shaping for the queue, or Disable to disable
egress queue shaping for the queue.
Page 405 of 1094

7.6.5 Assigning a Service Bundle Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle

To assign a service bundle shaper profile to a service bundle:
opens (Figure 259).
3 Select Egress Service Bundle Shaper. The Egress Service Bundle Shaper
Configuration table appears. All service bundle shaper profiles defined in the
system are listed in the table.
Figure 293: Logical Interfaces – Shaper – Egress Service Bundle Shaper

4 Click Add. The Egress Service Bundle Shaper Configuration – Add page opens.
Figure 294: Logical Interfaces – Egress Service Bundle Shaper Configuration – Add
Page
Note: Only one service bundle (Service Bundle ID 1) is supported.
5 In the Profile ID field, select from a list of configured service bundle shaper
profiles. See Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles.
Page 406 of 1094

6 In the Shaper Admin field, select Enable to enable egress service bundle
shaping, or Disable to disable egress service bundle shaping.
To assign a different service bundle shaper profile:
opens (Figure 259).
3 Select Egress Service Bundle Shaper. The Egress Service Bundle Shaper
Configuration table appears (Figure 293). All service bundle shaper profiles
defined in the system are listed in the table.
4 Select the row you want to edit and click Edit. The Egress Service Bundle
Shaper Configuration – Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Egress
Service Bundle Shaper Configuration – Add page (Figure 294).
5 To assign a different egress queue shaper profile, select the profile in the
Profile ID field.
6 To enable or disable egress service bundle shaping, select Enable or Disable.
7.7 Configuring Scheduling

• Scheduling Overview
• Configuring Priority Profiles
• Configuring WFQ Profiles
• Assigning a Priority Profile to an Interface
• Assigning a WFQ Profile to an Interface
7.7.1 Scheduling Overview

Scheduling determines the priority among the queues. IP-20 provides a unique
hierarchical scheduling model that includes four priorities, with Weighted Fair
Queuing (WFQ) within each priority, and shaping per port and per queue.
The scheduler scans the queues and determines which queue is ready to transmit.
If more than one queue is ready to transmit, the scheduler determines which
queue transmits first based on:
• Queue Priority – A queue with higher priority is served before lower-priority
queues.
• Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) – If two or more queues have the same priority
and are ready to transmit, the scheduler transmits frames from the queues
based on a WFQ algorithm that determines the ratio of frames per queue
based on a predefined weight assigned to each queue.
Page 407 of 1094

7.7.2 Configuring Priority Profiles

Scheduling priority profiles determine the queue priority. Each profile contains
eight CoS-based priorities, corresponding to eight queues in an interface to which
the profile is assigned. You can configure up to eight priority profiles. A ninth
profile, Profile ID 9, is pre-configured. You can configure Green priorities from 4
(highest) to 1 (lowest). An additional four Yellow priority profiles are defined
automatically.
• Adding a Scheduler Priority Profile
• Editing a Service Scheduler Priority Profile
• Deleting a Scheduler Priority Profile
Page 408 of 1094

7.7.2.1 Adding a Scheduler Priority Profile

To add a scheduler priority profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Scheduler > Priority Profiles. The Scheduler Priority
Profile page opens.
Figure 295: Scheduler Priority Profile Page

2 Click Add. The Scheduler Priority Profile – Add page opens, with default values
displayed.
Page 409 of 1094

Figure 296: Scheduler Priority Profile – Add Page

3 In the Profile ID field, select a unique Profile ID between 1 and 8.
Page 410 of 1094

4 For each CoS value, enter the Green priority, from 4 (highest) to 1 (lowest) (1-
4). This priority is applied to Green frames with that CoS egressing a queue to
which the profile is assigned.
5 Optionally, you can enter a description of up to 20 characters in the field to
the right of each CoS value.
Note: The Yellow priority values are assigned automatically by the system.
Page 411 of 1094

7.7.2.2 Editing a Service Scheduler Priority Profile

To edit a scheduler priority profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Scheduler > Priority Profiles. The Scheduler Priority
Profile page opens (Figure 295).
2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit. The Scheduler Priority Profile
– Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Scheduler Priority Profile – Add
page (Figure 296). You can edit any parameter except the Profile ID.
Page 412 of 1094

7.7.2.3 Deleting a Scheduler Priority Profile

To delete a scheduler priority profile, select the profile in the Scheduler Priority
Profiles page (Figure 295) and click Delete. The profile is deleted.
To delete multiple scheduler priority profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the Scheduler Priority Profiles page or select all the
profiles by selecting the check box in the top row.
7.7.3 Configuring WFQ Profiles

WFQ profiles determine the relative weight per queue. Each profile contains eight
CoS-based weight values, corresponding to eight queues in an interface to which
the profile is assigned. You can configure up to five WFQ profiles. A sixth profile,
Profile ID 1, is pre-configured.
• Adding a WFQ Profile
• Editing a WFQ Priority Profile
• Deleting a WFQ Profile
Page 413 of 1094

7.7.3.1 Adding a WFQ Profile

To add a WFQ profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Scheduler > WFQ Profiles. The Scheduler WFQ Profile
page opens.
Figure 297: Scheduler WFQ Profile Page

2 Click Add. The Scheduler WFQ Profile – Add page opens, with default values
displayed.
Figure 298: Scheduler WFQ Profile – Add Page

3 In the Profile ID field, select a unique Profile ID between 2 and 7. Profile ID 1 is
used for a pre-defined WFQ profile.
4 For each CoS value, enter the weight for that CoS, from 1 to 20.
Page 414 of 1094

Page 415 of 1094

7.7.3.2 Editing a WFQ Priority Profile

To edit a scheduler WFQ profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Scheduler > WFQ Profiles. The Scheduler WFQ Profile
2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit. The Scheduler WFQ Profile –
Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Scheduler WFQ Profile – Add page
(Figure 298). You can edit any parameter except the Profile ID.
Page 416 of 1094

7.7.3.3 Deleting a WFQ Profile

To delete a scheduler WFQ profile, select the profile in the Scheduler WFQ
Profiles page (Figure 297) and click Delete. The profile is deleted.
To delete multiple scheduler WFQ profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the Scheduler WFQ Profiles page or select all the profiles
by selecting the check box in the top row.
7.7.4 Assigning a Priority Profile to an Interface

To assign a priority profile to an interface:
opens (Figure 259).
Scheduler. The Logical Interfaces – Scheduler page opens, with the Egress Port
Scheduling Priority Configuration – Edit page open by default.
Figure 299: Logical Interfaces – Scheduler – Egress Port Scheduling Priority

3 In the Profile ID field, select from a list of configured scheduling priority
profiles. See Configuring Priority Profiles.
7.7.5 Assigning a WFQ Profile to an Interface

To assign a WFQ profile to an interface:
opens (Figure 259).
Scheduler. The Logical Interfaces – Scheduler page opens, with the Egress Port
Scheduling Priority Configuration – Edit page open by default (Figure 299).
Page 417 of 1094

3 Select Egress Port Scheduling WFQ. The Egress Port Scheduling WFQ
Configuration – Edit page opens.
Figure 300: Logical Interfaces – Scheduler – Egress Port Scheduling WFQ

4 In the Profile ID field, select from a list of configured scheduling priority
profiles. See Configuring WFQ Profiles.
Page 418 of 1094

7.8 Configuring and Displaying Queue-Level PMs

IP-20 devices support advanced traffic PMs per CoS queue and service bundle. For
each logical interface, you can configure thresholds for Green and Yellow traffic
per queue. You can then display the following PMs for 15-minute and 24-hour
intervals, per queue and color:
• Maximum bytes passed per second
• Minimum bytes passed per second
• Average bytes passed per second
• Maximum bytes dropped per second
• Minimum bytes dropped per second
• Average bytes dropped per second
• Maximum packets passed per second
• Minimum packets passed per second
• Average packets passed per second
• Maximum packets dropped per second
• Minimum packets dropped per second
• Average packets dropped per second
• Seconds bytes per second were over the configured threshold per interval
These PMs are available for any type of logical interface, including groups. To
activate collection of these PMs, the user must add a PM collection rule on a
logical interface and service bundle and set the relevant thresholds per CoS and
Color. When the PM is configured on a group, queue traffic PMs are recorded for
the group and not for the individual interfaces that belong to the group.
One collection rule is available per interface.
PMs for queue traffic are saved for 30 days, after which they are removed from
the database. It is important to note that they are not persistent, which means
they are not saved in the event of unit reset.
Page 419 of 1094

To configure queue-level PMs:

1 Select Ethernet > PM & Statistics > Egress CoS PM > Configuration. The Egress
CoS PM Configuration page opens.
Figure 301: Egress CoS PM Configuration Page
Page 420 of 1094

2 Click Add. The Egress CoS PM Configuration – Add page opens.
Figure 302: Egress CoS PM Configuration – Add Page
Page 421 of 1094

3 In the Interface Location field, select the interface for which you want to
configure the collection rule.
4 In the Service Bundle field, select a service bundle (1-6).
5 In the Admin field, select Enable to enable the collection rule.
6 Enter the Green and Yellow thresholds for each CoS, in bytes (0-4294967295).
7 Click Apply.
8 Repeat these steps to configure collection rules for additional interfaces.
To display queue-level PMs:
1 Select Ethernet > PM & Statistics > Egress CoS PM > Egress CoS PM. The
Egress CoS PM page opens.
Figure 303: Egress CoS PM Page

The Integrity column indicates whether the values received at the time and date
of the measured interval are valid. An X in the column indicates that the values
are invalid. This can occur for a number of reasons, including but not limited to a
disconnected cable, a missing SFP module, muting of a radio interface, and an
operational status of Down.
Page 422 of 1094

8. Ethernet Protocols
• Configuring G.8032
• Configuring MSTP
• Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN)
• Configuring Ethernet Bandwidth Notification (ETH-BN)
• Configuring LLDP
Related Topics:
• Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM)
8.1 Configuring G.8032

• G.8032 Overview
• Configuring the Destination MAC Address
• Adding ERPIs
• Configuring the RPL Owner
• Configuring Timers
• Viewing the ERPI Configuration and Status Parameters
• Viewing ERPI State Information
• Initiating a Manual or Forced Switch and Clearing the Switch or Initiating
Reversion
• Blocking or Unblocking R-APS Messages on a Service Point
• Viewing ERPI Statistics
8.1.1 G.8032 Overview

Note: P2P services are not affected by G.8032, and continue to traverse
ports that are blocked by G.8032.
G.8032 cannot be configured on management ports, including

management ports used for traffic (IP-20E and IP-20V).
ERPS, as defined in the G.8032 ITU standard, is currently the most advanced ring
protection protocol, providing convergence times of sub-50ms. ERPS prevents
loops in an Ethernet ring by guaranteeing that at any time, traffic can flow on all
except one link in the ring. This link is called the Ring Protection Link (RPL). Under
normal conditions, the RPL is blocked, i.e., not used for traffic. One designated
Ethernet Ring Node, the RPL Owner Node, is responsible for blocking traffic at one
end of the RPL. When an Ethernet ring failure occurs, the RPL Owner unblocks its
end of the RPL, allowing the RPL to be used for traffic. The other Ethernet Ring
Node adjacent to the RPL, the RPL Neighbor Node, may also participate in
blocking or unblocking its end of the RPL. A number of ERP instances (ERPIs) can
be created on the same ring.
Page 423 of 1094

For a more detailed description of G.8032 in the IP-20C and IP-20V, refer to the
Technical Description for the product you are using.
8.1.2 Configuring the Destination MAC Address

To configure the destination MAC address for G.8032:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > G.8032 > General Attribute. The G.8032 General
Attribute page opens.
Figure 304: G.8032 General Attribute Page

2 In the G8032 destination MAC address field, enter the destination MAC
address for PDUs generated by the node.
3 Click Apply.
Note: The G.8032 Node ID field displays the base MAC address for the node.
This field is read-only.
Page 424 of 1094

8.1.3 Adding ERPIs

You can configure up to 16 Ethernet Ring Protection instances (ERPIs). Each ERPI is
associated with an Ethernet service defined in the system.
Note: Before adding an ERPI to an Ethernet service, the service must be
mapped to an MSTP instance. See Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP
instances (MSTIs).
To add an ERPI:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > G.8032 > ERPI Attribute. The G.8032 ERPI
Attribute page opens.
Figure 305: G.8032 ERPI Attribute Page

2 Click Add. The Add G8032 ERPI Attribute wizard opens.
Figure 306: G.8032 ERPI Attribute Wizard – Page 1
Page 425 of 1094

3 In the ERPI ID field, select an available ID. The ERPI ID is a unique ID that
identifies the ERPI.
4 Optionally, in the ERPI Name field, enter a descriptive name for the ERPI.
5 In the Type field, select the type of ERPI, based on the type of ring:
◦ Ring: A Ring is an Ethernet ring that is connected on two ports (East and
West service points) to an interconnection node.
◦ Sub-ring: A Sub-Ring is an Ethernet ring which is connected to another ring
or network through the use of interconnection nodes (East and West
service points). On their own, the Sub-Ring links do not form a closed
physical loop. A closed loop may be formed by the sub-ring links and the
link between interconnection nodes that is controlled by other ring or
network.
◦ Ring with sub-ring: The ERPI includes both a ring, with East and West
service points, and a connection to a sub-ring using a Sub-Ring service
point.
6 In the Service ID field, select the ID of the Ethernet service to which the ERPI
belongs.
7 Optionally, in the MEG Level field, select the Maintenance Entity Group (MEG)
level used for R-APS messages sent in the ERPI (0-7).
8 Click Next. The second page of the Add G.8032 ERPI Attribute wizard opens.

9 In the West ERPI port (SP) field, select the first endpoint for the ERPI. This can
be any service point that has been configured for the service.
Note: Service points on the IP-20 side of the link must have a single,
determinate VLAN. This means the service point type must be dot1q,
s-tag, or QinQ. On the customer side, any service point type can be
used.
Page 426 of 1094

10 Click Next. The third page of the Add G.8032 ERPI Attribute wizard opens.

11 In the East ERPI port (SP) field, select the second endpoint for the ERPI. This
can be any service point that has been configured for the service.
12 Click Next:
◦ If the Type is Ring or Sub-ring, the Submit page opens. Go to Step 15.
◦ If the Type is Ring with sub-ring, the fourth page of the Add G.8032 ERPI
Attribute wizard opens.
Page 427 of 1094

13 In the Sub Ring port (SP) field, select the service point that connects the Ring
with the Sub-Ring. This can be any service point that has been configured for
the service.
14 Click Next. The Submit page opens.
Figure 310: G.8032 ERPI Attribute Wizard – Submit

15 Verify that the parameters of the ERPI are correct and click Submit.
Page 428 of 1094

8.1.4 Configuring the RPL Owner

The RPL Owner Node is a node in the ERPI that is responsible for blocking traffic at
one end of the ERPI. You can select one RPL per ERPI. To designate the RPL Owner
Node:
Attribute page opens (Figure 305).
2 Select the ERPI and click Edit. The ERPI Attribute – Edit page opens.
Figure 311: G.8032 ERPI Attribute – Edit Page
Page 429 of 1094

3 In the RPL Owner field, select the service point you want to configure as RPL
Owner.
8.1.5 Configuring Timers

You can configure timers per ERPI to control the ERPI's switching and convergence
parameters. The following timers are available:
• Wait to Restore (WTR) Timer – Defines a minimum time the system waits
after signal failure is recovered before reverting to idle state, when the RPL
can again be blocked.
• Guard Time – The guard time is the minimum time the system waits after
recovery from a signal failure before accepting new R-APS messages. The
Guard Time should be greater than the maximum expected forwarding delay
for which one R-APS message circles around the ring.
Note: The Guard Time is used to prevent Ethernet ring nodes from acting
upon outdated R-APS messages and prevents the possibility of forming
a closed loop.
• Hold-Off Time – Determines the time period from failure detection to
response. It is used to coordinate between recovery mechanisms (which
mechanism takes place first).
To configure the ERPI timers:
2 Select the ERPI and click Edit. The ERPI Attribute – Edit page opens (Figure
311).
3 In the ERPI WTR field, enter the Wait to Restore (WTR) timer (in minutes).
4 In the ERPI Guard Time field, enter the ERPI guard time (in msec). You must
enter a multiple of 10.
5 In the ERPI Holdoff Time field, enter the ERPI hold-off time (in msec). You
must enter a multiple of 100.
8.1.6 Viewing the ERPI Configuration and Status Parameters

The G.8032 ERPI Attribute page (Figure 305) displays some of the configuration
and status parameters for ERPIs configured in the system.
To display a full list of configuration and status parameters for an ERPI:
2 Select the ERPI and click Edit. The ERPI Attribute – Edit page opens (Figure
311).
◦ Table 59 lists and describes the parameters in the ERPI configuration
section of the ERPI Attribute – Edit page.
◦ Table 60 lists and describes the parameters in the ERPI status section of
the ERPI Attribute – Edit page.
Page 430 of 1094

Table 59: ERPI Configuration Parameters

ERPI ID Read-only. A unique ID that identifies the ERPI.

ERPI Name A descriptive name for the ERPI.
ERPI Type Read-only. The ERPI type.
ERPI Service ID Read-only. The ID of the Ethernet service to which the ERPI
belongs.
Instance ID Read-only. The MSTI to which the Ethernet service is mapped. See
Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP instances (MSTIs).
West ERPI Port (SP) Read-only. The interface to which the west ERPI service point
belongs.
East ERPI Port (SP) Read-only. The interface to which the east ERPI service point
belongs.
Sub Ring Port (SP) Read-only. The interface to which the service point that connects
the Ring with the Sub-Ring belongs.
ERPI Protocol Version Read-only. The ERPI (G.8032) protocol version currently being used
in the unit.
RPL Owner The RPL Owner Node is a node in the ERPI that is responsible for
blocking traffic at one end of the ERPI. See Configuring the RPL
Owner.
Revertive Read-only. Indicates whether the ERPI is currently in revertive
mode.
Virtual Channel VLAN Read-only. The VLAN of the virtual channel. If the value is 0, there
is no virtual channel.
Table 60: ERPI Status Parameters

ERPI State Indicates the current ERPI state. Possible values are:
• Initializing
• Idle
• Pending
• Protecting
• FS (Forced Switch)
• MS (Manual Switch)
MEG Level The Maintenance Entity Group (MEG) level used for R-APS
messages sent in the ERPI.
Last Local State Describes the current local state input to the ERPI state machine.
Last Remote State Indicates the last event received from the other end of the link.
Last HP Request Indicates the last high-priority event.
Last Change Timestamp Indicates the time of the last ring state transition.
Page 431 of 1094

8.1.7 Viewing ERPI State Information

To view information about an ERPI’s state:
2 Select the ERPI and click State. The ERPI Attribute – State page opens.
Figure 312: G.8032 ERPI Attribute – State Page

Table 61 lists and describes the parameters in the ERPI Attribute – State page.
Table 61: ERPI State Parameters

ERPI Port Identifies whether the row is for the West endpoint, the East
endpoint, or a Sub-Ring connection point.
ERPI Port Active State Indicates whether or not the service point is active for traffic
forwarding.
R-APS Channel Forwarding Indicates whether the service point is forwarding R-APS messages.
State
ERPI Data Forwarding State Indicates whether the service point is in unblocked (forwarding)
state.
RPL Blocking State Only relevant if the ERPI to which the service point belongs is the
RPL owner. Indicates whether the service point is in blocked state.
ERPI Port Defect State Indicates whether the service point is in Signal Fail (SF) or Signal Defect
(SD) state.
Note: Support for Signal Defect state is planned for future
release.
Page 432 of 1094

8.1.8 Initiating a Manual or Forced Switch and Clearing the Switch or Initiating
Reversion
You can initiate a manual or forced switch, clear the switch, and initiate reversion,
from the G.8032 ERPI Attribute – State page:
2 Select the ERPI and click State. The ERPI Attribute – State page opens (Figure
312).
3 Select the service point on which you want to perform the operation.
◦ To initiate a forced switch, click Force Switch.
◦ To initiate a manual switch, click Manual Switch.
◦ To clear a forced or manual switch, click Clear. You can also click Clear to
trigger convergence prior to the expiration of the relevant timer.
8.1.9 Blocking or Unblocking R-APS Messages on a Service Point

To enable or disable transmission of R-APS messages on a service point:
2 Select the ERPI and click State. The ERPI Attribute – State page opens (Figure
312).
3 Select the service point on which you want to perform the operation.
◦ To block R-APS message transmission on the service point, click R-APS
Block.
◦ To enable R-APS message transmission on the service point, click R-APS
Unblock.
8.1.10 Viewing ERPI Statistics

To view statistics about an ERPI:
2 Select the ERPI and click Statistics. The ERPI Attribute – Statistics page opens.
Figure 313: G.8032 ERPI Attribute – Statistics Page
Page 433 of 1094

Table 62 lists and describes the statistics shown in the ERPI Attribute – Statistics
page.
Table 62: ERPI Statistics

ERPI Port Identifies whether the row is for the West endpoint, the East
endpoint, or a Sub-Ring connection point.
Transmitted Total R-APS The number of R-APS frames that have been transmitted via the
Frames service point.
Transmitted SF PDU The number of R-APS Signal Fail (SF) frames that have been
transmitted via the service point.
Transmitted NR PDU The number of R-APS No Request (NR) frames that have been
Transmitted RB PDU The number of R-APS RPL Blocked (RB) frames that have been
Transmitted FS PDU The number of R-APS Force Switched (FS) frames that have been
Transmitted MS PDU The number of R-APS Manual Switched (MS) frames that have
been transmitted via the service point.
Transmitted R-APS Events Reserved for future use.
Received R-APS Frames The number of R-APS frames that have been received via the
service point.
Received Invalid R-APS The number of R-APS frames with an invalid format that have been
Frames received via the service point.
Received SF PDU The number of R-APS Signal Fail (SF) frames that have been
received via the service point.
Received NR PDU The number of R-APS No Request (NR) frames that have been
Received RB PDU The number of R-APS RPL Blocked (RB) frames that have been
Received SD PDU The number of R-APS Signal Degrade (SD) frames that have been
Received FS PDU The number of R-APS Forced Switch (FS) frames that have been
Received MS PDU The number of R-APS Manual Switch (MS) frames that have been
Received R-APS Events Reserved for future use.
Page 434 of 1094

8.2 Configuring MSTP

• MSTP Overview
• Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP instances (MSTIs)
• Configuring the MSTP Bridge Parameters
• Configuring the MSTP Port Parameters
8.2.1 MSTP Overview

Note: P2P services are not affected by MSTP, and continue to traverse ports
that are blocked by MSTP.
MSTP cannot be configured on management ports, including

MSTP, as defined in IEEE 802.1q, provides full connectivity for frames assigned to
any given VLAN throughout a bridged LAN consisting of arbitrarily interconnected
bridges.
With MSTP, an independent multiple spanning tree instance (MSTI) is configured
for each group of services, and only one path is made available (unblocked) per
spanning tree instance. This prevents network loops and provides load balancing
capability. It also enables operators to differentiate among Ethernet services by
mapping them to different, specific MSTIs. The maximum number of MSTIs is
configurable, from 2 to 16.
MSTP is an extension of, and is backwards compatible with, Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP).
IP-20F, IP-20G, and IP-20GX support MSTP according to the following IEEE
standards:
• 802.1q
• 802.1ad amendment (Q-in-Q)
• 802.1ah (TE instance)
For a more detailed description of MSTP support in the IP-20C or IP-20V, refer to
the Technical Description for the product you are using.
Page 435 of 1094

8.2.2 Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP instances (MSTIs)

Ethernet services can be mapped to MSTP instances (MSTIs) in the Instances per
Service Mapping section of the Ethernet General Configuration page. All mapping
of Ethernet services to MSTP instances (MSTIs) should be performed before
enabling MSTP.
Note: Ethernet service-to-MSTI mapping is also a prerequisite to configuring
G.8032. See Configuring G.8032.
To map Ethernet services to MSTP instances (MSTIs):
1 Select Ethernet > General Configuration. The Ethernet General Configuration
2 In the Instance per Service Mapping table, select the Service ID of the service
you want to map.
3 Click Edit. The Instance per Service Mapping – Edit page opens.
Figure 314: Instance Per Service Mapping – Edit Page

4 In the Instance ID field, enter a number between 0 and 16, or 4095. A service
mapped to MSTI 4095 is never blocked by any protocol.
5 Click Apply.
By default, all Ethernet services are mapped to MSTI 0, which represents the CIST
(Common Instance Spanning Tree).
Page 436 of 1094

8.2.3 Configuring the MSTP Bridge Parameters

• Enabling MSTP and Configuring the MSTP Bridge General Attributes
• Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge Configuration ID
• Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree
• Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge CIST Parameters
• Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge MSTI Parameters
• Viewing the MSTP VLAN Parameters
Page 437 of 1094

8.2.3.1 Enabling MSTP and Configuring the MSTP Bridge General Attributes
To configure the MSTP bridge general attributes:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > General Attributes. The MSTP
Bridge General Attributes page opens.
Figure 315: MSTP Bridge General Attributes Page

2 In the MSTP Enable field, select True to enable MSTP on the unit. To disable
MSTP, select False.
◦ Enabling MSTP starts the protocol and sets all ports in all MSTP instances
to Blocking state. Convergence upon enabling the protocol generally takes
less than two seconds.
◦ Disabling MSTP stops the MSTP protocol from running and sets all ports in
all MSTP instances to Forwarding state.
3 In the Number of Instances (excluding CIST) field, select the number of
Multiple Spanning Tree instances (MSTIs). Possible values are 1-16. This
number does not include the Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST).
Note: Changing the Number of Instances causes the MSTP stack to reset.
4 In the MSTP BPDU Destination MAC field, select the destination MAC address
of BPDUs generated in the unit. Options are:
◦ Customer – The destination MAC address of BPDUs is 0x0180-C200-0000.
Provider BPDUs are either tunneled or discarded.
◦ Provider – The destination MAC address of BPDUs is 0x0180-C200-0008.
Customer BPDUs are either tunneled or discarded.
Page 438 of 1094

5 In the MSTP SD Handling field, select how MSTP handles Signal Degrade (SD)
failures. Options are:
◦ Ignored – Signal Degrade (SD) failures are ignored in MSTP.
◦ Same as SF – SD failures trigger a topology change.
Note: SD handling is planned for future release.
6 Click Apply.
To reset the MSTP stack, click Reset Protocol.
Page 439 of 1094

8.2.3.2 Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge Configuration ID

To configure the Configuration Name and Revision Level:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > Configuration ID. The MSTP
Bridge Configuration ID page opens.
Figure 316: MSTP Bridge Configuration ID Page

2 Modify the configurable parameters.
3 Click Apply.
Table 63 lists and describes the parameters in the MSTP Bridge Configuration ID
page.
Table 63: MSTP Bridge Configuration ID Parameters

MSTP Configuration ID Read-only. Indicates the format specified in 802.1Q.

Format Selector
MSTP Configuration Name Enter a valid configuration name.
Note: Changing the Configuration Name when MSTP is enabled
causes the MSTP stack to reset.
MSTP Configuration Digest Read-only. Displays the MSTP Configuration Digest.
MSTP Revision Level Enter a valid MSTP revision level.
Note: Changing the Revision Level when MSTP is enabled causes
the MSTP stack to reset.
Page 440 of 1094

8.2.3.3 Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree

To configure the bridge-level spanning tree parameters:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > Spanning Tree. The MSTP
Bridge Spanning Tree page opens.
Figure 317: MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree Page

2 Modify the configurable parameters, described in Table 65.
3 Click Apply.
Table 64 lists and describes the status parameters in the MSTP Bridge Spanning
Tree page.
Page 441 of 1094

Table 64: MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree Status Parameters

STP Time Since Last TC The time that has elapsed (in cs) since the last time the bridge
entity detected a topology change.
STP Number of Topology The total number of topology changes that have been detected by
Changes this bridge since the management entity was last reset or
initialized.
Note: Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur upon
reinitialization of the management system.
STP Designated Root The Bridge ID of the spanning tree root, as determined by MSTP in
this node. This value is used as the Root ID in all configuration
BPDUs originated by this node.
STP Root Cost The cost of the path to the root as seen from this bridge.
STP Root Port The port number of the port that offers the lowest cost path from
this bridge to the external root bridge
STP Max Age The maximum age (in cs) of MSTP information learned from the
network on any port before the information is discarded.
Note: This field displays the value actually being used by the
bridge, in contrast to the STP Bridge Max Age parameter
described below, which is user-configurable and which represents
the value that this and all other bridges use if and when this
bridge becomes the root.
STP Forward Delay The speed at which ports change their spanning state when
moving towards the Forwarding state. This value determines how
long the port stays in Listening state and Learning state. This value
is also used when a topology change has been detected and is
underway for purposes of aging all dynamic entries in the filtering
database.
Note: This field displays the value actually being used by the
bridge, in contrast to the STP Bridge Forward Delay parameter
described below, which is user-configurable and which represents
the value that this and all other bridges use if and when this
bridge becomes the root.
STP Version The STP version the bridge is currently running (MSTP).
Table 65: MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Parameters
Page 442 of 1094

STP Priority Select a value as the writeable portion of the Bridge ID. This value
constitutes the first two octets of the Bridge ID. Possible values are
0-61440, in steps of 4096
STP Hold Time Select a value (in cs) as the interval length during which no more
than two configuration bridge PDUs will be transmitted by this
node. Possible values are 10-100.
STP Bridge Max Age Select a value (in cs) that all bridges will use, when this bridge is
the root, as the maximum age of MSTP information learned from
the network on any port before the information is discarded.
Options are 600-4000 cs.
STP Bridge Forward Delay Select a value (in cs) that all bridges will use, when this bridge is
the root, as the speed at which ports change their spanning state
when moving towards the Forwarding state. This value determines
how long the port stays in Listening state and Learning state. This
value is also used when a topology change has been detected and
is underway for purposes of aging all dynamic entries in the
filtering database. Options are 400-3000 cs.
STP Bridge Hello Time Select the value (in cs) that all bridges will use, when this bridge is
the root, as the Hello Time. The Hello Time determines how often
the switch broadcasts its hello message to other switches, and is
the same for all MSTIs. Options are 100-1000 cs.
Page 443 of 1094

8.2.3.4 Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge CIST Parameters

To configure the maximum hops parameter for the Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CIST) and view CIST status information:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > CIST. The MSTP Bridge CIST
page opens.
Figure 318: MSTP Bridge CIST Page

2 In the CIST Max Hops field, select the value that all bridges will use, when this
bridge is the root, as the maximum number of hops allowed for a BPDU within
a region before it is discarded. Options are 6-40.
3 Click Apply.
Table 66 lists and describes the status parameters in the MSTP Bridge CIST page.
Table 66: MSTP Bridge CIST Status Parameters

CIST Bridge Identifier The Bridge ID of the CIST.

CIST Topology Change in Indicates whether a topology change is currently in progress for
Progress any port that is part of the CIST.
CIST Regional Root ID The Bridge ID of the current CIST regional root.
CIST Path Cost The CIST path cost from the transmitting bridge to the CIST
regional root. If the transmitting bridge is the CIST regional root,
the value of this parameter may be 0.
Page 444 of 1094

8.2.3.5 Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge MSTI Parameters

To view the parameters of each MSTI in the system, and to configure the MSTI
bridge priority for each MSTI:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > MSTI. The MSTP Bridge MSTI
page opens.
Figure 319: MSTP Bridge MSTI Page

2 To view all the bridge parameters of an MSTI and/or configure its bridge
priority, select the MSTI and click Edit.
Figure 320: MSTP Bridge MSTI – Edit Page

3 To view all the bridge parameters of an MSTI and/or configure its bridge
priority, select the MSTI and click Edit.
Page 445 of 1094

4 In the MSTI Bridge Priority field, enter the MSTI writeable portion of the
Bridge ID. Possible values are 0-61440, in steps of 4096.
Table 67 lists and describes the status parameters in the MSTP Bridge MSTI page.
Table 67: MSTP Bridge MSTI Status Parameters

MSTI Instance ID The MSTI ID.

MSTI Bridge Identifier The Bridge ID for the MSTI.
MSTI Designated Root The Bridge ID of the root bridge for the MSTI.
MSTI Root Cost The path cost from the transmitting bridge to the root bridge for
the MSTI.
MSTI Root Port The root port for the MSTI.
MSTI Number of Topology The number of topology changes that the bridge has detected in
Changes the MSTI since the last time the management entity was reset or
initialized.
MSTI Topology Change in Indicates whether a topology change is currently in progress on
Progress any port in the MSTI.
MSTI Time Since Last TC The number of centi-seconds that have elapsed since the last time
the bridge identified a topology change for a port in the MSTI.
Page 446 of 1094

8.2.3.6 Viewing the MSTP VLAN Parameters

Each Ethernet service is mapped to an MSTI. By default, all services (VLAN ID) are
assigned to MSTI 0 (CIST). See Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP instances
(MSTIs).
Note: A service mapped to MSTI 4095 is never blocked by any protocol.
To view the VLAN ID to MSTI mapping table:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > MSTP > Bridge > VLAN. The MSTP Bridge VLAN
page opens.
Figure 321: MSTP Bridge VLAN Page
Page 447 of 1094

8.2.4 Configuring the MSTP Port Parameters

• Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Port Spanning Tree
• Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Port CIST Parameters
• Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Port MSTI Parameters
• Viewing and Resetting the BPDU Counters
Page 448 of 1094

8.2.4.1 Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Port Spanning Tree

To view the port-level spanning tree parameters and configure the STP port
priority:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > MSTP > Port > Spanning Tree. The MSTP Port
Spanning Tree page opens.
Figure 322: MSTP Port Spanning Tree Page (IP-20C)

2 Select an interface and click Edit. The MSTP Port Spanning Tree – Edit page
opens.
Figure 323: MSTP Port Spanning Tree – Edit Page

3 In the STP Port Priority field, select the CIST port priority of the interface. You
can select values from 0-240, in multiples of 16.
Table 68 lists and describes the status parameters in the MSTP Port Spanning Tree
page.
Page 449 of 1094

Table 68: MSTP Port Spanning Tree Status Parameters

STP Interface Location The slot number and port number of the port.
STP Port State The port's current state, as defined by application of STP. The port's
state controls the action the port takes upon receipt of a frame.
Possible values are:
• Forwarding – The port sends and receives traffic normally.
• Blocking – The port does not send or receive traffic, but does
receive BPDUs.
• Learning – The port receives traffic but does not forward the
traffic. The port learns the source MAC addresses of incoming
frames.
• Listening – The port monitors BPDUs, but does not forward
traffic and does not learn the source MAC addresses of
incoming frames.
• Disabled – The port is disabled (not by MSTP).
STP Port Designated The CIST Path Cost of the segment connected to this port. This value is
Cost compared to the root path cost in received BPDUs.
STP Port Designated The CIST Bridge ID of the bridge that this port considers to be the
Bridge designated bridge for this port's segment.
Page 450 of 1094

8.2.4.2 Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Port CIST Parameters

To view and configure CIST port parameters:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > MSTP > Port > CIST. The MSTP Port CIST page
opens.
Figure 324: MSTP Port CIST Page (IP-20C)

2 Select an interface and click Edit. The MSTP Port CIST – Edit page opens.
Figure 325: MSTP Port CIST – Edit Page
Page 451 of 1094

3 In the CIST Port Admin Path Cost field, enter an assigned value for the
contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the spanning tree
root.
Note: Changing the value of this parameter is considered to be a topology
change by the MSTP mechanism.
4 In the CIST Port Edge Admin field, select the port's administrative edge port
parameter, for the CIST.
5 In the CIST MAC enabled field, select the port's MAC Enabled parameter. A
value of True indicates that administratively, the MAC is set as if it were
connected to a point-to-point LAN. Options are:
◦ Force True – The MAC is treated as if it is connected to a point-to-point
LAN, regardless of any indications to the contrary that are generated by
the MAC entity.
◦ Force False –The MAC is treated as if it is connected to a non-point-to-
point LAN, regardless of any indications to the contrary that are generated
by the MAC entity.
◦ Automatic – The MAC Enabled parameter is set to True if the MAC is
connected to a point-to-point or full-duplex LAN. The MAC Enabled
parameter is set to False if the MAC is connected to a non-point-to-point
and half-duplex LAN.
Table 69 lists and describes the status parameters in the MSTP Port Spanning Tree
page.
Table 69: MSTP Port CIST Status Parameters

CIST Port Interface The slot number and port number of the port.
Location
CIST Port Designated The CIST Regional Root ID component of the port's Port Priority vector
Root for the CIST
CIST Port Edge Oper Indicates whether or not the port is operating as an Edge port. Possible
State values are:
• True – The port is operating as an Edge port, which means it
does not process the BPDUs that it receives.
• False – The port is operating as a non-Edge port, which means it
processes the BPDUs that it receives.
If CIST Port Edge Admin is set to True, the system automatically
determines its operational Edge port state.
CIST Port Role The port's current role in the CIST.
Transient port roles may be:
receive BPDUs.
Page 452 of 1094

frames.
• Listening – The port monitors BPDUs, but does not forward
traffic and does not learn the source MAC addresses of
incoming frames.
Final port roles may be:
• Disabled – The port is in Operational - Down state and is not
included in the MSTP calculation.
• Designated – The port is in Operational - Up state and has been
designated to forward traffic.
• Root – The port is forwarding traffic towards the root bridge.
• Alternate – The port is not forwarding traffic (blocked) but can
become a Designated port after MSTP calculation.
CIST Port CIST Regional The Bridge ID of the current CIST Regional Root.
Route ID
CIST Port CIST Path Cost The CIST path cost from the transmitting bridge to the CIST regional
root. If the transmitting bridge is the CIST regional root, the value of this
parameter will be 0.
CIST Port Hello Time The port's Hello Time timer parameter value, for the CIST (in cs).
CIST Port Protocol The current value of the mcheck variable for the port.
Migration Note: Migration support is planned for future release.
CIST Port MAC Oper The current state of the port's MAC operational parameter. True
State indicates the MAC is operational.
CIST Port Uptime The number of seconds that have elapsed since the port was last reset
or initialized.
Page 453 of 1094

8.2.4.3 Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Port MSTI Parameters

To view and configure MSTI port parameters:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > MSTP > Port > MSTI. The MSTP Port MSTI page
opens.
Figure 326: MSTP Port MSTI Page
Page 454 of 1094

2 To view the parameters for a specific MSTI-port combination in a separate

window and modify several of the parameters, select the row with the MSTI-
port combination you want to view and/or modify and click Edit. The MSTP
Port MSTI – Edit page opens.
Figure 327: MSTP Port MSTI – Edit Page

3 In the MSTI Port Priority field, select the port's Priority parameter value for
the MSTI, i.e., the priority field for the Port ID for the MSTI. You can select
values from 0-240, in multiples of 16.
Note: Changing the value of this parameter is considered to be a topology
change by the MSTP mechanism.
4 In the MSTI Port Path Cost field, select the port's Path Cost parameter value
for the MSTI.
Note: Changing the value of this parameter may cause re-initialization of the
MSTI for which the parameter is changed. No other MSTI is affected.
Table 70 lists and describes the status parameters in the MSTP MSTI Tree page.
Table 70: MSTP Port MSTI Status Parameters

MSTI Port MSTI ID The MSTI ID.

MSTI Port Interface The slot number and port number of the port.
Location
MSTI Port State The port's current state for the MSTI. Possible values are:
Page 455 of 1094

• Forwarding – The port sends and receives traffic normally.
receive BPDUs.
frames.
• Listening – The port monitors BPDUs, but does not forward traffic
and does not learn the source MAC addresses of incoming
frames.
• Disabled – The port is disabled (not by MSTP).
MSTI Port Designated The Regional Root ID component of the port's Port Priority vector for the
Root MSTI.
MSTI Port Designated The Internal Root Path Cost component of the port's MSTI port priority
Cost vector, for the MSTI.
MSTI Port Designated The Designated Bridge ID component of the port's MSTI port priority
Bridge vector.
MSTI Port Role The port's current role in the MSTI.
Transient port roles may be:
receive BPDUs.
frames.
• Listening – The port monitors BPDUs, but does not forward traffic
and does not learn the source MAC addresses of incoming
frames.
Final port roles may be:
• Disabled – The port is in Operational - Down state and is not
included in the MSTP calculation.
• Designated – The port is in Operational - Up state and has been
designated to forward traffic.
• Root – The port is forwarding traffic towards the root bridge.
• Alternate – The port is not forwarding traffic (blocked) but can
become a Designated port after MSTP calculation.
• Master – The port is forwarding traffic towards the CIST root
bridge.
MSTI Port Uptime The port's uptime parameter value for the MSTI. This is the number of
seconds that have elapsed since the port was last reset or initialized.
Page 456 of 1094

8.2.4.4 Viewing and Resetting the BPDU Counters

To view and reset the BPDU counters:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > MSTP > Port > BPDU Counters. The MSTP Port
BPDU Counters page opens.
Figure 328: MSTP Port BDPU Counters Page

◦ To reset the counters, click Reset Counters.
◦ To display the counters for a specific interface in a separate page, select
the interface and click View.
Table 71 describes the available MSTP BPDU counters.
Table 71: MSTP BPDU Counters
Interface Location The location of the port.
Received TCN The number of Topology Change Notifications (TCNs) received since the last counter
reset.
Received Configuration BPDU The number of configuration BPDUs received since the last counter reset.
Received RST BPDU The number of Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) BPDUs received since the last counter reset.
Received MST BPDU The number of Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) BPDUs received since the last counter
reset.
Transmitted TCN BPDU The number of Topology Change Notifications (TCNs) transmitted since the last
counter reset.
Transmitted Configuration The number of configuration BPDUs transmitted since the last counter reset.
BPDU
Transmitted RST BPDU The number of Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) BPDUs transmitted since the last counter
reset.
Transmitted MST BPDU The number of Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) BPDUs transmitted since the last counter
reset.
Page 457 of 1094

8.3 Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN)

• Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview
• Adding an ABN entity
• Editing an ABN Entity
• Deleting an ABN Entity
• Viewing the Statistics for an ABN Entity
8.3.1 Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview

Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN), also known as Ethernet Operation and
Maintenance (EOAM), enables third party applications to learn about bandwidth
changes in a radio link when ACM is active. Once ABN is enabled, the radio unit
reports bandwidth information to upstream third-party switches.
The ABN entity creates a logical relationship between a radio interface or a logical
group of radio interfaces, called the Monitored Interface, and an Ethernet
interface or a logical group of Ethernet interface, called the Control Interface.
When bandwidth degrades from the nominal value in the Monitored Interface,
messages relaying the actual bandwidth values are periodically sent over the
Control Interface. A termination message is sent once the bandwidth returns to its
nominal level.
8.3.2 Adding an ABN entity

To add an ABN entity:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > Bandwidth Notification. The Bandwidth
Figure 329: Bandwidth Notification Page
Page 458 of 1094

2 Click Add. The Bandwidth Notification - Add page opens.

3 In the Name field, enter a name for the ABN entity.
4 In the Protocol Type field, select VSM ABN.
5 In the Admin field, select Up to enable ABN monitoring or Down to disable
ABN monitoring.
6 In the Monitored Interface field, select the Monitored Interface. This is the
interface which is constantly monitored for its bandwidth value.
7 In the Control Interface field, select the Control Interface. This is the interface
to which messages are transmitted when bandwidth in the monitored
interface degrades below the nominal value.
8 In the MEL field, select the Maintenance Level in the messages.
9 In the Tx VLAN field, specify the VLAN on which messages are transmitted.
Options are:
◦ Untagged.
◦ 1 – 4090.
10 In the Tx Period field, specify how often messages are transmitted when
bandwidth is below the nominal value. Options are:
◦ 4 – One second.
◦ 5 – Ten seconds.
◦ 6 – One minute.
11 In the Holdoff Time field, specify the amount of time the system waits when
bandwidth degradation occurs, before transmitting a message. If the
bandwidth is below the nominal value when the holdoff period ends, the
system starts transmitting messages.
Page 459 of 1094

12 In the Monitoring Interval field, select the interval for which a weighted
average of the bandwidth readings is calculated.
Table 72 describes the status (read-only) fields in the ABN Configuration and
Status table.
Table 72: ABN Status Parameters
Nominal BW The nominal bandwidth of the link.
Current BW The weighted average of the bandwidth readings taken during the last Monitoring Interval.
Version The ABN version used.
8.3.3 Editing an ABN Entity

To edit an ABN entity:
Notification page opens (Figure 329).
2 Select the ABN entity in the Bandwidth Notification page.
3 Click Edit. The Bandwidth Notification - Edit page opens.
The Edit page is similar to the Bandwidth Notification – Add page (Figure 330).
However, the Control interface and Monitored interface parameters are
read-only, and additional read-only parameters display the Nominal BW,
the Current BW, and the Version.
4 Edit the ABN entity attributes, as described in Adding an ABN entity.
8.3.4 Deleting an ABN Entity

To delete an ABN entity:
3 Click Delete. The ABN entity is removed.
8.3.5 Viewing the Statistics for an ABN Entity

To view the statistics for an ABN entity:
3 Click Statistics. The Bandwidth Notification - Statistics page opens.
Page 460 of 1094

Figure 331: Bandwidth Notification - Statistics Page (ABN)

Table 73 describes the ABN entity statistics.
Table 73: ABN Entity Statistics Parameters

Name The name of the ABN entity.

Tx Messages Counter The number of bandwidth messages transmitted since the counter
was last reset.
Holdoff State The Holdoff state of the monitored link. Options are:
• Off – Holdoff time measurement has not been started.
• Counting – Holdoff time measurement has started but the
timeout has not elapsed yet.
• On – Holdoff measurement time has ended and the current
bandwidth is still below the nominal value.
Holdoff Start Time (mSec) The Holdoff start time for the last event.
Last Tx message The last transmitted bandwidth message, in hexadecimal notation.
Page 461 of 1094

8.4 Configuring Ethernet Bandwidth Notification (ETH-BN)

• ETH-BN Overview
• Adding an ETH-BN entity
• Editing an ETH-BN Entity
• Deleting an ETH-BN Entity
• Viewing the Statistics for an ETH-BN Entity
8.4.1 ETH-BN Overview

Ethernet Bandwidth Notification (ETH-BN) is defined by the Y.1731 OAM standard.
The purpose of ETH-BN is to inform the L2 or L3 customer switch of the capacity
of the radio link in transmit direction. This enables the switch to respond to
fluctuations in the radio link by, for example, reconfiguring the shaper on the
egress port facing the radio link or rerouting traffic to other egress ports.
Once ETH-BN is enabled, the radio unit reports bandwidth information to
upstream third-party switches. The ETH-BN entity creates a logical relationship
between a radio interface, called the Monitored Interface, and an Ethernet
interface, called the Control Interface. When bandwidth degrades from the
nominal value in the Monitored Interface, messages relaying the actual
bandwidth values (BNM frames) are periodically sent over the Control Interface.
Once the bandwidth returns to its nominal level, BNM messages are no longer
sent. Optionally, the device can be configured to send BNM frames even when
bandwidth is at its nominal level.
The Monitored Interface can be a single radio interface, a Multi-Carrier ABC
group, a Multiband group, or a radio LAG. To be used as a Monitored Interface,
the LAG must consist of radio interfaces only.
The Control Interface can be a single Ethernet interface or an Ethernet LAG. To be
used as a Control Interface, the LAG must consist of Ethernet interfaces only.
Note: ETH-BN cannot be used with HSB protection groups.
When the Control Interface is a LAG, EBN messages are only sent to
the first active member of the LAG.
When used with IP-20C, IP-20S, and IP-20C-HP unit redundancy, the
reported bandwidth may be inaccurate when switchover is in effect.
The same radio interface can be configured as a Monitored Interface for multiple
EBN instances. However, an Ethernet interface can only be configured as a Control
Interface for a single EBN instance.
Page 462 of 1094

8.4.2 Adding an ETH-BN entity

To add an ETH-BN entity:
Figure 332: Bandwidth Notification Page

2 Click Add. The Bandwidth Notification - Add page opens.

3 In the Name field, enter a name for the ETH-BN entity.
4 In the Protocol Type field, select Ethernet BNM.
5 In the Admin field, select Up to enable ETH-BN monitoring or Down to disable
ETH-BN monitoring.
6 In the Monitored Interface field, select the Monitored Interface. This is the
interface which is constantly monitored for its bandwidth value. It can be an
individual radio carrier or a Multi-Carrier ABC group.
Page 463 of 1094

7 In the Control Interface field, select the Control Interface. This is the interface
to which messages are transmitted when bandwidth in the monitored
interface degrades below the nominal value. It can be an individual Ethernet
interface or a LAG group.
8 In the MEL field, select the CFM Maintenance Level in the messages (0-7).
Note: If CFM MEPs are being used, the MEL must be set to a value greater
than the MEG level of the MEP. Otherwise, the BNM frames will be
dropped.
If CFM MEPs are not being used, the MEL for ETH-BN must be set to a
value greater than 0. Otherwise, the BNM frames will be dropped.
9 In the Tx VLAN field, specify the VLAN on which messages are transmitted.
Options are:
◦ Untagged.
◦ 1 – 4090.
Note: The CoS of the VLAN is automatically set to 7.
10 In the Is Always Sent field, specify whether periodic BNM frames should be
sent even when there is no bandwidth degradation in the monitored
interface:
◦ True – BNM frames are always sent, even when the bandwidth is at its
nominal value.
◦ False – BNM frames are only sent when the current bandwidth is lower
than the nominal bandwidth (default value).
11 In the Tx Period field, specify how often messages are transmitted when Is
Always Sent is set to True or, if not, when bandwidth is below the nominal
value. Options are:
◦ One second
◦ Ten seconds (default)
◦ Sixty seconds
12 In the Holdoff Time field, specify the amount of time (in seconds) the system
waits when bandwidth degradation occurs, before transmitting a message. If
the bandwidth is below the nominal value when the holdoff period ends, the
system starts transmitting messages. Options are 0-10. The default value is 10.
Note: If the bandwidth fluctuates before the Holdoff Time expires, and is
lower than the nominal bandwidth when the Holdoff Time expires, the
first BNM frame sent when the timer expires gives the lowest
bandwidth that was recorded while the timer was running.
Subsequent BNM frames are sent with the actual current bandwidth.
Table 74 describes the status (read-only) fields in the ABN Configuration and
Status table.
Page 464 of 1094

Table 74: ETH-BN Status Parameters
Nominal BW The maximum radio TX bitrate achievable with the current radio configuration.
Current BW The current radio TX bitrate.
8.4.3 Editing an ETH-BN Entity

To edit an ETH-BN entity:
2 Select the ETH-BN entity in the Bandwidth Notification page.
3 Click Edit. The Bandwidth Notification - Edit page opens.
The Edit page is similar to the Bandwidth Notification – Add page (Figure 333).
However, the Control interface and Monitored interface parameters are
read-only, and additional read-only parameters display the Nominal BW, and
the Current BW.
4 Edit the ETH-BN attributes, as described in Adding an ETH-BN entity.
8.4.4 Deleting an ETH-BN Entity

To delete an ETH-BN entity:
3 Click Delete. The ETH-BN entity is removed.
8.4.5 Viewing the Statistics for an ETH-BN Entity

To view the statistics for an ETH-BN entity:
3 Click Statistics. The Bandwidth Notification - Statistics page opens.
Figure 334: Bandwidth Notification - Statistics Page (ETH-BN)
Page 465 of 1094

Table 75 describes the ETH-BN entity statistics.
Table 75: ETH-BN Entity Statistics Parameters

Name The name of the ETH-BN entity.

Protocol Type Ethernet BNM.
Tx Messages Counter The number of bandwidth messages transmitted since the counter
was last reset.
Holdoff State The Holdoff state of the monitored link. Options are:
• Off – Holdoff time measurement has not been started.
• Counting – Holdoff time measurement has started but the
timeout has not elapsed yet.
• On – Holdoff measurement time has ended and the current
bandwidth is still below the nominal value.
Page 466 of 1094

8.5 Configuring LLDP

• LLDP Overview
• Displaying Peer Status
• Configuring the General LLDP Parameters
• Configuring the LLDP Port Parameters
• Displaying the Unit’s Management Parameters
• Displaying Peer Unit’s Management Parameters
• Displaying the Local Unit’s Parameters
• Displaying LLDP Statistics
8.5.1 LLDP Overview

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a vendor-neutral layer 2 protocol that can
be used by a network element attached to a specific LAN segment to advertise its
identity and capabilities and to receive identity and capacity information from
physically adjacent layer 2 peers. LLDP is a part of the IEEE 802.1AB – 2005
standard that enables automatic network connectivity discovery by means of a
port identity information exchange between each port and its peer. Each port
periodically sends and also expects to receive frames called Link Layer Discovery
Protocol Data Units (LLDPDU). LLDPDUs contain information in TLV format about
port identity, such as MAC address and IP address.
LLDP is used to send notifications to the NMS, based on data of the local unit and
data gathered from peer systems. These notifications enable the NMS to build an
accurate network topology.
8.5.2 Displaying Peer Status

To display a summary of the important LLDP management information regarding
the unit's nearest neighbor (peer):
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Remote Management. The LLDP Remote
Management page opens.
Page 467 of 1094

Figure 335: LLDP Remote System Management Page

Table 76 describes the LLDP remote system management parameters. These
parameters are read-only.
Table 76: LLDP Remote System Management Parameters

Local Interface Location The location of the local interface.

Management Address The octet string used to identify the management address
component associated with the remote system.
Address Sub Type The type of management address identifier encoding used in the
associated LLDP Agent Remote Management Address.
Time Mark The time the entry was created.
8.5.3 Configuring the General LLDP Parameters

This section explains how to define the general LLDP parameters for the unit. For
instructions on defining port-specific parameters, see Configuring the LLDP Port
Parameters.
Note: The management IP address advertised by the local element depends
on the IP protocol (IPv4 or IPv6) configured for the unit. See Defining
the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications.
To display and configure the general LLDP parameters for the unit:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Parameters.
The LLDP Configuration Parameters page opens.
Page 468 of 1094

Figure 336: LLDP Configuration Parameters Page

2 Modify the configurable parameters, described in Table 78.
3 Click Apply.
Table 77 lists and describes the status parameters in the LLDP Configuration
Parameters page.
Table 77: LLDP Read-Only Configuration Parameters

Max TX Credit Displays the maximum number of consecutive LLDPDUs that can be
transmitted at any one time. In this release, the Max TX Credit is set at 5.
Fast TX Interval Displays, in seconds, the interval at which LLDP frames are transmitted
(Seconds) during fast transmission periods, such as when the unit detects a new
peer. In this release, the Fast TX Interval is set at 1.
Fast TX The initial value used to initialize the variable which determines the
number of transmissions that are made during fast transmission periods.
In this release, the Fast TX No. is set at 4.
Reinit Delay Defines the minimum time, in seconds, the system waits after the LLDP
(Seconds) Admin status becomes Disabled until it will process a request to reinitialize
LLDP. For instructions on disabling or enabling LLDP on a port, see
Configuring the LLDP Port Parameters.
In this release, the Reinit Delay is set at 2.
Page 469 of 1094

Table 78: LLDP Configurable Configuration Parameters

TX Interval (Seconds) Defines the interval, in seconds, at which LLDP frames are
transmitted. You can select a value from 5 to 32768. The default
value is 30.
Notification Interval (Seconds) Defines the interval, in seconds, between transmission of LLDP
notifications during normal transmission periods. You can select
a value from 5 to 3600. The default value is 10.
Hold Multiplier Defines the time-to-live (TTL) multiplier. The TTL determines the
length of time LLDP frames are retained by the receiving device.
The TTL is determined by multiplying the TX Interval by the Hold
Multiplier.
You can select a value from 2 to 10. The default value is 4.
8.5.4 Configuring the LLDP Port Parameters

To enable LLDP per port and determine how LLDP operates and which TLVs are
sent for each port:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Port
Configuration. The LLDP Port Configuration page opens.
Figure 337: LLDP Port Configuration Page

2 Select an interface and click Edit. The LLDP Port Configuration - Edit page opens.
Page 470 of 1094

Figure 338: LLDP Port Configuration - Edit Page

3 In the Admin field, select from the following options to define how the LLDP
protocol operates for this port:
◦ TX Only – LLDP agent transmits LLDP frames on this port but does not
update information about its peer.
◦ RX Only – LLDP agent receives but does not transmit LLDP frames on this
port.
◦ TX and RX – LLDP agent transmits and receives LLDP frames on this port
(default value).
◦ Disabled – LLDP agent does not transmit or receive LLDP frames on this
port.
4 In the Notification Enable field, select from the following options to define, on
a per agent basis, whether or not notifications from the agent to the NMS are
enabled:
◦ True – The agent sends a Topology Change trap to the NMS whenever the
system information received from the peer changes.
◦ False – Notifications to the NMS are disabled (default value).
Table 79 lists and describes the status parameters in the LLDP Port Configuration page.
Table 79: LLDP Port Configuration Status Parameters

Interface Location Identifies the port.

Destination Address The destination address of the LLDP agent associated with this port.
TLV TX Indicates which of the unit's capabilities is transmitted by the LLDP agent
for the port:
• PortDesc – The LLDP agent transmits Port Description TLVs.
• SysName – The LLDP agent transmits System Name TLVs.
• SysDesc – The LLDP agent transmits System Description TLVs.
• SysCap – The LLDP agent transmits System Capabilities TLVs.
Page 471 of 1094

8.5.5 Displaying the Unit’s Management Parameters

To display the unit's destination LLDP MAC address:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Destination
Address. The LLDP Destination Address Table page opens.
Figure 339: LLDP Destination Address Table Page

To displays the MAC address associated with the unit for purposes of LLDP
transmissions:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration >
Management TLV. The LLDP Management TLV Configuration page opens.
Page 472 of 1094

Figure 340: LLDP Management TLV Configuration Page

Table 80 lists and describes the status parameters in the LLDP Management TLV
Configuration page.
Table 80: LLDP Management TLV Parameters


Destination Address Defines the MAC address associated with the port for purposes of
LLDP transmissions.
Management Address The unit's IP address.
Address Subtype Defines the type of the management address identifier encoding
used for the Management Address.
Tx Enable Indicates whether the unit's Management Address is transmitted
with LLDPDUs. In this release, the Management Address is always
sent.
Page 473 of 1094

8.5.6 Displaying Peer Unit’s Management Parameters

To display LLDP management information about the unit's nearest neighbor
(peer):
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Remote System >
Management. The LLDP Remote System Management page opens.
Figure 341: LLDP Remote System Management Page

Table 81 describes the LLDP remote system management parameters. These
Table 81: LLDP Remote System Management Parameters


Management Address The octet string used to identify the management address component
associated with the remote system.
Address Sub Type The type of management address identifier encoding used in the
associated LLDP Agent Remote Management Address.
Destination Address The peer LLDP agent's destination MAC Address.
Remote ID An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify a
particular connection instance, unique only for the indicated remote
system.
Page 474 of 1094

To display unit parameter information received via LLDP from the unit's nearest
neighbor (peer):
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Remote System > Remote
Table. The LLDP Remote System Table page opens.
Figure 342: LLDP Remote System Table Page

Table 82 describes the parameters in the LLDP Remote System Table page. These
Table 82: LLDP Remote System Table Parameters


Remote ID An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify a
particular connection instance, unique only for the indicated peer.
Remote Chassis ID An octet string used to identify the peer's hardware unit.
Chassis ID Subtype The type of encoding used to identify the peer's hardware unit.
Remote Port An octet string used to identify the port component associated with
the remote system.
Port Sub type The type of port identifier encoding used in the peer's Port ID.
Page 475 of 1094

8.5.7 Displaying the Local Unit’s Parameters

To display the unit parameters, as transmitted by the LLDP agents:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Local System > Parameters.
The LLDP Local System Parameters page opens.
Figure 343: LLDP Local System Parameters Page

Table 83 describes the parameters in the LLDP Local System Parameters page.
These parameters are read-only.
Table 83: LLDP Local System Parameters

System Name The system name included in TLVs transmitted by the LLDP agent, as
defined in the Name field of the Unit Parameters page. See Configuring
Unit Parameters.
System Description The system description included in TLVs transmitted by the LLDP agent, as
defined in the Description field of the Unit Parameters page. See
Chassis ID The MAC Address of the local unit.
Chassis ID SubType The type of encoding used to identify the local unit. In this release, this
parameter is always set to MAC Address.
Page 476 of 1094

Capabilities A bitmap value used to identify which system capabilities are supported
Supported on the local system, as included in TLVs transmitted by the LLDP agent.
The bitmap is defined by the following parameters:
0 – other
1 – repeater
2 – bridge
3 – wlanAccessPoint
4 – router
5 – telephone
6 – docsisCableDevice
7 – stationOnly
8 – cVLANComponent
9 – sVLANComponent
10 – twoPortMACRelay
Capabilities Enabled A bitmap value used to identify which system capabilities are enabled on
the local system, as included in TLVs transmitted by the LLDP agent.
The bitmap is defined by the following parameters:
0 – other
1 – repeater
2 – bridge
3 – wlanAccessPoint
4 – router
5 – telephone
6 – docsisCableDevice
7 – stationOnly
8 – cVLANComponent
9 – sVLANComponent
10 – twoPortMACRelay
Page 477 of 1094

To display the unit’s port parameters, as transmitted by the LLDP agents:

1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Local System > Port. The
LLDP Local System Port page opens.
Figure 344: LLDP Local System Port Page

Table 84 describes the parameters in the LLDP Local System Port page. These
Table 84: LLDP Local System Port Parameters


Port ID The port's MAC address.
Port Sub Type The type of encoding used to identify the port in LLDP transmissions. In
this release, this parameter is always set to MAC Address.
Port Description A description of the port.
Page 478 of 1094

To display the unit’s management parameters, as transmitted by the LLDP agents:

1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Local System >
Management. The LLDP Local System Management page opens.
Figure 345: LLDP Local System Management Page

2 To display all the parameters, select a row and click View.
Figure 346: LLDP Local System Management – View Page

Table 85 describes the parameters in the LLDP Local System Management page.
These parameters are read-only.
Page 479 of 1094

Table 85: LLDP Local System Management Parameters

Management Address The local unit's IP address.

Address Sub Type The format of the local unit's IP Address.
Address Length Reserved for future use.
Address Interface ID Reserved for future use.
Address Interface Sub Type Reserved for future use.
Address OID Reserved for future use.
8.5.8 Displaying LLDP Statistics

To display statistics about changes reported via LLDP by the remote unit:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > General. The LLDP
Statistic page opens.
Figure 347: LLDP Statistic Page

Table 86 describes the statistics in the LLDP Statistic page.
Page 480 of 1094

Table 86: LLDP Statistics

Last Change Time The time of the most recent change in the remote unit, as reported via
LLDP.
Inserts The number of times the information from the remote system has
changed.
Deletes The number of times the information from the remote system has
been deleted.
Drops Reserved for future use.
Ageouts The number of times the information from the remote system has
been deleted from the local unit's database because the information's
TTL has expired.
The RX Ageouts counter in the Port RX page is similar to this counter,
but is for specific ports rather than the entire unit.
To display statistics about LLDP transmissions and transmission errors:

1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > Port TX. The LLDP
Port TX Statistic page opens.
Figure 348: LLDP Port TX Statistics Page

Table 87 describes the statistics in the LLDP Port TX Statistic page.
Page 481 of 1094

Table 87: LLDP Port TX Statistics

Interface Location The index value used to identify the port in LLDP transmissions.
Destination Address The LLDP MAC address associated with this entry.
Total Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted by the LLDP agent on this port
to the destination MAC address.
Errored Length Frames The number of LLDPDU Length Errors recorded for this port and
destination MAC address.
If the set of TLVs that is selected in the LLDP local system MIB by
network management would result in an LLDPDU that violates LLDPDU
length restrictions, then the No. of Length Error statistic is incremented
by 1, and an LLDPDU is sent containing the mandatory TLVs plus as many
of the optional TLVs in the set as will fit in the remaining LLDPDU length.
To display statistics about LLDP frames received by the unit:

1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > Port RX. The LLDP
Port TX Statistic page opens.
Figure 349: LLDP Port RX Statistics Page

Table 88 describes the statistics in the LLDP Port TX Statistic page.
Table 88: LLDP Port RX Statistics

Interface Location The index value used to identify the port in LLDP transmissions.
Destination Address The LLDP MAC address associated with this entry.
Page 482 of 1094

Total Discarded The number of LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on this port, and
then discarded for any reason. This counter can provide an indication
that LLDP header formatting problems may exist with the local LLDP
agent in the sending system or that LLDPDU validation problems may
exist with the local LLDP agent in the receiving system.
Invalid Frames The number of invalid LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on this
port while the agent is enabled.
Valid Frames The number of valid LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on this
port.
Discarded TLVs The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on
this port.
Unrecognized TLVs The number of LLDP TLVs received on the given port that are not
recognized by LLDP agent.
Ageouts The number of age-outs that occurred on the port. An age-out is the
number of times the complete set of information advertised by the
remote system has been deleted from the unit's database because the
information timeliness interval has expired.
This counter is similar to the LLDP No. of Ageouts counter in the LLDP
Statistic page, except that it is per port rather than for the entire unit.
This counter is set to zero during agent initialization. This counter is
incremented only once when the complete set of information is
invalidated (aged out) from all related tables on a particular port. Partial
ageing is not allowed.
Page 483 of 1094

9. Synchronization
• Configuring SyncE Regenerator
• Configuring the Sync Source
• Configuring the Outgoing Clock and SSM Messages
• Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock
9.1 Configuring SyncE Regenerator

Note: For IP-20V and IP-20E R2H ESP, SyncE Regenerator is planned for
future release.
In SyncE PRC pipe regenerator mode, frequency is transported between two
interfaces through the radio link.
With the system acting as a simple link, no distribution mechanism is necessary,
resulting in improved frequency distribution performance with PRC quality and a
simplified configuration.
Notes: SyncE Regenerator currently supports only a single pipe configuration.
It cannot be used together with 1588 Transparent Clock.
To add a pipe configuration:
1 Set the Sync mode to Pipe. You must do this via the CLI. Enter the following
root> platform sync mode set pipe
Note: By default, the Sync mode is set to Automatic. To display the current
Sync mode, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform sync mode show

2 In the Web EMS, select Sync > SyncE Regenerator. The SyncE Regenerator
page opens.
Figure 350: SyncE Regenerator Page
Page 484 of 1094

3 Click Add underneath the Pipe Configurations Table. The Pipe Configuration -
Add window opens.
Figure 351: Pipe Configurations - Add Page

4 Select a Pipe ID.
5 Select one of the available interfaces for each Sync Interface.
Note: One of the Sync Interfaces must be a Radio interface and the other
must be an Ethernet interface. If the two interfaces are the same type,
the operation will fail.
Only one radio port is available for IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V units.
6 Click Apply.
Page 485 of 1094

9.2 Configuring the Sync Source

Note: To configure a sync source on which the sync source Quality
parameter must be set according to ANSI specifications. You must
change the ETSI/ANSI mode to ANSI before configuring the sync
source. See Changing the ETSI/ANSI Mode (CLI).
The frequency signals can be taken by the system from Ethernet and radio
interfaces.
The reference frequency may also be conveyed to external equipment through
different interfaces. For instructions how to configure the outgoing clock, see
Configuring the Outgoing Clock and SSM Messages.
Frequency is distributed by configuring the following parameters in each node:
• System Synchronization Sources – These are the interfaces from which the
frequency is taken and distributed to other interfaces. Up to 16 sources can
be configured in each node. For each interface, you must configure:
◦ Priority (1-16) – No two synchronization sources can have the same
priority.
◦ Quality – The quality level applied to the selected synchronization source.
This enables the system to select the source with the highest quality as the
current synchronization source.
• Each unit determines the current active clock reference source interface:
◦ The interface with the highest available quality is selected.
◦ From among interfaces with identical quality, the interface with the
highest priority is selected.
When configuring the Sync source, the Sync mode must be set to its default
setting of automatic. To display the current Sync mode, enter the following CLI
If the Sync mode is set to pipe, you must set it to automatic by entering the
following CLI command in root view:
root> platform sync mode set automatic
When configuring an Ethernet interface as a Sync source, the Media Type of the
interface must be RJ45 or SFP, not Auto-Type. To view and configure the Media
Type of an Ethernet interface, see Configuring Ethernet Interfaces.
Page 486 of 1094

9.2.1 Viewing the Sync Source Status

To view the current sync source and its quality:
1 Select Sync > Sync Source. The Sync Source page opens.
Figure 352: Sync Source Page

Table 89 lists and defines the sync source status parameters.
Table 89: Sync Source Parameters

System Reference The quality of the current synchronization source interface.

Quality
Current Active Sync The currently active system synchronization source interface.
Source
Sync Clock Unit The status of the unit’s Sync E mechanism.
Status
Sync Interface Displays the interface that is configured as a synchronization source.
Sync Interface Displays the quality level assigned to this synchronization source. This
Quality enables the system to select the source with the highest quality as the
If the Sync Interface Quality is set to Automatic, the quality is determined
by the received SSMs. If no valid SSM messages are received or in case of
interface failure (such as LOS, LOC, LOF), the quality becomes "Failure."
SSM must be enabled on the remote interface in order for the interface to
receive SSM messages. For instructions how to enable SSM, see
Sync Interface Displays the priority assigned to this synchronization source.
Priority
Sync Interface Displays the current actual synchronization quality of the interface.
Quality Status
Page 487 of 1094

9.2.2 Adding a Sync Source

To add a synchronization source:
1 In the Sync Source page (Figure 352), click Add. The Sync Source – Add page
opens.
Figure 353: Sync Source – Add Page

2 In the Sync Interface field, select the interface you want to define as a
synchronization source. You can select from the following interface types:
◦ Ethernet interfaces
◦ Radio interface
Note: In order to select an Ethernet interface, you must first specify the
media type for this interface. See Configuring Ethernet Interfaces.
3 In the Sync Interface Quality field, select the quality level applied to the
selected synchronization source. This enables the system to select the source
with the highest quality as the current synchronization source.
◦ If the Sync Interface Quality is set to Automatic, the quality is determined
by the received SSMs. If no valid SSM messages are received or in case of
interface failure (such as LOS, LOC, LOF), the quality becomes Failure. SSM
must be enabled on the remote interface in order for the interface to
receive SSM messages. For instructions how to enable SSM, see
◦ If the Sync Interface Quality is set to a fixed value, then the quality status
becomes Failure upon interface failure (such as LOS, LOC, LOF).
4 In the Sync Interface Priority field, select the priority of this synchronization
source relative to other synchronization sources configured in the unit (1-16).
You cannot assign the same priority to more than one synchronization source.
Once a priority value has been assigned, it no longer appears in the Sync
Interface Priority dropdown list.
Page 488 of 1094

9.2.3 Editing a Sync Source

To edit a synchronization source:
1 In the Sync Source page (Figure 352), click Edit. The Sync Source – Edit page
opens.
2 Edit the parameters, as defined above. You can edit all the parameters except
Sync Interface, which is read-only.
9.2.4 Deleting a Sync Source

To delete a synchronization source:
1 Select the synchronization source in the Sync Source page (Figure 352).
2 Click Delete. The synchronization source is deleted.
9.3 Configuring the Outgoing Clock and SSM Messages

In the Outgoing Clock page, you can view and configure the following
synchronization settings per interface:
• The interface's clock source (outgoing clock).
• For radio interfaces, the synchronization radio channel (used for
interoperability).
• SSM message administration.
In order to provide topological resiliency for synchronization transfer, IP-20
implements the passing of SSM messages over the radio interfaces. SSM timing in
IP-20 complies with ITU-T G.781.
In addition, the SSM mechanism provides reference source resiliency, since a
network may have more than one source clock. The following are the principles of
operation:
• At all times, each source interface has a “quality status” which is determined
as follows:
◦ If quality is configured as fixed, then the quality status becomes “failure”
upon interface failure (such as LOS, LOC, LOF).
◦ If quality is automatic, then the quality is determined by the received
SSMs. If no valid SSM messages are received or in case of interface failure
(such as LOS, LOC, LOF), the quality becomes "failure.
• Each unit holds a parameter which indicates the quality of its reference clock.
This is the quality of the current synchronization source interface.
• The reference source quality is transmitted through SSM messages to all
relevant radio interfaces.
• In order to prevent loops, an SSM with quality “Do Not Use” is sent from the
active source interface (both radio and Ethernet)
In order for an interface to transmit SSM messages, SSM must be enabled on the
interface. By default, SSM is disabled on all interfaces.
Page 489 of 1094

When configuring the outgoing clock and SSM administration, the Sync mode
must be set to its default setting of automatic. To display the current Sync mode,
enter the following CLI command in root view:
To configure the outgoing clock on an Ethernet interface, the Media Type of the
interface must be RJ45 or SFP, not Auto-Type. To view and configure the Media
Type of an Ethernet interface, see Configuring Ethernet Interfaces.
To view and configure the synchronization parameters of the unit’s interfaces:
1 Select Sync > Outgoing Clock. The Outgoing Clock page opens.
Figure 354: Outgoing Clock Page

2 Select the interface you want to configure and click Edit. The Outgoing Clock –
Edit page opens.
Figure 355: Outgoing Clock – Edit Page

3 In the Outgoing clock source field, select the interface's synchronization
source. Options are:
◦ Local Clock – The interface uses its internal clock as its synchronization
source.
Page 490 of 1094

◦ System Clock – Default value. The interface uses the system clock as its
synchronization source.
◦ Source Interface – Reserved for future use.
◦ Time Loop – Reserved for future use.
4 In Sync Radio Channel field, use the default value of 0.
5 In the SSM Admin field, select On or Off to enable or disable SSM for the
Page 491 of 1094

9.4 Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock

IP-20 uses 1588v2-compliant Transparent Clock to counter the effects of delay
variation. Transparent Clock measures and adjusts for delay variation, enabling
the IP-20 to guarantee ultra-low PDV.
A Transparent Clock node resides between a master and a slave node, and
updates the timestamps of PTP packets passing from the master to the slave to
compensate for delay, enabling the terminating clock in the slave node to remove
the delay accrued in the Transparent Clock node. The Transparent Clock node is
itself neither a master nor a slave node, but rather, serves as a bridge between
master and slave nodes.
Note that in CeraOS 11.3:
• 1588 TC is not supported when Master-Slave communication is using the IPv6
transport layer.
• 1588 TC cannot be used on 1+1 HSB links.
• 1588 TC cannot be used with 2 x 1+0 (East-West) configurations
• 1588 TC is not supported with Frame Cut-Through.
Note: Make sure to enable Transparent Clock on the remote side of the link
before enabling it on the local side.
To configure Transparent Clock:
1 Add the port receiving synchronization from the customer side as a Sync
source, with Sync Interface Priority 1. See Adding a Sync Source.
2 Add a radio interface as a Sync source, with lower priority than the port
receiving synchronization from the customer side. See Adding a Sync Source.
3 On the remote side of the radio link, add the radio interface facing the local
device as a Sync source, with Sync Interface Priority 1. See Adding a Sync
Source.
4 On the remote side of the radio link, if there is an Ethernet port conveying
synchronization, add this port as a Sync source, with lower priority than the
radio interface. See Adding a Sync Source.
5 Verify that the Sync Interface Quality Status of the first Sync source is not
Failure. See Viewing the Sync Source Status.
Page 492 of 1094

6 Select Sync > 1588 > General Configuration. The 1588 – General Configuration
page opens.
Figure 356: 1588 General Configuration Page

7 In the 1588 PTP field, select Enable.
8 Click Apply.
9 Select Sync > 1588 > Transparent Clock. The 1588 Transparent Clock page
opens.
Figure 357: 1588 Transparent Clock Page
Page 493 of 1094

10 Select a radio interface or Multi-Carrier ABC group and click Edit. The 1588
Transparent Clock – Edit page opens.
Figure 358: 1588 Transparent Clock – Edit Page

11 In the Port direction field, select Upstream or Downstream. This field must be
set to different values on the two sides of the link, so that if you set the local
side to Upstream, you must set the remote side to Downstream, and vice
versa. Otherwise than that, it does not matter how you set this field.
13 1588 packets should be mapped to CoS 7. By default, 1588 packets are not
mapped to any CoS. To map 1588 packets to CoS 7, you must disable CoS
preservation for 1588 packets. This must be performed via CLI, using the
following command:
root> ethernet generalcfg ptp-tc cos-preserve set admin disable
14 To map 1588 packets to CoS 7, enter the following command:
root> ethernet generalcfg ptp-tc cos-preserve cos value 7
After you enter these commands, 1588 packets will automatically be mapped
to CoS 7.
Note: If necessary, you can use the ethernet generalcfg ptp-tc cos-
preserve cos value command to map a different CoS value (0-7) to
1588 packets, but it is recommended to map 1588 packets to CoS 7.
To disable Transparent Clock synchronization:
1 Select Sync > 1588 > General Configuration. The 1588 – General Configuration
2 In the 1588 PTP field, select Disable.
3 Click Apply.
Note: Disabling 1588 PTP disables both Transparent Clock and Boundary
Clock, and can drastically affect time synchronization performance in
the entire network.
Page 494 of 1094

10. Access Management and Security

• Quick Security Configuration
• Configuring the General Access Control Parameters
• Configuring the Password Security Parameters
• Configuring the Session Timeout
• Configuring Users
• Configuring RADIUS
• Configuring TACACS+
• Viewing Remote Access User Connectivity and Permissions
• Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates
• Enabling HTTPS
• Downloading and Installing an RSA Key
• Blocking Telnet Access
• Uploading the Security Log
• Uploading the Configuration Log
• Anti-Theft Protection
Note: Another security feature, HTTPS cipher hardening, can be configured
via CLI. For instructions, see Configuring HTTPS Cipher Hardening (CLI).
IP-20 devices support SDN, with NETCONF/YANG capabilities. This

enables IP-20 devices to be managed via SDN using Ceragon’s SDN
controller, SDN Master. NETCONF must be enabled via CLI. See
Enabling NETCONF (CLI).
You can terminate all active sessions via a CLI command. See
Terminating all Active Sessions (CLI).
Related topics:
• Operating in FIPS Mode
• Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption
Page 495 of 1094

10.1 Quick Security Configuration

The Web EMS provides a set of Quick Configuration pages that enable you to
quickly configure the unit’s access and security parameters. This section describes
these pages, with cross references to the sections in which each parameter is
described in depth.
10.1.1 Quick Security Configuration – General Parameters Page

To configure the FIPS Admin, import and export security settings, session timeout,
a login banner, and AES-256 payload encryption:
Note: FIPS and AES-256 are not supported with IP-20E and IP-20V.
1 Select Quick Configuration > Security > General Parameters. The Quick
Configuration Security General Parameters page opens.
Figure 359: Quick Configuration Security General Parameters Page

2 In the FIPS Mode Admin field, you can enable or disable FIPS mode. For
details, see Operating in FIPS Mode.
Note: Only certain CeraOS versions support FIPS mode. These versions
include CeraOS 8.3 and CeraOS 10.9.6.
3 The Import/Export security settings field determines whether security
configurations are included in configuration backup files. If you select Enable,
security configurations will not be included in backup files.
4 In the Session timeout field, you can configure a session timeout, in minutes,
from 1 to 60 minutes. The default session timeout is 10 minutes. For details,
see Configuring the Session Timeout.
5 In the Login Banner Text field, you can define a login banner of up to 2,000
bytes. This banner will appear every time a user establishes a connection with
the Web EMS. The banner appears before the login prompt, so that users will
always see the login banner and must manually close the banner before
logging in to the Web EMS. For details, see Defining a Login Banner.
Page 496 of 1094

6 In the Radio Payload Encryption area, select an interface and click Edit to
define AES-256 payload encryption. For details, see Configuring AES-256
Payload Encryption.
10.1.2 Quick Security Configuration – Protocols Page

To configure the HTTP type, Telnet blocking, and SNMP parameters:
1 Select Quick Configuration > Security > Protocols. The Quick Configuration
Security Protocols page opens.
Figure 360: Quick Configuration Security Protocols Page

2 In the HTTP protocol field, you can determine the web interface protocol for
accessing the unit (HTTP or HTTPS). By default, the web interface protocol is
HTTP. For details, see Enabling HTTPS.
Note: After changing the HTTP protocol, management is lost. To restore
management, simply refresh the page.
3 In the Telnet Admin field, you can block or enable telnet access to the unit. By
default, telnet access is enabled. For details, see Blocking Telnet Access.
4 In the SNMP Parameters area, you can configure the unit’s SNMP parameters.
For details, see Configuring SNMP.
In addition, you can configure the following parameters only in the Quick
Configuration Security Protocols page:
i In the Block SNMP from Write Security Parameters field, select Yes if you
want to block SNMP from writing security parameters.
ii In the Block SNMP from Read Security Parameters field, select Yes if you
want to block SNMP from reading security parameters.
5 When you are finished editing the parameters described above, click Apply.
6 In the SNMP V3 Users are, you can click Add to add SNMP V3 users. For
details, see Configuring SNMP.
Page 497 of 1094

10.1.3 Quick Security Configuration – Access Control Page

To configure parameters relating to users and login parameters:
1 Select Quick Configuration > Security > Access Control. The Quick
Configuration Security Protocols page opens.
Figure 361: Quick Configuration Security Access Control Page

2 In the Login & Password Management area, you can configure enhanced
security requirements for user passwords and for logging into the unit. For
details, see Configuring the General Access Control Parameters and
Configuring the Password Security Parameters.
3 When you are finished editing the login and password parameters, click Apply.
4 In the User Accounts area, you can configure individual users:
◦ To add a user, click Add.
◦ To edit an existing user, select the user in the User Accounts table and click
Edit.
For details, see Configuring Users.
5 To configure user profiles, click Access Control User Profiles. For details, see
Configuring User Profiles.
Page 498 of 1094

10.1.4 Quick Security Configuration – RSA Key & Certificate Page

To download and install an RSA key and/or a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) file:
1 Select Quick Configuration > Security > RSA Key & Certificate. The Quick
Configuration Security RSA Key & Certificate page opens.
Figure 362: Quick Configuration Security RSA Key & Certificate Page
2 In the RSA Key Download Status area, you can download and install an RSA
key. For details, see Downloading and Installing an RSA Key.
3 In the Download Certification Status area, you can download and install a CSR
file. For details, see Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates .
Page 499 of 1094

10.2 Configuring the General Access Control Parameters

To avoid unauthorized login to the system, IP-20 automatically blocks users upon
a configurable number of failed login attempts. You can also configure IP-20 to
block users that have not logged into the unit for a defined number of days.
To configure the blocking criteria:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > General. The Access Control
General Configuration page opens.
Figure 363: Access Control General Configuration Page

2 In the Failure login attempts to block user field, select the number of failed
login attempts that will trigger blocking. If a user attempts to login to the
system with incorrect credentials this number of times consecutively, the user
will temporarily be prevented from logging into the system for the time period
defined in the Blocking period field. Valid values are 1-10. The default value is
3.
3 In the Blocking period (Minutes) field, enter the length of time, in minutes,
that a user is prevented from logging into the system after the defined
number of failed login attempts. Valid values are 1-60. The default value is 5.
4 In the Unused account period for blocking (Days) field, you can configure a
number of days after which a user is prevented from logging into the system if
the user has not logged in for the configured number of days. Valid values are
0, or 30-90. If you enter 0, this feature is disabled. The default value is 0.
5 Click Apply.
Once a user is blocked, you can unblock the user from the User Accounts page. To
unblock a user:
Page 500 of 1094

1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > User Accounts. The Access
Control User Accounts page opens (Figure 369).
2 Select the user and click Edit. The Access Control User Accounts - Edit page
opens.
Figure 364: Access Control User Accounts - Edit Page

3 In the Blocked field, select No.
Page 501 of 1094

10.3 Configuring the Password Security Parameters

To configure enhanced security requirements for user passwords:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > Password Management. The
Access Control Password Management page opens.
Figure 365: Access Control Password Management Page

2 In the Enforce password strength field, select Yes or No. When Yes is
selected:
not counted.
◦ The last five passwords you used cannot be reused.
3 In the Password change for first login field, select Yes or No. When Yes is
selected, the system requires the user to change his or her password the first
time the user logs in.
4 In the Password aging (Days) field, select the number of days that user
passwords will remain valid from the first time the user logs into the system.
You can enter 20-90, or No Aging. If you select No Aging, password aging is
disabled and passwords remain valid indefinitely.
5 Click Apply.
Page 502 of 1094

10.4 Configuring the Session Timeout

By default, there is a 10-minute session timeout. If you do not perform any
activity on the system for the period of time defined as the session timeout, the
user session times out and you will have to log in to the system again.
To modify the session timeout:
1 Select Platform > Security > Protocols Control. The Protocols Control page
opens.
Figure 366: Protocols Control Page

2 In the Session timeout (Minutes) field, select a session timeout, in minutes,
from 1 to 60.
3 Click Apply.
Page 503 of 1094

10.5 Configuring Users

• User Configuration Overview
• Configuring User Profiles
• Configuring Users
Related topics:
10.5.1 User Configuration Overview

User configuration is based on the Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) model.
According to the RBAC model, permissions to perform certain operations are
assigned to specific roles. Users are assigned to particular roles, and through
those role assignments acquire the permissions to perform particular system
functions.
In the IP-20 GUI, these roles are called user profiles. Up to 50 user profiles can be
configured. Each profile contains a set of privilege levels per functionality group,
and defines the management protocols (access channels) that can be used to
access the system by users to whom the user profile is assigned.
The system parameters are divided into the following functional groups:
• Security
• Management
• Radio
• TDM
• Ethernet
• Synchronization
A user profile defines the permitted access level per functionality group. For each
functionality group, the access level is defined separately for read and write
operations. The following access levels can be assigned:
• None – No access to this functional group.
• Normal – The user has access to parameters that require basic knowledge
about the functional group.
• Advanced – The user has access to parameters that require advanced
knowledge about the functional group, as well as parameters that have a
significant impact on the system as a whole, such as restoring the
configuration to factory default settings.
10.5.2 Configuring User Profiles

User profiles enable you to define system access levels. Each user must be
assigned a user profile. Each user profile contains a detailed set of read and write
permission levels per functionality group.
The system includes a number of pre-defined user profiles. You can edit these
profiles, and add user profiles. Together, the system supports up to 50 user
profiles.
Page 504 of 1094

To add a user profile:

1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > User Profiles. The Access
Control User Profiles page opens.
Figure 367: Access Control User Profiles Page

2 Click Add. The Access Control User Profiles - Add page opens.
Page 505 of 1094

Figure 368: Access Control User Profiles - Add Page

3 In the Profile field, enter a name for the profile. The profile name can include
up to 49 characters. Once you have created the user profile, you cannot
change its name.
Note: The Usage counter field displays the number of users to whom the
user profile is assigned.
4 In the Permitted access channels row, select the access channels the user will
be permitted to use to access the system.
5 For each functionality group, select one of these options for write level and
read level. All users with this profile will be assigned these access levels:
◦ None
◦ Normal
◦ Advanced
To view a user profile, click + next to the profile you want to view.
To edit a user profile, select the profile and click Edit. You can edit all of the profile
parameters except the profile name.
To delete a user profile, select the profile and click Delete.
Note: You cannot delete a user profile if the profile is assigned to any users.
Page 506 of 1094

10.5.3 Configuring Users

You can configure up to 2,000 users. Each user has a user name, password, and
user profile. The user profile defines a set of read and write permission levels per
functionality group. See Configuring User Profiles.
To add a new user:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > User Accounts. The Access
Control User Accounts page opens.
Figure 369: Access Control User Accounts Page

2 Click Add. The Access Control User Profiles - Add page opens.
Figure 370: Access Control User Accounts - Add Page

3 In the User name field, enter a user name for the user. The user name can be
up to 32 characters.
Page 507 of 1094

4 In the Profile field, select a User Profile. The User Profile defines the user’s
access levels for functionality groups in the system. See Configuring User
Profiles.
5 In the Password field, enter a password for the user. If Enforce Password
Strength is activated (see Configuring the Password Security Parameters), the
password must meet the following criteria:
not counted.
◦ The last five passwords you used cannot be reused.
6 In the Blocked field, you can block or unblock the user. Selecting Yes blocks
the user. You can use this option to block a user temporarily, without deleting
the user from the system. If you set this option to Yes while the user is logged
into the system, the user will be automatically logged out of the system within
30 seconds.
Note: Users can also be blocked by the system automatically. You can
unblock the user by selecting No in the Blocked field. See Configuring
the General Access Control Parameters.
7 Optionally, in the Expiration date field, you can configure the user to remain
active only until a defined date. After that date, the user automatically
becomes inactive. To set an expiration date, click the calendar icon and select
a date, or enter a date in the format dd-mm-yyyy. The latest date that can be
configured is 30-12-2037.
Note: If no expiration date is configured, the user account will expire five
years after the date configured on the unit.
In addition to the configurable parameters described above, the Access Control
User Accounts page displays the following information for each user:
• Login Status – Indicates whether the user is currently logged into the system.
• Last Logout – The date and time the user most recently logged out of the
system.
To edit a user’s account details, select the user and click Edit. You can edit all of
the user account parameters except the User name and password.
To add a user, click Add.
To delete a user, select the user and click Delete.
Page 508 of 1094

10.6 Configuring RADIUS

• RADIUS Overview
• Activating RADIUS Authentication
• Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes
• Configuring a RADIUS Server
10.6.1 RADIUS Overview

The RADIUS protocol provides centralized user management services. IP-20
supports RADIUS server and provides a RADIUS client for authentication and
authorization. When RADIUS is enabled, a user attempting to log into the system
from any access channel (CLI, WEB, NMS) is not authenticated locally. Instead, the
user’s credentials are sent to a centralized standard RADIUS server which
indicates to the IP-20 whether the user is known, and which privilege is to be
given to the user.
The following RADIUS servers are supported:
• FreeRADIUS
• RADIUS on Windows Server (IAS)
Windows Server 2008
You can define up to two Radius servers. If you define two, one serves as the
primary server and the other as the secondary server.
10.6.2 Activating RADIUS Authentication

To activate RADIUS authentication:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > Remote Access Control >
Configuration. The Remote Access Control Configuration page opens.
Figure 371: Remote Access Control Configuration Page (RADIUS)
Page 509 of 1094

2 In the Select Remote Access Protocol to Configure field, select RADIUS.

3 Configure the RADIUS server attributes. See Configuring the RADIUS Server
Attributes.
4 In the RADIUS Admin field, select Enable.
5 Click Apply.
Note: When the Protocol is changed, all active sessions are terminated when
you click Apply.
10.6.3 Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes

To configure the RADIUS server attributes:
Configuration. The Remote Access Control Configuration page opens (Figure
371). Verify that RADIUS is selected in the Protocol field.
2 In the Radius Configuration table, select the line that corresponds to the
RADIUS server you want to configure:
◦ Select Server ID 1 to configure the Primary Radius server.
◦ Select Server ID 2 to configure the Secondary Radius server.
3 Click Edit. The Radius Configuration – Edit page opens.
Figure 372: Radius Configuration – Edit Page

4 In the IPV4 address field, enter the IP address of the RADIUS server.
5 In the Port field, enter the port of the RADIUS server.
6 In the Retries field, enter the number of times the unit will try to
communicate with the RADIUS server before declaring the server to be
unreachable.
7 In the Timeout field, enter the timeout (in seconds) that the agent will wait in
each communication with the selected RADIUS server before retrying if no
response is received.
8 In the Secret field, enter the shared secret of the RADIUS server. The string
must be between 22-128 characters long.
Page 510 of 1094


In addition to the configurable parameters described above, the Remote Access
Control Configuration page displays the following information for each RADIUS
server:
• Server Id – The server ID of the Radius server:
◦ 1 – The primary Radius server.
◦ 2 – The secondary Radius server.
10.6.4 Configuring a RADIUS Server

If you want to use the IP-20 RADIUS feature, you must first install a RADIUS server
and configure it to work with the IP-20 device.
The following subsections describe how to configure a Win2008 RADIUS server
and a Linux FreeRADIUS server to work with an IP-20. For the sake of simplicity,
the subsections describe how to create three users: an Advanced user with
Advanced read/write permissions, a Normal user with regular read/write
permissions, and a Viewer user with no read/write permissions.
Note: These RADIUS servers are third-party software. The instructions
provided in this section are illustrative only and are provided for the
convenience of IP-20 users. For exact and up-to-date instructions, we
urge you to rely on the documentation provided with the RADIUS
server you are using. Ceragon is not responsible for syntax changes or
variations in different GNU distributions.
Page 511 of 1094

10.6.4.1 Configuring a Win 2008 RADIUS Server

The following sub-sections describe how to configure a Win 2008 RADIUS Server
to work with an IP-20 device.
Page 512 of 1094

Step 1 – Creating Groups and Users

To create groups and users:
1 Create three user groups, as follows:
i In the Server Manager, navigate to Configuration > Local Users and
Groups.
ii Right click Groups and create the following three user groups:
◦ Radius_Advanced
◦ Radius_Normal
◦ Radius_Viewer
Figure 373: Server Manager – Creating User Groups
Page 513 of 1094

2 Create three users:

◦ u1
◦ u2
◦ u3
Figure 374: Server Manager – Creating Users
Page 514 of 1094

3 In the Device Properties – General tab, make sure to select Password never
expires. If you leave the default setting (User must change password at next
logon), authentication may fail.
Figure 375: Server Manager – User Password Settings

4 Attach each user to a group, as follows:
◦ Attach u1 to Radius_Advanced
◦ Attach u2 to Radius_Normal
◦ Attach u3 to Radius_Viewer
Page 515 of 1094

Step 2 – Creating a RADIUS Client

Define the IP-20 device as a RADIUS client, as follows:
1 In the Server Manager, navigate to Roles > Network Policy and Access Services
> NPS (Local) > RADIUS Clients and Servers > RADIUS Clients.
2 Right-click RADIUS Clients, and select New RADIUS Client. The New RADIUS
Client window appears.
Figure 376: Server Manager – Creating a RADIUS Client

3 In the New RADIUS Client window:
i Select the Enable this RADIUS client check box.
ii Enter a descriptive Friendly name for the device, such as IP-20X.
iii Enter the device IP Address.
Page 516 of 1094

iv Select RADIUS Standard as the Vendor name.

v In the Shared Secret section, select Manual, and enter a Shared secret,
then enter it again in Confirm shared secret. Note down the secret
because you will need to enter the same value in the Secret field of the
Radius Configuration – Edit page (Figure 372).
Page 517 of 1094

Step 3 – Creating a Network Policy

Create a network policy for each of the three groups you created:
Radius_Advanced, Radius_Normal, Radius_Viewer. That is, follow the instructions
in this section, for each of the three groups.
To create a network policy:
1 In the Server Manager, navigate to Roles > Network Policy and Access Service
> NPS (Local) > Policies > Network Policies.
2 Right-click Network Policies, and select New. The New Network Policy wizard
appears.
3 In the specify Network Policy Name and Connection Type, give the policy a
descriptive name, indicating whether it is a policy for the Advanced, the
Normal or the Viewer group.
Figure 377: Create Network Policy – Specify Name and Connection Type
4 Click Next.
5 In the Specify Conditions window, click Add.
6 In the Select Condition window that appears, select the User Groups condition
and click Add.
Page 518 of 1094

Figure 378: Create Network Policy – Select Condition

7 In the User Groups window that appears, click Add Groups.
8 In the Select Group window that appears, click Advanced.
9 In the Select Group window that appears, click Find Now to list all groups, and
then select the appropriate group from the list: Radius_Advanced,
Radius_Normal, or Radius_Viewer.
10 Click OK.
Page 519 of 1094

Figure 379: Create Network Policy – User Group added to Policy’s Conditions
11 Click OK to save settings.
12 Click Next.
13 In the Specify Access Permission window that appears, select the Access
Granted option.
Page 520 of 1094

Figure 380: Create Network Policy – Specifying Access Permission

14 Click Next.
15 In the Configure Authentication Methods window that appears, make sure
only the Unencrypted Authentication (PAP, SPAP) option is selected.
Page 521 of 1094

Figure 381: Create Network Policy – Configuring Authentication Methods

16 In the query window that appears, click No.
Figure 382: Create Network Policy – Insecure Authentication Method Query

17 In the Configure Constraints window that appears, click Next.
Page 522 of 1094

Figure 383: Create Network Policy – Configuring Constraints

18 In the Configure Settings window that appears:
i Remove all Standard RADIUS attributes. Make sure the Attributes table is
empty.
Page 523 of 1094

384: Create Network Policy – Configuring Settings

iiSelect the Vendor Specific checkbox and click Add under the Attributes
table.
19 In the Add Vendor Specific Attribute window that appears:
i Select Custom in the Vendor drop down field.
ii Click Add.
Page 524 of 1094

Figure 385: Create Network Policy – Adding Vendor Specific Attributes

20 In the Attribute Information window that appears, click Add.
Figure 386: Create Network Policy – Selecting to Add Attribute Information
Page 525 of 1094

21 In the Vendor-Specific Attribute Information window that appears:

i Select Enter Vendor Code.
ii Enter 2281 in the Enter Vendor Code field.
iii Select the option Yes. It conforms.
iv Click Configure Attribute.
Figure 387: Create Network Policy – Specifying the Vendor

22 In the Configure VSA (RFC Compliant) window that appears, configure 13
attributes as follows:
i For Vendor-assigned attribute number from 21 till 32, select Decimal in
the Attribute format field. These twelve attributes define the Read access
level (None, Regular, or Advanced), and the Write access level (None,
Regular, or Advanced) for each of the six functional groups (Ethernet,
Management, Radio, Security, Sync, TDM). Therefore, in the Attribute
value field enter the value corresponding to the access level you wish to
permit to members of the group whose policy you are configuring, where:
◦ 2 = Advanced
◦ 1 = Regular
◦ 0 = None
Thus for example, enter 2 for all twelve attributes if you are configuring a
policy for the Radius_Advanced group. This gives Advanced read
permissions and Advanced write permissions, for all six functional groups,
to the members of the Radius_Advanced group.
Page 526 of 1094

Figure 388: Create Network Policy – Configuring Vendor-Specific Attribute Information

ii For Vendor-assigned attribute number 50, select Decimal in the Attribute
format field. The Attribute value of this attribute defines the access
channel(s) permitted to members of the group whose policy you are
configuring. The Attribute value is the sum of the values corresponding to
the access channels you wish to permit, where the value for each access
channel is:
◦ none=0
◦ serial=1
◦ telnet=2
◦ ssh=4
◦ web=8
◦ nms=16
◦ snmp=32
◦ snmpV3=64
Thus for example, enter 127 to allow access from all channels:
Serial + Telnet + SSH + Web + NMS + SNMP +SNMPv3;
Or enter 24 to allow access only from NMS + SNMP channels.

iii Click OK.
Page 527 of 1094

23 Click OK.
The following figure shows the Attributes table for the Radius_Advanced group,
where access to the device is allowed from all channels.
Figure 389: Create Network Policy – Example of Vendor-Specific Attribute Configuration

24 Close all opened windows and click Next.
25 In the Completing New Network Policy window, click Finish.
26 Reset the Network Policy Server (NPS) by stopping and starting the NPS
service as follows:
i Right click the NPS (Local) node, and select Stop NPS Service.
ii Right click the NPS (Local) node, and select Start NPS Service.
Page 528 of 1094

Figure 390: Create Network Policy – Stopping/Starting NPS Services
Page 529 of 1094

10.6.4.2 Configuring a Linux FreeRADIUS Server

The following sub-sections describe how to configure a Linux FreeRADIUS server
to work with an IP-20 device.
To so do, you will need to modify the following files:
• /etc/raddb/users
• /etc/raddb/clients.conf
• /usr/share/freeradius/dictionary.ceragon
• /etc/raddb/dictionary
Page 530 of 1094

Step 1 – Creating Users

This step describes how to create the following three users:
• u1 – with advanced read/write privileges, password 1111
• u2 – with normal read/write privileges, password 2222
• u3 – with no read/write privileges, password 3333
To create these RADIUS users:
1 Add the users in the /etc/raddb/users file, using any editor you like,
according to the following example:
# user1 - advanced privileges
u1 auth-type := local, Cleartext-Password := "1111"
security-ro = advanced,
security-wo = advanced,
mng-ro = advanced,
mng-wo = advanced,
radio-ro = advanced,
radio-wo = advanced,
tdm-ro = advanced,
tdm-wo = advanced,
eth-ro = advanced,
eth-wo = advanced,
sync-ro = advanced,
sync-wo = advanced,
access_channel = u1accesschannel,
fall-through = yes
# user2 - regular privileges
security-ro = regular,
security-wo = regular,
mng-ro = regular,
mng-wo = regular,
radio-ro = regular,
radio-wo = regular,
tdm-ro = regular,
tdm-wo = regular,
eth-ro = regular,
eth-wo = regular,
sync-ro = regular,
Page 531 of 1094

sync-wo = regular,
fall-through = yes
# user3 - no privilege (viewer)
security-ro = none,
security-wo = none,
mng-ro = none,
mng-wo = none,
radio-ro = none,
radio-wo = none,
tdm-ro = none,
tdm-wo = none,
eth-ro = none,
eth-wo = none,
sync-ro = none,
sync-wo = none,
fall-through = yes
2 Save the changes in the /etc/raddb/users file.
Page 532 of 1094

Step 2 – Defining the Permitted Access Channels

The access_channel of each user we configured in the /etc/raddb/users file,
defines the channels through which that user is allowed to access the unit.
This is done by summing the values corresponding to the allowed channels, where
the values are:
### none 0
### serial 1
### telnet 2
### ssh 4
### web 8
### nms 16
### snmp 32
### snmpV3 64
For example:
• The value 127 denotes permission to access the device from all channels:
Serial + Telnet + SSH + Web + NMS + SNMP +SNMPv3
• The value 24 indicates permission to access the device only from the Web +
NMS channels.
To define each user’s access channels:
1 In the usr/share/freeradius/dictionary.ceragon file, configure the
values of the access channels according to the following example:
### access channel for u1
user:serial+telnet+ssh+web+nms+snmp+snmpV4
VALUE ACCESS_CHANNEL u1accesschannel 127

2 Save the changes to the usr/share/freeradius/dictionary.ceragon file.
Page 533 of 1094

Step 3 – Specifying the RADIUS client

This step describes how to define a device as a RADIUS client. The RADIUS server
accepts attempts to connect to a device only if that is device is defined as a
RADIUS client.
To define a device as a RADIUS client:
1 In the /etc/raddb/clients.conf file, add the device according to the
following example.
◦ The example shows how to add an IP-20C device with IP address
192.168.1.118:
# IP20-C
client 192.168.1.118 {
secret = default_not_applicable
shortname = ceragon-ip-20C
}
◦ Keep in mind:
◦ The secret must be between 22 and 128 characters long. Note down
the secret because you will need to enter the same value in the Secret
field of the Radius Configuration – Edit page (Figure 372).
◦The shortname is not mandatory, but should be added, and should be
different for each RADIUS client.
2 Save the changes to the /etc/raddb/clients.conf file.
Page 534 of 1094

Step 4 – Adding a call to the Ceragon Dictionary File

To add a call to the Ceragon dictionary file:
1 Add the following at the end of the /etc/raddb/dictionary file, using any
editor you like:
#include the dictionary.ceragon file
$INCLUDE dictionary.ceragon
2 Save the changes in the /etc/raddb/dictionary file.
Note: Make sure to use absolute path mode if the target file is located in a
different directory. For example:
$INCLUDE ../share/freeradius/dictionary.ceragon)
Page 535 of 1094

Step 5 – Restarting the RADIUS server

After configuring all of the above, restart the RADIUS process.
To restart the RADIUS process:
1 Stop the process by entering:
killall -9 radiusd
2 Start the process running in the background by entering:
radius –X &
Note: To check the logs each time a user connects to the server, enter:
radius –X &
Page 536 of 1094

10.7 Configuring TACACS+

• TACACS+ Overview
• Activating TACACS+ Authentication and Authorization
• Configuring the TACACS+ Server Attributes
• Configuring a TACACS+ Server
10.7.1 TACACS+ Overview

The TACACS+ protocol provides centralized user management services. TACACS+
separates the functions of Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA). It
enables arbitrary length and content authentication exchanges, in order to
support future authentication mechanisms. It is extensible to provide for site
customization and future development features, and uses TCP to ensure reliable
communication.
IP-20 supports TACACS+ with authentication, authorization, and accounting. Using
TACACS+, the IP-20 device acts as the client, working with a TACACS+ server to
authenticate and authorize users.
Note: IP-20 supports session-based TACACS+ authorization, but not
command-based.
When TACACS+ is enabled, a user attempting to log into the system from any
access channel (CLI, WEB, NMS) is not authenticated locally. Instead, the user’s
credentials are sent to a centralized standard TACACS+ server which indicates to
the IP-20 device whether the user is known, and which privilege is to be given to
the user.
When a user successfully logs in or logs out of the device via TACACS+, the device
sends an accounting packet to the TACACS+ server packet which contains the
following information:
• User Name
• User IP Address
• Time and Date of Connection
• Connection port on the device
Note: This information is also written to the device’s Security Log.
Ceragon’s TACACS+ solution is compliant with any standard TACACS+ server.
Testing has been performed, and interoperability confirmed, with the following
TACACS+ servers:
• Cisco ISE - Version 2.6.0.156
• Tacacs.net - Version 1.2
• tac_plus version F4.0.4.27a
You can define up to four TACACS+ servers. When a user attempts to log into the
device, the device attempts to contact the first user-defined TACACS+ server to
authenticate the user. If no response is received from the server within the user-
defined timeout period (1-60 seconds), the device tries again to contact the server
up to the user-configured number of retries (1-5). Then, if no response is received
Page 537 of 1094

from the server, the device attempts to contact the second user-defined TACACS+
server. If no response is received from any of the servers, the device performs
user authentication locally.
10.7.2 Activating TACACS+ Authentication and Authorization

To activate TACACS+ authentication:
Configuration. The Remote Access Control Configuration page opens.
Figure 391: Remote Access Control Configuration Page (TACACS+)

2 In the Select Remote Access Protocol to Configure field, select TACACS+.
3 Configure the TACACS+ server attributes. See Configuring the TACACS+ Server
Attributes.
4 In the TACACS+ Admin field, select Enable.
5 In the Timeout field, define a timeout of 1-60 seconds. The timeout
determines how long to wait for a response from the TACACS+ server until the
connection attempt times out. When a connection attempt times out, the
device attempts to contact the next configured TACACS+ server.
6 In the TACACS+ Retries field, define the number of retries (1-5). This is the
number of times the device will attempt to contact each server before moving
on to the next server on the list. The default value is 1.
7 In the Authentication Type field, select from the following supported
protocols:
◦ ASCII
◦ PAP (default)
◦ CHAP
8 Click Apply.
Note: When the Protocol is changed, all active sessions are terminated when
you click Apply.
Page 538 of 1094

10.7.3 Configuring the TACACS+ Server Attributes

To configure the TACACS+ server attributes:
Configuration. The Remote Access Control Configuration page opens
(Figure 391).
2 In the TACACS+ Configuration table, select the line that corresponds to the
TACACS+ server you want to configure. When the device attempts to
authenticate a user, the device attempts to contact the first server in the list
(Server ID 1). If no response is received from the server within the user-
defined timeout period:
◦ If the TACACS+ Retries field is set to 1, the device attempts to contact the
second server in the list, then the third, then the fourth. If no response is
received from any of the servers, the device performs user authentication
locally.
◦ If the TACACS+ Retries field is set to a number greater than 1, the device
attempts to contact the first server again, up to the configured number of
retries. The device then repeats the process for the second server in the
list, then the third, then the fourth. If no response is received from any of
the servers, the device performs user authentication locally.
3 Click Edit. The TACACS+ Configuration Table – Edit page opens.
Figure 392: TACACS+ Configuration – Edit Page

4 In either the IPV4 address field or the IPV6 address field, enter the IP address
of the TACACS+ server in IPV4 or IPV6 format.
Note: You cannot enter both an IPv4 and an IPv6 address, but you cannot
leave either field blank. If you enter an IPv4 address, enter :: in the
IPV6 address field. If you enter an IPv6 address, enter 0.0.0.0 in the
IPV4 address field.
5 In the Port field, enter the port of the TACACS+ server. The default value is 49.
6 In the Shared Secret field, enter the shared secret of the TACACS+ server. The
string must be between 16-65 characters long.
Note: This field should not be left empty unless necessary for debugging.
Page 539 of 1094

In addition to the configurable parameters described above, the TACACS+

Configuration Table in the Remote Access Control Configuration page displays the
following information for each TACACS+ server:
• Server Id – The server ID of the server (1-4).
• Last Connection Attempt – The connectivity status of the TACACS+ server in
the last attempted connection:
◦ Succeeded – The last connection attempt succeeded.
◦ Failed – The last connection attempt failed.
Page 540 of 1094

10.7.4 Configuring a TACACS+ Server

To work with TACACS+, you must configure at least one and up to four TACACS+
servers. For instructions, refer to the documentation for the server type you are
using.
Use the following guidelines to ensure that the TACACS+ server will interoperate
properly with the IP-20 device.
• The TACACS+ server must be able to accept authentication modes ASCII, PAP,
and CHAP.
• It is recommended to configure the privilege levels as follows, regardless of
which type of TACACS+ server you are using:
◦ service=microwave
◦ protocol=ip
◦ priv-lvl=0/1/15
• Configure RBAC roles as follows. These roles are vendor-specific attributes.
<value> can be replaced with none, regular, or advance:
◦ protocol=ip
◦ security_read=<value>
◦ security_write=<value>
◦ mng_read=<value>
◦ mng_write=<value>
◦ radio_read=<value>
◦ radio_write=<value>
◦ tdm_read=<value>
◦ tdm_write=<value>
◦ eth_read= <value>
◦ eth_write=<value>
◦ sync_read=<value>
◦ sync_write=<value>
◦ access_control=all_channels
• Privilege level overwrite has specific attributes and combines privilege levels
and RBAC roles. Overwrite privilege levels can be configured as follows:
◦ Overwrite for privilege level 0:
◦ protocol=ip
◦ priv-lvl=0/1/15
◦ security_read=advance
◦ security_write=advance
Page 541 of 1094


◦ protocol=ip
◦ priv-lvl=0/1/15
◦ radio_read=none
◦ radio_write=none
◦ protocol=ip
◦ priv-lvl=0/1/15
◦ security_read=regular
◦ security_write=regular
Page 542 of 1094

10.8 Viewing Remote Access User Connectivity and Permissions

You can view remote access user connectivity and permissions information for all
RADIUS or TACACS+ users currently connected.
To view remote access users:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > Remote Access Control > Users.
The Remote Access Users page opens.
Figure 393: Remote Access Users Page

• The User ID column displays the user’s name.
• The Access Channels column displays the access channels the user is allowed
to use to access the unit.
• The User Instances column displays the number of open sessions the user
currently has.
Page 543 of 1094

To view the user’s authorized access levels, select the user and click View. The
Remote Access Users Table – View page opens.
Figure 394: Remote Access Users Table - View

For each of the six functional groups (Security, Management, Radio, TDM, Eth,
Sync), the page displays the Read access level (None, Regular, or Advanced), and
the Write access level (None, Regular, or Advanced).
Page 544 of 1094

10.9 Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates

The web interface protocol for accessing IP-20 can be configured to HTTP (default)
or HTTPS. It cannot be set to both at the same time.
Before setting the protocol to HTTPS, you must:
1 Create and upload a CSR file. See Generating a Certificate Signing Request
(CSR) File.
2 Download the certificate to the IP-20 and install the certificate. See
Downloading a Certificate.
3 Enable HTTPS. See Enabling HTTPS.
When uploading a CSR and downloading a certificate, the IP-20 functions as an
SFTP client. You must install SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are
using to perform the upload or download. For details, see Installing and
Note: For these operations, SFTP must be used.
10.9.1 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File

Note: If you need a customized public RSA key, you must download and
install the RSA key first, before generating a CSR file. Otherwise, the
CSR file will include the current public RSA key. See Downloading and
Installing an RSA Key.
To generate a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) file:
1 Select Platform > Security > X.509 Certificate > CSR. The Security Certificate
Request page opens.
Figure 395: Security Certificate Request Page

2 In the Common Name field, enter the fully–qualified domain name for your
web server. You must enter the exact domain name.
Page 545 of 1094

3 In the Organization field, enter the exact legal name of your organization. Do
not abbreviate.
4 In the Organization Unit field, enter the division of the organization that
handles the certificate.
5 In the Locality field, enter the city in which the organization is legally located.
6 In the State field, enter the state, province, or region in which the
organization is located. Do not abbreviate.
7 In the Country field, enter the two-letter ISO abbreviation for your country
(e.g., US).
8 In the Email field, enter an e-mail address that can be used to contact your
organization.
9 In the File Format field, select PEM or DER to determine the file format.
Note: In this version, only PEM is supported.
Figure 396: FTP Parameters Page (Security Certificate Request)

12 In the Username field, enter the user name you configured in the SFTP server.
13 In the Password field, enter the password you configured in the SFTP server. If
you did not configure a password for your SFTP user, simply leave this field
blank.
14 In the Path field, enter the directory path to which you are uploading the CSR.
Enter the path relative to the SFTP user's home directory, not the absolute
path. If the location is the home directory, it should be left empty. If the
location is a sub-folder under the home directory, specify the folder name. If
the shared folder is "C:\", this parameter can be left empty or populated with
"//".
15 In the File Name field, enter the name you want to give to the exported CSR.
Page 546 of 1094

PC or laptop you are using as the SFTP server in the Server IP address field.
PC or laptop you are using as the SFTP server in the Server IPv6 address field.
18 Click Apply, then Close, to save the FTP parameters and return to the Security
Log Upload page.
19 Click Generate & Upload. The file is generated and uploaded.
The Creation/Upload status field displays the status of any pending CSR
generation and upload. Possible values are:
• Ready – The default value, which appears when CSR generation and upload is
in progress.
• File-in-transfer – The upload operation is in progress.
• Success – The file has been successfully uploaded.
• Failure – The file was not successfully uploaded.
The Creation/Upload progress field displays the progress of any current CSR
upload operation.
10.9.2 Downloading a Certificate

To download a certificate:
1 Select Platform > Security > X.509 Certificate > Download & Install. The
Security Certification Download and Install page opens.
Figure 397: Security Certification Download and Install Page
Page 547 of 1094

Figure 398: FTP Parameters Page (Security Certification Download & Install)
blank.
5 In the Path field, enter the directory path from which you are uploading the
certificate. Enter the path relative to the SFTP user’s home directory, not the
with "//".
6 In the File Name field, enter the certificate’s file name in the SFTP server.
PC or laptop you are using as the SFTP server in the Server IPV4 address field.
Log Upload page.
10 Click Download. The certificate is downloaded.
11 Click Install. The certificate is installed on the IP-20.
Page 548 of 1094

10.10 Enabling HTTPS

By default, HTTP is used by IP-20 as its web interface protocol.
To enable HTTPS instead of HTTP:
opens (Figure 402).
2 In the HTTP protocol field, select HTTPS.
3 Click Apply.
Note: Make sure you have installed a valid certificate in the IP-20 before
changing the web interface protocol to HTTPS. Failure to do this may
prevent users from accessing the Web EMS.
Page 549 of 1094

10.11 Downloading and Installing an RSA Key

IP-20 devices support RSA keys for communication using HTTPS and SSH protocol.
The IP-20 device comes with randomly generated default private and public RSA
keys. However, you can replace the private key with a customer-defined private
key. The corresponding RSA public key will be generated based on this private key.
The file must be in PEM format. Supported RSA private key sizes are 2048, 4096,
and 8192.
The following is an example of a valid RSA private key file:
-----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----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-----END PRIVATE KEY-----
Page 550 of 1094

To download and install a private RSA key:

1 Select Platform > Security > RSA Key. The RSA Key Download & Install page
opens.
Figure 399: RSA Key Download & Install Page (HTTP Selected)
2 Select HTTP to download the file via HTTP/HTTPS or FTP to download the file
via SFTP.
Note: It is strongly recommended not to use HTTP to download RSA key files.
Page 551 of 1094

10.11.1.1Downloading an RSA Key via HTTP or HTTPS

To download and install a private RSA key file using HTTP or HTTPS:
1 Select HTTP.
2 Click Choose Private Key File.
3 Browse to and select the file.
4 Click Download. The download begins. You can view the status of the download in
the Download Status field. See Table 90.
5 Once the download has been completed, click Install to install the RSA key file. You
can view the status of the installation in the Install Status field. See Table 90.
Page 552 of 1094

10.11.1.2Downloading an RSA Key via SFTP

To download and install a private RSA key file using SFTP:
1 Install and configure SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are using to
perform the software upgrade. See Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP
Server.
2 In the RSA Key Download & Install page, select FTP.
Figure 400: RSA Key Download & Install Page (FTP Selected)

4 The File Transfer Protocol field is read-only and displays SFTP. RSA key files
cannot be downloaded to an IP-20 device using FTP.
Page 553 of 1094

blank.
7 In the Path field, enter the directory path from which you are downloading
the file. Enter the path relative to the SFTP user's home directory, not the
with "//"..
11 In the RSA Key Download & Install page, click Download. The download
begins. You can view the status of the download in the Download Status field.
See Table 90.
12 Once the download has been completed, click Install to install the RSA key file.
You can view the status of the installation in the Install Status field. See
Table 90.
Table 90: RSA File Download & Install Status Parameters

Download Status The status of any pending RSA file download. Possible values are:
• Ready – The default value, which appears when no download is in progress.
• In Progress – The download is in progress.
• Aborted – The download was aborted by user command.
If an error occurs during the download, an appropriate error message is displayed
in this field.
When the download is complete, one of the following status indications appears:
• Success – File downloaded and verified successfully.
• Failed – File download failed or verification failed.
When the system is reset, the Download Status returns to Ready.
Download Progress Displays the progress of the current download.
Install Status The status of any pending installation. Possible values are:
• Success
• Failed
Page 554 of 1094

10.12 Blocking Telnet Access

You can block telnet access to the unit. By default, telnet access is not blocked.
To block telnet access:
opens.
Figure 402: Protocols Control Page

2 In the Telnet Admin field, select Disable to block telnet access. By default,
telnet access is enabled (Enable).
3 Click Apply.
10.13 Uploading the Security Log

The security log is an internal system file which records all changes performed to
any security feature, as well as all security related events.
When uploading the security log, the IP-20 functions as an FTP or SFTP client. You
must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are using to
perform the import or export. For details, see Installing and Configuring an FTP or
SFTP Server.
To upload the security log:
perform the upload. See Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server.
2 Select Platform > Security > General > Security Log Upload. The Security Log
Upload page opens.
Page 555 of 1094

Figure 403: Security Log Upload Page

Figure 404: FTP Parameters Page (Security Log Upload)

Page 556 of 1094

blank.
PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server in the Server IPv6 address field.
8 In the Path field, enter the directory path to which you are uploading the files.
Enter the path relative to the FTP user's home directory, not the absolute
"//".
9 In the File name field, enter the name you want to give to the exported
security log.
Log Upload page.
11 Click Upload. The upload begins.
The File transfer status field displays the status of any pending security log
upload. Possible values are:
• Ready – The default value, which appears when no file transfer is in progress.
The File transfer progress field displays the progress of any current security log
upload operation.
10.14 Uploading the Configuration Log

The configuration log lists actions performed by users to configure the system.
This file is mostly used for security, to identify suspicious user actions. It can also
be used for troubleshooting.
When uploading the configuration log, the IP-20 functions as an FTP or SFTP
client. You must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are
using to perform the upload. For details, see Installing and Configuring an FTP or
SFTP Server.
To upload the configuration log:
2 Select Platform > Security > General > Configuration Log Upload. The
Configuration Log Upload page opens.
Page 557 of 1094

Figure 405: Configuration Log Upload Page

Figure 406: FTP Parameters Page (Configuration Log Upload)

Page 558 of 1094

blank.
PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server in the Server IPv6 address field.
8 In the Path field, enter the directory path to which you are uploading the files.
Enter the path relative to the FTP user's home directory, not the absolute
"//".
9 In the File Name field, enter the name you want to give to the exported
configuration log.
Note: The directory path and fie name, together, cannot be more
than:
If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4: 236
characters
If the IP address family is configured to be IPv6: 220
characters
10 Click Apply, then Close, to save the FTP parameters and return to the
Configuration Log Upload page.
11 Click Upload. The upload begins.
The File transfer status field displays the status of any pending configuration log
upload. Possible values are:
• Ready – The default value, which appears when no file transfer is in progress.
The File transfer progress field displays the progress of any current configuration
log upload operation.
Page 559 of 1094

10.15 Anti-Theft Protection

Anti-Theft Protection (AT) is supported for IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S. The
purpose of Anti-Theft Protection is to render IP-20 units that are stolen unusable,
thereby eliminating any incentive to steal such units.
Note: AT is not supported on IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S units with Unit
Redundancy.
In Anti-Theft (AT) mode, NetMaster NMS uses HTTPS to periodically authenticate
devices on which Anti-Theft is enabled. A shared code word and Sanction Delay
Counter are configured on NetMaster. NetMaster shares the code word and
Counter with AT-enabled IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S devices.
Each time NetMaster authenticates an AT-enabled device, the Sanction Delay
Counter on the device is reset to its original value. The Sanction Counter then
starts to count down until the next time NetMaster authenticates the device, at
which time the Sanction Counter is again reset to its original value.
If the counter reaches zero, the device enters Sanction Mode. In Sanction Mode,
the device resets every 30 minutes, making normal operation with the device
impossible. The device remains in Sanction mode until the next time NetMaster
authenticates the device. When NetMaster does authenticate the device,
Sanction Mode ends, and the Sanction Counter is reset to its original value.
To enable AT on an IP-20 device:
• Both NetMaster and the device must be configured to use HTTPS. See
Enabling HTTPS.
• The AT activation key must be configured on the device. See Configuring the
Activation Key.
The following activation key is required:
◦ SL-NE-Anti-theft
Important Note: You must configure the device and NetMaster to use HTTPS
before configuring the AT activation key on the device. Once
AT mode has been enabled, it will no longer be possible for the
device to work with HTTP.
Once these steps have been performed, AT can be configured on NetMaster for
IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S units that are being managed by NetMaster. For
details, refer to the NetMaster User Guide, R19A00 and higher.
It is important to note that once AT has been applied on the device and enabled
by NetMaster, it can never be permanently removed or disabled. It can be
temporarily disabled from NetMaster for seven days. Disabling AT requires a
special Disable AT license for NetMaster.
Also, once AT has been applied on the device and enabled by NetMaster, the
device cannot be downgraded to a CeraOS version lower than 11.0.
Page 560 of 1094

The following alarms relate to Anti-Theft Protection.
Table 91: Anti-Theft Alarms

ID Type Description
33001 Event Anti-Theft procedures have been enabled.

33002 Event Anti-Theft procedures have been temporary disabled.
33003 Alarm Anti-Theft Sanction Mode 24-hour window has been triggered.
33004 Alarm Anti-Theft Sanction Mode is active.
For more information about these alarms, see Alarms List.
Page 561 of 1094

11. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting

• Viewing Current Alarms
• Viewing Alarm Statistics
• Viewing and Saving the Event Log
• Editing Alarm Text and Severity and Disabling Alarms and Events
• Configuring Voltage Alarm Thresholds and Displaying Voltage PMs
• Uploading Unit Info
• Performing Diagnostics
Notes: CW mode, used to transmit a single or dual frequency tones for
debugging purposes, can be configured using the CLI. See Working in
CW Mode (Single or Dual Tone) (CLI).
You can configure a wait time of up to 120 seconds after an alarm is

cleared in the system before the alarm is actually reported as being
cleared. This prevents traps flooding the NMS in the event that some
external condition causes the alarm to be raised and cleared
continuously. The timeout for trap generation can be configured via
CLI. See Configuring a Timeout for Trap Generation (CLI).
11.1 Viewing Current Alarms

To display a list of current alarms in the unit:
1 Select Faults > Current Alarms. The Current Alarms page opens. The Current
Alarms page displays current alarms in the unit. Each row in the Current
Alarms table describes an alarm and provides basic information about the
alarm. For a description of the information provided in the Current Alarms
page, see Table 92: Alarm Information.
Figure 407: Current Alarms Page

2 To view more detailed information about an alarm, click + at the beginning of
the row or select the alarm and click View.
Page 562 of 1094

Figure 408: Current Alarms - View Page
Table 92: Alarm Information

Sequence Number (#) A unique sequence number assigned to the alarm by the system.
Time The date and time the alarm was triggered.
Severity The severity of the alarm. In the Current Alarms table, the
severity is indicated by a symbol. You can display a textual
description of the severity by holding the cursor over the symbol.
Note: You can edit the severity of alarm types in the Alarm
Configuration page. See Editing Alarm Text and Severity and
Disabling Alarms and Events.
Description A system-defined description of the alarm.
User Text Additional text that has been added to the system-defined
description of the alarm by users.
Note: You can add user text to alarms in the Alarm
Configuration page. See Editing Alarm Text and Severity and
Disabling Alarms and Events
Origin The module that generated the alarm.
Probable Cause This field only appears in the Current Alarms - View page. One or
more possible causes of the alarm, to be used for
troubleshooting.
Corrective Actions This field only appears in the Current Alarms - View page. One or
more possible corrective actions to be taken in troubleshooting
the alarm.
Alarm ID A unique ID that identifies the alarm type.
Page 563 of 1094

11.2 Viewing Alarm Statistics

To display a summary of alarms per module and per interface:
1 Select Faults > Alarm Statistics. The Alarm Statistics page opens.
Figure 409: Alarm Statistics Page

The Alarm Statistics page displays the number of current alarms per severity level
for each module, interface, and virtual interface (such as Multi-Carrier ABC
groups) in the unit. Only modules and interfaces for which one or more alarms are
currently raised are listed in the Alarm Statistics page.
11.3 Viewing and Saving the Event Log

The Event Log displays a list of current and historical events and information
about each event.
To display the Event Log:
1 Select Faults > Event Log. The Event Log opens. For a description of the
information provided in the Event Log, see Table 93: Event Log Information.
2 To export the Event Log to a CSV file, click Export to CSV in the lower right
corner of the Event Log page.
Figure 410: Event Log
Page 564 of 1094

Table 93: Event Log Information

Time The date and time the event was triggered.

Sequence Number (#) A unique sequence number assigned to the event by the system.
Severity The severity of the event. In the Event Log table, the severity is indicated
by a symbol. You can display a textual description of the severity by
holding the cursor over the symbol.
Note: You can edit the severity of event types in the Alarm
Configuration page. See Editing Alarm Text and Severity and Disabling
Alarms and Events.
State Indicates whether the event is currently raised or has been cleared.
Description A system-defined description of the event.
User Text Additional text that has been added to the system-defined description of
the event by users.
Note: You can add user text to events in the Alarm Configuration page.
See Editing Alarm Text and Severity and Disabling Alarms and Events.
Origin The module that generated the event.
Page 565 of 1094

11.4 Editing Alarm Text and Severity and Disabling Alarms and
Events
You can view a list of alarm types, edit the severity level assigned to individual
alarm types, disable alarms and events, and add additional descriptive text to
individual alarm types.
• Displaying Alarm Information
• Viewing the Probable Cause and Corrective Actions for an Alarm Type
• Editing an Alarm Type and Disabling Alarms and Events
• Setting Alarms to their Default Values
11.4.1 Displaying Alarm Information

To view the list of alarms defined in the system:
1 Select Faults > Alarm Configuration. The Alarm Configuration page opens. For
a description of the information provided in the Alarm Configuration page, see
Table 94: Alarm Configuration Page Parameters.
Figure 411: Alarm Configuration Page
Table 94: Alarm Configuration Page Parameters

Sequence Number (#) A unique sequence number assigned to the row by the system.
Alarm ID A unique ID that identifies the alarm type.
Severity The severity assigned to the alarm type. You can edit the severity in
the Alarm Configuration – Edit page. See Editing an Alarm Type and
Disabling Alarms and Events.
Description A system-defined description of the alarm.
Page 566 of 1094

Additional Text Additional text that has been added to the system-defined description
of the alarm by users. You can edit the text in the Alarm Configuration
– Edit page. See Editing an Alarm Type and Disabling Alarms and
Events.
Service Affecting Indicates whether the alarm is considered by the system to be service-
affecting (on) or not (off).
Alarm Admin Indicates whether the alarm is enabled or disabled. By default, all
alarms are enabled. See Editing an Alarm Type and Disabling Alarms
and Events.
11.4.2 Viewing the Probable Cause and Corrective Actions for an Alarm Type
Most alarm types include a system-defined probable cause and suggested
corrective actions. To view an alarm type's probable cause and corrective actions,
click + on the left side of the alarm type's row in the Alarm Configuration page.
The Probable Cause and Corrective Actions appear underneath the alarm type's
row, as shown below. If there is no +, that means no Probable Cause and
Corrective Actions are defined for the alarm type.
Figure 412: Alarm Configuration Page – Expanded
11.4.3 Editing an Alarm Type and Disabling Alarms and Events

You can change the severity of an alarm type, and add additional text to the alarm
type’s description.
You can also choose to disable selected alarms and events. Any alarm or event can
be disabled, so that no indication of the alarm is displayed, and no traps are sent
for the alarm.
If you disable an alarm that is currently raised, the alarm is treated as if it has
been cleared. If an alarm that has been disabled is enabled while it is in a raised
state, the alarm is treated as if it has just been raised when it is enabled.
If a timeout for trap generation is configured, and a disabled alarm is enabled
while the alarm is raised, the timeout count begins to run when the alarm is
enabled. If an alarm is disabled while raised, the timeout count begins to run upon
disabling the alarm, and an alarm cleared trap is sent when the timeout expires.
Page 567 of 1094

To change the severity of an alarm type, add additional text to the alarm type's
description, and disable and enable alarms and events:
1 Select the alarm type in the Alarm Configuration page (Figure 411).
2 Click Edit. The Alarm Configuration - Edit page opens.
Figure 413: Alarm Configuration - Edit Page

3 Modify the Severity and/or Additional Text fields.
4 To disable an alarm or event, select Disable in the Alarm Admin field. To re-
enable an alarm or event, select Enable in the Alarm Admin field.
11.4.4 Setting Alarms to their Default Values

To set all alarms to their default severity levels and text descriptions, click Set All
to Default in the Alarm Configuration page (Figure 411).
Page 568 of 1094

11.5 Configuring Voltage Alarm Thresholds and Displaying Voltage

PMs
You can configure undervoltage and overvoltage alarm thresholds and display
voltage PMs.
The default thresholds for IP-20C are:
• Undervoltage Raise Threshold: 32V
• Undervoltage Clear Threshold: 34V
• Overvoltage Raise Threshold: 60V
• Overvoltage Clear Threshold: 58V
The default thresholds for the other IP-20 all-outdoor products are:
These thresholds determine when the following alarms are raised and cleared:
• Alarm #32000: Under voltage
• Alarm #32001: Over voltage
To configure voltage alarm thresholds:
1 Select Faults > Voltage Alarm Configuration. The Voltage Alarm Configuration
page opens.
Note: You can also open the Voltage Alarm Configuration page by selecting
Platform > PM & Statistics > Voltage and clicking Thresholds.
Figure 414: Voltage Alarm Configuration Page
Page 569 of 1094

2 Click Edit. The Voltage Alarm Configuration – Edit page opens.
Figure 415: Voltage Alarm Configuration – Edit Page

3 Select the thresholds you want in the Undervoltage clear threshold (V),
Undervoltage raise threshold (V), Overvoltage clear threshold (V), and
Overvoltage raise threshold (V) fields. The configurable values for these
thresholds are 0-100V.
4 Click Apply.
To display voltage PMs:
1 Select Platform > PM & Statistics > Voltage. The Voltage PM Report page
opens.
Figure 416: Voltage PM Report Page
Page 570 of 1094


minutes.
Note: The Interface field displays PDC #1.
Table 95 describes the Voltage PMs.
Table 95: Voltage PMs

Minimum Voltage (V) The lowest voltage during the measured period.
Maximum Voltage (V) The highest voltage during the measured period.
Undervoltage Seconds The number of seconds the unit was in an undervoltage state during the
measured period.
Overvoltage Seconds The number of seconds the unit was in an overvoltage state during the
measured period.
reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred during
the interval.
Page 571 of 1094

11.6 Uploading Unit Info

You can generate a Unit Information file, which includes technical data about the
unit. This file can be uploaded and forwarded to customer support, at their
request, to help in analyzing issues that may occur.
You can upload the Unit Information file using HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, or SFTP.
Notes: For troubleshooting, it is important that an updated configuration file
be included in User Info files that are sent to customer support. To
ensure that an up-to-date configuration file is included, it is
recommended to back up the unit’s configuration before generating
the Unit Info file.
For IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S units with Unit Redundancy, you
must use FTP or SFTP to upload the User Information file.
11.6.1 Uploading a Unit Info File Via HTTP or HTTPS

To uploading a User Information file using HTTP or HTTPS:
1 Platform > Management > Unit Info. The Unit Info page opens.
2 Select HTTP.
Figure 417: Unit Info Page – HTTP/HTTPS Upload

3 Select HTTP.
4 Click Create to create the Unit Information file. The following fields display the
status of the file creation process:
◦ File Creation Status – Displays the file creation status. You must wait until
the status is Success to upload the file. Possible values are:
Page 572 of 1094

◦ Ready – The default value, which appears when no file is being

created.
◦ Generating File – The file is being generated.
◦ Success – The file has been successfully created. You may now
upload the file.
◦ Failure – The file was not successfully created.
◦ File Creation Progress – Displays the progress of the current Unit
Information file creation operation.
5 Click Export. The upload begins. The following fields display the status of the
upload process:
◦ File Transfer Status – Displays the status of any pending Unit Information
file upload. Possible values are:
◦ Ready – The default value, which appears when no file transfer is in
progress.
◦ File-in-transfer – The upload operation is in progress.
◦ Success – The file has been successfully uploaded.
◦ Failure – The file was not successfully uploaded.
If you try to export the file before it has been created, the following error
message appears: Error #3-Invalid set value.
If this occurs, wait about two minutes then click Export again.
◦ File Creation Progress – Displays the progress of the current Unit
Information file upload operation.
11.6.2 Uploading a Unit Info File Via FTP or SFTP

When uploading a Unit Information file via FTP or SFTP, the IP-20 functions as an
FTP or SFTP client. You must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or
laptop you are using to perform the upload. For details, see Installing and
To generate and upload a Unit Information file via FTP or SFTP:
2 Select Platform > Management > Unit Info. The Unit Info page opens.
Page 573 of 1094

Figure 418: Unit Info Page – FTP/SFTP Upload

3 Select FTP.
4 Set the FTP parameters:
i Click FTP Parameters. The FTP Parameters page opens.

ii In the File transfer protocol field, select the file transfer protocol you want
to use (FTP or SFTP).
iii In the Username field, enter the user name you configured in the FTP
server.
Page 574 of 1094

iv In the Password field, enter the password you configured in the FTP
server. If you did not configure a password for your FTP user, simply leave
this field blank.
v If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4, enter the IPv4 address of
the PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server in the Server IPv4 address
vi If the IP address family is configured to be IPv6, enter the IPv6 address of
the PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server in the Server IPv6 address
vii In the Path field, enter the directory path to which you are uploading the
file. Enter the path relative to the FTP user's home directory, not the
absolute path. If the location is the home directory, it should be left
empty. If the location is a sub-folder under the home directory, specify the
folder name. If the shared folder is "C:\", this parameter can be left empty
or populated with "//".
viii In the File Name field, enter the name you want to give to the exported
Unit Information file.
ix Click Apply to save your settings.
5 Click Create to create the Unit Information file. The following fields display the
status of the file creation process:
◦ File creation status – Displays the file creation status. You must wait until
the status is Success to upload the file. Possible values are:
◦ Ready – The default value, which appears when no file is being
created.
◦ Generating File – The file is being generated.
◦ Success – The file has been successfully created. You may now upload
the file.
◦ Failure – The file was not successfully created.
◦ File creation progress – Displays the progress of the current Unit
Information file creation operation.
6 Click Export. The upload begins. The following fields display the status of the
upload process:
◦ File transfer status – Displays the status of any pending Unit Information
file upload. Possible values are:
◦ Ready – The default value, which appears when no file transfer is in
progress.
◦ File-in-transfer – The upload operation is in progress.
◦ Success – The file has been successfully uploaded.
◦ Failure – The file was not successfully uploaded.
◦ If you try to export the file before it has been created, the following
error message appears: Error #3-Invalid set value. If this occurs, wait
about two minutes then click Export again.
◦ File transfer progress – Displays the progress of the current Unit
Information file upload operation.
Page 575 of 1094

11.7 Performing Diagnostics

• Performing Radio Loopback
• Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM)
11.7.1 Performing Radio Loopback

Note: To perform radio loopback, the radio must be set to its maximum TX
power.
To perform loopback on a radio:
1 Select Radio > Diagnostics > Loopback. The Radio Loopbacks page opens.
Figure 420: Radio Loopbacks Page

2 Select the slot on which you want to perform loopback and click Edit. The
Radio Loopbacks – Edit page opens.
Note: You cannot perform loopback directly on a Multi-Carrier ABC group. To
perform traffic-level diagnostics on a Multi-Carrier ABC group, the
loopback must be activated for all members of the group. Radio-level
diagnostics can still be performed on individual members of the group.
Page 576 of 1094

Figure 421: Radio Loopbacks – Edit Page

3 In the Loopback timeout (minutes) field, enter the timeout, in minutes, for
automatic termination of the loopback (0-1440). A value of 0 indicates that
there is no timeout.
4 In the RF loopback field, select On.
5 Click Apply.
11.7.2 Performing Ethernet Loopback

Ethernet loopbacks can be performed on any logical Ethernet interface except a
LAG. When Ethernet loopback is enabled on an interface, the system loops back
all packets ingressing the interface. This enables loopbacks to be performed over
the link from other points in the network.
To perform Ethernet loopback:
opens (Figure 259).
Loopback. The Logical Interfaces – Loopback page opens.
Figure 422: Logical Interfaces – Loopback Page
Page 577 of 1094

3 In the Ethernet loopback admin field, select Enable to enable Ethernet

loopback on the logical interface, or Disable to disable Ethernet loopback on
the logical interface.
4 In the Ethernet loopback duration (sec) field, enter the loopback duration
time (in seconds).
5 In the Swap MAC address admin field, select whether to swap DA and SA MAC
addresses during the loopback. Swapping addresses prevents Ethernet loops
from occurring. It is recommended to enable MAC address swapping if MSTP
or LLDP is enabled.
6 Click Apply to initiate the loopback.
Page 578 of 1094

11.7.3 Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM)

• SOAM Overview
• Configuring MDs
• Configuring MA/MEGs
• Configuring MEPs
• Displaying Remote MEPs
• Displaying Last Invalid CCMS
• Configuring MIPs with MHF Default
• Performing Loopback
Page 579 of 1094

11.7.3.1 SOAM Overview

The Y.1731 standard and the MEF-30 specifications define Service OAM (SOAM).
SOAM is concerned with detecting, isolating, and reporting connectivity faults
spanning networks comprising multiple LANs, including LANs other than IEEE
802.3 media.
Y.1731 Ethernet FM (Fault Management) consists of three protocols that operate
together to aid in fault management:
• Continuity check
• Link trace
• Loopback
Note: Link trace is planned for future release.
IP-20 utilizes these protocols to maintain smooth system operation and non-stop
data flow.
The following are the basic building blocks of FM:
• MD (Maintenance Domain) – An MD defines the management space on a
network, typically owned and operated by a single entity, for which
connectivity faults are managed via SOAM.
• MA/MEG (Maintenance Association/Maintenance Entity Group) – An
MA/MEG contains a set of MEPs or MIPs.
• MEP (MEG End Points) – Each MEP is located on a service point of an Ethernet
service at the boundary of the MEG. By exchanging CCMs (Continuity Check
Messages), local and remote MEPs have the ability to detect the network
status, discover the MAC address of the remote unit/port where the peer
MEP is defined, and identify network failures.
• MIP (MEG Intermediate Points) – Similar to MEPs, but located inside the MEG
and can only respond to, not initiate, CCM messages.
• CCM (Continuity Check Message) – MEPs in the network exchange CCMs with
their peers at defined intervals. This enables each MEP to detect loss of
connectivity or failure in the remote MEP.
Page 580 of 1094

11.7.3.2 Configuring MDs

In the current release, you can define one MD, with an MD Format of None.
To add an MD:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > SOAM > MD. The SOAM MD page opens.
Figure 423: SOAM MD Page

2 Click Add. The SOAM MD – Add page opens.
Figure 424: SOAM MD – Add Page

3 In the MD Name field, enter an identifier for the MD (up to 43 alphanumeric
characters). The MD Name should be unique over the domain.
4 In the MD Format field, select None.
Page 581 of 1094

Note: Support for MDs with the MD format Character String is planned for
future release. In this release, the software enables you to configure
such MDs, but they have no functionality.
5 In the MD Level field, select the maintenance level of the MD (0-7). The
maintenance level ensures that the CFM frames for each domain do not
interfere with each other. Where domains are nested, the encompassing
domain must have a higher level than the domain it encloses. The
maintenance level is carried in all CFM frames that relate to that domain. The
MD Level must be the same on both sides of the link.
Note: In the current release, the MD level is not relevant to the SOAM
functionality.
The MHF (MIP) Creation field displays the type of MHF format included in the
CCMs sent in this MD (in the current release, this is MHF none and MHF default).
The Sender TLV Content field displays the type of TLVs included in the CCMs sent
in this MD (in the current release, this is only Send ID Chassis).
Page 582 of 1094

11.7.3.3 Configuring MA/MEGs

You can configure up to 1280 MEGs per network element. MEGs are classified as
Fast MEGs or Slow MEGs according to the CCM interval (see Table 96):
• Fast MEGs have a CCM interval of 1 second.
• Slow MEGs have a CCM interval of 10 seconds, 1 minute, or 10 minutes.
You can configure up to 32 MEP pairs per network element.
To add a MEG:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > SOAM > MA/MEG. The SOAM MA/MEG page
opens.
Figure 425: SOAM MA/MEG Page

2 Click Add MEG. The SOAM MA/MEG – Add page opens.
Page 583 of 1094

Figure 426: SOAM MA/MEG – Add Page

3 Configure the fields described in Table 96.
Table 97 describes the status (read-only) fields in the SOAM MA/MEG Component
table.
Table 96: SOAM MA/MEG Configuration Parameters

MD (ID, Name) Select the MD to which you are assigning the MEP.
MA/MEG short name Enter a name for the MEG (up to 44 alphanumeric characters).
MEG Level Select a MEG level (0-7). The MEG level must be the same for MEGs
on both sides of the link. Higher levels take priority over lower levels.
If MEGs are nested, the OAM flow of each MEG must be clearly
identifiable and separable from the OAM flows of the other MEGs. In
cases where the OAM flows are not distinguishable by the Ethernet
layer encapsulation itself, the MEG level in the OAM frame
distinguishes between the OAM flows of nested MEGs.
Eight MEG levels are available to accommodate different network
deployment scenarios. When customer, provider, and operator data
path flows are not distinguishable based on means of the Ethernet
layer encapsulations, the eight MEG levels can be shared among them
to distinguish between OAM frames belonging to nested MEGs of
customers, providers and operators. The default MEG level
assignment among customer, provider, and operator roles is:
• The customer role is assigned MEG levels 6 and 7.
Page 584 of 1094

• The provider role is assigned MEG levels 3 through 5.
• The operator role is assigned MEG levels: 0 through 2.
The default MEG level assignment can be changed via a mutual
agreement among customer, provider, and/or operator roles.
The number of MEG levels used depends on the number of nested
MEs for which the OAM flows are not distinguishable based on the
Ethernet layer encapsulation.
CCM Interval The interval at which CCM messages are sent within the MEG. Options
are:
• 1 second (default)
• 10 seconds
• 1 minute
• 10 minutes
It takes a MEP 3.5 times the CCM interval to determine a change in
the status of its peer MEP. For example, if the CCM interval is 1
second, a MEP will detect failure of the peer 3.5 seconds after it
receives the first CCM failure message. If the CCM interval is 10
minutes, the MEP will detect failure of the peer 35 minutes after it
receives the first CCM failure message.
Service ID Select an Ethernet service to which the MEG belongs. You must define
the service before you configure the MEG.
Table 97: SOAM MA/MEG Status Parameters

MIP Creation Determines whether MIPs are created on the MEG. Options are:
• MHF none – No MIPs are created.
• MHF default – MIPs are created automatically on any service
point in the MEG’s Ethernet service.
• MHF explicit – MIPs are created on the service points of the
MEG when a lower-level MEP exists on the service point. This
option is usually used when the operator’s domain is
encompassed by another domain.
• MHF defer – No MIPs are created. Not used in the current
release.
MA/MEG ID Automatically generated by the system. You can change this value.
MA/MEG Name Format Reserved for future use. In the current release, this is Char String only.
Tx Sender ID TLV content Sender ID TLV is transmitted.
Port Status TLV TX Reserved for future use. No Port Status TLV is transmitted in the CCM
frame.
Interface Status TLV TX An Interface Status TLV is transmitted in the CCM frame, indicating
the operational status of the interface on which the transmitting MEP
is configured (Up or Down).
Page 585 of 1094

MEP List Lists all local and remote MEPs that have been defined for the MEG.
Page 586 of 1094

11.7.3.4 Configuring MEPs

Each MEP is attached to a service point in an Ethernet service. The service and
service point must be configured before you configure the MEP. See Configuring
Ethernet Service(s).
Each MEP inherits the same VLAN, C-VLAN, or S-VLAN configuration as the service
point on which it resides. See Configuring Service Points.
In order to set the VLAN used by CCM/LBM/LTM if the service point is defined
ambiguously (for example PIPE, Bundle-C, Bundle-S, or All-to-One), the service
point’s C-VLAN/S-VLAN parameter should not be set to N.A.
To configure a MEP, you must:
1 Add MEPs to the relevant MA/MEG. In this stage, you add both local and
remote MEPs. The only thing you define at this point is the MEP ID. See
Adding Local and Remote MEPs.
2 Configure the local MEPs. At this point, you determine which MEPs are local
MEPs. The system automatically defines the other MEPs you configured in the
previous step as remote MEPs. See Configuring the Local MEPs.
3 Enable the Local MEPs. See Enabling Local MEPs.
Page 587 of 1094

Adding Local and Remote MEPs

To add a MEP to the MA/MEG:
1 In the SOAM MA/MEG page, select a MA/MEG and click MEP List. The MEP
List page opens.
Figure 427: MEP List Page

2 Click Add. The Add MEP page opens.
Figure 428: Add MEP Page

3 In the MEP ID field, enter a MEP ID (1-8191).
Page 588 of 1094

Configuring the Local MEPs

Once you have added local and remote MEPs, you must define the MEPs and
determine which are the local MEPs:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > SOAM > MEP. The SOAM MEP page opens.
Table 98 lists and describes the parameters displayed in the SOAM MEP page.
Figure 429: SOAM MEP Page

Note: To display MEPs belonging to a specific MEG, select the MEG in the
Filter by MA/MEG field near the top of the SOAM MEP page. To
display all MEPs configured for the unit, select All.
2 Click Add. Page 1 of the Add SOAM MEP wizard opens.
Figure 430: Add SOAM MEP Wizard – Page 1

3 In the MA/MEG Name field, select an MA/MEG.
4 Click Next. Page 2 of the Add SOAM MEP wizard opens.
Page 589 of 1094

Figure 431: Add SOAM MEP Wizard – Page 2

5 In the Direction field, select Up or Down.
6 In the MEP ID field, select a MEP ID from the list of MEPs you have added to
the selected MEG.
7 In the Service Point field, select the service point on which you want to place
the MEP.
8 Click Finish. The Add SOAM MEP wizard displays the parameters you have
selected.
Figure 432: Add SOAM MEP Wizard –Summary Page

9 Verify that you want to submit the displayed parameters and click Submit.
Page 590 of 1094

Table 98: SOAM MEP Parameters

MD (ID, Name) The MD ID and name are automatically generated by the system.
MA/MEG (ID, Name) The MA/MEG ID and name are automatically generated by the
system.
MEP ID The MEP ID.
Interface Location The interface on which the service point associated with the MEP is
located.
SP ID The service point ID.
MEP Direction Up or Down.
MEP Fault Notification Indicates the status of the defect SOAM state machine. Possible
State values are:
• Fng Reset – Initial state.
• Fng Defect – Transient state when a defect is detected.
• Fng Defect Reported – The defect state is steady (stable).
• Fng Defect Clearing – Transient state when a defect is in the
process of being cleared.
• Fng Defect Cleared – The defect has been cleared (state =
transient).
Connectivity Status Indicates whether a MEP can exchange PDU (CCM, Loopback, LTR)
with its remote MEP. A MEP with some defect or an inactive MEP
cannot exchange PDUs.
• inactive – At least one of the remote MEPs is in rMEPFailed
status (not discovered).
active – All remote MEPs are discovered correctly and have an
rMEPOk status.
MEP Active Indicates whether the MEP is enabled (True) or disabled (False).
MEP CCM TX Enable Indicates whether the MEP is sending CCMs (True/False).
CCM and LTM Priority The p-bit included in CCMs and/or LTM frames sent by this MEP (0 to
7).
MEP Defects Indicates if a defect has been detected by the MEP level.
RMEP List Once you have configured at least one local MEP, all other MEPs that
you have added but not configured as local MEPs are displayed here
and are considered to be remote MEPs.
Page 591 of 1094

Enabling Local MEPs

Once you have added a MEP and defined it as a local MEP, you must enable the
MEP.
To enable a MEP:
1 In the SOAM MEP page (Figure 429), select the MEP you want to enable.
2 Click Edit. The SOAM MEP - Edit page opens.
Figure 433: SOAM MEP - Edit Page

3 In the MEP Active field, select True.
4 In the MEP CCM TX Enable field, select True.
5 In the CCM and LTM Priority field, select the p-bit that will be included in
CCMs sent by this MEP (0 to 7). It is recommended to select 7.
Page 592 of 1094

11.7.3.5 Displaying Remote MEPs

To display a list of remote MEPs (RMEPs) and their parameters:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > SOAM > MEP. The SOAM MEP page opens
(Figure 429).
2 Select a MEP and click RMEP List. The SOAM MEP DB table is displayed.
Figure 434: SOAM MEP DB Table

Table 99 lists and describes the parameters displayed in the SOAM MEP DB table.
To return to the SOAM MEP page, click Back to MEP.
Note: To display these parameters in a separate window for a specific
remote MEP, select the RMEP ID and click View.
Table 99: SOAM MEP DB Table Parameters

RMEP ID The remote MEP ID.

RMEP Operational State The operational state of the remote MEP.
RMEP Last rx CCM MAC The MAC Address of the interface on which the remote MEP is
Address located.
RMEP Last CCM OK or Fail The timestamp marked by the remote MEP indicated the most
Timestamp recent CCM OK or failure it recorded. If none, this field indicates the
amount of time since SOAM was activated.
RMEP Last rx CCM RDI Displays the state of the RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) bit in the
Indication most recent CCM received by the remote MEP:
• True – RDI was received in the last CCM.
• False – No RDI was received in the last CCM.
RMEP Last rx CCM Port The Port Status TLV in the most recent CCM received from the
Status TLV remote MEP.
Reserved for future use.
RMEP Last rx CCM Displays the operational status of the interface on which the remote
Interface Status TLV MEP has been defined.
Page 593 of 1094

RMEP Last rx CCM Chassis Displays the format of the remote chassis (always the MAC address).
ID Format
RMEP Last rx CCM Chassis Displays the MAC address of the remote chassis.
ID
Page 594 of 1094

11.7.3.6 Displaying Last Invalid CCMS

To display the entire frame of the last CCM error message and the last CCM cross-
connect error message received by a specific local MEP:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > SOAM > MEP. The SOAM MEP page opens
(Figure 429).
2 Select a MEP and click Last Invalid CCMS. The MEP Last Invalid CCMS page
opens.
Figure 435: MEP Last Invalid CCMS Page

The Last RX error CCM message field displays the frame of the last CCM that
contains an error received by the MEP.
The Last RX Xcon fault message field displays the frame of the last CCM that
contains a cross-connect error received by the MEP.
Note: A cross-connect error occurs when a CCM is received from a remote
MEP that has not been defined locally.
Page 595 of 1094

11.7.3.7 Configuring MIPs with MHF Default

If you configure a MEG with the MHF default option, MIPS are created
automatically on all service points of the service to which the MEG is attached.
These MIPs cannot be displayed in the Web EMS, but can be displayed via CLI. See
Displaying MEP and Remote MEP Attributes (CLI).
Creating MIPs is subject to the following limitations:
• Once you have created a MEG that contains MIPS, i.e., a MEG with the MHF
default attribute, you cannot create a MEG with the MHF none attribute on
the same or higher level on the same Ethernet Service. However, you can
create MEGs with the MHF none attribute on the same service on lower levels
then the MEG with the MHF default attribute.
• MEPs cannot be attached to a MEG with the MHF default attribute.
• The Ethernet service and service points must already be defined before
creating the MEG with the MHF default attribute in order for MIPs to be
created on the service points.
To configure MEGs with MIPs:
1 Create a MEG with the MHF none attribute on the intended Ethernet service.
See Configuring MA/MEGs.
2 Select the MEG and click Edit. The SOAM MA/MEG – Edit page opens.
3 In the MIP Creation field, select MHF Default.
Page 596 of 1094

11.7.3.8 Performing Loopback

To perform loopback on a MEP:
1 In the SOAM MEP page (Figure 429), select the MEP on which you want to
perform the loopback.
2 Click Loopback. The SOAM MEP – Loopback page opens.
Figure 436: SOAM MEP Loopback Page
Page 597 of 1094

3 In the Loopback Destination area, select from the following options:

◦ MEP ID – If you select MEP ID, you must enter the MEP ID of the MEP on
the interface to which you want to perform the loopback in the Loopback
Messages Destination MEP ID field. If you select MEP ID, the loopback will
only be activated if CCMs have already been received from the MEP. For
this reason, it is recommended to initiate loopback via MAC address.
◦ MAC Address (default) – If you select MAC Address, you must enter the
MAC address of the interface to which you want to send the loopback in
the Loopback Messages Destination MAC Address. If you are not sure
what the interface’s MAC address is, you can get it from the Interface
Manager by selecting Platform > Interfaces > Interface Manager.
4 In the Loopback messages to be transmitted field, select the number of
loopback messages to transmit (0 – 1024). If you select 0, loopback will not be
performed.
5 In the Loopback Messages Interval field, select the interval (in seconds)
between each loopback message (0.1 – 60). You can select in increments of
1/10 second. However, the lowest possible interval is 1 second. If you select a
smaller interval, the actual interval will still be 1 second.
6 In the Loopback Messages Frame Size field, select the frame size for the
loopback messages (64 – 1516). Note that for tagged frames, the frame size
will be slightly larger than the selected frame size.
7 In the Loopback Messages Priority field, select a value (0 – 7) for the priority
bit for tagged frames.
8 In the Drop Enable field, choose the value of the DEI field for tagged loopback
frames (True or False). The default value is False.
9 In the Loopback Messages Data Pattern Type field, select the type of data
pattern to be sent in an OAM PDU Data TLV. Options are All Zeros and All
Ones. The default value is All Zeros.
10 Click Apply to begin the loopback. The Loopback session state field displays
the status of the loopback:
◦ SOAM Loopback Complete – The loopback has been successfully
completed.
◦ SOAM Loopback Stopped – The loopback has been manually stopped.
◦ SOAM Loopback Failed – The loopback failed.
◦ SOAM Loopback Active – The loopback is currently active.
◦ SOAM Loopback Inactive – No loopback has been initiated.
The remote interface will answer and the loopback session will be completed if
either of the following is true:
• A remote MEP has been defined on the destination interface.
• A MIP has been defined on the destination interface. See Configuring MIPs
with MHF Default.
Note: To manually stop a loopback, you must use the CLI. Enter the following
root> ethernet soam loopback stop meg-id <meg-id> mep-id <mep-id>
Page 598 of 1094

12. Web EMS Utilities

• Restarting the HTTP Server
• Calculating an ifIndex
• Displaying, Searching, and Saving a list of MIB Entities
12.1 Restarting the HTTP Server

To restart the unit’s HTTP server:
1 Select Utilities > Restart HTTP. The Restart HTTP page opens.
Figure 437: Restart HTTP Page

2 Click Restart. The system prompts you for confirmation.
3 Click OK. The HTTP server is restarted, and all HTTP sessions are ended. After a
few seconds, the Web EMS prompts you to log in again.
12.2 Calculating an ifIndex

The ifIndex calculator enables you to:
• Calculate the ifIndex for any object in the system.
• Determine the object represented by any valid ifIndex.
To use the ifIndex calculator:
1 Select Utilities > ifCalculator. The ifIndex Calculator page opens.
Page 599 of 1094

Figure 438: ifIndex Calculator Page

• If you have an ifIndex and you want to determine which hardware item in the
unit it represents, enter the number in the ifIndex number field and click
Calculate Index to name. A description of the object appears in the Result
field.
• To determine the ifIndex of a hardware item in the unit, such as an interface,
card, or slot, select the object type in the Functional Type field, select the Slot
and Port (if relevant), and click Calculate Name to Index. The object’s ifIndex
appears in the Result field.
12.3 Displaying, Searching, and Saving a list of MIB Entities

To display a list of entities in the IP-20 private MIB:
1 Select Utilities > ifCalculator. The ifIndex Calculator page opens.
Figure 439: MIB Reference Table Page

The MIB Reference Table is customized to the type of IP-20 product you are using.
There are three separate versions of the MIB Reference Table:
Page 600 of 1094

• IP-20N, IP-20A, and IP-20LH

• IP-20G and IP-20GX
• IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V
Note: Even though the MIB Reference Table is customized to these three
product groups, some of the entities listed in the Table may not be
relevant to the particular unit you are using. This may occur because of
activation key restrictions, minor differences between product types,
or simply because a certain feature is not used in a particular
configuration. For example, the column
genEquipUnitShelfSlotConfigTable is relevant to IP-20GX but not to IP-
20G.
• To search for a text string, enter the string in the Search field and press
<Enter>. Items that contain the string are displayed in yellow. Searches are
not case-sensitive.
• To save the MIB Reference Table as a .csv file, click Save to File.
Page 601 of 1094

Section III:
CLI Configuration
Page 602 of 1094

13. Getting Started (CLI)

• General (CLI)
• Establishing a Connection (CLI)
• Logging On (CLI)
• General CLI Commands
• Changing Your Password (CLI)
• Configuring In-Band Management (CLI)
• Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding) (CLI)
• Changing the Management IP Address (CLI)
• Configuring the Activation Key (CLI)
• Setting the Time and Date (Optional) (CLI)
• Enabling the Interfaces (CLI)
• Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) (CLI)
• Configuring the Radio Parameters (CLI)
• Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power (CLI)
• Configuring the RSL Threshold Alarm (CLI)
• Operating in FIPS Mode (CLI)
• Configuring Grouping (Optional) (CLI)
• Creating Service(s) for Traffic (CLI)
13.1 General (CLI)

Before connection over the radio hop is established, it is of high importance that
you assign to the IP-20 unit a dedicated IP address, according to an IP plan for the
total network. See Changing the Management IP Address (CLI).
By default, a new IP-20 unit has the following IP settings:
• IP address: 192.168.1.1
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Warning! If the connection over the link is established with identical IP
addresses, an IP address conflict will occur and remote connection to
the element on the other side of the link may be lost.
13.2 Establishing a Connection (CLI)

Connect the IP-20 unit to a PC by means of a TP cable. The cable is connected to
the MGT port on the IP-20 and to the LAN port on the PC. Refer to the Installation
Guide for the type of unit you are connecting for cable connection instructions.
Address (CLI) and Changing Your Password (CLI).
Page 603 of 1094

13.2.1 PC Setup (CLI)

To obtain contact between the PC and the IP-20 unit, it is necessary to configure
an IP address on the PC within the same subnet as the IP-20 unit. The
default IP-20 IP address is 192.168.1.1. Set the PC address to e.g. 192.168.1.10
and subnet mask to 255.255.255.0. Note the initial settings before changing.
Address (CLI) and Changing Your Password (CLI).
13.3 Logging On (CLI)

Use a telnet connection to manage the IP-20 via CLI. You can use any standard
telnet client, such as PuTTy or ZOC Terminal. Alternatively, you can simply use the
telnet <ip address> command from the CMD window of your PC or laptop.
The default IP address of the unit is 192.168.1.1. Establish a telnet connection to

the unit using the default IP address.
When you have connected to the unit, a login prompt appears. For example:
login:
At the prompt, enter the default login user name: admin

A password prompt appears. Enter the default password: admin
The root prompt appears. For example:
login: admin
Password:
Last login: Mon Apr 13 11:27:02 on console
IP20C
root>
Page 604 of 1094

13.4 General CLI Commands

To display all command levels available from your current level, press <TAB>
twice. For example, if you press <TAB> twice at the root level, the following is
displayed:
root>
auto-state-propagation ethernet exit multi-carrier-abc
platform quit radio radio-groups
switch-back switch-to wait
Some of these are complete commands, such as quit and exit. Others constitute
the first word or phrase for a series of commands, such as ethernet and radio.
Similarly, if you enter the word “platform” and press <TAB> twice, the first word
or phrase of every command that follows platform is displayed:
root> platform
activation-key configuration if-manager management
security software status
sync unit-info unit-info-file
root> platform
To auto-complete a command, press <TAB> once.

Use the up and down arrow keys to navigate through recent commands.
Use the ? key to display a list of useful commands and their definitions.
At the prompt, or at any point in entering a command, enter the word help to
display a list of available commands. If you enter help at the prompt, a list of all
commands is displayed. If you enter help after entering part of a command, a list
of commands that start with the portion of the command you have already
entered is displayed.
To scroll up and down a list, use the up and down arrow keys.
To end the list and return to the most recent prompt, press the letter q.
To ping another network device, enter one of the following commands:
root> ping ipv4-address <x.x.x.x> count <number of echo packets>
packet-size <packet-size>
root> ping ipv6-address <ipv6> count <number of echo packets>

packet-size <packet-size>
The optional count parameter determines how many packets are sent. This
parameter can be an integer from 1 to 1000. The default value is 4.
The optional packet-size parameter determines the size of each packet, in
bytes. This parameter can be an integer from 64 to 1480. The default value is 64.
The ping command is available from all views (e.g., root, interface views, group
views).
Page 605 of 1094

13.5 Changing Your Password (CLI)

It is recommended to change your default Admin password as soon as you have
logged into the system.
In addition to the Admin password, there is an additional password protected user
account, “root user”, which is configured in the system. The root user password
and instructions for changing this password are available from Ceragon Customer
Support. It is strongly recommended to change this password.
To change your password, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security access-control password edit own-
password
The system will prompt you to enter your existing password. The system will then
prompt you to enter the new password.
If Enforce Password Strength is activated, the password must meet the following
criteria:
• Password length must be at least eight characters.
• Password must include characters of at least three of the following character
types: lower case letters, upper case letters, digits, and special characters. For
purposes of meeting this requirement, upper case letters at the beginning of
the password and digits at the end of the password are not counted.
• The last five passwords you used cannot be reused.
See Configuring the Password Security Parameters (CLI).
Page 606 of 1094

13.6 Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding) (CLI)

Mate Management Access enables the use of in-band management for nodes that
use two IP-20C or IP-20C-HP units (4x4 MIMO, 2+2 XPIC, and 4+0 Multi-Carrier
ABC), where traffic comes from an external switch operating in LAG mode. When
Mate Management Access is enabled, the two units exchange incoming
management packets, ensuring that all management data is received by both
units.
Note: Mate Management Access can be used regardless of whether the
unit’s IP address is in IPv4 or IPv6 format.
Mate Management Access should only be enabled for nodes receiving traffic from
a LAG, where in-band management is to be used. If either of these conditions is
not present, Mate Management Access should be disabled. By default, the feature
is disabled.
The following are the requirements for using Mate Management Access:
• The management ports of both IP-20 units must be connected by a protection
cable. The cable can be ordered in a variety of sizes, depending on the
distance between the two IP-20 units. See Table 100.
• To ensure proper convergence after failure events, Automatic State
Propagation must be enabled on both units at the local node and both units at
the remote node. See Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss
Forwarding (CLI).
• Mate Management Access must be enabled on both units at the local node
and both units at the remote node. On each unit, Mate Management Access
must be enabled before configuring in-band management.
Table 100: MIMO Protection Cables

Marketing Model Description
IP-20_MIMO_Prot_mng_cbl_1m IP-20C MIMO or Prot management cable 1m
IP-20_MIMO_Prot_ mng_cbl_5m IP-20C MIMO or Prot management cable 5m
IP-20C MIMO or Prot management cable

IP-20_MIMO_Prot_ mng_cbl_10m 10m


To enable Mate Management Access, enter the following command:

root> platform management mate-access admin enable
Note: When you enable or disable Mate Management Access, the unit is
reset.
To disable Mate Management Access, enter the following command:
root> platform management mate-access admin disable
Page 607 of 1094

To display whether Mate Management Access is enabled, enter the following

command:
root> platform management mate-access show
Notes: Mate Management Access can only be configured via CLI.
Upon recovery from a failure event, management may be lost for up

to 40 seconds.
Page 608 of 1094

13.7 Configuring In-Band Management (CLI)

You can configure in-band management in order to manage the unit remotely via
its radio and/or Ethernet interfaces.
Note: Before configuring in-band management, it is recommended to review
the configuration recommendations for in-band management listed in
Configuration Tips.
To use in-band management for nodes that utilize two IP-20C or
IP-20C-HP units (4x4 MIMO, 2x2 XPIC, and 4+0 Multi-Carrier ABC), you
must first configure Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding). See
Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding) (CLI).
Each IP-20 unit includes a pre-defined management service with Service ID 257.
The management service is a multipoint service that connects the two local
management ports and the network element host CPU in a single service. In order
to enable in-band management, you must add at least one service point to the
management service, in the direction of the remote site or sites from which you
want to access the unit for management. For instructions on adding service
points, see Configuring Service Points (CLI).
Note: In order to use in-band management, it must be supported on the
external switch.
13.8 Changing the Management IP Address (CLI)

Related Topics:
• Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications (CLI)
• Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address (CLI)
You can enter the unit's address in IPv4 format and/or in IPv6 format. The unit will
receive communications whether they were sent to its IPv4 address or its IPv6
address.
To set the unit's IP address in IPv4 format, enter the following command in root
view to configure the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway:
root> platform management ip set ipv4-address <ipv4-address>
subnet <subnet> gateway <gateway> name <name> description
<name>
Table 101: IP Address (IPv4) CLI Parameters

Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description
ipv4-address Dotted decimal format. Any valid IPv4 address. The IP address for the unit.
subnet Dotted decimal format. Any valid subnet mask. The subnet mask for the
unit.
gateway Dotted decimal format. Any valid IPv4 address. The default gateway for
the unit (optional).
name Text String. Enter a name (optional).
Page 609 of 1094


description Text String. Enter a description
(optional).
To set the unit's IP address in IPv6 format, enter the following command in root
view to configure the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway:
root> platform management ip set ipv6-address <ipv6-address>
prefix-length <prefix-length> gateway <gateway>
Note: It is recommended not to configure addresses of type FE:80::/64 (Link

Local addresses) because traps are not sent for these addresses.
Table 102: IP Address (IPv6) CLI Parameters

ipv6-address Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 The IP address for the
hexadecimal digits address. unit.
separated by colons.
prefix-length Number. 1-128 The prefix-length for
the unit.
gateway Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 The default gateway for
hexadecimal digits address. the unit (optional).
The command below sets the following parameters:

• IPv4 Address - 192.168.1.160
• Subnet Mask – 255.255.0.0
• Default Gateway – 192.168.1.100
root> platform management ip set ipv4-address 192.168.1.160
subnet 255.255.0.0 gateway 192.168.1.100
The command below sets the following parameters:

• IPv6 Address - FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329
• Prefix length – 64
• Default Gateway - FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329
root> platform management ip set ipv6-address
FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329 prefix-length 64
gateway FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329
Page 610 of 1094

13.9 Configuring the Activation Key (CLI)

• Activation Key Overview (CLI)
• Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters (CLI)
• Entering the Activation Key (CLI)
• Activating Demo Mode (CLI)
• Activation Key Reclaim (CLI)
• Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features (CLI)
13.9.1 Activation Key Overview (CLI)

IP-20 offers a pay-as-you-grow concept in which future capacity growth and
additional functionality can be enabled with activation keys. Each device contains
a single unified activation key cipher.
New IP-20 units are delivered with a default activation key that enables you to
manage and configure the unit. Additional feature and capacity support requires
you to enter an activation key. Contact your vendor to obtain your activation key
cipher.
Note: To obtain an activation key cipher, you may need to provide the unit’s
serial number. See Displaying Unit Inventory (CLI).
Each required feature and capacity should be purchased with an appropriate
activation key. It is not permitted to enable features that are not covered by a
valid activation key. In the event that the activation-key-enabled capacity and
feature set is exceeded, an Activation Key Violation alarm occurs and the Web
EMS displays a yellow background and an activation key violation warning. After a
48-hour grace period, all other alarms are hidden until the capacity and features
in use are brought within the activation key’s capacity and feature set.
In order to clear the alarm, you must configure the system to comply with the
activation key that has been loaded in the system. The system automatically
checks the configuration to ensure that it complies with the activation-key-
enabled features and capacities. If no violation is detected, the alarm is cleared.
When entering sanction state, the system configuration remains unchanged, even
after power cycles. However, the alarms remain hidden until an appropriate
activation key is entered or the features and capacities are re-configured to be
within the parameters of the current activation key.
Demo mode is available, which enables all features for 60 days. When demo
mode expires, the most recent valid activation key goes into effect. The 60-day
period is only counted when the system is powered up. Ten days before demo
mode expires, an alarm is raised indicating that demo mode is about to expire.
13.9.2 Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters (CLI)

To display information about the currently installed activation key, enter the
following command in root view:
root> platform activation-key show information
Page 611 of 1094

13.9.3 Entering the Activation Key (CLI)

To enter the activation key, enter the following command in root view.
root> platform activation-key set key string <key string>
If the activation key is not legal (e.g., a typing mistake or an invalid serial number),
an Activation Key Loading Failure event is sent to the Event Log. When a legal
activation key is entered, an Activation Key Loaded Successfully event is sent to
the Event Log.
To set the default activation key, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform activation-key set key string “Default
Activation Key”
Note: Make sure to enter the command using the exact syntax above,
including the spaces and quotation marks, or an error will be returned.
13.9.4 Activating Demo Mode (CLI)

To activate demo mode, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform activation-key set demo admin enable
To display the current status of demo mode, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform activation-key show demo status
13.9.5 Activation Key Reclaim (CLI)

If it is necessary to deactivate an IP-20 device, whether to return it for repairs or
for any other reason, the device’s activation key can be reclaimed for a credit that
can be applied to activation keys for other devices.
Note: Activation key reclaim is only available for IP-20 devices running
CeraOS 9.2 or later.
A composite type activation key provides free activation keys when certain
activation keys are purchased. For example, if a customer purchases an activation
key for one GB ethernet port, two FE ethernet port activation keys are also
provided. If the customer reclaims the activation key, the customer only gets
credit for the original activation key, not for the composite items.
Where the customer has purchased upgrade activation keys, credit is given for the
full feature or capacity, not for each individual upgrade. For example, if the
customer purchased two capacity activation keys for 300M and later purchased
one upgrade activation key to 350M, credit is given as if the customer had
purchased one activation key for 350M and one activation key for 300M.
For instructions on how to reclaim an activation key, refer to the User Guide for
the Ceragon Activation Key Management System, Rev A.15 or later, Chapter 7,
Reclaiming an Activation Key. During the activation key reclaim procedure, you
will need to obtain a Validation Number from the IP-20 unit. To display the
Validation Number, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform activation-key show all
Page 612 of 1094

13.9.6 Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features (CLI)

To display a list of features that your current activation key supports, and usage
information about these features, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform activation-key show usage all
To display a list of the radio capacities that your current activation key supports
and their usage information, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform activation-key show usage radio
13.10 Setting the Time and Date (Optional) (CLI)

Related Topics:
• Configuring NTP (CLI)
IP-20 uses the Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) standard for time and date
configuration. UTC is a more updated and accurate method of date coordination
than the earlier date standard, Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Every IP-20 unit holds the UTC offset and daylight savings time information for the
location of the unit. Each management unit presenting the information uses its
own UTC offset to present the information with the correct time.
Note: If the unit is powered down, the time and date are saved for 96 hours
(four days). If the unit remains powered down for longer, the time and
date may need to be reconfigured.
To set the UTC time, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management time-services utc set date-and-time
<date-and-time>
To set the local time offset relative to UTC, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management time-services utc set offset hours-
offset <hours-offset> minutes-offset <minutes-offset>
To display the local time configurations, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management time-services show status
Table 103: Local Time Configuration CLI Parameters

date-and-time Number dd-mm-yyyy,hh:mm:ss Sets the UTC time.

where:
dd = date
mm = month
yyyy= year
hh = hour
mm = minutes
ss = seconds
Page 613 of 1094


hours-offset Number -12 – 13 The required hours offset (positive
or negative) relative to GMT. This is
used to offset the clock relative to
GMT, according to the global
meridian location.
minutes-offset Number 0 – 59 The required minutes relative to
GMT. This is used to offset the
clock relative to GMT, according to
the global meridian location.
The following command sets the GMT date and time to January 30, 2014, 3:07 pm
and 58 seconds:
root> platform management time-services utc set date-and-time
30-01-2014,15:07:58
The following command sets the GMT offset to 13 hours and 32 minutes:
root> platform management time-services utc set offset hours-
offset 13 minutes-offset 32
13.10.1 Setting the Daylight Savings Time (CLI)

To set the daylight savings time parameters, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management time-services daylight-savings-time
set start-date-month <start-date-month> start-date-day <start-
date-day> end-date-month <end-date-month> end-date-day <end-
date-day> offset <offset>
Table 104: Daylight Savings Time CLI Parameters

start-date-month Number 1 – 12 The month when Daylight Savings Time begins.

start-date-day Number 1 – 31 The date in the month when Daylight Savings
Time begins.
end-date-month Number 1 – 12 The month when Daylight Savings Time ends.
end-date-day Number 1 – 31 The date in the month when Daylight Savings
Time ends.
offset Number 0 – 23 The required offset, in hours, for Daylight Savings
Time. Only positive offset is supported.
The following command configures daylight savings time as starting on May 30

and ending on October 1, with an offset of 20 hours.
root> platform management time-services daylight-savings-time
set start-date-month 5 start-date-day 30 end-date-month 10 end-
date-day 1 offset 20
Page 614 of 1094

13.11 Enabling the Interfaces (CLI)

By default:
• Ethernet traffic interfaces are disabled and must be manually enabled.
• The Ethernet management interface is enabled.
• Radio interfaces are enabled.
Note: IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V units have a single radio interface.
For IP-20C 2E2SX hardware versions, P4 can be used as a traffic port (Eth 4).
However, in 4x4 MIMO and 2+2 Space Diversity configurations, P4 is used as an
Extension port.
When one of these configurations is applied, the system automatically configures
P4 to operate in MIMO mode and it is no longer available for use as a traffic port
(Eth 4). In these configurations, P4 must be used with an SFP+ module.
If you try to apply a 4x4 MIMO or 2+2 Space Diversity configuration while P4 is
assigned one or more service points, ASP or LLF instances, or a LAG group or Sync
source is configured on P4, the configuration will fail and an error message will be
generated. Also, the admin status of the port must be set to down before
applying the 4x4 MIMO or 2+2 Space Diversity configuration.
In IP-20C 2E2SX models, P2 is a DisplayPort that uses a special splitter cable and
gland to accommodate two RJ-45 cables (see Table 14).
• One end of the cable is labelled GbE1/PoE. This is used for the RJ-45
connection to Eth 1 (traffic/PoE).
• The other end of the cable is labelled GbE2. This is used for the RJ-45
connection to Eth 2 (traffic).
To enable or disable an interface, enter the following command in root view:
Page 615 of 1094

root> platform if-manager set interface-type <interface-type>

slot <slot> port <port> admin <admin>
To display the status of all the interfaces in the unit, enter the following command
in root view:
root> platform if-manager show interfaces
Table 105: Interface Configuration CLI Parameters

interface-type Variable ethernet ethernet – an Ethernet

radio traffic interface.
radio – a radio interface.
slot Number Ethernet: 1 The slot on which the
Radio: 2 interface is located.
port Number GbE 1: 1 The specific interface you

GbE 2: 2 want to enable or disable.
GbE 3: 3 GbE4 is only used for P4 on
an IP-20C 2E2SX, when
GbE4: 4 (IP-20C 2E2SX and
used as a traffic port.
IP-20S 2E2S only)
When P4 is used as an
Radio Carrier 1: 1 Extension port, it is not
Radio Carrier 2 (IP-20C displayed at all.
and IP-20C-HP only): 2
admin Variable up Enter up to enable the
down interface or down to
disable the interface.
The following command enables Ethernet port 2:

root> platform if-manager set interface-type ethernet slot 1
port 2 admin up
The following command enables radio interface 1:

root> platform if-manager set interface-type radio slot 2 port
1 admin up
The following command disables radio interface 1:

root> platform if-manager set interface-type radio slot 2 port
1 admin down
The following command disables Ethernet port 3:

port 3 admin down
Page 616 of 1094

13.11.1 IP-20E and IP-20V Management Interface (CLI)

The management ports of IP-20E and IP-20V can be used for traffic as well as
management and (except for IP-20E ESE) PoE. For general information and
limitations regarding this port, see IP-20E and IP-20V Management Interface.
To use the management port for traffic, you should perform the following
configurations:
• An egress Service Bundle Shaper (Shaper ID 256) is attached to this service
point. This Shaper cannot be edited, but it can and must be either detached or
disabled on the port in order for the port to support 1G traffic. See Attaching
a Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle (CLI).
• Change the port speed from its default value of 100 Mbps to 1 Gbps. See
Configuring Ethernet Interfaces (CLI).
• Enable the LOC alarm (Alarm ID 401) for the management port. By default,
this alarm is disabled on the management port and must be manually enabled
when using the port for traffic.
To enable the LOC alarm:
1 Use the following command to enter management port view:
root> ethernet interfaces mng slot 1 port 1
2 In port view, use the following command:
eth type mng [1/1]> loc-alarm-supported set yes
If at some point you stop using the management port for traffic and use it instead
exclusively for management, enter the following command in port view to disable
the LOC alarm:
eth type mng [1/1]> loc-alarm-supported set no
To display the current LOC alarm status for the management port, enter the
following command in port view:
eth type mng [1/1]> loc-alarm-supported show
Page 617 of 1094

13.12 Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) (CLI)

Multi-Rate Multi-Constellation (MRMC) radio scripts define how the radio utilizes
its available capacity. Each script is a pre-defined collection of configuration
settings that specify the radio’s transmit and receive levels, link modulation,
channel spacing, and bit rate. Scripts apply uniform transmit and receive rates
that remain constant regardless of environmental impact on radio operation.
displayed.
13.12.1 Displaying Available MRMC Scripts (CLI)

To display all scripts that are available for a specific radio carrier in your unit,
enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>mrmc script show script-type <script-type> acm-
support <acm-support>

displayed.
Table 106: MRMC Script CLI Parameters

script-type Variable normal Determines the type of scripts to be

asymmetrical displayed:
• normal – Scripts for symmetrical
bandwidth.
• asymmetrical – Scripts for
asymmetrical bandwidth.
Note: Asymmetrical scripts are not
supported in this release.
acm-support Boolean yes Determines whether to display scripts that
no support Adaptive Coding Modulation
(ACM). In ACM mode, a range of profiles
determines Tx and Rx rates. This allows the
radio to modify its transmit and receive
levels in response to environmental
conditions.
The following command displays available symmetrical (normal) scripts with ACM
support for radio carrier 2 in a multi-carrier unit:
radio[2/2]>mrmc script show script-type normal acm-support yes
The following command displays available symmetrical (normal) scripts for radio
carrier 1:
radio[2/1]>mrmc script show script-type normal acm-support yes
Page 618 of 1094

13.12.2 Assigning an MRMC Script to a Radio Carrier (CLI)

Once you have a list of valid scripts, you can assign a script to the radio carrier.
The command syntax differs depending on whether you are assigning a script with
ACM support or a script without ACM support.
Note: When you enter a command to change the script, a prompt appears
informing you that changing the script will reset the unit and affect
traffic. To continue, enter yes. Changing the maximum or minimum
profile does not reset the radio interface.
To assign a script with ACM enabled, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]> mrmc set acm-support script-id <script-id>
modulation adaptive max-profile <max-profile> min-profile <min-
profile>
To assign a script without ACM enabled, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]> mrmc set acm-support script-id <script-id>
modulation fixed profile <profile>
To display the current MRMC script configuration, enter the following command
in radio view:
radio[x/x]>mrmc show script-configuration
Table 107: MRMC Script Assignation to Radio Carrier CLI Parameters

script-id Number Depends on available The ID of the script you want to

scripts. assign to the radio carrier.
modulation Variable adaptive Determines whether ACM is
fixed enabled (adaptive) or disabled
(fixed).
max-profile Number Depends on the unit type. Adaptive ACM mode only: The
See Configuring the Radio maximum profile for the script.
(MRMC) Script(s) (CLI). For example, if you select a
maximum profile of 5, the
system will not climb above
profile 5, even if channel fading
conditions allow it.
Page 619 of 1094


min-profile Number Depends on the unit type. Adaptive ACM mode only: The
See Configuring the Radio minimum profile for the script.
(MRMC) Script(s) (CLI). For example, if you select a
minimum profile of 3, the
system will not go below profile
3 regardless of the channel
fading conditions. The minimum
profile cannot be greater than
the maximum profile, but it can
be equal to it.
If you do not include this
parameter in the command, the
minimum profile is set at the
default value of 0.
profile Number Depends on the unit type. Fixed ACM mode only: The
See Configuring the Radio profile in which the system will
(MRMC) Script(s) (CLI). operate
The following command assigns MRMC script ID 1503, with ACM enabled, a
minimum profile of 3, and a maximum profile of 9, to radio carrier 1 in an IP-20C
or IP-20S unit:
radio[2/1]>mrmc set acm-support script-id 13 modulation
adaptive max-profile 9 min-profile 3
The following command assigns MRMC script ID 1502, with ACM disabled and a
profile of 5, to radio carrier 2 in an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit:
radio[2/2]>mrmc set acm-support script-id 13 modulation fixed
profile 5
The following command assigns MRMC script ID 4702, with ACM disabled and a
profile of 5, to the radio carrier in an IP-20E or IP-20V unit:
radio[2/1]>mrmc set acm-support script-id 4702 modulation fixed
profile 5
The following command assigns MRMC script ID 4701, with ACM enabled, and
both a minimum and a maximum profile of 5, to the radio carrier in an IP-20E unit.
This is the functional equivalent of assigning a fixed profile.
radio[2/1]>mrmc set acm-support script-id 4701 modulation max-
profile 5 min-profile 5
Page 620 of 1094

13.13 Configuring the Radio Parameters (CLI)

In order to establish a radio link, you must:
• Enter radio view.
• Verify that the radio is muted (the Mute Status should be On).
• Configure the radio frequencies.
Note: Even if you are using the default frequencies, it is mandatory to
actually configure the frequencies.
• Configure the TX level.
• Set Mute Admin to Off.
• Verify that the radio is unmuted (the Mute Status should be Off).
13.13.1 Entering Radio View (CLI)

To view and configure radio parameters, you must first enter the radio’s view
level in the CLI.
To enter a radio’s view level, enter the following command in root view:
root> radio slot <slot> port <port>
Table 108: Entering Radio View CLI Parameters

slot Number 2
port Number Radio Carrier 1: 1 The specific radio carrier
Radio Carrier 2 (IP-20C you want to access.
and IP-20C-HP only): 2
The following command enters radio view for radio carrier 1:

root> radio slot 2 port 1
The following prompt appears:

radio[2/1]>
Page 621 of 1094

13.13.2 Muting and Unmuting a Radio (CLI)

To mute or unmute the radio, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>rf mute set admin <admin>
To configure a timed mute, enter the following command in radio view:

radio[x/x]> rf mute set admin on-with-timer timeout-value <1-1440>
When the timer expires, the radio is automatically unmuted. A timed mute
provides a fail-safe mechanism for maintenance operations that eliminates the
possibility of accidently leaving the radio muted after the maintenance has been
completed. By default, the timer is 10 minutes.
Note: In contrast to an ordinary mute, a timed mute is not persistent. This
means that if the unit is reset, the radio is not muted when the unit
comes back online, even if the timer had not expired. Also, in unit and
radio protection configurations, a timed mute is not copied to the
mate unit or radio, and no mismatch alarm is raised if a timed mute is
configured on only one radio in the protection pair.
To display the mute status of a radio, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>rf mute show status
Table 109: Radio Mute/Unmute CLI Parameters

admin Variable on Mutes (on) or unmutes (off)

off the radio.
The following command mutes radio carrier 1:

radio[2/1]>rf mute set admin on
The following command unmutes radio carrier 2 in an IP-20C or IP-20C unit:

radio[2/2]>rf mute set admin off
The following command configures a timed mute on radio carrier 1. This mute will
automatically expire in 30 minutes.
radio[2/1]> rf mute set admin on-with-timer timeout-value 30
Page 622 of 1094

13.13.3 Configuring the Transmit (TX) Frequency (CLI)

To set the transmit (TX) frequency of a radio, enter the following command in
radio view. This command includes an option to set the remote RX frequency in
parallel:
radio[x/x]>rf set tx-frequency <tx-frequency> local-remote
<local-remote>
Table 110: Radio Transmit (TX) Frequency CLI Parameters

tx-frequency Number Depends on the The desired TX

MRMC script and the frequency (in KHz) and,
unit type. if <local-remote> is set
to enable, the desired
RX frequency of the
remote unit.
local-remote Variable enable Optional. Determines
disable whether to apply the
configured TX frequency
value to the RX
frequency of the remote
unit.
Notes: If the carrier belongs to a 4x4 MIMO group, an ASD group, an AFR

20V).
The following command sets the TX frequency of radio carrier 1 in an IP-20C,
IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S unit to 12900000 KHz, and sets the RX frequency of the
remote unit to the same value.
radio[2/1]>rf set tx-frequency 12900000 local-remote enable
The following command sets the TX frequency of radio carrier 1 in an IP-20C,

IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S unit to 12900000 KHz, but does not set the RX frequency of
the remote unit.
radio[2/1]>rf set rx-frequency 12900000 local-remote disable
The following command sets the TX frequency of the radio in an IP-20E unit to
71000000 KHz, and sets the RX frequency of the remote unit to the same value.
radio[2/1]> rf set tx-frequency 71000000 local-remote enable
The following command sets the TX frequency of the radio in an IP-20E unit to
71000000 KHz, but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit.
radio[2/1]> rf set rx-frequency 71000000 local-remote disable
Page 623 of 1094

13.13.4 Configuring the Transmit (TX) Level (CLI)

To set the transmit (TX) level of a radio, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>rf set tx-level <tx-level>
To display the maximum transmit (TX) level of a radio, enter the following
command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>rf show max-tx-level
Table 111: Radio Transmit (TX) Level CLI Parameters

tx-level Number Depends on hardware The desired TX signal

model. level (TSL), in dBm.
The following command sets the TX level of radio carrier 1 to 10 dBm:

radio[2/1]>rf set tx-level 10
Page 624 of 1094

13.14 Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power (CLI)

When planning ACM-based radio links, the radio planner attempts to apply the
lowest transmit power that will perform satisfactorily at the highest level of
modulation. During fade conditions requiring a modulation drop, most radio
systems cannot increase transmit power to compensate for the signal
degradation, resulting in a deeper reduction in capacity. The IP-20 is capable of
adjusting power on the fly, and optimizing the available capacity at every
modulation point.
To enable Adaptive TX Power for a radio, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>rf adaptive-power admin enable
To disable Adaptive TX Power for a radio, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>rf adaptive-power admin disable
To display whether Adaptive TX Power is enabled, enter the following command

in radio view:
radio[x/x]>rf adaptive-power show status
The output of this command is:

radio [x/x]>rf adaptive-power show status
RF adaptive power admin status: [enable/disable]

RF adaptive power operational status: [up/down]
RF adaptive power operational status: Up means the feature is enabled and

fully functional for that radio link. Note that the feature is configured and
operates independently for each radio link.
Note: Adaptive TX Power only operates when the MRMC script is configured
to Adaptive mode. If the script is configured to Fixed mode (or
Adaptive mode with the Minimum and Maximum Profile set to the
same value), you can set adaptive-power admin to enable, but the
adaptive power operational status field will indicate down.
Page 625 of 1094

13.15 Configuring the RSL Threshold Alarm (CLI)

You can enable an alarm to be triggered in the event that the RSL falls beneath a
defined threshold. This alarm is alarm ID 1610, Radio Receive Signal Level is below
the configured threshold. By default, the alarm is disabled.
To enable the RSL threshold alarm, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]> rf rsl-degradation set admin enable
To disable the RSL threshold alarm, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]> rf rsl-degradation set admin disable
To set the threshold of the RSL threshold alarm, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]> rf rsl-degradation set threshold <-99-0>
The default threshold is -68 dBm.

To display the current alarm configuration, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]> rf rsl-degradation show status
The following commands enable the RSL threshold alarm for radio carrier 1 and
set the threshold to -55 dBm.
radio [2/1]>rf rsl-degradation set admin enable
radio [2/1]>rf rsl-degradation set threshold -55
radio [2/1]>rf rsl-degradation show status
RSL degradation alarm admin: enable

RSL degradation threshold: -55
radio [2/1]>
The alarm is cleared when the RSL goes above the configured threshold. The
alarm is masked if the radio interface is disabled, the radio does not exist, or a
communication-failure alarm (Alarm ID #1703) is raised.
Page 626 of 1094

13.16 Operating in FIPS Mode (CLI)

FIPS 140-2 compliance is only available with the IP-20 Assured

platform. The IP-20 Assured platform is supported with CeraOS 10.9.6
and CeraOS 8.3. It is not supported with CeraOS 11.3.
FibeAir IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S can be configured to be FIPS 140-2-
compliant in specific hardware and software configurations, as described in this
section.
13.16.1 Requirements for FIPS Compliance (CLI)

For a full list of FIPS requirements, refer to the Ceragon IP-20 FIPS 140-2 Security
Policy, available upon request. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure
that these requirements are met.
For details on hardware requirements for operating in FIPS mode, see
Requirements for FIPS Compliance.
Unit redundancy configurations can be configured to be FIPS 140-2-compliant.
This requires encryption of the protection link between the two units. See
Encrypting the External Protection Link (CLI).
13.16.2 Enabling FIPS Mode (CLI)

To set the unit to operate in FIPS mode, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform security fips-mode set admin enable
To disable FIPS mode, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform security fips-mode set admin disable
Note: Changing the FIPS configuration causes a unit reset.

To display the unit’s current FIPS setting, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform security fips-mode show
Status values are:

• enable – FIPS mode is enabled.
• disable – FIPS mode is disabled.
After enabling FIPS:

• The MD5 option for SNMPv3 is blocked.
• After any system reset, the length of time before users can log back into the
system is longer than usual due to FIPS-related self-testing.
For a full list of FIPS requirements, including software configuration requirements,
refer to the Ceragon IP-20 FIPS 140-2 Security Policy, available upon request.
Page 627 of 1094

13.16.3 Encrypting the External Protection Link (CLI)

For unit redundancy configurations, the external protection link must be
encrypted using IPsec. This encrypts all IP packets that pass between the
management ports of the two IP-20 units.
IPsec uses a 32-character pre-shared key. The pre-shared key is a 32-byte
symmetric encryption key. The same pre-shared key must be configured on both
IPsec encryption is automatically enabled when FIPS mode is enabled. However, it
is enabled with a default value: protectionpresharedkey0123456789.
If this default value is not changed, the following alarm is triggered:
• 5113 – Protection Pre-Shared-Key has the default value
Page 628 of 1094

13.16.3.1Initial Configuration of FIPS-Compliant Unit Redundancy Configuration

(CLI)
To set up a unit redundancy configuration that is FIPS 140-2-compliant, you must
follow these steps:
1 Configure and enable unit redundancy on both units. See Configuring Unit
2 Enable FIPS on both IP-20 units. See Enabling FIPS Mode (CLI).
When you enable FIPS mode, IPsec encryption will automatically be enabled
on the protection link, using the default protection pre-shared key. Alarm
5113 will be raised.
3 Configure a new pre-shared key on the active unit. To configure a protection
key:
i Verify that the web interface protocol for accessing the unit is configured
to HTTPS. See Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates (CLI).
ii Enter the following command in root view:
root>platform management protection set pre-shared-key <key>
The key must be exactly 32 characters.
Note: Communication with the standby unit may be lost for a few seconds
while the key is being copied.
To clear the user-defined protection pre-shared key and restore it to its default
value, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management protection clear pre-shared-key
To display the protection pre-shared key, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management protection show pre-shared-key
Page 629 of 1094

13.16.3.2Replacing a Unit in a FIPS-Compliant Unit Redundancy Configuration (CLI)

If it becomes necessary to replace a unit in a FIPS 140-2-compliant unit
redundancy configuration, you must pre-configure the replacement unit as
follows:
1 Enable FIPS on the replacement unit. See Enabling FIPS Mode (CLI).
2 Configure the protection pre-shared key on the replacement unit. See Initial
Configuration of FIPS-Compliant Unit Redundancy Configuration (CLI), Step 3.
3 Configure and enable unit redundancy on the replacement unit. See
Configuring Unit Protection with HSB Radio Protection (External Protection).
13.17 Configuring Grouping (Optional) (CLI)

At this point in the configuration process, you should configure any interface
groups that need to be set up according to your network plan. For details on
available grouping and other configuration options, as well as configuration
instructions, see System Configurations (CLI).
13.18 Creating Service(s) for Traffic (CLI)

In order to pass traffic through the IP-20, you must configure Ethernet traffic
services. For configuration instructions, see Configuring Ethernet Services (CLI).
Page 630 of 1094

14. Configuration Guide (CLI)
14.1 System Configurations (CLI)

This section lists the basic system configurations and the IP-20 product types that
support them, as well as links to configuration instructions.
Table 112: System Configurations (CLI)

Multi-Carrier ABC (Multi-Radio) IP-20C Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC (CLI)
IP-20C-HP
Multiband (Enhanced Multi-Carrier IP-20E Configuring Multiband (CLI)
ABC) IP-20C
IP-20C-HP
IP-20S
Link Aggregation (LAG) IP-20C Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG)
IP-20C-HP and LACP (Optional) (CLI)
IP-20S
IP-20E
IP-20V
XPIC IP-20C Configuring XPIC (CLI)
IP-20C-HP
HSB Radio Protection IP-20C Configuring Unit Protection with HSB
IP-20C-HP Radio Protection (External
IP-20S Protection) (CLI)
1+1 HSB with Space Diversity IP-20C Configuring 1+1 HSB with Space
Diversity (CLI)
MIMO and Space Diversity IP-20C Configuring MIMO and Space
Diversity (CLI)
ASD 2+0 (XPIC) IP-20C Configuring Advanced Space
IP-20C-HP Diversity (ASD) (CLI)
AFR 1+0 IP-20C (hub site or tail site) Configuring Advanced Frequency
IP-20S (tail site only) Reuse (AFR) (CLI)
IP-20C in Single Radio Carrier Mode IP-20C Operating an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP in
IP-20C-HP Single Radio Carrier Mode (CLI)
Page 631 of 1094

14.2 Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC (CLI)

• Multi-Carrier ABC Overview (CLI)
• Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)
• Configuring the Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override Option (CLI)
• Removing Members from a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)
• Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)
14.2.1 Multi-Carrier ABC Overview (CLI)

Multi-Carrier Adaptive Bandwidth Control (ABC) enables multiple separate radio
carriers to be shared by a single Ethernet port. This provides an Ethernet link over
the radio with the total sum of the capacity of all the radios in the group, while
still behaving as a single Ethernet interface. In Multi-Carrier ABC mode, traffic is
dynamically divided among the carriers, at the Layer 1 level, without requiring
Ethernet Link Aggregation.
Load balancing is performed regardless of the number of MAC addresses or the
number of traffic flows. During fading events which cause ACM modulation
changes, each carrier fluctuates independently with hitless switchovers between
modulations, increasing capacity over a given bandwidth and maximizing
spectrum utilization. The result is 100% utilization of radio resources in which
traffic load is balanced based on instantaneous radio capacity per carrier.
One Multi-Carrier ABC group that includes both radio interfaces can be configured
per unit. The MRMC scripts for both radio carriers must be identical.
14.2.2 Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)

Note: Radio slot 2 port 1 should always be configured on channel 1 while
Radio slot 2 port 2 should always be configured on channel 2.
To configure a Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 Create the group by entering the following command in root view:
root> multi-carrier-abc create group group_id 1
multi-carrier-abc group-id [1]>
2 Enter Multi-Carrier ABC Group view by entering the following command in
root view:
root> multi-carrier-abc group-id [1]
3 Add members to the group as follows:
◦ To add a radio interface to the group, enter the following command in
Multi-Carrier ABC Group view. Repeat this command for each radio
interface you want to add.
multi-carrier-abc group-id [1]> attach-member slot 2 port
<port> channel-id <1-16>
◦ The Channel ID identifies the interface within the group.
4 Repeat for the second radio interface.
Page 632 of 1094

The following commands create a Multi-Carrier ABC group.

root> multi-carrier-abc create group group_id 1
multi-carrier-abc group-id[1]> attach-member slot 2 port 1
channel-id 1
multi-carrier-abc group-id[1]> attach-member slot 2 port 2
channel-id 2
multi-carrier-abc group-id[1]> exit
14.2.3 Configuring the Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override Option

(CLI)
A multi-carrier ABC group can be configured to be placed in Operational State
Down if the group’s capacity falls beneath a user-defined threshold.
By default, the Multi-Carrier ABC minimum bandwidth override option is disabled.
When enabled, the Multi-Carrier ABC group is automatically placed in Operational
State Down in the event that the group’s aggregated capacity falls beneath the
user-configured threshold. The group is returned to Operational State Up when its
aggregated capacity goes above the threshold.
In order to use Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override, an ASP group
must be configured on the IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit in which the Monitored
State Propagation and Link Loss Forwarding (CLI).
An alarm is also raised when this feature is enabled and the group’s aggregated
capacity falls beneath the threshold:
• Alarm ID – 2201
• Alarm Description – Multi Carrier ABC bandwidth is below the threshold
This option is used in conjunction with the LAG group shutdown in case of
degradation event option (see Enabling and Disabling the LAG Group Shutdown in
Case of Degradation Event Option (CLI)) in cases where the operator wants to re-
route traffic from an upstream switch connected to an another IP-20 unit
whenever the link is providing less than a certain capacity. To set up a
configuration in which a drop in the capacity of the Multi-Carrier ABC group closes
the Ethernet port in the upstream FibeAir IP-20 unit, you must perform all of the
following steps:
• Enable the Multi-Carrier ABC minimum bandwidth option and set a threshold
on the IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit, as described below.
• Enable an ASP group on the IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit, where the Monitored
Ethernet interface that faces the upstream IP-20 unit. See Configuring
Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss Forwarding (CLI).
• Enable the LAG group shutdown in case of degradation event option on the
upstream IP-20 unit.
Page 633 of 1094

Notes: When using in-band management, management is lost in the event of

radio failure and returns when the radio link is restored.
The minimum bandwidth threshold is based on the capacity of the
Multi-Carrier ABC group, not the combined capacities of the group’s
members. The group’s aggregated capacity is displayed in the Multi-
Carrier ABC Group – Edit Group page (Figure 94).
To enable Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override, enter the following
root> platform if-manager set group-type abc group-number <1-4>
minimum-bw-admin enable
To disable Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override, enter the following

minimum-bw-admin disable
To set the Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override threshold (in Mbps),
enter the following command in root view:
minimum-bw-threshold <0-20000>
The threshold can be between 0 – 20000 Mbps, with a resolution of 1 Mbps.

The following commands enable Multi-Carrier ABC Minimum Bandwidth Override
threshold for Multi-Carrier ABC group 1, and set a threshold of 12000 Mbps.
root> platform if-manager set group-type abc group-number 1
minimum-bw-admin enable
root> platform if-manager set group-type abc group-number 1
minimum-bw-threshold 12000
To view the status and the threshold use the following command:
14.2.4 Removing Members from a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)

To remove members from a Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 To remove an individual radio interface from the Multi-Carrier ABC group, go
to Multi-Carrier ABC group view and enter the following command:
multi-carrier-abc group-id[1]> detach-member channel-id
<channel-id>
14.2.5 Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)

To delete a Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 Remove the members from the group. See Removing Members from a Multi-
Carrier ABC Group (CLI).
2 Delete the group by entering the following command in root view:
root> multi-carrier-abc delete group group_id 1
Page 634 of 1094

14.3 Configuring Multiband (CLI)

• IP-20E ESP hardware version
• When used with IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S, an ESS hardware version (two
SFP ports) is required for the paired unit in order to configure synchronization
and/or in-band management for the paired unit.
14.3.1 Multiband Overview (CLI)

For general information about Multiband and how it operates, see Multiband
Overview.
14.3.2 Multiband Configuration (CLI)

To configure a Multiband node:
2 Connect the Eth2 port on the IP-20E to the unit paired with the IP-20E. When
the paired unit is an IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S, use the Eth2 port on the
IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S. When the paired unit is an IP-20N or IP-20A, use
any 1G SFP port on the IP-20N or IP-20A.
there are service points on Eth2, remove them. See Deleting a Service Point
(CLI).
4 Set Eth2 on the IP-20E to Admin – Disable. See Enabling the Interfaces (CLI).
5 On the IP-20E, configure a Multiband group that includes Eth2 and the radio:
i Create the group by entering the following command in root view:
root>multi-carrier-abc create group group_id 1 slot 1 type
Enhanced
ii Enter Multi-Carrier ABC Group view by entering the following command in
root view:
root>multi-carrier-abc group-id 1 slot 1 type Enhanced
multi-carrier-abc enhanced-group-id [1] slot [1]>
iii In Multi-Carrier ABC Group view, add the radio interface by entering the
following command:
multi-carrier-abc enhanced-group-id [1] slot [1]>attach-eth-
member slot 1 port 2 channel-id 2
iv In Multi-Carrier ABC Group view, add the Ethernet interface by entering
the following command:
multi-carrier-abc enhanced-group-id [1] slot [1]>attach-member
slot 2 port 1 channel-id 1
Note: The channel-id parameter must be set to 1 for the radio interface
and 2 for the Ethernet interface.
v In Multi-Carrier ABC Group view, use the following command to set the
maximum traffic that the IP-20E will pass to the paired unit
◦ When using Fixed ACM mode, set this parameter to the actual rate
you want the paired unit to broadcast.
Page 635 of 1094

◦ When using Adaptive ACM mode, set this parameter to the maximum
of the paired unit’s capacity.
multi-carrier-abc enhanced-group-id [1] slot [1]>abc-set-eth-
max-bandwidth slot 1 port 2 max-bandwidth <1-1000>
For example, the following command sets the maximum traffic to 900
Mbps:
multi-carrier-abc enhanced-group-id [1] slot [1]>abc-set-eth-
max-bandwidth slot 1 port 2 max-bandwidth 900
Maximum bandwith: 900 Mbps

Use the following command in Multi-Carrier ABC Group view to display the
current maximum traffic setting:
multi-carrier-abc enhanced-group-id [1] slot [1]>abc-show-eth-
max-bandwidth slot 1 port 2

vi Reset the IP-20E. See Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset (CLI).
6 On the paired unit, configure a service between the port receiving traffic from
the IP-20E and the radio or Multi-Carrier ABC group. See Configuring Ethernet
Services (CLI).
7 On the paired unit, configure Automatic State Propagation with ASP trigger by
remote fault enabled. See Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link
Loss Forwarding (CLI).
8 If the paired unit is an IP-20 unit, configure Bandwidth Notification. Bandwidth
Notification must be configured via the Web EMS. See Multiband
Configuration, Step 8.
Note: If the paired unit is a third-party radio, enable 802.3X Flow Control.
Page 636 of 1094

14.3.3 Multiband Management (CLI)

The IP-20E unit in a Multiband configuration can be managed normally, as in any
other configuration. For in-band management of the IP-20E, configure the
management service on the IP-20E Multiband group. See Configuring In-Band
Management (CLI).
The following options are available for managing the paired unit in a Multiband
configuration:
• Inband management via the IP-20E
• Inband management directly from the external switch
• Out-of-Band management
For a detailed explanation of these options and their requirements, see Multiband
Management.
14.3.4 Configuring Synchronization in a Multiband Node (CLI)

SyncE and 1588 Transparent Clock can be used in Multiband nodes. In Multiband
nodes that consist of an IP-20E and an IP-20 microwave unit, SyncE and 1588
Transparent Clock can also be configured for the microwave unit. SyncE and 1588
Transparent Clock for the IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S require an ESS hardware
version for IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S (two SFP ports) and a special cable. For
details, see Configuring Synchronization in a Multiband Node.
Notes: When a third-party unit is paired with the IP-20E, it is a
prerequisite that the third-party radio unit support SyncE and, if
required, 1588 Transparent Clock in order to provide
synchronization for the Multiband node.
For instructions on configuring SyncE, see Configuring the Sync Source (CLI).
For instructions on configuring 1588 Transparent Clock, see Configuring 1588
Transparent Clock (CLI).
14.3.5 Deleting a Multiband Group (CLI)

If you need to delete the Multiband group, you must first remove the group’s
members, then delete the group.
To remove members from a Multi-Carrier ABC group, go to Multi-Carrier ABC
group view and enter the following command for each interface in the group:
multi-carrier-abc enhanced-group-id [1] slot [1]>detach-member
channel-id <1-2>
After removing the members, enter the following command in root view:
root> multi-carrier-abc delete group group_id 1 slot 1 type Enhanced
14.3.6 Displaying Multiband Group Statistics (CLI)

To display general information about a Multiband group, including the group’s TX
and RX capacity, go to Multi-Carrier ABC group view and enter the following
command:
multi-carrier-abc enhanced-group-id [1] slot [1]>summary-show
Page 637 of 1094

To display port counters for a Multiband group, go to Multi-Carrier ABC group

view and enter the following command:
multi-carrier-abc enhanced-group-id [1] slot [1]>show-ethernet-
port-counters
Page 638 of 1094

14.4 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP (Optional) (CLI)

This section explains how to configure LAG and includes the following topics:
• LAG Overview (CLI)
• Configuring a LAG Group (CLI)
• Configuring LACP (CLI)
• Viewing LAG Details (CLI)
• Editing and Deleting a LAG Group (CLI)
• Enabling and Disabling the LAG Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event
Option (CLI)
• Configuring Enhanced LAG Distribution (CLI)
• Displaying LACP Parameters and Statistics (CLI)
14.4.1 LAG Overview (CLI)

LAG can be used to provide interface redundancy, both on the same card (line
protection) and on separate cards (line protection and equipment protection).
LAG can also be used to aggregate several interfaces in order to create a wider
(aggregate) link. For example, LAG can be used to create a 4 Gbps channel.
You can create up to four LAG groups.
The following restrictions exist with respect to LAG groups:
• Only physical interfaces (including radio interfaces), not logical interfaces, can
belong to a LAG group.
• Interfaces can only be added to the LAG group if no services or service points
are attached to the interface.
• Any classification rules defined for the interface are overridden by the
classification rules defined for the LAG group.
• When removing an interface from a LAG group, the removed interface is
assigned the default interface values.
There are no restrictions on the number of interfaces that can be included in a
LAG. It is recommended, but not required, that each interface in the LAG have the
same parameters (e.g., speed, duplex mode).
Page 639 of 1094

Note: To add or remove an Ethernet interface to a LAG group, the interface

must be in an administrative state of “down”. This restriction does not
apply to radio interfaces. For instructions on setting the administrative
state of an interface, see Enabling the Interfaces (CLI).
IP-20 supports LACP, which expands the capabilities of static LAG and provides
interoperability with third-party equipment that uses LACP. LACP improves the
communication between LAG members. This improves error detection capabilities
in situations such as improper LAG configuration or improper cabling. It also
enables the LAG to detect uni-directional failure and remove the link from the
LAG, preventing packet loss.
LACP is enabled as part of the LAG configuration process. It should only be used if
the LAG is in a link with another LACP-enabled LAG.
Note: LACP is not supported with unit protection. For unit protection, a
special, limited implementation is configured on the logical interface
level. See Configuring Line Protection Mode (CLI).
LACP can only be used with Ethernet interfaces.
LACP cannot be used with Enhanced LAG Distribution or with the LAG
Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event feature.
14.4.2 Configuring a LAG Group (CLI)

To create a LAG:
1 Go to interface view for the first interface you want to assign to the LAG and
enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]> static-lag add lagid <lagid>
2 Repeat this process for each interface you want to assign to the LAG.
14.4.3 Configuring LACP (CLI)

To enable LACP on a LAG group, go to interface view for the LAG and enter the
following command:
eth group [lagx]> lacp admin set enable
To disable LACP on a LAG group, go to interface view for the LAG and enter the
following command:
eth group [lagx]> lacp admin set disable
To display whether or not LACP is enabled on a LAG group, go to interface view for
the LAG and enter the following command:
eth group [lagx]>lacp admin show
The following commands enable LACP for LAG group 1:

root> ethernet interfaces group lag1
eth group [lag1]>lacp admin set enable
eth group [lag1]>
Page 640 of 1094

14.4.4 Viewing LAG Details (CLI)

To display the name of a LAG to which an interface belongs, go to interface view
for the interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]> static-lag show name
To enter interface view for a LAG, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet interfaces group <lagid>
To display details about a LAG, go to interface view for the LAG and enter the
following command:
eth group [lagx]> summary show
To display a LAG's operational state, go to interface view for the LAG and enter
eth group [lagx]> operational state show
To display a list of interfaces that belong to a LAG, go to interface view for the LAG
and enter the following command:
eth group [lagx]> port static-lag show members
14.4.5 Editing and Deleting a LAG Group (CLI)

Note: Before deleting a LAG group, make sure that all members of the LAG
group are set to Admin = Down.
To remove a member Ethernet interface from a LAG, go to interface view for the
LAG and enter the following command:
eth group [lagx]> port static-lag remove member interface eth
slot <slot> port <port>
To remove a member radio interface from a LAG, go to interface view for the LAG
eth group [lagx]> port static-lag remove member interface radio
To delete a LAG, go to interface view for the LAG and simply remove all the
members, as described above.
Table 113: LAG Group CLI Parameters
lagid Variable lag1 The ID for the LAG.

lag2
lag3
lag4
slot Number Ethernet: 1 Depends on the
Radio: 2 interface and unit type.
port Number GbE 1: 1 The port number of the
GbE 2: 2 interface.
GbE 3: 3
Page 641 of 1094


Radio Carrier 1: 1
Radio Carrier 2 (IP-
20C and IP-20C-HP
only): 2
The following commands create a LAG with the ID lag2. The LAG includes the
Ethernet interfaces 1 and 2 and radio interface 1:
port 1 admin down

port 2 admin down
root> ethernet interfaces eth slot 1 port 1
eth type eth [1/1]>
eth type eth [1/1]> static-lag add lagid lag2
eth type eth [1/1]> exit

root>
eth type eth [1/2]>

eth type eth [1/2]> static-lag add lagid lag2
eth type eth [1/2]> exit
root>
root> ethernet interfaces radio slot 2 port 1
eth type radio[2/1]>
eth type radio[2/1]> static-lag add lagid lag2
eth type radio[2/1]> exit

port 1 admin up

port 2 admin up
The following command displays the name of the LAG to which Ethernet port 1
belongs:
eth type eth [1/1]> static-lag show name
Static-lag group name: lag2
The following commands display details about the LAG:

eth group [lag2]>
eth group [lag2]> port static-lag show members
Static-lag members
-------------------
Page 642 of 1094

Eth#[1/1]
Eth#[1/2]
Radio#[2/1]
eth group [lag2]> summary show
Group lag2 Summary: Value

Port Description:
Port Admin state: enable
Port Operational state: down
Port Edge state: non-edge-port
Member Port#(1) 1/1
Member Port#(2) 1/2
Member Port#(3) 2/1
eth group [lag2]> operational state show
Port operational state: up.
eth group [lag2]>
The following commands remove port 2 on slot 1 from the LAG:

port 2 admin down
eth group [lag2]>
eth group [lag2]> port static-lag remove member interface eth

slot 1 port 2
14.4.6 Enabling and Disabling the LAG Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation
Event Option (CLI)
Note: LAG Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event cannot be used
with LACP.
A LAG group can be configured to be automatically closed in the event of LAG
degradation. This option is used if you want traffic from the switch to be re-routed
during such time as the link is providing less than a certain capacity.
By default, the LAG group shutdown in case of degradation event option is
disabled. When enabled, the LAG is automatically closed in the event that any one
or more ports in the LAG fail. When all ports in the LAG are again operational, the
LAG is automatically re-opened.
Note: Failure of a port in the LAG also triggers a lag-degraded alarm, Alarm
ID 100.
To enable the LAG group shutdown in case of degradation event option, go to
interface view for the LAG and enter the following command:
eth group [lagx]> static-lag set lag-degrade-admin admin enable
To disable the LAG group shutdown in case of degradation event option , go to

interface view for the LAG and enter the following command:
eth group [lagx]> static-lag set lag-degrade-admin admin
disable
Page 643 of 1094

To display the current LAG group shutdown in case of degradation event option
setting, go to interface view for the LAG and enter the following command:
eth group [lagx]> static-lag show lag-degrade-admin
The following commands enable the LAG group shutdown in case of degradation
event option for LAG group 1:
eth group [lag1]>static-lag set lag-degrade-admin admin enable
eth group [lag1]>
14.4.7 Configuring Enhanced LAG Distribution (CLI)

You can change the distribution function by selecting from ten pre-defined LAG
distribution schemes. The feature includes a display of the TX throughput for each
interface in the LAG, to help you identify the best LAG distribution scheme for the
specific link.
Note: Enhanced LAG distribution is only available for LAG groups that consist
of exactly two interfaces. It cannot be used with LACP.
To configure enhanced LAG distribution, go to interface view for the LAG and
eth group [lagx]> static-lag set df-pattern df <1-10>
The following commands set the LAG distribution scheme for LAG group 1 as
distribution pattern 3.
eth group [lag1]>static-lag set df-pattern df 3
The default LAG distribution pattern is 1.

To display the current LAG distribution scheme, go to interface view for the LAG
eth group [lagx]> static-lag show df-pattern
It is recommended to experiment with the various schemes by monitoring the TX

port PMs for each interface in the LAG for each LAG distribution scheme. In the
Web EMS, the page in which you configure enhanced LAG distribution also
displays TX throughput PMs per interface. See Configuring Enhanced LAG
Distribution. For information on monitoring Ethernet port PMs via the CLI, see
Displaying Ethernet Port PMs (CLI).
14.4.8 Displaying LACP Parameters and Statistics (CLI)

You can display the following LACP parameters and statistics:
• LACP Aggregation (per LAG)
• LACP Port Status
• LACP Port Statistics
• LACP Port Debug Statistics
Note: IP-20 does not support any LACP write parameters.
Page 644 of 1094

14.4.8.1 Displaying LACP Aggregation Status Parameters (CLI)

To display LACP aggregation status parameters, go to interface view for the LAG
eth group [lagx]> lacp show status
Table 114 describes the LACP aggregation status parameters.
Table 114: LACP Aggregation Status Parameters (CLI)

Admin Key The current administrative value of the key for the Aggregator.
System ID The MAC address value used as a unique identifier for the system that
contains this Aggregator.
System Priority The priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID.
Aggregate or Individual Indicates whether the Aggregator represents an aggregate or an
individual link.
Actor Oper Key The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator.
Agg MAC Address The individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator.
Partner System ID The MAC address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current
protocol Partner of this Aggregator.
Partner System Priority The priority value associated with the Partner’s System ID.
Partner Oper Key The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator’s current
Protocol partner.
Collector Max Delay The maximum delay, in tens of microseconds.
Page 645 of 1094

14.4.8.2 Displaying LACP Port Status Parameters (CLI)

To display LACP port status parameters, go to interface view for the LAG and enter
eth group [lagx]> lacp show ports status
Table 115 describes the LACP port status parameters.
Table 115: LACP Port Status Parameters (CLI)

System Priority The priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID.
Admin Key The current administrative value of the Key for the Aggregation Port.
System ID The MAC Address value that defines the value of the System ID for the
system that contains this Aggregation Port.
Port Priority The priority value assigned to this Aggregation Port.
Page 646 of 1094

Actor State The current operational values of the Actor’s state as transmitted by the
Actor via LACPDUs.
Partner State The current values of Actor State in the most recently received LACPDU
transmitted by the protocol Partner.
Last RX Time The value of a TimeSinceSystemReset (F.2.1) when the last LACPDU was
received by this Aggregation port.
RX State The state of the receive state machine for the Aggregation port. Possible
values are:
• Current – An LACPDU was received before expiration of the most
• Expired – No LACPDU was received before expiration of the most
• Defaulted – No LACPDU was received during the two most recent
timeout periods.
Mux State The state of the Mux state machine for the Aggregation port. Possible
values are Collecting, Distributing, Attached, and Detached.
Mux Reason A text string indicating the reason for the most reason change in the state
of the Mux machine.
Partner Oper Port The operational port number assigned to this Aggregation port by the
Aggregation port’s port Partner.
Partner Oper System The operational value of priority associated with the Partner’s System ID.
Priority
Partner Oper Key The current operational value of the Key for the protocol Partner.
Partner Oper System ID The MAC Address value representing the current value of the
Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner’s System ID.
Partner Oper Port The Priority value assigned to this Aggregation port by the Partner.
Priority
Page 647 of 1094

14.4.8.3 Displaying LACP Port Statistics (CLI)

To display LACP port statistics, go to interface view for the LAG and enter the
following command:
eth group [lagx]> lacp show ports statistics
Table 116 describes the LACP port statistics.
Table 116: LACP Port Statistics (CLI)

LACPDU RX The number of LACPDUs that this port has received.

LACPDU TX The number of LACPDUs that this port has transmitted.
Illegal RX The number of illegal protocol frames that this port has received.
Unknown RX The number of unknown protocol frames that this port has received.
Page 648 of 1094

14.5 Configuring XPIC (CLI)

This section explains how to configure XPIC and includes the following topics:
• XPIC Overview (CLI)
• Configuring the Radio Carriers for XPIC (CLI)
• Creating an XPIC Group (CLI)
• Performing Antenna Alignment for XPIC (CLI)
14.5.1 XPIC Overview (CLI)

Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) is a feature that enables two radio
carriers to use the same frequency with a polarity separation between them.
Since they will never be completely orthogonal, some signal cancelation is
required.
In addition, XPIC includes an automatic recovery mechanism that ensures that if
one carrier fails, or a false signal is received, the mate carrier will not be affected.
This mechanism also ensures that both carriers will be operational, after the
failure is cleared.
To configure and enable XPIC, first configure the carriers and then perform
antenna alignment, as described below.
For 2+2 XPIC using an external switch operating in LAG mode, Mate Management
Access enables users to manage both units via in-band management. See Mate
14.5.2 Configuring the Radio Carriers for XPIC (CLI)

To configure the radio carriers:
1 Configure the carriers on both ends of the link to the desired frequency
channel. Both carriers must be configured to the same frequency channel.
2 Assign XPIC (CCDP operational mode) support-enabled script to both RMCs on
both ends of the link. Each RMC must be assigned the same script. See
Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) (CLI).
Note: XPIC support is indicated by an X in the script name. For example,
mdN_A2828X_111_1205 is an XPIC-enabled script.
mdN_A2828N_130_100 is not an XPIC-enabled script. For a list of XPIC
support-enabled scripts, refer to the most recent Release Notes for
FibeAir IP-20 All-Outdoor Products.
3 Create an XPIC group. See Creating an XPIC Group (CLI).
14.5.3 Creating an XPIC Group (CLI)

To create an XPIC group, enter the following commands:
root> radio-groups
radio-groups>
radio-groups> xpic set admin enable
Page 649 of 1094

To disable XPIC, enter the following commands:

root> radio-groups
radio-groups>
radio-groups> xpic set admin disable
14.5.4 Performing Antenna Alignment for XPIC (CLI)

To configure the antennas:
1 Align the antennas for the first carrier. For a 2+2 XPIC configuration (or a 4x4
MIMO configuration), align the antennas for the first carrier on the upper IP-
20C or IP-20C-HP units. While you are aligning these antennas, mute the
second carrier. See Configuring the Radio Parameters (CLI). For a 2+2 XPIC
configuration (or a 4x4 MIMO configuration), mute all the carriers except the
first carrier on the upper IP-20C or IP-20C-HP units.
2 Adjust the antenna alignment until you achieve the maximum RSL for the first-
carrier link (the “RSLwanted”). This RSL should be no more than
+/-2 dB from the expected level. Record the RSL of the first carrier as the
RSLwanted.
3 Measure the RSL of the second carrier and record it as the “RSLunwanted”.
Note: To measure the second carrier, leave the Voltmeter connected to the
BNC connector. In the Radio Parameters page of the Web EMS
(Figure 43), change the RSL Connector Source field from PHYS1 to
PHYS2 (or vice versa). The BNC connector will now measure RSL from
the other carrier.
4 Determine the XPD by subtracting RSLunwanted from the RSLwanted.
5 The XPD should be between 25dB and 30 dB. If it is not, you should adjust the
OMT assembly on the back of the antenna at one side of the link until you
achieve the highest XPD, which should be no less than 25dB. Adjust the OMT
very slowly in a right-left direction. OMT adjustment requires very fine
movements and it may take several minutes to achieve the best possible XPD.
Note: As an extra step, to check the veracity of the initial measurements, you
can mute the first carrier and unmute the second carrier on the upper
IP-20C or IP-20C-HP units on both sides of the link. Then measure the
RSL of the second carrier link (the “RSLwanted”), measure the RSL of the
first carrier (the “RSLunwanted”) and determine the XPD. The XPD should
match the XPD with the second carriers muted.
6 Unmute all the carriers and check the RSL levels of all the carriers on both
sides of the link. The RSL of the horizontal carrier of the local unit should
match the RSL of the vertical carrier of the remote unit, within ±2dB. The RSL
of the vertical carrier of the local unit should match the RSL of the horizontal
carrier of the remote unit, within ±2dB.
7 For a 2x2 configuration, repeat Steps 1 through 6 for the lower IP-20C or IP-
20C-HP units.
8 Check the XPI levels of all the carriers at both sides of the link by going to
radio view and entering one of the following commands:
radio [x/x]>modem pm-xpi show interval 15min
Page 650 of 1094

radio [x/x]>modem pm-xpi show interval 24hr

All four carriers should have approximately the same XPI value. Do not adjust
the XPI at the remote side of the link, as this may cause the XPI at the local
side of the link to deteriorate.
Note: In some cases, the XPI might not exceed the required 25dB minimum
due to adverse atmospheric conditions. If you believe this to be the
case, you can leave the configuration at the lower values, but be sure
to monitor the XPI to make sure it subsequently exceeds 25dB. A
normal XPI level in clear sky conditions is between 25 and 30dB.
14.5.5 Displaying XPIC Status (CLI)

To display the status of an XPIC group, enter the following command in radio-
groups view:
radio-groups> xpic show status
The following is a typical command output:

XPIC:
Carrier 1: Radio #[2/1] ; Carrier 2: Radio #[2/2]
Admin mode: enable
XPIC state: XPIC-Idle
Page 651 of 1094

14.6 Configuring Unit Protection with HSB Radio Protection

(External Protection) (CLI)
This section explains how to configure unit protection, including HSB radio
protection and Ethernet interface protection, and includes the following topics:
• Unit Protection Overview (CLI)
• Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI)
• Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP Unit (CLI)
• Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit (CLI)
• Editing Standby Unit Settings (CLI)
• Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity (CLI)
• Manually Switching to the Standby Unit (CLI)
• Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit (CLI)
• Disabling Unit Protection (CLI)
Note: For instructions on configuring 1+1 unit protection with Space
Diversity, see Configuring 1+1 HSB with Space Diversity (CLI) on
page 660.
14.6.1 Unit Protection Overview (CLI)

IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S support 1+1 HSB radio protection. IP-20C and
IP-20C-HP also support 2+2 HSB radio protection. In HSB radio protection, one IP-
20 operates in active mode and the other operates in standby mode. If a
protection switchover occurs, the Active unit goes into standby mode and the
Standby unit goes into active mode.
• For a full explanation of 1+1 HSB radio protection and 2+2 HSB radio
protection support in IP-20C and IP-20C-HP, refer to the IP-20C Technical
Description or the IP-20C-HP Technical Description.
• For a full explanation of 1+1 HSB radio protection support in IP-20S, refer to
the IP-20S Technical Description.
To configure unit protection, you must perform the following steps:
1 Configure Ethernet interface protection – See Configuring Ethernet Interface
Protection (CLI).
2 Configure HSB radio protection – See Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI).
3 For 2+2 HSB configurations (IP-20C and IP-20C-HP only), perform the
additional steps described in Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C or
IP-20C-HP Unit (CLI).
Note: For FIPS configurations, the external protection link must be encrypted
using IPsec. This encrypts all IP packets that pass between the
management ports of the two units. For instructions, see Encrypting
the External Protection Link (CLI).
Page 652 of 1094

14.6.2 Configuring Ethernet Interface Protection (CLI)

There are two modes for Ethernet interface protection in an HSB radio protection
configuration:
• Line Protection Mode – Traffic is routed to the Ethernet ports via two ports on
an external switch.
• Split Protection Mode – Only available for optical Ethernet ports. An optical
splitter cable is used to connect to both the active and the standby optical
Ethernet ports.
Page 653 of 1094

14.6.2.1 Configuring Line Protection Mode (CLI)

To configure line protection mode:
1 Configure the GE ports on the external switch in LACP mode. The external
switch must support LACP.
Note: IP-20 supports a special LACP implementation for purposes of line
protection only. This LACP implementation is configured on the logical
interface level, as described below. Regular LACP is configured as part
of the LAG configuration, and is not supported with unit redundancy.
See Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP (Optional) (CLI).
2 Connect one port on the external switch to an Ethernet port on the active IP-
20, and the other port on the external switch to an Ethernet port on the
standby IP-20.
3 Enable LACP on the Ethernet interface connected to the external switch on
the active IP-20:
i Go to interface view for the Ethernet interface connected to the external
switch on the active IP-20.
ii In interface view, enter the following command:
eth type eth [1/x]>interface-mode-set interface-mode LACP
To disable LACP mode, enter the following command in Ethernet interface view:
eth type eth [1/x]>interface-mode-set interface-mode NONE
To display an interface’s current LACP setting, enter the following command in

Ethernet interface view:
eth type eth [1/x]>interface-mode-show
Page 654 of 1094

14.6.2.2 Configuring Split Ethernet Interface Protection Mode (CLI)

To configure split Ethernet interface protection mode:
1 Use an optical splitter to route traffic to an optical Ethernet port on each IP-20
unit.
2 Proceed to Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI).
14.6.3 Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI)

You must perform the initial configuration of a 1+1 or 2+2 HSB system using a
splitter cable for each unit to provide a management connection to each unit. For
instructions on preparing and connecting the splitter cables, refer to the
Installation Guide for IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S.
To configure HSB radio protection:
1 Before enabling protection, you must:
i Verify that both units have the same hardware part number (see
Displaying Unit Inventory (CLI)) and the same software version (see
Viewing Current Software Versions (CLI)). If the units do not have the same
software version, upgrade each unit to the most recent software release
(see Configuring a Software Download (CLI)).
ii Assign an IP address to each unit. For instructions, see Changing the
Management IP Address (CLI).
iii Establish a management connection to one of the units. You can select
either unit; once you enable Protection Administration, the system will
determine which unit becomes the Active unit.
2 To enable protection, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management protection set admin enable
The system configures itself for HSB protection:
◦ The system determines which unit is the Active unit based on a number of
pre-defined criteria.
◦ When the system returns online, all management must be performed via
the Active unit using the IP address you defined for that unit.
◦ The IP address you defined for the unit which is now the Standby unit is no
longer valid, and the management port of the Standby unit becomes non-
operational.
◦ Management of the Standby unit is performed via the Active unit, via the
cable between the two MIMO/Prot ports on the splitters connecting the
two units.
◦ HSB protection is enabled on both units.
3 Once you have enabled Protection Admin:
i Perform all necessary radio configurations on the Active unit, such as
setting the frequency, assigning MRMC scripts, unmuting the radio, and
setting up radio groups such as XPIC or Multi-Carrier ABC (Multi-Radio).
ii Perform all necessary Ethernet configurations on the Active unit, such as
defining Ethernet services.
Page 655 of 1094

iii Enter the following command in root view to copy the configuration of the
Active unit to the Standby unit:
root> platform management protection copy-to-mate
Note: While the system is performing the copy-to-mate operation, a

temporary loss of management connection will occur.
To keep the Standby unit up-to-date, after any change to the configuration of the
Active unit enter the copy-to-mate command to copy the configuration to the
Standby unit.
If you are unsure whether the Standby unit’s configuration matches that of the
Active unit, enter the following command in root view. The command output
displays the list of mismatched parameters.
root> platform management protection show mismatch details
14.6.4 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP Unit (CLI)

In order to configure 2+2 HSB unit protection on an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit, you
must simply enable the second radio carrier on both units on both sides of the
link. No other configuration is necessary other than the configuration described
above.
To enable the second radio carrier on both units using the CLI, enter the following
commands in root view:
root> platform if-manager set interface-type radio slot 2
port 2 admin up
root> platform management protection copy-to-mate
14.6.5 Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit (CLI)

You can view the settings of the standby unit any time.
To view the settings of the standby unit, you can run show commands in the
standby unit. To do so, first enter the mate/root context, as described in
Performing CLI operations on the Standby unit (CLI), then run the relevant show
command, and then switch back to the active unit.
14.6.6 Editing Standby Unit Settings (CLI)

Almost all settings of the standby unit are view-only. However, several settings
are editable on the Standby unit. They must be configured separately for the
Standby unit, and are not copied via copy-to-mate, nor do they trigger a
configuration mismatch in the CLI.
In the Web EMS, failure to synchronize these configuration settings causes a
configuration mismatch alarm.
The following settings must be configured separately on the standby unit:
• Setting the Unit Name. Refer to the description of platform management
system-name set name in Configuring Unit Parameters (CLI).
• Disabling/enabling Radio TX-mute. Refer to the description of rf mute set
admin in Muting and Unmuting a Radio (CLI).
Page 656 of 1094

• Clearing the Radio and RMON counters. Refer to the description of modem
clear counters in Displaying General Modem Status and Defective Block
PMs (CLI).
• Setting the activation key configuration. Refer to Configuring the Activation
Key (CLI) and Activating Demo Mode (CLI).
• Defining user accounts. Refer to Configuring User Accounts (CLI).
• Setting synchronization settings. Refer to Configuring SyncE Regenerator (CLI).
To configure these settings in the standby unit, first enter the mate/root context,
as described in Performing CLI operations on the Standby unit (CLI), then run the
relevant commands, and then switch back to the active unit.
Page 657 of 1094

14.6.6.1 Performing CLI operations on the Standby unit (CLI)

You can run CLI commands in the standby unit.
To run CLI commands in the standby unit:
1 Use the following command to enter view context for the standby unit:
root> switch-to mate
mate/root>
2 Enter the specific CLI command you want to run in mate/root context.
3 To switch back to the active unit, enter the following command:
mate/root> switch-back
root>
14.6.7 Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity (CLI)

You can view link and protection status and activity any time.
• To view whether HSB protection is enabled or disabled, enter the following
root> platform management protection show admin
• To view whether HSB protection is functional (available in practice), enter the
following command in root view. Note that protection is not functional if
MIMO is configured, or if the management connection to the mate is down.
root> platform management protection show operational-state
• To view protection activity, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management protection show activity-state
• To view the status of the protection link to the mate, enter the following
root> platform management protection show link-status
• To view the status of the last copy-to-mate operation, enter the following
root> platform management protection show copy-to-mate status
• To view the current lockout status, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management protection show lockout status
14.6.8 Manually Switching to the Standby Unit (CLI)

The following events trigger switchover for HSB radio protection according to
their priority, with the highest priority triggers listed first.
1 Loss of active unit
2 Lockout
3 Radio/Ethernet interface failure
4 Manual switch
At any point, you can manually switch to the Standby unit, provided that the
highest protection fault level in the Standby unit is no higher than the highest
protection fault level on the Active unit.
Page 658 of 1094

To manually switchover to the Standby unit enter the following in root view:
root> platform management protection set manual-switch
14.6.9 Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit (CLI)

At any point, you can perform lockout, which disables automatic switchover to
the standby unit.
To disable automatic switchover to the Standby unit, use the following command
in root view:
root> platform management protection lockout set admin on
To re-enable automatic switchover to the standby unit, use the following

root> platform management protection lockout set admin off
14.6.10 Disabling Unit Protection (CLI)

You can disable unit protection at any time. If you disable unit protection, keep in
mind that while the unit that was formerly the active unit maintains its IP address,
the unit that was formerly the standby unit is assigned the default IP address
(192.168.1.1)
To disable protection, enter the following command in root view.
root> platform management protection set admin disable
Page 659 of 1094

14.7 Configuring 1+1 HSB with Space Diversity (CLI)

Note: This feature is only relevant for IP-20C. It can be used with all IP-20C
hardware versions.
A 1+1 HSB-SD configuration utilizes two IP-20C units on each side of the link, with
both radio carriers activated. The IP-20C units are combined and connected to the
primary and diversity antennas via a dual coupler and two flexible waveguides.
Radio carrier 2 is muted on each unit. On the receiving side, the signals are
combined in the active unit to produce a single, optimized signal. The link is
protected via external protection, so that if a protection switchover occurs, the
standby unit becomes the active unit, and the link continues to function with full
space diversity.
To configure a 1+1 HSB link with Space Diversity:
1 For one IP-20 unit, enter the following command in root view to create a
Space Diversity group:
root> radio mimo create group 1 mimo-type 1-plus-0-sd radio 2
port 1 radio 2 port 2
2 Enter the following command in root view to enable the Space Diversity
group:
root> radio mimo set-admin group 1 admin enable
3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the second unit.
Note: The identity of the active and standby units is not determined until
unit protection is configured.
4 Configure Unit Protection, according to the instructions in Configuring Unit
Protection with HSB Radio Protection (External Protection) (CLI).
5 On the active IP-20 unit, mute the transmitter of radio carrier2. For
instructions, see Muting and Unmuting a Radio (CLI).
6 Perform Copy to Mate. See Step 3 in Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI).
Important Note: It is crucial to ensure that the port connected to the Diversity
antenna is muted in each IP-20 unit. If you perform Copy to Mate after
configuring unit protection, as indicated above, the mute
configuration will be copied to the standby unit. If you mute the
interface before configuring unit protection, you must make sure to
manually mute the interface on both IP-20 units. Otherwise,
configuring unit protection will override the mute configuration.
Page 660 of 1094

14.8 Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity (CLI)

This section describes how to configure MIMO and Space Diversity, and includes
the following topics:
• MIMO and Space Diversity Overview (CLI)
• Upgrading a 4x4 MIMO Link from an Earlier Version to CeraOS 10.5 or Higher
(CLI)
• Configuring a 4x4 MIMO Link (CLI)
• Configuring a 2x2 MIMO Link (CLI)
• Configuring a 1+0 or 2+0 Space Diversity Link (CLI)
• Viewing MMI Levels (CLI)
• Deleting a 4x4 MIMO Group (CLI)
• Deleting a 2x2 MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI)
14.8.1 MIMO and Space Diversity Overview (CLI)

Note: MIMO and Space Diversity are not supported with ATPC. ATPC must be
Override Timer (CLI).
Line-of-Sight (LoS) Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) achieves spatial
multiplexing by creating an artificial phase de-correlation by deliberate antenna
distance at each site in deterministic constant distance. At each site in a MIMO
configuration, data to be transmitted over the radio link is split into two bit
streams (2x2 MIMO) or four bit streams (4x4 MIMO). These bit streams are
transmitted via two antennas. In 2x2 MIMO, the antennas use a single
polarization. In 4x4 MIMO, each antenna uses dual polarization. The phase
difference caused by the antenna separation enables the receiver to distinguish
between the streams.
IP-20C supports both 2x2 MIMO and 4x4 MIMO. For a full explanation of MIMO
support in IP-20C, refer to the IP-20C Technical Description.
For 4x4 MIMO using an external switch operating in LAG mode, Mate
Management Access enables users to manage both units via in-band
management. See Mate Management Access (IP Forwarding) (CLI).
For IP-20C 2E2SX hardware models, if you try to apply a 4x4 MIMO or 2+2 Space
Diversity configuration while P4 is assigned one or more service points, ASP or LLF
instances, or a LAG group or Sync source is configured on P4, the configuration
will fail and an error message will be generated. Also, the Admin status of the port
must be set to Down before applying the 4x4 MIMO or 2+2 Space Diversity
configuration. See Enabling the Interfaces (CLI).
The same hardware configurations can also be used to implement BBS Space
Diversity. IP-20C and IP-20C-HP support 1+0 and 2+2 Space Diversity. For a full
explanation of Space Diversity support in IP-20C and IP-20C-HP, refer to the
Technical Description for the product and CeraOS version you are using.
2+2 HSB Space Diversity provides both equipment protection and signal
protection. If one unit goes out of service, the other unit takes over and maintains
Page 661 of 1094

the link until the other unit is restored to service and Space Diversity operation
resumes.
2+2 HSB Space Diversity utilizes two IP-20C units operating in dual core mode. In
each IP-20C unit, both radio carriers are connected to a single antenna. One
optical GbE port on each IP-20C is connected to an optical splitter. Traffic must be
routed to an optical GbE port on each IP-20C unit.
In effect, a 2+2 HSB configuration is a protected 2+0 Space Diversity configuration.
Each IP-20C monitors both of its cores. If the active IP-20C detects a radio failure
in either of its cores, it initiates a switchover to the standby IP-20C.
Notes: Only one MIMO or Space Diversity group can be created per IP-20C or
IP-20C-HP unit. All MRMC scripts that support MIMO also support
Space Diversity.
For 4x4 MIMO links, CeraOS 10.5 is not interoperable with earlier
CeraOS versions. If you are upgrading from an earlier version with an
existing 4x4 MIMO link, you must follow the procedure in Upgrading a
4x4 MIMO Link from an Earlier Version to CeraOS 10.5 or Higher (CLI).
14.8.2 Upgrading a 4x4 MIMO Link from an Earlier Version to CeraOS 10.5 or
Higher (CLI)
For 4x4 MIMO links, CeraOS versions 10.5 and higher are not interoperable with
earlier CeraOS versions. When upgrading from a CeraOS version prior to CeraOS
10.5 to CeraOS 10.5 or higher, if there is an existing 4x4 MIMO link, you must
perform either of the following procedures to properly upgrade the link. Option 1
is the preferred option.
Note: You must download the new CeraOS software package to all four units
before beginning the upgrade process. All four units in the 4x4 MIMO
link must use the same CeraOS build and version.
4. Wait for the link to be restored between the Master units.
5. Mute both radio carriers on the remote Slave unit.
7. Unmute both radio carriers on the remote Slave unit.
Page 662 of 1094

14.8.3 Configuring a 4x4 MIMO Link (CLI)

To configure a MIMO link, you must perform the following steps:
1 Verify that the following three cables are connected between the Master and
Slave IP-20C units on each side of the link. For details, refer to the IP-20C
Installation Guide or the IP-20C-HP Installation Guide:
◦ Source sharing cable between both EXT REF IP-20 radio connectors.
◦ MIMO data sharing cable between both IP-20 ETH3/EXT ports.
◦ MIMO signaling cable between both IP-20 MGT/PROT ports.
2 Configure the IP-20 carriers as XPIC links, using XPIC scripts, and configuring
the carriers as XPIC groups. See Configuring XPIC (CLI).
3 Perform antenna alignment for XPIC. See Performing Antenna Alignment for
XPIC (CLI).
4 Configure MIMO groups on each IP-20C unit, in the following order:
i Upper unit (Master) on the local side of the link.
ii Upper unit (Master) on the remote side of the link.
iii Lower unit (Slave) on the local side of the link.
iv Lower unit (Slave) on the remote side of the link.
To configure a 4x4 MIMO group, enter the following commands:
i Enter the following command in root view to create the group:
root> amcc create group group_id <1-4> group_type mimo_4x4
group_sub_type external
ii Enter the following command to go into group view:
root> amcc group group_id <1-4> group_type mimo_4x4
mimo-4X4-group[x]:
iii In group view, enter the following commands to add the unit’s two
carriers to the group:
mimo-4X4-group[x]> amcc attach slot 2 port 1 role
<mimo-master|mimo-slave>
mimo-4X4-group[x]> amcc attach slot 2 port 2 role
<mimo-master|mimo-slave>
iv In group view, enter the following command to enable the group:
mimo-4X4-group[x]> set admin enable
Note: To display details about the group, enter the following command in
root view:
root> amcc show group_id <1-4> group_type mimo_4x4

The following commands configure a Master group on Unit 1 and a Slave group on
Unit 2:
Page 663 of 1094

Unit 1
root> amcc create group group_id 1 group_type mimo_4x4
group_id 1, group_type mimo-4x4 created
root> amcc group group_id 1 group_type mimo_4x4
mimo-4X4-group[1]> amcc attach slot 2 port 1 role mimo-master

mimo-4X4-group[1]> amcc attach slot 2 port 2 role mimo-master
mimo-4X4-group[1]> set admin enable

Unit 2
root> amcc create group group_id 1 group_type mimo_4x4
group_id 1, group_type mimo-4x4 created
root> amcc group group_id 1 group_type mimo_4x4
mimo-4X4-group[1]> amcc attach slot 2 port 1 role mimo-slave

mimo-4X4-group[1]> amcc attach slot 2 port 2 role mimo-slave
mimo-4X4-group[1]> set admin enable

5 Verify that the MMI and XPIC levels are appropriate. See Viewing MMI Levels
(CLI).
6 Configure LAG on the two Ethernet ports of the external switches connected
to the IP-20C units on both sides of the link.
enabled on the MIMO group in all four IP-20 units that make up the link. See
Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss Forwarding (CLI).
Note: The last two steps are crucial to ensure that the link continues to
function via the MIMO resiliency mechanism in the event of a
hardware failure scenario.
Figure 138 shows one side of a 4x4 MIMO link.
14.8.4 Configuring a 2x2 MIMO Link (CLI)

1 Create a 2x2 MIMO group by entering the following command in root view:
root> radio mimo create group <1-4> mimo-type mimo-2x2 radio 2
port <first radio carrier in the group: either 1 or 2> radio 2
port <second radio carrier in the group: either 2 or 1>
2 Enable the group by entering the following command in root view:
root > radio mimo set-admin group <1-4> admin enable
To reset MIMO, enter the following command in root view:

root > radio mimo reset group 1
3 Verify that the XPIC levels are appropriate. See Viewing MMI Levels (CLI).
Note: XPI is not relevant for 2x2 MIMO.
Page 664 of 1094

14.8.5 Configuring a 1+0 or 2+0 Space Diversity Link (CLI)

1 Create a Space Diversity group by entering the following command in root
view:
root> radio mimo create group 1 mimo-type <mimo-type> radio 2
port <first radio carrier in the group: either 1 or 2> radio 2
port <second radio carrier in the group: either 2 or 1 >
where <mimo-type> defines the Space Diversity configuration. The options
are:
◦ 1-plus-0-sd – 1+0 Space Diversity.
◦ 2-plus-0-sd – 2+0 Space Diversity.
2 Enable the group by entering the following command in root view:
root > radio mimo set-admin group <1-4> admin enable
3 For 2+2 Space Diversity configurations, you must set the role of the group
to Master or Slave. This determines the role of the IP-20 unit in the overall
Space Diversity configuration.
To set the role of a MIMO or Space Diversity group, enter the following
root > radio mimo set-role group <1-4> mimo-role <slave|master>
14.8.6 Viewing MMI Levels (CLI)

You can view MMI levels for the individual radio carriers in a MIMO group.
Note that the MMI value can also be calculated manually. To calculate it manually,
you must measure the following RSL levels per receiver:
1 Mute all remote transmitters except the transmitter for the link you want to
measure, and measure the local RSL level (RSL_Wanted).
2 Mute all remote transmitters except the same polarization interferer and
measure the local RSL2 (RSL_Int).
3 The MMI is equal to RSL_Wanted – RSL_Int.
To show the status of a MIMO group, as well as the MMI and XPI levels for the
individual radio carriers, enter the following command:
root > radio mimo show status group 1
The following is a sample output from this command:

root> radio mimo show status group 1
MIMO group type: mimo-4x4.

MIMO group 1st member: slot 2 port 1.
MIMO group 2nd member: slot 2 port 2.
MIMO group admin status: disable.
MIMO state: MIMO-Disabled.
MIMO advanced state: disabled.
MIMO RFU role: slave.
MIMO 1st carrier MMI: -0.0
MIMO 2nd carrier MMI: -0.0
MIMO 1st carrier XPI: 99.0
MIMO 2nd carrier XPI: 99.0
Page 665 of 1094

Table 117: MMI and XPI Levels CLI Parameters

Parameter Input Type
MIMO group type The MIMO or Space Diversity configuration:

• mimo-2x2 – 2x2 MIMO.
• mimo-4x4 – 4x4 MIMO.
• 1-plus-0-sd – 1+0 BBS Space Diversity.
• 2-plus-0-sd – 2+0 XPIC with BBS Space Diversity.
MIMO group 1st member The first radio carrier in the group.
MIMO group 2nd member The second radio carrier in the group.
MIMO group admin status Indicates whether the MIMO group is enabled or
disabled.
MIMO state Indicates whether MIMO is enabled or disabled.
MIMO advanced state A detailed description of the MIMO state.
MIMO RFU role Indicates the role of the unit in the MIMO configuration
(Master or Slave).
MIMO 1st carrier MMI MIMO Mate Interference for the first group member.
MMI represents the difference between the RSL1 and
the RSL2 of the remote Master and Slave transmitters
with the same polarization. The nominal range is 0. The
range should be from -3 dB to +3 dB.
MMI is not relevant for 1+0 Space Diversity.
MIMO 2nd carrier MMI MMI for the second group member.
MIMO 1st carrier XPI Cross Polarization Interference for the first group
member. This is only relevant in 4x4 MIMO
configurations, where each unit operates in dual
polarization (XPIC) mode. The XPI value should be at
least 25 dB. For further information, refer to
Configuring XPIC (CLI).
MIMO 2nd carrier XPI XPI for the second group member.
14.8.7 Deleting a 4x4 MIMO Group (CLI)

To delete a 4x4 MIMO Group:
1 Enter the following command to go into group view:
root> amcc group group_id <1-4> group_type mimo_4x4
mimo-4X4-group[x]:
2 In group view, enter the following commands to remove the unit’s two
carriers from the group:
mimo-4X4-group[x]> amcc detach slot 2 port 1
mimo-4X4-group[x]> amcc detach slot 2 port 2
3 In group view, enter the following command to disable the group:
Page 666 of 1094

mimo-4X4-group[x]> set admin disable

4 In root view, enter the following command to delete the group:
root> amcc delete group group_id <1-4> group_type mimo_4x4
14.8.8 Deleting a 2x2 MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI)

You can delete a 2x2 MIMO or Space Diversity Group.
To delete a 2x2 MIMO or Space Diversity Group:
1 Before deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity group, you must first disable the
group using the following command in root view:
root > radio mimo set-admin group 1 admin disable
Note: When the MIMO or Space Diversity group is disabled, the

system is automatically reset.
2 Delete the MIMO or Space Diversity group by entering the following command
in root view:
root > radio mimo delete group 1
Page 667 of 1094

14.9 Configuring Advanced Space Diversity (ASD) (CLI)

This section describes how to configure Advanced Space Diversity (ASD), and
includes the following topics:
• Configuring an ASD Link (CLI)
• Viewing ASD Status (CLI)
• Deleting an ASD Group (CLI)
Note: For an overview of ASD, see ASD Overview.
14.9.1 Configuring an ASD Link (CLI)

Note: ASD is not supported with ATPC and XPIC. ATPC and XPIC must both be
Override Timer (CLI) and Creating an XPIC Group (CLI).
To configure an ASD link, you must perform the following steps:
1 Install the IP-20C or IP-20C-HP units as follows:
◦ At Site 1, install two IP-20C/IP-20C-HP units in a 4x4 MIMO configuration.
◦ At Site 2, install one IP-20C/IP-20C-HP unit in a 2+0 Dual Polarization (XPIC)
configuration.
For instructions, refer to the Installation Manual for IP-20C or IP-20C-HP.
2 Verify that the Ethernet interfaces on the Slave unit are set to Admin = Down
in the Interface Manager. See Enabling the Interfaces (CLI).
3 Configure the radio parameters for each of the six radio carriers in the link.
Make sure each carrier is configured with the same radio parameters. See
Configuring the Radio Parameters (CLI).
4 Assign an ASD script to each of the six radio carriers in the link. Options are:
See Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) (CLI).
in the ASD link. For ASD, the scripts must be set to Adaptive mode.
5 Mute both carriers on the Slave unit. See Muting and Unmuting a Radio (CLI).
6 Align the antenna of the Master unit to the antenna at Site 2 until you achieve
a steady link at the RSL that is expected according to the site plan, at 2048
QAM.
7 Unmute the carriers of the Slave unit and mute both carriers on the Master
unit. See Muting and Unmuting a Radio (CLI).
8 Align the antenna of the Slave unit to the antenna at Site 2 until you achieve a
steady link at the RSL that is expected according to the site plan, at 2048
QAM.
9 Unmute the carriers of the Master unit. At this point, all of the carriers in the
ASD link should be unmuted.
Page 668 of 1094

10 Create an ASD group on each unit:

◦ To create an ASD group at Site 1 (two units), enter the following command
in root view:
root> amcc create group group_id <1-4> group_type dual-asd
group_sub_type asd-2+0
◦ To create an ASD group at Site 2 (one unit), enter the following command
in root view:
root> amcc create group group_id <1-4> group_type single-asd
group_sub_type asd-2+0
11 Enter group view:
◦ Use the following command to enter group view at Site 1 (two units):
root>amcc group group_ id <1-4> group_type dual-asd
dual-asd-group[1]>
◦ Use the following command to enter group view at Site 1 (two units):
root>amcc group group_id <1-4> group_type single-asd
single-asd-group[1]>
12 In group view, add members and set the unit’s role (Master or Slave):
◦ Use the following commands to add members and set the group’s role for
the Master unit at Site 1:
dual-asd-group[1]>amcc attach slot 2 port 1 role master
the Slave unit at Site 1:
dual-asd-group[1]>amcc attach slot 2 port 1 role slave
the unit at Site 2:
single-asd-group[1]>amcc attach slot 2 port 1 role master
13 In group view, enter the following command to enable the group:
dual|single-asd-group[1]>set admin enable
To display details about the group at Site 1 enter the following command in root
view:
root>amcc show group_id 1 group_type dual-asd
To display details about the group at Site 2 enter the following command in root
view:
root>amcc show group_id 1 group_type single-asd
Page 669 of 1094

The following commands configure an ASD link:

Site 1, Unit 1 (Master)
root>amcc create group group_id 1 group_type dual-asd group_sub_type
asd-2+0
group_id 1, group_type dual-asd created
root>amcc group group_id 1 group_type dual-asd

dual-asd-group[1]>

slot 2 port 1 role master attached to group_id 1 group_type dual-asd

slot 2 port 2 role master attached to group_id 1 group_type dual-asd
dual-asd-group[1]>set admin enable

group_id 1 group_type dual-asd 'Admin Enabled'
dual-asd-group[1]>
Site 1, Unit 2
root>amcc create group group_id 1 group_type dual-asd group_sub_type
asd-2+0
group_id 1, group_type dual-asd created

dual-asd-group[1]>

slot 2 port 1 role slave attached to group_id 1 group_type dual-asd

slot 2 port 2 role slave attached to group_id 1 group_type dual-asd
dual-asd-group[1]>set admin enable

group_id 1 group_type dual-asd 'Admin Enabled'
dual-asd-group[1]>
Site 2 (Master)
root>amcc create group group_id 1 group_type single-asd group_sub_type
asd-2+0
group_id 1, group_type single-asd created
root>amcc group group_id 1 group_type single-asd


slot 2 port 1 role master attached to group_id 1 group_type single-asd

slot 2 port 2 role master attached to group_id 1 group_type single-asd
single-asd-group[1]>set admin enable

group_id 1 group_type single-asd 'Admin Enabled'
Page 670 of 1094

14.9.2 Viewing ASD Status (CLI)

To view BBC Space Diversity status, enter the following command in group view:
dual-asd-group[x]>show members
For each member of the group, the command displays the member’s role (master
or slave) and state:
• Idle – All units are operational.
• Master Only – The Slave unit is not operational.
• ASD Configuration not supported – The link has been misconfigured. Make
sure that each radio carrier is configured with the same radio parameters and
MRMC scripts and parameters.
For master units only, the command also displays the status of the ASD group’s
received radio signal:
• Combined – Only relevant for the Master unit at the dual-unit side of the link.
ASD is functioning to produce a combined radio signal.
• Main Only – Only relevant for Master units. Only the main path signal is being
received.
• Diversity Only – Only relevant for Slave units and the Master unit at the
single-unit side of the link. Only the diversity path is providing a usable signal.
• N/A – No adequate signal is being received, either because of an LOF
condition or misconfiguration of the link.
For example:
Dual-asd-group[1]>show members
slot 2 port 1 role master state Idle Combined Combined
slot 2 port 2 role master state Idle Combined Combined
You can also display the status of the ASD group’s received radio signal, but you
must do so via the Web EMS. See Viewing ASD Status.
14.9.3 Deleting an ASD Group (CLI)

To delete an ASD group, you must perform the following steps:
1 In group view, enter the following command to disable the group. When you
execute the command, the unit is automatically reset.
dual|single-asd-group[1]>set admin disable
2 Once the unit comes back online, enter group view and enter the following
commands to remove the members from the group:
dual|single-asd-group[1]> amcc detach slot 2 port 1
dual|single-asd-group[1]> amcc detach slot 2 port 2
3 In root view, enter the following command to delete the group:
root> amcc delete group group_id <1-4> group_type
<single asd|dual-asd>
The following sequence of commands disables the ASD group at one of the units
at Site 1:
dual-asd-group[1]>
Page 671 of 1094

dual-asd-group[1]>set admin disable

Power UP reset after 10 seconds...
group_id 1 group_type dual-asd 'Admin Disabled'
dual-asd-group[1]>
Broadcast message from root@hostname (console) (Sun May 7

23:10:01 2000):
The system is going down for reboot NOW!

dual-asd-group[1]>
dual-asd-group[1]>amcc detach slot 2 port 1

slot 2 port 1 detached from group_id 1 group_type dual-asd
dual-asd-group[1]>amcc detach slot 2 port 2

slot 2 port 2 detached from group_id 1 group_type dual-asd
dual-asd-group[1]>exit
root>
root>amcc delete group group_id 1 group_type dual-asd

group_id 1 group_type dual-asd deleted
root>
Page 672 of 1094

14.10 Configuring Advanced Frequency Reuse (AFR) (CLI)

For a general description of AFR, see AFR Overview.
14.10.1 Initial Link Configuration and Alignment for AFR (CLI)

Before performing the software configuration for AFR, you must set up and align
the two links as individual 1+0 links. For instructions, see Initial Link Configuration
and Alignment for AFR.
14.10.2 Software Configuration for AFR (CLI)

Note: AFR is not supported with ATPC. ATPC should be disabled before
configuring AFR. See Configuring ATPC and ATPC Override Timer (CLI).
Perform the following steps for each site in the AFR configuration.
• If you are performing the configuration locally at the Hub site and each Tail
site, the order in which you configure the sites does not matter.
• If you are performing the configuration for all three sites remotely from the
Hub Site, you must configure the sites in the following order:
◦ Tail Site 1
◦ Tail Site 2
◦ Hub Site
After you configure AFR on the Tails Sites, the link between the Hub Site and the
Tail Sites will be lost. The links will be restored after you configure AFR on the Hub
site and the Hub site comes back up after unit reset.
1 Create an AFR group by entering on of the following commands in root view:
◦ If you are configuring the Hub site, enter the following command:
root> amcc create group group_id 1 group_type afr-agg
group_sub_type internal
◦ If you are configuring a Tail site, enter the following command:
root>amcc create group group_id 1 group_type afr-tail
2 Enter AMCC Group view by entering the following command in root view:
root> amcc group group_id 1
group [1]>
3 Assign a role to each radio interface, as follows:
◦ If you are configuring the Hub site, enter the following command in group
view for each radio interface:
group [1]> amcc attach slot 2 port <1|2> role <agg-1|agg-2>
◦ If you are configuring a Tail site, enter the following command in group
view:
group [1]> amcc attach slot 2 port <1|2> role <tail-1|tail-2>
Make sure the interface you configure as agg-1 is part of the link with tail-1
and that the interface you configure as agg-2 is part of the link with tail-2.
4 Enter the following command to enable the group. When you execute the
command, the unit is automatically reset.
Page 673 of 1094

group [1]> amcc set enable
Once AFR has been configured on the Hub site and both Tail sites, the
configuration is complete.
To display the current AFR configuration, enter the following command in root
view:
root> amcc show
The following sequence of commands enables AFR at the Hub site, in a

configuration where radio interface 1 is Aggregator 1, connected to Tail Site 1,
and radio interface 2 is Aggregator 2, connected to Tail Site 2:
root> amcc create group group_id 1 group_type afr-agg
group[1]> amcc attach slot 2 port 1 role agg-1
The following sequence of commands enables AFR at Tail Site 1:

root> amcc create group group_id 1 group_type afr-tail
group[1]> amcc attach slot 2 port 1 role tail-1
The following sequence of commands enables AFR at Tail Site 2:

root> amcc create group group_id 1 group_type afr-tail
group[1]> amcc attach slot 2 port 1 role tail-2
14.10.3 Deleting an AFR Group (CLI)

If you want to disable AFR and convert the two links into non-AFR links, you must
perform the following steps for each site in the AFR configuration. If you are
managing the links by in-band management from the hub site, you must disable
AFR at the tail sites first, then disable AFR at the hub site. Once AFR has been
disabled at all of the sites, you can delete the AFR groups in any order.
1 Enter AMCC Group view by entering the following command in root view:
group [1]>
2 Enter the following command to disable the group. When you execute the
command, the unit is automatically reset.
group [1]> amcc set disable
3 Detach the radio interface from the group. If you are disabling AFR at the Hub
site, detach both interfaces. To detach an interface from the group, enter the
following command in root view for each interface:
group [1]> amcc detach slot 2 port <port>
4 Exit group view and enter the following command in root view to delete the
group:
root> amcc delete group group_id 1
Page 674 of 1094

Once you have performed this procedure for the Hub site and both Tail sites, you
can reconfigure the links according to the new network plan.
The following sequence of commands disables AFR at the Hub site:
group[1]> amcc set disable
group[1]> amcc detach slot 2 port 1
slot 2 port 1 detached from group_id 1
group[1]> amcc detach slot 2 port 2
slot 2 port 2 detached from group_id 1
group[1]> exit
root> amcc delete group group_id 1
group_id 1 deleted
14.11 Operating an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP in Single Radio Carrier Mode

(CLI)
If you wish to operate an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit in single radio carrier mode,
you must perform the following steps:
1 Verify that XPIC is disabled. See Configuring XPIC (CLI).
2 Disable Multi-Carrier ABC, as described in Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group
(CLI).
3 Disable one of the two radio interfaces, as described in Enabling the Interfaces
(CLI).
4 Mute the disabled radio interface, as described in Muting and Unmuting a
Radio (CLI).
Page 675 of 1094

15. Unit Management (CLI)

• Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications (CLI)
• Configuring SNMP (CLI)
• Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP (CLI)
• Upgrading the Software (CLI)
• Backing Up and Restoring Configurations (CLI)
• Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration (CLI)
• Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset (CLI)
• Configuring Unit Parameters (CLI)
• Configuring NTP (CLI)
• Displaying Unit Inventory (CLI)
• Displaying SFP DDM and Inventory Information (CLI)
Related topics:
• Setting the Time and Date (Optional) (CLI)
• Uploading Unit Info (CLI)
• Changing the Management IP Address (CLI)
15.1 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications

(CLI)
You can specify which IP protocol the unit will use when initiating
communications, such as downloading software, sending traps, pinging, or
exporting configurations. The options are IPv4 or IPv6.
To define which IP protocol the unit will use when initiating communications,
root> platform management ip set ip-address-family <ipv4|ipv6>
To show the IP protocol version the unit will use when initiating communications,
root> platform management ip show ip-address-family
15.2 Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address (CLI)

You can configure the remote unit’s IP address, subnet mask and default gateway
in IPv4 format and/or in IPv6 format. The remote unit will receive
communications whether they were sent to its IPv4 address or its IPv6 address.
15.2.1 Configuring the Remote Radio's IP Address in IPv4 format (CLI)

To set the remote radio’s IP Address, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set ip-address <ipv4-address>
Page 676 of 1094

To display the remote radio’s IP Address, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show ip-address
To set the remote radio’s subnet mask, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set subnet-mask IP <subnet-mask>
To display the remote radio’s subnet mask, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show subnet-mask
To set the remote radio’s default gateway, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set default-gateway IP <ipv4-address>
To display the remote radio’s default gateway, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show default-gateway
Table 118: Remote Unit IP Address (IPv4) CLI Parameters

ipv4-address Dotted decimal Any valid IPv4 Sets the default gateway
format. address. or IP address of the
remote radio.
subnet-mask Dotted decimal Any valid subnet Sets the subnet mask of
format. mask. the remote radio.
The following command sets the default gateway of the remote radio as
192.168.1.20:
radio[2/1]>remote-unit set default-gateway IP 192.168.1.20
The following commands set the IP address of the remote radio as 192.168.1.1,
with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255.
radio[2/1]>remote-unit set ip-address 192.168.1.1
radio[2/1]>remote-unit set subnet-mask IP 255.255.255.255
15.2.2 Configuring the Remote Radio's IP Address in IPv6 format (CLI)

To set the remote radio’s IP Address, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set ip-address-ipv6 <ipv6-address>
To display the remote radio’s IP Address, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show ip-address-ipv6
To set the remote radio’s prefix length, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set prefix-length <prefix-length >
Page 677 of 1094

To display the remote radio’s prefix-length, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show prefix-length
To set the remote radio’s default gateway, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set default-gateway-ipv6 IPv6 <ipv6-
address>
To display the remote radio’s default gateway, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show default-gateway-ipv6
Table 119: Remote Unit IP Address (IPv6) CLI Parameters

ipv6-address Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 Sets the default
hexadecimal digits address. gateway or IP address
separated by colons. of the remote radio.
prefix-length Number 1-128 Sets the prefix length
of the remote radio.
should be different for
each RADIUS client
The following command sets the default gateway of the remote radio as
FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329:
radio[2/1]>remote-unit set default-gateway-ipv6 IPv6
FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329
The following commands set the IP address of the remote radio as

FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329, with a prefix length of 64:
radio[2/2]>remote-unit set ip-address-ipv6
FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329
radio[2/2]>remote-unit set prefix-length 64
Page 678 of 1094

15.3 Configuring SNMP (CLI)

IP-20 supports SNMP v1, V2c, and v3. You can set community strings for access
to IP-20 units.
IP-20 supports the following MIBs:
• RFC-1213 (MIB II).
• RMON MIB.
• Proprietary MIB.
Access to the unit is provided by making use of the community and context fields
in SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c/SNMPv3, respectively.
• Configuring Basic SNMP Settings (CLI)
• Configuring SNMPv3 (CLI)
• Displaying the SNMP Settings (CLI)
• Configuring Trap Managers (CLI)
15.3.1 Configuring Basic SNMP Settings (CLI)

To enable SNMP, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp admin set
<admin>
To specify the SNMP version, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp version set
<version>
To specify the SNMP read and write communities, enter the following command
in root view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmpv1v2 set read-
community <read-community> write-community <write-community>
Note: Additional security parameters can be configured in the Quick

Configuration Security Protocols page. See Quick Security
Configuration – Protocols Page, Step 4.
Table 120: Basic SNMP CLI Parameters

admin Variable enable Select enable to enable

disable SNMP monitoring, or
disable to disable SNMP
monitoring.
version Variable v1 Specifies the SNMP version.
v2
v3
read-community Text String Any valid SNMP read The community string for the
community. SNMP read community.
Page 679 of 1094


write-community Text String Any valid SNMP write The community string for the
community. SNMP write community.
The following commands enable SNMP v2 on the unit, and set the read
community to “public” and the write community to “private”:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp admin set enable
root> platform security protocols-control snmp version set v2

community public write-community private
Page 680 of 1094

15.3.2 Configuring SNMPv3 (CLI)

The following commands are relevant for SNMPv3.
To block SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 access so that only SNMPv3 access will be enabled,
root> platform security protocols-control snmp v1v2-block set
<set-block>
To add an SNMPv3 user, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform security protocols-control snmp v3-
authentication add v3-user-name <v3-user-name> v3-user-password
<v3-user-password> v3-security-mode <v3-security-mode> v3-
encryption-mode <v3-encryption-mode> v3-auth-algorithm <v3-
auth-algorithm> v3-access-mode <v3-access-mode>
To remove an SNMP v3 user, enter the following command in root view:

authentication remove v3-user-name <v3-user-name>
To display all SNMP v3 users and their authentication parameters, enter the
authentication show
Table 121: SNMPv3 CLI Parameters

set-block Variable yes yes – SNMPv1 and

no SNMPv2 access is blocked.
no – SNMPv1 and
SNMPv2 access is not
blocked.
v3-user-name Text String An SNMPv3 user name.
v3-user-password Text String Must be at least eight An SNMPv3 user
characters. password.
v3-security-mode Variable authNoPriv Defines the security mode
authPriv to be used for this user.
noAuthNoPriv
v3-encryption-mode Variable None Defines the encryption
DES (privacy) protocol to be
used for this user.
AES
v3-auth-algorithm Variable None Defines the
SHA authentication algorithm
to be used for this user.
MD5
v3-access-mode Variable readWrite Defines the access
readOnly permission level for this
user.
Page 681 of 1094

The following commands enable SNMP v2 on the unit, and set the read
community to “public” and the write community to “private”:

community public write-community private
The following commands enable SNMP v3 on the unit, block SNMP v1 and SNMP
v2 access, and define an SNMPv3 user with User Name=Geno,
Password=abcdefgh, security mode authPriv, encryption mode DES,
authentication algorithm SHA, and read-write access:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp v1v2-block set

yes

authentication add v3-user-name geno v3-user-password abcdefgh
v3-security-mode authPriv v3-encryption-mode DES v3-auth-
algorithm SHA v3-access-mode readWrite
15.3.3 Displaying the SNMP Settings (CLI)

To display the general SNMP parameters, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp show-all
To display all SNMP v3 users and their authentication parameters, enter the
authentication show
To display the current MIB version used in the system, enter the following
root> platform security protocols-control snmp show-mib-version
To display details about the current MIB version used in the system, enter the
root> platform security protocols-control snmp show-mib-
version-table
To display the SNMP read and write communities, enter the following command
in root view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmpv1v2 show
15.3.4 Configuring Trap Managers (CLI)

To display the current SNMP trap manager settings, enter the following command
in root view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp trap-manager
show
Page 682 of 1094

To modify the settings of an SNMP trap manger, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp trap-manager set
manager-id <manager-id> manager-admin <manager-admin> manager-
ipv4 <manager-ipv4> manager-ipv6<manager-ipv6> manager-port
<manager-port> manager-community <manager-community> manager-
v3-user <manager-v3-user> manager-description <manager-
description>
To enable an SNMP trap manger without modifying its parameters, enter the
admin manager-id <manager-id> manager-admin <manager-admin>
To specify the number of minutes between heartbeat traps, enter the following
heartbeat manager-id <manager-id> manager-heartbeat <manager-
heartbeat>
Table 122: Trap Managers CLI Parameters

manager-id Number. 1–4 Enter the Manager ID of the trap

manager you want to modify.
manager-admin Variable. enable Enter enable or disable to enable or
disable disable the trap manager.
manager-ipv4 Dotted decimal Any valid IPv4 If the IP protocol selected in platform
format. address. management ip set ip-address-
family is IPv4, enter the destination
IPv4 address. Traps will be sent to
this IP address.
manager-ipv6 Eight groups of Any valid IPv6 If the IP protocol selected in platform
four hexadecimal address. management ip set ip-address-
digits separated family is IPv6, enter the destination
by colons. IPv6 address. Traps will be sent to
this IP address.
manager-port Number. 70 – 65535 Enter the number of the port
through which traps will be sent.
manager- Text String. Any valid SNMP Enter the community string for the
community read community. SNMP read community.
manager-v3- Text String. The name of a V3 If the SNMP Trap version selected in
user user defined in platform security protocols-
the system. control snmp version set is V3, enter
the name of a V3 user defined in the
system.
Note: Make sure that an identical V3
user is also defined on the
manager's side
Page 683 of 1094


manager- Text String. Enter a description of the trap
description manager (optional).
manager- Number. 0 – 1440 Specifies the number of minutes
heartbeat between heartbeat traps. If you
enter 0, no heartbeat traps will be
sent.
Note: To reduce unnecessary traffic,
heartbeat traps are only sent if no
other trap was sent during the
Heartbeat Period.
The following commands enable trap manager 2, and assign it IP address

192.168.1.250, port 164, and community “private”, with a heartbeat of
12 minutes.
root> platform security protocols-control snmp trap-manager set
manager-id 2 manager-admin enable manager-ip 192.168.1.250
manager-port 164 manager-community private manager-description
text

heartbeat manager-id 2 manager-heartbeat 12
Page 684 of 1094

15.4 Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP (CLI)

By default, the following IP-20 ports are used for FTP and SFTP when the IP-20
unit is acting as an FTP or SFTP client (e.g., software downloads, configuration file
backup and restore operations):
• FTP – 21
• SFTP – 22
To change the port for either protocol, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management file-transfer port-config protocol
<ftp|sftp> port-number <0-65535>
To display the ports that are currently configured for FTP and SFTP, enter the
root> platform management file-transfer port-show
These ports are configured globally, rather than per specific operation.
The following sequence of commands displays the current (default) FTP and SFTP
port settings, changes the FTP port to 125 and the SFTP port to 126, and shows
the new FTP and SFTP port settings.
root>platform management file-transfer port-show
Port config table:

==================
File transfer File transfer port
protocol number
=====================================
ftp 21
sftp 22

ftp port-number 125

sftp port-number 126
root>platform management file-transfer port-show
Port config table:

==================
File transfer File transfer port
protocol number
=====================================
ftp 125
sftp 126
root>
Page 685 of 1094

15.5 Upgrading the Software (CLI)

IP-20 software and firmware releases are provided in a single bundle that includes
software and firmware for all components in the system. Software is first
downloaded to the system, then installed. After installation, a reset is
automatically performed on all components whose software was upgraded.
Important Note: Make sure to use the original CeraOS software file, without any
modification. Otherwise the software download process will
fail.
• Software Upgrade Overview (CLI)
• Viewing Current Software Versions (CLI)
• Configuring a Software Download (CLI)
• Downloading a Software Package (CLI)
• Installing and Upgrading Software (CLI)
15.5.1 Software Upgrade Overview (CLI)

The IP-20 software installation process includes the following steps:
1 Download – The files required for the installation or upgrade are downloaded
from a remote server.
2 Installation – The downloaded software and firmware files are installed in all
modules and components of the IP-20 that are currently running an older
version.
3 Reset – The IP-20 is restarted in order to boot the new software and firmware
versions.
Software and firmware releases are provided in a single bundle that includes
software and firmware for all components in the system. When you download a
software bundle, the system verifies the validity of the bundle. The system also
compares the files in the bundle to the files currently installed in the IP-20 and its
components, so that only files that need to be updated are actually downloaded.
A message is displayed for each file that is actually downloaded.
Note: When downloading an older version, all files in the bundle may be
downloaded, including files that are already installed.
Software bundles can be downloaded via HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, or SFTP. After the
software download is complete, you can initiate the installation.
Note: Before performing a software upgrade, it is important to verify that
(Optional) (CLI).
When upgrading a node with unit protection, upgrade the standby

unit first, then the active unit.
Page 686 of 1094

15.5.2 Viewing Current Software Versions (CLI)

To display the software version running and downloaded on the unit, enter the
root> platform software show versions
The following appears:

◦ Downloaded Version – The version, if any, that has been downloaded
from the server but not yet installed. Upon installation and reset, this
version will become the Running Version.
◦ Installed Version – The software version currently running on the unit.
To display more detailed information about software component versions, enter
the following command in root view:
root> platform software show versions all
15.5.3 Configuring a Software Download (CLI)

You can download software using HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, or SFTP.
When downloading software via HTTP or HTTPS, the IP-20 functions as the server,
and you can download the software directly to the IP-20 unit.
Note: HTTP/HTTPS software download is only supported using the Web EMS.
For instructions, see Downloading and Installing Software.
When downloading software, the IDU functions as an FTP or SFTP client. You must
install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are using to perform
the software upgrade. For details, see Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP
Server.
Note: For SFTP downloads, be aware that only certain ciphers are supported
in some operation modes. For a list of supported ciphers, including an
indication of which ciphers are supported in HTTPS strong mode and
FIPS mode, refer to Annex A – Supported Ciphers for Secured
Communication Protocols in the Release Notes for the product and
To set the file transfer protocol you want to use (FTP or SFTP), enter the following
command:
root> platform software download version protocol <ftp|sftp>
If the IP protocol selected in platform management ip set ip-address-family is

IPv4, enter the following command:
root> platform software download channel server set server-ip
<server-ipv4> directory <directory> username <username>
password <password>
If the IP protocol selected in platform management ip set ip-address-family is

root> platform software download channel server-ipv6 set
server-ip <server-ipv6> directory <directory> username
<username> password <password>
Page 687 of 1094

To display the software download channel configuration, enter one of the

following commands:
root> platform software download channel server show
root> platform software download channel server-ipv6 show
Table 123: Software Download CLI Parameters

server-ipv4 Dotted decimal format. Any valid IPv4 The IPv4 address of the PC or
address. laptop you are using as the
FTP server.
server-ipv6 Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 The IPv6 address of the PC or
hexadecimal digits address. laptop you are using as the
separated by colons. FTP server.
directory Text String. The directory path from
which you are downloading
the files. Enter the path
relative to the FTP user's
home directory, not the
absolute path. If the location
is the home directory, it
should be left empty. If the
location is a sub-folder under
the home directory, specify
the folder name. If the shared
folder is "C:\", this parameter
can be left empty or
populated with "//".
server-username Text String. The user name you
configured in the FTP server.
server-password Text String. The password you configured
in the FTP server. If you did
not configure a password for
your FTP user, simply omit
this parameter.
The following command configures a download from IP address 192.168.1.242, in

the directory “current”, with user name “anonymous” and password “12345.”
root> platform software download channel server set server-
ip 192.168.1.242 directory \current username anonymous password
12345
Page 688 of 1094

15.5.4 Downloading a Software Package (CLI)

To initiate a software download, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform software download version protocol ftp

You are about to perform a software management operation. This
may cause a system reset.
Are you sure? (yes/no)
Enter Yes at the prompt. When the prompt appears again, enter the following
command to check the download status:
root> platform software download status show
Once the following message appears, proceed with the installation:

DOWNLOAD VERSION status: download success, process percentage:
100
If the software version on the FTP or SFTP server has already been downloaded to
the unit, the following message appears:
DOWNLOAD VERSION status: all components exist, process
percentage: 0
Important Note – If upgrading from version 7.9 or earlier:

• Before you proceed to install the software, repeat the download
process even if the platform software download status show
command produced a download success message, until the unit
displays the message all components exist.
• In case of failure, wait at least 30 minutes and repeat the software
download.
15.5.5 Installing and Upgrading Software (CLI)

To install or upgrade the software, enter the following command in root view
after downloading the software bundle:
root> platform software install version
If you wish to delay the start of installation, enter instead the following command.
The time you enter in HH:MM format is the amount of time to delay until the start
of the installation process:
root> platform software install version timer-countdown <hh:mm>

Software version to be installed:
Are you sure? (yes/no)
To display the status of a software installation or upgrade, enter the following

command:
root> platform software install status show
Important Notes:
Page 689 of 1094

• DO NOT reboot the unit during software installation process. As soon as

the process is successfully completed, the unit will reboot itself.
• Sometimes the installation process can take up to 30 minutes.
• Only in the event that software installation was not successfully finished
and more than 30 minutes have passed can the unit be rebooted.
If you configured delayed installation, you can do any of the following:
• Abort the current delayed installation. To do so, enter the following
command:
root> platform software install abort-timer
• Show the time left until the installation process begins. To do so, enter the
following command:
root> platform software install time-to-install
• Show the original timer as configured for a delayed installation. To do so,
root> platform software install show-time
Page 690 of 1094

15.6 Backing Up and Restoring Configurations (CLI)

You can import and export IP-20 configuration files. This enables you to copy the
system configuration to multiple IP-20 units. You can also backup and save
configuration files.
Importing and exporting configuration files can be done using HTTP, HTTPS, FTP,
or SFTP. However, import and export using HTTP or HTTPS must be performed
using the Web EMS. See Backing Up and Restoring Configurations.
Configuration files can only be copied between units of the same type, i.e., IP-20C
to IP-20C, IP-20C-HP to IP-20C-HP, IP-20S to IP-20S, IP-20E to IP-20E, and IP-20V to
IP-20V.
Note that you can also write CLI scripts that will automatically execute a series of
commands when the configuration file is restored. For information, refer to
Editing CLI Scripts (CLI).
• Configuration Management Overview (CLI)
• Setting the Configuration Management Parameters (CLI)
• Backing up and Exporting a Configuration File (CLI)
• Importing and Restoring a Configuration File (CLI)
• Editing CLI Scripts (CLI)
15.6.1 Configuration Management Overview (CLI)

System configuration files consist of a zip file that contains three components:
• A binary configuration file used by the system to restore the configuration.
• A text file which enables users to examine the system configuration in a
readable format. The file includes the value of all system parameters at the
time of creation of the backup file.
• An additional text file which enables you to write CLI scripts in order to make
desired changes in the backed-up configuration. This file is executed by the
system after restoring the configuration.
You can apply a configuration file to the system from any of the restore points.
You must configure from 1 to 3 restore points:
• When you import a configuration file, the file is saved to the selected restore
point, and overwrites whichever file was previously held in that restore point.
• When you export a configuration file, the file is exported from the selected
restore point.
Page 691 of 1094

• When you back up the current configuration, the backup configuration file is
saved to the selected restore point, and overwrites whichever file was
previously held in that restore point.
• When you restore a configuration, the configuration file in the selected
restore point is the file that is restored.
15.6.2 Setting the Configuration Management Parameters (CLI)

When importing and exporting configuration files, the IP-20 functions as an FTP or
SFTP client. You must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you
are using to perform the import or export. For details, see Installing and
Note Before importing or exporting a configuration file, you must verify that
(Optional) (CLI).
To set the FTP or SFTP parameters for configuration file import and export, enter
one of the following commands in root view:
• If the IP protocol selected in platform management ip set ip-address-family is
root> platform configuration channel server set ip-
address <server-ipv4> directory <directory> filename <filename>
username <username> password <password>
• If the IP protocol selected in platform management ip set ip-address-family is
root> platform configuration channel server-ipv6 set ip-
address <server-ipv6> directory <directory> filename <filename>
To set the file transfer protocol you want to use (FTP or SFTP), enter the following
command:
root>platform configuration channel set protocol <ftp|sftp>
To display the FTP channel parameters for importing and exporting configuration
files, enter one of the following commands in root view:
root> platform configuration channel server show
root> platform configuration channel server-ipv6 show
Table 124: Configuration Management CLI Parameters

server-ipv4 Dotted decimal Any valid IPv4 The IPv4 address of the PC or
format. address. laptop you are using as the FTP
server.
server-ipv6 Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 The IPv6 address of the PC or
hexadecimal digits address. laptop you are using as the FTP
separated by colons. server.
directory Text String. The location of the file you are
downloading or uploading. If the
location is the root shared folder,
Page 692 of 1094


it should be left empty. If the
location is a sub-folder under the
root shared folder, specify the
folder name. If the shared folder is
"C:\", this parameter can be left
empty or populated with "//".
filename Text String. The name of the file you are
importing, or the name you want
to give the file you are exporting.
Note: You must add the suffix .zip
to the file name. Otherwise, the
file import may fail. You can
export the file using any name,
then add the suffix .zip manually.
username Text String. The user name you configured in
the FTP server.
password Text String. The password you configured in
the FTP server. If you did not
configure a password for your FTP
user, simply omit this parameter.
The following command configures the FTP channel for configuration file import
and export to IP address 192.168.1.99, in the directory “current”, with file name
“version_8_backup.zip”, user name “anonymous”, and password “12345.”
root> platform configuration channel server set server-ip
192.168.1.99 directory \current filename version_8_backup.zip
username anonymous password 12345
15.6.3 Backing up and Exporting a Configuration File (CLI)

To save the current configuration as a backup file to one of the restore points,
root> platform configuration configuration-file add <restore-
point>
To export a configuration from a restore point to the external server location,

root> platform configuration configuration-file export
<restore-point>
Table 125: Configuration Backup and Restore CLI Parameters

restore-point Variable restore-point-1 Identifies the restore point to or

restore-point-2 from which to perform the backup
operation.
restore-point-3
The following commands save the current configuration as a configuration at

Restore Point 1, and export the file to the external server location:
Page 693 of 1094

root> platform configuration configuration-file add restore-point-1
root> platform configuration configuration-file export restore-point-1
15.6.4 Importing and Restoring a Configuration File (CLI)

You can import a configuration file from an external PC or laptop to one of the restore
points. Once you have imported the file, you can restore the configuration. Restoring a
saved configuration does not change the unit’s FIPS mode.
Note: In order to import a configuration file, you must configure the FTP
channel parameters and restore points, as described in Setting the
Configuration Management Parameters and Backing up and Exporting
a Configuration File.
To import a configuration file, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform configuration configuration-file import
<restore-point>
To restore a configuration from a restore point to become the active configuration

file, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform configuration configuration-file restore
<restore-point>
Table 126: Configuration Import and Restore CLI Parameters

restore-point Variable restore-point-1 Identifies the restore point to or

restore-point-2 from which to perform the backup
operation.
restore-point-3
The following commands import a configuration file from an external PC or laptop

to Restore Point 2 on the IP-20, and restore the file to be the system configuration
file for the IP-20:
root> platform configuration configuration-file import restore-
point-2
root> platform configuration configuration-file restore

restore-point-2
15.6.5 Editing CLI Scripts (CLI)

The configuration file package includes a text file that enables you to write CLI
scripts in a backed-up configuration that are executed after restoring the
configuration.
To edit a CLI script:
1 Back up the current configuration to one of the restore points. See Backing up
and Exporting a Configuration File (CLI).
2 Export the configuration from the restore point to a PC or laptop. See Backing
up and Exporting a Configuration File (CLI).
3 On the PC or laptop, unzip the file Configuration_files.zip.
4 Edit the cli_script.txt file using clish commands, one per line.
Page 694 of 1094

5 Save and close the cli_script.txt file, and add it back into
the Configuration_files.zip file.
6 Import the updated Configuration_files.zip file back into the unit.
See Importing and Restoring a Configuration File (CLI).
7 Restore the imported configuration file. See Importing and Restoring a
Configuration File (CLI). The unit is automatically reset. During initialization,
the CLI script is executed, line by line.
Note: If any specific command in the CLI script requires reset, the unit is
reset when that command is executed. During initialization following
the reset, execution of the CLI script continues from the following
command.
15.7 Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration (CLI)

To restore the unit to its factory default configuration, while retaining the unit’s IP
address settings and logs, enter the following commands in root view:
root> platform management set-to-default

WARNING: All database and configuration will be lost, unit will
be restart.
Are you sure? (yes/no):yes
At the prompt, type yes.

Note: This does not change the unit’s IP address or FIPS configuration.
15.8 Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset (CLI)

To initiate a hard (cold) reset on the unit, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management chassis reset

You are about to reset the shelf
Are you sure? :(yes/no):
Enter yes. The unit is reset.
15.9 Configuring Unit Parameters (CLI)

You can view and configure system information:
To configure a name for the unit, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management system-name set name <name>
To define a location for the unit, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management system-location set name <name>
To define a contact person for questions pertaining to the unit, enter the
root> platform management system-contact set name <name>
Page 695 of 1094

To define the unit's latitude coordinates, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management system-latitude set <latitude>
To define the unit's longitude coordinates, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management system-longitude set <longitude>
To define the type of measurement unit you want the system to use, enter the
root> platform management set unit_measure_format
<unit_measure_format>
To display the type of measurement unit used by the system, enter the following
root> platform management show unit_measure_format
Table 127: Unit Parameters CLI Parameters

name Text Up to 64 Defines the name of

characters. the unit.
latitude Text Up to 256 Defines the latitude
characters. coordinates of the
unit.
longitude Text Up to 256 Defines the longitude
characters. coordinates of the
unit.
unit_measure_format Variable metric Defines the
imperial measurement units of
the unit.
The following commands configure a name, location, contact person, latitude

coordinates, longitude coordinates, and units of measurements for the IP-20:
root> platform management system-name set name "My-System-Name"
root> platform management system-location set name "My-System-

Location"
root> platform management system-contact set name "John Doe"
root> platform management system-latitude set 40
root> platform management system-longitude set 73
root> platform management set unit_measure_format metric
Page 696 of 1094

15.10 Configuring NTP (CLI)

IP-20 supports Network Time Protocol (NTP). NTP distributes Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC) throughout the system, using a jitter buffer to neutralize the
effects of variable latency.
You can configure up to four NTP servers. Each server can be configured using
IPv4 or IPv6. When multiple servers are configured, the unit chooses the best
server according to the implementation of Version 4.2.6p1 of the NTPD (Network
Time Protocol Daemon). The servers are continually polled. The polling interval is
determined by the NTPD, to achieve maximum accuracy consistent with minimum
network overhead.
To configure an NTP server, enter the following commands in root view:
root> platform management ntp set admin index <index> admin
<admin>
To specify the server’s IP address, use one of the following commands.

Note: For each NTP server you configure, you can define an IPv4 address or
an IPv6 address, but not both.
• To configure the NTP server with an IPv4 address, enter the following
root> platform management ntp set server ipv4 index <index>
ipv4 <ipv4> ntp-version <ntp-version>
• To configure the NTP server with an IPv6 address, enter the following
root> platform management ntp set server ipv4 index <index>
ipv4 <ipv6> ntp-version <ntp-version>
To display the current configuration of all the defined NTP servers, enter the
root> platform management ntp show status
To display the current configuration and status of all the defined NTP servers,
including details that can be used for debugging, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform management ntp show status all
Table 128: NTP CLI Parameters

index Number 1-4 Determines the NTP server being configured.

You can configure up to four NTP servers.
admin Variable enable Enter enable or disable to enable or disable
disable the NTP server.
ipv4 Dotted decimal format. Any valid IPv4 Enter the IP address of the NTP server.
address.
ipv6 Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 Enter the IP address of the NTP server.
hexadecimal digits address.
Page 697 of 1094


ntp- Variable ntpv3 Enter the NTP version you want to use. NTP
version ntpv4 v4 provides interoperability with NTP v3 and
with SNTP.
The following commands configure NTP server 3, enable the server using NTP v4,
and set the IP address of the NTP server as 62.90.139.210.
root> platform management ntp set admin index 3 admin enable
root> platform management ntp set server ipv4 index 3 ipv4

62.90.139.210 ntp-version ntpv4
Page 698 of 1094

15.11 Displaying Unit Inventory (CLI)

To view inventory information, such as the part number and serial number of the
unit hardware, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management inventory show info
For example:
root> platform management inventory show info
System information:
card-name : IP-20
Subtype : 350
part number : 22-0001-0|
serial number : F493606212
company name : Ceragon Networks Ltd.
product name : AODU DC, All-outdoor, dual radio carriers in one

product
product description : AODU DC, All-outdoor, dual radio carriers

in one product
root>
Page 699 of 1094

15.12 Displaying SFP DDM and Inventory Information (CLI)

Static and dynamic monitoring is available for SFP modules, including all SFP,
SFP+, and CSFP modules used in Ethernet and MIMO ports in IP-20 all-outdoor
products. Dynamic monitoring PMs are also available.
Dynamic monitoring (DDM) PMs are also available.
Note: DDM parameters are not relevant for electrical SFPs.
The following alarms are available in connection with SFP DDM and inventory
monitoring. The polling interval for these alarms is one minute.
• Alarm #803- SFP port RX power level is too low.
• Alarm #804 – SFP port RX power level is too high.
• Alarm #805- SFP port TX power level is too low.
• Alarm #806 – SFP port TX power level is too high.
These alarms are based on thresholds defined by the SFP module vendor, which
are static. They also display the actual RX or TX values as of the time when the
alarm was raised, which are dynamic. The dynamic values are not changed as long
as the alarm is still raised. They are only updated if the alarm is cleared, then
raised again.
If there is no signal on the interface, a Loss of Carrier alarm (LOC) is raised, and
this alarm masks the DDM alarms.
15.12.1 Displaying Static Information about an SFP Module (CLI)

To display static information about an SFP module, enter the following command
in root view:
root> platform interfaces sfp-inventory show
For example:
Table 129: SFP Inventory Parameters (CLI)


Connector Type Always displays LC.
transceiver Type Displays a description of the SFP module.
Vendor Name Displays the name of the SFP’s vendor.
Vendor Part Number Displays the vendor’s part number for the SFP module.
Vendor Serial Number Displays the vendor’s serial number for the SFP module.
Vendor Revision Displays the revision number of the serial number provided by the vendor
for the SFP module.
Page 700 of 1094

Laser Wavelength (nm) Display’s the SFP module’s laser wavelength. For CSFP modules, two
wavelengths are displayed. This parameters is not relevant for copper SFPs.
Link Length SM Fiber (km) The maximum length of the cable (in km) for single mode fiber cables.
Link Length OM1 Fiber (m) The maximum length of the cable (in meters) for OM1 multi-mode fiber
cables.
cables.
cables.
Optical Diagnostics Supported Displays whether the SFP module supports DDM monitoring. For modules
that do not support DDM monitoring, the parameters described in Table
130 are not available.
15.12.2 Displaying Dynamic (DDM) Information about an SFP Module (CLI)

To display dynamic information about an SFP module, enter the following
root> platform interfaces sfp-diagnostic show
For example:
Table 130: SFP Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Parameters (CLI)


RX Power Level (dBm) The SFP module’s current RX power signal strength (in dBm).
TX Power Level (dBm) The SFP module’s current TX power signal strength (in dBm).
Bias Current (mA) The laser bias current of the SFP module (in mA)
Temperature The current temperature of the SFP module (displayed in both C° and F°).
If no signal is being received, RX Power Level is displayed as -40 dBm.

If the Admin status of the port is Down, the TX Power Level is displayed as -40
DBm and the Bias Current is displayed as 0 mA.
The Temperature is always shown as long as the SFP module is inserted in the
port.
Page 701 of 1094

15.12.3 Displaying DDM PMs about an SFP Module (CLI)

DDM PMs can be displayed for 15-minute and 24-hour intervals. For each interval,
the following PMs are displayed:
• Minimum RX power during the interval (dBm)
• Average RX power during the interval (dBm)
• Maximum RX power during the interval (dBm)
• Minimum TX power during the interval (dBm)
• Average TX power during the interval (dBm)
• Maximum TX power during the interval (dBm)
To display DDM PMs, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform interfaces sfp-pm show slot <slot> port <port>
interface eth interval <15min|24h|all>
For example:
The Integrity column indicates whether the PM is valid:

• 0 indicates a valid entry.
• 1 indicates an invalid entry. This can be caused by any of the following events
that occurred during the interval
◦ LOC alarm
◦ Changing the Admin status of the interface
◦ Unit reset
Note: No entries are displayed if the SFP device does not support DDM, or if
the Admin status of the interface is Down.
DDM PMs are not persistent, which means they are not saved in the event of unit
reset. RX and TX power levels are collected five times per 15-minute interval. 15-
minute PM data is saved for 24 hours. 24-hour PM data, which is updated every
15 minutes, is saved for 30 days.
Page 702 of 1094

16. Radio Configuration (CLI)

• Viewing and Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters (CLI)
• Configuring ATPC and ATPC Override Timer (CLI)
• Configuring Header De-Duplication (CLI)
• Configuring Frame Cut-Through (CLI)
• Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption (CLI)
• Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics (CLI)
Related topics:
• Entering Radio View (CLI)
• Muting and Unmuting a Radio (CLI)
• Configuring the Transmit (TX) Level (CLI)
• Configuring the Transmit (TX) Frequency (CLI)
• Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) (CLI)
• System Configurations (CLI)
• Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC (CLI)
• Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP (Optional) (CLI)
• Configuring XPIC (CLI)
• Configuring HSB Radio Protection (Unit Protection) (CLI)
• Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity (CLI)
• Operating an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP in Single Radio Carrier Mode (CLI)
Note that to view and configure radio parameters, you must first enter the radio’s
view level in the CLI. For details, refer to Entering Radio View (CLI).
Note: For convenience, this User Guide generally shows the radio prompt
as radio[2/1]>.
Page 703 of 1094

16.1 Viewing and Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters (CLI)

• Displaying Communication Status with the Remote Radio (CLI)
• Displaying the Remote Radio’s Link ID (CLI)
• Muting and Unmuting the Remote Radio (CLI)
• Displaying the Remote Radio’s RX Level (CLI)
• Configuring the Remote Radio’s TX Level (CLI)
• Configuring Remote ATPC (CLI)
• Displaying the Remote Unit’s Most Severe Alarm (CLI)
Related topics
16.1.1 Displaying Communication Status with the Remote Radio (CLI)

To display the communication status with the remote radio, enter the following
radio[x/x]>remote-unit communication status show
16.1.2 Displaying the Remote Radio’s Link ID (CLI)

To display the remote radio’s Link ID, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show link-id
16.1.3 Muting and Unmuting the Remote Radio (CLI)

To mute or unmute the remote radio, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit mute set admin <admin>
To display the mute status of the remote radio, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit mute show status
Table 131: Remote Radio Mute/Unmute CLI Parameters

admin Variable on Mutes (on) or unmutes

off (off) the remote unit.
The following command mutes the remote radio:

radio[2/1]>remote-unit mute set admin on
The following command unmutes the remote radio:

radio[2/1]>remote-unit mute set admin off
Page 704 of 1094

16.1.4 Displaying the Remote Radio’s RX Level (CLI)

To display the remote radio’s RX level, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show rx-level
16.1.5 Configuring the Remote Radio’s TX Level (CLI)

To set the transmit (TX) level of the remote radio, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set tx-level <tx-level>
To display the transmit (TX) level of the remote radio, enter the following
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show tx-level
Table 132: Remote Radio TX Level CLI Parameters

tx-level Number Depends on the The desired TX signal

frequency and unit level (TSL), in dBm.
type.
The following command sets the TX level of the remote radio to 10 dBm:
radio[2/1]>remote-unit set tx-level 10
16.1.6 Configuring Remote ATPC (CLI)

To set the RX reference level for ATPC on the remote radio, enter the following
radio[x/x]>remote-unit atpc set ref-level <ref-level>
To display the RX reference level for ATPC on the remote radio, enter the
following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit atpc show ref-level
Table 133: Remote Radio ATPC CLI Parameters

ref-level Number -70 - -30 The RX reference level

for the ATPC mechanism.
The following command sets the ATPC RX reference level of the remote radio to -
55:
radio[2/1]>remote-unit atpc set ref-level -55
16.1.7 Displaying the Remote Unit’s Most Severe Alarm (CLI)

To display the most severe alarm currently raised in the unit, enter the following
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show most-severe-alarm
Page 705 of 1094

16.2 Configuring ATPC and ATPC Override Timer (CLI)

ATPC is a closed-loop mechanism by which each carrier changes the TX power
according to the indication received across the link, in order to achieve a desired
RSL on the other side of the link.
With ATPC, if the radio increases its TX power up to the configured TX power, it
can lead to a period of sustained transmission at maximum power, resulting in
unacceptable interference with other systems.
In order to minimize interference, IP-20 provides an ATPC override mechanism.
When ATPC override is enabled, a timer begins when ATPC raises the TX power to
its maximum. When the timer expires, the radio enters ATPC override state. In
ATPC override state, the radio transmits no higher than the pre-determined ATPC
override TX level, and an ATPC override alarm is raised. The radio remains in ATPC
override state until the ATPC override state is manually cancelled by the user (or
until the unit is reset). The radio then returns to normal ATPC operation.
In a configuration with unit protection, the ATPC override state is propagated to
the standby unit in the event of switchover.
Notes: When canceling an ATPC override state, you should ensure that the
underlying problem has been corrected. Otherwise, ATPC may be
overridden again.
You cannot use ATPC in MIMO mode. See Configuring MIMO and
Space Diversity (CLI).
To enable or disable ATPC, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>atpc set admin <admin>
To display whether or not ATPC is enabled, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>atpc show admin
To set the RX reference level for ATPC, enter the following command in radio view
radio[x/x]>atpc set rx-level atpc_ref_rx_level <rx-level>
To display the RX reference level for ATPC, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>atpc show rx-level
To set an ATPC override timer, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>atpc set override timeout <timeout>
Note: The next command actually enables ATPC override. However, it is

recommended to set the timer before enabling ATPC override. Failure
to do so can lead to unexpected reduction of the TX power with
corresponding loss of capacity if TX override is enabled with the timer
set to a lower-than-desired value.
To enable ATPC override, enter the following command in radio view. ATPC must
be enabled before you enable ATPC override.
radio[x/x]>atpc override set admin <override admin>
Page 706 of 1094

To display whether or not ATPC override is enabled, enter the following command
in radio view:
radio[x/x]>atpc override show admin
To display the ATPC override timeout, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>atpc show override timeout
To set the TX power to be used when the unit is in an ATPC override state, enter
the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>atpc set override-tx-level <override-tx-level>
To display the ATPC override TX power, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>atpc show override tx-level
To display the current ATPC override state, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>atpc show override

• Normal – ATPC override is enabled, and there is no override.
• Disabled – ATPC override is not enabled.
• Override – ATPC override has been activated.
To cancel ATPC override, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>atpc set override-cancel
Table 134: Radio ATPC CLI Parameters

admin Variable enable Enables or disables ATPC mode.

disable
rx-level Number -70 - -30 The RSL reference level for the ATPC
mechanism. When ATPC is enabled, it
adjusts the TX power dynamically to
preserve this RSL level.
timeout Number 0-1800 The amount of time, in seconds, the timer
counts from the moment the radio reaches
its maximum configured TX power until
ATPC override goes into effect.
override Variable enable Enables or disables ATPC override.
admin disable
override-tx- Number -50 - 50 The TX power, in dBm, to be used when
level the unit is in an ATPC override state. The
range of values depends on the frequency,
MRMC script, and radio type.
The following commands enable ATPC mode and ATPC override for radio carrier 1,
with an RSL reference level of -55, an ATPC override timeout of 15 minutes, and
an override TX level of 18 dBm:
Page 707 of 1094

radio[2/1]>atpc set admin enable

radio[2/1]>atpc set rx-level atpc_ref_rx_level -55
radio[2/1]>atpc set override timeout 900
radio[2/1]>atpc override set admin enable
radio[2/1]> atpc set override-tx-level 18
Page 708 of 1094

16.3 Configuring Header De-Duplication (CLI)

Note: For IP-20E and IP-20V, Header De-Duplication is available for all
channels except 500 MHz. Make sure to disable Header De-Duplication
before selecting a 500 MHz MRMC script.
Header De-Duplication identifies traffic flows and replaces header fields with a
flow ID. The Header De-Duplication module includes an algorithm for learning
each new flow, and implements compression on the flow type starting with the
next frame of that flow type.
You can determine the depth to which the compression mechanism operates,
from Layer 2 to Layer 4. You must balance the depth of compression against the
number of flows in order to ensure maximum efficiency. Multi-Layer (Enhanced)
compression supports up to 256 flow types.
Note: The Header De-Duplication configuration must be identical on both
sides of the link.
To configure Header De-Duplication, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[2/1]> compression header-compression set <mode>
Note: In this release, if two radio carriers in an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit are
activated, the Header De-Duplication configuration for radio carrier 1
are applied to both carriers. You must enter radio view for radio
interface 1.
To clear Ethernet port counters, including both Frame Cut-Through and Header
De-Duplication counters, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>clear-ethernet-port-counters
Table 135: Header De-Duplication CLI Parameters

Parameter Input Type Permitted Description
Values
mode Variable Disabled Disabled - Header De-Duplication is disabled.

Layer2 Layer2 - Header De-Duplication operates on the
MPLS Ethernet level.
Layer3 MPLS - Header De-Duplication operates on the
Ethernet and MPLS levels.
Layer4
Layer3 - Header De-Duplication operates on the
Tunnel
Ethernet and IP levels.
Tunnel-Layer3
Layer4 - Header De-Duplication operates on all
Tunnel-Layer4 supported layers up to Layer 4.
Tunnel - Header De-Duplication operates on Layer
2, Layer 3, and on the Tunnel layer for packets
carrying GTP or GRE frames.
Tunnel-Layer3 - Header De-Duplication operates
on Layer 2, Layer 3, and on the Tunnel and T-3
layers for packets carrying GTP or GRE frames.
Page 709 of 1094


Values
Tunnel-Layer4 - Header De-Duplication operates
on Layer 2, Layer 3, and on the Tunnel, T-3, and T-
4 layers for packets carrying GTP or GRE frames.
The following command enables Layer 2 Header De-Duplication on radio carrier 1:

radio[2/1]> compression header-compression set Layer2
Page 710 of 1094

16.3.1 Displaying Header De-Duplication Information (CLI)

To display the current Header De-Duplication configuration, enter the following
radio[2/1]> compression show-configuration
To display counters for Header De-Duplication, enter the following command in

radio view:
radio[2/1]> compression header-compression show-counters
The following counters are displayed:

• TX in octet count - Bytes on the TX side before Header De-Duplication.
• TX out octet count - Bytes on the TX side that were compressed by Header De-
Duplication.
• TX frame in count - Frames on the TX side before Header De-Duplication.
• TX frame out compressed count - Frames on the TX side that were
compressed by Header De-Duplication.
• TX frame uncompressed count - The number of frames on the TX side that
were not compressed due to exclusion rules.
Note: The use of exclusion rules for Header De-Duplication is
planned for future release.
• TX frame uncompressed other count - Frames on the TX side that were not
compressed for reasons other than the use of exclusion rules.
• TX out frame learning count - The number of frames that have been used to
learn unique data flows. Once a particular flow type has been learned,
subsequent frames with that flow type are compressed by Header De-
Duplication.
• TX out number of active flows in count - The number of Header De-
Duplication flows that are active on the TX side.
16.4 Configuring Frame Cut-Through (CLI)

Using the Frame Cut-Through feature, frames assigned to queues with 4th priority
pre-empt frames already in transmission over the radio from other queues. After
the 4th queue frames have been transmitted, transmission of the pre-empted
frames resumes.
Notes: The Frame Cut-Through configuration must be identical on both sides
of the link.
If Frame Cut-Through is used together with 1588 Transparent Clock,

the 1588 packets must be given a CoS that is not assigned to the
fourth priority queue.
Note: Frame Cut-Through cannot be used together with 1588 Transparent
Clock.
To enable Frame Cut-Through, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[2/1]> cut-through mode yes
To disable Frame Cut-Through, enter the following command in radio view:
Page 711 of 1094

radio[2/1]> cut-through mode no
To display whether Frame Cut-Through is currently enabled or disabled, enter the

radio[2/1]> cut-through show-mode
To display the number of frames and bytes that have been transmitted via Frame
Cut-Through, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[2/1]> cut-through show-counters
Page 712 of 1094

16.5 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption (CLI)

This feature is not supported with MIMO or Space Diversity links.
• Requires an activation key per radio. If no valid AES activation key has been
applied to the unit, AES will not operate on the unit. See Configuring the
Activation Key (CLI).
Note: In order for the AES activation key to become active, you must reset
the unit after configuring a valid AES activation key. Until the unit is
reset, an alarm will be present if you enable AES. This is not the case
for other activation keys.
FibeAir IP-20C, IP-20C-HP, and IP-20S support AES-256 payload encryption. The
purpose of payload encryption is to secure the radio link and provide protection
against eavesdropping and/or personification (“man-in-the-middle”) attacks.
AES is enabled and configured separately for each radio carrier.
IP-20 uses a dual-key encryption mechanism for AES:
• The user provides a master key. The master key can also be generated by the
system upon user command. The master key is a 32-byte symmetric
encryption key. The same master key must be manually configured on both
• The session key is a 32-byte symmetric encryption key used to encrypt the
actual data. Each link uses two session keys, one for each direction. For each
direction, the session key is generated by the transmit side unit and
propagated automatically, via a Key Exchange Protocol, to the other side of
the link. The Key Exchange Protocol exchanges session keys by encrypting
them with the master key, using the AES-256 encryption algorithm. Session
keys are regenerated at user-configured intervals.
The first KEP exchange that takes place after a new master key is configured
causes traffic to be blocked for up to one minute, until the Crypto Validation State
becomes Valid. Subsequent KEP exchanges that take place when a session key
expires do not affect traffic. KEP exchanges have no effect upon ACM, RSL, and
MSE.
To display the current payload encryption status for all available radio links on the
unit, enter the following command in root view:
root> payload encryption status show
Page 713 of 1094

The following is a sample output of this command in which payload encryption is

enabled but not operational on radio interface 1, and disabled on radio
interface 2.
Note: The Crypto Validation State field indicates whether the interface is
functioning properly, with AES-256 encryption. In order for this field to
display Valid, both the interface itself and AES-256 encryption must be
enabled, the hardware must be in place and functioning properly,
initialization must be finished, and AES-256 encryption must be
functioning properly, with no loopback on the interface.
To configure payload encryption:
1 Verify that both the local and remote units are running with no alarms. If any
alarm is present, take corrective actions to clear the alarms before
proceeding.
2 If the link is using in-band management, identify which unit is local and which
unit is remote from the management point of view.
3 In a protected link, enable protection lockout, first on the remote and then on
the local unit. See Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit (CLI).
4 To configure AES on a radio carrier, you must first enter traffic encryption
view for the specific radio. To enter Payload Encryption view, enter the
root> payload encryption slot 2 port <port>
For example, to configure AES on radio interface 1, enter the following command
in root view:
root> payload encryption slot 2 port 1
Payload Encryption [1/1]>
To display the payload encryption mode of the radio interface, enter the following
command in Payload Encryption view:
Payload Encryption [2/x]> payload encryption mode show
The following display indicates that payload encryption is enabled on radio

interface 1:
Payload Encryption [2/1]> payload encryption mode show
Admin Mode: AES-256
Page 714 of 1094

The following display indicates that payload encryption is disabled on radio

interface 1:
Payload Encryption [2/1]> payload encryption mode show
Admin Mode: Disable
5 Configure the master key on the remote unit by doing one of the following:
◦ Enter a master key manually.
◦ Generate the master key automatically.
You must use the same master key on both sides of the link. This means that if
you generate a master key automatically on one side of the link, you must copy
that key and for use on the other side of the link. Once payload encryption has
been enabled on both sides of the link, the Key Exchange Protocol periodically
verifies that both ends of the link have the same master key. If a mismatch is
detected, an alarm is raised and traffic transmission is stopped for the
mismatched carrier at both sides of the link. The link becomes non-valid and
traffic stops being forwarded.
To define the master key manually, enter the following command in Payload
Encryption view:
Payload Encryption [2/x]> payload encryption mkey
When you press <Enter>, the following prompt appears:

Please enter key:
Enter the master key and press <Enter>. The master key must be between 8 and
32 ASCII characters. The characters do not appear as you type them. To display
the master key and verify that you typed it correctly, enter the payload
encryption status show command described above. You can copy the master
key from the output of this command.
To generate the master key automatically, enter the following command in
Payload Encryption view:
Payload Encryption [2/x]> master key generate
A random master key is generated. You must copy and paste this key to the other
end of the link to ensure that both sides of the link have the same master key. To
display and copy the master key, enter the traffic encryption status show
command described above. You can copy the master key from the output of this
command.
6 On the local unit, follow the procedure described in Step 5 to configure the
same master key configured on the remote unit also on the local unit.
7 Enable payload encryption on the remote unit:
i Enter the following command in Payload Encryption view:
Payload Encryption [2/x]> payload encryption mode admin AES-256
This step will cause the link status to be Down until payload encryption is
successfully enabled on the local unit. However, the RSL measured on the link
should remain at an acceptable level.
Page 715 of 1094

To disable payload encryption, enter the following command in Payload

Encryption view:
Payload Encryption [2/x]> payload encryption mode admin Disable
ii The session key is automatically regenerated at defined intervals. To set
the session key regeneration interval, enter the following command in
Payload Encryption view:
Payload Encryption [x/x]> payload encryption session-key period
set <00:03-12:00>
Enter the regeneration interval in hours and minutes (HH:MM). For
example, the following command configures radio interface 1 to
regenerate the session key every 4 hours and 15 minutes:
Payload Encryption [2/1]> payload encryption session-key period
set 04:15
To display the session key regeneration interval, enter the following
command in Payload Encryption view:
Payload Encryption [2/x]> payload encryption session-key period
show
8 Enable payload encryption on the local unit by following the procedure
described in Step 7. Verify that on both the local and remote active units, the
link status returns to Up and user traffic is restored. In links using in-band
management, verify also that in-band management returns.
9 In a protected link, perform copy-to-mate, first on the remote and then on the
local unit. See Step 3 in Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI). After the copy-
to-mate operation, wait for both standby units to re-boot and verify that
there are no alarms.
Note: The standby unit may have a payload encryption failure alarm for up to
about one minute after the unit is up and running.
10 In a protected link, remove the protection lockout, first on the remote and
then on the local unit. See Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit
(CLI).
11 Verify that there are no alarms on the link.
You can set all master keys defined on the unit to zero value. To zeroize the
master keys, enter the following command in root view:
root> payload encryption key zeroize
Warning! Executing this command on a FIPS-enabled unit formats the unit’s disk,
and renders the unit non-operational. If it is necessary to use this
command, contact Ceragon Technical Support for instructions how to
re-configure the unit.
This command has no effect on units that are not enabled for FIPS.
Note: Any time payload encryption fails, the Operational status of the link is
Down until payload encryption is successfully restored.
Page 716 of 1094

16.6 Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics (CLI)

• Displaying General Modem Status and Defective Block PMs (CLI)
• Displaying Excessive BER (Aggregate) PMs (CLI)
• Displaying BER Level and Configuring BER Parameters (CLI)
• Configuring RSL Thresholds (CLI)
• Configuring TSL Thresholds (CLI)
• Displaying RSL and TSL Levels (CLI)
• Configuring the Signal Level Threshold (CLI)
• Configuring the MSE Thresholds and Displaying the MSE PMs (CLI)
• Configuring the XPI Thresholds and Displaying the XPI PMs (CLI)
• Displaying ACM PMs and Configuring ACM Profile Thresholds (CLI)
16.6.1 Displaying General Modem Status and Defective Block PMs (CLI)
To display the general status of the modem, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>modem show status
The following is a sample output of the modem show status command:

MSE[db]: -99.00
Defective Blocks count: 0
Current Tx profile: 0
Current Tx QAM: 4
Current Tx rate(Kbps): 43389
Current Rx profile: 0
Current Rx QAM: 4
Current Rx rate(Kbps): 43389
A value of 0 in the MSE (dB) field means that the modem is not locked.
To clear all radio PMs in the system, enter the following command in root view:
root> radio pm clear all
To clear defective blocks counters for a radio, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>modem clear counters
16.6.2 Displaying Excessive BER (Aggregate) PMs (CLI)

You can display modem BER (Bit Error Rate) PMs in either 15-minute or daily
intervals.
To display modem BER PMs in 15-minute intervals, enter the following command
in radio view:
radio [x/x]>framer pm-aggregate show interval 15min
The following is a partial sample output of the framer pm-aggregate show

interval 15min command:
Page 717 of 1094

radio [2/1]>framer pm-aggregate show interval 15min

Modem BER PM table:
===================
Interval Integrity ES SES UAS BBE

===========================================================
0 1 0 0 333 0
1 1 0 0 900 0
2 1 0 0 900 0
3 1 0 0 900 0
4 1 0 0 900 0
5 1 0 0 900 0
6 1 0 0 900 0
7 1 0 0 900 0
8 1 0 0 900 0
radio [2/1]>
To display modem BER PMs in daily intervals, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio [x/x]>framer pm-aggregate show interval 24hr
The following is a sample output of the framer pm-aggregate show interval

24hr command:
radio [2/1]>framer pm-aggregate show interval 24hr
Modem BER PM table:

===================
Interval Integrity ES SES UAS BBE

===============================================================
0 1 0 0 53843 0
4 1 0 0 37061 0
5 1 0 0 4034 0
6 1 0 0 85971 0
8 1 0 0 46171 0
11 1 0 0 24184 0
15 1 0 0 85978 0
17 1 0 0 54979 0
radio [2/1]>
Table 136: Aggregate PMs (CLI)

Interval The number of the interval: 1-30 for daily PM reports, and 1-96 for 15 minute
PM reports.
interval are reliable. "1" in the column indicates that the values are not reliable
ES Indicates the number of seconds in the measuring interval during which errors
occurred.
SES Indicates the number of severe error seconds in the measuring interval.
Page 718 of 1094

UAS Indicates the Unavailable Seconds value of the measured interval. The value can
be between 0 and 900 seconds (15 minutes).
BBE Indicates the number of background block errors during the measured interval.
16.6.3 Displaying BER Level and Configuring BER Parameters (CLI)

To display the current BER level, enter the following command in radio view:
radio [x/x]>modem show ber
The excessive-ber parameter determines whether or not excessive BER is

propagated as a fault and considered a system event. For example, if excessive-
ber is enabled, excessive BER can trigger a protection switchover.
To enable or disable Excessive BER Admin, enter the following command

in root view:
root> radio excessive-ber set admin <admin>
To display the current setting for excessive-ber, enter the following command in
root view:
root> radio excessive-ber show admin
To set the level above which an excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected
over the radio link, enter the following command in radio view:
radio [x/x]>modem excessive-ber set threshold <threshold>
To display the excessive BER threshold, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio [x/x]>modem excessive-ber show threshold
Table 137: Excessive BER CLI Parameters

admin Variable enable Enables or disables

disable propagation of excessive
BER as a fault.
threshold Variable 1e-3 The level above which an
1e-4 excessive BER alarm is
1e-5 issued for errors
1e-6 detected over the radio
1e-7 link.
1e-8
1e-9
1e-10
The following command enables excessive-ber:

root> radio excessive-ber set admin enable
The following command sets the excessive BER threshold to 1e-5:

radio [2/1]>modem excessive-ber set threshold 1e-5
Page 719 of 1094

16.6.4 Configuring RSL Thresholds (CLI)

You can set two RSL (RX Signal Level) thresholds. The number of seconds during
which the RSL exceeds these thresholds are counted as RSL Exceed Threshold
Seconds. See Displaying RSL and TSL Levels (CLI).
To set the RSL thresholds, enter the following command in radio view:
radio [x/x]>rf pm-rsl set threshold1 <threshold1> threshold2
<threshold2>
Table 138: RSL Thresholds CLI Parameters

threshold1 Number -75 - -15 The first RSL threshold

(dBm).
threshold2 Number -75 - -15 The second RSL
threshold (dBm).
The following command sets the RSL thresholds to -30 dBm and -60 dBm,
respectively.
radio [2/1]>rf pm-rsl set threshold1 -30 threshold2 -60
16.6.5 Configuring TSL Thresholds (CLI)

The number of seconds during which the TX Signal Level exceeds the TSL
threshold are counted as TSL Exceed Threshold Seconds. See Displaying RSL and
TSL Levels (CLI).
To set the TSL threshold, enter the following command in radio view:
radio [x/x]>rf pm-tsl set threshold -15
Table 139: TSL Thresholds CLI Parameters

threshold Number -10 - 34 The TSL threshold

(dBm).
The following command sets the TSL threshold to 10 dBm:

radio [2/1]>rf pm-tsl set threshold 10
16.6.6 Displaying RSL and TSL Levels (CLI)

You can display the RSL (RX Signal Level) and TSL (TX Signal Level) PMs in either
15-minute or daily intervals.
To display RSL and TSL PMs in 15-minute intervals, enter the following command
in radio view:
radio [x/x]>rf pm-rsl-tsl show interval 15min
To display RSL and TSL PMs in daily intervals, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio [x/x]>rf pm-rsl-tsl show interval 24hr
Page 720 of 1094

The following is the output format of the rf pm-rsl-tsl show commands:
Page 721 of 1094

Table 140: RSL and TSL PMs (CLI)

Interval The number of the interval: 1-30 for daily PM

reports, and 1-96 for 15 minute PM reports.
Integrity Indicates whether the values received at the time
and date of the measured interval are reliable.
"1" in the column indicates that the values are
not reliable due to a possible power surge or
power failure that occurred at that time.
Min RSL (dBm) The minimum RSL (Received Signal Level) that
was measured during the interval.
Max RSL (dBm) The maximum RSL (Received Signal Level) that
Min TSL (dBm) The minimum TSL (Transmit Signal Level) that
Max TSL (dBm) The maximum TSL (Transmit Signal Level) that
TSL exceed threshold seconds The number of seconds the measured TSL
exceeded the threshold during the interval. See
Configuring TSL Thresholds (CLI).
RSL exceed threshold1 seconds The number of seconds the measured RSL
exceeded RSL threshold 1 during the interval. See
Configuring RSL Thresholds (CLI).
RSL exceed threshold2 seconds The number of seconds the measured RSL
exceeded RSL threshold 2 during the interval. See
Configuring RSL Thresholds (CLI).
16.6.7 Configuring the Signal Level Threshold (CLI)

To set the BER (Bit Error Rate) level above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued
for errors detected over the radio link, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio [x/x]>modem signal-degrade set threshold 1e-7
To display the Signal Degrade BER threshold, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio [x/x]>modem signal-degrade show threshold
Page 722 of 1094

Table 141: Signal Level Threshold CLI Parameters

threshold Variable 1e-6 The BER level above which a Signal

1e-7 Degrade alarm is issued for errors
1e-8 detected over the radio link.
1e-9
1e-10
1e-11
1e-12
1e-13
1e-14
1e-15
The following command sets the Signal Degrade threshold at 1e-7:

radio [2/1]>modem signal-degrade set threshold 1e-7
16.6.8 Configuring the MSE Thresholds and Displaying the MSE PMs (CLI)
To configure the MSE (Mean Square Error) threshold, enter the following
radio [x/x]>modem set mse-exceed threshold <threshold>
To display the currently configured MSE threshold, enter the following command
in radio view:
radio [x/x]>modem show threshold-mse-exceed
Table 142: MSE CLI Parameters

threshold Number -99 - -1 The MSE threshold.
To display MSE (Mean Square Error) PMs in 15-minute intervals, enter the
radio [x/x]>modem pm-mse show interval 15min
Page 723 of 1094

The following is a partial sample output of the modem pm-mse show interval
15min command:
radio [2/1]>modem pm-mse show interval 15min
Modem MSE PM Table:

===================
Interval Integrity
Min MSE (dB) Max MSE (dB) Exceed
threshold
seconds
===============================================================
0 1 0.00 0.00 708
1 1 0.00 0.00 900
2 1 0.00 0.00 900
3 1 0.00 0.00 900
4 1 0.00 0.00 900
5 1 0.00 0.00 900
6 1 0.00 0.00 900
7 1 0.00 0.00 900
8 1 0.00 0.00 900
9 1 0.00 0.00 900
10 1 0.00 0.00 900
radio [2/1]>
To display MSE (Mean Square Error) PMs in daily intervals, enter the following
radio [x/x]>modem pm-mse show interval 24hr
The following is sample output of the modem pm-mse show interval

24hr command:
radio [2/1]>modem pm-mse show interval 24hr
Modem MSE PM Table:

===================
Interval Integrity
Min MSE (dB) Max MSE (dB) Exceed
threshold
seconds
===============================================================
0 1 0.00 0.00 63745
4 1 0.00 0.00 37062
5 1 0.00 0.00 3495
6 1 0.00 0.00 85976
8 1 0.00 0.00 46173
11 1 0.00 0.00 24185
15 1 0.00 0.00 85988
17 1 0.00 0.00 54981
radio [2/1]>modem
Page 724 of 1094

Table 143: MSE PMs (CLI)

Interval The number of the interval: 1-30 for daily PM

reports, and 1-96 for 15 minute PM reports.
Integrity Indicates whether the values received at the time
and date of the measured interval are reliable.
"1" in the column indicates that the values are
not reliable due to a possible power surge or
power failure that occurred at that time. A 1 and
a 0 value in the Max MSE field may also indicate
that the modem was unlocked.
Min MSE (dB) Indicates the minimum MSE in dB, measured
during the interval. A 0 in this field and a 1 in the
Integrity field may also indicate that the modem
was unlocked during the entire interval.
Max MSE (dB) Indicates the maximum MSE in dB, measured
during the interval. A 0 in this field and a 1 in the
Integrity field may also indicate that the modem
was unlocked.
Exceed Threshold Seconds Indicates the number of seconds the MSE
exceeded the MSE PM threshold during the
interval.
The following command sets the MSE threshold to -30:

radio [2/1]>modem set mse-exceed threshold -30
16.6.9 Configuring the XPI Thresholds and Displaying the XPI PMs (CLI)
To configure the modem XPI threshold for calculating XPI Exceed Threshold
seconds, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>modem set threshold-xpi-exceed threshold <threshold>
To display the currently configured XPI threshold, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>modem show threshold-xpi-below
Table 144: XPI Threshold CLI Parameters

threshold Number 0-99 The XPI threshold.
To display XPI PMs in 15-minute intervals, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>modem pm-xpi show interval 15min
Page 725 of 1094

The following is a partial sample output of the modem pm-xpi show interval
15min command:
radio [2/1]>modem pm-xpi show interval 15min
Modem XPI PM Table:

===================
Interval Integrity
Min XPI (dB) Max XPI (dB) XPI below
threshold
seconds
===============================================================
1 1 55.00 0.00 0
2 1 55.00 0.00 0
3 1 55.00 0.00 0
4 1 55.00 0.00 0
5 1 55.00 0.00 0
6 1 55.00 0.00 0
7 1 55.00 0.00 0
8 1 55.00 0.00 0
9 1 55.00 0.00 0
10 1 55.00 0.00 0
11 1 55.00 0.00 0
12 1 55.00 0.00 0
13 1 55.00 0.00 0
14 1 55.00 0.00 0
15 1 55.00 0.00 0
16 1 55.00 0.00 0
17 1 55.00 0.00 0
18 1 55.00 0.00 0
19 1 55.00 0.00 0
20 1 55.00 0.00 0
radio [2/1]>
To display XPI PMs in daily intervals, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>modem pm-xpi show interval 24hr
Page 726 of 1094

The following is a partial sample output of the modem pm-xpi show interval
24hr command:
radio [2/1]>modem pm-xpi show interval 24hr
Modem XPI PM Table:

===================
Interval Integrity
Min XPI (dB) Max XPI (dB) XPI below
threshold
seconds
===============================================================
1 1 55.00 0.00 0
2 1 55.00 0.00 0
3 1 55.00 0.00 0
4 1 55.00 0.00 0
5 1 55.00 0.00 0
6 1 55.00 0.00 0
7 1 55.00 0.00 0
8 1 55.00 0.00 0
9 1 55.00 0.00 0
10 1 55.00 0.00 0
11 1 55.00 0.00 0
12 1 55.00 0.00 0
13 1 55.00 0.00 0
14 1 55.00 0.00 0
15 1 55.00 0.00 0
16 1 55.00 0.00 0
17 1 55.00 0.00 0
18 1 55.00 0.00 0
19 1 55.00 0.00 0
20 1 55.00 0.00 0
radio [2/1]>
Table 145: XPI PMs (CLI)

Interval The number of the interval: 1-30 for daily PM reports, and 1-
96 for 15 minute PM reports.
Integrity Indicates whether the values received at the time and date of
the measured interval are reliable. "1" in the column
indicates that the values are not reliable due to a possible
power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.
Min XPI (dB) Indicates the lowest XPI value in dB, measured during the
interval.
Max XPI (dB) Indicates the highest XPI value in dB, measured during the
interval.
XPI Below Threshold Seconds Indicates the number of seconds the XPI value was lower
than the XPI threshold during the interval.
The following command sets the XPI threshold for radio carrier 2 to 15:
radio[2/1]>modem set threshold-xpi-below threshold 15
Page 727 of 1094

16.6.10 Displaying ACM PMs and Configuring ACM Profile Thresholds (CLI)
For each radio carrier, you can display the minimum and maximum ACM profile
and the minimum and maximum bitrate (throughput) per 15-minute or daily
intervals.
You can also define two ACM profile thresholds for each radio carrier, and display
the number of seconds per interval that the radio’s ACM profile was below each
of these thresholds. These thresholds trigger the following alarms:
1313 (Major) is raised. The alarm is cleared when the ACM profile is at or
1314 (Critical) is raised. The alarm is cleared when the ACM profile is at or
To define the ACM thresholds, enter the following command in radio view:
radio [x/x]>mrmc pm-acm set threshold1 <threshold1> threshold2
<threshold2>
To display the ACM thresholds, enter the following command in radio view:
radio [x/x]>mrmc pm-acm get thresholds
To display ACM PMs in 15-minute intervals, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio [x/x]>mrmc pm-acm show interval 15min
The following is a partial sample output of the modem pm-acm show interval
15min command:
To display ACM PMs in daily intervals, enter the following command in radio view:
radio [x/x]>mrmc pm-acm show interval 24hr
Page 728 of 1094

The following is sample output of the modem pm-acm show interval

24hr command:
Table 146: ACM PMs and ACM Profile Thresholds (CLI)

threshold1 The higher ACM profile threshold (0-15). The default value is 0.
threshold2 The lower ACM profile threshold (0-15). The default value is 0.
Interval The number of the interval: 1-30 for daily PM reports, and 1-96 for 15
minute PM reports.
measured interval are reliable. "1" in the column indicates that the
Min profile Indicates the minimum ACM profile that was measured during the
interval.
Max profile Indicates the maximum ACM profile that was measured during the
interval.
Min bitrate Indicates the minimum total radio throughput (Mbps), delivered during
the interval.
Max bitrate Indicates the maximum total radio throughput (Mbps), delivered
Page 729 of 1094

17. Ethernet Services and Interfaces (CLI)

• Configuring Ethernet Services (CLI)
• Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)
• Configuring Ethernet Interfaces (CLI)
• Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss Forwarding (CLI)
• Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics (CLI)
Related topics:
• Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) and LACP (Optional) (CLI)
• Quality of Service (QoS) (CLI)
• Ethernet Protocols (CLI)
• Performing Ethernet Loopback (CLI)
17.1 Configuring Ethernet Services (CLI)

• Ethernet Services Overview (CLI)
• General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services (CLI)
• Defining Services (CLI)
• Configuring Service Points (CLI)
• Defining the MAC Address Forwarding Table for a Service (CLI)
17.1.1 Ethernet Services Overview (CLI)

Users can define up to 64 Ethernet services. Each service constitutes a virtual
bridge that defines the connectivity between logical ports in the IP-20 network
element.
This version of IP-20 supports the following service types:
• Multipoint (MP)
• Point-to-Point (P2P)
• Management (MNG)
In addition to user-defined services, IP-20 contains a pre-defined management
service (Service ID 257). By default, this service is operational.
Note: You can use the management service for in-band management. For
instructions on configuring in-band management, see Configuring In-
Band Management (CLI).
A service point is a logical entity attached to a physical or logical interface. Service
points define the movement of frames through the service. Each service point
includes both ingress and egress attributes. A Point-to-Point or Multipoint service
can hold up to 32 service points. A Management service can hold up 30 service
points.
For a more detailed overview of the IP-20 service-oriented Ethernet switching
engine, refer to the Technical Description for the IP-20 product type you are using.
Page 730 of 1094

17.1.2 General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services (CLI)

When provisioning Ethernet services, it is recommended to follow these
guidelines:
• Use the same Service ID for all service fragments along the path of the service.
• Do not re-use the same Service ID within the same region. A region is defined
as consisting of all IP-20 devices having Ethernet connectivity between them.
• Use meaningful EVC IDs.
• Give the same EVC ID (service name) to all service fragments along the path of
the service.
• Do not reuse the same EVC ID within the same region.
It is recommended to follow these guidelines for creating service points:
• Always use SNP service points on NNI ports and SAP service points on UNI
ports.
• For each logical interface associated with a specific service, there should
never be more than a single service point.
• The transport VLAN ID should be unique per service within a single region.
That is, no two services should use the same transport VLAN ID.
17.1.3 Defining Services (CLI)

Use the commands described in the following sections to define a service and its
parameters. After defining the service, you must add service points to the service
in order for the service to carry traffic.
Page 731 of 1094

17.1.3.1 Adding a Service (CLI)

To add a service, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet service add type <service type> sid <sid> admin
<service admin mode> evc-id <evc-id> description <evc-
description>
Table 147: Adding Ethernet Service CLI Parameters

service type Variable p2p Defines the service type:

mp p2p - Point-to-Point
mp – Multipoint
sid Number Any unused value A unique ID for the service.
from 1-256 Once you have added the
service, you cannot change
the Service ID. Service ID
257 is reserved for a pre-
defined management
service.
service admin mode Variable Operational The administrative state of
reserved the service:
• operational - The
service is
functional.
• reserved - The
service is disabled
until this
parameter is
changed
to operational. In
this mode, the
service occupies
system resources
but is unable to
receive and
transmit data.
evc-id Text String Up to 20 characters. Defines an Ethernet Virtual
Connection (EVC) ID. This
parameter does not affect
the network element’s
behavior, but is used by the
NMS for topology
management.
evc-description Text String Up to 64 characters. A text description of the
service. This parameter
does not affect the
network element’s
behavior, but is used by the
Page 732 of 1094


NMS for topology
management.
The following command adds a Multipoint service with Service ID 18:

root> ethernet service add type mp sid 18 admin operational
evc-id Ring_1 description east_west
The following command adds a Point-to-Point service with Service ID 10:

root> ethernet service add type p2p sid 10 admin
operational evc-id Ring_1 description east_west
These services are immediately enabled, although service points must be added
to the services in order for the services to carry traffic.
Page 733 of 1094

17.1.3.2 Entering Service View (CLI)

To view service details and set the service’s parameters, you must enter the
service’s view level in the CLI.
To enter a service’s view level:
root> ethernet service sid <sid>
Page 734 of 1094

Table 148: Entering Ethernet Service View CLI Parameters

sid Number Any unused value A unique ID for the

from 1-256 service. Once you have
added the service, you
cannot change the Service
ID. Service ID 257 is
reserved for a pre-defined
management service.
The following command enters service view for the service with Service ID 10:
root> ethernet service sid 10

service[10]>
Page 735 of 1094

17.1.3.3 Showing Service Details (CLI)

To display the attributes of a service, go to service view for the service and enter
service[SID]>service info show
For example:
service[1]>service info show
service info:
service id: 1
service type: p2p
service admin: operational
Maximal MAC address learning entries: 131072
default cos: 0
cos mode: preserve-sp-cos-decision
EVC id: N.A.
EVC description: N.A.
split horizon group: disable
configured multicast grouping: no
service[1]>
To display the attributes of a service and its service points, go to service view for
the service and enter the following command:
service[SID]>service detailed-info show
Page 736 of 1094

For example:
To display a list of service points and their attributes, enter the following
root>ethernet service show info sid <sid>
Table 149: Displaying Ethernet Service Details CLI Parameters

Parameter Input Type Permitted Default Description
Values
sid Number Any defined None The Service ID.

Service ID.
For example:
Page 737 of 1094

17.1.3.4 Configuring a Service’s Operational State (CLI)

To change the operational state of a service, go to service view for the service and
service[SID]>service admin set <service admin mode>
To display a service’s admin mode, go to service view for the service and enter the
following command:
Service[SID]> service admin show state
Table 150: Ethernet Service Operational State CLI Parameters

service admin mode Variable Operational The administrative state of

reserved the service:
• operational - The
service is
functional.
• reserved - The
service is disabled
until this
parameter is
changed to
Operational. In
this mode, the
service occupies
system resources
but is unable to
receive and
transmit data.
The following command sets Service 10 to be operational:

service[10]>service admin set operational
Page 738 of 1094

17.1.3.5 Configuring a Service’s CoS Mode and Default CoS (CLI)

The CoS mode determines whether or not frames passing through the service
have their CoS modified at the service level. The CoS determines the priority
queue to which frames are assigned.
The CoS of frames traveling through a service can be modified on the interface
level, the service point level, and the service level. The service level is the highest
priority, and overrides CoS decisions made at the interface and service point
levels. Thus, by configuring the service to apply a CoS value to frames in the
service, you can define a single CoS for all frames traveling through the service.
To set a service’s CoS mode, go to service view for the service and enter the
following command:
service[SID]>service cos-mode set cos-mode <cos-mode>
If the CoS mode is set to default-cos, you must define the Default CoS. Use the
following command to define the Default CoS:
service[SID]>service default-cos set cos <cos>
Table 151: Ethernet Service CoS Mode CLI Parameters

cos-mode Variable default-cos • default cos -

preserve-sp-cos- Frames passing
decision through the
service are
assigned the
default CoS
defined below.
This CoS value
overrides
whatever CoS
may have been
assigned at the
service point or
interface level.
• preserve-sp-cos-
decision - The
CoS of frames
passing through
the service is
not modified by
the service.
cos Number 0–7 This value is assigned to
frames at the service
level if cos-mode is set
to default-cos.
Otherwise, this value is
not used, and frames
retain whatever CoS
value they were assigned
Page 739 of 1094


at the service point or
logical interface level.
The following commands configure Service 10 to assign a CoS value of 7 to frames

traversing the service:
service[10]>service cos-mode set cos-mode default-cos
service[10]>service default-cos set cos 7
The following command configures Service 10 to preserve the CoS decision made
at the interface or service point level for frames traveling through the service:
service[10]>service cos-mode set cos-mode preserve-sp-cos-
decision
Page 740 of 1094

17.1.3.6 Configuring a Service’s EVC ID and Description (CLI)

To add or change the EVC ID of a service, go to service view for the service and
service[SID]>service evcid set <evcid>
To display a service’s EVC ID, go to service view for the service and enter the
following command:
service[SID]>service evcid show
To add or change the EVC description of a service, go to service view for the
service and enter the following command:
service[SID]>service description set <evc description>
To display a service’s EVC description, go to service view for the service and enter
service[SID]>service description show
Table 152: Ethernet Service EVC CLI Parameters

evcid Text String Up to 20 characters. Defines an Ethernet

Virtual Connection (EVC)
ID. This parameter does
not affect the network
element’s behavior, but
is used by the NMS for
topology management.
evc description Text String Up to 64 characters. A text description of the
service. This parameter
does not affect the
network element’s
behavior, but is used by
the NMS for topology
management.
The following commands add the EVC ID "East_West" and the EVC description
"Line_to_Radio" to Service 10:
service[10]>service evcid set East_West
service[10]>service description set Line_to_Radio
Page 741 of 1094

17.1.3.7 Deleting a Service (CLI)

Before deleting a service, you must first delete any service points attached to the
service (refer to Deleting a Service Point (CLI)).
Use the following command to delete a service:
root>ethernet service delete sid <sid>
Use the following command to delete a range of services:

root>ethernet service delete sid <sid> to <sid>
Table 153: Deleting Ethernet Service CLI Parameters

sid Number Any defined Service The Service ID.

ID.
The following command deletes Service 10:

root>ethernet service delete sid 10
The following command deletes Services 10 through 15:

root>ethernet service delete sid 10 to 15
Page 742 of 1094

17.1.4 Configuring Service Points (CLI)

• Service Points Overview (CLI)
• Service Point Classification (CLI)
• Adding a Service Point (CLI)
• Configuring Service Point Ingress Attributes (CLI)
• Configuring Service Point Egress Attributes (CLI)
• Displaying Service Point Attributes (CLI)
• Deleting a Service Point (CLI)
Page 743 of 1094

17.1.4.1 Service Points Overview (CLI)

Service points are logical interfaces within a service. A service point is a logical
entity attached to a physical or logical interface. Service points define the
movement of frames through the service. Each service point includes both ingress
and egress attributes.
Each service point for a Point-to-Point or Multipoint service can be either a
Service Access Point (SAP) or a Service Network Point (SNP). A Point-to-Point
service can also use Pipe service points.
• An SAP is equivalent to a UNI in MEF terminology and defines the connection
of the user network with its access points. SAPs are used for Point-to-Point
and Multipoint traffic services.
• An SNP is equivalent to an NNI or E-NNI in MEF terminology and defines the
connection between the network elements in the user network. SNPs are
used for Point-to-Point and Multipoint traffic services.
• A Pipe service point is used to create traffic connectivity between two ports in
a port-based manner (Smart Pipe). In other words, all the traffic from one port
passes to the other port.
Management services utilize Management (MNG) service points.
A Point-to-Point or Multipoint service can hold up to 32 service points. A
management service can hold up to 30 service points.
Table 154 summarizes the service point types available per service type.
Table 154: Service Points per Service Type

Service Point Type
MNG SAP SNP Pipe

Service Management Yes No No No
Type
Point-to-Point No Yes Yes Yes
Multipoint No Yes Yes No
Table 155 shows which service point types can co-exist on the same interface.
Table 155: Service Point Types per Interface

MNG SAP SNP Pipe
MNG Only one MNG Yes Yes Yes
SP is allowed per
interface.
SAP Yes Yes No No
SNP Yes No Yes No
PIPE Yes No No Only one Pipe SP
is allowed per
interface.
Page 744 of 1094

17.1.4.2 Service Point Classification (CLI)

• Overview of Service Point Classification (CLI)
• SAP Classification (CLI)
• SNP Classification (CLI)
• Pipe Service Point Classification (CLI)
• MNG Service Point Classification (CLI)
Page 745 of 1094

Overview of Service Point Classification (CLI)

Service points connect the service to the network element interfaces. It is crucial
that the network element have a means to classify incoming frames to the proper
service point. This classification process is implemented by means of a parsing
encapsulation rule for the interface associated with the service point. This rule is
called the Interface Type, and is based on a key consisting of:
• The Interface ID of the interface through which the frame entered.
• The frame’s C-VLAN and/or S-VLAN tags.
The Interface Type provides a definitive mapping of each arriving frame to a
specific service point in a specific service. Since more than one service point may
be associated with a single interface, frames are assigned to the earliest defined
service point in case of conflict.
Page 746 of 1094

SAP Classification (CLI)

SAPs can be used with the following Interface Types:
• All to one – All C-VLANs and untagged frames that enter the interface are
classified to the same service point.
• Dot1q – A single C-VLAN is classified to the service point.
• QinQ – A single S-VLAN and C-VLAN combination is classified to the service
point.
• Bundle C-Tag – A set of multiple C-VLANs is classified to the service point.
• Bundle S-Tag – A single S-VLAN and a set of multiple C-VLANs are classified to
the service point.
Page 747 of 1094

SNP Classification (CLI)

SNPs can be used with the following Attached Interface Types:
• S-Tag – A single S-VLAN is classified to the service point.
Page 748 of 1094

Pipe Service Point Classification (CLI)

Pipe service points can be used with the following Attached Interface Types:
• Dot1q – All C-VLANs and untagged frames that enter the interface are
• S-Tag – All S-VLANs and untagged frames that enter the interface are
Page 749 of 1094

MNG Service Point Classification (CLI)

Management service points can be used with the following Interface Types:
• S-Tag – A single S-VLAN is classified to the service point.
• QinQ – A single S-VLAN and C-VLAN combination is classified to the service
point.
Table 156 and Table 157 show which service point – Interface Type combinations
can co-exist on the same interface.
Table 156: Legal Service Point – Interface Type Combinations per Interface – SAP and
SNP
SP Type SAP SNP

SP Attached 802.1q Bundle- Bundle-S All to One Q in Q 802. S-
Type Interface Type C 1q Tag
SAP 802.1q Yes Yes No No No No No

Bundle-C Yes Yes No No No No No
Bundle-S No No Yes No Yes No No
All to One No No No Only 1 All No No No
to One SP
Allowed
Q in Q No No Yes No Yes No No
SNP 802.1q No No No No No Yes No
S-Tag No No No No No No Yes
Pipe 802.1q No No No No No No No
S-Tag No No No No No No No
MNG 802.1q Yes Yes No No No Yes No
Q in Q No No Yes No Yes No No
S-Tag No No No No No No Yes
Table 157: Legal Service Point – Interface Type Combinations per Interface – Pipe and
MNG
SP SP Type Pipe MNG

Type Attached 802.1q S-Tag 802.1q Q in Q S-Tag
Interface
Type
SAP 802.1q No No Yes No No

Bundle-C No No Yes No No
Bundle-S No No No Yes No
All to One No No No No No
Page 750 of 1094

Q in Q No No No Yes No
SNP 802.1q No No Yes No No
S-Tag No No No No Yes
Pipe 802.1q Only one No Yes No No
Pipe SP
Allowed
S-Tag No Only one No No Yes
Pipe SP
Allowed
MNG 802.1q Yes No Only 1 MNG No No
SP Allowed
Q in Q No No No Only 1 MNG No
SP Allowed
S-Tag No Yes No No Only 1 MNG
SP Allowed
Page 751 of 1094

17.1.4.3 Adding a Service Point (CLI)

The command syntax for adding a service point depends on the interface type of
the service point. The interface type determines which frames enter the service
via this service point.
To add a service point with an All-to-One interface type, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type all-to-
one spid <sp-id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot
<slot> port <port> sp-name <sp-name>
To add a service point with a Dot1q interface type, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type dot1q spid <sp-
id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot> port
<port> vlan <vlan> sp-name <sp-name>
To add a service point with an S-Tag interface type, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type s-tag spid <sp-
id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot> port
<port> vlan <vlan> sp-name <sp-name>
To add a service point with a Bundle-C interface type, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type bundle-
c spid <sp-id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot>
port <port> sp-name <sp-name>
To add a service point with a Bundle-S interface type, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type bundle-
s spid <sp-id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot>
port <port> [outer-vlan <outer-vlan>|vlan <vlan>] sp-name <sp-
name>
Note: In SAP service points, use the parameter outer-vlan. In SP service

points, use the parameter vlan.
To add a service point with a Q-in-Q interface type, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type qinq spid <sp-
id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot> port <port>
outer-vlan <outer-vlan> inner-vlan <inner-vlan> sp-name <sp-
name>
To add a Pipe service point, go to service view for the service and enter the
following command:
service[SID]>sp add sp-type pipe int-type <int-type> spid <sp-
id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot> port <port>
sp-name <sp-name>
Page 752 of 1094

Table 158: Add Service Point CLI Parameters

sp-type Variable sap • SAP - Service Access Point

snp • SNP - Service Network Point
pipe • PIPE - Pipe service point
mng • MNG - Management service point
int-type Variable all-to-one Determines which frames enter the service via
dot1q this service point, based on the frame's VLAN
tagging. Since more than one service point may
s-tag
be associated with a single interface, frames are
bundle-c-tag assigned to the earliest defined service point in
bundle-s-tag case of conflict.
qinq • all-to-one - All C-VLANs and untagged
frames that enter the interface are
classified to the service point. Only valid
for SAP service point types.
• dot1q - A single C-VLAN is classified to
the service point. Valid for all service
point types.
• s-tag - A single S- VLAN is classified to
the service point. Valid for SNP and
MNG service point types.
• bundle-c-tag - A set of multiple C-
VLANs is classified to the service point.
Only valid for SAP service point types.
• bundle-s-tag - A single S-VLAN and a set
of multiple C-VLANs are classified to the
service point. Only valid for SAP service
point types.
• qinq - A single S-VLAN and C-VLAN
combination is classified to the service
point. Valid for SAP and MNG service
point types.
sp-id Number 1-32 for P2P and MP This ID is unique within the service.
services.
1-30 for MNG
services.
interface Variable eth The Interface type for the service point:
radio • eth - An Ethernet interface.
• radio - A radio interface.
When you are defining the service point on a
group, such as a LAG, use the group parameter
instead of the interface parameter.
group Variable rp1 When you are defining the service point on an
rp2 HSB group (rp1 - rp-4), a LAG (lag1 - lag4), or a
Multi-Carrier ABC group (mc-abc1 - mc-abc4),
Page 753 of 1094


rp3 use this parameter instead of the interface
rp4 parameter to identify the group. The group
must be defined before you add the service
lag1
point.
lag2
Note: Multi-Carrier ABC and HSP protection are
lag3 only relevant for IP-20C and IP-20C-HP units.
lag4
mc-abc1
mc-abc2
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
slot Number Ethernet: 1
Radio: 2
port Number For an Ethernet The port or radio carrier on which the service
interface: 1-3 point is located.
For a radio interface
in multi-carrier units:
1-2
For a radio interface
in single-carrier units:
1
vlan Number or 1-4094 (except 4092 Defines the VLAN classified to the service point.
Variable which is reserved for This parameter should not be included for
the default service points with an interface type of bundle-
management service), C-tag. For instructions on attaching a bundled
or Untagged VLAN, refer to Attaching a VLAN Bundle to a
Service Point (CLI).
This parameter is also not relevant for:
Service points with an interface type of
qinq and all-to-one.
Pipe service points.
outer-vlan Number 1-4094 (except 4092, Defines the S-VLAN classified to the service
which is reserved for point.
the default This parameter is only relevant for service
management service), points with the interface type bundle-s-tag or
or Untagged qinq.
inner-vlan Number 1-4094 (except 4092, Defines the C-VLAN classified to the service
which is reserved for point.
the default This parameter is only relevant for service
management service), points with the interface type qinq.
or Untagged
sp-name Text string Up to 20 characters. A descriptive name for the service point
(optional).
Page 754 of 1094

The following command adds an SAP service point with Service Point ID 10 to
Service 37, with interface type dot1q. This service point is located on radio carrier
1. VLAN ID 100 is classified to this service point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type sap int-type dot1q spid 10 interface
radio slot 2 port 1 vlan 100 sp-name Radio
Service 37, with interface type bundle-c-tag. This service point is located on radio
carrier 1.
service[37]>sp add sp-type sap int-type bundle-c-tag spid 10
interface radio slot 2 port 1 sp-name Radio
Service 37, with interface type bundle-s-tag. This service point is located on radio
carrier 2 in an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit. S-VLAN 100 is classified to the service
point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type sap int-type bundle-s-tag spid 10
interface radio slot 2 port 2 outer-vlan 100 sp-name Radio
Service 37, with interface type qinq. This service point is located on radio carrier 2
in an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit. S-VLAN 100 and C-VLAN 200 are classified to the
service point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type sap int-type qinq spid 10 interface
radio slot 2 port 2 outer-vlan 100 inner-vlan 200 sp-name Radio
Service 37, with interface type all-to-one. This service point is located on radio
carrier 1. All traffic entering the system from that port is classified to the service
point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type sap int-type all-to-one spid 10
interface radio slot 2 port 1 sp-name "all-to-one"
The following command adds an SNP service point with Service Point ID 10 to
1. VLAN ID 100 is classified to this service point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type snp int-type dot1q spid 10 interface
The following command adds an SNP service point with Service Point ID 10 to
Service 37, with interface type s-tag. This service point is located on radio carrier
1. S-VLAN 100 is classified to the service point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type snp int-type s-tag spid 10 interface
Service 36, with interface type dot1q. This service point is connected to HSB group
1 (rp1). VLAN ID 100 is classified to the service point.
service[36]>sp add sp-type sap int-type dot1q spid 7 group
rp1 vlan 100 sp-name test1
The following command adds a Pipe service point with Service Point ID 1 to
Service 1, with interface type dot1q. This service point is connected to Eth1.
Page 755 of 1094

service[1]>sp add sp-type pipe int-type dot1q spid 1 interface

eth slot 1 port 1 sp-name pipe_dot1q
The following command adds a Pipe service point with Service Point ID 2 to
1.
service[1]>sp add sp-type pipe int-type dot1q spid 2 interface
radio slot 2 port 1 sp-name pipe_dot1q_radio
The following commands create a Smart Pipe service between Eth1 and radio
carrier 1. This service carries S-VLANs and untagged frames between the two
interfaces:
root> ethernet service add type p2p sid 10 admin
operational evc-id test description east_west
root>
service[10]>
service[10]>sp add sp-type pipe int-type s-tag spid 1 interface
eth slot 1 port 1 sp-name test1
service[10]>
service[10]>sp add sp-type pipe int-type s-tag spid 2 interface
radio slot 2 port 1 sp-name test2
service[10]>
Page 756 of 1094

17.1.4.4 Configuring Service Point Ingress Attributes (CLI)

A service point’s ingress attributes are attributes that operate upon frames
ingressing via the service point. This includes how the service point handles the
CoS of ingress frames and how the service point forwards frames to their next
destination within the service.
• Enabling and Disabling Broadcast Frames (CLI)
• CoS Preservation and Modification on a Service Point (CLI)
• Enabling and Disabling Flooding (CLI)
Page 757 of 1094

Enabling and Disabling Broadcast Frames (CLI)

To determine whether frames with a broadcast destination MAC address are
allowed to ingress the service via this service point, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp broadcast set spid <sp-id> state <state>
Table 159: Enable/Disable Broadcast Frames CLI Parameters

sp-id Number 1-32 for P2P and MP The Service Point ID.
services.
1-30 for MNG
services.
state Variable Allow Determines whether
disable frames with a broadcast
destination MAC
address are allowed to
ingress the service via
this service point.
The following command allows frames with a broadcast destination MAC address
to ingress Service 37 via Service Point 1.
service[37]>sp broadcast set spid 1 state allow
The following command prevents frames with a broadcast destination MAC

address from ingressing Service 37 via Service Point 1.
service[37]>sp broadcast set spid 1 state disable
Page 758 of 1094

CoS Preservation and Modification on a Service Point (CLI)

The CoS of frames traversing a service can be modified on the logical interface,
service point, and service level. The service point can override the CoS decision
made at the interface level. The service, in turn, can modify the CoS decision
made at the service point level.
To determine whether the service point modifies CoS decisions made at the
interface level, go to service view for the service and enter the following
command:
service[SID]> sp cos-mode set spid <sp-id> mode <cos mode>
If you set cos-mode to sp-def-cos, you must then configure a default CoS. This
CoS is applied to frames that ingress the service point, but can be overwritten at
the service level.
To configure the default CoS, go to service view for the service and enter the
following command:
service[SID]>sp sp-def-cos set spid <sp-id> cos <cos>
Table 160: Service Point CoS Preservation CLI Parameters

services.
1-30 for MNG services.
cos mode Variable sp-def-cos • sp-def-cos - The service point re-defines
interface-decision the CoS of frames that pass through the
service point, according to the Default CoS
(below). This decision can be overwritten on
the service level.
• interface-decision - The service point
preserves the CoS decision made at the
interface level. This decision can still be
overwritten at the service level.
• mac-da – The service point checks each
frame against a list of user-defined MAC
DAs. If there is a match, the service point
applies to the frame the CoS and Color
defined for that MAC DA. If there is no
match, the service point preserves the CoS
decision made at the interface level. See
Classification Overview.
Note: For Bundle-S and Bundle-C service
points, if Cos Overwrite Valid is set to True, the
CoS and Color defined in the Attached VLAN
page has priority over the interface decision,
but not over a MAC DA match.
cos Number 0–7 If cos-mode is sp-def-cos, this is the CoS
assigned to frames that pass through the
Page 759 of 1094


service point. This decision can be overwritten
on the service level.
The following commands configure Service Point 1 in Service 37 to apply a CoS

value of 5 to frames that ingress the service point:
service[37]>sp cos-mode set spid 1 mode sp-def-cos
service[37]>sp sp-def-cos set spid 1 cos 5
The following command configures Service Point 1 in Service 37 to preserve the

CoS decision made at the interface level for frames that ingress the service point:
service[37]>sp cos-mode set spid 1 mode interface-decision
Page 760 of 1094

Enabling and Disabling Flooding (CLI)

The ingress service point for a frame can forward the frame within the service by
means of flooding or dynamic MAC address learning in the service.
To enable or disable forwarding by means of flooding for a service point, go to
service view for the service and enter the following command:
service[SID]>sp flooding set spid <sp-id> state <flooding
state>
Table 161: Service Point Enable/Disable Flooding CLI Parameters

services.
1-30 for MNG
services.
state Variable allow Determines whether
disable incoming frames with
unknown MAC
addresses are forwarded
to other service points
via flooding.
The following command configures Service Point 1 in Service 37 to flood incoming

frames with unknown MAC addresses to other service points:
service[37]>sp flooding set spid 1 state allow
The following command configures Service Point 1 in Service 37 not to flood

incoming frames with unknown MAC addresses to other service points:
service[37]>sp flooding set spid 1 state disable
Page 761 of 1094

17.1.4.5 Configuring Service Point Egress Attributes (CLI)

A service point’s egress attributes are attributes that operate upon frames
ingressing via the service point. This includes VLAN preservation and marking
attributes.
• Configuring VLAN and CoS Preservation (CLI)
• Configuring Service Bundles (CLI)
• Attaching a VLAN Bundle to a Service Point (CLI)
Page 762 of 1094

Configuring VLAN and CoS Preservation (CLI)

CoS and VLAN preservation determines whether the CoS and/or VLAN IDs of
frames egressing the service via the service point are restored to the values they
had when the frame entered the service.
• Configuring C-VLAN CoS Preservation (CLI)
• Configuring C-VLAN Preservation (CLI)
• Configuring S-VLAN CoS Preservation (CLI)
Page 763 of 1094

Configuring C-VLAN CoS Preservation (CLI)

To configure CoS preservation for C-VLAN-tagged frames, go to service view for
service[SID]>sp cvlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid <sp-id>
mode <c-vlan cos preservation mode>
Table 162: C-VLAN CoS Preservation Mode CLI Parameters

Values
sp-id Number 1-32 for P2P The Service Point ID.

and MP
services.
1-30 for MNG
services.
c-vlan cos Variable enable Select enable or disable to determine
preservation mode disable whether the original C-VLAN CoS value
is preserved or restored for
frames egressing the service point.
• enable - the C-VLAN CoS value
of frames egressing the service
point is the same as the value
when the frame entered the
service.
• disable - the C-VLAN CoS value
of frames egressing the service
point is set at whatever value
might have been re-assigned
by the interface, service point,
or service, or whatever value
results from marking (see
Configuring Marking (CLI)).
The following command enables C-VLAN CoS preservation for Service Point 1 on
Service 37:
service[37]>sp cvlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode
enable
The following command disables C-VLAN CoS preservation for Service Point 1 on
Service 37:
service[37]>sp cvlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode
disable
Page 764 of 1094

Configuring C-VLAN Preservation (CLI)

To configure VLAN preservation for C-VLAN-tagged frames, go to service view for
service[SID]>sp cvlan-preservation-mode set spid <sp-id> mode
<c-vlan preservation mode>
Page 765 of 1094

Table 163: C-VLAN Preservation CLI Parameters

services.
1-30 for MNG
services.
c-vlan preservation mode Variable enable Determines whether the original
disable C-VLAN ID is preserved or
restored for frames egressing
from the service point.
• enable - The C-VLAN ID
of frames egressing the
service point is the same
as the C-VLAN ID when
the frame entered the
service.
• disable - The C-VLAN ID
of frames egressing the
service point is set at
whatever value might
have been re-assigned
by the interface, service
point, or service, or
whatever value results
from marking (see
Configuring Marking
(CLI)).
The following command enables C-VLAN preservation for Service Point 1 on

Service 37:
service[37]>sp cvlan-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode enable
The following command disables C-VLAN preservation for Service Point 1 on

Service 37:
service[37]>sp cvlan-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode disable
Page 766 of 1094

Configuring S-VLAN CoS Preservation (CLI)

To configure CoS preservation for S-VLAN-tagged frames, go to service view for
service[SID]>sp svlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid <sp-id>
mode <s-vlan cos preservation mode>
Table 164: S-VLAN CoS Preservation CLI Parameters

Values
sp-id Number 1-32 for P2P The Service Point ID.

and MP
services.
1-30 for MNG
services.
s-vlan cos Variable enable Select enable or disable to determine whether
preservation mode disable the original S-VLAN CoS value is preserved or
restored for frames egressing the service point.
• enable - the S-VLAN CoS value of frames
egressing the service point is the same
as the value when the frame entered
the service.
• disable - the S-VLAN CoS value of
frames egressing the service point is set
at whatever value might have been re-
assigned by the interface, service point,
or service, or whatever value results
from marking (see Configuring Marking
(CLI)).
The following command enables S-VLAN CoS preservation for Service Point 1 on
Service 37:
service[37]>sp svlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode
enable
The following command disables S-VLAN CoS preservation for Service Point 1 on
Service 37:
service[37]>sp svlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode
disable
Page 767 of 1094

Configuring Service Bundles (CLI)

Only one service bundle is supported.
To assign a service point to a service bundle, go to service view for the service and
service[SID]>sp egress-service-bundle set spid 1 service-
bundle-id <service-bundle-id>
Table 165: Service Bundle CLI Parameters

services.
1-30 for MNG
services.
service-bundle-id Number 1 The service bundle
assigned to the service
point.
The following command assigns Service Bundle 1 to Service Point 1 in Service 37.
service[37]>sp egress-service-bundle set spid 1 service-bundle-
id 1
Page 768 of 1094

Attaching a VLAN Bundle to a Service Point (CLI)

For service points with an interface type of bundle-C-tag or bundle-S-tag, you
must classify a group of VLANs (VLAN Bundle) to the service point.
To classify a VLAN Bundle to a bundle-c-tag or bundle s-tag service point, go to
service[SIP]>sp bundle cvlan attach spid <sp-id> vlan <vlan>
to-vlan <to-vlan>
To classify untagged frames to a bundle-c-tag or bundle s-tag service point, go to

service[SIP]>sp bundle attach untagged spid <sp-id>
To remove a VLAN Bundle from a bundle-c-tag or bundle-s-tag service point, go to

service[SIP]>sp bundle cvlan remove spid <sp-id> vlan <vlan>
to-vlan <to-vlan>
To removed untagged frames from a bundle-c-tag or bundle s-tag service point,

go to service view for the service and enter the following command:
service[SIP]>sp bundle remove untagged spid <sp-id>
To display a service point’s attributes, including the VLANs classified to a bundle

service point, go to service view for the service to which the service point belongs
service[SID]>sp service-point-info show spid <sp-id>
Table 166: VLAN Bundle to Service Point CLI Parameters

services.
vlan Number 1-4094 (except 4092, which The C-VLAN at the beginning
is reserved for the default of the range of the VLAN
management service) Bundle.
to-vlan Number 1-4094 (except 4092, which The C-VLAN at the end of the
is reserved for the default range of the VLAN Bundle.
management service)
The following command classifies C-VLANs 100 through 200 to Service Point 1 in
Service 37:
service[37]>sp bundle cvlan attach spid 1 vlan 100 to-vlan 200
The following command classifies untagged frames to Service Point 1 in Service

37:
service[37]>sp bundle attach untagged spid 1
The following command removes C-VLANs 100 through 200 from Service Point 1
in Service 37:
service[37]>sp bundle cvlan remove spid 1 vlan 100 to-vlan 200
Page 769 of 1094

The following command removes untagged frames to Service Point 1 in Service

37:
service[37]>sp bundle remove untagged spid 1
Page 770 of 1094

17.1.4.6 Displaying Service Point Attributes (CLI)

To display a service point’s attributes, go to service view for the service to which
the service point belongs and enter the following command:
service[SID]>sp service-point-info show spid <sp-id>
Table 167: Display Service Point Attributes CLI Parameters

services.
1-30 for MNG
services.
The following command displays the attributes of Service Point 1 in Service 37:
service[37]>sp service-point-info show spid 1
Page 771 of 1094

17.1.4.7 Deleting a Service Point (CLI)

You can only delete a service point if no VLAN bundles are attached to the service
point. This is only relevant if the interface type of the service point is bundle-c-tag
or bundle-s-tag. For more information, refer to Attaching a VLAN Bundle to a
Service Point (CLI).
To delete a service point from a service, go to service view for the service and
service[SID]>sp delete spid <sp-id>
Table 168: Delete Service Point Attributes CLI Parameters

sp-id Number 1-32 for P2P and MP services. The Service Point ID.
The following command deletes Service Point 10 from Service 37:

service[37]>sp delete spid 10
17.1.5 Defining the MAC Address Forwarding Table for a Service (CLI)
• MAC Address Forwarding Table Overview (CLI)
• Setting the Maximum Size of the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)
• Setting the MAC Address Forwarding Table Aging Time (CLI)
• Adding a Static MAC Address to the Forwarding Table (CLI)
• Displaying the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)
• Flushing the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)
• Enabling MAC Address Learning on a Service Point (CLI)
Page 772 of 1094

17.1.5.1 MAC Address Forwarding Table Overview (CLI)

IP-20 performs MAC address learning per service. IP-20 can learn up to 131,072
MAC addresses.
If necessary due to security issues or resource limitations, you can limit the size of
the MAC address forwarding table. The maximum size of the MAC address
forwarding table is configurable per service in granularity of 16 entries.
When a frame arrives via a specific service point, the learning mechanism checks
the MAC address forwarding table for the service to which the service point
belongs to determine whether that MAC address is known to the service. If the
MAC address is not found, the learning mechanism adds it to the table.
In parallel with the learning process, the forwarding mechanism searches the
service’s MAC forwarding table for the frame’s MAC address. If a match is found,
the frame is forwarded to the service point associated with the MAC address. If
not, the frame is flooded to all service points in the service.
Page 773 of 1094

17.1.5.2 Setting the Maximum Size of the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)
To limit the size of the MAC address forwarding table for a specific service, go to
service[SID]>service mac-limit-value set <mac limit>
Table 169: MAC Address Forwarding Table Maximum Size CLI Parameters
mac limit Number 16 to 131,072, in The maximum MAC

multiples of 16 address table size for
the service. This
maximum only applies
to dynamic, not static,
MAC address table
entries.
The following command limits the number of dynamic MAC address forwarding
table entries for Service 10 to 128:
service[10]>service mac-limit-value set 128
Page 774 of 1094

17.1.5.3 Setting the MAC Address Forwarding Table Aging Time (CLI)
You can configure a global aging time for dynamic entries in the MAC address
forwarding table. Once this aging time expires for a specific table entry, the entry
is erased from the table.
To set the global aging time for the MAC address forwarding table, enter the
following command:
root> ethernet service learning-ageing-time set time <time>
To display the global aging time for the MAC address forwarding table, enter the
following command:
root> ethernet service learning-ageing-time show
Table 170: MAC Address Forwarding Table Aging Time CLI Parameters
time Number 15 - 3825 The global aging time for

the MAC address
forwarding table, in
seconds.
The following command sets the global aging time to 2500 seconds:
root> ethernet service learning-ageing-time set time 2500
Page 775 of 1094

17.1.5.4 Adding a Static MAC Address to the Forwarding Table (CLI)

You can add static entries to the MAC forwarding table. The global aging timer
does not apply to static entries, and they are not counted with respect to the
maximum size of the MAC address forwarding table. It is the responsibility of the
user not to use all the entries in the table if the user also wants to utilize dynamic
MAC address learning.
To add a static MAC address to the MAC address forwarding table, go to service
view for the service to which you want to add the MAC address and enter the
following command:
service[SID]>service mac-learning-table set-static-
mac <static mac> spid <sp-id>
To delete a static MAC address from the MAC address forwarding table, go to
service view for the service from which you want to delete the MAC address and
service[SID]>service mac-learning-table del-static-
mac <static mac> spid <sp-id>
Table 171: Adding Static Address to MAC Address Forwarding Table CLI Parameters
static mac Six groups of two The MAC address.

hexadecimal digits
sp-id Number 1-32 The Service Point ID of
the service point
associated with the
MAC address.
The following command adds MAC address 00:11:22:33:44:55 to the MAC address
forwarding table for Service 10, and associates the MAC address with Service
Point ID 1 on Service 10:
service[10]>service mac-learning-table set-static-
mac 00:11:22:33:44:55 spid 1
The following command deletes MAC address 00:11:22:33:44:55, associated with

Service Point 1, from the MAC address forwarding table for Service 10:
service[10]>service mac-learning-table del-static-
mac 00:11:22:33:44:55 spid 1
Page 776 of 1094

17.1.5.5 Displaying the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)

You can display the MAC address forwarding table for an interface, a service, or
for the entire unit.
To display the MAC address forwarding table for a service, go to service view for
service[SID]>service mac-learning-table show
To display the MAC address forwarding table for an interface, go to interface view
eth type xxx[x/x]>mac-learning-table show
To display the MAC address forwarding table for the entire unit, enter the
following command:
root> ethernet generalcfg mac-learning-table show
To display the MAC address forwarding table for GbE 1, enter the following
commands:
eth type eth[1/1]>mac-learning-table show
Page 777 of 1094

17.1.5.6 Flushing the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)

You can perform a global flush on the MAC address forwarding table. This erases
all dynamic entries for all services. Static entries are not erased.
Note: The ability to flush the MAC address forwarding table per-service and
per-interface is planned for future release.
To perform a global flush of the MAC address forwarding table, enter the
following command:
root> ethernet service mac-learning-table set global-flush
Page 778 of 1094

17.1.5.7 Enabling MAC Address Learning on a Service Point (CLI)

You can enable or disable MAC address learning for specific service points. By
default, MAC learning is enabled.
To enable or disable MAC address learning for a service point, go to service view
for the service and enter the following command:
service[SID]>sp learning-state set spid <sp-id> learning
<learning>
Table 172: Enabling MAC Address Learning CLI Parameters

Values
sp-id Number 1-32 The Service Point ID of the service point

associated with the MAC address.
learning Variable Enable Select enable or disable to enable or
disable disable MAC address learning for frames
that ingress via the service point.
When enabled, the service point learns
the source MAC addresses of incoming
frames and adds them to the MAC
address forwarding table.
The following command enables MAC address learning for Service Point 1 on
Service 37:
service[37]>sp learning-state set spid 1 learning enable
The following command disables MAC address learning for Service Point 1 on
Service 37:
service[37]>sp learning-state set spid 1 learning disable
17.2 Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)
The following parameters are configured globally for the IP-20 switch:
• S- VLAN Ethertype – Defines the ethertype recognized by the system as the S-
VLAN ethertype.
• C-VLAN Ethertype – Defines the ethertype recognized by the system as the C-
VLAN ethertype. IP-20 supports 0x8100 as the C-VLAN ethertype.
• MRU – The maximum segment size defines the maximum receive unit (MRU)
capability and the maximum transmit capability (MTU) of the system. You can
configure a global MRU for the system.
Note: The MTU is determined by the receiving frame and editing operation
on the frame.
• Configuring the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)
• Configuring the C-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)
• Configuring the MRU (CLI)
Page 779 of 1094

17.2.1 Configuring the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)

To configure the S-VLAN Ethertype, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet generalcfg ethertype set svlan-value <ethertype>
To display the system S-VLAN ethertype, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet generalcfg ethertype show svlan
Table 173: Configure S-VLAN Ethertype CLI Parameters

ethertype Hexadecimal 0x8100 Defines the ethertype

0x88a8 recognized by the
system as the S-VLAN
0x9100
ethertype.
0x9200
For example, the following command sets the system S-VLAN ethertype to
0x88a8:
root> ethernet generalcfg ethertype set svlan-value 0x88a8
17.2.2 Configuring the C-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)

The system C-VLAN Ethertype is set by the system as 0x8100.
To display the system C-VLAN ethertype, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet generalcfg ethertype show cvlan
17.2.3 Configuring the MRU (CLI)

To define the global size (in bytes) of the Maximum Receive Unit (MRU), enter the
root> ethernet generalcfg mru set size <size>
To display the system MRU, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet generalcfg mru show
Table 174: Configure MRU CLI Parameters

size Number 64 to 9612 Defines the global size

(in bytes) of the
Maximum Receive Unit
(MRU). Frames that are
larger than the global
MRU will be discarded.
For example, the following command sets the system MRU to 9612:
root> ethernet generalcfg mru set size 9612
Page 780 of 1094

17.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces (CLI)

Related Topics:
• Enabling the Interfaces (CLI)
• Configuring Ethernet Services (CLI)
• Quality of Service (QoS) (CLI)
P-20's switching fabric distinguishes between physical interfaces and logical
interfaces. Physical and logical interfaces serve different purposes in the switching
fabric. In some cases, a physical interface corresponds to a logical interface on a
one-to-one basis. For some features, such as LAG, a group of physical interfaces
can be joined into a single logical interface.
The basic interface characteristics, such as media type, port speed, duplex, and
auto-negotiation, are configured on the physical interface level. Ethernet services,
QoS, and OAM characteristics are configured on the logical interface level.
Note: You cannot change the configuration of the Management interface. By
default, the Management interface has the following configuration:
• Auto negotiation ON
• Full Duplex
• RJ45 - 100Mbps
• Entering Interface View (CLI)
• Displaying the Operational State of the Interfaces in the Unit (CLI)
• Viewing Interface Attributes (CLI)
• Configuring an Interface’s Media Type (CLI)
• Configuring an Interface’s Speed and Duplex State (CLI)
• Configuring an Interface’s Auto Negotiation State (CLI)
• Configuring an Interface’s IFG (CLI)
• Configuring an Interface’s Preamble (CLI)
• Adding a Description for the Interface (CLI)
• Displaying Interface Statistics (RMON) (CLI)
17.3.1 Entering Interface View (CLI)

To view interface details and set the interface’s parameters, you must enter the
interface’s view level in the CLI. Use the following command to enter an Ethernet
interface’s view level:
root> ethernet interfaces eth slot <slot> port <port>
Use the following command to enter view level of the Management/Traffic port
on an IP-20E or IP-20V:
root> ethernet interfaces mng slot 1 port 1
Use the following command to enter the radio interface’s view level:
root> ethernet interfaces radio slot <slot> port <port>
Page 781 of 1094

Use the following command to enter the view level of a group, such as a Multi-
Carrier ABC group, an HSB protection group, or a LAG:
root> ethernet interfaces group <group>
Table 175: Entering Interface View CLI Parameters

size Number 64 to 9612 Defines the global size

(in bytes) of the
Maximum Receive Unit
(MRU). Frames that are
larger than the global
MRU will be discarded.
slot Number Ethernet: 1 Depends on the
Management (IP-20E interface and unit type.
and IP-20V): 1
Radio: 2
port Number GbE 1: 1 The port number of the
GbE 2: 2 interface.
GbE 3: 3
Management (IP-20E
and IP-20V): 1
Radio Carrier 1: 1
20C and IP-20C-HP
only): 2
group Variable rp1 To enter interface view
rp2 for a group, enter the
group ID for one of the
rp3
following types of group:
rp4
• HSB group (rp1
lag1 - rp-4)
lag2 • LAG (lag1 - lag4)
lag3 • Multi-Carrier
lag4 ABC group (mc-
mc-abc1 abc1 - mc-abc4)
mc-abc2 Note: HSB and Multi-
Carrier ABC groups are
mc-abc3
only relevant for IP-20C
mc-abc4 and IP-20C-HP.
The following command enters interface view for Ethernet port 3:


eth type eth [1/3]>
Page 782 of 1094

The following command enters interface view for radio interface 2 in an IP-20C or
IP-20C-HP unit:

radio [2/2]>
The following command enters interface view for radio interface 1:


radio [2/1]>
The following command enters interface view for LAG 1:


eth type group [64/1]>
Note: For simplicity, the examples in the following sections show the prompt
for an Ethernet interface.
17.3.2 Displaying the Operational State of the Interfaces in the Unit (CLI)
To display a list of all interfaces in the unit and their operational states, enter the
following command:
The following is a sample output of this command for an IP-20C:
The following is a sample output of this command for an IP-20E:
Page 783 of 1094

17.3.3 Viewing Interface Attributes (CLI)

To display an interface’s attributes, go to interface view for the interface and
eth type eth [x/x]>summary show
To display an interface’s current operational state (up or down), go to interface

view for the interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]>operational state show
The following command shows the attributes of GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>summary show
The following command shows the operational state of GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>operational state show
17.3.4 Configuring an Interface’s Media Type (CLI)

The Media Type attribute defines the physical interface Layer 1 media type.
Permitted values are RJ-45 and SFP.
To configure an Ethernet interface’s Media Type, go to interface view for the
interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]>media-type state set <media type>
Table 176: Interface Media Type CLI Parameters

media type Variable rj45 Select the physical interface layer 1

sfp media type:
RJ45 - An electrical (RJ-45) Ethernet
interface.
SFP - An optical (SFP) Ethernet interface.
The following command sets GbE 1 to RJ-45 (electrical):

eth type eth [1/2]>media-type state set rj45
The following command sets GbE 2 to SFP:

eth type eth [1/2]>media-type state set sfp
Page 784 of 1094

17.3.5 Configuring an Interface’s Speed and Duplex State (CLI)

To configure an Ethernet interface’s maximum speed and duplex state, go to
interface view for the interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]>speed-and-duplex state set <speed-and-duplex
state>
Table 177: Interface Speed and Duplex State CLI Parameters

speed-and-duplex Variable '10hd' This parameter sets the maximum speed and the
state '10fd' duplex state of the interface.
'100hd' • For RJ-45 interfaces, any of the permitted
values except 10000fd can be configured.
'100fd'
• For the management/traffic interface on an IP-
'1000fd'
20E or IP-20V (Management 1): Only 100 and
‘10000fd’ 1000 are supported.
• For SFP interfaces, only ‘100fd’ and '1000fd' is
supported.
• For SFP+ interfaces (IP-20V and IP-20E R2H ESP
models only), only 1000fd and 10000fd are
supported.
Notes: To use an SFP+ interface in 10G mode, the third-party switch must be
running Pause Frame Flow Control, as defined in IEEE 802.3x. It is also
recommended to configure shapers on the third-party switch so as to
limit the packet flow from the switch to the IP-20E unit to 2.5 Gbps.
After changing the speed of an SFP+ interface to or from 10000fd, you

must reset the unit in order for the change to take effect.
10HD is not supported in the current release.
The following command sets GbE 1 to 100 Mbps, full duplex:
eth type eth [1/1]>speed-and-duplex state set '100fd'
Note: Before performing this command, you must verify that the media-type
attribute is set to rj45.
The following command sets GbE 1 to 1 Gbps, full duplex:
eth type eth [1/1]>speed-and-duplex state set '1000fd'
The following command sets the Management port of an IP-20E or IP-20V to

1 Gbps, full duplex:
eth type mng [1/1]>speed-and-duplex state set '1000fd'
Page 785 of 1094

17.3.6 Configuring an Interface’s Auto Negotiation State (CLI)

To configure an Ethernet interface’s auto-negotiation state, go to interface view
eth type eth [x/x]>autoneg state set <autoneg state>
Table 178: Interface Auto Negotiation State CLI Parameters

autoneg state Variable on Enables or disables auto-

off negotiation on the physical
interface. Auto negotiation should
not be used for 100 Mbps SFP
interfaces or for SFP+ interfaces
on an IP-20E with the speed set to
10000.
The following command enables auto negotiation for GbE 2:

eth type eth [1/2]>autoneg state set on
17.3.7 Configuring an Interface’s IFG (CLI)

The IFG attribute represents the physical port Inter-frame gap. Although you can
modify the IFG field length, it is strongly recommended not to modify the default
value of 12 bytes without a thorough understanding of how the modification will
impact traffic.
To configure an Ethernet interface’s IFG, go to interface view for the interface and
eth type eth [x/x]>ifg set <ifg>
Table 179: Interface IFG CLI Parameters

ifg Number 6 - 15 Sets the interface’s IFG (in bytes).
The following command sets the ifg for GbE 1 to 12:

eth type eth [1/1]>ifg set 12
The following displays the currently configured ifg for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>ifg get
17.3.8 Configuring an Interface’s Preamble (CLI)

Although you can modify an Ethernet interface’s preamble, it is strongly
recommended not to modify the default value of 8 bytes without a thorough
understanding of how the modification will impact traffic.
To configure an Ethernet interface’s preamble, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>preamble set <preamble>
Page 786 of 1094

Table 180: Interface Preamble CLI Parameters

preamble Number 6 - 15 Sets the interface’s preamble (in bytes).
The following command sets the preamble for GbE 1 to 8:

eth type eth [1/1]>preamble set 8
The following command displays the current preamble for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>preamble get
17.3.9 Adding a Description for the Interface (CLI)

You can add a text description for an interface. To add a description, go to
eth type eth [x/x]>description set <description>
To delete a description, go to interface view for the interface and enter the
following command:
eth type eth [x/x]>description delete
To display an interface’s description, go to interface view for the interface and

eth type eth [x/x]>description show
Table 181: Interface Description CLI Parameters

description Text String Up to 40 Adds a text description to the interface.

characters
The following command adds the description “Line” to GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>description set Line
17.3.10 Displaying Interface Statistics (RMON) (CLI)

standards.
To display RMON statistics for a physical interface, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read <clear-
on-read> layer-1 <layer-1>
Table 182: Interface Statistics (RMON) CLI Parameters

clear-on-read Boolean yes If you enter yes, the statistics are cleared
no once you display them.
Page 787 of 1094


layer-1 Boolean yes yes – Statistics are represented as Layer 1
no statistics, including preamble and IFG.
no – Statistics are represented as Layer 2
statistics.
The following commands enter interface view for GbE 1, and clear the statistics
after displaying them.
eth type eth [1/1]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read yes

layer-1 yes
The following commands enter interface view for radio carrier 1 in an IP-20C,
IP-20C-HP, or IP-20S unit, and display statistics for the interface, without clearing
the statistics.
eth type radio[2/1]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read no

layer-1 no
Page 788 of 1094

17.4 Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss

Forwarding (CLI)
Automatic state propagation enables propagation of radio failures back to the
Ethernet port. You can also configure Automatic State Propagation to close the
Ethernet port based on a radio failure at the remote carrier.
pair includes one Monitored Interface and one Controlled Interface.
pair includes one Monitored Interface and one Controlled Interface. You can
create multiple pairs using the same Monitored Interface and multiple Controlled
Interfaces.
The Monitored Interface is a radio interface, a radio protection, or Multi-Carrier
ABC group. The Controlled Interface is an Ethernet interface or LAG. An Ethernet
interface can only be assigned to one Monitored interface.
Note: A radio interface that belongs to a LAG group cannot be used as a
monitored interface.
Each Controlled Interface is assigned an LLF ID. If ASP trigger by remote fault is
enabled on the remote side of the link, the ASP state of the Controlled Interface is
propagated to the Controlled Interface with the same LLF ID at the remote side of
the link. This means if ASP is triggered locally, it is propagated to the remote side
of the link, but only to Controlled Interfaces with LLF IDs that match the LLF IDs of
the affected Controlled Interfaces on the local side of the link.
Note: LLF requires an activation key (SL-LLF). Without this activation key,
only LLF ID 1 is available. See Configuring the Activation Key (CLI).
The following events in the Monitored Interface trigger ASP:
• Radio LOF
• Radio Excessive BER
• Remote Radio LOF
• Remote Excessive BER
• Remove LOC
The user can also configure the ASP pair so that Radio LOF, Radio Excessive BER,
or loss of the Ethernet connection at the remote side of the link will also trigger
ASP.
In addition, ASP is triggered if the Controlled Interface is a LAG, and the physical
interfaces that belong to the LAG are set to Admin = Down in the Interface
Manager.
When a triggering event takes place:
• If the Controlled Interface is an electrical GbE port, the port is closed.
• If the Controlled Interface is an optical GbE port, the port is muted.
The Controlled Interface remains closed or muted until all triggering events are
cleared.
Page 789 of 1094

In addition, when a local triggering event takes place, the ASP mechanism sends
an indication to the remote side of the link. Even when no triggering event has
taken place, the ASP mechanism sends periodic update messages indicating that
no triggering event has taken place.
A trigger delay time can be configured, so that when a triggering event takes
place, the ASP mechanism does not propagate the event until this delay time has
elapsed. A trigger delay from 0 to 10,000 ms can be set per LLD ID.
Note: It is recommended to configure both ends of the link to the same
Automatic State Propagation configuration.
To configure propagation of a radio interface failure to an Ethernet port, use the
following command:
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-radio eth-slot
<eth-slot> eth-port <eth-port> radio-slot <radio-slot> radio-
port <radio-port> llf-id <llf-id>
To configure propagation of a Multi-Carrier ABC group failure to an Ethernet port,

use the following command:
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-multi-radio-group
eth-slot <eth-slot> eth-port <eth-port> multi-radio-group
<multi-radio-group> slot 1 type TCC llf-id <llf-id>
To configure propagation of an HSB-SD protection group failure to an Ethernet

port, use the following command:
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-protection-group
eth-slot <eth-slot> eth-port <eth-port> protection-group
<protection-group> llf-id <llf-id>
To enable automatic state propagation on an Ethernet port, determine whether

remote interface failures are also propagated, enable ASP Management Safe (CSF)
mode (optional), and set a trigger delay (optional), use the following command:
root> auto-state-propagation configure eth-port eth-slot <eth-
slot> eth-port <eth-port> asp-admin <asp-admin> remote-fault-
trigger-admin <remote-fault-trigger-admin> csf-mode-admin <csf-
mode-admin> trigger-delay <trigger-delay> llf-id <llf-id>
Notes: In this command, the llf-id command is used optionally to change the
LLF ID of the Ethernet port.
To delete automatic state propagation on an Ethernet port, use the following
command:
root> auto-state-propagation delete eth-port eth-slot <eth-
slot> eth-port <eth-port>
To display all automatic state propagation configurations on the unit, use the
following command:
root> auto-state-propagation show-config all
To display the automatic state propagation configuration for a specific Ethernet

port, use the following command:
root> auto-state-propagation show-config eth-port eth-slot
<eth-slot> eth-port <eth-port>
Page 790 of 1094

Table 183: Automatic State Propagation to an Ethernet Port CLI Parameters

eth-slot Number 1 Always enter 1.

eth-port Number 1-3 The interface to which you want to
propagate faults from the selected radio
or group.
radio-slot Number 2
radio-port Number Radio Carrier 1: 1 The radio interface.
Radio Carrier 2
(IP-20C and IP-20C-HP only): 2
multi-radio-group Number 1-4 The Multi-Carrier ABC group failure of
which is propagated to the defined
interface.
Note: Only relevant for IP-20C and
IP-20C-HP units.
protection-group Number 1-4 The HSB-SD protection group failure of
which is propagated to the defined
interface.
Note: Only relevant for IP-20C and
IP-20C-HP units.
llf-id Number 1-31 An ID for Link Loss Forwarding (LLF).
When remote-fault-trigger-admin is set
to enable, ASP events at the other side of
the link are propagated to Controlled
Interfaces with LLF IDs that match the LLF
IDs of affected Controlled Interfaces at
the other side of the link. LLF IDs are
unique per Monitored Interface. That is, if
LLF ID 1 has been used for a Controlled
Interface that is grouped with radio
interface 1, that ID cannot be used again
for another Controlled Interface grouped
with radio interface 1. However, it can be
used for Controlled Interface grouped
with radio interface 2.
asp-admin Variable enable Enables or disables automatic state
disable propagation on the Ethernet interface.
remote-fault- Variable enable Determines whether faults on the remote
trigger-admin disable radio interface or group are propagated
to the local Ethernet interface.
Page 791 of 1094


csf-mode-admin Variable enable Enables or disables ASP Management
disable Safe (CSF) mode. In ASP Management
Safe mode, the ASP mechanism does not
physically shut down the Controlled
Interface when ASP is triggered. Instead,
the ASP mechanism sends a failure
indication message. This message is used
to propagate the failure indication to
external equipment.
Note: CSF mode must be enabled when
ASP is configured on the management
port of an IP-20E or IP-20V.
trigger-delay Number 0-10000 Sets a trigger delay time, in milliseconds.
When a triggering event takes place, the
ASP mechanism does not propagate the
event until this delay time has elapsed. By
default, the trigger-delay is 0 (no delay
time). In XPIC configurations, it is
recommended to configure a trigger-
delay of 100 ms.
The following commands configure and enable automatic state propagation to

propagate faults from radio interface 1 to Ethernet ports 1 and 2, and from radio
interface 2 to Ethernet port 3. ASP Management Safe mode is disabled. Faults on
the remote carrier are propagated to the local Ethernet ports as follows:
• A failure on the remote side of the link with radio interface 1 is propagated to
any of local Ethernet ports 1 or 2 that share an LLF ID with an Ethernet
interface in an ASP pair with the remote radio.
• A failure on the remote side of the link with radio interface 2 is propagated to
Ethernet port 3 if it shares an LLF ID with an Ethernet interface in an ASP pair
with the remote radio.
• The trigger delay for Ethernet port 1 is 100 ms. The trigger delay for Ethernet
port 2 is 5000 ms. There is no trigger delay for Ethernet port 3.
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-radio eth-slot 1
eth-port 1 radio-slot 2 radio-port 1 llf-id 1

root> auto-state-propagation configure eth-port eth-slot 1 eth-

port 1 asp-admin enable remote-fault-trigger-admin enable csf-
mode-admin disable trigger-delay 100


Page 792 of 1094


mode-admin disable

propagate faults from Multi-Carrier ABC group 1 to Ethernet port 1. Faults on the
remote carrier are also propagated to Ethernet port 1 if the LLF ID of an Ethernet
port paired with the remote carrier is 4. CSF mode is disabled and the trigger
delay is 300 ms.
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-multi-radio-group
eth-slot 1 eth-port 1 multi-radio-group 1 llf-id 4


propagate faults from 1+1 HSB protection group 1 to Ethernet port 2. Faults on
the remote carrier are not propagated to Ethernet port 2. ASP Management Safe
mode is disabled and there is no trigger delay.
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-protection-group
eth-slot 1 eth-port 2 protection-group 1 llf-id 1

port 2 asp-admin enable remote-fault-trigger-admin disable csf-
mode-admin disable
17.4.1 Configuring Receipt of CSF PDUs (CLI)

When ASP Management Safe mode (CSF) is configured, the peer unit must be
configured to receive CSF PDUs. To enable the unit to receive CSF PDUs, enter the
root> ethernet soam csf receive set admin enable ifc-down
<yes|no>
CSF receive must be enabled in order for G.8032 ERPI topology changes to be
initiated upon receipt of a CSF PDU.
To disable this setting, enter the following command
root> ethernet soam csf receive set admin disable
The ifc-down parameter should usually be set to Yes. This means that all network
protocols, LAG, and other unit modules will treat the interface on which the CSF
PDU was received as Operation Status = Down. Also, a soam-csf-rdi-alarm will be
raised to indicate that that relevant port is set to Operational Status = Down due
to ASP triggered by the remote unit.
To display the current setting of this parameter, enter the following command:
root> ethernet soam csf receive show
Page 793 of 1094

17.5 Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics (CLI)

standards. You can display various peak TX and RX rates (per second) and average
TX and RX rates (per second), both in bytes and in packets, for each measured
time interval. You can also display the number of seconds in the interval during
which TX and RX rates exceeded the configured threshold.
• Displaying RMON Statistics (CLI)
• Configuring Ethernet Port PMs and PM Thresholds (CLI)
• Displaying Ethernet Port PMs (CLI)
• Clearing Ethernet Port PMs (CLI)
17.5.1 Displaying RMON Statistics (CLI)

To display RMON statistics for a physical interface, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read <clear-
on-read> layer-1 <layer-1>
Table 184: RMON Statistics CLI Parameters

layer-1 Boolean yes • yes – Statistics are represented as

no Layer 1 statistics, including
preamble and IFG.
• no – Statistics are represented as
Layer 2 statistics.
The following commands bring you to interface view for Ethernet port 1, and
clears the statistics after displaying them.
eth type eth [1/1]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read yes

layer-1 yes
The following commands bring you to interface view for radio interface 2, without
clearing the statistics.
eth type radio[2/2]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read no

layer-1 no
Page 794 of 1094

17.5.2 Configuring Ethernet Port PMs and PM Thresholds (CLI)

To enable the gathering of PMs for an Ethernet interface, go to interface view for
the interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm set admin <enable|disable>
You can configure thresholds and display the number of seconds these thresholds
were exceeded during a specified interval.
To configure interface PM thresholds, go to interface view for the interface and
eth type eth [x/x]> pm set thresholds rx-layer1-rate-threshold
<0-4294967295> tx-layer1-rate-threshold <0-4294967295>
To display whether or not PM gathering is enabled for an Ethernet interface, as

well as the configured thresholds, go to interface view for the interface and enter
eth type eth [x/x]> pm show configuration
Table 185: Port PM Thresholds CLI Parameters

rx-layer1-rate- Number 0-4294967295 The exceed threshold for port RX PMs, in

thershold bytes per second.
tx-layer1-rate- Number 0-4294967295 The exceed threshold for port TX PMs, in
thershold bytes per second.
The following commands bring you to interface view for Ethernet port 1, enable
PM gathering, and set the thresholds for RX and TX PMs at 850,000,000 bytes per
second:
eth type eth [1/1]>pm set admin enable
eth type eth [1/1]>pm set thresholds rx-layer1-rate-threshold

850000000 tx-layer1-rate-threshold 850000000
17.5.3 Displaying Ethernet Port PMs (CLI)

Note: The port PM results may be several pages long. Remember:
To view the next results page, press the space bar.

To end the list and return to the most recent prompt, press the letter
q.
To display RX packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface view for the

Page 795 of 1094

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-packets interval 15min
To display RX packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view for the

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-packets interval 24hr
To display RX broadcast packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface view

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bcast-packets interval 15min
To display RX broadcast packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view for

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bcast-packets interval 24hr
To display RX multicast packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface view for

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-mcast-packets interval 15min
To display RX multicast packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view for

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-mcast-packets interval 24hr
To display Layer 1 RX PMs, in bytes per second, in 15-minute intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bytes-layer1 interval 15min
To display Layer 1 RX PMs, in bytes per second, in 24-hour intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bytes-layer1 interval 24hr
To display Layer 2 RX PMs, in bytes per second, in 15-minute intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bytes-layer2 interval 15min
To display Layer 2 RX PMs, in bytes per second, in 24-hour intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bytes-layer2 interval 24hr
To display TX packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface view for the

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-packets interval 15min
To display TX packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view for the

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-packets interval 24hr
To display TX broadcast packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface view

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bcast-packets interval 15min
To display TX broadcast packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view for

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bcast-packets interval 24hr
Page 796 of 1094

To display TX multicast packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface view for

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-mcast-packets interval 15min
To display TX multicast packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view for

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-mcast-packets interval 24hr
To display Layer 1 TX PMs, in bytes per second, in 15-minute intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bytes-layer1 interval 15min
To display Layer 1 TX PMs, in bytes per second, in 24-hour intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bytes-layer1 interval 24hr
To display Layer 2 TX PMs, in bytes per second, in 15-minute intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bytes-layer2 interval 15min
To display Layer 2 TX PMs, in bytes per second, in 24-hour intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bytes-layer2 interval 24hr
Table 186: Ethernet Port PMs

Interval For 24-hour intervals, displays the date of the interval.

For 15-minute intervals, displays the date and ending
time of the interval.
Invalid data flag Indicates whether the values received during the
measured interval are valid. An x in the column indicates
that the values are not valid (for example, because of a
power surge or power failure that occurred during the
interval).
Peak RX Packets The peak rate of RX packets per second for the measured
time interval.
Average RX Packets The average rate of RX packets per second for the
measured time interval.
Peak RX Broadcast Packets The peak rate of RX broadcast packets per second for the
Average RX Broadcast Packets The average rate of RX broadcast packets per second for
the measured time interval.
Peak RX Multicast Packets The peak rate of RX multicast packets per second for the
Average RX Multicast Packets The average rate of RX multicast packets per second for
Page 797 of 1094

Peak RX Bytes in Layer1 The peak RX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured
time interval (including preamble and IFG).
Average RX Bytes in Layer1 The average RX rate, in bytes per second, for the
measured time interval (including preamble and IFG).
RX Bytes Layer1 Exceed Threshold The number of seconds during the measured time
(sec) interval that the RX rate exceeded the configured
threshold.
Peak RX Bytes in Layer2 The peak RX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured
time interval (excluding preamble and IFG).
Average RX Bytes in Layer2 The average RX rate, in bytes per second, for the
measured time interval (excluding preamble and IFG).
Peak TX Packets The peak rate of TX packets per second for the measured
time interval.
Average TX Packets The average rate of TX packets per second for the
Peak TX Broadcast Packets The peak rate of TX broadcast packets per second for the
Average TX Broadcast Packets The average rate of TX broadcast packets per second for
Peak TX Multicast Packets The peak rate of TX multicast packets per second for the
Average TX Multicast Packets The average rate of TX multicast packets per second for
Peak TX Bytes in Layer1 The peak TX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured
time interval (including preamble and IFG).
Average TX Bytes in Layer1 The average TX rate, in bytes per second, for the
measured time interval (including preamble and IFG).
TX Bytes Layer1 Exceed Threshold The number of seconds during the measured time
(sec) interval that the TX rate exceeded the configured
threshold.
Peak TX Bytes in Layer2 The peak TX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured
time interval (excluding preamble and IFG).
Average TX Bytes in Layer2 The average TX rate, in bytes per second, for the
measured time interval (excluding preamble and IFG).
17.5.4 Clearing Ethernet Port PMs (CLI)

To clear all PMs for an Ethernet interface, go to interface view for the interface
eth type eth [x/x]> pm clear-all
Page 798 of 1094

18. Quality of Service (QoS) (CLI)

• Configuring Classification (CLI)
• Configuring Policers (Rate Metering) (CLI)
• Configuring Marking (CLI)
• Configuring WRED (CLI)
• Configuring Shapers (CLI)
• Configuring Scheduling (CLI)
• Displaying Egress PMs and Statistics (CLI)
18.1 Configuring Classification (CLI)

• Classification Overview (CLI)
• Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface (CLI)
• Configuring VLAN Classification and Override (CLI)
• Configuring 802.1p Classification (CLI)
• Configuring DSCP Classification (CLI)
• Configuring MPLS Classification (CLI)
• Configuring MAC DA Classification (CLI)
• Configuring a Default CoS (CLI)
• Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service Point (CLI)
• Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service (CLI)
18.1.1 Classification Overview (CLI)

IP-20 supports a hierarchical classification mechanism. The classification
mechanism examines incoming frames and determines their CoS and Color. The
benefit of hierarchical classification is that it provides the ability to “zoom in” or
“zoom out”, enabling classification at higher or lower levels of the hierarchy. The
nature of each traffic stream defines which level of the hierarchical classifier to
apply, or whether to use several levels of the classification hierarchy in parallel.
The hierarchical classifier consists of the following levels:
• Logical interface-level classification
• Service point-level classification
• Service level classification
Page 799 of 1094

18.1.2 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface (CLI)

Logical interface-level classification enables you to configure classification on a
single interface or on a number of interfaces grouped tougher, such as a LAG
group.
The classifier at the logical interface level supports the following classification
methods, listed from highest to lowest priority. A higher level classification
method supersedes a lower level classification method:
• VLAN ID
• 802.1p bits.
• DSCP values.
• MPLS EXP field.
• Default CoS
IP-20 performs the classification on each frame ingressing the system via the
logical interface. Classification is performed step by step from the highest priority
to the lowest priority classification method. Once a match is found, the classifier
determines the CoS and Color decision for the frame for the logical interface-level.
For example, if the frame is an untagged IP Ethernet frame, a match will not be
found until the DSCP priority level. The CoS and Color values defined for the
frame’s DSCP value will be applied to the frame.
You can disable some of these classification methods by configuring them as un-
trusted. For example, if 802.1p classification is configured as un-trusted for a
specific interface, the classification mechanism does not perform classification by
UP bits. This is useful, for example, if classification is based on DSCP priority bits.
If no match is found at the logical interface level, the default CoS is applied to
incoming frames at this level. In this case, the Color of the frame is assumed to be
Green.
Classification may also be performed by Destination MAC Address (MAC DA) at
the service point level. When MAC DA classification is enabled on a service point,
the classification mechanism checks each frame ingressing the interface on which
the service point is defined against a list of user-defined MAC DAs. If there is a
match, the mechanism applies to the frame the CoS and Color defined for that
MAC DA. Classification by MAC DA overrides the other classification criteria at the
service point level.
18.1.3 Configuring VLAN Classification and Override (CLI)

You can specify a specific CoS and Color for a specific VLAN ID. In the case of
double-tagged frames, the match must be with the frame’s outer VLAN. Permitted
values are CoS 0 to 7 and Color Green or Yellow per VLAN ID. This is the highest
classification priority on the logical interface level, and overrides any other
classification criteria at the logical interface level.
To configure CoS and Color override based on VLAN ID, go to interface view for
eth type eth [x/x]>vlan-cos-override set outer-vlan-id <outer-
vlan-id> inner-vlan-id <inner-vlan-id> use-cos <use-cos> use-
color <use-color>
Page 800 of 1094

To display configured VLAN-based CoS and Color override values, go to interface

eth type eth [x/x]>vlan-cos-override show outer-vlan-id <outer-
vlan-id> inner-vlan-id <inner-vlan-id>
To delete a set of VLAN-based CoS and Color override values, go to interface view
eth type eth [x/x]>vlan-cos-override delete outer-vlan-id
<outer-vlan-id> inner-vlan-id <inner-vlan-id>
Table 187: VLAN Classification and Override CLI Parameters

outer-vlan-id Number 1 – 4094 (except 4092, For double-tagged frames, the S-

which is reserved for the VLAN value mapped to the CoS and
default management Color values defined in the
service) command.
For single-tagged frames, the VLAN
value mapped to the CoS and Color
values defined in the command.
inner-vlan-id Number 1 – 4094 (except 4092, Optional. Include this parameter
which is reserved for the when you want to map double-
default management tagged frames to specific CoS and
service) Color values. When this parameter
is included in the command, both
the S-VLAN and the C-VLAN IDs must
match the configured outer-vlan-
id and inner-vlan-id values,
respectively, in order for the defined
CoS and Color values to be applied
to the frame.
use-cos Number 0–7 The CoS value applied to matching
frames.
use-color Variable green The Color applied to matching
yellow frames.
The following command configures the classification mechanism on GbE 1 to

override the CoS and Color values of frames with S-VLAN ID 10 and C-VLAN ID 30
with a CoS value of 6 and a Color value of Green:
eth type eth [1/1]>vlan-cos-override set outer-vlan-id 10
inner-vlan-id 30 use-cos 6 use-color green
The following command configures the classification mechanism on GbE 2 to

override the CoS and Color values of frames with VLAN ID 20 with a CoS value of 5
and a Color value of Green:
eth type eth [1/2]>vlan-cos-override set outer-vlan-id 20 use-
cos 5 use-color green
Page 801 of 1094

The following command displays the CoS and Color override values for frames
that ingress on GbE 1, with S-VLAN ID 10 and C-VLAN ID 20:
eth type eth [1/1]>vlan-cos-override show outer-vlan-id 10
inner-vlan-id 20
The following command displays all CoS and Color override values for frames that
ingress on GbE 2:
eth type eth [1/2]>vlan-cos-override show all
The following command deletes the VLAN to CoS and Color override mapping for
frames that ingress on GbE 1, with S-VLAN ID 10 and C-VLAN ID 20:
eth type eth [1/1]>vlan-cos-override delete outer-vlan-id 10
inner-vlan-id 20
18.1.4 Configuring 802.1p Classification (CLI)

When 802.1p classification is set to Trust mode, the interface performs QoS and
Color classification according to user-configurable tables for 802.1q UP bit (C-
VLAN frames) or 802.1AD UP bit (S-VLAN frames) to CoS and Color classification.
• Configuring Trust Mode for 802.1p Classification (CLI)
• Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI Bit Classification Table (CLI)
• Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table (CLI)
Page 802 of 1094

18.1.4.1 Configuring Trust Mode for 802.1p Classification (CLI)

To define the trust mode for 802.1p classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification set 802.1p <802.1p>
To display the trust mode for 802.1p classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification show 802.1p state
Table 188: 802.1p Trust Mode CLI Parameters

802.1p Variable trust Enter the interface's trust mode for user
un-trust priority (UP) bits:
• trust – The interface performs QoS
and color classification according to
UP and CFI/DEI bits according to user-
configurable tables for 802.1q UP bits
(C-VLAN frames) or 802.1AD UP bits
(S-VLAN frames). VLAN UP bit
classification has priority over DSCP
and MPLS classification, so that if a
match is found with the UP bit of the
ingressing frame, DSCP values and
MPLS bits are not considered.
• un-trust – The interface does not
consider 802.1 UP bits during
classification.
The following command enables 802.1p trust mode for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>classification set 802.1p trust
The following command disables 802.1p trust mode for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>classification set 802.1p un-trust
Page 803 of 1094

18.1.4.2 Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI Bit Classification Table (CLI)
The following table shows the default values for the C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI bit
classification table.
Table 189: C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI Bit Classification Table Default Values
802.1 UP CFI CoS (configurable) Color (configurable)
0 0 0 Green
0 1 0 Yellow
1 0 1 Green
1 1 1 Yellow
2 0 2 Green
2 1 2 Yellow
3 0 3 Green
3 1 3 Yellow
4 0 4 Green
4 1 4 Yellow
5 0 5 Green
5 1 5 Yellow
6 0 6 Green
6 1 6 Yellow
7 0 7 Green
7 1 7 Yellow
To modify the C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI bit classification table, enter the following
command:
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-mapping-tbl set 802.1p
<802.1p> cfi <cfi> cos <cos> color <color>
To display the C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI bit classification table, enter the following
command:
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-mapping-tbl show
Table 190: C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI Bit Classification Table CLI Parameters
802.1p Number 0–7 The User Priority (UP) bit to be mapped.

cfi Number 0–1 The CFI bit to be mapped.
cos Number 0–7 The CoS assigned to frames with the
designated UP and CFI.
color Variable green The Color assigned to frames with the
yellow designated UP and CFI.
Page 804 of 1094

The following command maps frames with an 802.1p UP bit value of 1 and a CFI
bit value of 0 to CoS 1 and Green color:
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-mapping-tbl set 802.1p
1 cfi 0 cos 1 color green
Page 805 of 1094

18.1.4.3 Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table (CLI)
The following table shows the default values for the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI bit
classification table.
Table 191: S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table Default Values
802.1 UP DEI CoS (Configurable) Color (Configurable)
0 0 0 Green
0 1 0 Yellow
1 0 1 Green
1 1 1 Yellow
2 0 2 Green
2 1 2 Yellow
3 0 3 Green
3 1 3 Yellow
4 0 4 Green
4 1 4 Yellow
5 0 5 Green
5 1 5 Yellow
6 0 6 Green
6 1 6 Yellow
7 0 7 Green
7 1 7 Yellow
To modify the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI bit classification table, enter the following
command:
root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-mapping-tbl set 802.1p
<802.1p> dei <dei> cos <cos> color <color>
To display the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI bit classification table, enter the following
command:
root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-mapping-tbl show
Table 192: S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table CLI Parameters
802.1p Number 0–7 The User Priority (UP) bit to be mapped.

dei Number 0-1 The DEI bit to be mapped.
designated UP and CFI.
yellow designated UP and CFI.
Page 806 of 1094

The following command maps frames with an 802.1ad UP bit value of 7 and a DEI
bit value of 0 to CoS 7 and Green color:
root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-mapping-tbl set 802.1p 7 dei
0 cos 7 color green
18.1.5 Configuring DSCP Classification (CLI)

When DSCP classification is set to Trust mode, the interface performs QoS and
Color classification according to a user-configurable DSCP to CoS and Color
classification table. 802.1p classification has priority over DSCP Trust Mode, so
that if a match is found on the 802.1p level, DSCP is not considered.
• Configuring Trust Mode for DSCP Classification (CLI)
• Modifying the DSCP Classification Table (CLI)
Page 807 of 1094

18.1.5.1 Configuring Trust Mode for DSCP Classification (CLI)

To define the trust mode for DSCP classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification set ip-dscp <ip-dscp>
To display the trust mode for DSCP classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification show 802.1p state
Table 193: Trust Mode for DSCP CLI Parameters

Values
ip-dscp Variable trust Select the interface's trust mode for DSCP
un-trust classification:
• trust – The interface performs QoS and
color classification according to a user-
configurable table for DSCP to CoS and color
classification. DSCP classification has priority
over MPLS classification, so that if a match is
found with the DSCP value of the ingressing
frame, MPLS bits are not considered.
• un-trust – The interface does not consider
DSCP during classification.
The following command enables DSCP trust mode for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>classification set ip-dscp trust
The following command disables DSCP trust mode for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>classification set ip-dscp un-trust
Page 808 of 1094

18.1.5.2 Modifying the DSCP Classification Table (CLI)

IP-20 units have a DSCP classification table with 24 pre-defined entries. Each entry
includes the following criteria:
• DSCP – The DSCP value to be mapped.
• Binary – The binary representation of the DSCP value.
• Description – A description of the DSCP value.
• CoS – The CoS assigned to frames with the designated DSCP value.
• Color – The Color assigned to frames with the designated DSCP value.
You can modify the Description, CoS, and Color for any of the pre-defined entries.
You can also add and delete entries. The maximum number of entries is 32.
The following table shows the pre-defined entries in the DSCP classification table.
Table 194: DSCP Classification Table Default Values

DSCP DSCP (bin) Description CoS (Configurable) Color (Configurable)
0 (default) 000000 BE (CS0) 0 Green

10 001010 AF11 1 Green
12 001100 AF12 1 Yellow
14 001110 AF13 1 Yellow
18 010010 AF21 2 Green
20 010100 AF22 2 Yellow
22 010110 AF23 2 Yellow
26 011010 AF31 3 Green
28 011100 AF32 3 Yellow
30 011110 AF33 3 Yellow
34 100010 AF41 4 Green
36 100100 AF42 4 Yellow
38 100110 AF43 4 Yellow
46 101110 EF 7 Green
8 001000 CS1 1 Green
16 010000 CS2 2 Green
24 011000 CS3 3 Green
32 100000 CS4 4 Green
40 101000 CS5 5 Green
48 110000 CS6 6 Green
56 111000 CS7 7 Green
51 110011 DSCP_51 6 Green
52 110100 DSCP_52 6 Green
Page 809 of 1094

DSCP DSCP (bin) Description CoS (Configurable) Color (Configurable)

54 110110 DSCP_54 6 Green
56 111000 CS7 7 Green
To modify the DSCP classification table, enter the following command:

root> ethernet qos dscp-mapping-tbl set dscp <dscp> cos <cos>
color <color> dscp description <description>
To add an entry to the DSCP classification table, enter the following command:
root> ethernet qos dscp-mapping-tbl add dscp <dscp> cos <cos>
color <color> dscp description <description>
To delete an entry from the DSCP classification table, enter the following
command:
root> ethernet qos dscp-mapping-tbl delete dscp <dscp>
To display the DSCP classification table, enter the following command:

root> ethernet qos dscp-mapping-tbl show
Table 195: Modify DSCP Classification Table CLI Parameters

dscp Number 0-63 The DSCP value to be mapped.

designated DSCP value.
yellow designated DSCP value.
description String A description of the entry.
The following command maps frames with DSCP value of 10 to CoS 1 and Green
color, and changes the description of the table entry to AFC11:
root> ethernet qos dscp-mapping-tbl set dscp 10 cos 1 color
green dscp description AFC11
18.1.6 Configuring MPLS Classification (CLI)

When MPLS classification is set to Trust mode, the interface performs QoS and
Color classification according to a user-configurable MPLS EXP bit to CoS and Color
classification table. Both 802.1p and DSCP classification have priority over MPLS
Trust Mode, so that if a match is found on either the 802.1p or DSCP levels, MPLS
bits are not considered.
• Configuring Trust Mode for MPLS Classification (CLI)
• Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table (CLI)
Page 810 of 1094

18.1.6.1 Configuring Trust Mode for MPLS Classification (CLI)

To define the trust mode for MPLS classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification set mpls <mpls>
To display the trust mode for MPLS classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification show mpls state
Page 811 of 1094

Table 196: Trust Mode for MPLS CLI Parameters

mpls Variable Trust Select the interface's trust mode for MPLS
un-trust bits:
• trust – The interface performs
QoS and color classification
according to a user-configurable
table for MPLS EXP to CoS and
color classification.
• un-trust – The interface does
not consider MPLS bits during
classification.
The following command enables MPLS trust mode for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>classification set mpls trust
The following command disables MPLS trust mode for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>classification set mpls un-trust
Page 812 of 1094

18.1.6.2 Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table (CLI)

The following table shows the default values for the MPLS EXP bit classification
table.
Table 197: MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table Default Values

MPLS EXP bits CoS (Configurable) Color (Configurable)
0 0 Yellow
1 1 Green
2 2 Yellow
3 3 Green
4 4 Yellow
5 5 Green
6 6 Green
7 7 Green
To modify the MPLS EXP bit classification table, enter the following command:
root> ethernet qos mpls-exp-bits-mapping-tbl set mpls-exp
<mpls-exp> cos <cos> color <color>
To display the MPLS EXP bit classification table, enter the following command:
root> ethernet qos mpls-mapping-tbl show
Page 813 of 1094

Table 198: MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table Modification CLI Parameters
mpls-exp Number 0–7 The MPLS EXP bit to be mapped.

designated MPLS EXP bit value.
yellow designated MPLS EXP bit value.
The following command maps frames with MPLS EXP bit value of 4 to CoS 4 and
Yellow color:
root> ethernet qos mpls-exp-bits-mapping-tbl set mpls-exp 4
cos 4 color yellow
18.1.7 Configuring MAC DA Classification (CLI)

You can determine whether classification is performed by MAC DA in the service
point’s CoS Mode parameter. See Classification Overview.
To add an entry to the MAC DA classification table, enter the following command
in root view:
root>ethernet generalcfg mac-da add mac <MAC address> color
<green|yellow>
To edit an entry to the MAC DA classification table, enter the following command
in root view:
root>ethernet generalcfg mac-da edit mac <MAC address> color
<green|yellow>
To delete an entry to the MAC DA classification table, enter the following

root>ethernet generalcfg mac-da delete mac <MAC address>
The following command adds MAC address 00:11:22:33:44:55 to the MAC DA

classification table, with a CoS of 7 and the Color green.
root>ethernet generalcfg mac-da add mac 00:11:22:33:44:55 cos 7
color green
The following command changes the CoS assigned to this MAC address to 6.
root>ethernet generalcfg mac-da edit mac 00:11:22:33:44:55 cos
6 color green
The following command deletes this MAC address.

root>ethernet generalcfg mac-da delete mac 00:11:22:33:44:55
Page 814 of 1094

18.1.8 Configuring a Default CoS (CLI)

You can define a default CoS value for frames passing through the interface. This
value can be overwritten on the service point and service level. The Color is
assumed to be Green.
To define a default CoS value for an interface, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification set default-cos <default-cos>
To display the default CoS value for an interface, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification show default-cos
Table 199: Default CoS CLI Parameters

Paramete Input Permitted Values Description
r Type
default- Number 0–7 Enter the default CoS value for frames passing
cos through the interface. This value can be
overwritten on the service point and service level.
The following command sets the default CoS for GbE 1 as 7:

eth type eth [1/1]>classification set default-cos 7
18.1.9 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service Point (CLI)

For instruction on configuring ingress path classification on a service point, see
CoS Preservation and Modification on a Service Point (CLI).
18.1.10 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service (CLI)

For instruction on configuring ingress path classification on a service, see
Configuring a Service’s CoS Mode and Default CoS (CLI).
Page 815 of 1094

18.2 Configuring Policers (Rate Metering) (CLI)

• Overview of Rate Metering (Policing) (CLI)
• Configuring Rate Meter (Policer) Profiles (CLI)
• Displaying Rate Meter Profiles (CLI)
• Deleting a Rate Meter Profile (CLI)
• Attaching a Rate Meter (Policer) to an Interface (CLI)
• Attaching a Rate Meter (Policer) to a Service Point and CoS (CLI)
• Configuring the Line Compensation Value for a Rate Meter (Policer) (CLI)
• Displaying Rate Meter Statistics for an Interface (CLI)
18.2.1 Overview of Rate Metering (Policing) (CLI)

The IP-20 switching fabric supports hierarchical policing on the logical interface
level, and the service point and CoS level. You can define up to 250 rate meter
(policer) profiles.
The IP-20's policer mechanism is based on a dual leaky bucket mechanism
(TrTCM). The policers can change a frame’s color and CoS settings based on
CIR/EIR + CBS/EBS, which makes the policer mechanism a key tool for
implementing bandwidth profiles and enabling operators to meet strict SLA
requirements.
The output of the policers is a suggested color for the inspected frame. Based on
this color, the queue management mechanism decides whether to drop the frame
or to pass it to the queue.
18.2.2 Configuring Rate Meter (Policer) Profiles (CLI)

To add a rate meter (policer) profile, enter the following command:
root> ethernet qos rate-meter add profile-id <profile-id> cir
<cir> cbs <cbs> eir <eir> ebs <ebs> color-mode <color-mode>
coupling-flag <coupling-flag> rate-meter-profile-name <rate-
meter-profile-name>
To edit an existing rate meter (policer) profile, enter the following command:
root> ethernet qos rate-meter edit profile-id <profile-id> cir
<cir> cbs <cbs> eir <eir> ebs <ebs> color-mode <color-mode>
coupling-flag <coupling-flag> rate-meter-profile-name <rate-
meter-profile-name>
Table 200: Rate Meter Profile CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1 – 250 A unique ID for the rate meter (policer)

profile.
cir Number 0, or 64,000 - The Committed Information Rate (CIR)
1,000,000,000 defined for the rate meter (policer), in
bits per second.
Page 816 of 1094


If the value is 0, all incoming CIR traffic is
dropped.
cbs Number 0 - 8192 The Committed Burst Rate (CBR) for the
rate meter (policer), in Kbytes.
eir Number 0, or 64,000 - The Excess Information Rate (EIR) for the
1,000,000,000 rate meter (policer), in bits per second.
If the value is 0, all incoming EIR traffic is
dropped.
ebs Number 0 - 8192 The Excess Burst Rate (EBR) for the rate
meter (policer), in Kbytes.
color-mode Variable color-blind Determines how the rate meter (policer)
color-aware treats frames that ingress with a CFI or
DEI field set to 1 (yellow). Options are:
• color aware – All frames that
ingress with a CFI/DEI field set
to 1 (yellow) are treated as EIR
frames, even if credits remain in
the CIR bucket.
• color blind – All ingress
frames are treated as green
regardless of their CFI/DEI
value. A color-blind policer
discards any former color
decisions.
coupling-flag Variable enable When enabled, frames that ingress as
disable yellow may be converted to green when
there are no available yellow credits in
the EIR bucket. Only relevant in color-
aware mode.
rate-meter- Text string Up to 20 characters. A description of the rate meter (policer)

profile-name profile.
The following command creates a rate meter (policer) profile with Profile ID 50,
named “64k.”
root> ethernet qos rate-meter add profile-id 50 cir 64000 cbs 5
eir 64000 ebs 5 color-mode color-blind coupling-flag disable
rate-meter-profile-name 64k
This profile includes the following parameters:

• CIR – 64,000 bps
• CBS – 5 Kbytes
• EIR – 64,000 bps
• EBS – 5 Kbytes
• Color Blind mode
• Coupling Flag disabled
Page 817 of 1094

The following command edits the rate meter (policer) profile with Profile ID 50,
and changes its name to “256 kBytes.”
root> ethernet qos rate-meter edit profile-id 50 cir 128000 cbs
5 eir 128000 ebs 5 color-mode color-aware coupling-flag enable
rate-meter-profile-name 256 kBytes
This edited profile includes the following parameters:

• CIR – 128,000 bps
• CBS – 5 Kbytes
• EIR – 128,000 bps
• EBS – 5 Kbytes
• Color Aware mode
• Coupling Flag enabled
18.2.3 Displaying Rate Meter Profiles (CLI)

You can display all configured rate meter (policer) profiles or a specific profile.
To display a specific profile, enter the following command:
root> ethernet qos rate-meter show profile-id <profile-id>
To display all configured profiles, enter the following command:

root> ethernet qos rate-meter show profile-id all
The following command displays the parameters of Rate Meter Profile 50:
root> ethernet qos rate-meter show profile-id 50
18.2.4 Deleting a Rate Meter Profile (CLI)

You cannot delete a rate meter (policer) profile that is attached to a logical
interface. You must first remove the profile from the logical interface, then delete
the profile.
To delete a rate meter (policer) profile, use the following command:
root> ethernet qos rate-meter delete profile-id <profile-id>
The following command deletes Rate Meter Profile 50:

root> ethernet qos rate-meter delete profile-id 50
Page 818 of 1094

18.2.5 Attaching a Rate Meter (Policer) to an Interface (CLI)

On the logical interface level, you can assign rate meter (policer) profiles as
follows:
• Per frame type (unicast, multicast, and broadcast)
• Per frame ethertype
• Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Unicast Traffic (CLI)
• Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Multicast Traffic (CLI)
• Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Broadcast Traffic (CLI)
• Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) per Ethertype (CLI)
Page 819 of 1094

18.2.5.1 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Unicast Traffic (CLI)

To assign a rate meter (policer) profile for unicast traffic to the interface, go to
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter unicast add capability admin-
state <admin-state> profile-id <profile-id>
To change the rate meter (policer) profile for unicast traffic, go to interface view
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter unicast edit admin-state <admin-
state> profile-id <profile-id>
To display the current unicast rate meter (policer) profile for an interface, go to
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter unicast show configuration
To delete the rate meter (policer) profile for unicast traffic, go to interface view
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter unicast delete
Table 201: Assigning Rate Meter for Unicast Traffic CLI Parameters
admin-state Variable enable Enables or disables rate metering on unicast

disable traffic flows from the logical interface.
profile-id Number 1 – 250 Select from the rate meter profiles defined in the
system.
The following command assigns Rate Meter Profile 1 to unicast traffic on GbE 1,
and enables rate metering on the port:
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter unicast add capability admin-
state enable profile-id 1
The following command changes the rate meter (policer) profile for unicast traffic
on GbE 1 to 4:
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter unicast edit admin-state enable
profile-id 4
Page 820 of 1094

18.2.5.2 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Multicast Traffic (CLI)

To assign a rate meter (policer) profile for multicast traffic to the interface, go to
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter multicast add capability admin-
To change the rate meter (policer) profile for multicast traffic, go to interface view
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter multicast edit admin-state
<admin-state> profile-id <profile-id>
To display the current multicast rate meter (policer) profile for an interface, go to
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter multicast show configuration
To delete the rate meter (policer) profile for multicast traffic, go to interface view
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter multicast delete
Table 202: Assigning Rate Meter for Multicast Traffic CLI Parameters
admin-state Variable enable Enables or disables rate metering on

disable multicast traffic flows from the logical
interface.
profile-id Number 1 – 250 Select from the rate meter profiles defined in
the system.
The following command assigns Rate Meter Profile 1 to multicast traffic on GbE 1,
and enables rate metering on the port.
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter multicast add capability admin-
The following command changes the rate meter (policer) profile for multicast
traffic on GbE 1 to 4:
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter multicast edit admin-state enable
profile-id 4
Page 821 of 1094

18.2.5.3 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Broadcast Traffic (CLI)

To assign a rate meter (policer) profile for broadcast traffic to the interface, go to
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter broadcast add capability admin-
To change the rate meter (policer) profile for broadcast traffic, go to interface
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter broadcast edit admin-state
To display the current broadcast rate meter (policer) settings for an interface, go
to interface view for the interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter broadcast show configuration
To delete the rate meter (policer) profile for broadcast traffic, go to interface view
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter broadcast delete
Table 203: Assigning Rate Meter for Broadcast Traffic CLI Parameters
admin-state Variable enable Enables or disables rate metering on broadcast

system.
The following command assigns Profile 1 to broadcast traffic on GbE 1, and

enables rate metering on the port.
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter broadcast add capability admin-
The following command changes the rate meter (policer) profile for broadcast
traffic on GbE 1 to 4:
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter broadcast edit admin-state enable
profile-id 4
Page 822 of 1094

18.2.5.4 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) per Ethertype (CLI)

You can define up to three policers per Ethertype value.
To assign a rate meter (policer) profile for a specific Ethertype to an interface, go
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter <ethertype#> add capability
ethertype-value <ethertype-value> admin-state <admin-state>
profile-id <profile-id>
To change the rate meter (policer) profile for a specific Ethertype, go to interface
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter <ethertype#> edit ethertype-value
<ethertype-value> admin-state <admin-state> profile-id
<profile-id>
To display the current Ethertype rate meter (policer) settings for an interface, go
to interface view for the interface and enter the following commands:
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter ethertype1 show configuration
To delete the rate meter (policer) profile for an Ethertype, go to interface view for
the interface and enter one or more of the following commands:
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter ethertype1 delete
Table 204: Assigning Rate Meter per Ethertype CLI Parameters

ethertype# Variable ethertype1 Identifies which of three possible policer-per-

ethertype2 Ethertype combinations you are defining.
ethertype3 I
ethertype- Hexadecimal 1-65535 Identifies the Ethertype to which the profile
value applies.
admin-state Variable enable Enables or disables policing on broadcast traffic
disable flows from the logical interface.
profile-id Number 1 – 250 Select from the policer profiles defined in the
system. For instructions on defining rate meter
(policer) profiles, refer to Configuring Rate Meter
(Policer) Profiles (CLI).
The following commands assign Rate Meter Profiles 1, 2, and 3 to Ethertypes

0x8000, 0x8100, and 0x9100, respectively, on GbE 1, and enable rate metering on
the port.
Page 823 of 1094

eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter ethertype1 add capability

ethertype-value 0x8000 admin-state enable profile-id 1


The following commands change the rate meter (policer) profiles assigned in the
examples above to 4, 5, and 6, respectively.
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter ethertype1 edit ethertype-value
0x8000 admin-state enable profile-id 4


18.2.6 Attaching a Rate Meter (Policer) to a Service Point and CoS (CLI)
To assign a rate meter (policer) profile to a service point, go to service view for the
service and enter the following commands:
service[x]>sp rate-meter add capability spid <spid>
service[x]>sp rate-meter edit spid <spid> admin-state <admin-

To change the rate meter (policer) profile for a service point, go to service view
for the service and enter the following command:
service[x]>sp rate-meter edit spid <spid> admin-state <admin-
To display the current rate meter (policer) profile for a service point, go to service
view for the service and enter the following command:
service[x]>sp rate-meter show configuration spid <spid>
To assign a rate meter (policer) profile to a service point and CoS, go to service
view for the service and enter the following commands:
service[x]>sp rate-meter add capability spid <spid>
service[x]>sp rate-meter edit spid <spid> cos <cos> admin-state

To change the rate meter (policer) profile for a service point and CoS, go to
service[x]>sp rate-meter edit spid <spid> cos <cos> admin-state
To display the current rate meter (policer) profile for a service point and CoS, go
to service view for the service and enter the following command:
service[x]>sp rate-meter show configuration spid <spid> cos
<cos>
To delete the rate meter (policer) profile for a service point or service point/CoS
combination, go to service view for the service and enter the following command:
Page 824 of 1094

service[x]>sp rate-meter delete spid <spid>
Table 205: Assigning Rate Meter for Service Point and Service Point/CoS CLI Parameters
sp-id Number 1-32 for P2P and The Service Point ID.
MP services.
1-30 for MNG
services.
admin-state Variable enable Enables or disables rate metering on unicast
system.
cos Number 0–7 The CoS value to which you are assigning the rate
meter.
The following commands assign Rate Meter Profile 2 to service point 10 on

service 5:
service[5]> sp rate-meter add capability spid 10
service[5]>sp rate-meter edit spid 10 admin-state enable

profile-id 2
The following commands assign Rate Meter Profile 4 to service point 10 and CoS 6
on service 5:
service[5]> sp rate-meter add capability spid 10
service[5]>sp rate-meter edit spid 10 cos 6 admin-state enable

profile-id 4
18.2.7 Configuring the Line Compensation Value for a Rate Meter (Policer) (CLI)
A rate meter can measure CIR and EIR at Layer 1 or Layer 2 rates. Layer 1 capacity
is equal to Layer 2 capacity plus 20 additional bytes for each frame due to the
preamble and Inter Frame Gap (IFG). In most cases, the preamble and IFG equals
20 bytes, but other values are also possible. Line compensation defines the
number of bytes to be added to each frame for purposes of CIR and EIR
calculation. When Line Compensation is 20, the rate meter operates as Layer 1.
When Line Compensation is 0, the rate meter operates as Layer 2. This parameter
is very important to users that want to distinguish between Layer 1 and Layer 2
traffic.
To configure the rate meter (policer) line compensation value for an interface, go
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter-compensation-value set <value>
To display the rate meter (policer) line compensation value for an interface, go to
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter-compensation-value get
Page 825 of 1094

Table 206: Assigning Line Compensation Value for Rate Meter CLI Parameters
value Number 0 – 32 Policers attached to the interface use this

value to compensate for Layer 1 non-effective
traffic bytes.
The following command sets the line compensation value for policers attached to
GbE 1 to 20:
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter-compensation-value set 20
18.2.8 Displaying Rate Meter Statistics for an Interface (CLI)

For the rate meter (policer) at the logical interface level, you can display the
following statistics counters:
• Green Frames
• Green Bytes
• Yellow Frames
• Yellow Bytes
• Red Frames
• Red Bytes
Note: Rate meter (policer) counters are displayed in granularity of 64 bits.
The following commands display rate meter counters for the available frame
types and Ethertypes:
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter unicast show statistics clear-on-
read <clear-on-read> layer-1 <layer-1>
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter multicast show statistics clear-

on-read <clear-on-read> layer-1 <layer-1>
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter broadcast show statistics clear-

eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter ethertype1 show statistics clear-



Table 207: Displaying Rate Meter Statistics CLI Parameters

layer 1 Boolean yes • yes – Statistics are represented as

no Layer 1 statistics, including
preamble and IFG.
Page 826 of 1094


• no – Statistics are represented as
Layer 2 statistics.
The following commands display rate meter counters for GbE 1, for each of the
available frame types and Ethertypes. These commands clear the counters after
displaying them.
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter unicast show statistics clear-on-
read yes layer-1 no
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter multicast show statistics clear-

on-read yes layer-1 no
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter broadcast show statistics clear-

eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter ethertype1 show statistics clear-



18.3 Configuring Marking (CLI)

• Marking Overview (CLI)
• Configuring Marking Mode on a Service Point (CLI)
• Marking Table for C-VLAN UP Bits (CLI)
• Marking Table for S-VLAN UP Bits (CLI)
18.3.1 Marking Overview (CLI)

When enabled, IP-20’s marking mechanism modifies each frame’s 802.1p UP bit
and CFI/DEI bits according to the classifier decision. The CFI/DEI (color) field is
modified according to the classifier and policer decision. The color is first
determined by a classifier and may be later overwritten by a policer. Green color
is represented by a CFI/DEI value of 0, and Yellow color is represented by a
CFI/DEI value of 1. Marking is performed on egress frames that are VLAN-tagged.
The marking is performed according to global marking tables that describe the
802.1p UP bits and the CFI bits (for C-VLAN tags) or DEI bits (for S VLAN tags). The
marking mode attribute in the service point egress attributes determines whether
the frame is marked as Green or Yellow according to the calculated color.
Note: The calculated color is sent to the queue manager regardless of
whether the marking bit is set.
Regular marking is only performed when:
• The outer frame is S-VLAN, and S-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled
• The outer frame is C-VLAN, and C-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled
Page 827 of 1094

If marking and CoS preservation for the relevant outer VLAN are both disabled,
special marking is applied. Special marking means that marking is performed, but
only according to the values defined for Green frames in the 802.1Q and 802.1AD
marking tables.
When marking is performed, the C-VLAN or S-VLAN 802.1p UP bits are re-marked
according to the calculated CoS and Color.
18.3.2 Configuring Marking Mode on a Service Point (CLI)

To enable or disable marking mode on a service point, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp marking set spid <sp-id> mode <mode>
Table 208: Marking Mode on Service Point CLI Parameters

sp-id Number 1-32 for P2P and The Service Point ID.
MP services.
1-30 for MNG
services.
mode Variable enable Determines whether re-marking of the outer
disable VLAN (C-VLAN or S-VLAN) of tagged frames
that pass through the service point is
enabled.
• If mode is set to enable, and CoS
preservation for the relevant outer
VLAN is set to disable, the service
point re-marks the C-VLAN or S-
VLAN 802.1p UP bits of egress
frames according to the calculated
CoS and Color, and the user-
configurable 802.1Q and 802.1AD
marking tables.
• If mode is set to enable and CoS
VLAN is also set to enable, re-
marking is not performed.
• If mode is set to disable and CoS
VLAN is also set to disable, re-
marking is applied, but only
according to the values defined for
Green frames in the 802.1Q and
802.1AD marking tables.
For information about configuring CoS
Preservation, refer to CoS Preservation and
Modification on a Service Point (CLI).
The following command enables marking mode on Service Point 3 on Service 2:
Page 828 of 1094

service[2]>sp marking set spid 3 mode enable
The following command disables marking mode on Service Point 3 on Service 2:

service[2]>sp marking set spid 3 mode disable
18.3.3 Marking Table for C-VLAN UP Bits (CLI)

When marking is performed, the following table is used by the marker to decide
which CoS and Color to use as the egress CoS and Color bits for C-VLAN-tagged
frames.
Table 209: Marking Table for C-VLAN UP Bits

CoS Color 802.1q (Configurable) CFI Color (Configurable)
0 Green 0 0
0 Yellow 0 1
1 Green 1 0
1 Yellow 1 1
2 Green 2 0
2 Yellow 2 1
3 Green 3 0
3 Yellow 3 1
4 Green 4 0
4 Yellow 4 1
5 Green 5 0
5 Yellow 5 1
6 Green 6 0
6 Yellow 6 1
7 Green 7 0
7 Yellow 7 1
To modify the 802.1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI bit mapping table, enter the
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-marking-tbl set cos <cos>
color <color> 802.1p <802.1p> cfi <cfi>
To display the 802.1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI bit mapping table, enter the
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-marking-tbl show
Table 210: 802.1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI Bit Mapping Table CLI Parameters
cos Number 0–7 The CoS value to be mapped.

color Variable green The Color to be mapped.
Page 829 of 1094


yellow
802.1p Number 0–7 The UP bit value assigned to matching
frames.
cfi Number 0–1 The CFI bit value assigned to matching
frames.
The following command maps CoS 0, Green, to 802.1p UP bit 0, and CFI bit 0:
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-marking-tbl set cos 0 color
green 802.1p 0 cfi 0
18.3.4 Marking Table for S-VLAN UP Bits (CLI)

When marking is performed, the following table is used by the marker to decide
which CoS and Color to use as the egress CoS and Color bits for S-VLAN-tagged
frames.
Table 211: 802.1ad UP Marking Table (S-VLAN)

CoS Color 802.1ad UP (Configurable) DEI Color (Configurable)
0 Green 0 0
0 Yellow 0 1
1 Green 1 0
1 Yellow 1 1
2 Green 2 0
2 Yellow 2 1
3 Green 3 0
3 Yellow 3 1
4 Green 4 0
4 Yellow 4 1
5 Green 5 0
5 Yellow 5 1
6 Green 6 0
6 Yellow 6 1
7 Green 7 0
7 Yellow 7 1
To modify the 802.1ad CoS and Color to UP and DEI bit mapping table, enter the
root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-marking-tbl set cos <cos>
color <color> 802.1p <802.1p> dei <dei>
To display the 802.1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI bit mapping table, enter the
Page 830 of 1094

root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-marking-tbl show
Table 212: 802.1ad UP Marking Table (S-VLAN) CLI Parameters

cos Number 0–7 The CoS value to be mapped.

color Variable green The Color to be mapped.
yellow
802.1p Number 0–7 The UP bit value assigned to matching
frames.
dei Number 0–1 The DEI bit value assigned to matching
frames.
The following command marks CoS 5, Yellow, to 802.1p UP bit 5, and DEI bit 1:
root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-marking-tbl set cos 5 color
yellow 802.1p 5 dei 1
18.4 Configuring WRED (CLI)

• WRED Overview (CLI)
• Configuring WRED Profiles (CLI)
• Assigning a WRED Profile to a Queue (CLI)
18.4.1 WRED Overview (CLI)

Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) enables differentiation between
higher and lower priority traffic based on CoS. You can define up to 30 WRED
profiles. Each profile contains a green traffic curve and a yellow traffic curve.
These curves describe the probability of randomly dropping frames as a function
of queue occupancy.
The system also includes two pre-defined read-only profiles. These profiles are
assigned WRED profile IDs 31 and 32:
• Profile number 31 defines a tail-drop curve and is configured with the
following values:
100% Yellow traffic drop after 64kbytes occupancy.
100% Green traffic drop after 128kbytes occupancy.
Yellow maximum drop is 100%
Green maximum drop is 100%
• Profile number 32 defines a profile in which all will be dropped. It is for
internal use and should not be applied to traffic.
A WRED profile can be assigned to each queue. The WRED profile assigned to the
queue determines whether or not to drop incoming frames according to the
occupancy of the queue. As the queue occupancy grows, the probability of
dropping each incoming frame increases as well. As a consequence, statistically
more TCP flows will be restrained before traffic congestion occurs.
Page 831 of 1094

18.4.2 Configuring WRED Profiles (CLI)

To configure a WRED profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl add profile-id <profile-id>
green-min-threshold <green-min-threshold> green-max-threshold
<green-max-threshold> green-max-drop <green-max-drop> yellow-
min-threshold <yellow-min-threshold> yellow-max-threshold
<yellow-max-threshold> yellow-max-drop <yellow-max-drop>
To edit an existing WRED profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl edit profile-id <profile-
id> green-min-threshold <green-min-threshold> green-max-
threshold <green-max-threshold> green-max-drop <green-max-drop>
yellow-min-threshold <yellow-min-threshold> yellow-max-
threshold <yellow-max-threshold> yellow-max-drop <yellow-max-
drop>
To display a WRED profile, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl show profile-id <profile-
id>
To delete a WRED profile, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl delete profile-id <profile
id>
You cannot delete a WRED profile that is assigned to a queue. You must first
remove the WRED profile from the queue by replacing it with a different WRED
profile. You can then delete the WRED profile.
Note: Each queue always has a WRED profile assigned to it. By default,
WRED Profile 31 is assigned to every queue until a different profile is
assigned.
Table 213: WRED Profile CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1 - 30 A unique ID to identify the profile.

green-min-threshold Number 0 - 8192 The minimum throughput of green
frames for queues with this profile, in
Kbytes. When this value is reached, the
system begins dropping green frames
in the queue.
green-max-threshold Number 0 - 8192 The maximum throughput of green
Kbytes. When this value is reached, all
green frames in the queue are
dropped.
green-max-drop Number 1 - 100 The maximum percentage of dropped
green frames for queues with this
profile.
yellow-min-threshold Number 0 - 8192 The minimum throughput of yellow
Page 832 of 1094


Kbytes. When this value is reached, the
system begins dropping yellow frames
in the queue.
yellow-max-threshold Number 0 - 8192 The maximum throughput of yellow
Kbytes. After this value is reached, all
yellow frames in the queue are
dropped.
yellow-max-drop Number 1 - 100 The maximum percentage of dropped
yellow frames for queues with this
profile.
The following command adds a WRED profile.

root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl add profile-id 2 green-min-
threshold 8000 green-max-threshold 8000 green-max-drop 100
yellow-min-threshold 8000 yellow-max-threshold 8000 yellow-max-
drop 100
The new profile has the following parameters:

• profile-id – 2
• green-min-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
• green-max-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
• green-max-drop – 100%
• yellow-min-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
• yellow-max-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
• yellow-max-drop – 100%
The following command edits the WRED profile created by the previous
command:
root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl edit profile-id 2 green-
min-threshold 8000 green-max-threshold 8000 green-max-drop 100
yellow-min-threshold 4000 yellow-max-threshold 4000 yellow-max-
drop 100
The edited profile has the following parameters:

• green-min-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
• green-max-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
• green-max-drop – 100%
• yellow-min-threshold – 4000 Kbytes
• yellow-max-threshold –4000 Kbytes
• yellow-max-drop – 100%
Page 833 of 1094

18.4.3 Assigning a WRED Profile to a Queue (CLI)

To assign a WRED profile to a queue, go to interface view for the interface and
eth type eth [x/x]> wred set service-bundle-id <service-bundle-
id> cos <cos> profile-id <profile-id>
To display the WRED profile assigned to a queue, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]> wred show profile-id service-bundle-id
<service-bundle-id> cos <cos>
Table 214: Assigning WRED Profile to Queue CLI Parameters

service-bundle-id Number 1 Assigns the WRED profile to a Service

Bundle. Service Bundles are bundles of
queues, grouped together in order to
configure common egress
characteristics for specific services.
cos Number 0–7 Assigns the WRED profile to a queue in
the designated service bundle.
profile-id Number 1 – 32 A unique ID that identifies the profile.
The following command assigns WRED Profile 2 to the CoS 0 queue in Service
Bundle 1, on GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]> wred set service-bundle-id 1 cos 0 profile-
id 2
The following command displays the WRED profile assigned to the CoS 0 queue in
Service Bundle 1, on GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]> wred show profile-id service-bundle-id
1 cos 0
Page 834 of 1094

18.5 Configuring Shapers (CLI)

• Overview of Egress Shaping (CLI)
• Configuring Queue Shapers (CLI)
• Configuring Service Bundle Shapers (CLI)
• Configuring Egress Line Compensation for Shaping (CLI)
18.5.1 Overview of Egress Shaping (CLI)

Egress shaping determines the traffic profile for each queue. IP-20 performs
egress shaping on the following levels:
• Queue level – Single leaky bucket shaping
• Service Bundle level – Dual leaky bucket shaping
Note: Single leaky bucket shaping on the interface level is planned for future
release.
18.5.2 Configuring Queue Shapers (CLI)

You can configure up to 32 single leaky bucket queue shaper profiles. The CIR
value can be set to the following values:
• 16,000 – 32,000,000 bps – granularity of 16,000 bps
• 32,000,000 – 131,008,000 bps – granularity of 64,000 bps
Note: You can enter any value within the permitted range. Based on the
value you enter, the software automatically rounds off the setting
according to the granularity. If you enter a value below the lowest
granular value (except 0), the software adjusts the setting to the
minimum.
You can attach one of the configured queue shaper profiles to each priority
queue. If no profile is attached to the queue, no egress shaping is performed on
that queue.
• Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles (CLI)
• Attaching a Shaper Profile to a Queue (CLI)
Page 835 of 1094

18.5.2.1 Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles (CLI)

To configure a queue shaper profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl add profile-id
<profile-id> cir <cir> shaper-profile-name <shaper-profile-
name>
To edit the parameters of an existing queue shaper profile, enter the following
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl edit profile-id
<profile-id> cir <cir> shaper-profile-name <shaper-profile-
name> burst-type short
Note: The burst-type parameter is reserved for future use. However, you
must enter this parameter in order for the command to execute.
To display the parameters of a queue shaper profile, enter the following
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl show profile-id
<profile-id>
To delete a queue shaper profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl delete profile-id
<profile id>
You cannot delete a queue shaper profile if it is attached to a queue. You must
first remove the profile from the queue. You can then delete the profile.
Table 215: Queue Shaper Profiles CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1 - 32 A unique ID that identifies the

profile.
cir Number 16000 – 131008000 The Committed Information
Rate (CIR) assigned to the
profile (in bps).
shaper-profile-name Text String Up to 20 characters. A description of the profile.
The following command creates Queue Shaper 1, named “p1”, with a CIR value of
16000 bps:
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl add profile-id 1
cir 16000 shaper-profile-name p1
The following command changes the CIR value of the profile created above from
16000 to 32000, and changes the profile name to p3:
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl edit profile-id 1
cir 32000 shaper-profile-name p3 burst-type short
Page 836 of 1094

18.5.2.2 Attaching a Shaper Profile to a Queue (CLI)

You can attach one of the configured queue shaper profiles to each priority
queue. If no profile is attached to the queue, no egress shaping is performed on
that queue. Shapers are attached to queues based on the logical interface and
service bundle to which the queue belongs, and the queue’s CoS value.
To attach a queue shaper profile to a queue, go to interface view for the interface
eth type eth [x/x]> queue-shaper add capability service-bundle-
id <service-bundle-id> cos <cos> admin-state <admin-state>
To change the queue shaper profile attached to a queue, go to interface view for
eth type eth [x/x]> queue-shaper edit service-bundle-id
<service-bundle-id> cos <cos> admin-state <admin-state>
To display the queue shaper profile attached to a queue, go to interface view for
eth type eth [x/x]> queue-shaper show configuration service-
bundle-id <service-bundle-id> cos <cos>
To remove a queue shaper profile from a queue, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]> queue-shaper delete service-bundle-id
<service-bundle-id> cos <cos>
Table 216: Attaching Shaper Profile to Queue CLI Parameters

service-bundle-id Number 1 The service bundle to which you are

attaching the queue shaper profile.
cos Number 0–7 The CoS queue ID of the queue to which
you want to assign the shaper. Queues are
numbered according to CoS value.
admin-state Variable enable Select enable to enable egress queue
disable shaping on the queue, or disable to
disable egress queue shaping on the
queue. If you set shaping to disable, the
shaper profile remains attached to the
queue, but does not affect traffic.
profile-id Number 1 – 32 Enter the ID of one of the configured
queue shaper profiles.
The following command adds Queue Shaper Profile 5 to queues with CoS 0, on
Service Bundle 1, on GbE 1, and enables shaping on these queues:
eth type eth [1/1]> queue-shaper add capability service-bundle-
id 1 cos 0 admin-state enable profile-id 5
Page 837 of 1094

The following command changes the Queue Shaper Profile assigned in the
previous command to Queue Shaper Profile 2:
eth type eth [1/1]> queue-shaper edit service-bundle-id 1 cos 0
admin-state enable profile-id 2
18.5.3 Configuring Service Bundle Shapers (CLI)

You can configure up to 256 dual leaky bucket service bundle shaper profiles. The
profiles can be configured as follows:
Valid CIR values are:
• 0 – 32,000,000 bps, with granularity of 16,000 bps
• 32,000,000 – 1,000,000,000 bps, with granularity of 64,000 bps
Valid PIR values are:
• 16,000 – 32,000,000 bps, with granularity of 16,000 bps
• 32,000,000 – 1,000,000,000 bps, with granularity of 64,000 bps
Note: You can enter any value within the permitted range. Based on the
value you enter, the software automatically rounds off the setting
according to the granularity. If you enter a value below the lowest
granular value (except 0), the software adjusts the setting to the
minimum.
You can attach one of the configured service bundle shaper profiles to each
service bundle. If no profile is attached to the service bundle, no egress shaping is
performed on that service bundle.
• Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles (CLI)
• Attaching a Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle (CLI)
Page 838 of 1094

18.5.3.1 Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles (CLI)

To configure a service bundle shaper profile, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl add
profile-id <profile-id> cir <cir> pir <pir> shaper-profile-name
<shaper-profile-name>
To edit the parameters of an existing service bundle shaper profile, enter the
root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl edit
profile-id <profile-id> cir <cir> pir <pir> shaper-profile-name
<shaper-profile-name>
To display the parameters of a service bundle shaper profile, enter the following
root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl show
To display the parameters of all configured service bundle shaper profiles, enter
root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl show
profile-id all
To delete a service bundle shaper profile, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl delete
You cannot delete a service bundle shaper profile if it is attached to a service

bundle. You must first remove the profile from the service bundle. You can then
delete the profile.
Table 217: Service Bundle Shaper Profiles CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1 - 256 A unique ID that identifies the profile.

cir Number 1 - 1000000000 The Committed Information Rate (CIR)
assigned to the profile (in bps).
pir Number 16000 - The Peak Information Rate (PIR)
1000000000 assigned to the profile (in bps).
shaper-profile-name Text String Up to 20 A description of the profile.
characters.
The following command creates Service Bundle Shaper 1, named “p1”, with a CIR
value of 100000000 bps and a PIR value of 200000000 bps:
root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl add
profile-id 1 cir 100000000 pir 200000000 shaper-profile-name p1
The following command changes the CIR value in the Service Bundle Shaper
created above from 100000000 bps to 110000000 bps:
Page 839 of 1094

root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl edit

profile-id 1 cir 110000000 pir 200000000 shaper-profile-name p1
Page 840 of 1094

18.5.3.2 Attaching a Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle (CLI)

You can attach one of the configured service bundle shaper profiles to each
service bundle. If no profile is attached to the service bundle, no egress shaping is
performed on that service bundle.
To attach a service bundle shaper profile to a service bundle, go to interface view
for the service bundle and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]> service-bundle-shaper add capability
service-bundle-id <service-bundle-id> admin-state <admin-state>
To change the service bundle shaper profile attached to a service bundle, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> service-bundle-shaper edit service-bundle-
id <service-bundle-id> admin-state <admin-state> profile-id
<profile-id>
To display the service bundle shaper profile attached to a service bundle, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> service-bundle-shaper show configuration
service-bundle-id <service-bundle-id>
To remove a service bundle shaper profile from a service bundle, go to interface

eth type eth [x/x]> service-bundle-shaper delete service-
bundle-id <service-bundle-id>
Table 218: Attaching Shaper Profile to Service Bundle CLI Parameters

service-bundle-id Number 1 The service bundle to which you are

attaching the queue shaper profile.
admin-state Variable enable Select enable to enable egress shaping
disable on the service bundle, or disable to
disable egress shaping on the service
bundle.
profile-id Number 1 – 256 Enter the ID of one of the configured
service bundle shaper profiles.
The following command adds Service Bundle Shaper Profile 5 to Service Bundle 1,
on GbE 1, and enables shaping on this service bundle:
eth type eth [1/1]> service-bundle-shaper add capability
service-bundle-id 1 admin-state enable profile-id 5
The following command changes the Service Bundle Shaper Profile assigned in the
previous command to Service Bundle 1, from 5 to 4:
eth type eth [1/1]> service-bundle-shaper edit service-bundle-
id 1 admin-state enable profile-id 4
Page 841 of 1094

18.5.4 Configuring Egress Line Compensation for Shaping (CLI)

You can configure a line compensation value for all the shapers under a specific
logical interface. This value is used to compensate for Layer 1 non-effective traffic
bytes on egress.
To set the egress line compensation value, go to interface view for the interface
eth type eth [x/x]>shaping-compensation-value set <value>
To display the egress line compensation value, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>shaping-compensation-value get
Table 219: Egress Line Compensation for Shaping CLI Parameters

value Number 0 – 26 Shapers attached to the interface use

(even numbers only) this value to compensate for Layer 1
non-effective traffic bytes on egress.
The following command sets the egress line compensation value to 0 on GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]>shaping-compensation-value set 0
18.6 Configuring Scheduling (CLI)

• Overview of Egress Scheduling (CLI)
• Configuring Queue Priority (CLI)
• Configuring Interface Priority Profiles (CLI)
• Attaching a Priority Profile to an Interface (CLI)
• Configuring Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) (CLI)
18.6.1 Overview of Egress Scheduling (CLI)

Egress scheduling is responsible for transmission from the priority queues. IP-20
uses a unique algorithm with a hierarchical scheduling model over the three levels
of the egress path that enables compliance with SLA requirements.
The scheduler scans all the queues over all the service bundles, per interface, and
determines which queue is ready to transmit. If more than one queue is ready to
transmit, the scheduler determines which queue transmits first based on:
• Queue Priority – A queue with higher priority is served before lower-priority
queues.
• Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) – If two or more queues have the same priority
and are ready to transmit, the scheduler transmits frames from the queues
based on a WFQ algorithm that determines the ratio of frames per queue
based on a predefined weight assigned to each queue.
Page 842 of 1094

18.6.2 Configuring Queue Priority (CLI)

A priority profile defines the exact order for serving the eight priority queues in a
single service bundle. When you attach a priority profile to an interface, all the
service bundles under the interface inherit the profile.
The priority mechanism distinguishes between two states of the service bundle:
• Green State – Committed state
• Yellow State – Best effort state
Green State refers to any time when the service bundle rate is below the user-
defined CIR. Yellow State refers to any time when the service bundle is above the
user-defined CIR but below the PIR.
You can define up to four Green priority profiles, from 4 (highest) to 1 (lowest). An
additional four Yellow priority profiles are defined automatically and cannot be
changed or edited.
The following table provides a sample of an interface priority profile. This profile is
also used as the default interface priority profile.
Table 220: Interface Priority Profile Example

Profile ID (1-9)
CoS Green Yellow Description
Priority (user Priority
defined) (read only)
0 1 1 Best Effort
1 2 1 Data Service 4
5 3 1 Real Time 2 (Video with large buffer)
6 3 1 Real Time 1 (Video with small buffer)
7 4 4 Management (Sync, PDUs, etc.)
When the service bundle state is Green (committed state), the service bundle
priorities are as defined in the Green Priority column. When the service bundle
state is Yellow (best effort state), the service bundle priorities are system-defined
priorities shown in the Yellow Priority column.
Note: CoS 7 is always marked with the highest priority and cannot be
changed or edited, no matter what the service bundle state is, since it
is assumed that only high priority traffic will be tunneled via CoS 7.
The system supports up to nine interface priority profiles. Profiles 1 to 8 are
defined by the user, while profile 9 is the pre-defined read-only default interface
priority profile.
18.6.3 Configuring Interface Priority Profiles (CLI)

To define an interface priority profile, enter the following command in root view:
Page 843 of 1094

root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl add profile-id

<profile-id> cos0-priority <cos0-priority> description
<description> cos1-priority <cos1-priority> description
<description>
To edit an existing interface priority profile, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl edit profile-id
<profile-id> cos0-priority <cos0-priority> description
<description>
To display the parameters of an interface priority profile, enter the following

root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl show profile-id
<profile-id>
To delete an interface priority profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl delete profile-id
<profile-id>
You can only delete an interface priority profile if the profile is not attached to any
interface.
Table 221: Interface Priority Profile CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1–8 A unique ID to identify the profile.

cos0-priority Number 1–4 The Green priority for the CoS 0 queue,
from 4 (highest) to 1 (lowest). This
priority is applied to Green frames with
CoS 0 egressing the service bundle to
description Text String Up to 20 A description of the priority level.
characters.
Page 844 of 1094


The following command configures a priority profile with Profile ID 1:

root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl add profile-id 1
cos0-priority 1 description c0_p1 cos1-priority 1 description
c1_p1 cos2-priority 1 description c2_p1 cos3-priority 2
description c3_p2 cos4-priority 2 description c4_p2 cos5-
priority 3 description c5_p3 cos6-priority 4 description c6_p4
cos7-priority 4 description c7_p4
This profile has the parameters listed in the following table.
Table 222: Interface Priority Sample Profile Parameters

CoS Green Priority (user defined) Yellow Priority (read only) Description
0 1 1 c0_p1
1 1 1 c1_p1
2 1 1 c2_p1
Page 845 of 1094

CoS Green Priority (user defined) Yellow Priority (read only) Description
3 2 1 c3_p2
4 2 1 c4_p2
5 3 1 c5_p3
6 4 1 c6_p4
7 4 4 c7_p4
The following command edits the profile you created in the previous command so
that CoS 6 queues have a Green priority of 3 instead of 4, and a description of
“c6_p3”.
root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl edit profile-id 1
cos0-priority 1 description c0_p1 cos1-priority 1 description
c1_p1 cos2-priority 1 description c2_p1 cos3-priority 2
description c3_p2 cos4-priority 2 description c4_p2 cos5-
priority 3 description c5_p3 cos6-priority 3 description c6_p3
cos7-priority 4 description c7_p4
18.6.4 Attaching a Priority Profile to an Interface (CLI)

To attach a priority profile to an interface, go to interface view for the interface
eth type eth [x/x]> priority set profile-id <profile-id>
To display which priority profile is attached to an interface, go to interface view

eth type eth [x/x]> port-priority show profile-id
Table 223: Attaching Priority Profile to Interface CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1–9 Enter the ID of one of the configured

logical interface priority profiles.
The following command attaches Interface Priority Profile 3 to GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]> priority set profile-id 3
The following is a sample output from the port-priority show profile-id

command:
eth type eth [1/1]>port-priority show profile-id
Profile ID: 9
CoS Priority Priority Description

(When queue is green) (When queue is yellow)
0 1 1 best effort
1 2 1 data service
2 2 1 data service
3 2 1 data service
4 2 1 data service
Page 846 of 1094

5 3 1 real time
6 3 1 real time
7 4 4 management
eth type eth [1/1]>
18.6.5 Configuring Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) (CLI)

• Overview of WFQ (CLI)
• Configuring a WFQ Profile (CLI)
• Attaching a WFQ Profile to an Interface (CLI)
Page 847 of 1094

18.6.5.1 Overview of WFQ (CLI)

The scheduler serves the queues based on their priority, but when two or more
queues have data to transmit and their priority is the same, the scheduler uses
Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) to determine the priorities within each priority.
WFQ defines the transmission ratio, in bytes, between the queues. All the service
bundles under the interface inherit the WFQ profile attached to the interface.
The system supports up to six WFQ interface profiles. Profile ID 1 is a pre-defined
read-only profile, and is used as the default profile. Profiles 2 to 6 are user-
defined profiles.
The following table provides an example of a WFQ profile.
Table 224: WFQ Profile Example

Profile ID (1-7)
CoS Queue Weight Queue Weight
(Green) (Yellow – not visible to users, and cannot be edited)
0 20 20
1 20 20
2
3 20 20
4
5 20 20
6
7 20 20
You can attach one of the configured interface WFQ profiles to each interface. By
default, the interface is assigned Profile ID 1, the pre-defined system profile.
Page 848 of 1094

18.6.5.2 Configuring a WFQ Profile (CLI)

To define a WFQ profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl add profile-id
<profile.id> cos0-weight <cos0-weight> cos1-weight <cos1-
weight> cos2-weight <cos2-weight> cos3-weight <cos3-weight>
cos4-weight <cos4-weight> cos5-weight <cos5-weight> cos6-weight
<cos6-weight> cos7-weight <cos7-weight>
To edit an existing WFQ profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl edit profile-id
<profile.id> cos0-weight <cos0-weight> cos1-weight <cos1-
weight> cos2-weight <cos2-weight> cos3-weight <cos3-weight>
cos4-weight <cos4-weight> cos5-weight <cos5-weight> cos6-weight
<cos6-weight> cos7-weight <cos7-weight>
To display the parameters of a WFQ profile, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl show profile-id
<profile-id>
To delete a WFQ profile, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl delete profile-id
<profile-id>
You can only delete a WFQ profile if the profile is not attached to any interface.
Table 225: WFQ Profile CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 2–6 A unique ID to identify the profile.

cos0-weight Number 1 - 20 The relative weight for the CoS 0 queue.
cos1- weight Number 1 - 20 The relative weight for the CoS 1 queue.
The following command configures a WFQ profile with Profile ID 2:

root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl add profile-id 2
cos0-weight 15 cos1-weight 15 cos2-weight 15 cos3-weight 15
This profile has the parameters listed in the following table. Note that the yellow
queue weight is constant and cannot be changed. This means that all best effort
traffic (yellow) will always have the same weight, regardless of CoS.
Page 849 of 1094

Table 226: WFQ Sample Profile Parameters

CoS Queue Weight (Green) Queue Weight (Yellow – not visible to users, and
cannot be edited)
0 15 20
1 20 20
2 20 20
3 20 20
4 20 20
5 20 20
6 20 20
7 20 20
The following command edits the profile you created in the previous command so
that CoS 6 queues have a weight of 20 instead of 15:
root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl edit profile-id 2
Page 850 of 1094

18.6.5.3 Attaching a WFQ Profile to an Interface (CLI)

To attach a WFQ profile to an interface, go to interface view for the interface and
eth type eth [x/x]> port-wfq set profile-id <profile-id>
To display which WFQ profile is attached to an interface, go to interface view for

eth type eth [x/x]> port-wfq show profile-id
Table 227: Attaching WFQ Profile to Interface CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1–6 Enter the ID of one of the configured WFQ

profiles.
The following command assigns WFQ Profile 3 to GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]> port-wfq set profile-id 3
The following is a sample display for the port-wfq show profile-id command:
eth type eth [1/1]>port-wfq show profile-id
Profile ID: 1
CoS Queue Weight

(Green)
0 20
1 20
2 20
3 20
4 20
5 20
6 20
7 20
eth type eth [1/1]>
Page 851 of 1094

18.7 Displaying Egress PMs and Statistics (CLI)

IP-20 collects egress PMs and statistics at the queue level and the service bundle
level.
18.7.1 Displaying Queue-Level Statistics (CLI)

IP-20 supports the following counters per queue at the queue level:
• Transmitted Green Packets (64 bits counter)
• Transmitted Green Bytes (64 bits counter)
• Transmitted Green Bits per Second (32 bits counter)
• Dropped Green Packets (64 bits counter)
• Dropped Green Bytes (64 bits counter)
• Transmitted Yellow Packets (64 bits counter)
• Transmitted Yellow Bytes (64 bits counter)
• Transmitted Yellow Bits per Second (32 bits counter)
• Dropped Yellow Packets (64 bits counter)
• Dropped Yellow Bytes (64 bits counter)
To display queue-level PMs, enter interface view for the interface and enter the
following command:
eth type eth [x/x]> tm-queue show statistics service-bundle-id
<service-bundle-id> cos <cos> clear-on-read <clear-on-read>
layer-1 <layer-1>
To clear queue-level PMs for a specific service bundle, enter interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]> tm-queue clear statistics service-bundle-id
<service-bundle-id>
Table 228: Egress Queue Level PMs CLI Parameters

service-bundle-id Number 1 The service bundle for which you want

to display PMs.
cos Number 0-7 The queue for which you want to
display PMs.
clear-on-read Boolean yes If you enter yes, the statistics are
no cleared once you display them.
layer-1 Boolean yes • yes – Statistics are represented

no as Layer 1 statistics, including
preamble and IFG.
• no – Statistics are represented
as Layer 2 statistics.
Page 852 of 1094

The following command displays PMs for the CoS 0 queue in Service Bundle 1, on
GbE 2. The PMs are cleared after they are displayed:
eth type eth [1/2]> tm-queue show statistics service-bundle-id
1 cos 0 clear-on-read yes layer-1 yes
The following command clears PMs for all queues in Service Bundle 1, on GbE 2:
eth type eth [1/2]> tm-queue clear statistics service-bundle-id 1
18.7.2 Configuring and Displaying Queue-Level PMs (CLI)

IP-20 devices support advanced traffic PMs per CoS queue and service bundle. For
each logical interface, you can configure thresholds for Green and Yellow traffic
per queue. You can then display the following PMs for 15-minute and 24-hour
intervals, per queue and color:
• Maximum bytes passed per second
• Minimum bytes passed per second
• Average bytes passed per second
• Maximum bytes dropped per second
• Minimum bytes dropped per second
• Average bytes dropped per second
• Maximum packets passed per second
• Minimum packets passed per second
• Average packets passed per second
• Maximum packets dropped per second
• Minimum packets dropped per second
• Average packets dropped per second
• Seconds bytes per second were over the configured threshold per interval
These PMs are available for any type of logical interface, including groups. To
activate collection of these PMs, the user must add a PM collection rule on a
logical interface and service bundle and set the relevant thresholds per CoS and
Color. When the PM is configured on a group, queue traffic PMs are recorded for
the group and not for the individual interfaces that belong to the group.
One collection rule is available per interface.
PMs for queue traffic are saved for 30 days, after which they are removed from
the database. It is important to note that they are not persistent, which means
they are not saved in the event of unit reset.
To configure and display queue-level PMs, you must first enter interface view. See
Entering Interface View (CLI).
To display whether any service bundles are configured on an interface, enter the
following command in interface view:
eth type eth [x/x]> eth type eth [1/2]>pm tm-queue show
configuration all
Page 853 of 1094

If no service bundles have been configured, the following output is displayed:

eth type eth [x/x]>pm tm-queue show configuration all
Num entries: 0
If a service bundle has been configured and enabled, the following output is
displayed:
Service bundle: 1 Admin: enable
Num entries: 1
If a service bundle has been configured but it’s Admin status is disabled, the
following output is displayed:
Service bundle: 1 Admin: disable
Num entries: 1
To configure a service bundle, enter the following command in interface view:

eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue create service-bundle-id <1-6>
admin-state <enable|disable>
To change the Admin state of a service bundle, enter the following command in
interface view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue set service-bundle-id <1-6> admin-
state <enable|disable>
To remove a service bundle, enter the following command in interface view:

eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue remove service-bundle-id <1-6>
For example:
eth type eth [1/1]>pm tm-queue remove service-bundle-id 1
WARNING: All PM history for that service bundle will be deleted.
Are you sure? (yes/no):yes
eth type eth [1/1]>
To display the threshold settings for a service bundle, enter the following
command in interface view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue show configuration service-bundle-id
<1-6>
Page 854 of 1094

For example:
eth type eth [1/1]>pm tm-queue show configuration service-
bundle-id 1
Admin: enable
cos0 green bytes passed threshold: 675000 bytes
cos0 yellow bytes passed threshold: 675000 bytes
To set thresholds for green bytes, enter the following command in interface view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue set service-bundle-id <1-6> cos <0-7>
green-bytes-passed-threshold <0-4294967295>
To set thresholds for yellow bytes, enter the following command in interface view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue set service-bundle-id <1-6> cos <0-7>
yellow-bytes-passed-threshold <0-4294967295>
To display PMs for green bytes passed, enter the following command in interface
view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue show counter green_bytes_passed
service-bundle-id 1 cos <0-7> interval <15min|24hr>
For example:
To display PMs for green packets passed, enter the following command in
interface view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue show counter green_packets_passed
Page 855 of 1094

For example:
To display PMs for green bytes dropped, enter the following command in
interface view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue show counter green_bytes_dropped
For example:
To display PMs for green packets dropped, enter the following command in
interface view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue show counter green_packets_dropped
For example:
To display PMs for yellow bytes passed, enter the following command in interface
view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue show counter yellow_bytes_passed
Page 856 of 1094

For example:
To display PMs for yellow packets passed, enter the following command in
interface view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue show counter yellow_packets_passed
For example:
To display PMs for yellow bytes dropped, enter the following command in
interface view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue show counter yellow_bytes_dropped
For example:
To display PMs for yellow packets dropped, enter the following command in
interface view:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm tm-queue show counter yellow_packets_dropped
Page 857 of 1094

For example:
The integrity column indicates whether the PM is valid:

• 1 indicates an invalid entry. This can occur for a number of reasons, including
but not limited to a disconnected cable, a missing SFP module, muting of a
radio interface, and an operational status of Down.
18.7.3 Displaying Service Bundle-Level Statistics (CLI)

IP-20 supports the following counters per service bundle at the service bundle
level:
• Transmitted Green Packets (64 bits counter)
• Transmitted Green Bytes (64 bits counter)
• Transmitted Green Bits per Second (32 bits counter)
• Dropped Green Packets (64 bits counter)
• Dropped Green Bytes (64 bits counter)
• Transmitted Yellow Packets (64 bits counter)
• Transmitted Yellow Bytes (64 bits counter)
• Transmitted Yellow Bits per Second (32 bits counter)
• Dropped Yellow Packets (64 bits counter)
• Dropped Yellow Bytes (64 bits counter)
To display service bundle-level PMs, enter interface view for the interface and
eth type eth [x/x]> tm-service-bundle show statistics service-
bundle-id <service-bundle-id> clear-on-read <clear-on-read>
layer-1 <layer-1>
To clear service bundle-level PMs for all service bundles on an interface, enter
eth type eth [x/x]> tm-service-bundle clear statistics
Table 229: Egress Service Bundle Level PMs CLI Parameters

service-bundle-id Number 1 The service bundle for which you

want to display PMs.
clear-on-read Boolean yes If you enter yes, the statistics are
no cleared once you display them.
Page 858 of 1094


layer-1 Boolean yes • yes – Statistics are
no represented as Layer 1
statistics, including preamble
and IFG.
• no – Statistics are
represented as Layer 2
statistics.
The following command displays service bundle PMs for Service Bundle 1, on GbE
1. The PMs are cleared after they are displayed.
eth type eth [1/1]> tm-service-bundle show statistics service-
bundle-id 1 clear-on-read yes layer-1 yes
Page 859 of 1094

19. Ethernet Protocols (CLI)

• Configuring G.8032 (CLI)
• Configuring MSTP (CLI)
• Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN) (CLI)
• Configuring Ethernet Bandwidth Notification (ETH-BN) (CLI)
• Configuring LLDP (CLI)
Related Topics:
• Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM) (CLI)
19.1 Configuring G.8032 (CLI)

• Configuring the Destination MAC Address (CLI)
• Configuring ERPIs (CLI)
• Configuring the RPL Owner (CLI)
• Configuring Timers (CLI)
• Initiating a Manual or Forced Switch and Clearing the Switch or Initiating
Reversion (CLI)
• Blocking or Unblocking R-APS Messages on a Service Point (CLI)
• Displaying the ERPI Attributes (CLI)
Note: P2P services are not affected by G.8032, and continue to traverse
ports that are blocked by G.8032.
G.8032 cannot be configured on management ports, including

19.1.1 Configuring the Destination MAC Address (CLI)

To set the destination MAC address for PDUs generated by the node, enter the
root> ethernet generalcfg g8032-dest-mac-address set MAC <MAC
address>
To display the destination MAC address, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet generalcfg g8032-dest-mac-address show
To display the destination MAC address and the node ID, enter the following
root> ethernet g8032 show-node-attributes
The node ID is the base MAC address for the node.
Page 860 of 1094

Table 230: G.8032 Destination MAC Address CLI Parameters

MAC Six groups of two 01:19:a7:00:00:x where x can The destination MAC address
address hexadecimal digits be any number between 0 for PDUs generated by the
and 16. node.
The following command sets the destination MAC address as 01:19:a7:00:00:02:

root> ethernet generalcfg g8032-dest-mac-address set MAC
01:19:a7:00:00:02
19.1.2 Configuring ERPIs (CLI)

You can configure up to 16 Ethernet Ring Protection instances (ERPIs). Each ERPI is
associated with an Ethernet service defined in the system. An ERPI can be:
• Ring: A Ring is an Ethernet ring that is connected on two ports (East and West
service points) to an interconnection node.
• Sub-Ring: A Sub-Ring is an Ethernet ring which is connected to another ring or
network through the use of interconnection nodes (East and West service
points). On their own, the Rub-Ring links do not form a closed physical loop. A
closed loop may be formed by the sub-ring links and the link between
interconnection nodes that is controlled by other ring or network.
• Ring with Sub-Ring: The ERPI includes both a ring, with East and West service
points, and a connection to a sub-ring using a Sub-Ring service point.
Note: Service points on the IP-20 side of the link must have a single,
determinate VLAN. This means the service point type must be dot1q,
s-tag, or QinQ. On the customer side, any service point type can be
used.
To add a Ring ERPI, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet g8032 create-erpi erp-type ring erpi-id <erpi-
id> erpi-service-id <erpi-service-id> west-sp <west-sp> east-sp
<east-sp> level <level> version <version>
To add a Sub-Ring ERPI, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet g8032 create-erpi erp-type sub-ring erpi-id
<erpi-id> erpi-service-id <erpi-service-id> west-sp <west-sp>
east-sp <east-sp> level <level> version <version>
To add a Ring with Sub-Ring ERPI, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet g8032 create-erpi erp-type ring-with-sub-ring
erpi-id <erpi-id> erpi-service-id <erpi-service-id> west-sp
<west-sp> east-sp <east-sp> sub-ring-sp <sub-ring-sp> level
<level> version <version>
To assign a name to an ERPI, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet g8032 set-erpi-name erpi-id <erpi-id> erpi-name
<erpi-name>
To delete an ERPI, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet g8032 delete-erpi erpi-id 1
Page 861 of 1094

Table 231: G.8032 ERPI Configuration CLI Parameters

Parameter Input Permitted Values Description
Type
erpi-id Number 1-64 A unique ID that identifies the ERPI.

erpi- Number 1-4095 The ID of the Ethernet service to which the ERPI belongs.
service-id
west-sp Number 1-32 The first endpoint for the ERPI. This can be any service
point that has been configured for the service.
east-sp Number 1-32 The second endpoint for the ERPI. This can be any service
point that has been configured for the service.
sub-ring-sp Number 1-32 The service point that connects the Ring with the Sub-
Ring. This can be any service point that has been
configured for the service.
level Number 0-7 Optional. The Maintenance Entity Group (MEG) level used
for R-APS messages sent in the ERPI.
version Number 1-2 Optional. The ERPI (G.8032) protocol version currently
being used in the unit.
erpi-name Text A descriptive name for the ERPI.
The following commands create a Ring ERPI with ID 1, and name the ERPI
"service_x". This ERPI is associated with Ethernet Service 1. The end points of the
ERPI are Service Point 1 and Service Point 2. The ERPI is configured with MEG
level 2:
root> ethernet g8032 create-erpi erp-type ring erpi-id 1 erpi-
service-id 1 west-sp 1 east-sp 2 level 2
root> ethernet g8032 set-erpi-name erpi-id 1 erpi-name
service_x
The following commands create a Sub-Ring ERPI with ID 10, and name the ERPI
"Sub_ring". This ERPI is associated with Ethernet Service 20. The end points of the
ERPI are Service Point 1 and Service Point 2. The ERPI is configured with MEG
level 4:
root> ethernet g8032 create-erpi erp-type sub-ring erpi-id 10
erpi-service-id 20 west-sp 1 east-sp 2 level 4
root> ethernet g8032 set-erpi-name erpi-id 1 erpi-name Sub_ring
The following commands create a Ring with Sub-Ring ERPI with ID 20, and name
the ERPI "RSRi". This ERPI is associated with Ethernet Service 30. The end points of
the ERPI are Service Point 1 and Service Point 2, and the point of connection
between the Ring and the Sub-Ring is Service Point 3. The ERPI is configured with
MEG level 5:
root> ethernet g8032 create-erpi erp-type ring-with-sub-ring
erpi-id 20 erpi-service-id 30 west-sp 1 east-sp 2 sub-ring-sp 3
level 5
root> ethernet g8032 set-erpi-name erpi-id 1 erpi-name RSRi
The following command deletes ERPI 1:

root> ethernet g8032 delete-erpi erpi-id 1
Page 862 of 1094

19.1.3 Configuring the RPL Owner (CLI)

The RPL Owner Node is a node in the ERPI that is responsible for blocking traffic at
one end of the ERPI. You can select one RPL per ERPI.
To set the RPL Owner Node, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet g8032 set-rpl-owner erpi-id <erpi-id> SP <SP>
To remove the RPL Owner Node, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet g8032 remove-rpl-owner erpi-id <erpi-id>
Table 232: G.8032 RPL Owner CLI Parameters

erpi-id Number 1-64 The ID of the ERPI for which you want to set
or delete the RPL owner.
SP Number or east Specifies the service point you want to
Variable west designate as the RPL owner.
sub-ring
The following command sets the East service point as the RPL owner for ERPI 1:
root> ethernet g8032 set-rpl-owner erpi-id 1 SP east
The following command sets the Sub-Ring service point as the RPL owner for
ERPI 20:
root> ethernet g8032 set-rpl-owner erpi-id 20 SP sub-ring
The following command removes the RPL owner for ERPI 1:

root> ethernet g8032 remove-rpl-owner erpi-id 1
19.1.4 Configuring Timers (CLI)

You can configure timers per ERPI to control the ERPI's switching and convergence
parameters. The following timers are available:
• Wait to Restore (WTR) Timer – Defines a minimum time the system waits
after signal failure is recovered before reverting to idle state, when the RPL
can again be blocked.
• Guard Time – The guard time is the minimum time the system waits after
recovery from a signal failure before accepting new R-APS messages. The
Guard Time should be greater than the maximum expected forwarding delay
for which one R-APS message circles around the ring.
Note: The Guard Time is used to prevent Ethernet ring nodes from acting
upon outdated R-APS messages and prevents the possibility of forming
a closed loop.
• Hold-Off Time – Determines the time period from failure detection to
response. It is used to coordinate between recovery mechanisms (which
mechanism takes place first).
To configure the WTR timer, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet g8032 set-wtr erpi-id <erpi-id> wtr <wtr>
Page 863 of 1094

To configure the guard time, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet g8032 set-guard-time erpi-id <erpi-id> guard-
time <guard-time>
To configure the hold-off, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet g8032 set-holdoff-time erpi-id <erpi-id>
holdoff-time <holdoff-time>
Table 233: G.8032 Timer Configuration CLI Parameters

Parameter Input Permitted Description
Type Values
erpi-id Number 1-64 The ID of the ERPI for which you want to set a timer.
wtr Number 1-12 The minimum time (in minutes) the system waits
after signal failure is recovered before reverting to
idle state.
guard- Number 10-2000, in The minimum time (in msec) the system waits after
time multiples of 10 recovery from a signal failure before accepting new
R-APS messages.
holdoff- Number 0-10000, in The minimum time (in msec) the system waits before
time multiples of 100 reacting to a signal failure.
The following command sets the WTR timer for ERPI 1 to 2 minutes:
root> ethernet g8032 set-wtr erpi-id 1 wtr 2
The following command sets the guard time for ERPI 1 to 20 msecs:
root> ethernet g8032 set-guard-time erpi-id 1 guard-time 20
The following command sets the hold-off time for ERPI 1 to 1000 msecs:
root> ethernet g8032 set-holdoff-time erpi-id 1 holdoff-time
1000
19.1.5 Initiating a Manual or Forced Switch and Clearing the Switch or Initiating
Reversion (CLI)
To initiate a forced switch, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet g8032 fs-erpi erpi-id <erpi-id> SP <SP>
To initiate a manual switch, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet g8032 ms-erpi erpi-id <erpi-id> SP <SP>
You can use a "clear" command to clear a forced or manual switch. You can also
use a "clear" command to trigger convergence prior to the expiration of the
relevant timer. To issue a "clear" command, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet g8032 clear-erpi erpi-id <erpi-id> SP <SP>
Page 864 of 1094

Table 234: G.8032 Switching and Reversion CLI Parameters

Values
erpi-id Number 1-64 The ID of the ERPI on which you want to

perform or clear the switch or initiate
convergence.
SP Number or east Specifies the service point on which to clear
Variable west the manual or forced switch or to implement
sub-ring convergence.
The following command initiates a forced switch in the East service point of
ERPI 1:
root> ethernet g8032 fs-erpi erpi-id 1 SP east
The following command initiates a manual switch in the Sub-Ring service point of
ERPI 20:
root> ethernet g8032 ms-erpi erpi-id 20 SP sub-ring
The following command initiates convergence in the East service point of ERPI 1:
root> ethernet g8032 clear-erpi erpi-id 1 SP east
19.1.6 Blocking or Unblocking R-APS Messages on a Service Point (CLI)

To enable or disable transmission of R-APS messages on a service point, enter the
root> ethernet g8032 set-erpi-sp-tx-raps-cntrl erpi-id <erpi-
id> SP <SP> tx-raps <tx-raps>
Table 235: G.8032 Switching and Reversion CLI Parameters

Values
erpi-id Number 1-64 The ID of the ERPI on which you want to

perform or clear the switch or initiate
convergence.
SP Variable east Specifies the service point on which to clear the
west manual or forced switch or to implement
sub-ring convergence.
tx-raps Variable true true – R-APS message transmission is enabled
false on the service point.
false – R-APS message transmission is blocked
on the service point.
Page 865 of 1094

19.1.7 Displaying the ERPI Attributes (CLI)

To display a list of all ERPIs configured on the unit, enter the following command
in root view:
root> ethernet g8032 show-all-erpi
The following is an example of this command's output.
To display all ERPIs that include a service point on a specific port, enter the
root> ethernet g8032 show-all-port-erpi interface <interface>
To display all ERPIs that include a service point on a specific group, enter the
root> ethernet g8032 show-all-port-erpi group <group>
The following command displays all ERPIs with a service point on LAG group 1:
root> ethernet g8032 show-all-port-erpi group lag1
The following command displays all ERPIs with a service point on HSB protection
group 2:
root> ethernet g8032 show-all-port-erpi group rp2
The following command displays all ERPIs with a service point on Multi-Carrier
ABC group 1:
root> ethernet g8032 show-all-port-erpi group mc-abc1
Page 866 of 1094

To display detailed information about a specific ERPI, enter the following

root> ethernet g8032 show-erpi-config erpi-id <erpi-id>
The following command displays detailed output for ERPI 1:

root> ethernet g8032 show-erpi-config erpi-id 1
To display state information about a specific ERPI, enter the following command
in root view:
root> ethernet g8032 show-erpi-dynamic erpi-id <erpi-id>
The following command displays detailed output for ERPI 1:

root> ethernet g8032 show-erpi-dynamic erpi-id 1
Page 867 of 1094

Table 236: G.8032 ERPI Display Command Input Parameters

Type Values
interface Variable eth Enter the type of interface:

radio eth – Ethernet
radio – Radio
slot Number Ethernet: 1 Depends on the interface and unit type.

Radio: 2
port Number GbE 1: 1 The port number of the interface.
GbE 2: 2
GbE 3: 3
Radio Carrier 1:
1
Radio Carrier 2
(IP-20C only): 2
group Variable rp1 To enter interface view for a group, enter the group
rp2 ID for one of the following types of group:
rp3 • HSB group (rp1 - rp-4)
rp4 • LAG (lag1 - lag4)
lag1 • Multi-Carrier ABC group (mc-abc1 - mc-
abc4)
lag2
Note: HSB and Multi-Carrier ABC groups are only
lag3
relevant for IP-20C.
lag4
mc-abc1
mc-abc2
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
erpi-id Number 1-64 The ID of the ERPI for which you want to perform or
clear the switch, initiate convergence, or display
information.
Table 237: G.8032 ERPI Display Command Output Parameters

ERPI ID A unique ID that identifies the ERPI.
Page 868 of 1094

ERPI Name A descriptive name for the ERPI.
Service The ID of the Ethernet service to which the ERPI belongs.
User Instance The MSTI to which the Ethernet service is mapped.
Ring State Indicates the current ERPI state. Possible values are:
Initializing
Idle
Pending
Protecting
FS (Forced Switch)
MS (Manual Switch)
West SP The interface to which the west ERPI service point belongs.
East SP The interface to which the east ERPI service point belongs.
Sub-Ring SP The interface to which the ERPI service point that connects the
Ring to the Sub-Ring belongs.
ERPI Type The ERPI type (Ring, Sub-Ring, or Ring with Sub-Ring).
MEG Level The Maintenance Entity Group (MEG) level used for R-APS
messages sent in the ERPI.
Version The ERPI (G.8032) protocol version currently being used in the
unit.
Virtual Channel Reserved for future use.
RPL Owner Indicates whether the ERPI is currently an RPL owner, and if it is,
which ERPI port is the owner.
Revertive Indicates whether the ERPI is currently in revertive mode.
WTR The Wait to Restore (WTR) timer. This timer sets the minimum
time (in minutes) the system waits after signal failure before
entering revertive mode.
Guard Time The minimum time (in msec) the system waits after recovery
from a signal failure before accepting new R-APS messages. The
purpose of this timer is to prevent unnecessary state changes
that might be caused by outdated messages.
Hold-Off Time The minimum time (in msec) the system waits before reacting to
a signal failure.
SD Handling Reserved for future use.
West SP SD Capacity Threshold Reserved for future use.
East SP SD Capacity Threshold Reserved for future use.
Sub-Ring SP SD Capacity Reserved for future use.
Threshold
Local State The current local state input to the ERPI state machine.
Remote State The last event received from the other end of the link.
Page 869 of 1094

Last HP Request The last high priority request.
Last Change Time The time of the last ring state transition.
To display the state of a specific service point, enter the following command in
root view:
root> ethernet g8032 show-erpi-sp-state erpi-id <erpi-id> SP
<SP>
The following command displays the current state of the East service point for
ERPI 1:
root> ethernet g8032 show-erpi-sp-state erpi-id 1 SP east
Table 238: G.8032 Service Point Display Command Output Parameters

ERPI ID A unique ID that identifies the ERPI.

SP Index Identifies the service point in the ERPI.
SP ID The Service Point ID.
Active State Indicates whether or not the service point is active for traffic
forwarding.
R-APS Channel Forwarding Indicates whether the service point is forwarding R-APS messages.
State
Data Forwarding State Indicates whether the service point is in unblocked (forwarding)
state.
RPL Link Blocked State Only relevant if the ERPI to which the service point belongs is the
RPL owner. Indicates whether the service point is in blocked state.
Defect State Indicates whether the service point is in Signal Fail (SF) or Signal
Defect (SD) state.
Note: Support for Signal Defect state is planned for future
release.
TX R-APS Frames The number of R-APS frames that have been transmitted via the
service point.
TX R-APS SF The number of R-APS Signal Fail (SF) frames that have been
TX R-APS NR The number of R-APS No Request (NR) frames that have been
Page 870 of 1094

TX R-APS RB The number of R-APS RPL Blocked (RB) frames that have been
TX R-APS SD The number of R-APS Signal Degrade (SD) frames that have been
TX R-APS FS The number of R-APS Forced Switch (FS) frames that have been
TX R-APS MS The number of R-APS Manual Switch (MS) frames that have been
TX R-APS Event Reserved for future use.
RX R-APS Frames The number of R-APS frames that have been received by the
service point.
RX Invalid R-APS Frames The number of R-APS frames with an invalid format that have been
received by the service point.
RX R-APS SF The number of R-APS Signal Fail (SF) frames that have been
RX R-APS NR The number of R-APS No Request (NR) frames that have been
TX R-APS RB The number of R-APS RPL Blocked (RB) frames that have been
transmitted by the service point.
TX R-APS SD The number of R-APS Signal Degrade (SD) frames that have been
TX R-APS FS The number of R-APS Forced Switch (FS) frames that have been
TX R-APS MS The number of R-APS Manual Switch (MS) frames that have been
TX R-APS Event Reserved for future use.
Page 871 of 1094

19.2 Configuring MSTP (CLI)

• Configuring the MSTP Bridge Parameters (CLI)
• Configuring the MSTP Port Parameters (CLI)
Note: P2P services are not affected by MSTP, and continue to traverse ports
that are blocked by MSTP.
MSTP cannot be configured on management ports, including

19.2.1 Configuring the MSTP Bridge Parameters (CLI)

• Enabling and Disabling MSTP (CLI)
• Defining the Number of MSTIs (CLI)
• Setting the BPDU Destination MAC Address (CLI)
• Freezing MSTP (CLI)
• Resetting the MSTP Stack (CLI)
• Handling Signal Degrade (SD) Failures (CLI)
• Setting the Configuration ID (CLI)
• Mapping Services to MSTIs (CLI)
• Setting the Bridge Level Spanning Tree Parameters (CLI)
• Setting and Viewing the Bridge Level MSTI Parameters (CLI)
• Viewing the MSTP Parameters (CLI)
Page 872 of 1094

19.2.1.1 Enabling and Disabling MSTP (CLI)

Enabling MSTP starts the protocol and sets all port states in all MSTP instances to
Blocking. Convergence upon enabling the protocol generally takes less than two
seconds.
Note: All mapping of Ethernet services to MSTP instances (MSTIs) should be
performed before enabling MSTP, For instructions, see Mapping
Services to MSTIs (CLI).
To enable MSTP on the unit, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp mstp-enable
Disabling MSTP stops the MSTP protocol from running and sets all ports in all
MSTP instances to Forwarding state.
To disable MSTP on the unit, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp mstp-disable
To display whether MSTP is currently enabled or disabled on the unit, enter the
root> ethernet mstp show-mstp-enabled
Page 873 of 1094

19.2.1.2 Defining the Number of MSTIs (CLI)

IP-20C and IP-20V can support from 1 to 16 Multiple Spanning Tree Instances
(MSTIs) on a single unit. This does not include the Common and Internal Spanning
Tree (CIST).
To specify the number of MSTIs, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp set number-of-instances <MSTI>
Note: Changing the number of MSTIs causes the MSTP stack to reset.
To display the number of MSTIs on the unit, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet mstp show-number-of-instances
Table 239: Defining Number of MSTIs CLI Parameters

MSTI Number 2-16 The number of MSTIs on the unit. This number
does not include the Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CIST).
The following command sets the number of MSTIs to 14:

root> ethernet mstp set number-of-instances 14
Page 874 of 1094

19.2.1.3 Setting the BPDU Destination MAC Address (CLI)

To specify the destination MAC address for BPDUs generated in the unit, enter the
root> ethernet mstp set bpdu-destination-mac <bpdu-destination-
mac>
Table 240: BPDU Destination MAC Address CLI Parameters

Type
bpdu-destination- Variable customer customer – The destination MAC address of

mac provider BPDUs is 0x0180-C200-0000. Provider BPDUs
are either tunneled or discarded.
provider – The destination MAC address
of BPDUs is 0x0180-C200-0008. Customer
BPDUs are either tunneled or discarded.
Page 875 of 1094

19.2.1.4 Freezing MSTP (CLI)

You can freeze MSTP in the unit. When MSTP is frozen, BPDUs are neither
transmitted nor processed, and all port states are maintained as they were before
MSTP was frozen.
To freeze MSTP, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp mstp-freeze
To unfreeze MSTP, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet mstp mstp-defreeze
To display whether MSTP is or is not currently frozen in the unit, enter the
root> ethernet mstp show-mstp-frozen
Page 876 of 1094

19.2.1.5 Resetting the MSTP Stack (CLI)

To reset MSTP on the unit, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp mstp-reset
Page 877 of 1094

19.2.1.6 Handling Signal Degrade (SD) Failures (CLI)

Signal Degrade failures (SD) can either be ignored or treated the same as SF,
which means an SD failure triggers a topology change.
Note: This feature is planned for future release.
To determine how SD failures are treated, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet mstp set sd-handling <sd-handling>
Table 241: MSTP Signal Degrade Failure CLI Parameters

Type Values
sd- Variable ignored ignored – Signal Degrade (SD) failures are ignored in
handling same-as-SF MSTP.
same-as-SF – MSTP handles SD failures the same as
Signal Failure, i.e., an SD failure triggers a topology
change.
Page 878 of 1094

19.2.1.7 Setting the Configuration ID (CLI)

The configuration ID attributes include the Configuration Name and the Revision
Level. These attributes are part of the Bridge Configuration Identifier.
To set the configuration ID attributes, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp set configuration-name <configuration-name>
revision-level <revision-level>
To display the configuration ID attributes, enter the following command in root

view:
root> ethernet mstp show-config-id
Table 242: MSTP Configuration ID CLI Parameters

Type Values
configuration- Text The IEEE 802.1Q Configuration Name. The

name String Configuration Name is part of the bridge
configuration Identifier.
revision-level Number 0-65535 The IEEE 802.1Q Revision Level. The Revision
Level is part of the bridge configuration
Identifier.
Page 879 of 1094

19.2.1.8 Mapping Services to MSTIs (CLI)

By default, all Ethernet services are assigned to MSTI 0 (CIST). You can map
Ethernet services to other MSTIs.
Note: All mapping of Ethernet services to MSTP instances (MSTIs) should be
performed before enabling MSTP.
To assign a service to another MSTI, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet generalcfg instance-to-service-mapping set
service sid <sid> instance-id <instance-id>
To assign a range of services to another MSTI, enter the following command in

root view:
service sid <sid> to <sid> instance-id <instance-id>
To display the service to MSTI mapping for a specific service, enter the following
root> ethernet generalcfg instance-to-service-mapping show
service sid <sid>
To display the service to MSTI mapping for a range of services, enter the following
service sid <sid> to <sid>
Table 243: MSTP Service to MSTI Mapping CLI Parameters

sid Number or Any Ethernet service or range The service ID.

Range of services configured in the
unit.
instance- Number 1-16, 4095 The MSTI to which you want to
id map the service.
The following command assigns Service 1 to MSTI 2:

service sid 1 instance-id 2
The following command assigns Services 1 through 10 to MSTI 2:

service sid 1 to 10 instance-id 2
The following command displays the service to MSTI mapping for services 1
through 1000:
service sid 1 to 1000
Page 880 of 1094

19.2.1.9 Setting the Bridge Level Spanning Tree Parameters (CLI)

The bridge level spanning tree parameters determine most of the bridge MSTP
parameters, including parameters that are applied to all bridges when this bridge
is acting as the root.
To set the CIST bridge priority, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp set cist-bridge-priority <cist-bridge-
priority>
To set the CIST hold time, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp set cist-bridge-hold-time <cist-bridge-
hold-time>
To set the CIST maximum age, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp set cist-bridge-max-age <cist-bridge-max-
age>
To set the CIST forward delay, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp set cist-bridge-forward-delay <cist-bridge-
forward-delay>
To set the CIST Hello Time, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp set cist-bridge-hello-time <cist-bridge-
hello-time>
To set the CIST maximum number of hops, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet mstp set cist-bridge-max-hops <cist-bridge-max-
hops>
Table 244: MSTP Bridge Level Spanning Tree CLI Parameters

Type
cist-bridge-priority Number 0-61440, in steps of Enter a value as the writeable portion of

4096. the Bridge ID. This value constitutes the
first two octets of the Bridge ID.
cist-bridge-hold- Number 10-100 Enter a value (in cs) as the interval
time length during which no more than two
configuration bridge PDUs will be
transmitted by this node.
cist-bridge-max-age Number 600-4000 Enter a value (in cs) that all bridges will
use, when this bridge is the root, as the
maximum age of MSTP information
learned from the network on any port
before the information is discarded.
Page 881 of 1094


Type
cist-bridge-forward- Number 400-3000 Enter a value (in cs) that all bridges will
delay use, when this bridge is the root, as the
speed at which ports change their
spanning state when moving towards
the Forwarding state. This value
determines how long the port stays in
Listening state and Learning state. This
value is also used when a topology
change has been detected and is
underway for purposes of aging all
dynamic entries in the filtering
database.
cist-bridge-hello- Number 100-1000 Enter the value (in cs) that all bridges
time will use, when this bridge is the root, as
the Hello Time. The Hello Time
determines how often the switch
broadcasts its hello message to other
switches, and is the same for all MSTIs.
cist-bridge-max- Number 6-40 Enter the value that all bridges will use,
hops when this bridge is the root, as the
maximum number of hops allowed for a
BPDU within a region before it is
discarded.
Page 882 of 1094

19.2.1.10Setting and Viewing the Bridge Level MSTI Parameters (CLI)

To set the bridge priority for an MSTI, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp set instance <msti-id> msti-bridge-priority
<msti-bridge-priority>
To display the bridge parameters of an MSTI, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet mstp show-msti-attributes instance <msti-id>
Table 245: Bridge Level MSTI CLI Parameters

Type
instance Number 1-16 Enter the MSTI ID of the MSTI you want to
configure.
msti- Number 0-61440, in steps of The MSTI writeable portion of the Bridge ID.
bridge- 4096.
priority
pwe
radio – Radio
pwe – TDM

Radio: 2
GbE 2: 2
GbE 3: 3
Radio Carrier 1: 1
20C only): 2
group Variable rp1 To enter interface view for a group, enter the
rp2 group ID for one of the following types of group:
rp3 • HSB group (rp1 - rp-4)
rp4 • LAG (lag1 - lag4)
lag1 • Multi-Carrier ABC group (mc-abc1 - mc-
abc4)
lag2
Note: HSB and Multi-Carrier ABC groups are only
lag3
relevant for IP-20C.
lag4
mc-abc1
mc-abc2
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
Page 883 of 1094

The following command sets the bridge priority for MSTI 15 to 28672:
root> ethernet mstp set instance 15 msti-bridge-priority 28672
The following command displays the bridge parameters of MSTI 10:

root> ethernet mstp show-msti-attributes instance 10
Page 884 of 1094

19.2.1.11Viewing the MSTP Parameters (CLI)

To display the general MSTP parameters, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet mstp show-gen-attributes
Page 885 of 1094

19.2.2 Configuring the MSTP Port Parameters (CLI)

• Configuring and Viewing the CIST Port Parameters (CLI)
• Configuring and Viewing the MSTI Port Parameters (CLI)
• Viewing and Resetting Port BPDU Counters (CLI)
Page 886 of 1094

19.2.2.1 Configuring and Viewing the CIST Port Parameters (CLI)

To set the CIST port priority of a port, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp set interface <interface> slot <slot> port
<port> cist-port-priority <cist-port-priority>
To set the CIST port priority of an interface group, enter the following command in
root view:
root> ethernet mstp set group <group> cist-port-priority <cist-
port-priority>
To set the CIST path cost of a port, enter the following command in root view:
<port> cist-port-path-cost <cist-port-path-cost>
To set the CIST path cost of an interface group, enter the following command in
root view:
root> ethernet mstp set group <group> cist-port-path-cost
<cist-port-path-cost>
To set a port's administrative edge port parameter for the CIST, enter the
<port> cist-port-edge-port <cist-port-edge-port>
To set an interface group's administrative edge port parameter for the CIST, enter
root> ethernet mstp set group <group> cist-port-edge-port
<cist-port-edge-port>
To set a port's MAC Enabled parameter for the CIST, enter the following command
in root view:
<port> cist-port-mac-enabled <cist-port-mac-enabled>
To set an interface group's MAC Enabled parameter for the CIST, enter the
root> ethernet mstp set group <group> cist-port-mac-enabled
<cist-port-mac-enabled
To display a port's CIST parameters, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp show-cist-port-attributes interface
<interface> slot <slot> port <port>
To display an interface group's CIST parameters, enter the following command in

root view:
root> ethernet mstp show-cist-port-attributes group <group>
Page 887 of 1094

Table 246: CIST Port CLI Parameters


radio – Radio

Radio: 2
GbE 2: 2
GbE 3: 3
Radio Carrier 1: 1
Radio Carrier 2 (IP-20C
only): 2
rp2 group ID for one of the following types of
group:
rp3
• HSB group (rp1 - rp-4)
rp4
• LAG (lag1 - lag4)
lag1
• Multi-Carrier ABC group (mc-abc1 -
lag2
mc-abc4)
lag3
Note: HSB and Multi-Carrier ABC groups are
lag4 only relevant for IP-20C.
mc-abc1
mc-abc2
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
cist-port- Number 0-240, in multiples of 16. The priority contained in the first octet of the
priority two-octet Port ID.
cist-port- Number 1-200000000. The configurable assigned value for the
path-cost contribution of this port to the path cost of
paths towards the spanning tree root.
Note: Changing the value of this parameter
is considered to be a topology change by the
MSTP mechanism.
cist-port- Variable true true – The port is considered an edge port in
edge-port false the CIST.
false – The port is considered a non-edge
port in the CIST.
Page 888 of 1094


cist-port- Variable forceTrue forceTrue – The MAC is treated as if it is
mac- forceFalse connected to a point-to-point LAN, regardless
enabled auto of any indications to the contrary that are
generated by the MAC entity.
forceFalse –The MAC is treated as if it is
connected to a non-point-to-point LAN,
regardless of any indications to the contrary
that are generated by the MAC entity.
auto – The MAC Enabled parameter is set to
True if the MAC is connected to a point-to-
point or full-duplex LAN. The MAC Enabled
parameter is set to False if the MAC is
connected to a non-point-to-point and half-
duplex LAN.
The following command sets the CIST port priority for Ethernet port 2 to 192:
root> ethernet mstp set interface eth slot 1 port 2 cist-port-
priority 192
The following command sets the CIST port priority for HSB protection group 1 to
192:
root> ethernet mstp set group rp1 cist-port-priority 192
The following command sets the CIST path cost for Ethernet port 1 to 20,000:
root> ethernet mstp set interface eth slot 1 port 1 cist-path-
cost 20000
The following command sets the CIST path cost for LAG 1 to 20,000:
root> ethernet mstp set group lag1 cist-path-cost 20000
The following command sets fixed radio interface 1 to be an Edge port in the CIST:
root> ethernet mstp set interface radio slot 3 port 1 cist-
port-admin-edge true
The following command sets HSB protection group 1 to be an Edge port in the
CIST:
root> ethernet mstp set group rp1 cist-port-admin-edge true
The following command displays the CIST parameters of fixed radio interface 2:
root> ethernet mstp show-cist-port-attributes interface radio
slot 2 port 2
The following command displays the CIST parameters of LAG 1:

root> ethernet mstp show-cist-port-attributes group lag1
Page 889 of 1094

19.2.2.2 Configuring and Viewing the MSTI Port Parameters (CLI)

To set the port priority for an MSTI and port, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet mstp set instance <instance> interface
<interface> slot <slot> port <port> msti-port-priority <msti-
port-priority>
To set the port priority for an MSTI and an interface group, enter the following
root> ethernet mstp set instance <instance> group <group> msti-
port-priority <msti-port-priority>
To set the path cost for a port in a specific MSTI, enter the following command in
root view:
root> ethernet mstp set instance <instance> interface
<interface> slot <slot> port <port> msti-port-path-cost <msti-
port-path-cost>
To set the path cost for an interface group in a specific MSTI, enter the following
root> ethernet mstp set instance <instance> group <group> msti-
port-path-cost <msti-port-path-cost>
To display the MSTI parameters for a specific MSTI and port, enter the following
root> ethernet mstp show-msti-port-attributes instance
<instance> interface <interface> slot <slot> port <port>
To display the MSTI parameters for a specific MSTI and interface group, enter the
root> ethernet mstp show-msti-port-attributes instance
<instance> group <group>
Table 247: MSTI Port CLI Parameters

Type
instance Number 1-16 Enter the MSTI ID of the MSTI you want to
configure.
radio – Radio

Radio: 2
Page 890 of 1094


Type
GbE 2: 2
GbE 3: 3
Radio Carrier 1: 1
only): 2
group:
rp3
rp4
lag1
lag2
mc-abc4)
lag3
mc-abc1
mc-abc2
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
msti-port- Number 0-240, in multiples of 16. The priority contained in the first octet of the
priority two-octet Port ID.
msti-port- Number 1-200000000. The port's Path Cost parameter for the MSTI.
path-cost Note: Changing the value of this parameter
may cause re-initialization of the MSTI for
which the parameter is changed. No other
MSTI should be affected.
The following command sets the MSTI port priority for MSTI 14 on Ethernet port 2
to 192:
root> ethernet mstp set instance 14 interface eth slot 1 port 2
msti-port-priority 192
The following command sets the MSTI port priority for MSTI 14 on LAG 1 to 192:
root> ethernet mstp set instance 14 group lag1 msti-port-
priority 192
The following command sets the MSTI path cost for MSTI 12 on Ethernet port 3 to
20000:
root> ethernet mstp set instance 12 interface eth slot 1 port 3
msti-port-path-cost 20000
The following command sets the MSTI path cost for MSTI 12 on HSB protection
group 1 to 20000:
root> ethernet mstp set instance 12 group rp1 msti-port-path-
cost 20000
Page 891 of 1094

The following command displays the MSTI parameters for MSTI 10 and radio
interface 1:
root> ethernet mstp show-msti-port-attributes instance 10
interface radio slot 2 port 1
The following command displays the MSTI parameters for MSTI 10 and LAG 1:
root> ethernet mstp show-msti-port-attributes instance 10 group
lag1
Page 892 of 1094

19.2.2.3 Viewing and Resetting Port BPDU Counters (CLI)

To view the BPDU counters for a port, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp show-port-counters interface <interface>
To view the BPDU counters for an interface group, enter the following command
in root view:
root> ethernet mstp show-port-counters group <group>
To reset the BPDU counters, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet mstp reset-counters
Table 248: Port BPDU Counters CLI Parameters

Type

radio – Radio

Radio: 2
GbE 2: 2
GbE 3: 3
Radio Carrier 1: 1
only): 2
group:
rp3
rp4
lag1
lag2
mc-abc4)
lag3
mc-abc1
mc-abc2
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
Page 893 of 1094

19.3 Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN) (CLI)

• Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview (CLI)
• Configuring an ABN Entity (CLI)
19.3.1 Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview (CLI)

Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN), also known as Ethernet Operation and
Maintenance (EOAM), enables third party applications to learn about bandwidth
changes in a radio link when ACM is active. Once ABN is enabled, the radio unit
reports bandwidth information to upstream third-party switches.
The ABN entity creates a logical relationship between a radio interface or a logical
group of radio interfaces, called the Monitored Interface, and an Ethernet
interface or a logical group of Ethernet interfaces, called the Control Interface.
When bandwidth degrades from the nominal value in the monitored interface,
messages relaying the actual bandwidth values are periodically sent over the
Control Interface. A termination message is sent once the bandwidth returns to its
nominal level.
19.3.2 Configuring an ABN Entity (CLI)

You must first create an ABN entity consisting of the Monitored Interface on the
one hand, and the Control Interface on the other. You must then use separate
commands to enable or disable bandwidth monitoring of the monitored interface
and transmission of messages. You can also set various parameters related to the
bandwidth sampling and the transmitted bandwidth messages.
To create an ABN entity consisting of a physical radio interface as the monitored
interface and a physical Ethernet interface as the control interface, enter the
root> ethernet abn abn-entity-create abn-name <ab-name>
monitored-interface <monitored-interface> monitored-slot
<monitored-slot> monitored-port <monitored-port> control-
interface <control-interface> control-slot <control-slot>
control-port <control-port> vlan <vlan>
To create an ABN entity consisting of a physical radio interface as the monitored

interface and an interface group as the control interface, enter the following
root> ethernet abn abn-entity-create abn-name <abn-name>
<monitored-slot> monitored-port <monitored-port> control-group
<control-group> vlan <vlan>
To create an ABN entity consisting of an interface group as the monitored

interface and a physical Ethernet interface as the control interface, enter the
monitored-group <monitored-group> control-interface <control-
interface> control-slot <control-slot> control-port <control-
port> vlan <vlan>
Page 894 of 1094

To create an ABN entity consisting of an interface group as the monitored

interface and an interface group as the control interface, enter the following
monitored-group <monitored-group> control-group <control-group>
vlan <vlan>
To set the Admin status of an ABN entity, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet abn abn-admin-set abn-name <abn-name> admin
<admin-state>
To delete an ABN entity, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet abn abn-entity-delete abn-name <abn-name>
To show a summary of all ABN entities defined, enter the following command in
root view:
root> ethernet abn abn-entities-summary-show
To show a summary of the configuration and status of a specific ABN entity, enter
root> ethernet abn abn-entity-show abn-name <abn-name>
To set the monitoring interval for which a weighted average of the bandwidth
readings is calculated, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet abn abn-monitoring-interval-set abn-name <abn-
name> period <monitoring-interval>
To set how often messages are transmitted when bandwidth is below the nominal
root> ethernet abn abn-period-set abn-name <abn-name> period
<message-frequency>
To set the holdoff time, enter the following command in root view. Holdoff time is
the amount of time the system waits when bandwidth degradation occurs, before
transmitting a message. If the bandwidth is below the nominal value when the
holdoff period ends, the system starts transmitting messages:
root> ethernet abn abn-holdoff-set abn-name <abn-name> holdoff
<holdoff-time>
To clear the messages counter, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet abn abn-entity-counter-reset abn-name <abn-name>
Table 249: ABN Entity CLI Parameters

pipe-id Number 1 The pipe ID. Only one pipe is

supported in the current release.
abn-name Text String The name of the ABN entity.
monitored-interface Variable radio This parameter is always set to radio.
monitored-slot Number 2
Page 895 of 1094


monitored-port Number Radio Carrier 1: 1
Radio Carrier 2
(IP-20C and
IP-20C-HP only):
2
monitored-group Variable rp1 When the monitored group is an HSB
rp2 protection group (rp1 - rp-4), a LAG
(lag1 - lag4), or a Multi-Carrier ABC
rp3
group (mc-abc1 - mc-abc4), use this
rp4 parameter instead of the monitored-
lag1 interface parameter to identify the
lag2 group. The group must be defined
lag3 before you create the ABN entity.
Note: Multi-Carrier ABC and HSP
lag4
protection are only relevant for IP-
mc-abc1 20C and IP-20C-HP units.
mc-abc2
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
control-interface Variable eth This parameter is always set to
ethernet.
control-slot Number 1 This parameter is always set to 1.
control-port Number 1-3 The specific Ethernet interface to
which messages are transmitted
when bandwidth in the monitored
interface degrades below the nominal
value.
control-group Variable rp1 When the control group is an HSB
rp2 protection group (rp1 - rp-4), a LAG
(lag1 - lag4), or a Multi-Carrier ABC
rp3
group (mc-abc1 - mc-abc4), use this
rp4 parameter instead of the control-
lag1 interface parameter to identify the
lag2 group. The group must be defined
before you create the ABN entity.
lag3
Note: Multi-Carrier ABC and HSP
lag4
protection are only relevant for IP-
mc-abc1 20C and IP-20C-HP units.
mc-abc2
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
vlan Variable untag The VLAN on which messages are
1 - 4094, except transmitted (optional).
4092 (reserved
for the default
Page 896 of 1094


management
service)
admin-state Variable isUp Enter isUp to enable ABN monitoring
isDown on the interface, or isDown to disable
ABN monitoring on the interface.
monitoring-interval Number 1 - 20 The interval (in seconds) for which a
weighted average of the bandwidth
readings is calculated.
message-frequency Variable 4-one-second - How often messages are transmitted
sets message when bandwidth is below the nominal
frequency to 1 value.
second
5-ten-seconds -
sets message
frequency to 10
seconds
6-one-minute -
sets message
frequency to 1
minute
holdoff-time Number 10 - 29 The amount of time the system waits
when bandwidth degradation occurs,
before transmitting a message.
The following command creates an ABN entity with radio interface 1 as the
monitored interface and Ethernet port 1 as the control interface. It also specifies
to transmit bandwidth messages on VLAN 1:
root> ethernet abn abn-entity-create abn-name ABN-1 monitored-
interface radio monitored-slot 1 monitored-port 1 control-
interface ethernet control-slot 1 control-port 1 vlan 1
The following command creates an ABN entity in an IP-20C or IP-20C-HP unit with
radio interface 2 as the monitored interface and LAG group lag1 as the control
interface. It also specifies to transmit bandwidth messages on VLAN 55:
interface radio monitored-slot 1 monitored-port 2 control-group
lag1 vlan 55
HSB protection group rp1 as the monitored interface and Ethernet port 2 as the
control interface. It also specifies to transmit bandwidth messages on VLAN 200:
group rp1 control-interface ethernet control-slot 1 control-
port 2 vlan 200
HSB protection group rp1 as the monitored interface and LAG group lag1 as the
control interface. It also specifies to transmit bandwidth messages on VLAN 300:
Page 897 of 1094


group rp1 control-group lag1 vlan 300
The following command deletes ABN-1:

root> ethernet abn abn-entity-delete abn-name ABN-1
The following command sets the monitoring interval of ABN-1 to 1 second:

root> ethernet abn abn-monitoring-interval-set abn-name ABN-1
period 1
The following command sets the frequency of bandwidth messages regarding

ABN-1 to 10 seconds:
root> ethernet abn abn-period-set abn-name ABN-1 period 5-ten-
seconds
The following command sets the Holdoff time of ABN-1 to 15 seconds:

root> ethernet abn abn-holdoff-set abn-name ABN-1 holdoff 15
The following command clears the messages counter for ABN-1:

root> ethernet abn abn-entity-counter-reset abn-name ABN-1
Page 898 of 1094

19.4 Configuring Ethernet Bandwidth Notification (ETH-BN) (CLI)

Note: For an overview of ETH-BN, see ETH-BN Overview.
You must first create an ETH-BN entity consisting of the Monitored Interface on
the one hand, and the Control Interface on the other. You must then use separate
commands to enable or disable bandwidth monitoring of the monitored interface
and transmission of messages. You can also set various parameters related to the
bandwidth sampling and the transmitted bandwidth messages.
To create an ETH-BN entity in which the Monitored and Control interfaces are
both single interfaces, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet ebn ebn-entity-create ebn-name <eb-name>
<monitored-slot> monitored-port <monitored-port> control-
interface <control-interface> control-slot <control-slot> vlan
<vlan>
To create an ETH-BN entity in which the Monitored interface is a Multi-Carrier

ABC group and the Control interface is a single Ethernet interface, enter the
monitored-group <monitored-group> control-interface <control-
interface> control-slot <control-slot> vlan <vlan>
To create an ETH-BN entity on an IP-20E in which the Monitored interface is an

Enhanced Multi-Carrier ABC (Multiband) group and the Control interface is a
single Ethernet interface, enter the following command in root view:
monitored-group-on-slot enhanced-abc monitored-slot 1
monitored-port 1 control-interface <control-interface> control-
slot <control-slot> vlan <vlan>
To create an ETH-BN entity in which the Monitored interface is an individual radio

interface and the Control interface is a LAG, enter the following command in root
view:
<monitored-slot> monitored-port <monitored-port> control-group
<control-group> vlan <vlan>
To create an ETH-BN entity in which the Monitored interface is a Multi-Carrier

ABC group and the Control interface is a LAG, enter the following command in
root view:
monitored-group <monitored-group> control-group <control-group>
vlan <vlan>
To create an ETH-BN entity on an IP-20E in which the Monitored interface is an

Enhanced Multi-Carrier ABC (Multiband) group and the Control interface is a LAG,
monitored-group-on-slot enhanced-abc monitored-slot 1
monitored-port 1 control-group <control-group> vlan <vlan>
Page 899 of 1094

To change the name of an ETH-BN entity, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet ebn ebn-name-set ebn-name <ebn-name> new-ebn-
name <ebn-name>
To set the Admin status of an ETH-BN entity, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet ebn ebn-admin-set ebn-name <ebn-name> admin
<admin-state>
To set the Maintenance Level of messages sent by the ETH-BN entity, enter the
root> ethernet ebn ebn-mel-set ebn-name <ebn-name> mel <mel>
Note: If CFM MEPs are being used, the MEL must be set to a value greater
than the MEG level of the MEP. Otherwise, the BNM frames will be
dropped.
If CFM MEPs are not being used, the MEL for ETH-BN must be set to a
value greater than 0. Otherwise, the BNM frames will be dropped.
To set the VLAN with which messages sent by the ETH-BN entity are transmitted,
root> ethernet ebn ebn-vlan-set ebn-name <ebn-name> vlan <vlan>
To determine whether periodic BNM frames should be sent even when there is no
bandwidth degradation in the monitored interface, enter the following command
in root view:
root> ethernet ebn ebn-is-always-send ebn-name <string> is-
always-send <is-always-send>
To delete an ETH-BN entity, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet ebn ebn-entity-delete ebn-name <ebn-name>
To show a summary of all ETH-BN entities defined, enter the following command
in root view:
root> ethernet ebn ebn-entities-summary-show
To show a summary of the configuration and status of a specific ABN entity, enter
root> ethernet ebn ebn-entity-show ebn-name <ebn-name>
To set how often messages are transmitted when bandwidth is below the nominal
root> ethernet ebn ebn-period-set ebn-name <ebn-name> period
<period>
To set the holdoff time, enter the following command in root view. Holdoff time is
the amount of time the system waits when bandwidth degradation occurs, before
transmitting a message. If the bandwidth is below the nominal value when the
holdoff period ends, the system starts transmitting messages:
root> ethernet ebn ebn-holdoff-set ebn-name <ebn-name> holdoff
<holdoff-time>
Page 900 of 1094

To clear the messages counter, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet ebn ebn-entity-counter-reset ebn-name <ebn-name>
Table 250: ETH-BN Entity CLI Parameters

ebn-name Text String The name of the ABN entity.

monitored-interface Variable radio This parameter is always set to radio.
monitored-slot Number 2
monitored-port Number Radio Carrier 1: 1
20C and IP-20C-HP
only): 2
monitored-group Variable mc-abc1 To configure a Multi-Carrier ABC
mc-abc2 group as the monitored interface,
mc-abc3 use this parameter instead of the
mc-abc4 interface, slot, and port parameters
to identify the group.
control-interface Variable eth This parameter is always set to eth.
control-slot Number 1 This parameter is always set to 1.
control-port Number 1-3 The specific Ethernet interface to
which messages are transmitted
when bandwidth in the monitored
interface degrades below the
nominal value.
control-group Variable lag1 To configure a LAG group as the
lag2 control interface, use this parameter
lag3 instead of the interface, slot, and
lag4 port parameters to identify the
group.
mel Number 0-7 The CFM Maintenance Level of
messages sent by an ETH-BN entity.
vlan Variable untag The VLAN on which messages are
1 - 4094, except transmitted (optional). The CoS of
4092 (reserved for the VLAN is automatically set to 7.
the default
management
service)
is-always-send Variable true Specifies whether periodic BNM
false frames are sent even when there is
no bandwidth degradation in the
monitored interface:
• true – BNM frames are always
sent, even when the bandwidth
is at its nominal value.
Page 901 of 1094


• false – BNM frames are only
sent when the current
bandwidth is lower than the
nominal bandwidth (default
value).
admin-state Variable up Enter up to enable ETH-BN
down monitoring on the interface,
or down to disable EBN monitoring
on the interface.
period Variable 4-one-second How often messages are transmitted
5-ten-seconds when is-always-send is set to true
or, if not, when bandwidth is below
6-sixty-seconds
the nominal value:
4-one-second – Message is sent
every one second.
5-ten-seconds – Message is sent
every ten seconds.
6-sixty-seconds – Message is sent
every minute.
The default value is ten seconds.
holdoff-time Number 0-10 The amount of time (in seconds) the
system waits when bandwidth
degradation occurs, before
transmitting a message. The default
value is 10 seconds.
Page 902 of 1094

The following command creates an EBN entity with the following attributes:
• The name of the EBN entity is Test.
• The monitored radio interface is interface 1
• The Ethernet control interface is Ethernet port 1
• The MEL is set to 7.
• BNM frames are only sent when the current bandwidth is lower than the
nominal bandwidth.
• When the current bandwidth is below the nominal value, BNM frames are
sent every 60 seconds, after a holdoff time of 10 seconds.
• BNM frames are untagged
root>ethernet ebn ebn-entity-create ebn-name Test monitored-
interface radio monitored-slot 1 monitored-port 1 control-
interface eth control-slot 1 control-port 7 vlan untag
root>ethernet ebn ebn-admin-set ebn-name Test admin up
root>ethernet ebn ebn-mel-set ebn-name Test mel 7

root>ethernet ebn ebn-is-always-send ebn-name Test is-always-
send false
root>ethernet ebn ebn-period-set ebn-name Test period 6-sixty-

seconds
root>ethernet ebn ebn-holdoff-set ebn-name Test holdoff 10
root>
Page 903 of 1094

19.5 Configuring LLDP (CLI)

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a vendor-neutral layer 2 protocol that can
be used by a network element attached to a specific LAN segment to advertise its
identity and capabilities and to receive identity and capacity information from
physically adjacent layer 2 peers. LLDP is a part of the IEEE 802.1AB – 2005
standard that enables automatic network connectivity discovery by means of a
port identity information exchange between each port and its peer. Each port
periodically sends and also expects to receive frames called Link Layer Discovery
Protocol Data Units (LLDPDU). LLDPDUs contain information in TLV format about
port identity, such as MAC address and IP address.
LLDP is used to send notifications to the NMS, based on data of the local unit and
data gathered from peer systems. These notifications enable the NMS to build an
accurate network topology.
• Configuring the General LLDP Parameters (CLI)
• Displaying the General LLDP Parameters (CLI)
• Configuring LLDP Port Parameters (CLI)
• Displaying LLDP Port Parameters (CLI)
• Displaying LLDP Local System Parameters (CLI)
• Displaying the LLDP Remote System Parameters (CLI)
• Displaying LLDP Statistics (CLI)
19.5.1 Configuring the General LLDP Parameters (CLI)

This section explains how to define the general LLDP parameters for the unit. For
instructions on defining port-specific parameters, see Configuring LLDP Port
Parameters (CLI).
To define the Transmit Interval, which is the interval at which LLDP frames are
transmitted, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet lldp tx-interval-set tx-interval <tx-interval>
The time-to-live (TTL) determines the length of time LLDP frames are retained by
the receiving device. The TTL is determined by multiplying the Transmit Interval by
the TTL Multiplier.
To define the TTL Multiplier, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet lldp tx-hold-multiplier-set hold-multiplier
<hold-multiplier>
To define the interval between transmission of LLDP notifications during normal

transmission periods, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet lldp notif-interval-set notif-interval <notif-
interval>
Page 904 of 1094

Table 251: General LLDP CLI Parameters

tx-interval Number 5-3600 The interval, in seconds, at which LLDP

frames are transmitted. The default value is
30.
hold- Number 2-10 The TTL Multiplier, which is multiplied by the
multiplier Transmit Interval to determine the TTL, in
seconds, of LLDP frames. The default value is
4.
notif- Number 5-3600 The interval, in seconds, between
interval transmission of LLDP notifications during
normal transmission periods. The default
value is 30.
The following commands set the Transmit Interval to 50 seconds with a TTL
Multiplier of 5. This produces a TTL of 4 minutes and 10 seconds.
root> ethernet lldp tx-interval-set tx-interval 50
root> ethernet lldp tx-hold-multiplier-set hold-multiplier 50
The following command sets a Notification Interval of 20 seconds:

root> ethernet lldp notif-interval-set notif-interval 20
19.5.2 Displaying the General LLDP Parameters (CLI)

To display the general LLDP parameters, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet lldp configuration-scalers-show

• Message Tx Interval - The interval, in seconds, at which LLDP frames are
transmitted, as defined by the ethernet lldp tx-interval-set tx-
interval command. The default value is 30.
• Message Tx Hold Multiplier - The TTL Multiplier, as defined by the ethernet
lldp tx-hold-multiplier-set hold-multiplier command. The TTL
Multiplier is multiplied by the Transmit Interval to determine the TTL, in
seconds, of LLDP frames. The default value is 4.
• Reinit Delay - The minimum time, in seconds, the system waits after the LLDP
Admin status becomes Disabled until it will process a request to reinitialize
LLDP. In this release, this parameter is set at 2.
• Notification Interval - The interval, in seconds, between transmission of LLDP
notifications during normal transmission periods, as defined by the ethernet
lldp notif-interval-set notif-interval command. The default value is
30.
• Tx Credit Max - The maximum number of consecutive LLDPDUs that can be
transmitted at any one time. In this release, the Tx Credit Max is set at 5.
• Message Fast Tx - The interval, in seconds, at which LLDP frames are
transmitted during fast transmission periods, such as when the unit detects a
new neighbor. In this release, this parameter is set at 1.
Page 905 of 1094

• Message Fast Init - The initial value used to initialize the variable which
determines the number of transmissions that are made during fast
transmission periods. In this release, this parameter is set at 4.
19.5.3 Configuring LLDP Port Parameters (CLI)

This section explains how to enable LLDP per port, and determine how LLDP
operates and which TLVs are sent for each port:
To define how the LLDP agent operates on a specific port, enter the following
root> ethernet lldp agent-admin-set interface eth slot <slot>
port <port> agent-admin <agent-admin>
To enable or disable LLDP notifications to the NMS on a specific port, enter the
root> ethernet lldp agent-notif-enable interface eth slot
<slot> port <port> agent-notif-enable <agent-notif-enable>
Table 252: LLDP Port CLI Parameters

slot Number 1 The slot in which the card resides.

port Number 1-3 The port for which you want to configure
LLDP.
agent-admin Variable txOnly Defines how the LLDP protocol operates
rxOnly for this port:
txAndRx • txOnly - The LLDP agent transmits
LLDP frames on this port but does
disabled
not update information about its
peer.
• rxOnly - The LLDP agent receives
but does not transmit LLDP frames
on this port.
• txAndRx - The LLDP agent
transmits and receives LLDP
frames on this port (default value).
• disabled - The LLDP agent does
not transmit or receive LLDP
frames on this port.
agent-notif- Variable true • true - The agent sends a
enable false Topology Change trap to the NMS
whenever the system information
received from its peer changes.
• false - Notifications to the NMS
are disabled (default value).
The following commands configure Ethernet port 2 to transmit and receive LLDP
frames and to send a Topology Change trap to the NMS whenever the system
information of its peer changes:
Page 906 of 1094

root> ethernet lldp agent-admin-set interface eth slot 1 port 2

agent-admin txAndRx
root> ethernet lldp agent-notif-enable interface eth slot 1

port 2 agent-notif-enable true
19.5.4 Displaying LLDP Port Parameters (CLI)

To display the LLDP agent configuration on all ports, enter the following command
in root view:
root> ethernet lldp agent-configuration-show
The following is a sample output of the command:
19.5.5 Displaying LLDP Local System Parameters (CLI)

• Displaying Local Unit Parameters (CLI)
• Displaying Local Port Parameters (CLI)
• Displaying Local Unit Management Information (CLI)
• Displaying Local Unit Management Information per Port (CLI)
• Displaying Unit’s Destination MAC Addresses (CLI)
Page 907 of 1094

19.5.5.1 Displaying Local Unit Parameters (CLI)

To display the local unit's unit parameters, as transmitted by the LLDP agents,
root> ethernet lldp local-system-scalars-show

• local Chassis Id Subtype - The type of encoding used to identify the local unit.
In this release, this parameter is always set to 4 (MAC Address).
• local Chassis Id - The MAC Address of the local unit.
• local System Name - The system name included in TLVs transmitted by the
LLDP agent. To define the system name, see Configuring Unit Parameters
(CLI).
• local System Description - The system description included in TLVs
transmitted by the LLDP agent.
• local System Cap Supported - A bitmap value used to identify which system
capabilities are supported on the local system, as included in TLVs transmitted
by the LLDP agent. The bitmap is defined by the following parameters:
◦ 0 - other
◦ 1 - repeater
◦ 2 - bridge
◦ 3 - wlanAccessPoint
◦ 4 - router
◦ 5 - telephone
◦ 6 - docsisCableDevice
◦ 7 - stationOnly
◦ 8 - cVLANComponent
◦ 9 - sVLANComponent
◦ 10 - twoPortMACRelay
• local System Cap Enabled - A bitmap value used to identify which system
capabilities are enabled on the local system, as included in TLVs transmitted
by the LLDP agent. The bitmap is defined by the following parameters:
◦ 0 - other
◦ 1 - repeater
◦ 2 - bridge
◦ 4 - router
◦ 5 - telephone
◦ 7 - stationOnly
Page 908 of 1094

19.5.5.2 Displaying Local Port Parameters (CLI)

To display local port parameters, as transmitted by the LLDP agent, enter the
root> ethernet lldp local-port-show

• Interface type/slot/port - The port type, slot number, and port number.
• Port ID Subtype - The type of encoding used to identify the port in LLDP
transmissions. In this release, this parameter is always set to MAC Address.
• Port ID - The port's MAC address.
• Description - A text string that describes the port. In this release, this
parameter is always set to ethPort.
Page 909 of 1094

19.5.5.3 Displaying Local Unit Management Information (CLI)

To display the local unit's management information, enter the following command
in root view:
root> ethernet lldp local-mng-show

• Mng Addr SubType - The format of the local unit's IP Address. In this release,
only IPV4 is supported.
• Management Address - The local unit's IP address.
• Mng Addr Length - Reserved for future use.
• Mng Addr IF SubType - Reserved for future use.
• Mng Addr IF - Reserved for future use.
• Mng Addr OID - Reserved for future use.
Page 910 of 1094

19.5.5.4 Displaying Local Unit Management Information per Port (CLI)

To display the local unit's management information per port, enter the following
root> ethernet lldp mng-addr-table-show

• Interface type/slot/port - The port type, slot number, and port number.
• Dest Mac Address - Defines the MAC address associated with the port for
purposes of LLDP transmissions.
• Mng Address subType - Defines the type of the management address
identifier encoding used for the Management Address. In this release, only
IpV4 is supported.
• Management Address - The unit's IP address.
• Mng Address Tx Enable - Indicates whether the unit's Management Address is
transmitted with LLDPDUs. In this release, the Management Address is always
sent.
Page 911 of 1094

19.5.5.5 Displaying Unit’s Destination MAC Addresses (CLI)

To display the destination MAC address or range of MAC addresses associated
with the unit, and their internal index, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet lldp mac-da-table-show

• LLDP DA Index - The internal index associated with the unit's destination LLDP
MAC address.
• LLDP DA - The unit's destination LLDP MAC address.
19.5.6 Displaying the LLDP Remote System Parameters (CLI)

• Displaying the LLDP Remote Unit Parameters (CLI)
• Displaying the LLDP Remote Management Data per Port (CLI)
Note: Remote information is not displayed for ports that belong to a LAG
group.
Page 912 of 1094

19.5.6.1 Displaying the LLDP Remote Unit Parameters (CLI)

To display the peer's LLDP unit parameter information, starting from a specific
time, enter the following command in root view. If no time is specified, all data is
displayed.
root> ethernet lldp agent-remote-table-show agent-start-time
<agent-start-time> interface eth slot <slot> port <port>
Table 253: LLDP Remote Unit CLI Parameters

slot Number 1 The slot in which the card resides.

port Number 1-3 The port for which you want to configure
LLDP.
agent-start- Date Use the format: The sys-up-time of the entry creation.
time dd-mm-
yyyy,hh:mm:ss

• Time Mark – The time the entry was created.
• Interface Type/Slot/Port – The port for which you are displaying data about
the peer.
• Rem Dest Mac Address – The peer LLDP agent's destination MAC Address.
• Remote Index – An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify
a particular connection instance, unique only for the indicated peer.
• Remote Chassis ID subType – The type of encoding used to identify the peer
hardware unit.
• Remote Chassis ID – An octet string used to identify the peer hardware unit.
• Rem Port ID subType – The type of port identifier encoding used in the peer's
Port ID.
• Rem Port ID – An octet string used to identify the port component associated
with the peer.
• Rem Port Description – A description of the peer's port.
• Rem System Name – The peer's system name.
• Rem System Description – The peer's system description.
Note: The Rem Port Description, Rem System Name, and Rem
System Description fields are not used in the current
version.
• Rem System Cap Supported - The bitmap value used to identify which system
capabilities are supported on the peer. The bitmap is defined by the following
parameters:
◦ 0 - other
◦ 1 - repeater
◦ 2 - bridge
◦ 4 - router
Page 913 of 1094

◦ 5 - telephone
◦ 7 - stationOnly
• Rem System Cap Enabled - The bitmap value used to identify which system
capabilities are enabled on the peer. The bitmap is defined by the following
parameters:
◦ 0 - other
◦ 1 - repeater
◦ 2 - bridge
◦ 4 - router
◦ 5 - telephone
◦ 7 - stationOnly
• Remote Changes - Indicates whether there are changes in the peer's MIB, as
determined by the variable remoteChanges. Possible values are:
◦ True - Changes have taken place in the peer's MIB since the defined agent-
start-time.
◦ False - No changes have taken place in the peer's MIB since the
defined agent-start-time.
Page 914 of 1094

19.5.6.2 Displaying the LLDP Remote Management Data per Port (CLI)
To display remote LLDP management data from a specific port, starting from a
specific time, enter the following command in root view. If no time is specified, all
data is displayed.
root> ethernet lldp agent-remote-mng-show agent-start-time
<agent-start-time> interface eth slot <slot> port <port>
Table 254: LLDP Remote Management Data Per Port CLI Parameters
slot Number 1
port Number 1-3 The port for which you want to
configure LLDP.
agent-start-time Date Use the format: The sys-up-time of the entry
dd-mm- creation.
yyyy,hh:mm:ss

• Time Mark - The time the entry was created.
• Interface Type/Slot/Port - The port for which you are displaying data about
the peer.
• Rem Dest Mac Address - The peer LLDP agent's destination MAC Address.
• Remote Index - An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify a
particular connection instance, unique only for the indicated peer.
• Remote Mng Addr subType - The type of management address identifier
encoding used in the associated LLDP Agent Remote Management Address.
• Remote Mng Address - The octet string used to identify the management
address component associated with the remote system. The purpose of this
address is to contact the management entity.
• Remote Mng IF subType - The enumeration value that identifies the interface
numbering method used for defining the interface number, associated with
the remote system. Possible values are:
◦ unknown(1)
◦ ifIndex(2)
◦ systemPortNumber(3)
• Agent Rem OID - The OID value used to identify the type of hardware
component or protocol entity associated with the management address
advertised by the remote system agent.
19.5.7 Displaying LLDP Statistics (CLI)

• Displaying Statistics Regarding Changes in Peer Unit (CLI)
• Displaying LLDP Transmission Statistics (CLI)
• Displaying LLDP Received Frames Statistics (CLI)
Page 915 of 1094

19.5.7.1 Displaying Statistics Regarding Changes in Peer Unit (CLI)

To display statistics about changes reported via LLDP by the remote unit, enter
root> ethernet lldp statistics-scalars-show

• stats Rem Tables Last Change Time - The time of the most recent change in
the remote unit, as reported via LLDP.
• stats Rem Tables Inserts - The number of times the information from the
remote system has changed.
• stats Rem Tables Deletes - The number of times the information from the
remote system has been deleted.
• stats Rem Tables Drops - Reserved for future use.
• stats Rem Tables Ageouts - The number of times the information from the
remote system has been deleted from the local unit's database because the
information's TTL has expired. The RX Ageouts counter is similar to this
counter, but is for specific ports rather than the entire unit.
Page 916 of 1094

19.5.7.2 Displaying LLDP Transmission Statistics (CLI)

To display statistics about LLDP transmissions and transmission errors, enter the
root> ethernet lldp statistics-port-tx-show

• LLDP TX Statistics Ifindex - The index value used to identify the port in LLDP
transmissions.
• LLDP TX Statistics DA ID - The LLDP MAC address associated with this entry.
• LLDP TX Statistics Total Frames - The number of LLDP frames transmitted by
the LLDP agent on this port to the destination MAC address.
• LLDP TX Statistics No. of Length Error - The number of LLDPDU Length Errors
recorded for this port and destination MAC address. If the set of TLVs that is
selected in the LLDP local system MIB by network management would result
in an LLDPDU that violates LLDPDU length restrictions, then the No. of Length
Error statistic is incremented by 1, and an LLDPDU is sent containing the
mandatory TLVs plus as many of the optional TLVs in the set as will fit in the
remaining LLDPDU length.
Page 917 of 1094

19.5.7.3 Displaying LLDP Received Frames Statistics (CLI)

To display statistics about LLDP frames received by the unit, enter the following
root> ethernet lldp statistics-port-rx-show

• RX Destination Port - The index value used to identify the port in LLDP
transmissions.
• RX DA Index - The index value used to identify the destination MAC address
associated with this entry.
• RX Total Discarded - The number of LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent
on this port, and then discarded for any reason. This counter can provide an
indication that LLDP header formatting problems may exist with the local
LLDP agent in the sending system or that LLDPDU validation problems may
exist with the local LLDP agent in the receiving system.
• RX Invalid Frames - The number of invalid LLDP frames received by the LLDP
agent on this port while the agent is enabled.
• RX Valid Frames - The number of valid LLDP frames received by the LLDP
agent on this port.
• RX Discarded TLVs - The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the
LLDP agent on this port.
• RX Unrecognized TLVs - The number of LLDP TLVs received on the given port
that are not recognized by LLDP agent.
• RX Ageouts - The number of age-outs that occurred on the port. An age-out is
the number of times the complete set of information advertised by the
remote system has been deleted from the unit's database because the
information timeliness interval has expired. This counter is similar to the LLDP
No. of Ageouts counter, except that it is per port rather than for the entire
unit. This counter is set to zero during agent initialization. This counter is
incremented only once when the complete set of information is invalidated
(aged out) from all related tables on a particular port. Partial ageing is not
allowed.
Page 918 of 1094

20. Synchronization (CLI)

• Configuring SyncE Regenerator (CLI)
• Changing the ETSI/ANSI Mode (CLI)
• Configuring the Sync Source (CLI)
• Configuring the Outgoing Clock (CLI)
• Configuring SSM Messages (CLI)
• Displaying Synchronization Status and Parameters (CLI)
• Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock (CLI)
20.1 Configuring SyncE Regenerator (CLI)

Note: For IP-20V and IP-20E R2H ESP, SyncE Regenerator is planned for
future release.
In SyncE PRC pipe regenerator mode, frequency is transported between two
interfaces through the radio link.
With the system acting as a simple link, no distribution mechanism is necessary,
resulting in improved frequency distribution performance with PRC quality and a
simplified configuration.
Notes: SyncE Regenerator currently supports only a single pipe configuration.
It cannot be used together with 1588 Transparent Clock.
Before adding a pipe configuration, you must set the Sync mode to Pipe. Enter the
root> platform sync mode set pipe
By default, the Sync mode is set to Automatic. To display the current Sync mode,
To add a pipe configuration, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform sync pipe add pipe-id <pipe-id> interface-1-type
<interface-1-type> slot <slot> port <port> interface-2-type
<interface-2-type> slot <slot> port <port>
To change the first interface in a SyncE pipe, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform sync pipe edit interface-1 pipe-id <pipe-id>
interface-1-type <interface-1-type> slot <slot> port <port>
To change the second interface in a SyncE pipe, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform sync pipe edit interface-1 pipe-id <pipe-id>
interface-2-type <interface-2-type> slot <slot> port <port>
To remove a SyncE pipe, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform sync pipe remove pipe-id <pipe-id>
Page 919 of 1094

To remove all SyncE Regenerators (pipes), enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform sync pipe remove all
To view the configured SyncE pipes, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform sync pipe show
Table 255: SyncE Regenerator CLI Parameters

pipe-id Number 1 The pipe ID. Only one pipe is

supported in the current
release.
interface-1-type Variable ethernet The interface type for the first
radio interface in the pipe.
slot Number Ethernet: 1

Radio: 2
port Number GbE 1: 1
GbE 2: 2
GbE 3: 3 (IP-20E only)
Radio Carrier 1: 1
Radio Carrier 2
(IP-20C and IP-20C-HP
only): 2
interface-2-type Variable ethernet The interface type for the
radio second interface in the pipe. If
the first interface type is
ethernet, the second must by
radio, and vice versa.
The following command configures a SyncE pipe between Ethernet port 1 and
radio interface 1:
root> platform sync pipe add pipe-id 1 interface-1-type
ethernet slot 1 port 1 interface-2-type radio slot 2 port 1
The following command changes the first interface in the pipe from ethernet port
1 to Ethernet port 2:
root> platform sync pipe edit interface-1 pipe-id 1 interface-
1-type ethernet slot 1 port 2
The following command changes the second interface in the pipe from radio
interface 1 to radio interface 2:
root> platform sync pipe edit interface-2 pipe-id 1 interface-
2-type radio slot 2 port 2
The following command removes SyncE pipe 1:

root> platform sync pipe remove pipe-id 1
Page 920 of 1094

20.2 Changing the ETSI/ANSI Mode (CLI)

By default, IP-20 units are set to ETSI mode. No mode change is necessary to
configure an MRMC script, even if an FCC (ANSI) script is used. However, to
configure a sync source on which the sync source Quality parameter must be set
according to ANSI specifications. You must change the ETSI/ANSI mode to ANSI
before configuring the sync source.
To change the ETSI/ANSI mode, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management set interfaces-standard <ansi|etsi>
The following command changes the ETSI/ANSI mode from the default value of
ETSI to ANSI mode:
root> platform management set interfaces-standard ansi
To display the current ETSI/ANSI mode, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management show interfaces-standard
Changing the ETSI/ANSI mode does not require unit reset.
20.3 Configuring the Sync Source (CLI)

Note: To configure a sync source on which the sync source Quality
parameter must be set according to ANSI specifications. You must
change the ETSI/ANSI mode to ANSI before configuring the sync
source. See Changing the ETSI/ANSI Mode (CLI).
The frequency signals can be taken by the system from Ethernet and radio
interfaces. The reference frequency may also be conveyed to external equipment
through different interfaces.
Frequency is distributed by configuring the following parameters in each node:
• System Synchronization Sources – These are the interfaces from which the
frequency is taken and distributed to other interfaces. Up to 16 sources can
be configured in each node. For each interface, you must configure:
◦ Priority (1-16) – No two synchronization sources can have the same
priority.
◦ Quality – The quality level applied to the selected synchronization source.
This enables the system to select the source with the highest quality as the
• Each unit determines the current active clock reference source interface:
◦ The interface with the highest available quality is selected.
◦ From among interfaces with identical quality, the interface with the
highest priority is selected.
When configuring the Sync source, the Sync mode must be set to its default
setting of automatic. To display the current Sync mode, enter the following CLI
Page 921 of 1094

When configuring an Ethernet interface as a Sync source, the Media Type of the
interface must be rj45 or sfp, not auto-type. To view and configure the Media
Type of an Ethernet interface, see Configuring an Interface’s Media Type (CLI).
• Configuring an Ethernet Interface as a Synchronization Source (CLI)
• Configuring a Radio Interface as a Synchronization Source (CLI)
• Clearing All Sync Sources (CLI)
20.3.1 Configuring an Ethernet Interface as a Synchronization Source (CLI)

Note: In order to select an Ethernet interface, you must first specify the
media type for this interface. See Configuring Ethernet Interfaces (CLI).
To configure an Ethernet interface as a synchronization source, enter the
root> platform sync source add eth-interface slot <slot> port
<port> priority <priority> quality <quality>
To edit the parameters of an existing Ethernet interface synchronization source,

root> platform sync source edit eth-interface slot <slot> port
<port> priority <priority> quality <quality>
To remove an Ethernet interface as a synchronization source, enter the following

root> platform sync source remove eth-interface slot <slot>
port <port>
Table 256: Sync Source Ethernet CLI Parameters

slot Number 1
port Number 1-3 (IP-20E only) The interface to be configured as a
priority Number 1 – 16 The priority of this synchronization source
relative to other synchronization sources
configured in the unit.
Page 922 of 1094


quality Variable For ETSI systems: The quality level applied to the selected
• automatic synchronization source. This enables the system
to select the source with the highest quality as
• prc
the current synchronization source.
• ssu-a If the quality is set to automatic, then the quality
• ssu-b is determined by the received SSMs. If no valid
• g813.8262 SSM messages are received or in case of
interface failure (such as LOS, LOC, LOF), the
For ANSI (FCC)
quality becomes "failure."
systems:
SSM must be enabled on the remote interface in
• automatic
order for the interface to receive SSM messages.
• prs
If the quality is configured to a fixed value, then
• stratum-2 the quality status becomes “failure” upon
• transit-node interface failure (such as LOS, LOC, LOF).
• stratum-3e
• stratum-3
• smc
• unknown
The following command configures Ethernet port 2 as a synchronization source

with priority = 8, and quality = automatic:
root> platform sync source add eth-interface slot 1 port 2
priority 8 quality automatic
The following command changes the priority of this synchronization source to 6:

root> platform sync source edit eth-interface slot 1 port 2
priority 6
The following command removes this synchronization source:

root> platform sync source remove eth-interface slot 1 port 2
20.3.2 Configuring a Radio Interface as a Synchronization Source (CLI)

To configure a radio interface as a synchronization source, enter the following
root> platform sync source add radio-interface slot <slot> port
<port> radio-channel <radio-channel> priority <priority>
quality <quality>
To edit the parameters of an existing radio interface synchronization source, enter

root> platform sync source edit radio-interface slot <slot>
port <port> radio-channel <radio-channel> priority <priority>
quality <quality>
To remove a radio interface as a synchronization source, enter the following

root> platform sync source remove radio-interface slot <slot>
port <port> radio-channel <radio-channel>
Page 923 of 1094

Table 257: Sync Source Radio CLI Parameters

slot Number 2
port Number 1-2
radio-channel Number 0 – 85 Must be set to 0.
priority Number 1 – 16 The priority of this synchronization source
relative to other synchronization sources
configured in the unit.
quality Variable For ETSI systems: The quality level applied to the selected
• automatic synchronization source. This enables the
system to select the source with the
• prc highest quality as the current
• ssu-a synchronization source.
• ssu-b If the quality is set to automatic, then the
quality is determined by the received
• g813.8262
SSMs. If no valid SSM messages are
For ANSI (FCC) received or in case of interface failure (such
systems: as LOS, LOC, LOF), the quality becomes
• automatic "failure."
• prs SSM must be enabled on the remote
• stratum-2 interface in order for the interface to
• transit- receive SSM messages.
node
• stratum-3e
• stratum-3
• smc
• unknown
The following command configures radio interface 1 as a synchronization source

with priority = 16, and quality = automatic:
root> platform sync source add radio-interface slot 2 port 1
radio-channel 0 priority 16 quality automatic
The following command changes the priority of this synchronization source to 14:
root> platform sync source edit radio-interface slot 2 port 1
radio-channel 0 priority 14
The following command removes this synchronization source:

root> platform sync source remove radio-interface slot 2 port 1
radio-channel 0
20.3.3 Clearing All Sync Sources (CLI)

To clear all synchronization sources that have been configured in the system,
root> platform sync source remove all
Page 924 of 1094

20.4 Configuring the Outgoing Clock (CLI)

For each interface, you can choose between using the system clock or the
interface’s internal clock as its synchronization source. By default, interfaces use
the system clock.
When configuring the outgoing clock, the Sync mode must be set to its default
setting of automatic. To display the current Sync mode, enter the following
To set the interface clock for a radio interface, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform sync interface-clock set radio-interface slot
<slot> port <port> radio-channel <radio-channel> source
<source>
To set the interface clock for an Ethernet interface, enter the following command
in root view:
root> platform sync interface-clock set eth-interface slot
<slot> port <port> source <source>
Note: To configure the interface clock on an Ethernet interface, the Media

Type of the interface must be rj45 or sfp, not auto-type. To view and
configure the Media Type of an Ethernet interface, see Configuring an
Interface’s Media Type (CLI).
Table 258: Outgoing Clock CLI Parameters

slot Number ethernet: 1

radio: 2
port Number ethernet: 1-3 The port number of the interface.
(3 only for IP-20E)
radio: 1-2
(2 only for IP-20C and
IP-20C-HP)
radio-channel Number 0 – 84 The radio-channel configured for the
source Variable system-clock system-clock – The interface uses the
local-clock system clock as its synchronization
source.
local-clock – The interface uses its
internal clock as its synchronization
source.
Page 925 of 1094

The following command sets the clock source for radio interface 2 to its internal
clock:
root> platform sync interface-clock set radio-interface slot 2
port 2 radio-channel 0 source local-clock
The following command sets the clock source for Ethernet port 2 to the system
clock:
root> platform sync interface-clock set eth-interface slot 1
port 2 source system-clock
20.5 Configuring SSM Messages (CLI)

In order to provide topological resiliency for synchronization transfer, IP-20C, IP-
20C-HP, IP-20S, and IP-20E implement the passing of SSM messages over the
Ethernet and radio interfaces. SSM timing in IP-20 complies with ITU-T G.781.
In addition, the SSM mechanism provides reference source resiliency, since a
network may have more than one source clock.
The following are the principles of operation:
• At all times, each source interface has a “quality status” which is determined
as follows:
◦ If quality is configured as fixed, then the quality status becomes “failure”
upon interface failure (such as LOS, LOC, LOF).
◦ If quality is automatic, then the quality is determined by the received
SSMs. If no valid SSM messages are received or in case of interface failure
(such as LOS, LOC, LOF), the quality becomes "failure."
• Each unit holds a parameter which indicates the quality of its reference clock.
This is the quality of the current synchronization source interface.
• The reference source quality is transmitted through SSM messages to all
relevant radio interfaces.
• In order to prevent loops, an SSM with quality “Do Not Use” is sent from the
active source interface (both radio and Ethernet).
In order for an interface to transmit SSM messages, SSM must be enabled on the
When configuring SSM, the Sync mode must be set to its default setting of
automatic. To display the current Sync mode, enter the following command in
root view:
To enable SSM on a radio interface, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform sync ssm admin radio-interface slot <slot> port
<port> admin on
Page 926 of 1094

To disable SSM on a radio interface, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform sync ssm admin radio-interface slot <slot> port
<port> admin off
To enable SSM on an Ethernet interface, enter the following command in root

view:
root> platform sync ssm admin eth-interface slot <slot> port
<port> admin on
To disable SSM on an Ethernet interface, enter the following command in root

view:
root> platform sync ssm admin eth-interface slot <slot> port
<port> admin off
The following command enables SSM on radio interface 2:

root> platform sync ssm admin radio-interface slot 2 port 2
admin on
The following command enables SSM on Ethernet port 1:

root> platform sync ssm admin eth-interface slot 1 port 1 admin
on
20.6 Displaying Synchronization Status and Parameters (CLI)

To display the synchronization sources configured in the system, enter the
root> platform sync source config show
The following is a sample synchronization source display output:

number of configured sources = 4
|============================================================|
| Slot | Port | Type | Instance | Priority | Quality |
|============================================================|
| 1 | 1 | Ethernet | | 11 | automatic |
|------------------------------------------------------------|
| 1 | 2 | Ethernet | | 3 | automatic |
|------------------------------------------------------------|
| 2 | 1 | Radio | | 5 | automatic |
|------------------------------------------------------------|
| 2 | 2 | Radio | | 6 | automatic |
|------------------------------------------------------------|
To display the synchronization source status, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform sync source status show
Page 927 of 1094

The following is a sample synchronization source status display output:

number of configured sources = 4
|=============================================================|
| Slot | Port | Type | Instance | Active-Src | Act. Quality |
Received SSM | revert-time |
|=============================================================|
| 1 | 1 | ethernet | | false | PRC | do-not-use | 0 |
|------------------- -----------------------------------------|
| 1 | 2 | ethernet | | false | do-not-use | do-not-use | 0 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------|
| 2 | 1 | radio | | false | failure | do-not-use | 0 |
|------------------- -----------------------------------------|
| 2 | 2 | radio | | true | failure | g.813 | 0 |
|=============================================================|
To display the current system reference clock quality, enter the following
root> platform sync source show-reference-clock-quality
To display the current synchronization configuration of the unit’s interfaces, enter

root> platform sync interface config show
The following is a sample interface synchronization configuration display output:

number of configured clock-interfaces = 14
|=============================================================|
| Slot | Port | Type | Trail Radio | Source-Type | SSM-Admin |
|=============================================================|
| 1 | 1 | Ethernet | | System Clock | Off |
| 2 | 1 | Radio | | System Clock | On |
| 2 | 2 | Radio | | System Clock | On |
|=============================================================|
To display the current system clock status, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform sync clu-state show
The following is a sample system clock status display output:

CLU is in Free-running mode
Page 928 of 1094

20.7 Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock (CLI)

IP-20 uses 1588v2-compliant Transparent Clock to counter the effects of delay
variation. Transparent Clock measures and adjusts for delay variation, enabling
the IP-20 to guarantee ultra-low PDV.
A Transparent Clock node resides between a master and a slave node, and
updates the timestamps of PTP packets passing from the master to the slave to
compensate for delay, enabling the terminating clock in the slave node to remove
the delay accrued in the Transparent Clock node. The Transparent Clock node is
itself neither a master nor a slave node, but rather, serves as a bridge between
master and slave nodes.
Note that in CeraOS 11.3:
• 1588 TC is not supported when Master-Slave communication is using the IPv6
transport layer.
• 1588 TC cannot be used on 1+1 HSB links.
• 1588 TC cannot be used with 2 x 1+0 (East-West) configurations
• 1588 TC is not supported with Frame Cut-Through.
Note: Make sure to enable Transparent Clock on the remote side of the link
before enabling it on the local side.
To configure Transparent Clock:
source, with Sync Interface Priority 1. See Configuring an Ethernet Interface as
a Synchronization Source (CLI).
2 Add a radio interface as a Sync source, with lower priority than the port
receiving synchronization from the customer side. See Configuring a Radio
Interface as a Synchronization Source (CLI).
3 On the remote side of the radio link, add the radio interface facing the local
device as a Sync source, with Sync Interface Priority 1. See Configuring a Radio
Interface as a Synchronization Source (CLI).
source, with Sync Interface Priority 1. See Configuring an Ethernet Interface as
a Synchronization Source (CLI).
5 Verify that the Sync Interface Quality Status of the first Sync source is not
Failure. See Displaying Synchronization Status and Parameters (CLI).
6 Enter the following command in root view to enable Transparent Clock:
root> platform sync ptp set admin enable
Note: To disable Transparent Clock, enter the following command in root

view:
root> platform sync ptp set admin disable
Note: Disabling 1588 PTP can drastically affect time synchronization

performance in the entire network.
7 Enter one of the following commands in root view to assign the radio or Multi-
Carrier ABC group that will carry the PTP packets and determine the direction
of the PTP packet flow.
Page 929 of 1094

For an individual radio, enter the following command:

root> platform sync ptp-tc set radio slot <slot> port <port>
direction <upstream|downstream>
For a Multi-Carrier ABC group, enter the following command:

root> platform sync ptp-tc set group id <group> direction
<upstream|downstream>
The direction parameter must be set to different values on the two sides of the
link, so that if you set the local side to upstream, you must set the remote side to
downstream, and vice versa. Otherwise than that, it does not matter how you set
this parameter.
To display the Transparent Clock settings, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform sync ptp-tc show status
The following commands enable Transparent Clock on radio carrier 1 and

configure the radio to send PTP packets upstream:
root> platform sync ptp-tc set admin enable
root> platform sync ptp-tc set radio slot 2 port 1 direction
upstream
The following commands enable Transparent Clock on Multi-Carrier ABC group 1 and
configure the radio to send PTP packets upstream:
root> platform sync ptp-tc set group id mc-abc1 direction upstream
Table 259: 1588 Transparent Clock CLI Parameters

slot Number 2
port Number 1-2
group Variable mc-abc1
8 1588 packets should be mapped to CoS 7. By default, 1588 packets are not
mapped to any CoS. To map 1588 packets to CoS 7, you must disable CoS
preservation for 1588 packets. This must be performed via CLI, using the
following command:
root> ethernet generalcfg ptp-tc cos-preserve set admin disable
9 To map 1588 packets to CoS 7, enter the following command:
root> ethernet generalcfg ptp-tc cos-preserve cos value 7
After you enter these commands, 1588 packets will automatically be mapped
to CoS 7.
Note: If necessary, you can use the ethernet generalcfg ptp-tc cos-
preserve cos value command to map a different CoS value (0-7) to
1588 packets, but it is recommended to map 1588 packets to CoS 7.
Page 930 of 1094

21. Access Management and Security (CLI)

• Configuring the General Access Control Parameters (CLI)
• Configuring the Password Security Parameters (CLI)
• Configuring Users (CLI)
• Configuring RADIUS (CLI)
• Configuring TACACS+ (CLI)
• Displaying Remote Access Users
• Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates (CLI)
• Enabling HTTPS (CLI)
• Configuring HTTPS Cipher Hardening (CLI)
• Downloading and Installing an RSA Key (CLI)
• Blocking Telnet Access (CLI)
• Uploading the Security Log (CLI)
• Uploading the Configuration Log (CLI)
• Enabling NETCONF (CLI)
• Terminating all Active Sessions (CLI)
Related Topics:
• Operating in FIPS Mode (CLI)
• Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption (CLI)
21.1 Configuring the General Access Control Parameters (CLI)

To avoid unauthorized login to the system, the following parameters should be
set:
• Inactivity Timeout
• Blocking access due to login failures
• Blocking unused accounts
• Configuring the Inactivity Timeout Period (CLI)
• Configuring Blocking Upon Login Failure (CLI)
• Configuring Blocking of Unused Accounts (CLI)
21.1.1 Configuring the Inactivity Timeout Period (CLI)

A system management session automatically times out after a defined period (in
minutes) with no user activity. To configure the session timeout period, enter the
root> platform security protocols-control session inactivity-
timeout set <inactivity-timeout>
Page 931 of 1094

To display the currently configured session timeout period, enter the following
timeout show
Table 260: Inactivity Timeout Period CLI Parameters

inactivity-timeout Number 1 - 60 The session inactivity timeout

period (in minutes).
The following command sets the session inactivity timeout period to 30 minutes:
timeout set 30
21.1.2 Configuring Blocking Upon Login Failure (CLI)

Upon a configurable number of failed login attempts, the system blocks the user
from logging in for a configurable number of minutes.
To configure the number of failed login attempts that will temporarily block the
user from logging into the system, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security access-control block-failure-login
attempt set <attempt>
To define the period (in minutes) for which a user is blocked after the configured
number of failed login attempts, enter the following command in root view:
period set <period>
To display the current failed login attempt blocking parameters, enter the
root> platform security access-control block-failure-login show
Table 261: Blocking Upon Login Failure CLI Parameters

attempt Number 1 - 10 If a user attempts to login to the system with

incorrect credentials this number of times
consecutively, the user will temporarily be
prevented from logging into the system for
the time period defined by the platform
security access-control block-failure-login
period set command.
period Number 1 - 60 The duration of time, in minutes, that a user is
prevented from logging into the system after
the defined number of failed login attempts.
The following commands configure a blocking period of 45 minutes for users that
perform 5 consecutive failed login attempts:
attempt set 5
Page 932 of 1094


period set 45
21.1.3 Configuring Blocking of Unused Accounts (CLI)

You can configure a number of days after which a user is prevented from logging
into the system if the user has not logged in for the configured number of days.
You can also manually block a specific user.
To configure the blocking of unused accounts period, enter the following
root> platform security access-control block-unused-account
period set <period>
Once the user is blocked, you can use the following command to unblock the user:
root> platform security access-control user-account block user-
name <user-name> block no
To manually block a specific user, enter the following command in root view:
name <user-name> block yes
To display the currently configured blocking of unused account period, enter the
show
Table 262: Blocking Unused Accounts CLI Parameters

period Number 0, 30 - 90 The number of days after which a user

is prevented from logging into the
system if the user has not logged in for
the configured number of days. If you
enter 0, this feature is disabled.
user-name Text String Any valid user name. The name of the user being blocked or
unblocked.
The following command configures the system to block any user that does not log
into the system for 50 days:
period set 50
The following commands block, then unblock, a user with the user name
John_Smith:
name John_Smith block yes

name John_Smith block no
Page 933 of 1094

21.2 Configuring the Password Security Parameters (CLI)

You can configure enhanced security requirements for user passwords.
• Configuring Password Aging (CLI)
• Configuring Password Strength Enforcement (CLI)
• Forcing Password Change Upon First Login (CLI)
• Displaying the System Password Settings (CLI)
21.2.1 Configuring Password Aging (CLI)

Passwords remain valid from the first time the user logs into the system for the
number of days (20-90) set by this command. If you set this parameter to 0,
password aging is disabled, and passwords remain valid indefinitely.
To configure password aging, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security access-control password aging set
<password aging>
Table 263: Password Aging CLI Parameters

password aging Number 0, 20 - 90 The number of days that user

passwords will remain valid from the
first time the user logs into the
system.
The following command sets the password aging time to 60 days:

root> platform security access-control password aging set 60
21.2.2 Configuring Password Strength Enforcement (CLI)

To set password strength enforcement, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform security access-control password enforce-
strength set <enforce-strength>
Table 264: Password Strength Enforcement CLI Parameters

password aging Number 0, 20 - 90 The number of days that user

passwords will remain valid from
the first time the user logs into the
system.
Page 934 of 1094


enforce-strength Boolean Yes When yes is selected:
no • Password length must be at
least eight characters.
• Password must include
characters of at least three
of the following character
types: lower case letters,
upper case letters, digits,
and special characters. For
purposes of meeting this
requirement, upper case
letters at the beginning of
the password and digits at
the end of the password
are not counted.
• The last five passwords you
used cannot be reused.
The following command enables password strength enforcement:

root> platform security access-control password enforce-
strength set yes
21.2.3 Forcing Password Change Upon First Login (CLI)

To determine whether the system requires users to change their password the
first time they log into the system, enter the following command in root view.
root> platform security access-control password first-login set
<first-login>
To require users to change their password the first time they log in, enter the
root> platform security access-control password first-login set
yes
Table 265: Force Password Change on First Time Login CLI Parameters
first-login Boolean yes When yes is selected, the system requires

no users to change their password the first time
they log in.
21.2.4 Displaying the System Password Settings (CLI)

Use the following command to display the system password settings:
root> platform security access-control password show-all
Page 935 of 1094

21.3 Configuring Users (CLI)

• User Configuration Overview (CLI)
• Configuring User Profiles (CLI)
• Configuring User Accounts (CLI)
Related topics:
21.3.1 User Configuration Overview (CLI)

User configuration is based on the Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) model.
According to the RBAC model, permissions to perform certain operations are
assigned to specific roles. Users are assigned to particular roles, and through
those role assignments acquire the permissions to perform particular system
functions.
In the IP-20 GUI, these roles are called user profiles. Up to 50 user profiles can be
configured. Each profile contains a set of privilege levels per functionality group,
and defines the management protocols (access channels) that can be used to
access the system by users to whom the user profile is assigned.
The system parameters are divided into the following functional groups:
• Security
• Management
• Radio
• TDM
• Ethernet
• Synchronization
A user profile defines the permitted access level per functionality group. For each
functionality group, the access level is defined separately for read and write
operations. The following access levels can be assigned:
• None – No access to this functional group.
• Normal – The user has access to parameters that require basic knowledge
about the functional group.
• Advanced – The user has access to parameters that require advanced
knowledge about the functional group, as well as parameters that have a
significant impact on the system as a whole, such as restoring the
configuration to factory default settings.
21.3.2 Configuring User Profiles (CLI)

User profiles enable you to define system access levels. Each user must be
assigned a user profile. Each user profile contains a detailed set of read
and write permission levels per functionality group.
The system includes a number of pre-defined user profiles. You can edit these
profiles, and add user profiles. Together, the system supports up to 50 user
profiles.
Page 936 of 1094

To create a new user profile with default settings, enter the following command:
root> platform security access-control profile add name
<profile-name>
To edit the settings of a user profile, enter the following command:

root> platform security access-control profile edit group name
<profile-name> group <group> write-lvl <write-lvl> read-
lvl <read-lvl>
Table 266: User Profile CLI Parameters

profile--name Text String Up to 49 characters The name of the user profile.

group Variable security The functionality group for which you
management are defining access levels.
radio
ethernet
sync
write-lvl Variable none The read level for the functionality
normal group.
advanced
read-lvl Variable none The read level for the functionality
normal group.
advanced
The following commands create a user profile called “operator” and give users to
whom this profile is assigned normal write privileges for all system functionality
and advanced read privileges for all functionality except security features.
root> platform security access-control profile add name
operator
root> platform security access-control profile edit group name

operator group security write-lvl normal read-lvl normal group
management write-lvl normal read-lvl advanced group radio
write-lvl normal read-lvl advanced group ethernet write-
lvl normal read-lvl advanced group sync write-lvl normal read-
lvl advanced
Page 937 of 1094

21.3.2.1 Limiting Access Protocols for a User Profile (CLI)

The user profile can limit the access channels that users with the user profile can
use to access the system. By default, a user profile includes all access channels.
Use the following command to limit the protocols users with this user profile can
use to access the system:
root> platform security access-control profile edit mng-channel
name <profile-name> channel-type <channel-type> allowed
<allowed>
Table 267: User Profile Access Protocols CLI Parameters

profile--name Text String Up to 49 characters The name of the user profile.

profile-name Text String Up to 49 characters The name of the user profile.
channel-type Variable Serial The access channel type allowed
Web or disallowed by the command for
users with this user profile.
NMS
Telnet
SSH
allowed Boolean yes • yes – Users with this user
no profile can access the
access channel type
defined in the preceding
parameter.
• no - Users with this user
profile cannot access the
access channel type
defined in the preceding
parameter.
The following command prevents users with the user profile “operator” from
accessing the system via NMS:
root> platform security access-control profile edit mng-channel
name operator channel-type NMS allowed no
21.3.3 Configuring User Accounts (CLI)

You can configure up to 2,000 users. Each user has a user name, password, and
user profile. The user profile defines a set of read and write permission levels per
functionality group (see Configuring User Profiles (CLI)).
To create a new user account, enter the following command:
root> platform security access-control user-account add user-
name <user-name> profile-name <profile-name> expired-date
<expired-date>
When you create a new user account, the system will prompt you to enter a
default password. If Enforce Password Strength is activated (refer to Configuring
Page 938 of 1094

Password Strength Enforcement (CLI)), the password must meet the following
criteria:
• Password length must be at least eight characters.
• Password must include characters of at least three of the following character
types: lower case letters, upper case letters, digits, and special characters. For
purposes of meeting this requirement, upper case letters at the beginning of
the password and digits at the end of the password are not counted.
• The last five passwords you used cannot be reused.
To block or unblock a user account, enter the following command:
name <user-name> block <block>
To change a user account's expiration date, enter the following command:

root> platform security access-control user-account edit
expired-date user-name <user-name> expired-date <expired-date>
Note: The latest date that can be configured is 30-12-2037. If no expiration

date is configured, the user account will expire five years after the
date configured on the unit.
To change a user account's profile, enter the following command:
root> platform security access-control user-account edit
profile-name user-name <user-name> profile-name <profile name>
To delete a user account, enter the following command:

root> platform security access-control user-account delete
user-name <user-name>
To display all user accounts configured on the unit and their settings, including
whether the user is currently logged in and the time of the user's last logout,
root> platform security access-control user-account show
To display the settings of a specific user account, enter the following command:
root> platform security access-control user-account show user-
name <user-name>
Table 268: User Accounts CLI Parameters

user-name Text String Up to 32 characters The name of the user profile.

profile name Text String Up to 49 characters The name of the User Profile you want to
assign to the user. The User Profile
defines the user’s access permissions per
functionality group.
expired-date Date Use the format: Optional. The date on which the user
YYYY-MM-DD account will expire. On this date, the user
automatically becomes inactive.
block Variable yes yes - blocks the account.
no no - unblocks the account.
Page 939 of 1094

The following command creates a user account named Tom_Jones, with user
profile “operator”. This user’s account expires on February 1, 2024.
root> platform security access-control user-account add user-
name Tom_Jones profile-name operator expired-date 2024-02-01
Page 940 of 1094

21.4 Configuring RADIUS (CLI)

• RADIUS Overview (CLI)
• Activating RADIUS Authentication (CLI)
• Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes (CLI)
Note: For instructions on configuring a RADIUS server, see Configuring a
RADIUS Server.
21.4.1 RADIUS Overview (CLI)

The RADIUS protocol provides centralized user management services. IP-20
supports RADIUS server and provides a RADIUS client for authentication and
authorization. When RADIUS is enabled, a user attempting to log into the system
from any access channels (CLI, WEB, NMS) is not authenticated locally. Instead,
the user’s credentials are sent to a centralized standard RADIUS server which
indicates to the IP-20 whether the user is known, and which privilege is to be
given to the user.
You can define up to two Radius servers. If you define two, one serves as the
primary server and the other as the secondary server.
21.4.2 Activating RADIUS Authentication (CLI)

To enable or disable Radius access control, enter the following command:
root> platform security radius-admin set <admin>
Table 269: Activate RADIUS CLI Parameters

Type Values
admin Variable enable Enables or disables Radius access control.

disable
21.4.3 Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes (CLI)

To configure Radius server attributes, enter the following command:
root> platform security radius-server-communication-ipv4 set
server-id <server-id> ip-address <ip-address> port <radius-
port> retries <retries> timeout <timeout> secret <shared-
secret>
Table 270: Configure RADIUS Server CLI Parameters

Values
server-id Number 1 • 1 - The primary Radius server

2 • 2 - The secondary Radius server.
Page 941 of 1094


Values
ip-address Dotted Any valid IP The IP address of the Radius server.
decimal address
format
radius-port Number 0-65535 The port ID of the RADIUS server.
retries Number 3-30 The number of times the device will try to
communicate with the RADIUS server before
declaring the server to be unreachable.
timeout Number 1-10 The timeout (in seconds) that the agent will wait in
each communication with the selected RADIUS
server before retrying if no response is received.
shared- String Between 22- The shared secret of the RADIUS server.
secret 128 characters
The following command configures Radius server attributes for the primary Radius
server:
root> platform security radius-server-communication-ipv4 set
server-id 1 ip-address 192.168.1.99 port 1812 retries 5 timeout
10 secret U8glp3KJ6FKGksdgase4IQ9FMm
Page 942 of 1094

21.5 Configuring TACACS+ (CLI)

Notes: For an overview of TACACS+, see TACACS+ Overview.
To enable or disable TACACS+ access control, enter the following command in
root view:
root>platform security tacacs-plus set admin <enable|disable>
Note: When TACACS+ is enabled or disabled, all active sessions are

terminated.
To define a timeout (in seconds), enter the following command in root view:
root>platform security tacacs-plus set timeout <1-60>
The timeout determines how long to wait for a response from the TACACS+ server
until the connection attempt times out. When a connection attempt times out,
the device attempts to contact the next configured TACACS+ server.
To define the number of retries, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security tacacs-plus set retry <1-5>
This sets the number of times the device will attempt to contact each server
before moving on to the next server on the list. The default value is 1.
To set the TACACS+ server attributes, enter one of the following commands,
depending on whether you want to configure the TACACS+ server’s IP address in
IPv4 or IPv6 format. You can configure up to four TACACS+ servers. When
authenticating a user, the device contacts attempts to contact the TACACS+
servers in the order of the Server IDs you assign to each server. If no response is
received from Server 1 within the user-defined timeout period, the device
attempts to contact Server 2, then Server 3, then Server 4. If no response is
received from any of the servers, the device performs user authentication locally.
Note: You cannot enter both an IPV4 and an IPV6 address. Whichever format
you enter, the other field must be left blank.
To determine the authentication type for TACACS+, enter the following command
in root view:
root> platform security tacacs-plus set authentication type
<ascii|pap|chap>
To configure a TACACS+ server with an IPv4 IP address, enter the following

root> platform security tacacs-plus set ipv4 server-id <1-4>
ip-address <IPv4-address> port <port> shared-secret <shared-
secret>
To configure a TACACS+ server with an IPv6 IP address, enter the following

root>platform security tacacs-plus set ipv6 server-id <1-4> ip-
address <IPv6-address> port < port > shared-secret <shared-
secret>
To delete a TACACS+ server, enter the following command in root view:

root>platform security tacacs-plus delete server-id <1-4>
Page 943 of 1094

Table 271: TACACS+ CLI Parameters

server-id Number 1-4 Sets the priority of the server.

IPv4-address Dotted decimal format Any valid IPV4 The IP address of the TACACS+
address. server.
IPv6-address Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 The IP address of the TACACS+
hexadecimal digits address. server.
port Number 0-65535 The port ID of the TACACS+
server. The default value is 49.
shared-secret String Between 16-65 The shared secret of the
characters TACACS+ server.
Note: This field should not be
left empty unless necessary for
debugging.
To display the current TACACS+ configuration and status for the device, enter the
root>platform security tacacs-plus show
The following is a sample output. In addition to the configurable parameters

described above, the command output displays the following for each server:
• Last Connection Attempt – The connectivity status of the TACACS+ server in
the last attempted connection:
◦ succeeded – The last connection attempt succeeded.
◦ failed – The last connection attempt failed.
Page 944 of 1094

21.6 Displaying Remote Access Users

You can view remote access user connectivity and permissions information for all
RADIUS or TACACS+ users currently connected. To do so, enter the following
root> platform security remote-access show
The following user information is displayed, for each currently connected remote
access user:
• User Name – The user name
• Access Channels – The permitted access channels.
• Number of Active Sessions – The number of currently open sessions.
• Security Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the Security
functional group: None, Regular or Advanced.
• Security Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the Security
functional group: None, Regular or Advanced.
• Management Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the
Management functional group: None, Regular or Advanced.
• Management Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the
Management functional group: None, Regular or Advanced.
• Radio Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the Radio functional
group: None, Regular or Advanced.
• Radio Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the Radio functional
• TDM Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the TDM functional
• TDM Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the TDM functional
• Eth Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the Eth functional
• Eth Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the Eth functional
• Sync Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the Sync functional
• Sync Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the Sync functional
Page 945 of 1094

21.7 Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates (CLI)

The web interface protocol for accessing IP-20 can be configured to HTTP (default)
or HTTPS. It cannot be set to both at the same time.
Before setting the protocol to HTTPS, you must:
1 Create and upload a CSR file. See Generating a Certificate Signing Request
(CSR) File (CLI).
2 Download the certificate to the IP-20 and install the certificate. See
Downloading a Certificate (CLI).
3 Enable HTTPS. See Enabling HTTPS (CLI).
When uploading a CSR and downloading a certificate, the IP-20 functions as an
SFTP client. You must install SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are
using to perform the upload or download. For details, see Installing and
Note: For these operations, SFTP must be used.
• Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File (CLI)
• Downloading a Certificate (CLI)
• Enabling HTTPS (CLI)
21.7.1 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File (CLI)

Note: If you need a customized public RSA key, you must download and
install the RSA key first, before generating a CSR file. Otherwise, the
CSR file will include the current public RSA key. See Downloading and
Installing an RSA Key (CLI).
To set the CSR parameters, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security csr-set-parameters common-name <common-
name> country <country> state <state> locality <locality>
organization <organization> org-unit <org-unit> email <email>
file-format <file-format>
To display the currently-configured CSR parameters, enter the following command

in root view:
root> platform security csr-show-parameters
If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4, enter the following command in

root view to configure the SFTP server parameters for the CSR file upload:
root> platform security csr-set-server-parameters server-ipv4
<server-ipv4> server-path <server-path> filename <filename>
server-username <username> server-password <password>

root view to configure the SFTP server parameters for the CSR file upload:
root> platform security csr-set-server-parameters server-ipv6
Page 946 of 1094

To display the currently-configured SFTP parameters for CSR upload, enter the
root> platform security csr-show-server-parameters
To generate and upload a CSR, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security csr-generate-and-upload
To display the status of a pending CSR generation and upload operation, enter the
root> platform security csr-generate-and-upload-show-status
Table 272: CSR Generation and Upload CLI Parameters

common name String The fully–qualified domain name for your

web server. You must enter the exact
domain name.
country String The two-letter ISO abbreviation for your
country (e.g., US)
state String The state, province, or region in which the
organization is located. Do not abbreviate.
locality String The city in which the organization is legally
located.
organization String The exact legal name of your organization.
Do not abbreviate.
org-unit String The division of the organization that
handles the certificate.
email String An e-mail address that can be used to
contact your organization.
file-format Variable PEM The file format of the CSR. In this version,
DER only PEM is supported.
server-ipv4 Dotted Any valid IPv4 IP The IPv4 address of the PC or laptop you
decimal address. are using as the SFTP server.
format.
server-ipv6 Eight groups Any valid IPv6 The IPv6 address of the PC or laptop you
of four address. are using as the SFTP server.
hexadecimal
digits
separated by
colons.
server-path Text String The directory path to which you are
uploading the CSR. Enter the path relative
to the SFTP user's home directory, not the
absolute path. If the location is the home
directory, it should be left empty. If the
location is a sub-folder under the home
directory, specify the folder name. If the
Page 947 of 1094


shared folder is "C:\", this parameter can
be left empty or populated with "//".
filename Text String The name you want to give the CSR.
username Text String The user name for the SFTP session.
password Text String The password for the SFTP session. To
configure the SFTP settings without a
password, simply omit this parameter.
21.7.2 Downloading a Certificate (CLI)

root view to configure the SFTP server parameters for downloading a certificate:
root> platform security certificate-set-download-parameters
server-ipv4 <server-ipv4> server-path <server-path> filename
<filename> server-username <username> server-password
<password>

root view to configure the SFTP server parameters for downloading a certificate:
root> platform security certificate-set-download-parameters
server-ipv6 < server-ipv6> server-path <server-path> filename
<filename> server-username <username> server-password
<password>
To display the currently-configured SFTP parameters for downloading a

certificate, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security certificate-show-download-parameters
To download a certificate, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform security certificate-download
To display the status of a pending certificate download, enter the following

root> platform security certificate-download-show-status
To install a certificate, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform security certificate-install
Table 273: Certificate Download and Install CLI Parameters

server-ipv4 Dotted decimal Any valid IPv4 IP The IPv4 address of the PC or laptop
format. address. you are using as the SFTP server.
server-ipv6 Eight groups of Any valid IPv6 The IPv6 address of the PC or laptop
four address. you are using as the SFTP server.
hexadecimal
Page 948 of 1094


digits separated
by colons.
server-path Text String The directory path from which you are
downloading the certificate. Enter the
path relative to the SFTP user's home
directory, not the absolute path. If the
location is the home directory, it
should be left empty. If the location is
a sub-folder under the home
directory, specify the folder name. If
the shared folder is "C:\", this
parameter can be left empty or
populated with "//".
filename Text String The certificate’s file name in the SFTP
server.
Page 949 of 1094

21.8 Enabling HTTPS (CLI)

By default, HTTP is used by IP-20 as its web interface protocol.
To change the protocol to HTTPS, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security url-protocol-set url-protocol https
Note: Make sure you have installed a valid certificate in the IP-20 before
changing the web interface protocol to HTTPS. Failure to do this may
prevent users from accessing the Web EMS.
To change the protocol back to HTTP, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security url-protocol-set url-protocol http
To display which protocol is currently enabled, enter the following command in

root view:
root> platform security url-protocol-show
Page 950 of 1094

21.9 Configuring HTTPS Cipher Hardening (CLI)

You can configure the IP-20 to operate in HTTPS strong mode. In HTTPS strong
mode, SSLv3, TLSv1.0, and TLSv1.1 are disabled completely and only certain
ciphers are supported in TLSv1.2.
In FIPS mode also, SSLv3, TLSv1.0, and TLSv1.1 are disabled completely and only
certain ciphers are supported in TLSv1.2.
For a list of supported HTTPS ciphers, including an indication of which ciphers are
supported in HTTPS strong mode and FIPS mode, refer to Annex B – Supported
Ciphers for Secured Communication Protocols in the Release Notes for the CeraOS
version you are using.
Note: HTTPS cipher hardening is supported from CeraOS 10.3. HTTPS cipher
hardening is not available in FIPS mode.
To set HTTPS strong mode, enter the following command:
root> platform security https-ciphers-hardening-level-set level
strong
To set HTTPS normal mode, enter the following command:

root> platform security https-ciphers-hardening-level-set level
normal
Note: The default HTTP cipher mode is normal.

To display the current HTTPS cipher mode, enter the following command:
root> platform security https-ciphers-hardening-level-show
Page 951 of 1094

21.10 Downloading and Installing an RSA Key (CLI)

IP-20 devices support RSA keys for communication using HTTPS and SSH protocol.
The IP-20 device comes with randomly generated default private and public RSA
keys. However, you can replace the private key with a customer-defined private
key. The corresponding RSA public key will be generated based on this private key.
The file must be in PEM format. Supported RSA private key sizes are 2048, 4096,
and 8192.
The following is an example of a valid RSA private key file:
-----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----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-----END PRIVATE KEY-----
You can download and install a private RSA key via HTTP, HTTPS, or SFTP. It is
strongly recommended not to use HTTP to download RSA key files.
Note: To download an RSA key file using HTTP or HTTPS, you must use the
Web EMS. See Downloading an RSA Key via HTTP or HTTPS.
To display the current RSA public key, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security rsa-show-installed-public-key

root view to configure the SFTP server parameters for downloading the RSA key:
root> platform security rsa-set-download-parameters server-ipv4
Page 952 of 1094


root view to configure the SFTP server parameters for downloading the RSA key:
root> platform security rsa-set-download-parameters server-ipv6
To download an RSA key, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform security rsa-download
To install the RSA key, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security rsa-install
Table 274: RSA Key Download and Install CLI Parameters

server-ipv4 Dotted decimal Any valid IPv4 IP The IPv4 address of the PC or laptop you are
format. address. using as the SFTP server.
server-ipv6 Eight groups of Any valid IPv6 The IPv6 address of the PC or laptop you are
four address. using as the SFTP server.
hexadecimal
digits separated
by colons.
server-path Text String The directory path from which you are
downloading the RSA key. Enter the path
relative to the SFTP user's home directory,
not the absolute path. If the location is the
home directory, it should be populated with
"". If the location is a sub-folder under the
home directory, specify the folder name. If
the shared folder is "C:\", this parameter can
be populated with "".
filename Text String The RSA key file’s name in the SFTP server.
password, populate this parameter with “”..
Page 953 of 1094

21.11 Blocking Telnet Access (CLI)

You can block telnet access to the unit. By default, telnet access is not blocked.
To block telnet access, enter the following command:
root> platform security protocols-control telnet admin set
disable
To unblock telnet access, enter the following command:

root> platform security protocols-control telnet admin set
enable
To display whether telnet is currently allowed (enable) or blocked (disable), enter

root> platform security protocols-control telnet show
Note: When you block telnet, any current telnet sessions are immediately
disconnected.
21.12 Uploading the Security Log (CLI)

The security log is an internal system file which records all changes performed to
any security feature, as well as all security related events.
In order to read the security log, you must upload the log to an FTP or SFTP server.
IP-20 works with any standard FTP or SFTP server. For details, see Installing and
Before uploading the security log, you must install and configure the FTP server on
the laptop or PC from which you are performing the download. See Installing and
To set the FTP parameters for security log upload, enter the following command
in root view:
root> platform security file-transfer set server-path <server-
path> file-name <file-name> ip-address <ip-address> protocol
<protocol> username <username> password <password>
To display the FTP channel parameters for uploading the security log, enter the
root> platform security file-transfer show configuration
To upload the security log to your FTP server, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform security file-transfer operation set upload-
security-log
To display the progress of a current security log upload operation, enter the
root> platform security file-transfer show operation
To display the result of the most recent current security log upload operation,
root> platform security file-transfer show status
Page 954 of 1094

Table 275: Security Log CLI Parameters

server-path Text String The directory path to which you are

uploading the security log. Enter the path
relative to the FTP user's home directory, not
the absolute path. If the location is the home
directory, it should be left empty. If the
location is a sub-folder under the home
directory, specify the folder name. If the
shared folder is "C:\", this parameter can be
left empty or populated with "//".
file-name Text String The name you want to give the file you are
uploading.
ip-address Dotted Any valid IP The IP address of the FTP server.
decimal address.
format.
protocol Variable ftp
sftp
username Text String The user name for the FTP or SFTP session.
password Text String The password for the FTP or SFTP session. To
configure the FTP settings without a
The following commands configure an FTP channel for security log upload to IP
address 192.168.1.80, in the directory “current”, with file name
“security_log_Oct8.zip”, user name “anonymous”, and password “12345”, and
initiate the upload:
root> platform security file-transfer set server-path \current
file-name security_log_Oct8.zip ip-address 192.168.1.80
protocol ftp username anonymous password 12345
root> platform security file-transfer operation set upload-

security-log
Page 955 of 1094

21.13 Uploading the Configuration Log (CLI)

The configuration log lists actions performed by users to configure the system.
This file is mostly used for security, to identify suspicious user actions. It can also
be used for troubleshooting.
In order to upload the configuration log, you must install an FTP or SFTP server on
the laptop or PC from which you are performing the upload. IP-20 works with any
standard FTP or SFTP server. For details, see Installing and Configuring an FTP or
SFTP Server.
To set the FTP or SFTP parameters for configuration log export, enter the
root> platform security configuration-log-upload-params set
path <path> file-name <file-name> ip-address <ip-address>
protocol <protocol> username <username> password <password>
To display the FTP or SFTP parameters for configuration log export, enter the
root> platform security configuration-log-upload-params show
To export the configuration log, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security configuration-log upload
To display the status of a configuration log export operation, enter the following
command in root view
root> platform security configuration-log-upload-status show
Table 276: Configuration Log CLI Parameters

path Text String The directory path to which you are

exporting the configuration log. Enter the
path relative to the FTP user's home
directory, not the absolute path. If the
location is the home directory, it should be
left empty. If the location is a sub-folder
under the home directory, specify the folder
name. If the shared folder is "C:\", this
parameter can be left empty or populated
with "//".
file-name Text String The name you want to give the file you are
exporting.
Note: You must add the suffix .zip to the
file name. Otherwise, the file import may
fail. You can export the file using any name,
then add the suffix .zip manually. For
example: UnitInfo.zip
If the Unit Information file is exported
several times consecutively, the file itself will
not be replaced. Instead, the filename will be
Page 956 of 1094

updated by time stamp. For example:

UnitInfo.zip.11-05-14 03-31-04
ip-address Dotted Any valid IP The IP address of the PC or laptop you are
decimal address. using as the FTP or SFTP server.
format.
protocol Variable ftp The file transfer protocol.
sftp
username Text String The user name for the FTP or SFTP session.
password Text String The password for the FTP or SFTP session. To
configure the FTP or SFTP settings without a
Note: The path and fie name, together, cannot be more than:
If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4: 236 characters
If the IP address family is configured to be IPv6: 220 characters
The following commands configure an FTP channel for configuration log export to
IP address 192.168.1.99, in the directory “current”, with file name “cfg_log”, user
name “anonymous”, and password “12345.”
path \file-name cfg_log ip-address 192.168.1.99 protocol ftp
root> platform unit-info channel set protocol ftp
The following command exports the configuration log to the external server
location:
root> platform security configuration-log upload
Page 957 of 1094

21.14 Enabling NETCONF (CLI)

IP-20 devices support SDN, with NETCONF/YANG capabilities. This enables IP-20
devices to be managed via SDN using Ceragon’s SDN controller, SDN Master.
In order for the device to be managed via SDN, you must enable NETCONF on the
device. By default, NETCONF is disabled.
To enable NETCONF, enter the following command in root view:
root>platform security protocols-control netconf admin set
enable
To disable NETCONF, enter the following command in root view:

root>platform security protocols-control netconf admin set
disable
To display the current NETCONF configuration on the device, enter the following
root>platform security protocols-control netconf show-all
Page 958 of 1094

21.15 Terminating all Active Sessions (CLI)

You can terminate all active sessions of all users by entering the following
root> platform security access-control disconnect all
This command terminates sessions using any channel type:

• Serial
• Web
• NMS
• Telnet
• SSH
Page 959 of 1094

22. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting (CLI)

• Viewing Current Alarms (CLI)
• Viewing the Event Log (CLI)
• Editing Alarm Text and Severity (CLI)
• Configuring a Timeout for Trap Generation (CLI)
• Disabling Alarms and Events (CLI)
• Configuring Voltage Alarm Thresholds and Displaying Voltage PMs (CLI)
• Uploading Unit Info (CLI)
• Activating the Radio Logger (CLI)
• Performing Diagnostics (CLI)
• Working in CW Mode (Single or Dual Tone) (CLI)
22.1 Viewing Current Alarms (CLI)

To display all alarms currently raised on the unit, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform status current-alarm show module unit
To display the most severe alarm currently raised in the unit, enter the following
root> platform status current-alarm show most-severe-alarm
module unit
22.2 Viewing the Event Log (CLI)

The Event Log displays a list of current and historical events and information
about each event.
To display the event log, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform status event-log show module unit
To clear the event log, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform status event-log clear module unit
Note: You can save the event log to a CSV file from the Web EMS. See
Viewing and Saving the Event Log.
22.3 Editing Alarm Text and Severity (CLI)

You can view a list of alarm types, edit the severity level assigned to individual
alarm types, and add additional descriptive text to individual alarm types.
• Displaying Alarm Information (CLI)
• Editing an Alarm Type (CLI)
• Setting Alarms to their Default Values (CLI)
Page 960 of 1094

22.3.1 Displaying Alarm Information (CLI)

To display a list of all alarm types, their severity levels, descriptions, and admin
status (enabled or disabled), enter the following command in root view:
root> platform status alarm-management show alarm-id all
To display the attributes of a specific alarm, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform status alarm-management show alarm-id <alarm-id>
attributes
22.3.2 Editing an Alarm Type (CLI)

To edit an alarm type’s severity level, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform status alarm-management set alarm-id <alarm-id>
severity-level <severity-level>
To add descriptive information to an alarm type, enter the following command in

root view:
additional-text <additional-text>
Table 277: Editing Alarm Text and Severity CLI Parameters

alarm-id Number All valid alarm type IDs, Enter the unique Alarm ID that identifies
depending on system the alarm type.
configuration
severity- Variable indeterminate The severity of the alarm, as displayed to
level critical users.
major
minor
warning
additional- Text String 255 characters An additional text description of the alarm
text type.
The following command changes the severity level of alarm type 401 (Loss of
Carrier) to minor:
root> platform status alarm-management set alarm-id 401
severity-level minor
22.3.3 Setting Alarms to their Default Values (CLI)

To restore an alarm type’s severity level and description to their default values,
restore default
To restore the severity levels and descriptions of all alarm types to their default
values, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform status alarm-management set all default
Page 961 of 1094

Table 278: Restoring Alarms to Default CLI Parameters

alarm-id Number All valid alarm type Enter the unique Alarm ID that
IDs, depending on identifies the alarm type.
system configuration
The following command restores alarm type 401 (Loss of Carrier) to its default
severity level:
root> platform status alarm-management set alarm-id 401 restore
default
22.4 Configuring a Timeout for Trap Generation (CLI)

You can configure a wait time of up to 120 seconds after an alarm is cleared in the
system before the alarm is actually reported as being cleared. This prevents traps
flooding the NMS in the event that some external condition causes the alarm to
be raised and cleared continuously.
This means that when the alarm is cleared, the alarm continues to be displayed and no
clear alarm trap is sent until the timeout period is finished.
The timeout for trap generation can be configured via CLI. By default, the timeout is 10
seconds.
Note: If the unit is upgraded from an earlier version to CeraOS 10.0 or
higher, the timeout retains its previous value until it is changed. That
means if it was never configured, it retains its previous default value of
0. If the unit is set to its factory default configuration, the timeout is
set to 10 seconds.
To configure the timeout (in seconds) for trap generation, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform status alarm-management alarm-stabilization-set time <0-
120>
To disable the timeout for trap generation, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform status alarm-management alarm-stabilization-set
time 0
To display the current trap generation timeout, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform status alarm-management alarm-stabilization-show
The following command sets a trap generation timeout of 60 seconds:

root> platform status alarm-management alarm-stabilization-set
time 60
Page 962 of 1094

22.5 Disabling Alarms and Events (CLI)

You can choose to disable selected alarms and events. Any alarm or event can be
disabled, so that no indication of the alarm is displayed, and no traps are sent for
the alarm.
If you disable an alarm that is currently raised, the alarm is treated as if it has
been cleared. If an alarm that has been disabled is enabled while it is in a raised
state, the alarm is treated as if it has just been raised when it is enabled.
If a timeout for trap generation is configured, and a disabled alarm is enabled
while the alarm is raised, the timeout count begins to run when the alarm is
enabled. If an alarm is disabled while raised, the timeout count begins to run upon
disabling the alarm, and an alarm cleared trap is sent when the timeout expires.
To disable an alarm or event, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform status alarm-management set alarm-id <alarm ID> admin
disable
To enable an alarm or event, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform status alarm-management set alarm-id <alarm ID> admin
enable
To display a list of all disabled alarms and events, and their attributes, enter the
root> platform status alarm-management show all admin disable attributes
To display a list of all enabled alarms and events and their attributes, enter the
root> platform status alarm-management show all admin enable attributes
To enable all alarms and events, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform status alarm-management set all admin default
The alarm status commands platform status alarm-management show alarm-

id all and platform status alarm-management show alarm-id <alarm-id>
attributes display alarms, even if they are disabled. The Alarm Admin column in
the output displays whether the alarm or event is enabled or disabled.
Page 963 of 1094

22.6 Configuring Voltage Alarm Thresholds and Displaying Voltage

PMs (CLI)
You can configure undervoltage and overvoltage alarm thresholds.
The default thresholds for IP-20C are:
The default thresholds for the other IP-20 all-outdoor products are:
These thresholds determine when the following alarms are raised and cleared:
• Alarm #32000: Under voltage
• Alarm #32001: Over voltage
To display the current thresholds, enter the following command in root view.
root> platform management voltage thresholds show
To change the threshold for raising an undervoltage alarm, enter the following
root> platform management undervoltage set raise-threshold <0-100>
To change the threshold for clearing an undervoltage alarm, enter the following
root> platform management undervoltage set clear-threshold <0-100>
To change the threshold for raising an overvoltage alarm, enter the following
root> platform management overvoltage set raise-threshold <0-100>
To change the threshold for clearing an overvoltage alarm, enter the following
root> platform management overvoltage set clear-threshold <0-100>
You can display voltage PMs that indicate, per 15-minute and 24-hour periods:
• The number of seconds the unit was in an undervoltage state during the
measured period.
• The number of seconds the unit was in an overvoltage state during the
measured period.
• The lowest voltage during the measured period.
• The highest voltage during the measured period.
To display voltage PMs, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management voltage pm show pm-interval-type
<all|15min|24hr>
Page 964 of 1094

For example:
The IDF column indicates whether the PM is valid:

• 1 indicates an invalid entry. This can be caused by a power surge or power
failure that occurred during the interval.
Page 965 of 1094

22.7 Uploading Unit Info (CLI)

You can generate a unit information file, which includes technical data about the
unit. This file can be forwarded to customer support, at their request, to help in
analyzing issues that may occur.
Note: For troubleshooting, it is important that an updated configuration file
be included in User Info files that are sent to customer support. To
ensure that an up-to-date configuration file is included, it is
recommended to back up the unit’s configuration before generating
the Unit Info file.
In order to export a unit information file, you must install an FTP or SFTP server on
the laptop or PC from which you are performing the upload. IP-20 works with any
standard FTP or SFTP server. For details, see Installing and Configuring an FTP or
SFTP Server.
Note: You can also use HTTP or HTTPS to upload the Unit Information file.
HTTP or HTTPS upload must be performed via the Web EMS. See
Uploading Unit Info.
To set the FTP or SFTP parameters for unit information file export, enter one of
the following commands in root view. If the IP protocol selected in platform
management ip set ip-address-family is IPv4, enter the destination IPv4 address. If
the selected IP protocol is IPv6, enter the destination IPv6 address.
root> platform unit-info channel server set ip-address <server-
ipv4> directory <directory> filename <filename> username
<username> password <password>
root> platform unit-info channel server-ipv6 set ip-address

<server-ipv6> directory <directory> filename <filename>
To set the protocol for unit information file export, enter the following command
in root view.
root> platform unit-info channel set protocol <protocol>
To display the FTP or SFTP parameters for unit information file export, enter one
of the following commands in root view:
root> platform unit-info-file channel show
root> platform unit-info-file channel-ipv6 show
To create a unit information file based on the current state of the system, enter
root> platform unit-info-file create
To export the unit information file you just created, enter the following command
in root view:
root> platform unit-info-file export
To display the status of a unit information file export operation, enter the
following command in root view
root> platform unit-info-file status show
Page 966 of 1094

Table 279: Uploading Unit Info CLI Parameters

server-ipv4 Dotted decimal Any valid IPv4 The IPv4 address of the PC or laptop
format. address. you are using as the FTP or SFTP
server.
server-ipv6 Eight groups of Any valid IPv6 The IPv6 address of the PC or laptop
four address. you are using as the FTP or SFTP
hexadecimal server.
digits separated
by colons.
directory Text String The directory path to which you are
exporting the unit information file.
Enter the path relative to the FTP or
SFTP user's home directory, not the
absolute path. If the location is the
home directory, it should be left
empty. If the location is a sub-folder
under the home directory, specify the
folder name. If the shared folder is
"C:\", this parameter can be left empty
or populated with "//".
filename Text String The name you want to give the file you
are exporting.
Note: You must add the suffix .zip to
the file name. Otherwise, the file
import may fail. You can export the
file using any name, then add the
suffix .zip manually.
username Text String The user name for the FTP or SFTP
session.
password Text String The password for the FTP or SFTP
session. To configure the FTP or SFTP
settings without a password, simply
omit this parameter.
protocol Variable ftp The file transfer protocol.
sftp
The following commands configure an FTP or SFTP channel for configuration log
export to IP address 192.168.1.99, in the directory “current”, with file name
“cfg_log”, user name “anonymous”, and password “12345.”
path \\ file-name cfg_log ip-address 192.168.1.99 protocol ftp
Page 967 of 1094

The following commands create a unit information file and export the file to the
external server location:
The following commands configures an FTP channel for unit information file
export to IP address 192.168.1.99, in the directory “current”, with file name
“version_8_backup.zip”, user name “anonymous”, and password “12345.”
root> platform unit-info channel server set ip-address
192.168.1.99 directory \current filename version_8_backup.zip
The following commands create a unit information file and export the file to the
external server location:
Page 968 of 1094

22.8 Activating the Radio Logger (CLI)

The Radio Logger, when it is activated, gathers technical data about the radio and
its operation. By default, the Radio Logger is inactive. It should only be activated
by technical support personnel, or by the customer upon request of Ceragon’s
Customer Support team. Data gathered by the Radio Logger is added to the Unit
Info file, which can be exported from the unit and sent to Customer Support upon
their request. See Uploading Unit Info (CLI).
Note: In order to conserve CPU resources, do not activate the Radio Logger
unless it is necessary for unit diagnostic purposes, and do not leave it
active longer than necessary.
To activate the Radio Logger, enter the following command in root view:
root> logger start logger-type radio logger-duration <1-1440>
slot1 2 port1 1 slot2 2 port2 2
The logger-duration parameter is set in minutes. You can activate the logger on
one or (for IP-20C and IP-20C-HP) two radios in a single command. For example,
the following command activates the logger for 40 minutes on both carriers of an
IP-20C or IP-20C-HP device:
root> logger start logger-type radio logger-duration 40 slot1 2
port1 1 slot2 2 port2 2
To display whether the Radio Logger is currently active, enter the following
root> logger get status logger-type radio
For example, the following display indicates the Radio Logger has been set on
both carriers for 20 minutes, and that the Logger is set to run for an additional
1191 seconds:
root> logger get status logger-type radio
Logger status:
Logger duration(in minutes): 20
Logger time left(in seconds): 1191
Active instances list:
Slot 2 Port 1
Slot 2 Port 2
root>
To stop the Radio Logger manually, enter the following command in root view:
root> logger stop logger-type radio
To delete all data that has been saved by the Radio Logger, enter the following
root> logger delete logger files<logger-type>.
Important Note: Whenever you activate the Radio Logger, any previous Radio
Logger results are deleted.
Page 969 of 1094

22.9 Performing Diagnostics (CLI)

• Performing Radio Loopback (CLI)
• Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM) (CLI)
22.9.1 Performing Radio Loopback (CLI)

Note: To perform radio loopback, the radio must be set to its maximum TX
power.
You can perform loopback on a radio.
To set the timeout for a radio loopback, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]> radio loopbacks-timeout set duration <duration>
To display the radio loopback timeout, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>radio loopbacks-timeout show
To activate an RF loopback, enter the following command in radio view:

radio[x/x]>rf loopback-rf set admin <admin>
Table 280: Radio Loopback CLI Parameters

duration Number 0 – 1440 The timeout, in minutes, for automatic

termination of a loopback. A value of 0 indicates
that there is no timeout.
admin Variable on Set on to initiate an RF loopback.
off
The following commands initiate an RF loopback on radio carrier 1 with a timeout

of two minutes:
radio[2/1]> radio loopbacks-timeout set duration 2
radio[2/1]>rf loopback-rf set admin on
The following command cancels an RF loopback on radio carrier 1:

radio[2/1]>rf loopback-rf set admin off
22.9.2 Performing Ethernet Loopback (CLI)

Ethernet loopbacks can be performed on any logical Ethernet interface except a
LAG. When Ethernet loopback is enabled on an interface, the system loops back
all packets ingressing the interface. This enables loopbacks to be performed over
the link from other points in the network.
To configure loopback on an Ethernet interface, go to interface view for the
eth type eth[x/x]> loopback admin <loopback-admin-state>
Page 970 of 1094

To configure the loopback duration time, go to interface view for the interface
eth type eth[x/x]> loopback set duration <loopback-duration>
You can select whether to swap DA and SA MAC addresses during the loopback.
Swapping addresses prevents Ethernet loops from occurring. It is recommended
to enable MAC address swapping if MSTP or LLDP is enabled.
To configure MAC address swapping, go to interface view for the interface and
eth type eth[x/x]> loopback swap-mac-address admin <MAC_swap-
admin-state>
To view loopback status, go to interface view for the interface and enter the
following command:
eth type eth[x/x]> loopback status show
Table 281: Ethernet Loopback CLI Parameters

loopback- Variable enable Enter enable to enable Ethernet loopback on

admin-state disable the interface, or disable to disable Ethernet
loopback on the interface.
loopback- Number 1 - 900 The loopback duration time, in seconds.
duration
MAC_swap- Variable enable Enter enable to enable MAC address
admin-state disable swapping, or disable to disable MAC address
swapping.
The following command enables Ethernet loopback on Ethernet interface 2:

eth type eth [1/2]> loopback admin enable
The following command sets the loopback duration time to 900 seconds:
eth type eth [1/2]> loopback set duration 900
The following command enables MAC address swapping during the loopback:
eth type eth [1/2]> loopback swap-mac-address admin enable
The following command displays Ethernet port loopback status:

eth type eth [1/2]> loopback status show
Page 971 of 1094

22.9.3 Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM) (CLI)

• SOAM Overview (CLI)
• Configuring MDs (CLI)
• Configuring MA/MEGs (CLI)
• Configuring MEPs (CLI)
• Displaying MEP and Remote MEP Attributes (CLI)
• Displaying Detailed MEP Error Information (CLI)
• Performing Loopback (CLI)
Page 972 of 1094

22.9.3.1 SOAM Overview (CLI)

The Y.1731 standard and the MEF-30 specifications define Service OAM (SOAM).
SOAM is concerned with detecting, isolating, and reporting connectivity faults
spanning networks comprising multiple LANs, including LANs other than IEEE
802.3 media.
Y.1731 Ethernet FM (Fault Management) consists of three protocols that operate
together to aid in fault management:
• Continuity check
• Link trace
• Loopback
Note: Link trace is planned for future release.
IP-20 utilizes these protocols to maintain smooth system operation and non-stop
data flow.
The following are the basic building blocks of FM:
• MD (Maintenance Domain) – An MD defines the management space on a
network, typically owned and operated by a single entity, for which
connectivity faults are managed via SOAM.
• MA/MEG (Maintenance Association/Maintenance Entity Group) – An
MA/MEG contains a set of MEPs or MIPs.
• MEP (MEG End Points) – Each MEP is located on a service point of an Ethernet
service at the boundary of the MEG. By exchanging CCMs (Continuity Check
Messages), local and remote MEPs have the ability to detect the network
status, discover the MAC address of the remote unit/port where the peer
MEP is defined, and identify network failures.
• MIP (MEG Intermediate Points) – Similar to MEPs, but located inside the MEG
and can only respond to, not initiate, CCM messages.
• CCM (Continuity Check Message) – MEPs in the network exchange CCMs with
their peers at defined intervals. This enables each MEP to detect loss of
connectivity or failure in the remote MEP.
Page 973 of 1094

22.9.3.2 Configuring MDs (CLI)

In the current release, you can define one MD, with an MD Format of None.
To add an MD, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam md create md-id <md-id> md-format none md-
name <md-name> md-level <md-level>
Note: Support for MDs with the MD format Character String is planned for
future release. In this release, the software enables you to configure
such MDs, but they have no functionality.
The following command creates MD 5, named TR-988 with maintenance level 5.
root> ethernet soam md create md-id 5 md-format none md-name
TR-988 md-level 5
To delete an MD, enter the following command in root view. Before deleting an
MD, you must delete any MA/MEG associated with the MD.
root> ethernet soam md delete md-id <md-id>
To display a list of MDs and their attributes, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet soam md show
Table 282: Maintenance Domain CLI Parameters

md-id Number 1-4294967295

md-name String Up to 43 An identifier for the MD. The MD Name should
alphanumeric be unique over the domain.
characters.
md-level Number 0-7 The maintenance level of the MD. The
maintenance level ensures that the CFM frames
for each domain do not interfere with each
other. Where domains are nested, the
encompassing domain must have a higher level
than the domain it encloses. The maintenance
level is carried in all CFM frames that relate to
that domain. The maintenance level must be
the same on both sides of the link.
Note: In the current release, the
maintenance level is not relevant to the SOAM
functionality.
Page 974 of 1094

22.9.3.3 Configuring MA/MEGs (CLI)

You can configure up to 1280 MEGs per network element. MEGs are classified as
Fast MEGs or Slow MEGs according to the CCM interval (see Table 283):
• Fast MEGs have a CCM interval of 1 second.
• Slow MEGs have a CCM interval of 10 seconds, 1 minute, or 10 minutes.
You can configure up to 32 MEP pairs per network element.
To add an MA/MEG, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam meg create meg-id <meg-id> meg-fmt
charString meg-name <meg-name> meg-level <meg-level> service-id
<0-4095>
Note: In the current release, charString is the only available MEG name
format.
The following command creates MEG ID 1, named FR-10, with MEG level 4,
assigned to Ethernet service 20.
root> ethernet soam meg create meg-id 1 meg-fmt charString meg-
name FR-10 meg-level 4 service-id 20
To set the interval at which CCM messages are sent within the MEG, enter the
root> ethernet soam meg ccm-interval set meg-id <meg-id> ccm <ccm>
The following command sets an interval of one second between CCM messages
for MEG 1.
root> ethernet soam meg ccm-interval set meg-id 1 ccm
interval1s
To determine whether MIPs are created on the MEG, enter the following
root> ethernet soam meg mip set meg-id <meg-id> mhf
<defMHFdefault|defMHFexplicit>
For example, the following command creates MIPs on any service point in the
MEG:
root> ethernet soam meg mip set meg-id 1 mhf defMHFdefault
To delete a MEG, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet soam meg delete <meg-id> ccm <ccm>
Note: To can only delete a MEG if no MEPs or MIPs are attached to the MEP.
To display a list of all MEGs configured on the unit, enter the following command
in root view:
root> ethernet soam meg show
To display MEG attributes, including the number of MEPS, local MEPS, and MIPs
attached to the MEG, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam meg attributes show meg-id <meg-id>
Page 975 of 1094

Table 283: SOAM MEG CLI Configuration Parameters

meg-id Number 1-4294967295 Enter an ID for the MEG.

meg-name String Up to 44 A name to identify the MEG.
alphanumeric
characters
meg-level Number 0-7 The MEG level must be the same for MEGs on
both sides of the link. Higher levels take
priority over lower levels.
If MEGs are nested, the OAM flow of each
MEG must be clearly identifiable and
separable from the OAM flows of the other
MEGs. In cases where the OAM flows are not
distinguishable by the Ethernet layer
encapsulation itself, the MEG level in the
OAM frame distinguishes between the OAM
flows of nested MEGs.
Eight MEG levels are available to
accommodate different network deployment
scenarios. When customer, provider, and
operator data path flows are not
distinguishable based on means of the
Ethernet layer encapsulations, the eight MEG
levels can be shared among them to
distinguish between OAM frames belonging
to nested MEGs of customers, providers and
operators. The default MEG level assignment
among customer, provider, and operator
roles is:
• The customer role is assigned MEG
levels 6 and 7
• The provider role is assigned MEG
levels 3 through 5
• The operator role is assigned MEG
levels: 0 through 2
The default MEG level assignment can be
changed via a mutual agreement among
customer, provider, and/or operator roles.
The number of MEG levels used depends on
the number of nested MEs for which the
OAM flows are not distinguishable based on
the Ethernet layer encapsulation.
service-id Number 0-4095 Assign the MEG to an Ethernet service. You
must define the service before you configure
the MEG.
Page 976 of 1094


ccm Variable interval1s interval1s – One second (default)
interval10s interval10s – 10 seconds
interval1min interval1min – One minute
interval10min interval10min – 10 minutes
It takes a MEP 3.5 times the CCM interval to
determine a change in the status of its peer
MEP. For example, if the CCM interval is 1
second, a MEP will detect failure of the peer
3.5 seconds after it receives the first CCM
failure message. If the CCM interval is 10
minutes, the MEP will detect failure of the
peer 35 minutes after it receives the first CCM
failure message.
mhf Variable defMHFnone Determines whether MIPs are created on the
defMHFdefault MEG. Options are:
defMHFexplicit defMHFnone – No MIPs are created.
defMHFdefer defMHFdefault – MIPs are created on any
service point in the MEG.
defMHFexplicit – MIPs are created on the
service points of the MEG when a lower-level
MEP exists on the service point. This option is
usually used when the operator’s domain is
encompassed by another domain.
defMHFdefer – No MIPs are created.
Page 977 of 1094

22.9.3.4 Configuring MEPs (CLI)

Each MEP is attached to a service point in an Ethernet service. The service and
service point must be configured before you configure the MEP. See Configuring
Ethernet Services (CLI).
Each MEP inherits the same VLAN, C-VLAN, or S-VLAN configuration as the service
point on which it resides. See Configuring Service Points (CLI).
In order to set the VLAN used by CCM/LBM/LTM if the service point is defined
ambiguously (for example PIPE, Bundle-C, Bundle-S, or All-to-One), the service
point’s C-VLAN/S-VLAN parameter should not be set to N.A.
To configure a MEP, you must:
1 Add MEPs to the relevant MA/MEG. In this stage, you add both local and
remote MEPs. The only thing you define at this point is the MEP ID. See
Adding Local and Remote MEPs (CLI).
2 Configure the local MEPs. At this point, you determine which MEPs are local
MEPs. The system automatically defines the other MEPs you configured in the
previous step as remote MEPs. See Configuring the Local MEPs (CLI).
3 Enable the Local MEPs. See Enabling Local MEPs (CLI).
Page 978 of 1094

Adding Local and Remote MEPs (CLI)

To add a MEP, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam meg mep add meg-id <meg-id> mep-id <mep-id>
The following command adds MEP 25 on MEG 2.

root> ethernet soam meg mep add meg-id 2 mep-id 25
To remove a MEP, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet soam meg mep remove meg-id <meg-id> mep-id <mep-id>
The following command removes MEP 25 from MEG 2.

root> ethernet soam meg mep remove meg-id 2 mep-id 25
To display a list of all MEPs that belong to a specific MEG, enter the following
root> ethernet soam meg mep show meg-id <meg-id>
Page 979 of 1094

Configuring the Local MEPs (CLI)

Once you have added local and remote MEPs, you must configure the MEPs and
determine which are the local MEPs.
To make a defined MEP a local MEP, you must assign the MEP to a service point
on the Ethernet service on which the MEG resides.
To assign a MEP to a service point, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam mep create meg-id <meg-id> mep-id <mep-id>
sp-id <sp-id> mep-dir <mep-dir>
The following command assigns MEP 35 on MEG 2 to Service Point 3 on the

service on which MEG 2 resides.
root> ethernet soam mep create meg-id 2 mep-id 35 sp-id 3 mep-
dir down
To change a MEP from a local to a remote MEP, enter the following command in
root view:
root> ethernet soam mep delete meg-id <meg-id> mep-id <mep-id>
The following command changes MEP 35 from a local to a remote MEP.

root> ethernet soam mep delete meg-id 2 mep-id 35
To display a list of local MEPs for a specific MEG, enter the following command in
root view:
root> ethernet soam meg local-mep show meg-id <meg-id>
For example:
Page 980 of 1094

Enabling Local MEPs (CLI)

Once you have added a MEP and defined it as a local MEP, you must enable the
MEP by setting the MEP to Active, enabling CCM messages from the MEP, and
assigning a CCM-LTM priority to the MEP.
To set a MEP to Active, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam mep active set meg-id <meg-id> mep-id <mep-
id> mep-active <mep-active>
The following command sets MEP 35 on MEG 2 to Active.

root> ethernet soam mep active set meg-id 2 mep-id 35 mep-
active true
To enable or disable the sending of CCM messages on a MEP, enter the following
root> ethernet soam mep ccm-enable set meg-id <meg-id> mep-id
<mep-id> enabled <ccm-enabled>
The following command assigns enables CCM messages for MEP 35 on MEG 2.
root> ethernet soam mep ccm-enable set meg-id 2 mep-id 35 enabled
true
To set a MEP’s CCM-LTM priority, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam mep ccm-ltm-prio set meg-id <meg-id> mep-id
<mep-id> ccm-ltm-priority <ccm-ltm-priority>
The following command sets the CCM-LTM priority of MEP 35 in MEG 2 to 5.

root> ethernet soam mep ccm-ltm-prio set meg-id 2 mep-id 35
ccm-ltm-priority 5
Table 284: MEP CLI Configuration Parameters

meg-id Number 1-4294967295 Enter an ID for the MEG.

mep-id Number 1-8191 A name to identify the MEG.
sp-id Number 0-32 The Service Point ID of the service point to which
you want to assign the MEP.
mep-dir Variable up The MEP direction.
down
ccm-enabled Variable true true – CCM messages are enabled on the MEP.
false false – CCM messages are disabled on the MEP.
ccm-ltm- Number 0-7 The p-bit included in CCMs sent by this MEP.
priority
mep-active Variable true true – The MEP is Active.
false false – The MEP is Inactive.
Page 981 of 1094

22.9.3.5 Displaying MEP and Remote MEP Attributes (CLI)

To display the attributes of a specific MEP, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet soam mep configuration general show meg-id <meg-
id <meg-id> mep-id <mep-id>
For example:
To display a list of remote MEPs (RMEPs) and their parameters per MEG and local
MEP, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam mep rmep list show meg-id <meg-id <meg-id>
mep-id <mep-id>
For example:
To display a list of remote MEPs (RMEPs) and their parameters per MEG and local
MEP, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam mep rmep show meg-id meg-id < meg-id <meg-
id> mep-id <mep-id> rmep-id <rmep-id>
For example:
Page 982 of 1094

Table 285: MEP and Remote MEP Status Parameters (CLI)

MD Parameters
MD ID The MD ID.
MD Name The MD name (44 characters).
MD Format The MD format (None).
MD Level The maintenance level of the MD (0-7).
MEG Parameters
MA ID The MA/MEG ID.
Format charString in the current release.
Name The MA/MEG name (43 characters).
Level The MEG Level (0-7).
Service The Service ID of the Ethernet service to which the MEG belongs.
CCM Interval The interval at which CCM messages are sent within the MEG.
Number of MEPs The number of MEPs that belong to the MEG.
Number of Local MEPs The number of local MEPs that belong to the MEG.
Number of MIPs The number of MIPs that belong to the MEG.
SOAM MEP Table Parameters

MEP ID The MEP ID.
Interface Location The interface on which the service point associated with the MEP is
located.
MEP Direction Up or Down.
MEP Active Indicates whether the MEP is enabled (true) or disabled (false).
MEP CCM TX Enable Indicates whether the MEP is configured to send CCMs (true or false).
Page 983 of 1094

CCM and LTM Priority The p-bit included in CCMs sent by the MEP (0-7).
MEP MAC Address The MAC address of the service point associated with the MEP.
MEP Lowest priority fault The lowest defect priority that can trigger alarm generation. Defects
alarm with a lower priority will not trigger alarms.
MEP Alarm on time The amount of time that defects must be present before an alarm is
generated, in msec intervals (250-1000).
MEP Alarm Clear Time The amount of time that defects must be absent before an alarm is
cleared, msec intervals (250-1000).
Sequence errors CCM The number of out-of-sequence CCM messages received.
Frames
CCM Messages TX The number of transmitted CCM messages.
RMEP Parameters
MepId The MEP ID of the local MEP paired with the remote MEP.
Rmep Id The remote MEP ID.
operState The operational state of the remote MEP.
OKorFail Time The timestamp marked by the remote MEP indicating the most recent
CCM OK or failure it recorded. If none, this field indicates the amount
of time, in msec intervals, since SOAM was activated.
MAC The MAC Address of the interface on which the remote MEP is
located.
Rdi Displays the state of the RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) bit in the most
recent CCM received by the remote MEP:
• True – RDI was received in the last CCM.
• False – No RDI was received in the last CCM.
Port Status The Port Status TLV in the most recent CCM received from the remote
MEP.
Interface Status The Interface Status TLV in the most recent CCM received from the
remote MEP. Indicates the operational status of the interface (Up or
Down).
Chassis ID Format Displays the address format of the remote chassis (in the current
release, MAC Address).
Chassis ID Displays the MAC Address of the remote chassis.
Mng Addr Domain Displays the BASE MAC address of the remote unit (the unit on which
the remote MEP resides).
Page 984 of 1094

22.9.3.6 Displaying Detailed MEP Error Information (CLI)

To display the entire frame of the last CCM error message and the last CCM cross-
connect error message received by a specific local MEP, along with other detailed
information, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam mep status general show meg-id <meg-id>
mep-id <mep-id> detailed yes
For example:
To display the same information without the last RX error CCM and fault
messages, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam mep status general show meg-id <meg-id>
mep-id <mep-id> detailed no
The Last RX error CCM message field displays the frame of the last CCM that
contains an error received by the MEP.
The Last RX Xcon fault message field displays the frame of the last CCM that
contains a cross-connect error received by the MEP.
Note: A cross-connect error occurs when a CCM is received from a remote
MEP that has not been defined locally.
Page 985 of 1094

22.9.3.7 Performing Loopback (CLI)

To set the interval between loopback message transmissions in a loopback
session, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam loopback interval set meg-id <meg-id> mep-
id <mep-id> interval <0-60000>
For example, the following command sets the loopback interval for MEP 25 on
MEG 1 to 5 seconds:
root> ethernet soam loopback interval set meg-id 1 mep-id 25
interval 5000
To set the loopback message frame size and data pattern, enter the following
root> ethernet soam loopback data set meg-id <meg-id> mep-id
<mep-id> size <size> pattern <pattern>
For example, the following command sets the loopback frame size to 128 and the
pattern to zero for MEP 25 on MEG 1 to 5 seconds:
root> ethernet soam loopback data set meg-id 1 mep-id 25 size
128 pattern zeroPattern
To set the loopback priority bit size and drop-enable parameters, enter the
root> ethernet soam loopback prio set meg-id <meg-id> mep-id
<mep-id> prio <priority> drop <drop>
For example, the following command sets a priority bit size of 5 and enables
frame dropping for MEP 25 on MEG 1 to 5 seconds:
root> ethernet soam loopback prio set meg-id 1 mep-id 25 prio 5
drop true
To set the loopback destination by MAC address, set the number of loopback
messages to transmit and the interval between messages, and initiate the
loopback, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet soam loopback send meg-id <meg-id> mep-id <mep-
id> dest-mac-addr <dest-mac-addr> tx-num <tx-num> tx-interval
<interval>
For example, the following command initiates a loopback session with the
interface having MAC address 00:0A:25:38:09:4B. The session is configured to
send 100 loopback messages at six-second intervals.
root> ethernet soam loopback send meg-id 1 mep-id 25 dest-mac-
addr 00:0A:25:38:09:4B tx-num 100 tx-interval 6000
To set the loopback destination by MEP ID, set the number of loopback messages
to transmit and the interval between messages, and initiate the loopback, enter
root> ethernet soam loopback send meg-id <meg-id> mep-id <mep-
id> dest-mep-id <dest-mac-addr> tx-num <tx-num> tx-interval
<interval>
Page 986 of 1094

For example, the following command initiates a loopback session with the
interface having MAC address 00:0A:25:38:09:4B. The session is configured to
send 100 loopback messages at six-second intervals.
root> ethernet soam loopback send meg-id 1 mep-id 25 dest-mac-
addr 00:0A:25:38:09:4B tx-num 100 tx-interval 6000
Note: If you initiate the loopback via MEP ID, the loopback will only be
activated if CCMs have already been received from the MEP. For this
reason, it is recommended to initiate loopback via MAC address.
To display the loopback attributes of a MEP, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet soam loopback config show meg-id <meg-id> mep-id
<mep-id>
For example:
To stop a loopback that is already in progress, enter the following command in

root view:
root> ethernet soam loopback stop meg-id <meg-id> mep-id <mep-
id>
Table 286: Loopback CLI Parameters

meg-id Number 1-4294967295 The MEG ID of the MEG on which the loopback
is being configured or run.
mep-id Number 1-8191 The MEP ID of the MEP on which the loopback
is being configured or run.
interval Number 0-60000 The interval (in ms) between each loopback
message. Note that the granularity for this
parameter is 100 ms. If you enter a number that
is not in multiples of 100, the value will be
rounded off to the next higher multiple of 100.
Also, the lowest interval is 1000 ms (1 second).
If you enter a smaller value, it will be rounded
up to 1000 ms.
size Number 64-1518 The frame size for the loopback messages. Note
that for tagged frames, the frame size will be
slightly larger than the selected frame size.
pattern Variable zeroPattern The type of data pattern to be sent in an OAM
onesPattern PDU Data TLV.
Page 987 of 1094


priority Number 0-7 The priority bit for tagged frames.
drop Boolean true true – Frame dropping is enabled.
false false – Frame dropping is disabled.
dest-mac- Six groups of The MAC address of the interface to which you
addr two want to send the loopback. If you are not sure
hexadecimal what the interface’s MAC address is, you can
digits get it from the Interface Manager by entering
the platform if-manager show
interfaces command in root view.
dest-mep-id Number 1-8191 The MEP ID of the interface to which you want
to send the loopback.
tx-num Number 0-1024 The number of loopback messages to transmit.
If you enter 0, loopback will not be performed.
To display loopback results, enter the following command in

root view:root> ethernet soam loopback status show meg-id <meg-
id> mep-id <mep-id>
The following is a sample output for this command on MEG ID 127, MEP ID 1.
22.10 Working in CW Mode (Single or Dual Tone) (CLI)

CW mode enables you to transmit a single or dual frequency tones, for debugging
purposes.
To work in CW mode, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x] modem tx-source set admin enable
Once you are in CW mode, you can choose to transmit in a single tone or two
tones.
To transmit in a single tone, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x] modem tx-source set mode one-tone freq-shift <freq-
shift>
To transmit two tones, enter the following command in radio view:

radio[x/x] modem tx-source set mode two-tone freq-shift <freq-
shift> freq-shift2 <freq-shift>
To exit CW mode, enter the following command in radio view:
Page 988 of 1094

radio[x/x] modem tx-source set admin disable
Table 287: CW Mode CLI Parameters

freq-shift Number 0-7000 Enter the frequency you want to transmit,

in KHz.
The following commands set a single-tone transmit frequency of 5050 KHz on

radio interface 1, then exit CW mode and return the interface to normal
operation:
radio[2/1] modem tx-source set admin enable
radio[2/1] radio[x/x] modem tx-source set mode one-tone freq-
shift 5050
radio[2/1] modem tx-source set admin disable
Page 989 of 1094

Section IV
Maintenance
Page 990 of 1094

23. Maintenance
• Temperature Ranges
• Troubleshooting Tips
• IP-20C Connector Pin-outs
• IP-20C LEDs
• IP-20C-HP Connector Pin-outs
• IP-20C-HP LEDs
• IP-20S Connector Pin-outs
• IP-20S LEDs
• IP-20E Connector Pin-outs
• IP-20E LEDs
• IP-20V Connector Pin-outs
• IP-20V LEDs
• PoE Injector Pin-outs
23.1 Temperature Ranges

The following are the permissible unit temperature ranges for IP-20C, IP-20C-HP,
IP-20S, IP-20E, and IP-20V:
• -33C to 55C – Temperature range for continuous operating temperature
with high reliability.
• -45C to 60C – Temperature range for exceptional temperatures, tested
successfully, with limited margins.
For IP-20C, IP-20S, IP-20V, and IP-20E, an extreme temperature alarm (25) is
raised if the unit’s internal temperature goes above 100°C or below -40°C. The
alarm is cleared when the temperature goes below 95°C or above -35°C.
For IP-20C-HP, an extreme temperature alarm (25) is raised if the unit’s internal
temperature goes above 92°C or below -40°C. The alarm is cleared when the
temperature goes below 87°C or above -35°C.
To display the current unit temperature, see Configuring Unit Parameters.
The permissible IDU humidity range is 5%RH to 100%RH.
Page 991 of 1094

23.2 Troubleshooting Tips

23.2.1 Platform
• If during or right after a software upgrade the message Your session has
expired, please login again appears and you cannot log in, it is recommended
to refresh the Web EMS page (F5) after completion of the upgrade. If pressing
F5 does not help, clear the browser’s cache by pressing Ctrl+Shift+Delete.
23.2.2 XPIC
• For dual-polarization and XPIC links, if one of the polarizations has significantly
reduced performance, check to make sure the antenna’s rectangular interface
was replaced with a circular adaptor.
• For dual-polarization and XPIC links, the RSL should be similar for both
polarizations. For XPIC links, the XPI value should be similar for both
polarizations; the difference should not be more than 2 dB.
23.2.3 Unit Protection

• When switchover takes place, a series of GARP packets are sent identifying
the MAC address of the new management interface. This enables the
management device to immediately re-establish the management connection.
By default, three GARP packets are sent:
◦ The first GARP packet is sent immediately upon switchover.
◦ The second GARP packet is sent 500 ms after switchover.
◦ The third GARP packet is sent one second after switchover.
The number of GARP packets is user-configurable. If you experience a delay in
re-establishing management, you can increase the number of GARP packets
that are sent upon switchover. The number of packets can be changed to any
value from 0 (disabling the feature) to 10. Packets are sent at intervals of
500 ms.
Use the following CLI command to change the number of GARP packets to be
sent upon switchover:
root>platform management protection debug set garp <0-10>
Use the following CLI command to show the current configuration of this
parameter:
root>platform management protection debug show garp
Page 992 of 1094

23.3 IP-20C Connector Pin-outs

Two labelling formats are available for the IP-20C ESS and IP-20C ESX hardware
models, as shown in the following figures.
Figure 440: IP-20C Interfaces – Descriptive Labels
Figure 441: IP-20C Interfaces – Letter Labels
Page 993 of 1094

A four-port IP-20C hardware model is also available (2E2SX). This model includes
two electrical traffic ports in a single gland, in addition to two optical ports, for a
total of up to four available traffic ports. This model is interoperable with other IP-
20C hardware models, and supports MIMO and all other advanced IP-20C
features.
Figure 442: IP-20C Interfaces – 2E2SX Model
23.3.1 Ethernet Traffic Ports – RJ-45/SFP Pinouts
Table 288: IP-20C Ethernet Traffic Ports- RJ-45/SFP Pinouts

Pin no. Description
1 BI_DA+ (Bi-directional pair +A)

2 BI_DA- (Bi-directional pair -A)
3 BI_DB+ (Bi-directional pair +B)
4 BI_DC+ (Bi-directional pair +C)
5 BI_DC- (Bi-directional pair -C)
6 BI_DB- (Bi-directional pair -B)
7 BI_DD+ (Bi-directional pair +D)
8 BI_DD- (Bi-directional pair -D)
Page 994 of 1094

23.3.2 MGT/PROT - Management (FE-Standard) and Protection (FE-Non-

Standard)
Table 289: IP-20C MGT/PROT Interface - RJ-45 Pinouts

Pin no. Description
Management - Standard 100Base-T 4 Wire
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
6 RX-
Protection - Non-Standard 100Base-T 4 Wire
4 TX+
5 TX-
7 RX+
8 RX-
23.3.3 DC
The DC port is UL-60950 compliant, with a 2-pin connector.
Figure 443: IP-20C DC Port Connector
23.3.4 RSL Interface

IP-20C uses a weather-proof BNC connector.
Note: The voltage at the RSL interface is 1.XX where XX is the RSL level. For
measured at the RSL interface is not accurate and should be used only
as an aid).
23.3.5 Source Sharing

IP-20C uses a TNC connector for source sharing. This connector is marked
EXT/REF.
Page 995 of 1094

23.4 IP-20C LEDs

The IP-20C provides the following LEDs to indicate the status of the unit's
interfaces, and the unit as a whole:
• Electrical GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs
• Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs
• Management FE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs
• Radio LED
• Status LED
• Protection LED
23.4.1 Electrical GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs

There are two LEDs next to each electrical (RJ-45) interface, a Green LED to the
left of the interface and an Orange LED to the right of the interface.
The Green LED indicates the port’s Admin state:
• Off – Admin is Disabled.
• Green – Admin is Enabled.
The Orange LED indicates the interface's Admin and cable connection status, and
whether there is traffic on the interface:
• Off - Admin is Disabled or no cable is connected to the interface.
• Orange - Admin is Enabled and a cable is connected to the interface.
• Blinking Orange - Admin is Enabled and a cable is connected to the interface,
and there is traffic on the interface.
Note: 2E2SX models include a DisplayPort (P2), which is
used with a special splitter cable (see Enabling the
Interfaces (Interface Manager). The RJ-45 connectors
on this cable include two LEDs, but only the Orange
LED is functional.
23.4.2 Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs

There is one Green LED next to each optical (SFP) GbE interface.
The LED indicates the interface's Admin and cable connection
status, and whether there is traffic on the interface:
• Green - Admin is Enabled and a cable is connected to the interface.
• Blinking Green - Admin is Enabled and a cable is connected to the interface,
23.4.3 Management FE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs

There are two LEDs next to the MGT (management) interface, a Green LED to the
Page 996 of 1094

• Blinking Green – Management traffic is passing through the interface.

If the MGT interface is being used for protection, the Orange LED indicates the
status of the mate unit:
• Off – The interface is not in an operational state (down).
• Orange – The interface is operational (up).
• Blinking Orange – The interface is operational, and there is traffic on the
interface (Tx, Rx, or both).
23.4.4 Radio LED

The Radio LED indicates the status of the radio link:
• Off – The radio is off; all carriers are Admin = Disabled in the Interface
Manager.
• Green - The power is on, and all carriers are operational (up).
• Orange – A signal degrade condition exists on at least one carrier.
• Red - A loss of frame (LOF) or excessive BER condition exists on at least one
carrier.
23.4.5 Status LED

The Status LED indicates the status of the main board:
• Off – The power is off.
• Green - The power is on, and no alarms are raised on the motherboard.
• Orange – The power is on, and one or more minor alarms or warnings are
raised on the motherboard.
• Red - The power is on, and one or more major or critical alarms are raised on
the motherboard.
23.4.6 Protection LED

The Protection LED operates in a protected configuration to indicate the
protection status:
• Red – A protection alarm exists (cable disconnected, mismatch configuration,
or mate communication not working). Note that only the active unit will have
a red LED.
• Orange -Protection is enabled, and the unit is in standby mode.
• Green - Protection is enabled, the unit is in active mode, and no protection
alarms are present.
• Off – Protection is not enabled.
Page 997 of 1094

23.5 IP-20C-HP Connector Pin-outs
Figure 444: IP-20C-HP Interfaces
23.5.1 Data Port 1 - GbE Electrical (RJ-45)
Table 290: IP-20C-HP Data Port 1 – Pinouts

Pin no. Description

Page 998 of 1094

23.5.2 Management Port (FE-Standard) and Protection (FE-Non-Standard)
Table 291: IP-20C-HP Management Interface - RJ-45 Pinouts

Pin no. Description
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
6 RX-
4 TX+
5 TX-
7 RX+
8 RX-
23.5.3 DC
Figure 445: IP-20C DC Port Connector

IP-20C-HP uses a dual-pin connector.
measured at the BNC port is not accurate and should be used only as
an aid).
23.5.5 Source Sharing

IP-20C-HP uses a TNC connector for source sharing. This connector is marked
EXT/REF.
Page 999 of 1094

23.6 IP-20C-HP LEDs

The IP-20C-HP provides the following LEDs to indicate the status of the unit's
• Radio LED
• Status LED
• Protection LED


There is one Green LED next to each optical (SFP) GbE interface. The LED indicates
the interface's Admin and cable connection status, and whether there is traffic on
the interface:

status of the mate unit:
• Off – The interface is not in an operational state (down).
Page 1000 of 1094

• Orange – The interface is operational (up).

• Blinking Orange – The interface is operational, and there is traffic on the
interface (Tx, Rx, or both).
23.6.4 Radio LED

• Off – The radio is off; all carriers are Admin = Disabled in the Interface
Manager.
• Orange – A signal degrade condition exists on at least one carrier.
• Red - A loss of frame (LOF) or excessive BER condition exists on at least one
carrier.
23.6.5 Status LED

the motherboard.

protection status:
a red LED.
alarms are present.
Page 1001 of 1094

23.7 IP-20S Connector Pin-outs

IP-20S includes one RJ-45 port and two SFP ports for Ethernet traffic.
Two labelling formats are available for IP-20S, as shown in the following figures.
Except for the interface labelling, these versions are identical.
Figure 446: IP-20S Interfaces – Descriptive Labels
Figure 447: IP-20S Interfaces – Letter Labels
Page 1002 of 1094

23.7.1 Eth1/PoE - GbE Electrical+PoE/Optical
Table 292: IP-20S Eth1/PoE Interface- RJ-45/SFP Pinouts

Pin no. Description

23.7.2 Eth2 - GbE Electrical/Optical
Table 293: IP-20S Eth2 Interface - RJ-45/SFP Pinouts

Pin no. Description

23.7.3 Eth3 - GbE Electrical/Optical
Table 294: IP-20S Eth3/EXP Interface - RJ-45/SFP Pinouts

Pin no. Description

Page 1003 of 1094

23.7.4 MGT/PROT - Management (FE-Standard) and Protection (FE-Non-

Standard)
Table 295: IP-20S MGT/PROT Interface - RJ-45 Pinouts

Pin no. Description
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
6 RX-
4 TX+
5 TX-
7 RX+
8 RX-
23.7.5 DC
Figure 448: IP-20S DC Connector

IP-20S uses a weather-proof BNC connector.
measured at the RSL interface is not accurate and should be used only
as an aid).
Page 1004 of 1094

23.8 IP-20S LEDs

The IP-20S provides the following LEDs to indicate the status of the unit's
• Radio LED
• Status LED
• Protection LED

There are two LEDs next to the electrical (RJ-45) interface, a Green LED to the left
of the interface and an Orange LED to the right of the interface.

There is one Green LED next to each optical (SFP) GbE interface. The LED indicates
the interface's Admin and cable connection status, and whether there is traffic on
the interface:

status of the mate unit.:
Page 1005 of 1094


23.8.4 Radio LED

• Off – The radio is off; the carrier is Admin = Disabled in the Interface Manager.
• Green - The power is on, and the carrier is operational (up).
• Orange – A signal degrade condition exists on the carrier.
• Red - A loss of frame (LOF) or excessive BER condition exists on the carrier.
23.8.5 Status LED

the motherboard.

protection status:
a red LED.
alarms are present.
Page 1006 of 1094

23.9 IP-20E Connector Pin-outs

There are three basic IP-20E hardware versions with the following interface
layouts:
• ESE – Two electrical Ethernet interfaces (Port 1 and Port 3) and one optical
SFP cage that supports regular and CSFP standards (Port 2).
• ESS – One electrical Ethernet interface (Port 1), an optical SFP cage that
supports the regular SFP standard (Port 2), and an optical SFP cage that
supports regular and CSFP standards (Port 3).
Note: IP-20E ESS requires CeraOS 9.0 or higher.
• ESP – One electrical Ethernet interface (Port 1), an optical SFP cage that
supports regular and CSFP standards (Port 2), and an optical SFP cage that can
be configured for 1G or 10G (Port 3).
Notes: IP-20E ESP requires CeraOS 9.7 or higher.
The following table summarizes the port distribution in each of these variants.
Table 296: IP-20E Port Distribution Per Hardware Model
IP-20E Variant Port 1 Port 2 Port 3

ESE RJ-45: 10/100/1000BaseT SFP cage: SFP, CSFP RJ-45: 10/100/1000BaseT
1Gb/s Ethernet Traffic 1Gb/s Ethernet Traffic (Eth2 + Eth3) Local management
(Eth1) + PoE 1Gb/s Ethernet Traffic
ESS RJ45: 10/100/1000BaseT SFP cage: SFP SFP cage: SFP, CSFP
Local management + PoE 1Gb/s Ethernet Traffic (Eth1) 1Gb/s Ethernet Traffic (Eth2 + Eth3)
1Gb/s Ethernet Traffic
ESP RJ45: 10/100/1000BaseT SFP cage: SFP, CSFP SFP cage: SFP/SFP+
Local management + PoE 1Gb/s Ethernet Traffic (Eth2 + Eth3) 1/10Gb/s Ethernet Traffic (Eth1)
1Gb/s Ethernet Traffic
Page 1007 of 1094

23.9.1 IP-20E Interfaces – ESE
Figure 449: IP-20E Interfaces – ESE

• Port 1 (Eth1):
Electric: 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45.
PoE or external DC support (adapter)
• Port 2
SFP cage which supports – Regular and CSFP standards
• Regular SFP provides Eth2
• CSFP (Dual BiDir SFP) provides Eth2 and Eth3
• Port 3 (MGT):
Management
1G Eth traffic
• Extension Port:
◦ XPIC and HSB source sharing (planned for future release)
◦ Direct connection to CPU by technician – see Logging in Without Knowing
the IP Address
Page 1008 of 1094

23.9.2 IP-20E Interfaces – ESS
Figure 450: IP-20E Interfaces – ESS

• Port 1 (MGT):
Management
1G Eth traffic
• Port 2 (Eth1)
SFP cage which supports Regular SFP standard
• Port 3:
SFP cage which supports Regular and CSFP standards
• Extension Port:
◦ XPIC and HSB (planned for future release)
the IP Address
Page 1009 of 1094

23.9.3 IP-20E Interfaces – ESP
Figure 451: IP-20E Interfaces – ESP

• Port 1 (MGT):
Management
1G Eth traffic
• Port 2
• Port 3 (Eth1):
SFP cage which supports SFP+ standard
1G or 10G Eth traffic (user-configurable)
Note: If the port is configured for 1G, a regular SFP module (rather than
SFP+) can be used.
• Extension Port:
◦ XPIC and HSB (planned for future release)
the IP Address
Page 1010 of 1094

23.9.4 Eth1/PoE GbE Interface (RJ-45) (ESE only)

Table 297: IP-20E Eth1/PoE Interface- RJ-45
Pin no. Description

23.9.5 Eth1 GbE Optical Interface (SFP) (ESS only)

Eth1 in ESS hardware versions is an SFP cage that supports the regular SFP
standard.
23.9.6 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP)

Eth2/Eth3 is an SFP cage that supports regular and CSFP standards.
23.9.7 Eth1 10G Optical Interface (SFP+) (ESP only)

Eth1 is an SFP cage that supports the SFP+ standard. Eth1 can be configured by
the user for 1G or 10G Ethernet traffic.
23.9.8 MGT GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45)
Table 298: IP-20E MGT Interface - RJ-45/ Pinouts

Pin no. Description

23.9.9 EXT Port

This port is reserved for future use.
Page 1011 of 1094

23.9.10 Power Adaptor

For configurations in which power is not provided via PoE, a special adaptor (IP-
20_Mini_Power_Adaptor) is available that enables users to connect a two-wire
power connector to the PoE port. This adaptor is located inside of the gland. In
such configurations, only one electrical GbE interface is available (MGT).
Figure 452: Two-Wire to PoE Port Power Adaptor

IP-20E uses a two-pin connection to measure the RSL level using standard
voltmeter test leads:
Figure 453: RSL Pins
Page 1012 of 1094

23.10 IP-20E LEDs

The IP-20E provides the following LEDs to indicate the status of the unit's
• Eth1/PoE GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs (ESE only)
• Eth1 GbE Optical Interface (SFP) LEDs (ESS only)
• Eth1 10G Optical Interface (SFP+) LEDs (ESP only)
• Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) LEDs
• MGT GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) LEDs
• Radio LED
• Status LED
• Protection LED
23.10.1 Eth1/PoE GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs (ESE only)

The Green LED indicates the interface’s Admin status:
23.10.2 Eth1 GbE Optical Interface (SFP) LEDs (ESS only)

Eth1 is an SFP cage that supports regular SFP.
There is one Green LED to the left of the interface and one Green LED to the right
of the interface. The LED to the left is for Eth1. The LED to the right is inactive
The LED on the left indicates the interface's Admin and cable connection status,
and whether there is traffic on the interface:
23.10.3 Eth1 10G Optical Interface (SFP+) LEDs (ESP only)

Eth1 is an SFP cage that supports regular SFP and SFP+.
There is one Green LED to the left of the interface. The LED is for Eth1 and
indicates the interface's Admin and cable connection status, and whether there is
traffic on the interface:
Page 1013 of 1094


Note: The LED does not indicate traffic on the interface (Blinking Green) in
10G mode.
23.10.4 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) LEDs

• When Eth2/Eth3 is used with a regular SFP, it provides Ethernet port 2.
• When Eth2/Eth3 is used with CSFP, it provides two Ethernet ports: Ethernet
port 2 and Ethernet port 3.
Note: The Web EMS displays Ethernet port 3 even if a regular SFP is used,
and there is no Ethernet port 3. You must avoid configuring Ethernet
port 3 in this case.
On ESE and ESS hardware versions, there is one Green LED to the left of the
interface and one Green LED to the right of the interface. On ESP hardware
versions, there are two LEDS to the left of the interface. The LED to the left or the
upper LED is for Eth2. When CSFP is used, the LED to the right or the lower LED is
for Eth3; otherwise, it is inactive.
Each LED indicates the interface's Admin and cable connection status, and
23.10.5 MGT GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) LEDs

There are two LEDs next to the MGT interface, a Green LED to the left of the
interface and an Orange LED to the right of the interface.
The Green LED is not functional in this release.
23.10.6 Radio LED

Page 1014 of 1094

23.10.7 Status LED

• Orange - The power is on, and one or more minor alarms or warnings are
the motherboard.

Page 1015 of 1094

23.11 IP-20V Connector Pin-outs

IP-20V has one electrical Ethernet interface for PoE and management (Port 1), an
optical SFP cage that supports regular and CSFP standards (Port 2), and an optical
SFP cage that can be configured for 1G or 10G (Port 3).
Figure 454: IP-20V Interfaces

• Port 1 (MGT):
Electric: 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45
Management
1G Eth traffic
• Port 2
• Regular SFP provides ETH2
• CSFP (Dual BiDir SFP) provides ETH2 and ETH3
• Port 3
SFP cage which supports SFP+ standard
1G or 10G Eth traffic (user-configurable)
• Extension Port:
the IP Address
23.11.1 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP)

23.11.2 Eth1 10G Optical Interface (SFP+)

Eth1 is an SFP cage that supports the SFP+ standard. Eth1 can be configured by
the user for 1G or 10G Ethernet traffic.
Page 1016 of 1094

23.11.3 MGT GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45)
Table 299: IP-20V MGT Interface - RJ-45/ Pinouts

Pin no. Description

23.11.4 Power Adaptor

For configurations in which power is not provided via PoE, a special adaptor (IP-
20_Mini_Power_Adaptor) is available that enables users to connect a two-wire
power connector to the PoE port. This adaptor is located inside of the gland. In
such configurations, only one electrical GbE interface is available (MGT).
Figure 455: Two-Wire to PoE Port Power Adaptor

IP-20V uses a two-pin connection to measure the RSL level using standard
voltmeter test leads:
Page 1017 of 1094

Figure 456: RSL Pins
Page 1018 of 1094

23.12 IP-20V LEDs

The IP-20Vprovides the following LEDs to indicate the status of the unit's
• Eth1 10G Optical Interface (SFP+) LEDs
• Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) LEDs
• MGT GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) LEDs
• Radio LED
• Status LED
23.12.1 Eth1 10G Optical Interface (SFP+) LEDs

Eth1 is an SFP cage that supports regular SFP and SFP+.
There is a Green LED to the left of the interface for Eth1. This LED indicates the
interface's Admin and cable connection status, and whether there is traffic on the
interface:
Note: The LED does not indicate traffic on the interface (Blinking Green) in
10G mode.
23.12.2 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) LEDs

• When Eth2/Eth3 is used with a regular SFP, it provides Ethernet port 2.
• When Eth2/Eth3 is used with CSFP, it provides two Ethernet ports: Ethernet
port 2 and Ethernet port 3.
Note: The Web EMS displays Ethernet port 3 even if a regular SFP is used,
and there is no Ethernet port 3. You must avoid configuring Ethernet
port 3 in this case.
There are two Green LEDs to the left of the interface. The upper LED is for Eth2.
When CSFP is used, the lower LED is for Eth3; otherwise, it is inactive.
Each LED indicates the interface's Admin and cable connection status, and
Page 1019 of 1094

23.12.3 MGT GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) LEDs

There are two LEDs next to the MGT interface, a Green LED to the left of the
interface and an Orange LED to the right of the interface.
The Green LED is not functional in this release.
23.12.4 Radio LED

23.12.5 Status LED

• Orange - The power is on, and one or more minor alarms or warnings are
the motherboard.
Page 1020 of 1094

23.13 PoE Injector Pin-outs
Figure 457: PoE Injector Connectors
23.13.1 PoE Port
Table 300: PoE Injector PoE Port - RJ-45 Pinouts

Pin no. Description

23.13.2 Data Port
Table 301: PoE Injector RJ-45 Data Port Supporting 10/100/1000Base-T

Pin no. Description

Page 1021 of 1094

23.13.3 DC
One or two DC ports, depending on the PoE Injector model:
Two models of the PoE Injector are available:
• PoE_Inj_AO_2DC_24V_48V – Includes two DC power ports with power input
ranges of ±(18-60)V each.
• PoE_Inj_AO – Includes one DC power port (DC Power Port #1), with a power
input range of ±(40-60)V.
These ports are UL-60950 compliant, with a 2-pin connector.
23.14 PoE Injector LEDs

• PWR1 (Bi-color LED)
◦ Green – Power available on PWR1 DC input
◦ Off – No power is available on PWR1 DC input.
• PWR2 (Bi-color LED)
◦ Green – Power available on PWR2 DC input,
◦ Off – No power is available on PWR2 DC input.
• PoE (Tri -color LED)
◦ Orange – No load is detected
◦ Green – Providing in-line power
◦ Blinking Red – Invalid/over-load
◦ Off – no power to the injector unit.
23.14.1 Radio LED

• Off – The radio is off.
• Orange - A signal degrade condition exists in at least one carrier.
• Red - A loss of frame (LOF) or excessive BER condition exists in at least one
carrier.
Page 1022 of 1094

Section V: Appendices
Page 1023 of 1094

24. Alarms List

The following table lists all alarms used in FibeAir IP-20 products.
Table 302: Alarms
Alarm ID Name Type Group Description Severity Probable Cause Corrective Action
10 radio-digital-loopback Alarm Equipment Framer digital loopback Warning User enabled framer Disable the framer digital
is enabled. digital loopback. loopback.
11 ntp-local Alarm Communications NTP locked on local Warning 1. No connection to 1. Check connection to
clock remote server. remote servers.
2. Remote server 2. Check remote server’s
quality does not status parameters in the
meet the minimum unit’s “NTP configuration
required to be panel”.
chosen by the NTP
algorithm.
15 ntp-locked Event Communications NTP locked on server Indeterminate
25 main-board-extreme- Alarm Unit Temperature is out Warning
temperature-alarm of system specified
limits.
26 main-board-low-voltage-alarm Alarm N/A Unit input voltage is too Warning 3. Power supply output 1. Check/replace the power
low. is too low. supply connected to the
4. Power cable to the RFU.
unit is defective.
Page 1024 of 1094

5. Threshold value is 2. Check/replace the power
not set correctly. cable connected to the
RFU.
3. Set the threshold
correctly.
27 main-board-high-voltage-alarm Alarm N/A Unit input voltage is too Warning 1. Power Supply output 1. Make sure the power
high. is too high. supply voltage is within
2. Threshold value not the specification range. 2)
set correctly. Adjust the threshold value.
28 main-board-warm-reset Event Unit warm reset. Indeterminate

29 main-board-cold-reset Event Unit reset. Warning
30 main-board-poe-low-voltage- Alarm POE input voltage is too Warning 1. PoE supply output is Make sure the PoE voltage is
alarm low too low. within the specification range.
2. PoE cable to the unit
is defective.
31 Event Change Remote request Major
was sent
32 Event Protection switchover Major
due to remote request
33 protection-mimo- Alarm Major Unit Redundancy and 4x4
misconfiguration-alarm MIMO cannot operate
simultaneously.
Page 1025 of 1094

100 lag-degraded Alarm Equipment LAG is not fully Major 1. At least one interface 1. Check the physical
functional - LAG is not connected or connections.
Degraded. configured to admin 2. Verify that the Admin state
down. of all the LAG members is
2. If one of the up.
members is radio it 3. Verify the operational
might be in state of all radio members
operational state in the LAG.
down due to channel
fading
101 lag-down Alarm Equipment LAG operational state is Critical The LAG group is not 1. Check the physical
down operational. connections and
administrative status on
both sides of the link of all
interfaces that are
members of the LAG
Group.
2. Check the physical
connections of all
interfaces that are
members of the LAG
Group.
102 ethernet-loopback-active-alarm Alarm Equipment Loopback is active Major Ethernet loopback is Wait for expiration of the
active. loopback timeout, or manually
disable the loopback.
Page 1026 of 1094

103 port-mirroring-is-active Alarm Equipment Slot X port XX is Minor Mirroring is enabled by Disable mirroring.
mirrored to slot Y port user configuration.
YY
120 port-speed-mismatch-alarm Alarm Equipment Port speed mismatch Major System reset is required 1. Reset the system.
after the port speed was 2. Change the port speed
changed. back to the previous value.
150 auto-state-propagation- Alarm Communications Auto-state-propagation Major Failure of the Check adjacent local/remote
interface-down-alarm is triggered radio/remote radio radio interface for failure
interface which is conditions that cause
monitored for automatic automatic state propagation.
state propagation causes
automatic shutdown of
the controlled interface.
200 protection-communication- Alarm Equipment Protection Major 1. Mate unit is 1. Verify that the mate unit is
down-alarm communication is down absent/failure. up and running.
2. Protection cable is 2. Check the state of the
disconnected. protection cable
3. Unit failure. connection between the
units.
3. Reset the mate unit
4. Replace the mate unit
201 protection-lockout-alarm Alarm Equipment Protection in Lockout Major
State
202 protection-switch-command Event Equipment Protection switchover Major 1. Check the unit.
due to local failure
Page 1027 of 1094

2. Look for current alarms.
203 protection-mate-not-present- Alarm Equipment Mate does not exist Major Mate does not exist or 1. Verify that the mate unit is
alarm cable unplugged. up and running.
2. Verify that the protection
cable is properly
connected between the
units.
204 protection-hsb-insufficient- Alarm Equipment HSB insufficient Critical External Protection Remove External Protection or
alarm configuration configured together with 1+1 HSB configuration.
1+1 HSB.
205 protection-revertive-primary- Alarm Equipment Protection revertive warning Identical configuration Ensure one (and only one) unit
insufficient-alarm mode - insufficient for the revertive-primary is configured as the primary
configuration parameter. unit.
307 tdm-link-up Event Equipment TDM interface is up Warning
308 tdm-link-down Event Equipment TDM interface is down Warning
401 TrafficPhyLocAlarm Alarm Equipment Loss of Carrier Major 1. Cable disconnected. At both ends of the cable:
2. Defective cable. 1. Check the cable
3. External equipment connection.
failure. 2. Check the Admin state of
the port.
3. Replace the cable.
4. Check external equipment.
407 ethernet-link-up Event Equipment Ethernet interface is up Warning Ethernet interface is back Notification. Corrective action
to being operational. is not required.
Page 1028 of 1094

408 ethernet-link-down Event Equipment Ethernet interface is Warning 1. User commanded 1. Set the Ethernet interface
down the interface to admin State to Up.
admin down. 2. Reconnect the Ethernet
2. Ethernet cable is cable
disconnected. 3. Wait 30 seconds to allow
3. Ethernet card is the Ethernet card to
initializing. complete its init.
4. External equipment 4. Check external equipment.
failure.
601 radio-excessive-ber Alarm Communications Radio excessive BER Major 1. Fade in the link. 1. Check link performance via
2. Defective IF cable. the Web EMS Radio PM
and Statistics page and
3. Fault in RFU.
take corrective action
4. Fault in RMC (Radio accordingly..
Modem Card).
2. Check IF cable and replace
5. Interference on the if required.
link.
3. Replace RFU.
4. Replace RMC (Radio
Modem Card).
5. Remove source of
interference or change link
frequency.
602 remote-link-id-mismatch Alarm Equipment Link ID mismatch Major 1. Link ID is not the 1. Configure same Link ID for
same at both sides of both sides of link via Web
link.
Page 1029 of 1094

2. Radio has synched EMS Radio Parameters
on the wrong peer page.
radio. 2. Check if the radio is
synched on the correct
peer radio (check: channel
frequency, antennae
direction).
603 radio-lof Alarm Communications Radio loss of frame Critical 1. Fade in the link. 1. Check link performance.
2. Defective IF cable. 2. Check IF cable and replace
3. Fault in RFU. if required.
4. Fault in RMC (Radio 3. Replace RFU.
Modem Card). 4. Replace RMC (Radio
5. Different radio Modem Card).
scripts at both ends 5. Make sure same script is
of the link. loaded at both ends of the
link.
604 radio-signal-degrade Alarm Communications Radio signal degrade Minor 1. Fade in the link. 1. Check link performance.
2. Defective IF cable. 2. Check IF cable and replace
3. Fault in RFU. if required.
4. Fault in RMC (Radio 3. Replace RFU.
Modem Card). 4. Replace RMC (Radio
Modem Card).
605 radio-link-up Event Equipment Radio interface is up Warning The radio interface is No action is required.
back to being
operational.
Page 1030 of 1094

606 radio-link-down Event Equipment Radio interface is down. Warning Radio interface is not 1. If required, set the radio
operational: interface admin State to
1. User configured the Up.
radio interface to 2. Check if there is a reason
admin Down. for LOF / Excessive BER
2. Loss of Frame (LOF) alarms.
alarm is raised. 3. Wait 30 seconds until the
3. Excessive BER alarm radio card finishes its init.
is raised.
4. Radio card has not
completed its init.
607 rfu-frequency-scanner-in- Alarm Equipment Frequency scanner in Warning The frequency scanner is If required, stop the frequency
process progress activated. scanner process.
801 corrupted-file-card-failure Alarm Equipment Corrupted inventory file Critical The inventory file is 1. Reset the card.
corrupted 2. Reinstall the software.
3. Replace the unit.
802 file-not-found Alarm Equipment Inventory file not found Warning The inventory file is 1. Reset the system.
missing 2. Reinstall the software.
3. Replace the unit
803 sfp-rx-power-level-low Alarm Equipment SFP port RX power level Warning 1. Remote SFP port Tx 1. Verify remote SFP Tx laser
is below the rx power laser power is too power is within range.
level low threshold low. 2. Check fiber type and
2. Fiber length is too length fit the installed SFP.
long or fiber type
Page 1031 of 1094

doesn't fit the If not, replace it with an
installed SFP. appropriate one.
804 sfp-rx-power-level-high Alarm Equipment SFP port RX power level Warning Remote SFP Tx power is Add attenuator on Rx side.
is above the rx power too high.
level high threshold
805 sfp-tx-power-level-low Alarm Equipment SFP port TX power level Warning SFP transmit laser power Check laser Bias current. If it is
is below the tx power is too low too low, replace SFP.
level low threshold
806 sfp-tx-power-level-high Alarm Equipment SFP port TX power level Warning SFP laser Tx power is too Check laser Bias current and
is above the tx power high. laser temperature values. If
level high threshold either of them is too high,
replace SFP.
807 recovered-inventory-on-boot- Event Equipment Default Activation Key Critical Corrupted Inventory
event activated due to failure
808 recovered-inventory-on- Event Equipment Activation Key Critical Corrupted Inventory
running-event Configuration failed
901 demo-license-alarm Alarm Equipment Demo mode is active Warning Demo mode has been Disable demo mode from the
activated by the user Activation Key Configuration
page in the Web EMS.
902 license-demo-expired Event Equipment Demo mode is expired Warning
903 license-demo-start-by-user Event Processing Demo mode is started Warning
904 license-demo-stop-by-user Event Processing Demo mode is stopped Warning
Page 1032 of 1094

905 license-load-fail Event Equipment Activation key loading Major
failure
906 license-load-successful Event Equipment Activation key loaded Warning
successfully
907 license-violation-alarm Alarm Equipment Activation key violation Critical The current configuration 1. Go to the "Activation Key
does not match the Overview" page in the
activation-key-enabled Web EMS to display a list
feature set. of features and their
48 hours after an activation key violation
"activation-key-violation" status.
alarm is raised, sanction 2. Install a new activation key
mode is activated in that enables all features
which all alarms except and capacities that you
the activation key require.
violation alarm are
cleared and no new
alarms are raised.
908 demo-license-about-to-expire- Alarm Equipment Demo mode is about to Major Demo mode allowed Disable demo mode and install
alarm expire period is about to end a new valid activation key in
within 10 days the “Activation Key
Configuration” page of the
Web EMS.
910 license-signature-failed-alarm Alarm Equipment Activation key signature Major Activation key validation Make sure that the activation
failure has failed due to invalid key matches the serial number
product serial number or of the unit.
Page 1033 of 1094

activation key does not
match.
911 license-violation-runtime- Event Equipment Activation key violation Major
counter-expired sanction is enforced
913 license-bad-xml-file-alarm Alarm Equipment Activation key Major Essential internal Reinstall software
components are missing activation key
or corrupted components are missing
or corrupted.
1002 radio-protection-configuration- Alarm Equipment Radio protection Major The configuration Apply a copy-to-mate
mismatch configuration mismatch between the radio command to copy the
protection members is configuration from the active
not aligned radio to the standby radio.
1006 radio-protection-switchover- Event Equipment Radio protection Warning Protection decision Check the system for local
event switchover - reason machine initiated failures. What checks? Check
switchover due to local Radio Parameters: Tx Level, Rx
failure or user command Level, Modem MSE.
1007 radio-protection-no-mate Alarm Equipment Radio protection no Major Radio protection function 1. Insert the radio module.
mate is missing radio module, 2. Replace a defective
module defected or existing radio module.
disabled
3. Make sure all radio
interfaces are enabled.
1008 radio-protection-remote-switch- Event Equipment Remote switchover Warning
request request was sent -
reason
Page 1034 of 1094

1009 radio-protection-lockout Alarm Equipment Radio protection Major The user has issued a Clear the lockout command
lockout command is on lockout command
1010 ethernet-protection-switchover Event Equipment Ethernet Interface Warning 1. LOC event on an 1. Check the system for local
Group protection Ethernet interface. failures.
switchover 2. Protection group 2. Check external equipment.
member was
disabled or pulled
out of the shelf.
1011 interface-protection-lockout Alarm Equipment Interface protection Major 1. The user has issued a 1. If required, clear the
lockout is on lockout command lockout.
1012 interface-protection-no-mate Alarm Equipment Interface protection no Major Interface protection 1. Insert the interface
mate: mate interface is function is missing an module.
missing or disabled interface module, 2. Replace a defective
module is defective or existing interface.
disabled.
3. Make sure all interfaces
are enabled.
1102 software-installation-status Event Processing Software installation Warning
status:
1105 software-new-version-installed Event Processing New version installed Warning A software version has
been installed but system
has not been reset.
1111 software-user-confirmation-for- Event Processing User approved Warning
version download of software
version file
Page 1035 of 1094

1112 software-download-status Event Processing Software download Warning
status:
1113 software-download-missing- Event Processing Missing SW Warning
components components:
1114 software-management- Event Processing Incomplete file set; Warning Software bundle is Get a complete software
incomplete-bundle missing components missing components. bundle
1150 backup-started Event Processing Configuration file Warning User command
backup generation
started
1151 backup-succeeded Event Processing Configuration file Warning Backup file creation
backup created finished successfully
1152 backup-failure Event Processing Failure in configuration Warning System failed in attempt
file backup generation to create backup
configuration file
1153 restore-succeeded Event Processing Configuration Warning Configuration restore
successfully restored finished successfully
from file backup
1154 restore-failure Event Processing Failure in configuration Warning System failed in attempt 1. Configuration file system
restoring from backup to restore configuration type mismatch
file from backup file 2. Invalid or corrupted
configuration file
1155 restore-canceled Event Processing Configuration restore Warning Restore operation Try again
operation cancelled cancelled because of user
command or execution of
Page 1036 of 1094

another configuration
management operation
1156 file-transfer-issued Event Processing User issued command Warning User command
for transfer of
configuration file
1157 file-transfer-succeeded Event Processing Configuration file Warning Configuration file transfer
transfer successful successful
1158 file-transfer-failure Event Processing Configuration file Warning 1. Communications 1. Mark sure protocol details
transfer failure failure. are properly configured.
2. File not found in 2. Make sure file exists.
server
1159 file-transfer-in-progress Event Processing Configuration file Warning File transfer started
transfer in progress
1163 cli-script-activation-started Event Processing CLI configuration script Warning User command
activation started
1164 cli-script-activation-succeeded Event Processing CLI Configuration script Warning
executed successfully
1165 cli-script-activation-failure Event Processing CLI Configuration script Warning 1. Syntax Error. Verify script in the relevant
failed 2. Error returned by line, and run again.
system during Note that script may assume
runtime pre-existing configuration.
1166 unit-info-file-transfer-status- Event Processing Unit info file transfer Warning
changed status:
Page 1037 of 1094

1167 unit-info-file-creation-status- Event Processing Unit info file creation Warning
changed status:
1169 restore-started Event Processing Configuration restore Warning Restore operation started
operation started because of user
command
1201 file-missed Alarm Equipment Modem firmware file Critical Modem file is missing 1. Download software
not found package.
2. Reset the system.
1202 load-failed Alarm Equipment Modem firmware was Critical 1. Modem firmware file 1. Download software
not loaded successfully is corrupted. package.
2. System failure. 2. Reset the system.
1203 modem-wd-reset Event Equipment Modem watch-dog Warning
reset event
1301 fpga-file-currupt-alarm Alarm Equipment Radio MRMC script LUT Critical Damaged radio MRMC Download the specific radio
file is corrupted script LUT file MRMC script LUT file
1302 fpga-file-not-found-alarm Alarm Equipment Radio MRMC script LUT Critical Missing radio MRMC Download the specific radio
file is not found script LUT file MRMC script LUT file
1304 modem-script-file-corrupt- Alarm Equipment Radio MRMC script Critical Damaged radio MRMC Download the specific radio
alarm modem file is corrupted script modem file MRMC script modem file
1305 modem-script-file-not-found- Alarm Equipment Radio MRMC script Critical Missing radio MRMC Download the specific radio
alarm modem file is not found script modem file MRMC script modem file
1308 rfu-file-corrupt-alarm Alarm Equipment Radio MRMC file is Critical Damaged Radio MRMC Download the specific radio
corrupted script LUT file MRMC RFU file
Page 1038 of 1094

1309 rfu-file-not-found-alarm Alarm Equipment Radio MRMC RFU file is Major Missing radio MRMC RFU Download the specific radio
not found file MRMC RFU file
1312 script-loading-failed Alarm Equipment Radio errrror! Major Damaged hardware Replace the radio hardware
MRMC script loading module module
failed
1313 mrmc-profile-below-thresh1 Alarm Equipment MRMC RX profile below Major
threshold 1
1314 mrmc-profile-below-thresh2 Alarm Equipment MRMC RX profile below Critical
threshold 2
1401 incompatible-rfu-tx-calibration Alarm Equipment Incompatible RFU TX Major RFU calibration tables Upgrade IDU SW
calibration require SW upgrade
1501 remote-communication-failure Alarm Equipment Remote communication Critical Fade in the link Check the link performance
failure
1601 if-loopback Alarm Equipment IF loopback Warning User enabled IF loopback Disable IF loopback
1602 lock-detect Alarm Equipment IF synthesizer is Critical 1. Extreme 1. Check installation.
unlocked. temperature 2. Reset the RMC (Radio
condition. Modem Card) module.
2. HW failure. 3. Replace the RMC (Radio
Modem Card).
1610 rsl-degradation-threshold-out- Alarm Equipment Radio Receive Signal Warning RSL is very low due to: 1. Check for obstruction in
of-range Level is below the 1. Weather conditions, link path.
configured threshold obstruction in
Page 1039 of 1094

antenna line of sight, 2. Check the antennae
antennae alignment. alignment and link
2. Configured threshold planning.
needs to be 3. Recalculate the Path Loss
adjusted.2. and set the threshold
accordingly.
4. Check link settings - Tx
Power and Tx Frequency.
5. Check for a hardware
problem.
1651 atpc-override Alarm Communications ATPC overridden: Tx Warning Actual transmitted signal Correct the transmission levels.
level has been equal to level has been at its The alarm will be cleared only
the Max Tx level for a maximum value for upon manual clearing.
longer time than longer than allowed. This
allowed is probably caused by a
configuration error or link
planning error.
1697 radio-unit-extreme- Alarm Equipment Radio unit extreme Warning 1. Installation 1. Correct the installation
temperature temperature conditions. conditions.
2. Defective RFU. 2. Verify that the product is
operating according to
specifications.
3. Replace the RFU.
Page 1040 of 1094

1698 radio-unit-low-voltage Alarm Equipment Radio unit input voltage Warning 1. Power supply output 1. Check/replace the power
is too low is too low. supply connected to the
2. Power cable to RFU RFU.
is defective. 2. Check/replace the power
cable connected to the
RFU.
1699 radio-unit-high-voltage Alarm Equipment Radio unit input voltage Warning Power Supply output too 3. Check power supply.
is too high high.
1700 fw-download-failure Alarm Communications Radio unit not aligned Critical 1. FW alignment 1. Reinitiate the FW
to IDU interrupted, power download by disabling and
disruption, ODU then enabling the
cable malfunction. corresponding RFU port.
2. Damaged ODU. 2. Replace the ODU
1701 cable-open Alarm Equipment Cable open Major Cable is not connected to 1. Check cables and
radio card or RFU. connectors.
2. Replace Radio card.
3. Replace RFU.
1702 cable-short Alarm Equipment Cable short Major Physical short at the IF 1. Check cables and
cable connectors.
2. Replace Radio card.
3. Replace RFU.
1703 communication-failure Alarm Equipment RFU communication Warning 1. Defective IF cable. 1. Verify RFU software
failure 2. IF cable not download completed.
connected properly.
Page 1041 of 1094

3. Defective RMC 2. Check IF cable and
(Radio Modem Card). connector.
4. Defective RFU. 3. Verify that N-Type
5. RFU software connector inner pin is not
download in spliced.
progress. 4. Replace RMC.
5. Replace RFU.
For High Power RF Unit:
1. Check BMA connector on
OCB
2. Check BMA connector on
RFU.
1704 delay-calibration-failure-1 Alarm Equipment RFU delay calibration Warning Defective RFU 1. Reset the RMC (Radio
failure 1 Modem Card) / RFU.
2. Replace RFU.
1705 delay-calibration-failure-2 Alarm Equipment RFU delay calibration Warning Calibration cannot be Enter delay calibration value
failure 2 completed due to notch manually.
detection
1706 extreme-temp-cond Alarm Equipment RFU extreme Warning 1. Installation 1. Verify that the product is
temperature conditions. operating according to
2. Defective RFU. specifications.
2. Correct the installation
conditions.
3. Replace the RFU."
Page 1042 of 1094

1707 radio-unit-abc-incompatible-rfu Alarm Equipment RFU is incompatible Warning The RFU type does not Replace the RFU with an RFU
with ABC configuration support the type of type that supports the
Multi-Carrier ABC the configured Multi-Carrier ABC
user has configured. type.
1708 freq-set-automatically Event Equipment RFU frequency was set Warning Defective RFU 1. Check if problem repeats
automatically and if errors/alarms
reported.
2. Replace RFU.
1709 hardware-failure-1 Alarm Equipment RFU hardware failure 1 Critical Defective RFU. Replace RFU.
1710 hardware-failure-2 Alarm Equipment RFU hardware failure 2 Critical Defective RFU. Replace RFU.
1711 low-if-signal-to-rfu Alarm Equipment Low IF signal to RFU Major 1. IF cable connection. 1. Check IF cable connectors.
2. Defective RFU. 2. Verify that N-Type
3. Defective RMC connector inner pin is not
(Radio Modem Card). spliced.
Modem Card).
4. Replace RFU.
1712 no-signal-from-rfu Alarm Equipment Low IF signal from RFU Warning Low RX IF signal (140 1. Check IF cable and
MHz) from RFU. connectors.
2. Verify that N-Type
connector inner pin is not
spliced.
Modem Card).
Page 1043 of 1094

4. Replace RFU.
1713 pa-extreme-temp-cond Alarm Equipment RFU PA extreme Warning 1. Installation 1. Check installation
temperature conditions. conditions.
2. Defective RFU. 2. Replace RFU.
1714 power-failure-12v Alarm Equipment RFU power failure (12v) Major 1. Defective IF 1. Replace IF
cable/connector. cable/connector.
3. Defective IDU. 3. Replace IDU.
1715 power-failure-1point5 Alarm Equipment RFU power failure (1.5v) Major 1. Defective IF 1. Replace IF
1716 power-failure-24v Alarm Equipment RFU power failure (24v) Major 1. Defective IF 1. Replace IF
1717 power-failure-6v Alarm Equipment RFU power failure (6v Major 1. Defective IF 1. Replace IF
pro) cable/connector. cable/connector.
1718 power-failure-6v-sw Alarm Equipment RFU power failure (6v Major 1. Defective IF 1. Replace IF
SW) cable/connector. cable/connector.
Page 1044 of 1094

1719 power-failure-minus-5v Alarm Equipment RFU power failure (-5v) Major 1. Defective IF 1. Replace IF
1720 power-failure-vd Alarm Equipment RFU power failure (Vd) Major 1. Defective IF 1. Replace IF
1721 reset-occurred Event Equipment RFU reset Major
1722 rfu-loopback-active Alarm Equipment RFU loopback is active Major User has activated RFU Disable RFU loopback.
loopback.
1723 rfu-mode-changed-to-combined Event Equipment RFU mode changed to Indeterminate
Combined
1724 rfu-mode-changed-to-diversity Event Equipment RFU mode changed to Indeterminate
Diversity
1725 rfu-mode-changed-to-main Event Equipment RFU mode changed to Indeterminate
Main
1726 rfu-power-supply-failure Alarm Equipment RFU power supply Major At least one of the RFU's 1. Check the RFU cable
failure power supply voltages is connection.
too low. 2. Replace the RFU.
1727 rx-level-out-of-range Alarm Equipment RFU RX level out of Warning RSL is very low, link is 1. Check antenna alignment
range down. & link planning.
Page 1045 of 1094

2. Check link settings (TX
power, TX frequency).
3. Check antenna
connections.
4. Replace local/remote RFU.
1728 rx-level-path1-out-of-range Alarm Equipment RFU RX level path1 out Warning 1. Improper 1. Check that the fault is not
of range installation. due to rain/multi-path
2. Fading event. fading or lack of LOS.
3. Defective RFU. 2. Check link settings (TX
3. Check antenna alignment.
4. Check antenna
connections.
1729 rx-level-path2-out-of-range Alarm Equipment RFU RX level path2 out Warning 1. Improper 1. Check that the fault is not
of range installation. due to rain/multi-path
2. Fading event. fading or lack of LOS.
3. Defective RFU. 2. Check link settings (TX
3. Check antenna alignment.
4. Check antenna
connections.
Page 1046 of 1094

1730 radio-unit-communication- Alarm Equipment Radio unit Critical 1. Defective RFU cable. 1. Check RFU power supply.
failure communication failure 2. RFU cable not 2. Check RFU cable and
connected properly. connectors.
3. Defective RIC (Radio 3. Replace RIC (Radio
Interface Card). Interface Card).
5. RFU initialization in
progress.
6. RFU powered off.
1731 power-supply-radio-unit-cable- Alarm Equipment Power supply cable Major Power is enabled but 1. Check RFU cable and
open open consumption is lower connectors.
than threshold. 2. If internal power supply is
not in use disable the
power supply.
1732 power-supply-radio-unit-cable- Alarm Equipment Power supply cable Major 1. Power is enabled but 1. Check RFU cable and
short short consumption connectors.
reached the 2. Disconnect and Re-
threshold. Connect the RFU cable.
2. Physical short at the 3. Extract the RIC-D and re-
ETH cable. insert it.
4. Restart the IDU.
5. Replace the RIC-D card or
the IP-20F IDU.
Page 1047 of 1094

1733 synthesizer-unlocked Alarm Equipment RFU synthesizer Major At least one of the RFU 6. Replace RFU.
unlocked synthesizers is unlocked 7. In XPIC mode, replace
mate RFU as well.
1734 tx-level-out-of-range Alarm Equipment RFU TX level out of Minor Defective RFU (the RFU 1. Replace RFU.
range cannot transmit the 2. Intermediate solution -
requested TX power) reduce TX power.
1735 tx-mute Alarm Equipment RFU TX Mute Warning RFU Transmitter muted Unmute the RFU transmitter
by user
1736 unknown-rfu-type Alarm Equipment IDU SW does not Major IDC SW does not support Upgrade IDC SW
support this type of RFU the RFU
1737 card-extracted-from-slot Event Equipment Card was extracted from Warning Card was extracted from NA
slot slot
1738 card-failure Alarm Equipment Card is in Failure state Major Card is down as a result 1. Reset Card.
of card failure 2. Check if slot was disabled.
1739 card-fpga-fw-not-found Alarm Equipment FPGA Firmware file not Critical There is no FPGA file NA
found found on the Main Board
for the card on the slot
1740 card-fw-load-fail Alarm Equipment Download card Major Firmware download was 1. Reset Card.
firmware has failed unsuccessful. 2. Download software
package.
3. Try to insert another Card.
1741 card-inserted-to-slot Event Equipment Card was inserted to Warning Card was inserted to slot NA
slot
Page 1048 of 1094

1742 card-intermediate-channel- Alarm Equipment Card is in Major Card is down as a result 1. Reset Card.
failure interconnection failure of card interconnection 2. Check if the slot was
state failure disabled.
1743 card-missing Alarm Equipment Expected Card is missing Major 1. Card is missing. 1. Insert Expected Card.
in slot 2. Expected Card Type 2. Clear Expected Card Type.
configured on empty
slot.
1744 card-not-supported-for-slot Alarm Equipment This Card type is not Major The card is not on the 1. Reset.
supported in this slot Allowed Card Types list 2. Insert Card belongs to
for this slot. Allowed Card Types list.
1745 card-state-is-down Event Equipment Card operational state is Indeterminate Card state was change to NA
Down Down state
1746 card-state-is-up Event Equipment Card operational state is Indeterminate Card state was change to NA
Up Up state
1747 card-state-is-up-with-alarms Event Equipment Card operational state is Indeterminate Card state was change to NA
Up with Alarms Up state but with Alarms
indication
1748 card-unexpected Alarm Equipment Unexpected Card Type Minor Expected card type is 1. Insert Expected Card.
in slot different than the actual 2. Change Expected Card
card type Type.
1749 slot-disabled Event Equipment Slot was Disabled Indeterminate The user Disabled slot NA
1750 slot-enabled Event Equipment Slot was Enabled Indeterminate The user Enabled slot NA
1751 slot-reseted Event Equipment Card on slot was Reset Indeterminate The user Reset slot NA
Page 1049 of 1094

1752 fan-card-extraction-event Event Equipment FAN Card was extracted Warning FAN Card was extracted
from slot from slot
1753 fan-card-failure-event Event Equipment FAN failure Major
1754 fan-card-insertion-event Event Equipment FAN Card was inserted Warning FAN Card was inserted to
to slot slot
1755 fan-card-missing Alarm Equipment FAN Card is missing in Critical 1. FAN Card is missing. 1. Insert FAN Card.
slot 2. Slot enabled when 2. Disable slot.
empty.
17561 fan-extreme-temperature Alarm Equipment Extreme Temperature Major 1. Installation 1. Correct the installation
conditions. conditions.
2. Defective unit. 2. Verify that the product is
3. Defective fan. operating according to
specifications.
3. Replace the fan card.
4. Replace the unit.
1757 fan-failure Alarm Equipment FAN Card is in Failure Major FAN Card is in Failure Change FAN Card
state state
1758 pdc-card-extraction-event Event Equipment Power Supply was Warning Power Supply was Re-Insert the power supply
extracted from slot extracted from slot back into the slot.
1
This alarm is not relevant for IP-20 all-outdoor products.
Page 1050 of 1094

1759 pdc-card-insertion-event Event Equipment Power Supply was Warning Power Supply was
inserted to slot inserted to slot.
1760 pdc-card-missing Alarm Equipment Power Supply is missing Major 1. Power Supply is Insert Power Supply.
in slot missing.
2. Slot enabled when
empty.
1761 pdc-over-voltage Alarm Equipment Over voltage Major 1. System power supply 1. Make sure the power
voltage is higher supply voltage is within
than allowed. the specification range.
2. Threshold value is 2. Check the value of the
too low. threshold.
1762 pdc-under-voltage Alarm Equipment Under voltage Major 1. System power supply 1. Make sure the power
voltage is lower than supply voltage is within
allowed. the specification range.
2. Threshold value is 2. Check the value of the
too high. threshold.
1763 TCC-fpga-fw-not-found Alarm Equipment The Main board Warning
firmware is not found
1764 TCC-fw-load-fail Alarm Equipment Download Main Board Major Firmware download was 1. Reset board.
firmware has failed unsuccessful. 2. Download software
package.
3. Try to insert another
board.
1765 tcc-powerup-reset-event Event Equipment Main Board was reset Warning
Page 1051 of 1094

1766 upload-software-failed Event Equipment RFU installation failure Warning 1. Unsupported RFU 1. Make sure RFU is
type. supported by SW version.
2. IDU-RFU 2. Check IDU-RFU cable.
communications 3. Replace RFU.
problem.
3. RFU failure.
1767 upload-software-started Event Equipment RFU installation in Warning User command
progress
1768 upload-software-succeeded- Event Equipment RFU installation Warning User command
event successfully completed
1769 unit-cold-reset-event Event Unit Performed Power Warning
up
1770 cable-lof-rfu Event Equipment Unit performing power- Major
up.
1771 cable-error-rfu Alarm Equipment RFU cable error. Major Errors in signal from IDU 1. Check the IF cable and
to XCVR. connectors.
2. Verify that the N-
Type/TNC connector inner
pin is not spliced.
3. Replace RMC.
4. Replace XCVR.
1772 xpic-data-los Alarm Equipment Radio XPIC sync loss Major Signaling between RMCs 1. Check that the RMCs are in
(Radio Modem Cards) for allowed slots.
Page 1052 of 1094

XPIC functionality has 2. Populate the RMCs in
failed different allowed location
in the chassis.
3. Replace RMC/s.
4. Replace chassis.
1773 early-warning Alarm Communications Radio early warning. Warning The estimated radio BER 5. Check link performance.
(Bit Error Rate) is above 6. Check IF cable, and replace
10E-12. if required.
7. Replace XCVR.
8. Replace RMC.
1774 sw-download-incompatible-rfu Alarm Equipment RFU software download Critical The hardware of the 1. Upgrade the XCVR
cannot be initiated. XCVR is OK, but is it software application via
running with METRO XPAND-IP and then
radio application. reinitiate software
download..
1775 hw-incompatible-rfu Alarm Equipment RFU software download Critical Wrong type of XCVR, the Replace the XCVR
is not possible. XCVR hardware is
METRO.
1776 pll-rmc Alarm Equipment RMC hardware failure. Major RMC hardware failure of Replace the RMC.
the clock distributor.
1777 rfu-mute-with-timeout Event Equipment RFU TX Mute with Warning RFU Transmitter muted Unmute the RFU transmitter or
timeout by user. wait for expiration of the
timeout.
Page 1053 of 1094

1778 rfu-power-decreased-due-to-pa- Alarm Equipment RFU power decreased Major Defective RFU (the RFU 1. Replace RFU.
temp due to PA temperature cannot transmit the 2. Intermediate solution -
requested TX power). reduce TX power.
1780 mrmc-running-script-deleted Event Equipment MRMC running script is Warning New installed software 1. Make sure the required
deleted package does not include software package include
the running MRMC radio the running MRMC radio
script script.
2. Download and install the
correct software package.
1781 mrmc-running-script-updated Event Equipment MRMC running script is Warning New installed software Reset the radio carrier to
updated package does has an reacquire the new updated
updated version of the MRMC radio script
running MRMC radio
script
1782 radio-2_5gbps-mismatch- Alarm Equipment 2.5Gbps mismatch Warning The card cannot function Add the card to an ABC group,
configuration configuration outside of an ABC group or change the Slot Section to
in 2.5Gbps mode. 1Gbps.
1783 remote-fault-indication Alarm Communication Radio remote fault Minor
indication (RFI)
1790 np-hw-failure Alarm Equipment Hardware failure Critical An internal hardware Replace the card or unit which
failure has been detected reports hardware failure.
by the system.
1794 interface-not-functional-until- Alarm equipment Interface is not Warning Changes were made to Reset chassis
reset operational until chassis platform due to user
reset configuration
Page 1054 of 1094

1800 t3-loc-alarm Alarm Equipment T3 sync interface Loss of Major 1. Cable disconnected. 1. Check the cable
Carrier 2. Defective cable. connection.
2. Disable the interface in the
Interface Manager.
1975 radio-fan-failure Alarm Equipment RFU fan failure Major 1. RFU fan is 1. Check fan cable
disconnected. connection to the RFU.
2. RFU fan HW failure. 2. Check/replace the fan.
3. RFU fan jammed. 3. Clear/clean the fan.
2001 pwe3-pwc-s-card-reset Alarm Equipment TDM-LIC has rebooted Major 1. Recent TDM-LIC card 1. Wait for card to reboot.
and is not in service reset; 2. Reset the TDM-LIC card.
now 2. System malfunction. 3. Replace card.
2002 pwe3-pwc-s-config-mismatch Alarm Equipment TDM-LIC configuration Major System malfunction. 1. Reset the TDM-LIC.
mismatch 2. Reset the Device.
3. Remove the TDM
Configuration and Re-
Configure it again.
2003 pwe3-pwc-s-front-panel-clock- Alarm Equipment Loss of Signal (LOS) on Major Cable is not properly 1. Reconnect cable.
los TDM-LIC's front panel connected. 2. Check line cables.
clock port
4. Reset the TDM-LIC.
2004 pwe3-pwc-s-host-pw-lic-comm- Alarm Equipment Communication with Minor System malfunction 1. Reset the TDM-LIC.
disrupt TDM-LIC is disrupted in 2. Replace card.
Host-Card direction
Page 1055 of 1094

2005 pwe3-pwc-s-hw-failure Alarm Equipment TDM-LIC hardware Major System malfunction 1. Reset the TDM-LIC.
failure 2. Replace card.
2006 pwe3-pwc-s-pw-lic-host-comm- Alarm Equipment No communication with Major TDM-LIC to Host 1. Reset the TDM-LIC.
disrupt TDM-LIC communication failure. 2. Reset the whole device.
3. Replace card.
2007 pwe3-pws-s-jitter-buffer- Alarm Equipment Jitter-buffer-overrun Major TDM service 1. Check TDM service
overrun alarm on TDM service synchronization failure. configuration across the
network.
2. Check the loop
timing/clock recovery
configuration.
2008 pwe3-pws-s-late-frame Alarm Equipment Late-frame alarm on Warning TDM service failure or Check TDM service
TDM service device synchronization configuration across the
problem. network.
2009 pwe3-pws-s-loss-of-frames Alarm Equipment Loss-of-frames alarm on Major Failure along the network Check network or configuration
TDM service path of TDM service for errors in the network
transport side of the service
2010 pwe3-pws-s-malformed-frames Alarm Equipment Malformed-frames Major 1. Payload size does not Check TDM service
alarm on TDM service correspond to the configuration
defined value.
2. Mismatch in PT value
in RTP header (if
used)
Page 1056 of 1094

2011 pwe3-pws-s-misconnection Alarm Equipment Misconnection alarm on Major Stray packets with wrong Check TDM service
TDM service RTP configurations are configuration
received and dropped.
2012 pwe3-tdm-port-s-ais Alarm Equipment Alarm Indication Signal Major 1. Cable is not properly 1. Check the cable
(AIS) on TDM-LIC TDM connected. connectivity at both local
port 2. External equipment and peer interfaces.
is faulty. 2. Check external equipment.
3. External equipment 3. Check configuration of the
is not properly external equipment.
configured.
2013 pwe3-tdm-port-s-lof Alarm Equipment Loss Of Frame (LOF) on Major 1. Line is not properly 1. Check the line interface
TDM-LIC TDM port connected. connectivity
2. External equipment 2. Correct the TDM
is faulty. configuration.
3. Configuration 3. Check the equipment that
problem. feeds the system
2014 pwe3-tdm-port-s-lomf Alarm Equipment Loss Of Multi-Frame Major 1. Line is not properly 1. Check the line interface
(LOMF) on TDM-LIC connected. connectivity
TDM port 2. External equipment 2. Correct the TDM
is faulty. configuration.
3. Configuration 3. Check the equipment that
problem. feeds the system
2015 pwe3-tdm-port-s-loopback- Alarm Equipment Loopback on TDM-LIC Warning Loopback enabled. Disable loopback.
alarm TDM port
Page 1057 of 1094

2016 pwe3-tdm-port-s-los Alarm Equipment Loss Of Signal (LOS) on Major 1. Cable is not properly 1. Check the cable
TDM-LIC TDM port connected. connectivity at both local
2. Cable is faulty; and peer interfaces.
is faulty;
4. Defective TDM-LIC.
2017 pwe3-tdm-port-s-rai Alarm Equipment Remote Alarm Minor 1. Cable is not properly 1. Check the cable
Indication (RAI) on connected. connectivity at both local
TDM-LIC TDM port 2. External equipment and peer interfaces.
2018 pwe3-tdm-port-s-unexpected- Alarm Equipment E1/DS1 Unexpected Warning Line is connected to a 1. Enable relevant port.
signal-alarm signal on TDM-LIC TDM disabled port. 2. Disconnect cable from
port relevant port.
2021 pwe3-pwc-s-ssm-rx-changed Event Equipment SSM received pattern Warning No action is required.
change was discovered
2022 pwe3-stm1oc3-s-excessive-ber- Alarm Equipment Excessive BER on TDM- Major 1. Line is not properly 1. Reconnect line.
alarm LIC STM1/OC3 port connected. 2. Check line cables.
is faulty.
4. Power cycle the TDM-LIC.
2023 pwe3-stm1oc3-s-lof-alarm Alarm Equipment Loss Of Frame (LOF) on Major 1. Cable is not properly 1. Check the cable
TDM-LIC STM1/OC3 connected. connectivity at both local
port 2. External equipment and peer interfaces.
Page 1058 of 1094

3. Wrong TDM 3. Reset the TDM-LIC.
configuration.
2024 pwe3-stm1oc3-s-loopback- Alarm Equipment Loopback on TDM-LIC Warning STM1/OC3 loopback Disable STM1/OC3 loopback.
alarm STM1/OC3 port enabled.
2025 pwe3-stm1oc3-s-los-alarm Alarm Equipment Loss Of Signal (LOS) on Critical 1. Cable is not properly 1. Reconnect cable.
TDM-LIC STM1/OC3 connected. 2. Check line cables.
port 2. External equipment 3. Check external equipment.
is faulty.
3. Peer Equipment
Configuration
problem.
2026 pwe3-stm1oc3-s-mute-override- Alarm Equipment SFP is muted on TDM- Warning The SFP interface has Set the interface to mute OFF.
alarm LIC STM1/OC3 port been muted.
2027 pwe3-stm1oc3-s-sfp-absent- Alarm Equipment SFP absent in TDM-LIC Critical SFP is not inserted Insert the SFP.
alarm STM1/OC3 port properly.
2028 pwe3-stm1oc3-s-sfp-failure- Alarm Equipment SFP failure on TDM-LIC Critical 1. SFP is not inserted 1. Insert the SFP.
alarm STM1/OC3 port properly. 2. Replace the SFP.
2. Card is faulty. 3. Replace the card.
2029 pwe3-stm1oc3-s-sfp-tx-fail- Alarm Equipment SFP transmit failure on Critical 1. SFP is not inserted 1. Insert the SFP.
alarm TDM-LIC STM1/OC3 properly. 2. Replace the SFP.
port 2. Card is faulty. 3. Replace the card.
2030 pwe3-stm1oc3-s-signal- Alarm Equipment Signal Degrade on TDM- Minor 1. Line is not properly 1. Install SFP properly.
degrade-alarm LIC STM1/OC3 port connected. 2. Reconnect line.
Page 1059 of 1094

2. SFP is not properly 3. Check line cables.
installed. 4. Check external equipment.
3. SFP is faulty. 5. Change Signal Degrade
4. External equipment Threshold.
is faulty
2031 pwe3-stm1oc3-s-slm-alarm Alarm Equipment J0 Trace Identifier Minor 1. J0 misconfiguration. 1. Make sure expected and
Mismatch on TDM-LIC 2. Line is not properly received J0 identifiers
STM1/OC3 port connected. match.
3. SFP is not properly 2. Connect line cables
installed. properly.
4. External equipment 3. Install SFP properly.
is faulty.
2032 pwe3-stm1oc3-s-ssm-rx- Event Equipment SSM pattern received Warning
changed on TDM-LIC STM1/OC3
port changed
2033 pwe3-vc12vt15-s-ais-alarm Alarm Equipment Alarm Indication Signal Minor 1. Cable is not properly 1. Check the cable
(AIS) on TDM-LIC connected. connectivity at both local
VC12/VT1.5 2. Local/Peer and peer interfaces.
Configuration is 2. Check/Correct the
incorrect. configuration at the
local/peer.
2034 pwe3-vc12vt15-s-excessive-ber- Alarm Equipment Excessive BER on TDM- Minor 1. Line is not properly 1. Check the line cables.
alarm LIC VC12/VT1.5 connected. 2. Fix the problem at the
2. External equipment peer.
is faulty.
Page 1060 of 1094

3. Change the Excessive BER
threshold.
2035 pwe3-vc12vt15-s-loopback- Alarm Equipment Loopback on TDM-LIC Warning Loopback enabled on Disable loopback on TDM-LIC
alarm VC12/VT1.5 TDM-LIC VC12/VC11. VC12/VC11.
2036 pwe3-vc12vt15-s-rcv-plm-alarm Alarm Equipment Payload Mismatch Path Minor Incorrect VC12/VC11 Check/Correct the
(PLM) received on TDM- configuration configuration at the local/peer.
LIC VC12/VT1.5
2037 pwe3-vc12vt15-s-rcv-rdi-alarm Alarm Equipment Remote Defect Minor 1. Alarm exists along 1. Fix the problem along the
Indication (RDI) received the Trail. trail.
on TDM-LIC VC12/VT1.5 2. Cable is not properly 2. Check the cable
connected. connectivity at both local
and peer interfaces.
2038 pwe3-vc12vt15-s-rcv-slm-alarm Alarm Equipment Signal Label Mismatch Minor 1. J2 misconfiguration. 1. Make sure expected and
(SLM) received on TDM- 2. Line is not properly receive J2 match
LIC VC12/VT1.5 connected. 2. Reconnect line.
3. External equipment 3. Check line cables.
2039 pwe3-vc12vt15-s-signal- Alarm Equipment Signal Degrade on TDM- Minor 1. Line is not properly 1. Reconnect line.
degrade-alarm LIC VC12/VT1.5 connected. 2. Check line cables.
is faulty.
Page 1061 of 1094

2040 pwe3-vc12vt15-s-unequipped- Alarm Equipment Unequipped on TDM-LIC Minor 1. Incorrect line is 1. Reconnect line.
alarm VC12/VT1.5 connected. 2. Check line cables.
is faulty or
misconfigured.
2041 pwe3-card-group-s-config- Alarm Equipment TDM-LIC card protection Major The configuration Apply a copy-to-mate
mismatch configuration mismatch between the TDM-LIC command to copy the
card protection members configuration from the
is not aligned required TDM-LIC to the other
one
2042 pwe3-card-group-s-lockout Alarm Equipment TDM-LIC card protection Minor The user has issued a Clear the lockout command
group lockout command lockout command
is on
2043 pwe3-card-group-s-no-mate Alarm Equipment A member of TDM-LIC Minor TDM-LIC card is not Install the missing TDM-LIC
card protection group is installed in the shelf card
missing
2044 pwe3-card-group-s-protection- Event Equipment TDM-LIC card protection Warning 1. LOS alarm on a STM1 1. Check line cables.
switch-evt switch over, priority interface of the 2. Enable the TDM-LIC card
TDM-LIC card protection group member
protection group or insert the missing card
member; into the shelf.
2. A TDM-LIC card
protection group
member was
disabled or pulled
out of the shelf
Page 1062 of 1094

2045 pwe3-vc12vt15-s-lop-alarm Alarm Equipment Loss Of Pointer (LOP) Minor 1. Timing not 1. Correct the timing
received on TDM-LIC configured correctly. configuration.
VC12/VT1.5 2. End-to-end timing is 2. Correct the end-to-end
not synchronized. timing problem.
3. External Equipment 3. Check the external
is faulty. equipment.
4. Network service 4. Fix the network service
connectivity problem.
problem. 5. Fix the interface and card
5. Lower layer problem. problem.
2046 pwe3-tunnel-groups-s- Event Equipment Path protection switch Minor 1. Failure along service 1. Check errors along primary
protection-switch on TDM service primary path. path
2. User command. 2. Check local service
configuration.
2047 pwe3-tunnel-groups-s- Event Equipment Path protection Minor Primary path has been -
revertive-switch revertive switch on TDM operational for the
service duration of the defined
WTR time
2100 STM-1-OC-3-IN-LOS Alarm Equipment Loss of Signal on Line Critical 1. Line is not properly 1. Reconnect line.
Interface (LOS) on STM- connected. 2. Check line cables.
1/OC-3 port. 2. External equipment 3. Check external equipment.
is faulty.
2101 STM-1-OC-3-IN-LOF Alarm Equipment Loss of Frame on Line Major 1. Line is not properly 1. Reconnect line.
Interface (LOF) on STM- connected. 2. Check line cables.
1/OC-3 port.
Page 1063 of 1094

is faulty.
2102 STM-1-OC-3-IN-MSAIS Alarm Equipment Alarm Indication Signal Minor 1. Line is not properly 1. Reconnect line.
on Line Interface (MS- connected. 2. Check line cables.
AIS/AIS-L) received. 2. External equipment 3. Check external equipment.
is faulty.
2103 STM-1-OC-3-IN-MSRDI Alarm Equipment Remote Defect Minor External equipment is 1. Reconnect line.
Indication on Line faulty. 2. Check line cables.
Interface (MS-RDI/RDI-
L) received.
2104 STM-1-OC-3-RX-LOS Alarm Equipment Loss of STM-1/OC-3 Major 1. All channels in Multi 1. Check link performance.
Frame on Radio Carrier ABC group 2. Check radio alarms for
Interface. are down. channel.
2. Incorrect 3. Check configuration.
configuration on
remote side.
2105 STM-1-OC-3-RX-MSAIS Alarm Equipment MS-AIS/AIS-L on Radio Minor 1. Remote STM-1/OC-3 Check remote equipment.
Interface detected. signal is missing
(LOS/LOF/MS-
AIS/AIS-L on remote
STM-1/OC-3
interface).
2. STM-1/OC-3
Channel removed
due to reduced
Page 1064 of 1094

radio capacity on
remote side.
2106 STM-1-OC-3-RX-RDI Alarm Equipment MS-RDI/RDI-L on Radio Minor External equipment is Check remote equipment.
Interface detected. faulty.
2107 STM-1-OC-3-LOOPBACK Alarm Equipment STM-1/OC-3 Loopback Warning Looping. Remove looping.
2108 STM-1/OC-3-CHANNEL-1- Alarm Equipment STM-1/OC-3 Channel Warning 1. Reduced capacity. 1. Check link performance.
REMOVED Removed alarm (due to 2. Fading 2. Check radio alarms for
reduced radio capacity). channel.
2109 STM-1-OC-3-PBRS-INSERTION Alarm Equipment PRBS insertion. Warning PRBS insertion on STM- Remove PRBS insertion.
1/OC-3 card.
2110 STM-1-OC-3-SFP-NOT- Alarm Equipment SFP absent in STM- Critical 1. SFP is not properly 1. Install SFP properly.
DETECTED 1/OC-3 port. installed. 2. Replace the card.
2. SFP is faulty.
2111 STM-1-OC-3-SFP-TX-FAILURE Alarm Equipment SFP Transmit Failure on Critical 1. SFP is faulty. 1. Replace SFP or insert SFP if
STM-1/OC-3 port. it is not inserted correctly.
2. Replace the card.
2112 STM-1-OC-3-SFP-TX-MUTED Alarm Equipment SFP is muted on STM- Warning SFP is muted by Remove muting.
1/OC-3 port. configuration.
REMOVED Removed alarm (due to 2. Fading. 2. Check radio alarms for
Page 1065 of 1094

2120 STM1-OC3-GROUP-ACTIVITY- Event Equipment STM-1/OC-3 Group Warning 1. LOS alarm on an 1. Check line cables.
CHANGED protection switchover STM-1/OC-3 2. Check external equipment.
interface.
2. STM1-OC3 Group
protection group
member was
Page 1066 of 1094

disabled or pulled
out of the shelf.
2200 MC-ABC-Local-LOF Alarm Communications Multi Carrier ABC LOF. Critical All channels in Multi 1. Check link performance on
Carrier ABC group are all radio channels in Multi
down. Carrier ABC group.
2. Check radio alarms for
channels in Multi Carrier
ABC group.
3. Check configuration of
Multi Carrier ABC group.
2201 MC-ABC-local-cap-below Alarm Multi Carrier ABC Major 1. One of the radio 1. Check link performance on
bandwidth is below the channels in the Multi all radio channels in Multi
threshold Carrier ABC group Carrier ABC group
has a lower capacity 2. Check radio alarms for
than expected channels in Multi Carrier
2. Minimum bandwidth ABC group
threshold 3. Check configuration of
configuration is Multi Carrier ABC group
wrong Minimum bandwidth
threshold
2203 MC-ABC-Lvds-Error-Sl2 Alarm Equipment LVDS RX Error Slot 2. Major Hardware failure 1. Replace RMC.
between RMC and TCC 2. Replace TCC.
cards.
3. Replace chassis.
Page 1067 of 1094

cards.
3. Replace chassis.
cards.
3. Replace chassis.
cards.
3. Replace chassis.
cards.
3. Replace chassis.
cards.
3. Replace chassis.
cards.
3. Replace chassis.
cards.
3. Replace chassis.
Page 1068 of 1094

cards.
3. Replace chassis.
cards.
3. Replace chassis.
2219 MC-ABC-Ch-Id-Mismatch-Ch1 Alarm Equipment Multi Carrier ABC Warning Configuration failure. Compare Channel ID
Channel Id Mismatch configuration with remote side.
Ch1.
Ch2.
Ch3.
Ch4.
Ch5.
Ch6.
Page 1069 of 1094

Ch7.
Ch8.
2235 MC-ABC-Ch-Id-Disabled-Ch1 Alarm Equipment Multi Carrier ABC Warning Admin state for channel Enable admin state for
Channel Id Manual is down. channel.
Disabled Ch1.
Disabled Ch2.
Disabled Ch3.
Disabled Ch4.
Disabled Ch5.
Disabled Ch6.
Page 1070 of 1094

Disabled Ch7.
Disabled Ch8.
2250 CRB-Group-Entity Alarm communications Enhanced Multi Carrier Critical All channels in Enhanced 1. Check link performance on
ABC LOF Multi Carrier ABC group all channels in Enhanced
are down Multi Carrier ABC group.
2. Check alarms for channels
in Enhanced Multi Carrier
ABC group.
3. Check configuration of
Enhanced Multi Carrier
ABC group.
2300 protection-configuration- Alarm Equipment Protection configuration Major The configuration Apply copy-to-mate command
mismatc mismatch! between the protected to copy the configuration from
devices is not aligned. the required device to the
other one.
2301 protection-copytomate-started Event Processing Copy to mate started Indeterminate The copy-to-mate This is a notification
command has just begun!
2302 protection-copytomate- Event Processing Copy to mate Indeterminate The copy-to-mate This is a notification
completed completed command was
completed.
Page 1071 of 1094

3000 chassis-reset-event Event Equipment Chassis was reset Warning User issued a command Wait until the reset cycle is
to reset the chassis. ended and the system is up
and running.
3001 10gbps-mode-front-panel-ports- Alarm Equipment Reset chassis to activate Warning Front panel Ethernet Reset chassis.
unavailable front panel Ethernet ports cannot work when
ports slot 12 is configured in
10Gbps mode.
3002 slot-mode-front-panel-ports- Alarm Equipment Front panel Ethernet Warning Front panel Ethernet port Configure the relevant capacity
not-functional port cannot function in cannot work in a mode mode to 1 Gbps mode.
current configured other than 1Gbps.
capacity mode
3003 abc-mode-not-functional Alarm Equipment Multi Carrier ABC group Warning Multi Carrier ABC group Configure the relevant capacity
is not functional in does not support the mode to 1 Gbps mode.
current configured configured capacity
capacity mode mode.
3004 abc-mode-not-functional-until- Alarm Equipment Multi Carrier ABC group Warning Multi Carrier ABC group Reset chassis.
reset is not functional in capacity mode is
current configured different than the
capacity mode until configured capacity
chassis is reset mode.
4000 hw-failure Alarm Equipment Card has one or more Critical One or more HW faults. Replace card.
HW failures
4001 slotsection-2_5gbps- Alarm Equipment Card cannot function in Warning The user set an expected Change the Slot Section to
compatibility 2.5Gbps mode. card that does not 1Gbps.
support 2.5Gbps.
Page 1072 of 1094

4002 slot-slotsection-10gbps-card- Alarm Equipment Card is not functional Warning Slot is not in 10Gbps Reset chassis.
not-functional until chassis is reset mode.
5000 failure-login-event Event Equipment User blocked due to Indeterminate User blocked due to The user should wait few
consecutive failure login consecutive failure login minutes until it account will be
unblock
5001 g8032-protection-switching- Alarm Processing ERPI is either in Minor Either link failure Fix the broken link in the ring
alarm protection state or happened in the ring or or release the force/manual
forced protection state force/manual command command.
is active.
5002 g8032-failure-of-protocol-pm- Alarm Processing More than a single RPL Warning RPL configuration is Reconfigure the RPL
alarm is configured in a ring wrong. configuration.
5003 lldp-topology-change Event Processing LLDP topology change Warning New neighbor None
5004 security-log-upload-started- Event Equipment Security log upload Indeterminate Security log upload
event started started
5005 security-log-upload-failed-event Event Equipment Security log upload Indeterminate Security log upload failed
failed
5006 security-log-upload-succeeded- Event Equipment Security log upload Indeterminate Security log upload
event succeeded succeeded
5010 force-mode-alarm Alarm Equipment System is in sync force Warning User command
mode state
5011 sync-quality-change-event Event Equipment The sync-source quality Major
level was changed
Page 1073 of 1094

5012 system-clock-in-holdover-mode Alarm Equipment System Synchronization Critical Active Sync Source Fix the Sync Source Failure.
Reference in Holdover Failure and the clock unit Provide an alternative sync
Mode enters holdover mode source.
5013 sync-T0-quality-change-event Event Equipment System sync reference Major
T0 quality has changed
5014 sync-pipe-invalid-interface- Alarm Equipment The pipe interface clock- Major For interfaces of a Pipe, Set the outgoing clock source
clock-source source in signal- the outgoing clock source type to System Clock in the
interface table is not type must be "System Outgoing Clock Table via
system-clock Clock". Outgoing Clock view in the
Web EMS or the platform sync
interface config command in
the CLI.
5015 sync-pipe-missing-edge Alarm Equipment The pipe is missing an Major Pipe Regenerator Configure a second interface
edge interface contains less than 2 for the Pipe Regenerator.
interfaces.
5016 sync-pipe-interface-op-state- Alarm Equipment Pipe interface Major One or both of the 1. Check both interfaces of
down operational state is Regenerator Interfaces the pipe regenerator -
down status is down. admin and operational
statuses.
2. Check Ethernet cable
communication.
3. Make sure Radio Link is up.
5017 sync-pipe-invalid-pipe Alarm Equipment Pipe is invalid Major Pipe Regenerator 1. Fix the Pipe Regenerator
configuration is invalid or configuration.
Page 1074 of 1094

interface operational 2. Ensure both interfaces are
failure. operational.
5018 sync-1588-tc-not-operational Alarm Equipment 1588TC is not Major System Failure Reboot the unit
operational
5019 sync-1588-tc-not-calibrated Alarm Sync 1588TC over the radio is Major 1588TC over the radio is Check that the radio link
not calibrated enabled but could not be configuration have:
calibrated 1. TC enabled on both sides
2. Frequency lock UP on both
sides
3. TC downstream at one
side and upstream on the
other side
5020 sync-T3-remote-loopback Alarm Equipment T3 interface at loopback Warning T3 Interface is configured If required, disable the
mode in loopback. loopback.
5021 sync-T4-analog-loopback Alarm Equipment T4 interface at loopback Warning T4 Interface is configured If required, disable the
mode in loopback. loopback.
5022 security-rsa-key-download- Event Equipment Security rsa key Indeterminate Security rsa key
failed-event download failed download failed
started-event download started download started
succeeded-event download succeeded download succeeded
5025 security-rsa-key-install-failed- Event Equipment Security rsa key install Indeterminate Security rsa key install
event failed failed
Page 1075 of 1094

5026 security-rsa-key-install-started- Event Equipment Security rsa key install Indeterminate Security rsa key install
5027 security-rsa-key-install- Event Equipment Security rsa key install Indeterminate Security rsa key
succeeded-event succeeded download succeeded
5030 soam-connectivity-failure Alarm Processing A connectivity failure in Minor Wrong link Check the link in the traffic
MA/MEG configurations. path
5031 soam-def-error-failure Alarm Processing Error CCM received Major 1. Invalid CCMs has 1. Check the links along the
been received. traffic path.
2. MEP Id does not 2. Check the configuration of
exist or a wrong the MEPs.
interval was received
in the CCM.
5032 soam-def-mac-failure Alarm Processing Remote mep MAC Minor Remote MEP’s associated Check remote Port Interface
status not up MAC is reporting an error status
status
5033 soam-def-rdi-failure Alarm Processing Mep Rdi received Minor Remote Defect indication 1. Check the SOAM
has been received from configurations.
remote MEP 2. Check that all local MEPs
are configured correctly
and enabled.
3. Check the service
connectivity.
5034 soam-remote-ccm-failure Alarm Processing Remote mep CCMs are Major The MEP is not 1. Check all the remote
not received receiving CCMs from at SOAM configurations.
Page 1076 of 1094

least one of the remote 2. Check that all remote
MEPs MEPs are configured
correctly and enabled.
3. Check the service
connectivity.
5035 soam-def-xcon-failure Alarm Processing Cross Connect CCM Major CCM from another MAID Check MA/MEG and MEP
received or lower MEG level have configurations
been received
5036 ptp-stream-state-change Event Processing 1588-BC port state Warning
changed
5037 ptp-bmca-update Event Processing 1588-BC BMCA has Warning
been updated.
5038 ptp-output-squelch Event Processing 1588-BC outputs are Warning
squelched.
5039 ptp-parent-data-set-change Event Processing 1588-BC parent dataset Warning
has changed.
5040 ptp-utc-offset-change Event Processing 1588-BC UTC offset Warning
value changed.
5041 ptp-leap-seconds-flag-change Event Processing 1588-BC one of the leap Warning
seconds flags have
changed.
5042 ptp-message-interval-change Event Processing 1588-BC message Warning
interval change
detected.
Page 1077 of 1094

5043 ptp-message-rate-announce Alarm Processing 1588-BC announce Major Misconfiguration of the Check the message rate
message rate is below peer system. configuration of the peer
expected. system.
5044 ptp-message-rate-sync Alarm Processing 1588-BC sync message Major Misconfiguration of the Check the message rate
rate is below expected. peer system. configuration of the peer
system.
5045 ptp-message-rate-delay-req Alarm Processing 1588-BC delay request Major Misconfiguration of the Check the message rate
message rate is below peer system. configuration of the peer
expected. system.
5046 ptp-no-syncE Alarm Processing 1588-BC performance is Critical Loss of system clock Restore the system clock
degraded due to loss of reference. synchronization to a PRC-
system clock reference. traceable source.
5047 soam-csf-rdi-alarm Alarm Processing Auto-state-propagation Major Remote system triggered Resolve the problem on the
indication received auto-state-propagation .remote system.
5048 lacp-port-out-of-sync-alarm Alarm Processing LACP port out of Major LACP port was not Resolve the problem on the
collecting-distributing selected by the remote system
aggregator or partner is
out of sync
5100 mkey-mismatch Alarm Equipment Master key mismatch Critical Master Key was not set Verify the Master Key.
cross over the link correctly.
5101 mkey-no-exist Alarm Equipment No Master Key set, Warning Crypto module has been Set the Master Key.
default value used enabled, but no Master
Key has been loaded.
Page 1078 of 1094

5102 general-encryption-failure Alarm Equipment Payload Encryption Critical 1. Radio LOF on Tx/Rx 4. Validate the MSE on both
failure direction. sides of the link.
2. The session key does 5. Validate the session key on
not match across the both sides of the link.
link. 6. Validate the AES admin
3. The AES admin setting on both sides of
setting does not the link.
match across the
link.
5104 kep-initiated Event Equipment Key Exchange Protocol Indeterminate
in progress, Traffic has
been blocked
5105 kep-remote-initiated Event Equipment Key Exchange Protocol Indeterminate
initiated by remote side
5107 bypass-self-test-alarm Alarm Equipment FIPS Bypass Self-Test Critical Disk failure
failed
5108 post-fail-alarm Alarm Equipment Power On Self-Test Critical System failure 1. Reboot the unit.
Failed 2. Check for faults.
3. Replace unit
5109 main-board-non-fips-alarm Alarm Equipment Main Board is not FIPS Critical Main Board used is not Use a FIPS-certified TCC.
certified FIPS certified
5110 radio-non-fips-alarm Alarm Equipment Radio card is not FIPS Major Radio Card used is not Use a FIPS-certified RMC.
certified FIPS certified
Page 1079 of 1094

5111 aes-self-test-fail-alarm Alarm Equipment Radio crypto module fail Critical FIPS Radio Encryption Use different FIPS supported
Self-Test failed radio card
5112 hw-not-supported-alarm Alarm Equipment Radio Encryption not Major No Payload Encryption Insert suitable Activation Key
supported Activation Key inserted and reboot the unit
5113 prot-pre-shared-key-alarm Alarm Equipment Protection Pre-Shared- Major Protection Pre-shared Configure the Pre-shared key
Key has the default key was not configured to a different value than the
value default
5132 security-certificate-download- Event Security Security certificate Indeterminate Security certificate N/A
success-event download succeeded download succeeded
failed-event download failed download failed
started-event download started download started
5222 security-csr-upload-success- Event Security Security CSR upload Indeterminate Security csr upload N/A
event succeeded succeeded
5223 security-csr-upload-failed-event Event Security Security CSR upload Indeterminate Security csr upload failed N/A
failed
5224 security-csr-upload-started- Event Security Security CSR upload Indeterminate Security csr upload N/A
30007 Clock-source-sharing-failure- Event Equipment Clock source sharing Critical 1. Faulty coaxial cable 1. Try re-initiation of MIMO.
event failure between master and If still fails:
slave RFUs.
Page 1080 of 1094

2. Hardware failure in 2. Replace faulty coaxial
Master RFU. cable and reset Master
3. Hardware failure in RFU.
Slave RFU. 3. Replace faulty RFU.
31000 Insufficient-conditions-for- Alarm Equipment Insufficient conditions Critical 1. Insufficient 1. Make sure all cables
MIMO-alarm for MIMO conditions for between master and slave
MIMO. are connected (4x4 MIMO
2. Hardware failure. only).
2. Replace faulty units and
check that cables are
plugged.
31003 Unsuitable-hardware-for- Alarm Communications Unsuitable hardware for Critical 1. Unsuitable hardware Make sure both RFUs are
MIMO-alarm MIMO for MIMO operation compatible for MIMO
requirements. operation.
2. Dual carrier RFUs
(2x2 and 4x4 MIMO).
3. RFUs with MIMO bus
interface (4x4
MIMO).
4. Clock source sharing
capability (4x4
MIMO).
Page 1081 of 1094

31004 Unsuitable-software- Alarm Communications Unsuitable software Critical 1. Not all MIMO 1. Load same MIMO
configuration-for-MIMO-alarm configuration for MIMO carriers are set to compatible radio script to
same radio script or all MIMO carriers.
script is not 2. Set same TX and RX
compatible for frequency on all MIMO
MIMO. carriers.
2. Radio TX and RX 3. Disable XPIC, Multi radio
frequency is not and ATPC on all MIMO
identical on all carriers.
MIMO carriers.
3. XPIC or Multi radio
or ATPC features are
enabled.
31005 Clock-source-sharing-failure- Alarm Equipment Clock source sharing Critical 1. Faulty coaxial cable 1. Replace faulty coaxial
alarm cable unplugged between master and cable and reset Master
slave RFUs RFU.
2. Mate does not exist 2. Replace faulty RFU.
31100 AMCC-Incompatible-radio- Alarm Communications Radio script is Critical MRMC Script selected Set AFR Script in both Agg1 &
script-alarm incompatible to AMCC does not support AMCC Agg2 carriers
Group type/subtype
31101 AMCC-Inconsistent-MRMC- Alarm Communications Inconsistent MRMC Critical All members of a group Set the members to the
Script-alarm script between must be configured to appropriate MRMC script
members the same MRMC Script
Page 1082 of 1094

31102 AMCC-Inconsistent-radio- Alarm Communications Inconsistent radio Critical Radio TX/RX frequency is Set same radio TX/RX
frequency-alarm frequency not identical on all AMCC frequency on all AMCC carriers
carriers
31103 AMCC-Failed-To-Load-Alarm Alarm Communications Agg 1 failed Bring-up Critical Agg1 did not complete Drop both Agg1 & Agg2 into
procedure Bring-up successfully single carrier mode (Pre-Init)
31104 AMCC-Invalid-ACM- Alarm Communications Invalid ACM Critical AMCC member have Set AMCC member to adaptive
Configuration-alarm configuration been set to fixed profile ACM profiles
31105 AMCC-Mimo-not-supported- Alarm Equipment AMCC/MIMO Critical 1. MIMO script is not 1. Align MIMO script on all
alarm insufficient condition – enabled on any radio radio members.
configuration is not member. 2. Align same frequency on
supported 2. Different TX/RX all radio members.
frequency. 3. Disable ATPC.
3. ATPC enabled. 4. Disable XPIC.
4. XPIC enabled. 5. Align ACM mode.
5. ACM mode 6. Disable Unit Redundancy.
(adaptive/Fixed) is
7. Replace unit.
not the same.
6. Unit Redundancy
enabled.
7. Platform not
supported.
31106 AMCC-Master-failure-alarm Alarm Equipment AMCC insufficient Critical Master unit failure. 1. Verify Master unit power.
condition – Master unit 2. Replace hardware.
failure.
Page 1083 of 1094

31107 AMCC-Slave-failure-alarm Alarm Equipment AMCC insufficient Critical Slave unit failure. 1. Verify Slave unit power.
condition – Slave unit 2. Replace hardware.
failure.
31108 AMCC-Data-Sharing-cable- Alarm Equipment AMCC insufficient Critical Data sharing cable 1. Verify Data sharing cable
disconnected-alarm condition – Data sharing failure. connected.
cable failure. 2. Replace Data sharing
cable.
31109 AMCC-Prot-port-cable- Alarm Equipment MIMO insufficient Critical Mate communication 1. Verify Mate
disconnected-alarm condition – Mate cable failure. communication cable
communication cable connected.
failure. 2. Replace Mate
communication cable.
31110 AMCC-Source-Sharing-cable- Alarm Equipment MIMO insufficient Critical Source sharing cable 1. Verify Source sharing cable
disconnected-alarm condition – Source failure. connected.
sharing cable failure. 2. Replace Source sharing
cable.
31111 AMCC-Master-Slave-config- Alarm Equipment MIMO insufficient Critical Master/Slave Align Master/Slave
mismatch-alarm condition - configuration mismatch configuration.
Master/Slave due to:
configuration mismatch 1. Different TX/RX
frequency.
2. Different MIMO
script ID.
3. Different ACM mode
(adaptive/Fixed).
Page 1084 of 1094

31112 AMCC-Remote-failure-alarm Alarm Equipment AMCC insufficient Critical AMCC remote failure. Handle AMCC remote failure.
condition – Remote
failure
31113 AMCC-Asd-not-supported-alarm Alarm Radio AMCC/ASD insufficient Critical 1. ASD script is not 1. Align ASD script on all
condition - enabled on any radio radio members.
4. XPIC enabled. 5. Set ACM mode to adaptive
5. ACM mode is not on all radio members.
adaptive on any
6. Disable Unit Redundancy.
radio member.
7. Replace platform.
6. Unit Redundancy
enabled.
7. Platform not
supported.
31114 AMCC-SD-not-supported-alarm Alarm Radio AMCC/SD insufficient Critical 1. SD script is not 1. Align SD script on all radio
condition - enabled on any radio members.
4. XPIC enabled. 5. Align ACM mode.
Page 1085 of 1094

5. ACM mode 6. Replace RFU.
(adaptive/Fixed) is
not the same.
6. RFU not supported.
31115 AMCC-Data-Sharing-failure- alarm Radio AMCC insufficient Critical Units alignment failure. 1. Verify Source sharing cable
alarm condition - Units connected.
alignment failure. 2. Replace Source sharing
cable.
3. Verify Data sharing cable
connected.
4. Replace Data sharing
cable.
5. Verify using correct SFPs.
31118 AMCC-XPIC-not-supported- alarm Radio XPIC configuration is not Critical XPIC MRMC script is not Set XPIC MRMC script
alarm supported configured
31119 AMCC-XPIC-remote-failure- alarm Radio XPIC configuration Warning XPIC remote failure Handle XPIC remote failure
alarm failure in remote
32000 unit-mgr-undervoltage-alarm Alarm Equipment Under voltage Major System Power Voltage
lower than allowed.
32001 unit-mgr-overvoltage-alarm Alarm Equipment Over voltage Major System Power Voltage
higher than allowed.
Page 1086 of 1094

2
32002 unit-mgr-extremeTemperature- Alarm Management System Temperature Major
alarm not in allowed range.
32003 unit-mgr-unit-reset-event Event Management Unit was reset. Warning User issued a command Wait until the reset cycle is
to reset the unit ended and the system is up
and running
33001 anti-theft-enabled-event Event Management Anti-Theft Procedures Indeterminate
have been enabled
33002 anti-theft-temporary-disabled- Event Management Anti-Theft Procedures Indeterminate
event have been temporary
disabled
33003 anti-theft-sanction-timer- Alarm Management Anti-Theft Sanction Critical Watchdog timer Return the equipment to the
countdown-alarm Mode 24 hours window countdown network
has been triggered
33004 anti-theft-sanction-mode- Alarm Management Anti-Theft Sanction Critical Equipment has been Return the equipment to the
entered-alarm Mode is Active stolen network
2
This alarm is not relevant for IP-20 all-outdoor products.
Page 1087 of 1094

25. Abbreviations
The following table lists the abbreviations used in this guide.
Table 303: Abbreviations
ABC Adaptive Bandwidth Control

ABN Adaptive Bandwidth Notification
AC Alternating Current
ACAP Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization
ACCP Adjacent Channel Co-Polarization
ACM Adaptive Coded Modulation
ACR Adaptive Clock Recovery
AES Advanced Encryption Standard
AFR Advanced Frequency Reuse
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm Indicating Signal
ALC Automatic Level Control
AMCC Advanced Multi-Carrier Configuration
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARP Address Resolution Protocol
ASD Advanced Space Diversity
ASIC Application Specified Integrated Circuit
ASP Automatic State Propagation
AT Anti-Theft
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
AUX Auxiliary Unit
BB Baseband
BBS Baseband Switching
BER Bit Error Rate
BLSR Bidirectional Line Switch Ring
BNM Bandwidth Notification Message
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units
Page 1088 of 1094

BWA Broadband Wireless Access
CBS Committed Burst Size

CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CCITT Comité Consultatif International de Télégraph et des
Télécommunications (ITU)
CET Carrier-Ethernet Transport
CFM Connectivity Fault Management
CIR Committed Information Rate
CLI Command Line Interface
Clk Clock
CODEC Coder/Decoder
CoS Class of Service
DA Destination Address
DC Direct Current
DCB Diversity Circulator Block
DCC Data Communication Channel
DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitoring
DXC Digital Cross Connect
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point
EBS Excess Burst Size

EIR Excess Information Rate
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
ERPS G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ESE Electrical SFP Electrical
ESP Electrical SFP+ 10G
ESP Encapsulating Security Payload
Page 1089 of 1094

ESS Electrical SFP

ETH-BN Ethernet Bandwidth Notification
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FCC Federal Communications Commission

FCS Frame Check Sequence
FTP File Transfer Protocol
GARP Gratuitous ARP

GbE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
(Procedure for mapping of Ethernet traffic over a
transport network)
GND Ground
GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation
GTP GPRS Tunneling Protocol
HBER High Bit Error Rate

HDLC High-level Data Link Control
HF High Frequency (3-30 MHz)
HSB Hot-Standby
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
HTTPS Secured Hypertext Transfer Protocol
IDC Indoor Controller

IF Intermediate Frequency
IFC IF Combining
IPsec Internet Security Protocol
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ITU International Telecom. Union
ITU-R International Telecom. Union (former CCIR)
Page 1090 of 1094

ITU-T International Telecom. Union (former CCITT)

IVM Inventory Module
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG Link Aggregation Group
LAN Local Area Network
LBER Low Bit Error Rate
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LED Light Emitting Diode
LIU Line Interface Unit
LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol
LLF Link Loss Forwarding
LMS License Management System
LO Local Oscillator
LOC Loss of Carrier
LOF Loss of Frame
LOS Loss of Signal
LSI Large Scale Integration
LTE Long-Term Evolution
MAID Maintenance Association Identifier

MPLS Multi-Protocol Label Switching
MA-ASP Management Safe Automatic State Propagation
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSTI MSTP Instance
MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MUX Multiplexer
NE Network Element
NMS Network Management System
NTP Network Time Protocol
Page 1091 of 1094

OAM Operation Administration & Maintenance (Protocols)

OCB Outdoor Circulator Box
OHC OverHead Connections
OMT Orthogonal Mode Transducer
OOF Out of Frame
OPEX Operational Expenditure
PBB-TE Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering

PBS Peak Burst Rate
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PDV Packed Delay Variation
PIR Peak Information Rate
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PM Performance Monitoring
PN Provider Network
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
PSN Packet Switched Network
PTP Precision Timing Protocol
PWR Power
QoE Quality of Experience

QoS Quality of Service
RBAC Role Based Access Control

RCVR Receiver
RDI Reverse Defect Indication
RF Radio Frequency
RIP Routing Information Protocol
RMON Ethernet Statistics
Page 1092 of 1094

RPS Radio Protection Switching

RSA Rivest–Shamir–Adleman public-key cryptosystem
RSL Received Signal Level
RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
SAP Service Access Point

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDWRR Shaped Deficit Weighted Round Robin
SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
SFTP Secure FTP
SLA Service Level Agreements
SNCP Simple Network Connection Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNP Service Network Point
SNR Signal to Noise Ratio
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SOH Section OverHead (ETSI)
SONET Synchronous Optical NETwork
SP Service Point
SSH Secured Shell (Protocol)
SSM Synchronization Status Message
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SyncE Synchronous Ethernet
SVCE Service Channel Equipment
TACACS+ Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System Plus

TC Traffic Class
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TOH Transport OverHead (ANSI)
TOS Type Of Service
Page 1093 of 1094

VC Virtual Container
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VCXO Voltage Controlled crystal Oscillator
VLSI Very Large Scale of Integration
WAN Wide Area Network

Web EMS Web-Based Element Management System
WFQ Weighted Fair Queue
WG Waveguide
WRED Weighted Random Early Detection
WRR Weighted Round Robin
XCVR Transceiver (Transmitter/Receiver)

XMTR Transmitter
XO Crystal Oscillator
XPD Cross Polar Differentiation
XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Cancellation
Page 1094 of 1094

Ceragon FibeAir IP-20 All OutDoor User Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ceragon FibeAir IP-20 All OutDoor User Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ceragon FibeAir IP-20 All OutDoor User Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Guide

FibeAir® IP-20 All-Outdoor

Open Source Statement

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

Section II: Web EMS Configuration ............................................................................... 74

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

2.12 Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager) ............................................................................. 98

3. Configuration Guide .............................................................................................. 128

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

3.6.4 Performing Antenna Alignment for XPIC .................................................................................196

4. Unit Management ................................................................................................. 238

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

4.8 Backing Up and Restoring Configurations ................................................................................262

5. Radio Configuration .............................................................................................. 284

6. Ethernet Services and Interfaces............................................................................ 326

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

6.1.7 Enabling, Disabling, or Deleting Multiple Services ...................................................................331

7. Quality of Service (QoS) ........................................................................................ 365

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

7.7.5 Assigning a WFQ Profile to an Interface ..................................................................................417

8. Ethernet Protocols ................................................................................................ 423

9. Synchronization .................................................................................................... 484

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

9.2.4 Deleting a Sync Source .............................................................................................................489

10. Access Management and Security.......................................................................... 495

11. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting .............................................................. 562

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

11.4.1 Displaying Alarm Information ..................................................................................................566

12. Web EMS Utilities ................................................................................................. 599

Section III: CLI Configuration ...................................................................................... 602

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

13.13 Configuring the Radio Parameters (CLI) ...................................................................................621

14. Configuration Guide (CLI) ...................................................................................... 631

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

14.6.3 Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI) ...................................................................................655

15. Unit Management (CLI) ......................................................................................... 676

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

15.6.2 Setting the Configuration Management Parameters (CLI).......................................................692

16. Radio Configuration (CLI)....................................................................................... 703

17. Ethernet Services and Interfaces (CLI) .................................................................... 730

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

18. Quality of Service (QoS) (CLI) ................................................................................. 799

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

18.3.4 Marking Table for S-VLAN UP Bits (CLI)....................................................................................830

19. Ethernet Protocols (CLI)......................................................................................... 860

20. Synchronization (CLI)............................................................................................. 919

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

20.2 Changing the ETSI/ANSI Mode (CLI) .........................................................................................921

21. Access Management and Security (CLI) .................................................................. 931

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

22. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting (CLI) ...................................................... 960

Section IV Maintenance .............................................................................................. 990

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

23.6 IP-20C-HP LEDs .......................................................................................................................1000

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential

23.12 IP-20V LEDs ............................................................................................................................1019

Section V: Appendices............................................................................................... 1023

24. Alarms List .......................................................................................................... 1024

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential